Graded detection, signalling and monitoring — everything from domestic PIRs to EN 50131 Grade 4 commercial systems.
PD 6662 is the UK implementation guide for EN 50131. All UK intruder alarm systems must comply with PD 6662 for insurance and NSI/SSAIB certification.
| Fault / Trouble | Cause | Corrective Action |
|---|---|---|
| No Internet Connection | Ethernet disconnected or ISP failure | Check Ethernet cable and router; verify ISP connectivity; hub will switch to SIM automatically |
| SIM Card Fault | SIM not inserted, PIN enabled, or insufficient credit | Check SIM insertion; disable SIM PIN using a mobile phone; top up credit if required |
| No Connection to Ajax Cloud | All communication channels failed | Check Ethernet and SIM connections; verify APN settings for SIM |
| Hub Battery Low | Internal backup battery low or faulty | Check mains power supply; replace battery if fault persists after mains restore |
| Mains Power Failure | 230VAC mains supply lost | Check mains supply and PSU; hub runs on battery backup |
| Device Lost | Ajax device not communicating with hub | Check device battery; verify device is within radio range; check for interference |
| Device Tamper | Device cover removed or device dismounted | Check device mounting and cover; replace device if tamper cannot be cleared |
| Device Battery Low | Device battery below threshold | Replace device battery per device installation instructions |
| Hub Tamper | Hub cover removed or SmartBracket dismounted | Refit hub cover and SmartBracket securely |
| Jamming Detected | Radio frequency jamming detected at Jeweller frequencies | Hub switches to free frequency automatically; investigate source of jamming; notify monitoring station |
| Connection | Function | Notes |
|---|---|---|
| Power Socket | 12V DC power input | Use supplied power cable; connect to a mains-powered 12V DC PSU |
| Ethernet Socket | Wired internet connection | Connect to router/switch; primary communication channel |
| SIM Slot 1 | Primary SIM card | Micro SIM; disable SIM PIN before insertion |
| SIM Slot 2 | Secondary SIM card | Micro SIM; used as backup if SIM 1 fails |
| Parameter | Value |
|---|---|
| Max Connected Devices | 100 Ajax devices |
| Radio Protocol | Jeweller (alarms/events); Wings (photo verification) |
| Jeweller Range | 2,000m open air |
| Wings Range | 1,700m open air |
| Communication | Ethernet + 2x Micro SIM (2G or 2G/3G/4G) |
| Power Supply | 12V DC via supplied cable |
| Backup Battery | Built-in; up to 16 hours standby |
| Operating Temperature | -10°C to +40°C |
| Humidity | Up to 75% RH non-condensing |
| Dimensions | 163 × 163 × 36mm |
| Standards | EN 50131-3 Grade 2; EN 50131-1; PD 6662:2017 |
| Feature | Detail |
|---|---|
| Fibra Protocol | Wired bus — up to 2,000 m range on U/UTP Cat.5 twisted pair |
| Jeweller Protocol | Wireless — AES-128 encrypted, 2,000 m open-air range |
| Automation Scenarios | Up to 36 automation rules |
| Alarm Transmission | SIA DC-09 to ARCs; supports Ajax Ultra DP for DP2/DP3/DP4 dual-path |
| Management | Ajax PRO app (iOS/Android/macOS/Windows) — installer access |
| User App | Ajax app for end-users (arming, disarming, notifications) |
| Terminal | Function |
|---|---|
| +24V | Power supply to Fibra devices |
| A | First signal conductor |
| B | Second signal conductor |
| GND | Power ground |
| Fault / Event | Meaning & Action |
|---|---|
| No External Power Supply | Mains power lost — hub running on backup battery. Check supply fuse and mains connection. |
| Battery Error | Polarity reversal on battery connection, or battery below threshold. Check battery connection and replace if necessary. |
| No Internet / Ajax Cloud Connection | Hub LED red. Check Ethernet cable and router. Check SIM cards are active and have data. |
| Device Communication Loss | A Fibra or Jeweller device has lost contact with the hub. Check cable continuity (Fibra) or device battery and location (Jeweller). |
| Jamming Detected | Radio frequency interference detected. Hub switches to idle frequency and notifies ARC and users. Investigate RF source. |
| Tamper Triggered | Hub lid removed or hub detached from wall. Alarm sent to ARC and users. Inspect installation. |
| Fibra Line Short Circuit | Short circuit on A/B conductors of a Fibra line. Isolate line and check cable run for damage. |
| Fibra Line Open Circuit | Break in Fibra cable. Check cable continuity from hub to last device on the line. |
| SIM Card Fault | SIM card not detected or network registration failed. Check SIM insertion and network coverage. |
| Low Battery (Device) | A wireless Jeweller device battery is low. Replace battery in the indicated device. |
| Terminal | Colour (typical) | Function |
|---|---|---|
| +24V | Red | Device power supply |
| A | White/Yellow | Signal conductor 1 — observe polarity |
| B | White/Blue | Signal conductor 2 — observe polarity |
| GND | Black | Power ground / signal return |
| Parameter | Requirement |
|---|---|
| Cable Type | U/UTP Cat.5 twisted pair (minimum) |
| Max Fibra Line Length | 2,000 m per line |
| Max Devices per Line | Determined by total current draw (100 mA max per line) |
| Ethernet | Standard Cat.5e/Cat.6 to router/switch |
| Tamper | Two tamper buttons on hub PCB — lid and wall removal |
| Model | Zones | Application |
|---|---|---|
| Solution 2000 | 8 zones | Residential |
| Solution 3000 | 16 zones | Residential / small commercial |
| Solution 6000 | 144 zones | Commercial / industrial |
| Code Type | Default | Notes |
|---|---|---|
| Installer Code | 1234 | Full programming access |
| Master Code | 1234 | User management |
| User Code 1 | 1234 | Standard user |
| Zone Type | Description |
|---|---|
| Entry/Exit | Entry route with delay |
| Intruder | Standard alarm zone |
| 24-Hour | Always active |
| PA | Personal attack |
| Fire | Fire detection |
| Tamper | Anti-tamper |
| Keyswitch | External arm/disarm |
| Code / Display | Description | Likely Cause | Action |
|---|---|---|---|
| Zone Fault | Zone open circuit | Wiring break, device failure | Check wiring and device. |
| Zone Tamper | Tamper activated | Lid removed, cable cut | Inspect device. |
| Mains Fail | Mains supply lost | Power cut, blown fuse | Check fuses and MCB. |
| Battery Low | Battery below threshold | Battery end of life | Replace battery. |
| Comms Fail | Signalling failure | IP/PSTN fault | Check IP/PSTN settings. |
| Engineer Reset | Engineer reset required | Confirmed alarm | Enter installer mode and reset. |
| Zone Config | EOL Resistor | Normal | Alarm |
|---|---|---|---|
| EOL | 4k7Ω | 4,700Ω | <500Ω |
| DEOL | 2 × 4k7Ω | 4,700Ω | <500Ω |
| Terminal | Function | Notes |
|---|---|---|
| AUX+ | Auxiliary power output | 500mA max |
| AUX− | Common ground | Must be continuous |
| Z1–Z8 | Zone inputs (on-board) | EOL resistors required |
| BELL+ | Bell/siren positive | Supervised output |
| BELL− | Bell/siren negative | Via tamper capacitor |
| TIP/RING | PSTN telephone line | For dialler signalling |
=== WEB RESEARCH: bosch ===
# Bosch Solution 2000/3000/6000 Intruder Alarm Panel Technical Reference
## Manufacturer and Product Name
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. - Solution 2000, Solution 3000, Solution 6000 Control Panels
## Full Product Range and Model Numbers
* **ICP-SOL2-P**: Solution 2000 Control Panel
* **ICP-SOL3-P**: Solution 3000 Control Panel
* **ICP-SOL6-P**: Solution 6000 Control Panel
* **IUI – SOL -TEXT**: Text LCD Codepad
* **IUI – SOL – ICON**: Icon LCD Codepad
## Complete Technical Specifications
### Solution 2000/3000 Control Panel Specifications
* **Temperature Range**: 0℃ to +50℃
* **Humidity**: 20% to 90%
* **Power Source**: TF008 Plug Pack – 240 V/18 VAC @ 1.3A
* **Stand-By Current**: 65 mA
* **Current Draw in Alarm Condition**: 115 mA
* **Current Draw in Alarm Condition with Codepad**: 105 mA
* **Back-Up Battery**: 7 Ah/12 VDC Rechargeable Sealed Lead Acid Battery
* **Dimensions (Case, packed in carton)**: 306 mm x 262 mm x84 mm
* **Weight**: 2.5 kg
* **Supplier Code**: N771
### Control Panel Capacities
| Features | Solution 2000 | Solution 3000 |
|:-----------------------------|:--------------|:--------------|
| Number of users | 32 | 32 |
| Number of zones | 4+4 (ZD) | 8+8 (ZD) |
| Number of areas/partitions | 2 | 2 |
| Number of on-board outputs | 4 | 4 |
| Number of codepads | 4 | 4 |
| Number of B308 Octo-output modules | 2 | 2 |
| Number of B426 IP communicators | 2 | 2 |
| Number of B442 or B450 GPRS communicators | 2 | 2 |
| Number of WE800EV2 receivers | 1 | 1 |
| Number of RADION receivers | 0 | 1 |
| Number of RADION repeaters | 0 | 8 |
## All Default Codes
* **Installer Code**: Default is 1234. (Can be changed in programming menu 21)
* **Master Code**: Default is 1234. (Can be changed by Installer or Master User)
* **User Codes**: User codes are programmed by the Master User or Installer. No universal default user codes.
* **Duress Code**: Programmed as a user code with duress option enabled. No universal default duress code.
## Complete Fault/Event/Alarm Code Tables
### Fault Descriptions (User Guide Section 5.6.1)
* **AC Fail**: Mains power failure. The system runs on battery backup.
* **Battery Fail**: Battery is low or disconnected.
* **Phone Line Fail**: Telephone line is disconnected or faulty.
* **Wireless Device Low Battery**: A wireless sensor or keyfob has a low battery.
* **Wireless Device Supervision Fail**: A wireless device has not communicated with the panel for a set period.
* **Sensor Watch Fail**: A zone has been unsealed for too long.
* **Communication Fail**: The panel failed to communicate with the monitoring station.
* **Tamper**: A zone or device tamper has occurred.
* **Service Required**: General system fault requiring technician attention.
### System Reporting List (Installation Guide Section 11.22.3)
* **Zone Tamper Report**: Reports when a zone tamper is detected.
* **Walk Test Report**: Reports the results of a walk test.
* **Bypass Report**: Reports when a zone is bypassed.
* **Trouble Report**: Reports general system troubles.
* **Sensor Watch Report**: Reports when a sensor watch condition occurs.
* **Alarm Restore Code**: Reports when an alarm condition is restored.
* **RF Receiver Trouble Report**: Reports trouble with a wireless receiver.
* **RF Receiver Trouble Restore Report**: Reports when wireless receiver trouble is restored.
* **RF Low Battery Report**: Reports low battery on a wireless device.
* **Arm/Disarm Reports**: Reports system arming and disarming events.
* **Codepad Duress Report**: Reports when a duress code is entered.
* **Codepad Panic Report**: Reports when a panic alarm is activated from the codepad.
* **Codepad Fire Report**: Reports when a fire alarm is activated from the codepad.
* **Codepad Medical Report**: Reports when a medical alarm is activated from the codepad.
* **AUX Power Supply Fail Report**: Reports auxiliary power supply failure.
* **AUX Power Supply Fail Restore Report**: Reports auxiliary power supply restoration.
* **AC Fail Report**: Reports AC mains power failure.
* **AC Fail Restore Report**: Reports AC mains power restoration.
* **Low Battery Report**: Reports low system battery.
* **Low Battery Restore Report**: Reports system battery restoration.
## All Zone Types and Their Descriptions
### Zone Defaults (Installation Guide Section 13.3.1)
* **Zone Type 00: Disabled**: Zone is not used.
* **Zone Type 01: Entry/Exit**: Entry/Exit zone with entry and exit delays.
* **Zone Type 02: Perimeter**: Instant alarm if violated when armed.
* **Zone Type 03: Interior**: Delayed alarm if violated after entry delay.
* **Zone Type 04: Day Alarm**: Activates a chime or report during disarmed state.
* **Zone Type 05: 24 Hour Silent**: Silent alarm, reports to monitoring station without audible indication.
* **Zone Type 06: 24 Hour Audible**: Audible alarm, reports to monitoring station with audible indication.
* **Zone Type 07: Fire**: 24-hour fire alarm.
* **Zone Type 08: Keyswitch**: Used for arming/disarming with a keyswitch.
* **Zone Type 09: Follower**: Follows entry/exit delay if an entry/exit zone is violated first, otherwise instant.
* **Zone Type 10: Medical**: 24-hour medical alarm.
* **Zone Type 11: Panic**: 24-hour panic alarm.
* **Zone Type 12: Duress**: Silent alarm, reports duress to monitoring station.
* **Zone Type 13: Arming**: Used for remote arming/disarming.
* **Zone Type 14: Guard**: Used for guard tour applications.
* **Zone Type 15: Utility**: General purpose 24-hour zone.
## Complete Wiring Diagrams and Terminal Descriptions
(Detailed wiring diagrams are typically found in the physical installation manual with visual representations. The text content provides descriptions of connections.)
### Control Panel Terminals (General Description - refer to actual manual for detailed diagrams)
* **Power Input**: AC input from TF008 Plug Pack (240 V/18 VAC @ 1.3A).
* **Battery Terminals**: Connections for 7 Ah/12 VDC Rechargeable Sealed Lead Acid Battery.
* **Zone Inputs**: Terminals for connecting wired detection devices (e.g., door contacts, PIRs). Each zone requires an End-Of-Line (EOL) resistor (typically 3k3 Ohm).
* **Outputs**: Programmable outputs for sirens, strobes, and other devices.
* **Siren Output**: Connects to external siren.
* **Strobe Output**: Connects to external strobe light.
* **Auxiliary Outputs**: General purpose programmable outputs.
* **Codepad Bus**: 4-wire bus (Red, Black, Yellow, Green) for connecting codepads and other bus devices.
* **Phone Line Input/Output**: For PSTN connection to monitoring station and domestic dialing.
* **Network Module Connector**: For B426/B426-M IP communicators or B450/B450-M GPRS communicators.
* **Wireless Receiver Connector**: For WE800EV2 or RADION receivers.
## Full Programming Menu Structure (TEXT LCD Codepad)
### Main Menu (User Guide Section 4.1)
* **[ A U I ] 1 Command**
* **[ U I ] 2 Access**
* **[ U I ] 3 System**
* **[ U I ] 4 Zone**
* **[ I ] 5 Area**
* **[ I ] 6 Output**
* **[ I ] 7 Comm**
* **[ I ] 8 Parameter**
### Command Menu (User Guide Section 4.1.1)
* **[ U ] 11 Arm**
* [ U ] 111 AWAY Arm
* [ U ] 112 STAY 1 Arm
* [ U ] 113 STAY 2 Arm
* [ U ] 114 AWAY Arm All
* **[ A U I ] 12 Inquire**
* [ A U I ] 121 Fault Analysis
* [ U I ] 122 Event Recall
* **[ A U I ] 13 System**
* [ U ] 131 Set Date & Time
* [ A U I ] 132 Day Alarm
* [ U I ] 133 Arm/Disa Seq.
* [ I ] 134 Report Monitor
* [ A U I ] 135 ModemCall Init
* [ U I ] 136 Domestic Phone
* [ U I ] 137 VersionDisplay
* [ I ] 138 FactoryDefault
* [ U ] 139 System Reset
* **[ I ] 14 RF Diagnose**
* [ I ] 141 RF Zone
* [ I ] 142 RF Keyfob
* [ I ] 143 RF Repeater
* **[ A U I ] 15 Test**
* [ A U I ] 151 Horn Speaker
* [ A U I ] 152 Bell Test
* [ A U I ] 153 Strobe Test
* [ U I ] 154 Walk Test
* [ A U I ] 155 Test Report
* **[ U ] 16 Zone Bypass**
* **[ U ] 17 Output On/Off**
### Access Menu (User Guide Section 4.1.2)
* **[ I ] 21 Installer Code**
* **[ U ] 22 User Code**
* **[ I ] 23 Access Retry**
* **[ U I ] 24 User Property**
* [ U ] 241 User Name
* [ I ] 242 User Allocate
* [ I ] 243 User Authority
### System Menu (User Guide Section 4.1.3)
* **[ I ] 31 Timer**
* [ I ] 311 Entry Time1
* [ I ] 312 Entry Time2
* [ I ] 313 Exit Time
* [ I ] 314 Entry Guard Time For STAY Mode
* [ I ] 315 Sensor Watch Time
* [ I ] 316 Codepad Lockout Time
* [ I ] 317 Auto Arm Pre-AlertTime
* [ I ] 318 Auto Arm Time
* [ I ] 319 Auto Disarm Time
* **[ I ] 32 Codepad**
* [ I ] 321 Silent Codepad Panic Alarm
* [ I ] 322 Silent Codepad Fire Alarm
* [ I ] 323 Silent Codepad Medical Alarm
* [ I ] 324 Codepad Access Denied Silent
* [ I ] 325 Codepad Fault Beep Enable
* [ I ] 326 Codepad Display Off after 60s
* **[ I ] 33 Arm/Disarm**
* [ I ] 331 Auto Arm In STAY1
* [ I ] 332 Single Btn Arm Enable
* [ I ] 333 Single Btn Disarm Enable
* [ I ] 334 Disarmed On Power Up
* [ I ] 335 Arm/Disarm Track On Power Up
* [ I ] 336 Phone Remote Arm
* [ I ] 337 Answer Machine Bypass On Arm
* **[ I ] 34 Fault**
* [ I ] 341 Ignore AC Fail
* [ I ] 342 AC Fail Report Wait Time
* [ I ] 343 Horn Speaker Fault Monitor
* [ I ] 344 Phone Line Fault Indicator
* [ I ] 345 Phone Line Fault Alarm on Armed
* [ I ] 346 Phone Line Fault Alarm on Disarm
* [ I ] 347 Lockout Phone Line Fail Alarm
* **[ U I ] 35 Wireless**
* [ I ] 351 RF Receiver
* [ I ] 352 Zone RFID And Input Option
* [ U I ] 353 Keyfob RFID
* [ I ] 354 Repeater RFID
* [ I ] 355 RF Supervision Time
* [ I ] 356 RF Jam Sensitivity
* [ I ] 357 RF RECE Jam/Tamper Siren Alarm
* [ I ] 358 RFKF Btn4 Arm In STAY1
* [ I ] 359 RF Arm/Disarm Strobe Indicate
* **[ U I ] 36 System Option**
* [ U I ] 361 Home Message
* [ I ] 362 Button Factory Default Enable
* [ I ] 363 Alarm Memory Reset On Disarm
* [ I ] 364 STAY Indicator For Day Alarm
* [ I ] 365 Digit 3 For Codepad Duress Alarm
* [ I ] 366 Siren & Strobe Output In STAY
* [ I ] 367 Speaker Beep Volume
### Zone Menu (User Guide Section 4.1.4)
* **[ U I ] 4 Zone**
* [ I ] 41 Zone Config
* [ I ] 42 Zone Allocate
* [ U I ] 43 Zone Name
* [ I ] 44 Day Alarm Zone
* [ U I ] 45 STAY2 Zone
* [ I ] 46 EOL Resistor
* [ I ] 47 Zone State Rpt
* **[ I ] 48 Swing Shutdown**
* [ I ] 481 Siren Swing Shutdown Count
* [ I ] 482 Dialer Swing Shutdown Count
* **[ I ] 49 Zone Option**
* [ I ] 491 Silent Zone Tamper Alarm
* [ I ] 492 Unseal Zone That Fail Monitor
* [ I ] 493 Bosch Smart Lockout Enable
* [ I ] 494 Zone Pulse Cnt Handover Enable
* [ I ] 495 Handover Delay In Order
### Area Menu (User Guide Section 4.1.5)
* **[ I ] 5 Area**
* [ I ] 51 Codepad Area
* **[ I ] 52 Area Option**
* [ I ] 521 Arm/Disarm All Areas Once
* [ I ] 522 Reset Siren From Any Area
### Output Menu (User Guide Section 4.1.6)
* **[ I ] 6 Output**
* [ I ] 61 Onboard Output
* [ I ] 62 Codepad Output
* [ I ] 63 Extend Output
* **[ I ] 64 Siren Config**
* [ I ] 641 Siren Run Time
* [ I ] 642 Siren Run Rate
* [ I ] 643 Siren Sound On RF Receiver Fail
### Communication Menu (User Guide Section 4.1.7)
* **[ I ] 71 Receiver Config**
* **[ I ] 72 Network Config**
* [ I ] 721 Network Module
* [ I ] 722 A-Link/RSC PSWD
* [ I ] 723 IP Destination
* [ I ] 724 CSVIP User Name And Password
* **[ I ] 73 Report Config**
* [ I ] 731 STAY Mode Arm/Disa Report Enable
* [ I ] 732 Arm/Disa Report Only If Alarmed
* [ I ] 733 First Disarm/Last Arm Report
* [ I ] 734 Arm/Disarm Report Option
* [ I ] 735 Codepad Report Option
* [ I ] 736 Test Report Time And Interval
* [ I ] 737 Test Report Only When Armed
* [ I ] 738 Test Report On Siren Reset
* [ I ] 739 Test Report Dialer Option
* **[ I ] 74 Comm Option1**
* [ I ] 741 Ring Count
* [ I ] 742 Dialer Report Function Enable
* [ I ] 743 Exit A-Link Connection On Alarm
* [ I ] 744 System Status Report Option
* [ I ] 745 Use Bell-103 For FSK Format
* [ I ] 746 DTMT Dial Pulse To 1 Digit/Sec
* [ I ] 747 Receiver1/2 Dialing Format
* [ I ] 748 Set Up Domestic Dialing Format
* **[ I ] 75 Comm Option2**
* [ I ] 751 Telco Arming Sequence
* [ I ] 752 Telco Disarming Sequence
* [ I ] 753 Delay Alarm Report Time
* [ I ] 754 Kiss-Off Wait Time
* [ I ] 755 Delay Siren Until Transmit Over
* [ I ] 756 Extend Wait For Handshake
* [ I ] 757 Upload/Download Enable
* [ I ] 758 Callback Phone Number Request
* [ I ] 759 Callback Phone Number
### Parameter Menu (User Guide Section 4.1.8)
* **[ I ] 8 Parameter**
* [ I ] 81 Addr Program
* [ I ] 82 Addr Auto Step
* **[ I ] 83 Adapter**
* [ I ] 831 Test Adapter
* [ I ] 832 Read Adapter
* [ I ] 833 Write Adapter
## All Expander/Peripheral Devices with Specs
* **Codepads**: IUI – SOL -TEXT (Text LCD) and IUI – SOL – ICON (Icon LCD).
* **WE800EV2 receiver**: Wireless receiver for keyfobs.
* **HCT-4 keyfob**: Wireless keyfob.
* **RADION receiver B810**: Wireless receiver for RADION devices.
* **RADION keyfobs**: Wireless keyfobs compatible with RADION receiver.
* **RADION repeater**: Extends range for RADION wireless devices.
* **RADION detectors**: Wireless detection devices (e.g., PIRs, door/window contacts).
* **B308 Octo-output Module**: Provides additional programmable outputs.
* **B426/B426-M Conettix Ethernet Communication Modules**: IP communicators for network reporting and remote access.
* **B450/B450-M Conettix Plug-in Communicator Interfaces**: GPRS communicators for cellular reporting and remote access.
* **TF008 Plug Pack (TF008-B)**: 240 V/18 VAC @ 1.3A transformer.
## Commissioning Steps (General Outline - refer to actual manual for detailed steps)
1. **Hardware Installation**: Mount control panel, codepads, and other devices. Wire power, battery, zones, and outputs.
2. **Power Up**: Connect AC power and battery.
3. **Initial Programming**: Enter Installer Programming Mode.
* Set Date and Time.
* Program communication settings (PSTN, IP, GPRS).
* Enroll wireless devices (receivers, keyfobs, detectors).
* Configure zones (zone types, EOL resistors, options).
* Program outputs (siren, strobe, auxiliary).
* Set system timers.
* Configure user codes and authority levels.
* Set partitioning (if applicable).
4. **Testing**: Perform system tests.
* Walk Test: Verify all zones are functioning correctly.
* Siren/Strobe Test: Check audible and visual alarms.
* Communication Test: Confirm reporting to monitoring station.
5. **User Training**: Instruct end-users on system operation, arming/disarming, and fault analysis.
## Common Fault Diagnosis
* **AC Fail**: Check mains power supply, transformer, and wiring to the panel. Ensure the TF008 Plug Pack is functioning.
* **Battery Fail**: Check battery connections. Test battery voltage and replace if necessary. Ensure battery charging circuit is operational.
* **Phone Line Fail**: Check telephone line connection to the panel. Verify dial tone. Contact phone service provider if necessary.
* **Zone Faults (Open/Short/Tamper)**: Check wiring for the affected zone. Verify EOL resistor is correctly installed. Inspect detection device for damage or tampering.
* **Wireless Device Faults (Low Battery/Supervision Fail)**: Replace batteries in wireless devices. Check device placement and signal strength. Verify wireless receiver is functioning and correctly enrolled.
* **Communication Fail**: Verify phone line or network connection. Check programming for monitoring station numbers and account codes. Contact monitoring station to confirm they are receiving signals.
* **Codepad Not Responding**: Check codepad bus wiring (Red, Black, Yellow, Green). Ensure codepad is correctly addressed.
* **System Not Arming**: Check for open zones (unsealed). Verify all users have correct authority levels. Check for system faults preventing arming.
## Compliance Standards Met
(Specific compliance standards are usually detailed in the full installation manual or datasheets. Common standards for intruder alarms include:)
* **AS/NZS 2201.1**: Intruder alarm systems – General requirements.
* **AS/NZS 2201.5**: Intruder alarm systems – Alarm transmission systems.
* **CE Compliance**: European conformity for electronic products.
* **RCM Mark**: Australian regulatory compliance mark.
## Any Other Technical Detail You Find
### Codepad Indicators (User Guide Section 3.3)
* **ZONE 1 – 8 (ICP-SOL2-P) / ZONE 1 – 16 (ICP-SOL3-P)**:
* **On**: Zone is unsealed.
* **Off**: Zone is sealed.
* **Flashing Fast (0.25 sec on/0.25 sec off)**: Zone is in alarm condition.
* **Flashing Slow (1 sec on/1 sec off)**: Zone is manually isolated or selected to be isolated.
* **AWAY**:
* **On**: System is armed in AWAY Mode.
* **Off**: System is not armed in AWAY Mode.
* **Flashing twice a sec with STAY indicator**: Setting STAY Mode 2 zones.
* **STAY**:
* **On**: System is armed in STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2.
* **Off**: System is not armed in STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2.
* **Flashing twice a sec**: Zone isolating mode.
* **Flashing twice a sec with AWAY indicator**: Setting STAY Mode 2 zones.
* **Flashing once every 3 sec**: Day alarm status – day alarm turned on.
* **OFF Indicator**: Lights when system is disarmed, flashes when a zone becomes unsealed when disarmed. Stops flashing when all zones are sealed.
* **ON Indicator**: Lights when system is armed, flashes when an alarm occurs. Resets after a valid User Code is entered.
* **MAINS**:
* **On**: AC MAINS power normal.
* **Flashing**: AC MAINS supply has failed.
* **FAULTS**:
* **On**: There is a system fault that needs to be rectified.
* **Off**: The system is normal, no faults.
* **Flashing**: There is a system fault that needs to be acknowledged.
* **Programming Mode**: These two indicators flash when you enter Installer’s Programming Mode or use any Master Code function.
### Audible Indications (User Guide Section 3.4)
* **One short beep**: A button/key was pressed on the codepad, or Exit Time ended when armed in STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2.
* **Two short beeps**: The system accepted your code.
* **Three short beeps**: The requested function was executed.
* **One long beep**: Indicates the last 10 seconds of Exit Time when armed in AWAY Mode, or the requested operation was denied or aborted. Also indicates codepad panic/fire/medical alarm operation.
* **One beep every sec**: Walk Test Mode is currently active.
* **One short beep every min**: There is a system fault waiting to be acknowledged.
* **One beep every 4 sec**: During Auto Arming Pre-Alert Time, the warning before automatic arming takes place.
* **One beep every 2 sec**: During Exit Time when armed in AWAY Mode.
### Installer Commands (Installation Guide Section 5.1)
* **Command 958**: Exit from Installer’s Programming Mode without saving changes.
* **Command 959**: Test IUI-SOL-ADAPTER.
* **Command 960**: Save and exit from Installer’s Programming Mode.
* **Command 961**: Reset the Control Panel to Factory Default Settings.
* **Command 962**: Copy the Control Panel Memory to IUI-SOL-ADAPTER.
* **Command 963**: Copy IUI-SOL-ADAPTER data to the Control Panel.
* **Command 965**: Set up Domestic Dialing Format.
* **Command 966**: Enable/Disable the Automatic Stepping of Locations.
* **Command 999**: Display the Control Panel Firmware Version Number.
### System Options (Installation Guide Section 18)
* **System Options 1**
* **System Options 2**
* **System Options 3**
* **System Options 4**
* **System Option 5**
* **Consumer Options 1**
* **Consumer Options 2**
* **Consumer Options 3**
### Partitioning (Installation Guide Section 19)
* **Partitioning Options 1**
* **Partitioning Options 2**
* **Partition Allocations**
* Zone Area Assignments
* Codepad assignment
* User code area assignments
### RF Information (Installation Guide Section 14)
* **RF Supervision Time**
* **Anti-Jamming Sensitivity**
* **RF Receiver**
* **RF Options**
* **RFID**
* RF Keyfob RFID
* RF Device RFID
* RF Repeater RFID
### Communication Information (Installation Guide Section 11)
* **Primary Telephone Number for Receivers**
* **Secondary Telephone Number for Receivers**
* **Transmission Format for Receivers**
* **Subscriber ID Number for Receivers**
* **IP Items for Receivers**
* **Conettix Items for Receivers**
* **External Network Modules**
* **Network Module Cloud Connection**
* **Password for A-Link Connection**
* **DTMF Timing Compensation**
* **Country Codes**
* **Telco Arming Sequence**
* **Telco Disarming Sequence**
* **Call Back Telephone Number**
* **Ring Count**
* **Telephone Line Fail Options**
* **Communication Options 1**
* **Communication Options 2**
* **Communication Options 3**
* **A-Link Plus Options**
* **Domestic Dialing**
* Domestic Dialing Function
* Setting Up and Programming Domestic Reporting
* **Reporting Formats**
* Contact ID Format
* SIA Format
### Programmable Outputs (Installation Guide Section 16)
* **Output Programming**
* **B228 Output Mode**
* **Output Event Types**
* **Output Polarity**
* **Output Timing**
* **Pulsing Polarities**
* **One-Shot Polarities**
### System Event Timers (Installation Guide Section 17)
* **Entry Time 1**
* **Entry Time 2**
* **Exit Time**
* **Entry Guard Time for STAY Mode**
* **Delay Alarm Reporting Time**
* **Sensor Watch Time**
* **Codepad Lockout Time**
* **Siren Run Time**
* **Siren Sound Rate**
* **Auto Arming Pre-Alert Time**
* **Auto Arming Time**
* **Auto Disarming Time**
* **Kiss-Off Wait Time**
* **Speaker Beep Volume**
This document contains a comprehensive collection of technical details for the Bosch Solution 2000, 3000, and 6000 intruder alarm panels, compiled from user and installation guides. It includes product specifications, default codes, fault codes, zone types, programming menu structures, peripheral device information, commissioning steps, common fault diagnosis, and compliance standards. The content is presented in a raw, unsummarized format to provide maximum detail for security engineers.
=== WEB RESEARCH: solution 2000 ===
# Bosch Solution 2000/3000/6000 Intruder Alarm Panel Technical Reference
## Manufacturer and Product Name
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. - Solution 2000, Solution 3000, Solution 6000 Control Panels
## Full Product Range and Model Numbers
* **ICP-SOL2-P**: Solution 2000 Control Panel
* **ICP-SOL3-P**: Solution 3000 Control Panel
* **ICP-SOL6-P**: Solution 6000 Control Panel
* **IUI – SOL -TEXT**: Text LCD Codepad
* **IUI – SOL – ICON**: Icon LCD Codepad
## Complete Technical Specifications
### Solution 2000/3000 Control Panel Specifications
* **Temperature Range**: 0℃ to +50℃
* **Humidity**: 20% to 90%
* **Power Source**: TF008 Plug Pack – 240 V/18 VAC @ 1.3A
* **Stand-By Current**: 65 mA
* **Current Draw in Alarm Condition**: 115 mA
* **Current Draw in Alarm Condition with Codepad**: 105 mA
* **Back-Up Battery**: 7 Ah/12 VDC Rechargeable Sealed Lead Acid Battery
* **Dimensions (Case, packed in carton)**: 306 mm x 262 mm x84 mm
* **Weight**: 2.5 kg
* **Supplier Code**: N771
### Control Panel Capacities
| Features | Solution 2000 | Solution 3000 |
|:-----------------------------|:--------------|:--------------|
| Number of users | 32 | 32 |
| Number of zones | 4+4 (ZD) | 8+8 (ZD) |
| Number of areas/partitions | 2 | 2 |
| Number of on-board outputs | 4 | 4 |
| Number of codepads | 4 | 4 |
| Number of B308 Octo-output modules | 2 | 2 |
| Number of B426 IP communicators | 2 | 2 |
| Number of B442 or B450 GPRS communicators | 2 | 2 |
| Number of WE800EV2 receivers | 1 | 1 |
| Number of RADION receivers | 0 | 1 |
| Number of RADION repeaters | 0 | 8 |
## All Default Codes
* **Installer Code**: Default is 1234. (Can be changed in programming menu 21)
* **Master Code**: Default is 1234. (Can be changed by Installer or Master User)
* **User Codes**: User codes are programmed by the Master User or Installer. No universal default user codes.
* **Duress Code**: Programmed as a user code with duress option enabled. No universal default duress code.
## Complete Fault/Event/Alarm Code Tables
### Fault Descriptions (User Guide Section 5.6.1)
* **AC Fail**: Mains power failure. The system runs on battery backup.
* **Battery Fail**: Battery is low or disconnected.
* **Phone Line Fail**: Telephone line is disconnected or faulty.
* **Wireless Device Low Battery**: A wireless sensor or keyfob has a low battery.
* **Wireless Device Supervision Fail**: A wireless device has not communicated with the panel for a set period.
* **Sensor Watch Fail**: A zone has been unsealed for too long.
* **Communication Fail**: The panel failed to communicate with the monitoring station.
* **Tamper**: A zone or device tamper has occurred.
* **Service Required**: General system fault requiring technician attention.
### System Reporting List (Installation Guide Section 11.22.3)
* **Zone Tamper Report**: Reports when a zone tamper is detected.
* **Walk Test Report**: Reports the results of a walk test.
* **Bypass Report**: Reports when a zone is bypassed.
* **Trouble Report**: Reports general system troubles.
* **Sensor Watch Report**: Reports when a sensor watch condition occurs.
* **Alarm Restore Code**: Reports when an alarm condition is restored.
* **RF Receiver Trouble Report**: Reports trouble with a wireless receiver.
* **RF Receiver Trouble Restore Report**: Reports when wireless receiver trouble is restored.
* **RF Low Battery Report**: Reports low battery on a wireless device.
* **Arm/Disarm Reports**: Reports system arming and disarming events.
* **Codepad Duress Report**: Reports when a duress code is entered.
* **Codepad Panic Report**: Reports when a panic alarm is activated from the codepad.
* **Codepad Fire Report**: Reports when a fire alarm is activated from the codepad.
* **Codepad Medical Report**: Reports when a medical alarm is activated from the codepad.
* **AUX Power Supply Fail Report**: Reports auxiliary power supply failure.
* **AUX Power Supply Fail Restore Report**: Reports auxiliary power supply restoration.
* **AC Fail Report**: Reports AC mains power failure.
* **AC Fail Restore Report**: Reports AC mains power restoration.
* **Low Battery Report**: Reports low system battery.
* **Low Battery Restore Report**: Reports system battery restoration.
## All Zone Types and Their Descriptions
### Zone Defaults (Installation Guide Section 13.3.1)
* **Zone Type 00: Disabled**: Zone is not used.
* **Zone Type 01: Entry/Exit**: Entry/Exit zone with entry and exit delays.
* **Zone Type 02: Perimeter**: Instant alarm if violated when armed.
* **Zone Type 03: Interior**: Delayed alarm if violated after entry delay.
* **Zone Type 04: Day Alarm**: Activates a chime or report during disarmed state.
* **Zone Type 05: 24 Hour Silent**: Silent alarm, reports to monitoring station without audible indication.
* **Zone Type 06: 24 Hour Audible**: Audible alarm, reports to monitoring station with audible indication.
* **Zone Type 07: Fire**: 24-hour fire alarm.
* **Zone Type 08: Keyswitch**: Used for arming/disarming with a keyswitch.
* **Zone Type 09: Follower**: Follows entry/exit delay if an entry/exit zone is violated first, otherwise instant.
* **Zone Type 10: Medical**: 24-hour medical alarm.
* **Zone Type 11: Panic**: 24-hour panic alarm.
* **Zone Type 12: Duress**: Silent alarm, reports duress to monitoring station.
* **Zone Type 13: Arming**: Used for remote arming/disarming.
* **Zone Type 14: Guard**: Used for guard tour applications.
* **Zone Type 15: Utility**: General purpose 24-hour zone.
## Complete Wiring Diagrams and Terminal Descriptions
(Detailed wiring diagrams are typically found in the physical installation manual with visual representations. The text content provides descriptions of connections.)
### Control Panel Terminals (General Description - refer to actual manual for detailed diagrams)
* **Power Input**: AC input from TF008 Plug Pack (240 V/18 VAC @ 1.3A).
* **Battery Terminals**: Connections for 7 Ah/12 VDC Rechargeable Sealed Lead Acid Battery.
* **Zone Inputs**: Terminals for connecting wired detection devices (e.g., door contacts, PIRs). Each zone requires an End-Of-Line (EOL) resistor (typically 3k3 Ohm).
* **Outputs**: Programmable outputs for sirens, strobes, and other devices.
* **Siren Output**: Connects to external siren.
* **Strobe Output**: Connects to external strobe light.
* **Auxiliary Outputs**: General purpose programmable outputs.
* **Codepad Bus**: 4-wire bus (Red, Black, Yellow, Green) for connecting codepads and other bus devices.
* **Phone Line Input/Output**: For PSTN connection to monitoring station and domestic dialing.
* **Network Module Connector**: For B426/B426-M IP communicators or B450/B450-M GPRS communicators.
* **Wireless Receiver Connector**: For WE800EV2 or RADION receivers.
## Full Programming Menu Structure (TEXT LCD Codepad)
### Main Menu (User Guide Section 4.1)
* **[ A U I ] 1 Command**
* **[ U I ] 2 Access**
* **[ U I ] 3 System**
* **[ U I ] 4 Zone**
* **[ I ] 5 Area**
* **[ I ] 6 Output**
* **[ I ] 7 Comm**
* **[ I ] 8 Parameter**
### Command Menu (User Guide Section 4.1.1)
* **[ U ] 11 Arm**
* [ U ] 111 AWAY Arm
* [ U ] 112 STAY 1 Arm
* [ U ] 113 STAY 2 Arm
* [ U ] 114 AWAY Arm All
* **[ A U I ] 12 Inquire**
* [ A U I ] 121 Fault Analysis
* [ U I ] 122 Event Recall
* **[ A U I ] 13 System**
* [ U ] 131 Set Date & Time
* [ A U I ] 132 Day Alarm
* [ U I ] 133 Arm/Disa Seq.
* [ I ] 134 Report Monitor
* [ A U I ] 135 ModemCall Init
* [ U I ] 136 Domestic Phone
* [ U I ] 137 VersionDisplay
* [ I ] 138 FactoryDefault
* [ U ] 139 System Reset
* **[ I ] 14 RF Diagnose**
* [ I ] 141 RF Zone
* [ I ] 142 RF Keyfob
* [ I ] 143 RF Repeater
* **[ A U I ] 15 Test**
* [ A U I ] 151 Horn Speaker
* [ A U I ] 152 Bell Test
* [ A U I ] 153 Strobe Test
* [ U I ] 154 Walk Test
* [ A U I ] 155 Test Report
* **[ U ] 16 Zone Bypass**
* **[ U ] 17 Output On/Off**
### Access Menu (User Guide Section 4.1.2)
* **[ I ] 21 Installer Code**
* **[ U ] 22 User Code**
* **[ I ] 23 Access Retry**
* **[ U I ] 24 User Property**
* [ U ] 241 User Name
* [ I ] 242 User Allocate
* [ I ] 243 User Authority
### System Menu (User Guide Section 4.1.3)
* **[ I ] 31 Timer**
* [ I ] 311 Entry Time1
* [ I ] 312 Entry Time2
* [ I ] 313 Exit Time
* [ I ] 314 Entry Guard Time For STAY Mode
* [ I ] 315 Sensor Watch Time
* [ I ] 316 Codepad Lockout Time
* [ I ] 317 Auto Arm Pre-AlertTime
* [ I ] 318 Auto Arm Time
* [ I ] 319 Auto Disarm Time
* **[ I ] 32 Codepad**
* [ I ] 321 Silent Codepad Panic Alarm
* [ I ] 322 Silent Codepad Fire Alarm
* [ I ] 323 Silent Codepad Medical Alarm
* [ I ] 324 Codepad Access Denied Silent
* [ I ] 325 Codepad Fault Beep Enable
* [ I ] 326 Codepad Display Off after 60s
* **[ I ] 33 Arm/Disarm**
* [ I ] 331 Auto Arm In STAY1
* [ I ] 332 Single Btn Arm Enable
* [ I ] 333 Single Btn Disarm Enable
* [ I ] 334 Disarmed On Power Up
* [ I ] 335 Arm/Disarm Track On Power Up
* [ I ] 336 Phone Remote Arm
* [ I ] 337 Answer Machine Bypass On Arm
* **[ I ] 34 Fault**
* [ I ] 341 Ignore AC Fail
* [ I ] 342 AC Fail Report Wait Time
* [ I ] 343 Horn Speaker Fault Monitor
* [ I ] 344 Phone Line Fault Indicator
* [ I ] 345 Phone Line Fault Alarm on Armed
* [ I ] 346 Phone Line Fault Alarm on Disarm
* [ I ] 347 Lockout Phone Line Fail Alarm
* **[ U I ] 35 Wireless**
* [ I ] 351 RF Receiver
* [ I ] 352 Zone RFID And Input Option
* [ U I ] 353 Keyfob RFID
* [ I ] 354 Repeater RFID
* [ I ] 355 RF Supervision Time
* [ I ] 356 RF Jam Sensitivity
* [ I ] 357 RF RECE Jam/Tamper Siren Alarm
* [ I ] 358 RFKF Btn4 Arm In STAY1
* [ I ] 359 RF Arm/Disarm Strobe Indicate
* **[ U I ] 36 System Option**
* [ U I ] 361 Home Message
* [ I ] 362 Button Factory Default Enable
* [ I ] 363 Alarm Memory Reset On Disarm
* [ I ] 364 STAY Indicator For Day Alarm
* [ I ] 365 Digit 3 For Codepad Duress Alarm
* [ I ] 366 Siren & Strobe Output In STAY
* [ I ] 367 Speaker Beep Volume
### Zone Menu (User Guide Section 4.1.4)
* **[ U I ] 4 Zone**
* [ I ] 41 Zone Config
* [ I ] 42 Zone Allocate
* [ U I ] 43 Zone Name
* [ I ] 44 Day Alarm Zone
* [ U I ] 45 STAY2 Zone
* [ I ] 46 EOL Resistor
* [ I ] 47 Zone State Rpt
* **[ I ] 48 Swing Shutdown**
* [ I ] 481 Siren Swing Shutdown Count
* [ I ] 482 Dialer Swing Shutdown Count
* **[ I ] 49 Zone Option**
* [ I ] 491 Silent Zone Tamper Alarm
* [ I ] 492 Unseal Zone That Fail Monitor
* [ I ] 493 Bosch Smart Lockout Enable
* [ I ] 494 Zone Pulse Cnt Handover Enable
* [ I ] 495 Handover Delay In Order
### Area Menu (User Guide Section 4.1.5)
* **[ I ] 5 Area**
* [ I ] 51 Codepad Area
* **[ I ] 52 Area Option**
* [ I ] 521 Arm/Disarm All Areas Once
* [ I ] 522 Reset Siren From Any Area
### Output Menu (User Guide Section 4.1.6)
* **[ I ] 6 Output**
* [ I ] 61 Onboard Output
* [ I ] 62 Codepad Output
* [ I ] 63 Extend Output
* **[ I ] 64 Siren Config**
* [ I ] 641 Siren Run Time
* [ I ] 642 Siren Run Rate
* [ I ] 643 Siren Sound On RF Receiver Fail
### Communication Menu (User Guide Section 4.1.7)
* **[ I ] 71 Receiver Config**
* **[ I ] 72 Network Config**
* [ I ] 721 Network Module
* [ I ] 722 A-Link/RSC PSWD
* [ I ] 723 IP Destination
* [ I ] 724 CSVIP User Name And Password
* **[ I ] 73 Report Config**
* [ I ] 731 STAY Mode Arm/Disa Report Enable
* [ I ] 732 Arm/Disa Report Only If Alarmed
* [ I ] 733 First Disarm/Last Arm Report
* [ I ] 734 Arm/Disarm Report Option
* [ I ] 735 Codepad Report Option
* [ I ] 736 Test Report Time And Interval
* [ I ] 737 Test Report Only When Armed
* [ I ] 738 Test Report On Siren Reset
* [ I ] 739 Test Report Dialer Option
* **[ I ] 74 Comm Option1**
* [ I ] 741 Ring Count
* [ I ] 742 Dialer Report Function Enable
* [ I ] 743 Exit A-Link Connection On Alarm
* [ I ] 744 System Status Report Option
* [ I ] 745 Use Bell-103 For FSK Format
* [ I ] 746 DTMT Dial Pulse To 1 Digit/Sec
* [ I ] 747 Receiver1/2 Dialing Format
* [ I ] 748 Set Up Domestic Dialing Format
* **[ I ] 75 Comm Option2**
* [ I ] 751 Telco Arming Sequence
* [ I ] 752 Telco Disarming Sequence
* [ I ] 753 Delay Alarm Report Time
* [ I ] 754 Kiss-Off Wait Time
* [ I ] 755 Delay Siren Until Transmit Over
* [ I ] 756 Extend Wait For Handshake
* [ I ] 757 Upload/Download Enable
* [ I ] 758 Callback Phone Number Request
* [ I ] 759 Callback Phone Number
### Parameter Menu (User Guide Section 4.1.8)
* **[ I ] 8 Parameter**
* [ I ] 81 Addr Program
* [ I ] 82 Addr Auto Step
* **[ I ] 83 Adapter**
* [ I ] 831 Test Adapter
* [ I ] 832 Read Adapter
* [ I ] 833 Write Adapter
## All Expander/Peripheral Devices with Specs
* **Codepads**: IUI – SOL -TEXT (Text LCD) and IUI – SOL – ICON (Icon LCD).
* **WE800EV2 receiver**: Wireless receiver for keyfobs.
* **HCT-4 keyfob**: Wireless keyfob.
* **RADION receiver B810**: Wireless receiver for RADION devices.
* **RADION keyfobs**: Wireless keyfobs compatible with RADION receiver.
* **RADION repeater**: Extends range for RADION wireless devices.
* **RADION detectors**: Wireless detection devices (e.g., PIRs, door/window contacts).
* **B308 Octo-output Module**: Provides additional programmable outputs.
* **B426/B426-M Conettix Ethernet Communication Modules**: IP communicators for network reporting and remote access.
* **B450/B450-M Conettix Plug-in Communicator Interfaces**: GPRS communicators for cellular reporting and remote access.
* **TF008 Plug Pack (TF008-B)**: 240 V/18 VAC @ 1.3A transformer.
## Commissioning Steps (General Outline - refer to actual manual for detailed steps)
1. **Hardware Installation**: Mount control panel, codepads, and other devices. Wire power, battery, zones, and outputs.
2. **Power Up**: Connect AC power and battery.
3. **Initial Programming**: Enter Installer Programming Mode.
* Set Date and Time.
* Program communication settings (PSTN, IP, GPRS).
* Enroll wireless devices (receivers, keyfobs, detectors).
* Configure zones (zone types, EOL resistors, options).
* Program outputs (siren, strobe, auxiliary).
* Set system timers.
* Configure user codes and authority levels.
* Set partitioning (if applicable).
4. **Testing**: Perform system tests.
* Walk Test: Verify all zones are functioning correctly.
* Siren/Strobe Test: Check audible and visual alarms.
* Communication Test: Confirm reporting to monitoring station.
5. **User Training**: Instruct end-users on system operation, arming/disarming, and fault analysis.
## Common Fault Diagnosis
* **AC Fail**: Check mains power supply, transformer, and wiring to the panel. Ensure the TF008 Plug Pack is functioning.
* **Battery Fail**: Check battery connections. Test battery voltage and replace if necessary. Ensure battery charging circuit is operational.
* **Phone Line Fail**: Check telephone line connection to the panel. Verify dial tone. Contact phone service provider if necessary.
* **Zone Faults (Open/Short/Tamper)**: Check wiring for the affected zone. Verify EOL resistor is correctly installed. Inspect detection device for damage or tampering.
* **Wireless Device Faults (Low Battery/Supervision Fail)**: Replace batteries in wireless devices. Check device placement and signal strength. Verify wireless receiver is functioning and correctly enrolled.
* **Communication Fail**: Verify phone line or network connection. Check programming for monitoring station numbers and account codes. Contact monitoring station to confirm they are receiving signals.
* **Codepad Not Responding**: Check codepad bus wiring (Red, Black, Yellow, Green). Ensure codepad is correctly addressed.
* **System Not Arming**: Check for open zones (unsealed). Verify all users have correct authority levels. Check for system faults preventing arming.
## Compliance Standards Met
(Specific compliance standards are usually detailed in the full installation manual or datasheets. Common standards for intruder alarms include:)
* **AS/NZS 2201.1**: Intruder alarm systems – General requirements.
* **AS/NZS 2201.5**: Intruder alarm systems – Alarm transmission systems.
* **CE Compliance**: European conformity for electronic products.
* **RCM Mark**: Australian regulatory compliance mark.
## Any Other Technical Detail You Find
### Codepad Indicators (User Guide Section 3.3)
* **ZONE 1 – 8 (ICP-SOL2-P) / ZONE 1 – 16 (ICP-SOL3-P)**:
* **On**: Zone is unsealed.
* **Off**: Zone is sealed.
* **Flashing Fast (0.25 sec on/0.25 sec off)**: Zone is in alarm condition.
* **Flashing Slow (1 sec on/1 sec off)**: Zone is manually isolated or selected to be isolated.
* **AWAY**:
* **On**: System is armed in AWAY Mode.
* **Off**: System is not armed in AWAY Mode.
* **Flashing twice a sec with STAY indicator**: Setting STAY Mode 2 zones.
* **STAY**:
* **On**: System is armed in STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2.
* **Off**: System is not armed in STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2.
* **Flashing twice a sec**: Zone isolating mode.
* **Flashing twice a sec with AWAY indicator**: Setting STAY Mode 2 zones.
* **Flashing once every 3 sec**: Day alarm status – day alarm turned on.
* **OFF Indicator**: Lights when system is disarmed, flashes when a zone becomes unsealed when disarmed. Stops flashing when all zones are sealed.
* **ON Indicator**: Lights when system is armed, flashes when an alarm occurs. Resets after a valid User Code is entered.
* **MAINS**:
* **On**: AC MAINS power normal.
* **Flashing**: AC MAINS supply has failed.
* **FAULTS**:
* **On**: There is a system fault that needs to be rectified.
* **Off**: The system is normal, no faults.
* **Flashing**: There is a system fault that needs to be acknowledged.
* **Programming Mode**: These two indicators flash when you enter Installer’s Programming Mode or use any Master Code function.
### Audible Indications (User Guide Section 3.4)
* **One short beep**: A button/key was pressed on the codepad, or Exit Time ended when armed in STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2.
* **Two short beeps**: The system accepted your code.
* **Three short beeps**: The requested function was executed.
* **One long beep**: Indicates the last 10 seconds of Exit Time when armed in AWAY Mode, or the requested operation was denied or aborted. Also indicates codepad panic/fire/medical alarm operation.
* **One beep every sec**: Walk Test Mode is currently active.
* **One short beep every min**: There is a system fault waiting to be acknowledged.
* **One beep every 4 sec**: During Auto Arming Pre-Alert Time, the warning before automatic arming takes place.
* **One beep every 2 sec**: During Exit Time when armed in AWAY Mode.
### Installer Commands (Installation Guide Section 5.1)
* **Command 958**: Exit from Installer’s Programming Mode without saving changes.
* **Command 959**: Test IUI-SOL-ADAPTER.
* **Command 960**: Save and exit from Installer’s Programming Mode.
* **Command 961**: Reset the Control Panel to Factory Default Settings.
* **Command 962**: Copy the Control Panel Memory to IUI-SOL-ADAPTER.
* **Command 963**: Copy IUI-SOL-ADAPTER data to the Control Panel.
* **Command 965**: Set up Domestic Dialing Format.
* **Command 966**: Enable/Disable the Automatic Stepping of Locations.
* **Command 999**: Display the Control Panel Firmware Version Number.
### System Options (Installation Guide Section 18)
* **System Options 1**
* **System Options 2**
* **System Options 3**
* **System Options 4**
* **System Option 5**
* **Consumer Options 1**
* **Consumer Options 2**
* **Consumer Options 3**
### Partitioning (Installation Guide Section 19)
* **Partitioning Options 1**
* **Partitioning Options 2**
* **Partition Allocations**
* Zone Area Assignments
* Codepad assignment
* User code area assignments
### RF Information (Installation Guide Section 14)
* **RF Supervision Time**
* **Anti-Jamming Sensitivity**
* **RF Receiver**
* **RF Options**
* **RFID**
* RF Keyfob RFID
* RF Device RFID
* RF Repeater RFID
### Communication Information (Installation Guide Section 11)
* **Primary Telephone Number for Receivers**
* **Secondary Telephone Number for Receivers**
* **Transmission Format for Receivers**
* **Subscriber ID Number for Receivers**
* **IP Items for Receivers**
* **Conettix Items for Receivers**
* **External Network Modules**
* **Network Module Cloud Connection**
* **Password for A-Link Connection**
* **DTMF Timing Compensation**
* **Country Codes**
* **Telco Arming Sequence**
* **Telco Disarming Sequence**
* **Call Back Telephone Number**
* **Ring Count**
* **Telephone Line Fail Options**
* **Communication Options 1**
* **Communication Options 2**
* **Communication Options 3**
* **A-Link Plus Options**
* **Domestic Dialing**
* Domestic Dialing Function
* Setting Up and Programming Domestic Reporting
* **Reporting Formats**
* Contact ID Format
* SIA Format
### Programmable Outputs (Installation Guide Section 16)
* **Output Programming**
* **B228 Output Mode**
* **Output Event Types**
* **Output Polarity**
* **Output Timing**
* **Pulsing Polarities**
* **One-Shot Polarities**
### System Event Timers (Installation Guide Section 17)
* **Entry Time 1**
* **Entry Time 2**
* **Exit Time**
* **Entry Guard Time for STAY Mode**
* **Delay Alarm Reporting Time**
* **Sensor Watch Time**
* **Codepad Lockout Time**
* **Siren Run Time**
* **Siren Sound Rate**
* **Auto Arming Pre-Alert Time**
* **Auto Arming Time**
* **Auto Disarming Time**
* **Kiss-Off Wait Time**
* **Speaker Beep Volume**
This document contains a comprehensive collection of technical details for the Bosch Solution 2000, 3000, and 6000 intruder alarm panels, compiled from user and installation guides. It includes product specifications, default codes, fault codes, zone types, programming menu structures, peripheral device information, commissioning steps, common fault diagnosis, and compliance standards. The content is presented in a raw, unsummarized format to provide maximum detail for security engineers.
=== RESEARCH: Bosch Solution 2000 3000 6000 ===
## Bosch Solution 2000/3000/6000 Series Intruder Alarm Systems: Technical Documentation Summary
This document provides a comprehensive technical summary of the Bosch Solution 2000, 3000, and 6000 series intruder alarm systems, compiled from various official installation guides, quick reference guides, and user manuals. It covers key aspects such as fault codes, default codes, zone types, programming menus, wiring specifications, system capacities, and compliance standards.
### 1. Bosch Solution 2000/3000 Series
**Manufacturer:** Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
**Product Names:** Solution 2000, Solution 3000
#### 1.1 System Capacities [1] [2]
| Feature | Solution 2000 | Solution 3000 |
| :------------------ | :------------ | :------------ |
| Number of users | 32 | 32 |
| Number of zones | 4+4 (ZD) | 8+8 (ZD) |
| Areas/Partitions | 2 | 2 |
| On-board outputs | 4 | 4 |
| Codepads | 4 | 4 |
| B308 Octo-output modules | 2 | 2 |
| B426 IP communicators | 2 | 2 |
| B442/B450 GPRS communicators | 2 | 2 |
| WE800EV2 receivers | 1 | 1 |
| RADION receivers | 0 | 1 |
| RADION repeaters | 0 | 8 |
*Note: Solution 3000 supports 16 inputs via zone doubling with 8 onboard inputs or 8 onboard inputs plus 8 B228 inputs. Receiver WE800EV2 and B810 are mutually exclusive. A total of 2 B426/B450 can be used per system.* [2]
#### 1.2 Default Codes [2] [4]
* **Installer Code:** 1234
* **Master Code:** 2580
#### 1.3 Zone Types (Common) [4]
* **0:** Instant
* **1:** Handover
* **2:** Delay 1
* **3:** Delay 2
* **11:** Keyswitch
* **12:** 24hr Burglary
* **14:** Chime Only
* **15:** Not Used
#### 1.4 Programming Menus (via Alphanumeric Codepad) [2] [4]
Programming is typically done via the codepad using installer or master codes. The menu structure allows configuration of various system parameters. Key programming areas include:
* **Installer Commands:** Exit without saving (958), Test IUI-SOL-ADAPTER (959), Save and exit (960), Reset to Factory Defaults (961), Copy memory to/from IUI-SOL-ADAPTER (962/963), Set Domestic Dialing Format (965), Enable/Disable Automatic Stepping (966), Display Firmware Version (999). [1]
* **Communication Programming:** Receiver phone numbers, transmission format (Contact ID, SIA, Domestic Dial, CSV-IP, Email), subscriber ID, IP items, Conettix items, network modules, A-Link password, DTMF timing, country codes, Telco arm/disarm sequences, callback numbers, ring count, telephone line fail options, communication options, A-Link Plus options, domestic dialing setup, and reporting formats. [1] [2]
* **Access Programming:** Installer code, user codes, user code priority. [1] [2]
* **Zone Information:** Day alarm, EOL resistor value, zone programming (defaults, types, pulse count, options, report options, keyswitch options, zone source), swinger shutdown counts, STAY Mode 2 bypass zones, zone status reporting. [1] [2]
* **RF Information:** RF supervision time, anti-jamming sensitivity, RF receiver, RF options, RFID (keyfob, device, repeater). [1] [2]
* **System Reporting Information:** Arm/disarm reporting, codepad reporting, access denied, system status reporting, test reporting (time, options), various reports (zone tamper, walk test, bypass, trouble, sensor watch, alarm restore, RF receiver trouble/restore, RF low battery, arm/disarm, codepad duress/panic/fire/medical, AUX power fail/restore, AC fail/restore, low battery/restore). [1] [2]
* **Programmable Outputs:** Output programming, B228 output mode, output event types, output polarity, output timing, pulsing polarities, one-shot polarities. [1] [2]
* **System Event Timers:** Entry/exit times, entry guard time for STAY mode, delay alarm reporting, sensor watch time, codepad lockout, siren run time, siren sound rate, auto arming pre-alert/arming/disarming times, kiss-off wait time, speaker beep volume. [1] [2]
* **System and Consumer Options:** Various system and consumer configurable options. [1] [2]
* **Partitioning:** Programming options, zone area assignments, codepad assignment, user code area assignments. [1] [2]
* **Text Information:** Home message, zone names, user names. [2]
#### 1.5 Wiring Specifications [2]
* **EOL Resistor Value:** Typically 3k3 (3.3 kΩ). Connections for EOL resistors are detailed in the quick reference guide. [2]
* **Wiring Diagram:** Comprehensive wiring diagrams are available in the quick reference guide, illustrating connections for various components. [2]
#### 1.6 Fault Descriptions [1] [3]
The system provides fault analysis mode and fault descriptions via the codepad. Common fault indicators include:
* **MAINS indicator flashing:** AC MAINS supply has failed. [3]
* **FAULTS indicator on:** System fault needs rectification. [3]
* **FAULTS indicator flashing:** System fault needs acknowledgment. [3]
* **One short beep every minute:** System fault waiting to be acknowledged. [3]
### 2. Bosch Solution 6000 Series
**Manufacturer:** Bosch Security Systems Pty Ltd
**Product Name:** Solution 6000 (CC610 Alarm System)
#### 2.1 System Capacities [5]
The Solution 6000 is a highly flexible system with extensive capacities, including support for a large number of zones, users, and various communication modules. Specific capacities are detailed in the installation manual.
#### 2.2 Defaulting the System [5] [6]
* **Hardware Default:** Remove power (PSU & battery), press and hold the DEFAULT button on the PCB for 5 seconds while reconnecting power. [5]
* **Software Default:** Can be performed via programming menus. [5]
#### 2.3 Wiring Diagrams and Terminal Descriptions [5] [6]
* **EOL Resistor Colour Code:** Detailed in the installation manual, typically 3k3 (3.3 kΩ) for single EOL and 6k8 (6.8 kΩ) for split EOL. [5] [6]
* **Board Connectors & Terminal Descriptions:** The installation guide provides detailed descriptions of all board connectors and terminals for various inputs, outputs, power, and communication modules. [5]
* **LAN Wiring:** Instructions for LAN wiring using 2-pair security cable and twisted-pair cable, including system earthing and LAN termination. [5]
* **Connection Diagram:** A comprehensive connection diagram is available, illustrating the wiring of the Solution 6000 panel. [6]
#### 2.4 Programming Overview [5] [6]
Programming is accessed via an installer code. The system supports menu-driven programming through the keypad. Key programming areas include:
* **Entering/Exiting Programming Mode:** Specific sequences are used to enter and exit programming mode. [5]
* **Command Menus & Option Bit Menus:** Navigation through various menus for configuration. [5]
* **Alpha Text:** Programming of custom text for zones, areas, and user names. [5]
* **Clock Programming:** Setting system date and time. [5]
* **Telephone Numbers:** Configuration of reporting telephone numbers. [5]
* **Service Mode:** Turning service mode ON/OFF. [5]
* **Direct Link Programming:** For advanced configurations. [5]
* **Zone Array, Output Array, Door Array:** Configuration of zones, outputs, and doors. [5]
* **Basic Reporting Reference:** Details on system reporting. [5]
* **Menu Reference Table & Program Locations:** Comprehensive tables outlining all programming locations and their functions. [5]
* **Access Programming:** User default table, area programming, input programming, zone assignments, zone default table, output programming. [5]
#### 2.5 Keypad Indicators and Tones [5] [7]
* **Status Icons/LEDs:** Provide visual feedback on system status (e.g., armed, disarmed, fault, zone status). [5] [7]
* **Keypad Tones:** Audible indications for various events (e.g., button press, system armed/disarmed, alarms, faults). [5] [7]
#### 2.6 Compliance Standards [5]
* **Australian Standard AS 2201:** Requires regular service by qualified and licensed security persons and regular user testing. [5]
* **Telepermit Note:** Indicates compliance for connection to the Telecom Network in New Zealand, with specific warnings regarding usage and disconnection. [5]
### 3. General Information and Warnings [1] [3] [5] [7]
* **Installation:** All Bosch Solution panels must be installed by a qualified and licensed security installer. Incorrect installation may lead to system malfunction. [1] [3] [5] [7]
* **Power Supply:** The mains adapter and telephone line (if used for reporting) should remain plugged in at all times under normal conditions. [1] [3] [5] [7]
* **Product Identification Label:** Must be affixed to the outside of the enclosure during installation. [5] [7]
* **Reporting:** Features like Back to Base reporting, SMS, and Email Reporting require a working telephone line and may incur service provider charges. [1] [3] [5] [7]
* **Emergency Calls:** Equipment should not be set up to make automatic calls to emergency services (e.g., Telecom ‘111’ Emergency Service). [5] [7]
### References
[1] Bosch Security Systems, Inc. (2017). *Control Panel Solution 2000 / 3000 Installation Guide*. Retrieved from https://gsec.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2021/08/Bosch-2000-or-3000-installation-manual-Copy.pdf
[2] Bosch Security Systems, Inc. (2016). *Control Panel Solution 2000 / 3000 Quick Reference Guide*. Retrieved from https://www.ozdem.com.au/ProductFiles/439_Bosch-2000-3000-Quick-Reference-Guide-icp-sol2-p-4.pdf
[3] Bosch Security Systems, Inc. (2015). *Control Panel Solution 2000 / 3000 User's Guide*. Retrieved from https://www.smartersecurity.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/ICP_SOL2_SOL3__Operation_Manual_enUS_17699927691.pdf
[4] Bosch Security Systems, Inc. (n.d.). *Solution 2000/3000 LCD Alphanumeric Codepad (Menu Programming)*. Retrieved from https://media.boschsecurity.com/fs/media/pb/media/products_1/intrusion_alarm_systems/programming_reference_guides/solution-2000-3000-lcd-alphanumeric-codepad.pdf
[5] Bosch Security Systems (2017). *Solution 6000 Security System Installation Guide*. Retrieved from https://www.dickerdata.com.au/hubfs/%2B%20New%20Zealand/%2B%20Connect%20Website%20Assets/Connect%20Knowledgebase%20Assets/Intrusion/Bosch%20Intrusion/BLCC600I%20Solution%206000%20Installation%20Manual%20FTR2.3%20(latest)%20Screen%20(1).pdf
[6] Bosch Security Systems (2016). *Solution 6000 Security System Quick Start Guide*. Retrieved from https://insideoutsecurity.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2019/03/Bosch-Solution-6000-Installer-Manual.pdf
[7] Bosch Security Systems (2013). *Solution 6000 Security System User Guide*. Retrieved from https://www.serioussecurity.com.au/user_manuals/bosch-solution-6000-user-manual.pdf
=== RESEARCH: Bosch Solution 2000 3000 6000 ===
## Bosch Solution 2000/3000/6000 Series Intruder Alarm Systems: Technical Documentation Summary
This document provides a comprehensive technical summary of the Bosch Solution 2000, 3000, and 6000 series intruder alarm systems, compiled from various official installation guides, quick reference guides, and user manuals. It covers key aspects such as fault codes, default codes, zone types, programming menus, wiring specifications, system capacities, and compliance standards.
### 1. Bosch Solution 2000/3000 Series
**Manufacturer:** Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
**Product Names:** Solution 2000, Solution 3000
#### 1.1 System Capacities [1] [2]
| Feature | Solution 2000 | Solution 3000 |
| :------------------ | :------------ | :------------ |
| Number of users | 32 | 32 |
| Number of zones | 4+4 (ZD) | 8+8 (ZD) |
| Areas/Partitions | 2 | 2 |
| On-board outputs | 4 | 4 |
| Codepads | 4 | 4 |
| B308 Octo-output modules | 2 | 2 |
| B426 IP communicators | 2 | 2 |
| B442/B450 GPRS communicators | 2 | 2 |
| WE800EV2 receivers | 1 | 1 |
| RADION receivers | 0 | 1 |
| RADION repeaters | 0 | 8 |
*Note: Solution 3000 supports 16 inputs via zone doubling with 8 onboard inputs or 8 onboard inputs plus 8 B228 inputs. Receiver WE800EV2 and B810 are mutually exclusive. A total of 2 B426/B450 can be used per system.* [2]
#### 1.2 Default Codes [2] [4]
* **Installer Code:** 1234
* **Master Code:** 2580
#### 1.3 Zone Types (Common) [4]
* **0:** Instant
* **1:** Handover
* **2:** Delay 1
* **3:** Delay 2
* **11:** Keyswitch
* **12:** 24hr Burglary
* **14:** Chime Only
* **15:** Not Used
#### 1.4 Programming Menus (via Alphanumeric Codepad) [2] [4]
Programming is typically done via the codepad using installer or master codes. The menu structure allows configuration of various system parameters. Key programming areas include:
* **Installer Commands:** Exit without saving (958), Test IUI-SOL-ADAPTER (959), Save and exit (960), Reset to Factory Defaults (961), Copy memory to/from IUI-SOL-ADAPTER (962/963), Set Domestic Dialing Format (965), Enable/Disable Automatic Stepping (966), Display Firmware Version (999). [1]
* **Communication Programming:** Receiver phone numbers, transmission format (Contact ID, SIA, Domestic Dial, CSV-IP, Email), subscriber ID, IP items, Conettix items, network modules, A-Link password, DTMF timing, country codes, Telco arm/disarm sequences, callback numbers, ring count, telephone line fail options, communication options, A-Link Plus options, domestic dialing setup, and reporting formats. [1] [2]
* **Access Programming:** Installer code, user codes, user code priority. [1] [2]
* **Zone Information:** Day alarm, EOL resistor value, zone programming (defaults, types, pulse count, options, report options, keyswitch options, zone source), swinger shutdown counts, STAY Mode 2 bypass zones, zone status reporting. [1] [2]
* **RF Information:** RF supervision time, anti-jamming sensitivity, RF receiver, RF options, RFID (keyfob, device, repeater). [1] [2]
* **System Reporting Information:** Arm/disarm reporting, codepad reporting, access denied, system status reporting, test reporting (time, options), various reports (zone tamper, walk test, bypass, trouble, sensor watch, alarm restore, RF receiver trouble/restore, RF low battery, arm/disarm, codepad duress/panic/fire/medical, AUX power fail/restore, AC fail/restore, low battery/restore). [1] [2]
* **Programmable Outputs:** Output programming, B228 output mode, output event types, output polarity, output timing, pulsing polarities, one-shot polarities. [1] [2]
* **System Event Timers:** Entry/exit times, entry guard time for STAY mode, delay alarm reporting, sensor watch time, codepad lockout, siren run time, siren sound rate, auto arming pre-alert/arming/disarming times, kiss-off wait time, speaker beep volume. [1] [2]
* **System and Consumer Options:** Various system and consumer configurable options. [1] [2]
* **Partitioning:** Programming options, zone area assignments, codepad assignment, user code area assignments. [1] [2]
* **Text Information:** Home message, zone names, user names. [2]
#### 1.5 Wiring Specifications [2]
* **EOL Resistor Value:** Typically 3k3 (3.3 kΩ). Connections for EOL resistors are detailed in the quick reference guide. [2]
* **Wiring Diagram:** Comprehensive wiring diagrams are available in the quick reference guide, illustrating connections for various components. [2]
#### 1.6 Fault Descriptions [1] [3]
The system provides fault analysis mode and fault descriptions via the codepad. Common fault indicators include:
* **MAINS indicator flashing:** AC MAINS supply has failed. [3]
* **FAULTS indicator on:** System fault needs rectification. [3]
* **FAULTS indicator flashing:** System fault needs acknowledgment. [3]
* **One short beep every minute:** System fault waiting to be acknowledged. [3]
### 2. Bosch Solution 6000 Series
**Manufacturer:** Bosch Security Systems Pty Ltd
**Product Name:** Solution 6000 (CC610 Alarm System)
#### 2.1 System Capacities [5]
The Solution 6000 is a highly flexible system with extensive capacities, including support for a large number of zones, users, and various communication modules. Specific capacities are detailed in the installation manual.
#### 2.2 Defaulting the System [5] [6]
* **Hardware Default:** Remove power (PSU & battery), press and hold the DEFAULT button on the PCB for 5 seconds while reconnecting power. [5]
* **Software Default:** Can be performed via programming menus. [5]
#### 2.3 Wiring Diagrams and Terminal Descriptions [5] [6]
* **EOL Resistor Colour Code:** Detailed in the installation manual, typically 3k3 (3.3 kΩ) for single EOL and 6k8 (6.8 kΩ) for split EOL. [5] [6]
* **Board Connectors & Terminal Descriptions:** The installation guide provides detailed descriptions of all board connectors and terminals for various inputs, outputs, power, and communication modules. [5]
* **LAN Wiring:** Instructions for LAN wiring using 2-pair security cable and twisted-pair cable, including system earthing and LAN termination. [5]
* **Connection Diagram:** A comprehensive connection diagram is available, illustrating the wiring of the Solution 6000 panel. [6]
#### 2.4 Programming Overview [5] [6]
Programming is accessed via an installer code. The system supports menu-driven programming through the keypad. Key programming areas include:
* **Entering/Exiting Programming Mode:** Specific sequences are used to enter and exit programming mode. [5]
* **Command Menus & Option Bit Menus:** Navigation through various menus for configuration. [5]
* **Alpha Text:** Programming of custom text for zones, areas, and user names. [5]
* **Clock Programming:** Setting system date and time. [5]
* **Telephone Numbers:** Configuration of reporting telephone numbers. [5]
* **Service Mode:** Turning service mode ON/OFF. [5]
* **Direct Link Programming:** For advanced configurations. [5]
* **Zone Array, Output Array, Door Array:** Configuration of zones, outputs, and doors. [5]
* **Basic Reporting Reference:** Details on system reporting. [5]
* **Menu Reference Table & Program Locations:** Comprehensive tables outlining all programming locations and their functions. [5]
* **Access Programming:** User default table, area programming, input programming, zone assignments, zone default table, output programming. [5]
#### 2.5 Keypad Indicators and Tones [5] [7]
* **Status Icons/LEDs:** Provide visual feedback on system status (e.g., armed, disarmed, fault, zone status). [5] [7]
* **Keypad Tones:** Audible indications for various events (e.g., button press, system armed/disarmed, alarms, faults). [5] [7]
#### 2.6 Compliance Standards [5]
* **Australian Standard AS 2201:** Requires regular service by qualified and licensed security persons and regular user testing. [5]
* **Telepermit Note:** Indicates compliance for connection to the Telecom Network in New Zealand, with specific warnings regarding usage and disconnection. [5]
### 3. General Information and Warnings [1] [3] [5] [7]
* **Installation:** All Bosch Solution panels must be installed by a qualified and licensed security installer. Incorrect installation may lead to system malfunction. [1] [3] [5] [7]
* **Power Supply:** The mains adapter and telephone line (if used for reporting) should remain plugged in at all times under normal conditions. [1] [3] [5] [7]
* **Product Identification Label:** Must be affixed to the outside of the enclosure during installation. [5] [7]
* **Reporting:** Features like Back to Base reporting, SMS, and Email Reporting require a working telephone line and may incur service provider charges. [1] [3] [5] [7]
* **Emergency Calls:** Equipment should not be set up to make automatic calls to emergency services (e.g., Telecom ‘111’ Emergency Service). [5] [7]
### References
[1] Bosch Security Systems, Inc. (2017). *Control Panel Solution 2000 / 3000 Installation Guide*. Retrieved from https://gsec.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2021/08/Bosch-2000-or-3000-installation-manual-Copy.pdf
[2] Bosch Security Systems, Inc. (2016). *Control Panel Solution 2000 / 3000 Quick Reference Guide*. Retrieved from https://www.ozdem.com.au/ProductFiles/439_Bosch-2000-3000-Quick-Reference-Guide-icp-sol2-p-4.pdf
[3] Bosch Security Systems, Inc. (2015). *Control Panel Solution 2000 / 3000 User's Guide*. Retrieved from https://www.smartersecurity.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/ICP_SOL2_SOL3__Operation_Manual_enUS_17699927691.pdf
[4] Bosch Security Systems, Inc. (n.d.). *Solution 2000/3000 LCD Alphanumeric Codepad (Menu Programming)*. Retrieved from https://media.boschsecurity.com/fs/media/pb/media/products_1/intrusion_alarm_systems/programming_reference_guides/solution-2000-3000-lcd-alphanumeric-codepad.pdf
[5] Bosch Security Systems (2017). *Solution 6000 Security System Installation Guide*. Retrieved from https://www.dickerdata.com.au/hubfs/%2B%20New%20Zealand/%2B%20Connect%20Website%20Assets/Connect%20Knowledgebase%20Assets/Intrusion/Bosch%20Intrusion/BLCC600I%20Solution%206000%20Installation%20Manual%20FTR2.3%20(latest)%20Screen%20(1).pdf
[6] Bosch Security Systems (2016). *Solution 6000 Security System Quick Start Guide*. Retrieved from https://insideoutsecurity.com.au/wp-content/uploads/2019/03/Bosch-Solution-6000-Installer-Manual.pdf
[7] Bosch Security Systems (2013). *Solution 6000 Security System User Guide*. Retrieved from https://www.serioussecurity.com.au/user_manuals/bosch-solution-6000-user-manual.pdf
=== PDF TEXT: bosch_intruder_439_Bosch-2000-3000-Quick-Reference-Guide-icp-sol2-p-4.txt ===
Control Panel
Solution 2000 / 3000
en
Quick Reference Guide
--- PAGE BREAK ---
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Control Panel
Table of contents | en
3
Table of contents
1
Introduction
6
2
Programming
7
2.1
Alphanumeric Codepad Menu Programming
7
2.2
ICON LCD Codepad Programming
10
2.3
Programming Option Bits
11
2.4
Installer's programming commands
11
3
Operating Commands
12
3.1
Add/Delete RF Device (Wireless Zones)
14
3.2
Add/Delete RF Repeater
14
3.3
Add/Delete RF Keyfob
15
3.4
Set the Number of Days until the First Test Report
17
3.5
Change Domestic Telephone Numbers
17
3.6
Change the Telco Arm/Disarm Sequence
17
3.7
Set STAY Mode 2 Bypass Zones
17
3.8
Report Monitor Mode (Toggle On/Off)
17
3.9
Walk Test Mode
18
3.10
Event Memory Recall
18
3.11
Fault Analysis Mode
18
4
Programming Parameters
22
4.1
Communication Programming
22
4.1.1
Receiver 1
22
4.1.2
Receiver 2
22
4.1.3
Receiver 3
23
4.1.4
Receiver 4
24
4.1.5
External Network Module
25
4.1.6
Password for A-Link Plus/RSC Connection
26
4.1.7
DTMF Timing Compensation
26
4.1.8
Country Codes
26
4.1.9
Telco Arming Sequence (Call Forward On)
26
4.1.10
Telco Disarm Sequence (Call Forward Off)
26
4.1.11
Call Back Telephone Number
26
4.1.12
Ring Count
26
4.1.13
Telephone Line Fail Options
27
4.1.14
Communication Options 1
27
4.1.15
Communication Options 2
27
4.1.16
Communication Options 3
27
4.1.17
A-Link Plus Options
27
4.2
Installer Code
28
4.3
User Code Programming
28
4.4
Day Alarm Zones
29
4.5
EOL Resistor Value
30
4.6
Zone Programming
30
4.7
Swinger Programming
34
4.7.1
Swinger Shutdown Count For Siren
34
4.7.2
Swinger Shutdown Count For Report
34
4.8
Zone Status Programming
34
4.8.1
STAY Mode 2 Automatically Bypass Zones
34
4.8.2
Zone Status Reporting Options
34
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
Quick Reference Guide
2016.11 | 03a | F.01U.298.027
--- PAGE BREAK ---
4
en | Table of contents
Control Panel
4.9
RF Programming
35
4.9.1
RF Supervision Time
35
4.9.2
RADION Anti-Jamming Sensitivity
35
4.9.3
RF Receiver
35
4.9.4
RF Options
35
4.10
Report Programming
35
4.10.1
Arm / Disarm Reporting Options
35
4.10.2
Codepad Reporting Options
36
4.11
System Status Programming
36
4.11.1
Access Denied(Code Retry)
36
4.11.2
System Status Reporting Options
36
4.12
Test Report Programming
36
4.12.1
Test Report Time (Automatic)
36
4.12.2
Test Reporting Options
37
4.13
Output Programming
38
4.14
Time Programming
43
4.14.1
Entry Time 1
43
4.14.2
Entry Time 2
43
4.14.3
Exit Time (AWAY/STAY Modes)
43
4.14.4
Entry Guard Time For STAY Mode
43
4.14.5
Delay Alarm Report Time
43
4.14.6
Sensor Watch Time
43
4.14.7
Codepad Lockout Time
44
4.14.8
Siren Run Time
44
4.14.9
Siren Sound Rate
44
4.14.10
Auto Arming Pre-Alert Time
44
4.14.11
Auto Arming Time
44
4.14.12
Auto Disarming Time
44
4.14.13
Kiss-Off Wait Time
44
4.14.14
Speaker Beep Volume
45
4.15
Options Programming
45
4.15.1
System Options 1
45
4.15.2
System Options 2
45
4.15.3
System Options 3
45
4.15.4
System Options 4
45
4.15.5
System Options 5
46
4.15.6
Consumer Options 1
46
4.15.7
Consumer Options 2
46
4.15.8
Consumer Options 3
46
4.15.9
Partitioning Options 1
46
4.15.10
Partitioning Options 2
47
4.16
Partition Allocations
47
4.16.1
Zone Area Assignment
47
4.16.2
Codepad Assignment
47
4.16.3
User Code Area Assignment
48
4.17
Default Options
48
4.18
RFID Programming
48
4.18.1
Keyfob RFID
48
4.18.2
Zone/Device RFID and RF Zone Option
49
2016.11 | 03a | F.01U.298.027
Quick Reference Guide
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Control Panel
Table of contents | en
5
4.18.3
Repeater RFID
50
4.19
Alphanumeric Codepad Items
50
4.19.1
Home Message
50
4.19.2
Zone Names
50
4.19.3
User Names
51
5
Appendices
52
5.1
Connections for EOL Resistors
52
5.2
Wiring Diagram
53
5.3
Component Overlay
54
5.4
Codepad Address Setting
55
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
Quick Reference Guide
2016.11 | 03a | F.01U.298.027
--- PAGE BREAK ---
6
1
en | Introduction
Control Panel
Introduction
Thank you for choosing the Solution 2000 / 3000 Control Panel for your installation. You will
find this system extremely flexible, reliable, and easy to use. This Quick Reference Guide is
supplied with the system to provide users with enough basic information to wire, configure,
and program the system. Due to the systems many programmable features and options, we
suggest that you obtain the Installation Guide that provides detailed information on system
options, functions, and programming methods.
Throughout this document, the words “control panel ” refer to all control panels covered by
this document ( Solution 2000 / Solution 3000 ).
Features
Solution 2000
Solution 3000
Number of users
32
32
HCT-4 Keyfobs – WE800EV2 required
21
21
RADION RFKF Keyfobs – RADION B810 required
0
32
Number of areas / partitions
2
2
Number of zones / inputs *
4 + 4 (ZD)
8 + 8 (ZD) or
8 + 8 (B228)
Number of Onboard outputs
4
4
Number of Alphanumeric LCD codepads IUI-SOL- 4
4
TEXT or ICON LCD codepads IUI-SOL-ICON
Number of Touchscreen codepads IUI-SOL-4TS
1
1
Number of wireless receiver WE800EV2 *
1
1
Number of RADION receiver B810
0
1
Number of RADION repeater RFRP
0
8
Number of B228 Octo-input Module
0
1
Number of B308 Octo-output Modules
2
2
Number of B426 Conettix Ethernet
2
2
2
2
or IUI-SOL-7TS *
Communication Modules *
Number of B450 Conettix Plug-in Communicator
Interfaces
Tab. 1.1: Control Panel Capacities
* Solution 3000 supports 16 inputs via zone doubling with 8 onboard inputs or 8 onboard
input plus 8 B228 inputs
* Including the touchscreen codepad, up to 4 codepads can be used per system.
* Receiver WE800EV2 and B810 are mutually exclusive.
* A total of 2 B426/B450 can be used per system.
2016.11 | 03a | F.01U.298.027
Quick Reference Guide
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Control Panel
2
Programming | en
7
Programming
The programming options of the system are stored in a non-volatile EPROM. This memory
holds all information during a total power loss and can be changed as many times as required.
The entire programming sequence consists of entering a location number and changing the
data as required.
Use the following methods to program the system:
2.1
–
Codepad
–
A-Link Plus Software
Alphanumeric Codepad Menu Programming
1.
Enable Alphanumeric codepad and confirm that the system is in disarmed status.
2.
To enter Installer’s Programming Menu, enter the installer code (Default = 1234) followed
by the [#] key or [-] key.
3.
Programming: Select the menu and operate according to the menu prompt.
–
Down to the next menu: Press [▼]
–
Up to the previous menu: Press [▲]
–
Enter menu or confirm input : [#]
–
Back to the menu or exit programming item setting: Press [-]; or press and hold [-]
for 3 seconds to exit programming without saving changes.
–
Operate according to the menu prompt. Select menu and enter or select data for
specific programming items to complete programming, step by step. For specific
items and options, refer to Programming Parameters, page 22.
4.
After completing input, press [-] to get back to the previous menu. Complete all
programming input by repeating step 3 and press [-] to get back to the current main
menu level by level.
5.
To use the Alphanumeric codepad in location programming mode (like IUI-SOL-ICON ),
enter programming option [8] [1].
6.
–
In location programming mode enter the programming location then [#].
–
Enter the new data then [*] to save it. Enter [#] to go to the next location.
When [Confirm to Save Parameter Changes?] display, press [#] to save parameter
changes , exit menu programming and reset system.
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
Quick Reference Guide
2016.11 | 03a | F.01U.298.027
--- PAGE BREAK ---
8
en | Programming
Control Panel
Installer
Passcode
2 Inquire
1
Command
2 Day alarm
3 Arm/disarm seq.
4 Report monitor
5 Modem call init.
6 Domestic phone
7 Version display
8 Factory default
1 Fault analysis
2 Event recall
3 System
4 RF diagnose
5 Test
1 RF zone
2 RF Keyfob
3 RF Repeater
1 Horn speaker
2 Bell test
3 Strobe test
4 Walk test
5 Test report
1 Installer code [181]
2
Access
3 Access retry [424]
4 User property
2 User allocate [534]
3 User authority [189]
1 Timer
3
System
1 Entry time1
[466]
2 Entry time2
[468]
[470]
3 Exit time
4 Entry guard time for STAY mode [472]
[476]
5 Sensor watch time
[478]
6 Codepad lockout time
[481]
7 Auto arm pre-alert time
[482]
8 Auto arm time
[486]
9 Auto disarm time
.
2 Codepad
3 Arm/disarm
4 Fault
1 Auto arm in STAY1
[496.3]
2 Single button arm enable
[497.2]
[497.3]
3 Single button disarm enable
4 Disarmed on power up
[495.1]
5 Arm/disarm track on power up
[495.2]
6 Phone remote arm
[177.2]
7 Answer machine bypass on arm [177.3]
1 Ignore AC fail
[494.2]
[494.1]
2 AC fail report wait time
[492.2]
3 Warning device fault monitor
[176.1]
4 Phone line fault indicator
5 Phone line fault alarm on armed [176.2]
6 Phone line fault alarm on disarm [176.3]
7 Lockout phone line fail alarm
[179.2]
8 Onboard tamper trigger alarm
[495.3]
5 Wireless
6 System option 1
1 Home message
2 Button factory default enable
3 Alarm memory reset on disarm
4 STAY indicator for day alarm
5 Digit 3 for codepad duress alarm
6 Siren and strobe output in STAY
7 Speaker beep volume
8 Country code
[2500]
[900]
[497.4]
[496.4]
[498.2]
[498.3]
[491]
[112]
7 System option 2
1 Domestic Dail Fail To Report
2 Installer Arm/Disarm Function
[110.1]
[110.2]
2016.11 | 03a | F.01U.298.027
Quick Reference Guide
[493.1]
1 Silent codepad panic alarm
[493.2]
2 Silent codepad fire alarm
3 Silent codepad medical alarm [493.3]
4 Codepad access denied silent [493.4]
[498.1]
5 Codepad fault beep enable
6 Codepad display off after 60s [497.1]
1 RF receiver
2 Zone RFID and input option
3 Keyfob RFID
4 Repeater RFID
5 RF supervision time
6 RF jam sensitivity
7 RF RECE jam/tamper siren alarm
8 RFKF button4 arm in STAY1
9 RF arm/disarm strobe indicator
[395]
[1820]
[1500]
[1980]
[393]
[394]
[396.2]
[492.4]
[492.3]
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Control Panel
Installer
Passcode
4
Zone
Programming | en
1 Zone config
[267]
2 Zone allocate
[502]
3 Zone name
[2536]
4 Day alarm zone
[265]
5 STAY2 zone
[381]
[266]
6 EOL resistor
9
7 Zone state report [392]
1 Siren swing shutdown count
2 Report swing shutdown count
8 Swing shutdown
9 Zone option
5
Area
1 Codepad area [518]
1 Onboard output
[436]
2 Codepad output [460]
3 Extend output
4 Siren config
7
Comm
[498.4]
1 Silent zone tamper alarm
2 Unseal RF zone that failed monitor [396.3]
[492.1]
3 Bosch Smart Lockout enable
4 Zone pulse count handover enable [494.3]
[494.4]
5 Handover delay in order
1 Arm/disarm all areas once [501.2]
2 Reset siren from any area [500.3]
2 Area option
6
Output
[379]
[380]
[646]
1 Siren run time
[479]
[480]
2 Siren sound rate
3 Siren sound on RF receiver fail [396.1]
1 Receiver config
2 Network config
1 Network module
2 A-Link/RSC password
[81,82]
[83]
3 Report config
4 Comm option 1
1 Ring count
2 Report function enable
3 Exit A-Link connection on alarm
4 System status report option
5 Use bell-103 for FSK format
6 DTMF dial pulse to 1 digit/sec
7 Set up domestic dialing format
8 DTMF timing compensation
5 Comm option 2
8
Parameter
1 Address program
2 Address auto step
3 Adapter
1 Test adapter
2 Read adapter
3 Write adapter
[175]
[177.1]
[180.3]
[427]
[177.4]
[179.1]
[*]
[111]
1 First phone number
2 Second phone number
3 Transmit format
4 Subscriber ID number
5 IP + Port / Email
6 CSVIP user name and password
7 Conettix ACK wait time
8 Conettix heart beat time
9 Conettix anti-replay enable
[0, 40, 1417, 1457]
[16, 56, 1433, 1473]
[33, 73, 1450, 1490]
[34, 74, 1451, 1491]
[1000, 1200, 2060, 2260]
[1100, 1300, 2160, 2360]
[1401, 1405, 1409, 1413]
[1403, 1407, 1411, 1415]
[1400]
1 STAY mode arm/disarm report enable [178.2]
2 Arm/disarm report only if alarmed
[178.1]
3 First disarm/last arm report
[500.1]
[403]
4 Arm/disarm report option
[411]
5 Codepad report option
[428, 434]
6 Test report time and interval
7 Test report only when armed
[496.1]
[496.2]
8 Test report on siren reset
[435]
9 Test report option
1 Telco arming sequence
[113]
2 Telco disarming sequence
[143]
3 Delay alarm report time
[474]
4 Kiss-off wait time
[490]
5 Delay siren until transmit over
[178.3]
6 Extend wait for handshake
[178.4]
7 Upload/download enable
[180.1]
8 Callback phone number request [180.2]
9 Callback phone number
[159]
Figure 2.1: Alphanumeric Codepad Programming Menu
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
Quick Reference Guide
2016.11 | 03a | F.01U.298.027
--- PAGE BREAK ---
10
2.2
en | Programming
Control Panel
ICON LCD Codepad Programming
The system must be disarmed (with no active alarm) to program the system. If there is an
active alarm or the system is armed, enter the code for User 1 (Default = 2580) followed by
the [#] key. (User Code 1 is factory default as the Master Code.)
1.
Enter Installer’s Programming Mode: Enter the installer code (Default = 1234) followed by
the [#] key. Two beeps are heard and both the STAY and AWAY indicators flash
simultaneously to indicate that you entered programming mode. The codepad indicators
display the current data programmed in Location 0000 (first location of the Primary
Telephone Number).
2.
Programming: Move to the required location and program new data into location.
–
To move to another programming location, enter the location number followed by
the [#] key. The data in the new location is displayed using the codepad indicators.
(For example, if you enter [34 #], the system jumps to Location 0034, the beginning
of the Subscriber ID Number For Receiver 1.)
–
To move to the next location, press the [#] key. This steps you to the next location.
The data in the next location is displayed using the codepad indicators. (For
example, if you are currently positioned at Location 0034, pressing [#] key takes you
to Location 0035.)
–
To step back one location, press the [*] key. (For example, if you are currently
positioned at Location 0035, pressing the [*] key returns to Location 0034.)
–
To change data in the current location, enter the new value (0 to 15) followed by the
[*] key. This stores the new data into the location. (For example, if you enter the
value [14*], the Zone 14 indicator display to represent the new data value.)
3.
Exit from Installer’s Programming Mode with saving changes: Enter [960#]. Two beeps
are heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators no longer display. The system returns to the
disarmed state and is ready for use.
Task
Keystrokes
Enter Installer’s Programming Mode
[1234#]
Exit from Installer’s Programming Mode
[958#]
without saving changes
Exit from Installer’s Programming Mode with
[960#]
saving changes and panel reset
Step to next Location
[#]
Step back one Location
[*]
Program new data into Location
[Data][*] (Data = 0 to 15)
Jump to another Location
[Location No.] [#]
Tab. 2.2: Quick Guide to Programming
2016.11 | 03a | F.01U.298.027
Quick Reference Guide
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Control Panel
2.3
Programming | en
11
Programming Option Bits
Use option bits to program any combination of the four different options in one location by
adding the options together. Programming a zero disables all four options.
Example
If at Location 0178 you only want options 1, 2, and 4, add the numbers together and the total
is the number to be programmed. The number to be programmed is 7 (1 + 2 + 4 = 7).
Option
Description
1
Arm/Disarm Reports only if alarmed
2
STAY Mode Arm/Disarm Reports Enable
4
Delay siren until transmission complete
8
Extend handshake wait time from 30 to 60 sec.
Tab. 2.3: Programming Option Bits
2.4
Installer's programming commands
Installer Programming Commands, displayed in below table can only be used when you enter
Installer’s Programming Mode. Enter the command followed by the [#] key.
Command
Description
958
Exit from Installer’s Programming Mode without saving changes
959
Test IUI-SOL-ADAPTER
960
Exit from Installer’s Programming Mode with saving changes and system
reset
961
Reset the control panel to factory defaults
962
Copy the control panel memory to IUI-SOL-ADAPTER
963
Copy IUI-SOL-ADAPTER data to the control panel memory
965
Set up domestic dialing format
966
Enable/disable the automatic stepping of locations during programming
999
Display the control panel firmware version number
Tab. 2.4: Installer’s Programming Commands
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
Quick Reference Guide
2016.11 | 03a | F.01U.298.027
--- PAGE BREAK ---
12
en | Operating Commands
3
Control Panel
Operating Commands
The system supports programmable 1- 4- digit Installer code or User Code to execute the
following operating commands.
No identical User Codes are allowed. User Codes are not permitted to be the same as Installer
codes.
For [Code] + [Number] commands, the code must be 4-digit.
Master/User Function Description
Access
Command
Code+[0][#]
Installer
Arm/Disarm both areas
(U)
Code+[0][#]
at the same time
Code+[1][#]
Function Description
Access
Add or Delete RF
(I)
Command
Change or Delete User
Devices
(U)
Code+[0][#]
Code and RF Keyfob
Add or Delete RF
(I)
Repeaters / Keyfobs
(ICON codepad only)
Code+[2][#]
Change Domestic Phone (U)
Code+[1][#]
Number
Code+[3][#]
Change Telco Arm/
Test Report
(U)
Code+[2][#]
Disarm Sequence
Code+[4][#]
Setting STAY Mode 2
Turn Output On/Off
Change Domestic
(I)
Phone Number
(U)
Code+[3][#]
Zones
Code+[5][#]
Set Days until the First (I)
Change Telco Arm/
(I)
Disarm Sequence
(U)
Code+[4][#]
Setting STAY Mode 2
(I)
Zones
Code+[6][#]
Setting the Date and
(U)
Code+[6][#]
Time
Enable Report Monitor (I)
Mode
Code+[7][#]
Walk Test Mode
(U)
Code+[7][#]
Walk Test Mode
(I)
Code+[8][#]
Event Memory Recall
(U)
Code+[8][#]
Event Memory Recall
(I)
Mode
Mode
Code+[9][#]
Duress Disarm
(U)
Code+[9][#]
AWAY Arm/Disarm
(I)
Code+[*]
STAY 1 Arm / Disarm
(U)
Code+[9][*]
STAY 1 Arm/Disarm
(I)
(U)
Code+[#]
Enter Programming
(I)
Or STAY 2 Disarm
Code+[#]
AWAY Arm / Disarm
Menu
Code+[0][1]
STAY1 Arm/Disarm Area (U)
[*]
1
Code+[-]
Enter Programming
(I)
Menu
Or STAY2 Disarm Area 1
Code+[0][2]
STAY1 Arm/Disarm Area (U)
[*]
2
Or STAY2 Disarm Area 2
Code+[0][1]
AWAY Arm/Disarm Area
[#]
1
Code+[0][2]
AWAY Arm/Disarm Area
[#]
2
2016.11 | 03a | F.01U.298.027
(U)
(U)
Quick Reference Guide
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Control Panel
Operating Commands | en
Master/User Function Description
Access
Command
Code+[-]
Installer
Function Description
Access
Function Description
Access
Hold-down
Arm/Disarm the
(AUI)
[0] 3sec
system in STAY Mode
13
Command
Enter User Menu
(U)
(Alphanumeric codepad
Long Press
Command
only)
[*]+Code+[*] Zone Bypass (Zone
(U)
Isolating)
2
Code+[9][9]
System Reset
(U)
[8][9][#]
Hold-down
Horn Speaker Test
(AUI)
Bell Test
(AUI)
Strobe Test
(AUI)
[1] 3sec
Hold-down
[2] 3sec
Two Keys
Function Description
Access
Command
[1]+[3]
Hold-down
[3] 3sec
Codepad Panic Alarm
(AUI)
Hold-down
Turn Day Alarm On/Off (AUI)
[4] 3sec
[4]+[6]
Codepad Fire Alarm
(AUI)
Hold-down
Fault Analysis Mode
(AUI)
Initiate a Modem Call
(AUI)
[5] 3sec
[7]+[9]
Codepad Medical Alarm
(AUI)
Hold-down
[6] 3sec
[*]+[#]
Codepad Panic Alarm
(AUI)
Hold-down
Reset Latching Output (AUI)
[7] 3sec
Hold-down
Change the Codepad
[8]
Buzzer Tone and
(AUI)
Codepad Area Display
Other
Function Description
Access
Command
[*]+[*]
[-]
Hold-down
Send Test Report
(AUI)
Hold-down
Arm the system in
(AUI)
[#] 3sec
AWAY Mode
Hold-down
Arm/Disarm the
[*] 3sec
system in STAY Mode
[9] 3sec
Zone Bypass
Enter General Menu
(U)
(AUI)
(Alphanumeric codepad
only)
[#]
(AUI)
1
Stop Walk Test/New
Fault Confirm
(AUI)
Hold-down
Exit Menu Without
[-] 3sec
Saving changes
(AUI)
Table 3.5: Operating Commands
Access Key:
A = All have access (no code required)
U = User and Master access (user code required)
I = Installer access (Installer code required)
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
Quick Reference Guide
2016.11 | 03a | F.01U.298.027
--- PAGE BREAK ---
14
en | Operating Commands
Control Panel
Notice!
Below commands examples are operated via IUI-SOL-ICON codepad.
3.1
Add/Delete RF Device (Wireless Zones)
Notice!
The Solution 2000 control panel does not support wireless devices.
Add RF Device
Notice!
Set RF receiver as RADION Receiver B810 (Value 1 in Location 395), and set Zone Source of
RF zones as RF (Location 754 to 769).
1.
Enter the Installer Code, followed by [0] and the [#] key (for example, [12340#]).
2.
Enter the Device Number (1 to 16) you want to add, followed by the [#] key.
3.
Use manual mode or auto-learn mode to configure device RFID.
–
In manual mode, enter the 9-digit RF device ID number, followed by the [#] key.
–
Or press [#] key to switch into auto-learn mode. When icon numbers (1 to 16) flash,
trigger the RF device. The panel learns the RF device ID number and the last digit of
RFID number displays on the codepad. Press [#] key to confirm.
Caution!
!
Press [*] key to switch into auto-learn mode when the Alphanumeric codepad is used.
4.
Enter [#] key to accept the default value for the RF zone input option. Or enter a different
zone input option (0 to 15), followed by the [#] key.
RF zone/device ID numbers and RF zone input option, refer to Zone/Device RFID and RF Zone
Option, page 49.
Zone source programming, refer to Zone Programming, page 30.
Delete RF Device
3.2
1.
Enter the Installer Code, followed by [0] and the [#] key.
2.
Enter the Device Number (1 to 16) you want to delete, followed by the [#] key.
3.
Press the [*] key to delete the RF device.
Add/Delete RF Repeater
Notice!
The Solution 2000 control panel does not support RF repeaters.
Add RF Repeater
Set RF receiver as RADION Receiver.
1.
2016.11 | 03a | F.01U.298.027
Enter the Installer Code, followed by [0] and the [#] key (for example, [12340#]).
Quick Reference Guide
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Control Panel
Operating Commands | en
2.
15
Enter the point ID of RADION Repeater (822 to 829) you want to add (822 = 1,823 = 2,
etc.), followed by the [#] key. Repeater number (1 to 8) displays on the ICON codepad.
3.
Use manual mode or auto-learn mode to configure Repeater RFID.
–
In manual mode, enter the 9-digit RF Repeater ID number, followed by the [#] key.
–
Or press [#] key to switch into auto-learn mode. When icon numbers (1 to 16) flash,
tamper the RF Repeater. The panel learns the RF Repeater ID number and the last
digit of RFID number displays on the codepad. Press [#] key to confirm.
4.
Enter [#] key to confirm the operation, or enter [*] to cancel.
Delete RF Repeater
1.
Enter the Installer Code, followed by [0] and the [#] key.
2.
Enter the point id of RADION Repeater (822 to 829) you want to delete, followed by the
[#] key.
3.
Press the [*] key to delete the RF Repeater.
Example:
To delete existing RF Repeater 8: Enter your installer code and press [0] [#] [8] [2] [9] [#] [*].
3.3
Add/Delete RF Keyfob
Notice!
Use Master Code to add/delete the RF keyfobs.
Add WE800EV2 Keyfob
Notice!
Learn all WE800EV2 keyfobs via WE800EV2 receiver Learn/Delete button before adding the
WE800EV2 keyfobs to the system. Refer WE800EV2 manual for learn/delete fobs.
Notice!
Set RF receiver as WE800EV2 Receiver (Value 2 in Location 395).
1.
Enter the Master Code, followed by [1] and the [#] key (for example, [25801#]).
2.
Enter the WE800EV2 keyfob number (301 to 332) you want to add (301 = keyfob 1, 302 =
keyfob2, etc.), followed by the [#] key. Up to 21 WE800EV2 keyfobs can be added, but
only current keyfob number (1 to 16) displays through zone indicators on the ICON
codepad.
3.
The user number displays on the codepad. Press [#] to continue.
4.
When icon numbers (1 to 16) flash, press button 1 or 2 of the keyfob. The panel learns
the WE800EV2 Keyfob ID number and the last digit of RFID number displays on the
codepad. Press [#] key to confirm.
5.
Enter [#] key to confirm the operation, or press [*] to cancel.
Delete WE800EV2 Keyfob
1.
Enter the Master Code, followed by [1] and the [#] key.
2.
Enter the WE800EV2 keyfob number (301 to 332) you want to delete, followed by the [#]
key.
3.
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
Press the [*] key to delete the WE800EV2 Keyfob.
Quick Reference Guide
2016.11 | 03a | F.01U.298.027
--- PAGE BREAK ---
16
en | Operating Commands
Control Panel
Add RADION Keyfob
Notice!
Set RF receiver as RADION Receiver B810 (Value 1 in Location 395).
1.
Enter the Master Code, followed by [1] and the [#] key (for example, [25801#]).
2.
Enter the RADION keyfob number (301 to 332) you want to add (301 = keyfob 1, 302 =
keyfob2, etc.), followed by the [#] key. Up to 32 RADION keyfobs can be added, but only
current keyfob number (1 to 16) displays through zone indicators on the ICON codepad.
3.
Use manual mode or auto-learn mode to configure RADION keyfob RFID.
–
In manual mode, enter the 9-digit RF device ID number, followed by the [#] key.
–
Or press [#] key to switch into auto-learn mode. When icon numbers (1 to 16) flash,
press button 1 or 2 of the keyfob. The panel learns the RADION Keyfob ID number
and the last digit of RFID number displays on the codepad. Press [#] key to confirm.
4.
Enter [#] key to confirm the operation, or press [*] to cancel.
Delete RADION Keyfob
1.
Enter the Master Code, followed by [1] and the [#] key.
2.
Enter the RADION keyfob number (301 to 332) you want to delete, followed by the [#]
key.
3.
Press the [*] key to delete the RADION Keyfob.
Example:
To delete existing RADION keyfob 1: Enter your Master Code and press [1] [#] [3] [0] [1] [#]
[*].
Notice!
The Solution 2000 control panel does not support RADION keyfobs.
Using an Alphanumeric codepad to add/delete keyfobs
Notice!
Set RF receiver as WE800EV2 or RADION receiver through the menu [3][5][1].
Add the Keyfob
1.
Enter the Master Code, followed by [1] and the [#] key (for example, [25801#]).
2.
Choose a user number then press the [#] key.
3.
Choose keyfob then press the [#] key.
4.
Keyfob RFID displays. The letter "M" appears in the top right corner of the display
indicating it is in manual mode.
–
In manual mode, enter the 9-digit keyfob RFID, followed by the [#] key.
–
Or press [*] key to switch into auto-learn mode. The letter ‘A’ should appear in the
top right corner of the display indicating it is in automatic mode. Press button 1 or 2
of the keyfob. The RFID number displays on the codepad. Press [#] key to confirm.
The RE012EU keyfob can only be configured through auto-learn mode.
5.
Enter [#] key to confirm the operation, or press [*] to cancel.
6.
Press menu [-] to exit.
2016.11 | 03a | F.01U.298.027
Quick Reference Guide
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Control Panel
Operating Commands | en
17
Delete the keyfob
3.4
1.
Enter the Master Code, followed by [1] and the [#] key.
2.
Choose a user number then press the [#] key.
3.
Choose keyfob then press the [#] key.
4.
Press the [*] key to blank the RFID and then [#] to accept.
5.
Press menu [-] to exit.
Set the Number of Days until the First Test Report
1.
Enter the Installer Code, followed by [1] and the [#] key.
2.
Enter the Number of Days (0 to 15) until the first Test Report is sent, followed by the [#]
key.
3.5
Change Domestic Telephone Numbers
Set up receiver transmission format as Domestic.
1.
Enter the Installer Code or Master Code, followed by [2] and the [#] key.
2.
Enter the sequence number of the telephone number, followed by the [#] key. For
example, Telephone Number 1 is [1] [#], Telephone Number 2 is [2] [#], etc.
3.
Enter the digits for the telephone number, followed by the [#] key.
If there is more than one telephone number, repeat Step 1 to Step 3.
3.6
Change the Telco Arm/Disarm Sequence
Telco Arm Sequency (Call Forward On)
1.
Enter the Installer Code or Master Code followed by [3] and the [#] key.
2.
Press [1] followed by the [#] key.
3.
Enter the Call Forward On sequence.
4.
Press the [#] key to exit.
Telco Disarm Sequency (Call Forward Off)
3.7
1.
Enter the Installer Code or Master Code followed by [3] and the [#] key.
2.
Press [2] followed by the [#] key.
3.
Enter the Call Forward Off sequence.
4.
Press the [#] key to exit.
Set STAY Mode 2 Bypass Zones
1.
Enter the Installer Code or Master Code, followed by [4] and the [#] key.
2.
Enter the Zone Number you want the system to automatically isolate, followed by the [*]
key. Repeat if more than one zone must be automatically isolated when armed in STAY
Mode 2.
3.
3.8
Press the [#] key to exit.
Report Monitor Mode (Toggle On/Off)
To turn Report Monitor Mode on:
1.
Enter the Installer Code, followed by [6] and the [#] key. Three beeps sound.
2.
Press and hold the [9] key until two beeps are heard to send a test report.
To Turn Report Monitor Mode off:
Enter the Installer Code, followed by [6] and the [#] key. Two beeps sound.
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
Quick Reference Guide
2016.11 | 03a | F.01U.298.027
--- PAGE BREAK ---
18
en | Operating Commands
Control Panel
Zone LED for
Zone LED for
Zone LED for
Zone LED for
Report Event
Receiver 1
Receiver 2
Receiver 3
Receiver 4
1
9
Telephone Line Seized
2
10
Dialing Telephone
Number / Network
Connect
3
11
Handshake Received
4
12
Data Being Sent
5
13
Kiss-Off Received
None
None
Released Telephone
Line / Idle
Tab. 3.6: Report Monitor Mode Indications
Zone LED for
Zone LED for
Report Event
Receiver 1
Receiver 2
1
9
Telephone Line Seized
2
10
Dialing Telephone Number / Network Connect
3
11
Handshake Received
4
12
Data Being Sent
5
13
Kiss-Off Received
None
None
Released Telephone Line / Idle
Notice!
You must exit from Report Monitor Mode to resume normal operations.
3.9
3.10
Walk Test Mode
1.
Enter the Installer Code or Master Code, followed by [7] and the [#] key.
2.
Test each zone as required.
3.
Press the [#] key to exit.
Event Memory Recall
Enter the Installer Code or Master Code, followed by [8] and the [#] key.
The last 256 events are displayed in reverse order (for example, most recent to least recent).
3.11
Fault Analysis Mode
If a fault occurs, the FAULT or MAINS indicators flash and the codepad beeps once every min.
If the AC MAINS supply fails, the MAINS indicator flashes until the AC MAINS supply is
restored. Pressing the [#] button once acknowledges the fault and stops the codepad from
beeping once every min.
2016.11 | 03a | F.01U.298.027
Quick Reference Guide
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Control Panel
Operating Commands | en
19
How to Determine the Type of System Fault
To determine which system fault occurred, enter Fault Analysis Mode by following the steps
below:
1.
Hold down the [5] key until two beeps sound. The STAY and AWAY indicators flash in
unison. A zone indicator displays the type of fault that occurred (for example, Zone 1 =
System Fault). Refer to Fault Indicators, page 19 for the list of possible system faults.
2.
To further determine the type of fault condition, press the key that corresponds to the
zone indicator displayed. For example, if Zone 1 displayed System Fault, press the [1] key
to display which system fault occurred.
3.
To exit Fault Analysis Mode and return to the disarmed state, press the [#] key. The
FAULT indicator continues to display and the codepad stops sounding once a min.
Fault Indicators
Zone
Fault Description
Indicator
1
System Fault
Press
Zone
Button
Indicator
Fault Condition
1
1
Battery Fail
2
Date and Time
3
RF Receiver Fail
4
Output 1 to 3 Fail
5
Telephone Line Fail
7
Power Supply Fail
8
Onboard Tamper
9 to 16
RF Repeaters 1 to 8 Fail (Solution
2000 N.A.)
2
RF Low Battery
2
1 to 16
Zones 1 to 16 RF Low Battery
(Solution 2000
N.A.)
3
Zone Tamper Alarm
3
1 to 16
Zones 1 to 16 Tamper Alarm
4
Sensor Watch Fault
4
1 to 16
Zones 1 to 16 Sensor Watch Fail
5
RF Sensor Missing
5
1 to 16
Zones 1 to 16 RF Sensor Watch Fail
1
Receiver 1 Fail
2
Receiver 2 Fail
3
Receiver 3 Fail
4
Receiver 4 Fail
5
IP Module 1 Fail
6
IP Module 2 Fail
1 to 2
Output Expanders 1 to 2 Fail
3 to 6
Codepads 1 to 4 Fail
1 to 16
Keyfobs 1 to 16 Low Battery
(Solution 2000
N.A.)
6
7
Communication Fail 6
Output and
7
Codepad Fail
8
Keyfob Low Battery
8
Tab. 3.7: Fault Indicators
Fault Descriptions
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
Quick Reference Guide
2016.11 | 03a | F.01U.298.027
--- PAGE BREAK ---
20
en | Operating Commands
Control Panel
1 System Fault
A system fault only displays when any of the following faults occur. After entering Fault
Analysis Mode, press the [1] key to determine which of the following faults occurred.
Low Battery Fault – A low battery fault registers when the system detects a low capacity
back-up battery. The system automatically performs a battery test every four hours and every
time you arm the system.
Date and Time – The date and time fault registers every time the system is powered down.
RF Receiver Fail – This fault registers when the RF wireless receiver unit detects RF jamming,
the RF wireless receiver is disconnected from the control panel or failed, or the RF receiver’s
cover tamper switch is activated.
Output 1 to 3 Fail – This fault registers when the system detects output 1 – 3 as warning
device (Horn Speaker, Siren Running, Strobe) is disconnected or short. This fault clears once
all outputs are reconnected. Your installer must program the system for this feature to
operate.
Telephone Line Fail – A telephone line fault registers when the system detects that the
telephone line is disconnected from the control panel. Your installer must program the system
for this feature to operate.
Power Supply Fail – This fault occurs when AUX power supplies fails, +12V power fails, or
SDI2 Bus power fails. Contact your installer as soon as this fault displays.
Onboard Tamper – This fault occurs when the system detects the control panel is tampered.
RF Repeater Fail – The RF repeater 1 to 8 fault registers once the system detects that the
wireless repeater is disconnected or the repeater tamper is triggered.
2 RF Low Battery
This fault occurs when any of the RF wireless devices report a low battery condition to the
control panel. While in Fault Analysis Mode, press the [2] key until two beeps sound. This
displays the zone reporting the RF Low Battery fault.
3 Zone Tamper Fail
This fault occurs when any zone with tamper becomes an open or short circuit. Press the [3]
key until two beeps sound. This displays the zone reporting the tamper fail fault.
4 Sensor Watch Fault
A sensor watch fault registers because one or more detection devices failed to detect any
movement during the disarmed state for the time period programmed by your installer. The
fault clears once the zone in question detects movement and resets. Press the [4] key until
two beeps sound. This displays the zone reporting the sensor watch fault.
5 RF Sensor Missing
An RF sensor missing fault registers because one or more RF detection devices fails to
communicate to the RF radio receiver for the time period programmed by your installer. The
fault clears once the RF device in question successfully transmits to the RF radio receiver.
Press the [5] key until two beeps sound. This displays the RF detection device reporting the
RF sensor watch fault.
6 Communication Fail
A communication fail registers when the control panel fails to communicate with the receiving
party (such as a monitoring company, mobile phone). The communication fault clears once the
control panel successfully reports to the receiving party.
A communication fail also registers when network module is disconnected or tampered.
To determine which receiver or module failed to communicate, press the [6] key.
7 Output and Codepad Fail
The output fault registers when the output expander B308 is disconnected or tampered.
2016.11 | 03a | F.01U.298.027
Quick Reference Guide
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Control Panel
Operating Commands | en
21
The codepad fault registers when any codepad is tampered or disconnected from the control
panel.
To determine which fault occurred, press the [7] key.
8 Keyfob Low Battery
This fault occurs when any of the RF keyfobs report a low battery condition to the control
panel. To determine which keyfob failed, press the [8] key. Only keyfob 1 to 16 faults display
on the codepad through zone indicator 1 to 16.
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
Quick Reference Guide
2016.11 | 03a | F.01U.298.027
--- PAGE BREAK ---
22
en | Programming Parameters
4
Control Panel
Programming Parameters
Notice!
Column New is for installer to record new programming parameters.
4.1
Communication Programming
4.1.1
Receiver 1
Item
Location
Option
Default
Phone Number 1
0000 - 0015
15 = Telephone termination
15
Phone Number 2
0016 - 0031
15 = Telephone termination
15
Transmission Format
0033
0 = Not used
1
New
1 = Contact ID
4 = Domestic
5 = Conettix IP
6 = SIA Fast
7 = SIA Slow
8 = CSVIP
9 = Email
Subscriber ID Number
0034 - 0039
IP + Port / Email
1000 - 1099
CSVIP User Name and
1100 - 1163
0
Password
Conettix Anti-replay
1400
1 = Anti-replay for Receiver 1 Enable
15
2 = Anti-replay for Receiver 2 Enable
4 = Anti-replay for Receiver 3 Enable
8 = Anti-replay for Receiver 4 Enable
Conettix ACK Wait Time
1401 – 1402
0 – 99 = 0 – 99 sec.
5
Conettix Heart Beat Time 1403 – 1404
1 – 99 = 1 – 99 min.
1
4.1.2
Receiver 2
Item
Location
Option
Default
Phone Number 1
0040 - 0055
15 = Telephone termination
15
Phone Number 2
0056 - 0071
15 = Telephone termination
15
2016.11 | 03a | F.01U.298.027
Quick Reference Guide
New
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Control Panel
Programming Parameters | en
Item
Location
Option
Default
Transmission Format
0073
0 = Not used
1
23
New
1 = Contact ID
4 = Domestic
5 = Conettix IP
6 = SIA Fast
7 = SIA Slow
8 = CSVIP
9 = Email
Subscriber ID Number
0074 - 0079
IP + Port / Email
1200 - 1299
CSVIP User Name and
1300 - 1363
0
Password
Conettix Anti-replay
1400
1 = Anti-replay for Receiver 1 Enable
15
2 = Anti-replay for Receiver 2 Enable
4 = Anti-replay for Receiver 3 Enable
8 = Anti-replay for Receiver 4 Enable
Conettix ACK Wait Time
1405 – 1406
0 – 99 = 0 – 99 sec.
5
Conettix Heart Beat Time 1407 – 1408
1 – 99 = 1 – 99 min.
1
4.1.3
Receiver 3
Item
Location
Option
Default
Phone Number 1
1417 - 1432
15 = Telephone termination
15
Phone Number 2
1433 - 1448
15 = Telephone termination
15
Transmission Format
1450
0 = Not used
1
New
1 = Contact ID
4 = Domestic
5 = Conettix IP
6 = SIA Fast
7 = SIA Slow
8 = CSVIP
9 = Email
Subscriber ID Number
1451 - 1456
IP + Port / Email
2060 - 2159
CSVIP User Name and
2160 - 2223
0
Password
Conettix Anti-replay
1400
1 = Anti-replay for Receiver 1 Enable
15
2 = Anti-replay for Receiver 2 Enable
4 = Anti-replay for Receiver 3 Enable
8 = Anti-replay for Receiver 4 Enable
Conettix ACK Wait Time
1409 – 1410
0 – 99 = 0 – 99 sec.
5
Conettix Heart Beat Time 1411 – 1412
1 – 99 = 1 – 99 min.
1
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
Quick Reference Guide
2016.11 | 03a | F.01U.298.027
--- PAGE BREAK ---
24
en | Programming Parameters
4.1.4
Control Panel
Receiver 4
Item
Location
Option
Default
Phone Number 1
1457 - 1472
15 = Telephone termination
15
Phone Number 2
1473 - 1488
15 = Telephone termination
15
Transmission Format
1490
0 = Not used
1
New
1 = Contact ID
4 = Domestic
5 = Conettix IP
6 = SIA Fast
7 = SIA Slow
8 = CSVIP
9 = Email
Subscriber ID Number
1491 - 1496
IP + Port / Email
2260 - 2359
CSVIP User Name and
2360 - 2423
0
Password
Conettix Anti-replay
1400
1 = Anti-replay for Receiver 1 Enable
15
2 = Anti-replay for Receiver 2 Enable
4 = Anti-replay for Receiver 3 Enable
8 = Anti-replay for Receiver 4 Enable
Conettix ACK Wait Time
1413 – 1414
0 – 99 = 0 – 99 sec.
5
Conettix Heart Beat Time 1415 – 1416
1 – 99 = 1 – 99 min.
1
Notice!
Recommend to use A-Link Plus Software or Alphanumeric codepad IUI-SOL-TEXT to enter IP
items. Or enter IP items via ASCII Character Codes with ICON codepad IUI-SOL-ICON .
Program IP items with A-Link Plus Software or Alphanumeric codepad
1.
Select Comm -> Receiver Config -> Transmit Format, select CSVIP for Receiver 1 or
Receiver 2.
2.
Select Comm -> Receiver Config -> Subscriber ID Number, enter Subscriber ID Number.
3.
Select Comm -> Network Config , select module 1 or 2 as Use, do not configure.
4.
Select Comm -> Receiver Config -> IP + Port / Email, enter IP and the Port, for example,
192.168.226.17:12000.
5.
Select Comm -> Receiver Config -> CSVIP User Name And Password, enter CSVIP User
Name and Password:
–
Both user name and password, enter as user name with comma and password with
comma, for example, USER 1, 2580,.
–
Only user name, enter as user name with two commas, for example, USER 1,,.
–
Only password, enter as comma, followed by password with comma, for example, ,
2580,.
–
No user name and password, only enter two commas.
For A-Link Plus, enter up to 32 case sensitive alphanumeric characters for CSVIP User Name
and Password directly through keyboard.
For Alphanumeric codepad, enter sensitive alphanumeric characters as below table.
2016.11 | 03a | F.01U.298.027
Quick Reference Guide
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Control Panel
Programming Parameters | en
Codepad Key Characters / Function
25
Codepad key Characters / Function
▲
Step back former character
6
[ m ], [ n ], [ o ], [ 6 ]
_
Exit item setting
7
[ p ], [ q ], [ r ], [ s ], [ 7 ]
▼
Move to next character
8
[ t ], [ u ], [ v ], [ 8 ]
1
[ . ], [ @ ], [ : ], [ _ ], [ 1 ]
9
[ w ], [ x ], [ y ], [ z ], [ 9 ]
2
[ a ], [ b ], [ c ], [ 2 ]
*
Case shift
3
[ d ], [ e ], [ f ], [ 3 ]
0
[ Space ], [ , ], [ / ], [ ? ], [ 0 ]
4
[ g ], [ h ], [ i ], [ 4 ]
#
Confirm item setting
5
[ j ], [ k ], [ l ], [ 5 ]
Tab. 4.8: Alphanumeric on Alphanumeric codepad
Program Email with A-Link Plus Software
Notice!
For the network module B426, Panel Programming Enable shall be defaulted Yes in the
Maintenance Page of the web-based configuration menus.
Notice!
When A- Link Plus is used to configure the network module, network module parameters will
be replaced by parameters configured in A - Link Plus.
Network module parameters, such as IP address and port, must be entered into A-Link Plus
as exactly as they are in the module; Web Access Enable must be reset as Enable in A-Link
Plus if access to network module via the web interface is still needed.
1.
Select Comm -> Receiver Config -> Transmit Format, select Email.
2.
Select Comm -> Receiver Config -> Subscriber ID Number, enter Email title with consist
of 6 numbers.
3.
Selec Comm -> Network Config, select module 1 or 2 as Use and configure.
4.
Select Comm -> Receiver Config -> IP + Port / Email, enter email address of the
recipient.
5.
Select Network module programming -> Module 1 (or 2) -> Mail Information, enter email
information. Take the sender as test @ 163.com for example, :
4.1.5
–
Partial mail server name / url : smtp.163.com
–
Mail server port: 465
–
Partial ail server user name: test @ 163.com
–
Mail server password: (enter current password)
–
Security options: Encrypted
External Network Module
Item
Location
Option
Default
External Network Module 0081
0 = Not used
0
1
1 = Use, do not configure
External Network Module 0082
2 = Use and configure
New
0
2
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
Quick Reference Guide
2016.11 | 03a | F.01U.298.027
--- PAGE BREAK ---
26
en | Programming Parameters
4.1.6
Control Panel
Password for A-Link Plus/RSC Connection
Item
Location
Password for A-Link
0083 - 0092
Option
Default
New
0
Plus/RSC Connection
4.1.7
DTMF Timing Compensation
Item
Location
Option
Default
DTMF Timing
0111
0 = Disable
0
Compensation
4.1.8
New
1 – 9 = Timing compensation
Country Codes
Item
Location
Option
Default
Country codes
0112
0 = Australia
0
New
1 = China
4.1.9
Telco Arming Sequence (Call Forward On)
Item
Location
Option
Default
Telco Arming Sequence
0113 - 0142
15 = Telephone termination
15
New
(Call Forward On)
4.1.10
Telco Disarm Sequence (Call Forward Off)
Item
Location
Option
Default
Telco Disarm Sequence
0143 - 0158
15 = Telephone termination
15
New
(Call Forward Off)
4.1.11
Call Back Telephone Number
Item
Location
Option
Default
Call Back Telephone
0159 - 0174
15 = Telephone termination
15
New
Number
4.1.12
Ring Count
Item
Location
Option
Default
Ring Count
0175
0 = Panel does not answer
8
New
1 - 13 = Number of rings until panel
answers
14 = Answering machine bypass 2
15 = Answering machine bypass 1
2016.11 | 03a | F.01U.298.027
Quick Reference Guide
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Control Panel
4.1.13
Programming Parameters | en
27
Telephone Line Fail Options
Item
Location
Option
Default
Telephone Line Fail
0176
1 = Display FAULT Indicator when
0
Options
New
telephone line fails
2 = Sound alarm when system is armed
4 = Sound alarm when system is
disarmed
8 = Reserved
Notice!
Option 2 and 4 must be used in conjunction with Option 1 (for example, program 1,3,5, or 7).
4.1.14
Communication Options 1
Item
Location
Option
Default
Communication Options
0177
1 = Reporting functions allowed
9
1
New
2 = Remote arming by telephone allowed
4 = Answering machine bypass only when
armed
8 = Use Bell 103 for FSK format (Disabled
= CCITT V21)
4.1.15
Communication Options 2
Item
Location
Option
Default
Communication Options
0178
1 = Arm/Disarm Reports only if alarmed
0
2
New
2 = STAY Mode Arm/Disarm Reports
Enable
4 = Delay siren until transmission
complete
8 = Extend handshake wait time from 30
to 60 sec.
4.1.16
Communication Options 3
Item
Location
Option
Communication Options
0179
1 = Set DTMF dialing pluses to 1 digit/sec 2
3
Default
New
2 = Lockout telephone line fail alarm
4 = Reserved
8 = Reserved
4.1.17
A-Link Plus Options
Item
Location
Option
Default
A-Link Plus Options
0180
1 = Enable upload/download using A-Link
3
New
2 = Enable A-Link callback
4 = Terminate A-Link connection on alarm
8 = Reserved
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
Quick Reference Guide
2016.11 | 03a | F.01U.298.027
--- PAGE BREAK ---
28
en | Programming Parameters
Control Panel
4.2
Installer Code
Item
Location
Installer Code
0181
1
0182
2
0183
3
0184
4
4.3
Item
Option
Default
New
User Code Programming
Location
Default
New
Authority Level
Default
New
Location
User #01
0185
2
0186
5
0189
10
0187
8
0188
0
User #02
0190 - 0193
15
0194
2
User #03
0195 - 0198
15
0199
2
User #04
0200 - 0203
15
0204
2
User #05
0205 - 0208
15
0209
2
User #06
0210 - 0213
15
0214
2
User #07
0215 - 0218
15
0219
2
User #08
0220
0
0224
3
0221 - 0223
15
User #09
0225 - 0228
15
0229
2
User #10
0230 - 0233
15
0234
2
User #11
0235 - 0238
15
0239
2
User #12
0240 - 0243
15
0244
2
User #13
0245 - 0248
15
0249
2
User #14
0250 - 0253
15
0254
2
User #15
0255 - 0258
15
0259
2
User #16
0260 - 0263
15
0264
2
User #17
0566 - 0569
15
0570
2
User #18
0571 - 0574
15
0575
2
User #19
0576 - 0579
15
0580
2
User #20
0581 - 0584
15
0585
2
User #21
0586 - 0589
15
0590
2
User #22
0591 - 0594
15
0595
2
User #23
0596 - 0599
15
0600
2
2016.11 | 03a | F.01U.298.027
Quick Reference Guide
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Control Panel
Item
Programming Parameters | en
Location
Default
New
Authority Level
Default
29
New
Location
User #24
0601 -0604
15
0605
2
User #25
0606 - 0609
15
0610
2
User #26
0611 - 0614
15
0615
2
User #27
0616 - 0619
15
0620
2
User #28
0621 - 0624
15
0625
2
User #29
0626 - 0629
15
0630
2
User #30
0631 - 0634
15
0635
2
User #31
0636 - 0639
15
0640
2
User #32
0641 - 0644
15
0645
2
Authority Levels
Description
0
Arm/Disarm
1
Arm Only
2
Arm/Disarm and Arm/Disarm Reports
3
Arm Only and Arm Reports
4
Arm/Disarm and Code Required to Isolate
6
Arm/Disarm and Arm/Disarm Reports and Code Required to Isolate
8
Master Code and Arm/Disarm
10
Master Code and Arm/Disarm and Arm/Disarm Reports
12
Master Code and Arm/Disarm and Code Required to Isolate
14
Master Code and Arm/Disarm and Code Required to Isolate and Arm/Disarm
Reports
Table 4.9: Authority Levels
4.4
Day Alarm Zones
Item
Location
Option
Default
Day Alarm Zones
0265
1 = Zone 1
0
New
2 = Zone 2
4 = Zone 3
8 = Zone 4
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
Quick Reference Guide
2016.11 | 03a | F.01U.298.027
--- PAGE BREAK ---
30
en | Programming Parameters
4.5
Control Panel
EOL Resistor Value
Item
Location
Option
EOL Resistor
0266
0 = No EOL
8 = 6k8
1 = 1k
9 = 10k
2 = 1k5
10 = 12k
3 = 2k2
11 = 22k
4 = 3k3
12 = Normal open
5 = 3k9
13 = Reserved
6 = 4k7
14 = Split EOL (3k3/6k8
7 = 5k6
with tamper 1k)
Value
Default
New
15
15 = Split EOL (3k3/6k8)
4.6
Zone Programming
Item
Location
Default
Zone #01
New
Item
Location
Default
Zone #02
Zone Type
0267
2
Zone Type
0274
1
Zone Pulse Count
0268
0
Zone Pulse Count
0275
0
Zone Pulse Count Time 0269
0
Zone Pulse Count Time 0276
0
Zone Options 1
0270
1
Zone Options 1
0277
1
Zone Options 2
0271
14
Zone Options 2
0278
14
Reserved
0272
Reserved
0279
Zone Report Options
0273
Zone Report Options
0280
1
1
Zone #03
Zone #04
Zone Type
0281
1
Zone Type
0288
1
Zone Pulse Count
0282
0
Zone Pulse Count
0289
0
Zone Pulse Count Time 0283
0
Zone Pulse Count Time 0290
0
Zone Options 1
0284
1
Zone Options 1
0291
1
Zone Options 2
0285
14
Zone Options 2
0292
14
Reserved
0286
Reserved
0293
Zone Report Options
0287
Zone Report Options
0294
1
1
Zone #05
Zone #06
Zone Type
0295
0
Zone Type
0302
0
Zone Pulse Count
0296
0
Zone Pulse Count
0303
0
Zone Pulse Count Time 0297
0
Zone Pulse Count Time 0304
0
Zone Options 1
0298
1
Zone Options 1
0305
1
Zone Options 2
0299
14
Zone Options 2
0306
14
Reserved
0300
Reserved
0307
2016.11 | 03a | F.01U.298.027
New
Quick Reference Guide
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Control Panel
Programming Parameters | en
Item
Location
Default
Zone Report Options
0301
1
Zone #07
New
Item
Location
Default
Zone Report Options
0308
1
New
Zone #08
Zone Type
0309
0
Zone Type
0316
9
Zone Pulse Count
0310
0
Zone Pulse Count
0317
0
Zone Pulse Count Time 0311
0
Zone Pulse Count Time 0318
0
Zone Options 1
0312
1
Zone Options 1
0319
1
Zone Options 2
0313
14
Zone Options 2
0320
12
Reserved
0314
Reserved
0321
Zone Report Options
0315
Zone Report Options
0322
1
1
Zone #09
Zone #10
Zone Type
0323
15
Zone Type
0330
15
Zone Pulse Count
0324
0
Zone Pulse Count
0331
0
Zone Pulse Count Time 0325
0
Zone Pulse Count Time 0332
0
Zone Options 1
0326
1
Zone Options 1
0333
1
Zone Options 2
0327
14
Zone Options 2
0334
14
Reserved
0328
Reserved
0335
Zone Report Options
0329
Zone Report Options
0336
1
1
Zone #11
Zone #12
Zone Type
0337
15
Zone Type
0344
15
Zone Pulse Count
0338
0
Zone Pulse Count
0345
0
Zone Pulse Count Time 0339
0
Zone Pulse Count Time 0346
0
Zone Options 1
0340
1
Zone Options 1
0347
1
Zone Options 2
0341
14
Zone Options 2
0348
14
Reserved
0342
Reserved
0349
Zone Report Options
0343
Zone Report Options
0350
1
1
Zone #13
Zone #14
Zone Type
0351
15
Zone Type
0358
15
Zone Pulse Count
0352
0
Zone Pulse Count
0359
0
Zone Pulse Count Time 0353
0
Zone Pulse Count Time 0360
0
Zone Options 1
0354
1
Zone Options 1
0361
1
Zone Options 2
0355
14
Zone Options 2
0362
14
Reserved
0356
Reserved
0363
Zone Report Options
0357
Zone Report Options
0364
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
31
1
Quick Reference Guide
1
2016.11 | 03a | F.01U.298.027
--- PAGE BREAK ---
32
en | Programming Parameters
Item
Location
Control Panel
Default
New
Zone #15
Item
Location
Default
New
Zone #16
Zone Type
0365
15
Zone Type
0372
15
Zone Pulse Count
0366
0
Zone Pulse Count
0373
0
Zone Pulse Count Time 0367
0
Zone Pulse Count Time 0374
0
Zone Options 1
0368
1
Zone Options 1
0375
1
Zone Options 2
0369
14
Zone Options 2
0376
14
Reserved
0370
Reserved
0377
Zone Report Options
0371
1
Zone Report Options
0378
1
Item
Location
Default
Item
Location
Default
Zone 1 Source
0754
0
Zone 2 Source
0755
0
Zone 3 Source
0756
0
Zone 4 Source
0757
0
Zone 5 Source
0758
0
Zone 6 Source
0759
0
Zone 7 Source
0760
0
Zone 8 Source
0761
0
Zone 9 Source
0762
0
Zone 10 Source
0763
0
Zone 11 Source
0764
0
Zone 12 Source
0765
0
Zone 13 Source
0766
0
Zone 14 Source
0767
0
Zone 15 Source
0768
0
Zone 16 Source
0769
0
New
New
For zone item options, refer to below Zone Item Options.
Item
Option
Zone Type
0 = Instant
8 = 24-Hour Hold-up
1 = Handover
9 = 24-Hour Tamper
2 = Delay-1
10 = Reserved
3 = Delay-2
11 = Keyswitch
4 = Reserved
12 = 24-Hour Burglary
5 = Reserved
13 = 24-Hour Fire
6 = 24-Hour Medical
14 = Chime Only
7 = 24-Hour Panic
15 = Not used
Zone Pulse Count
Use the pulse count to program how many pulses (0 to 15) need to
be registered within the pulse count time to activate an alarm.
Zone Pulse Count Time
2016.11 | 03a | F.01U.298.027
20 ms Loop Response Time
150 ms Loop Response Time
0 = 0.5 sec.
8 = 20 sec.
1 = 1 sec.
9 = 30 sec.
2 = 2 sec.
10 = 40 sec.
3 = 3 sec.
11 = 50 sec.
4 = 4 sec.
12 = 60 sec.
5 = 5 sec.
13 = 90 sec.
6 = 10 sec.
14 = 120 sec.
7 = 15 sec.
15 = 200 sec.
Quick Reference Guide
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Control Panel
Programming Parameters | en
Item
Option
Zone Options 1
1 = Lockout siren/report
33
2 = Delay alarm report
4 = Silent alarm
8 = Sensor watch
Zone Options 2
1 = Isolated in STAY Mode 1
2 = Zone isolation allowed
4 = Forced arming allowed
8 = Zone Restore Report allowed
Zone Report Options
0 = No zone reports allowed
1 = Report to Receiver 1
2 = Report to Receiver 2
3 = Report to Receiver 3
4 = Report to Receiver 4
5 = Report to Receiver 1,2,3,4
6 = Report to Receiver 1 (2,3,4 backup)
7 = Report to Receiver 1 (2 backup) and Receiver 3 (4 backup)
Keyswitch Zone Options
0 = Latching arm and disarm in AWAY Mode
1 = Latching arm in AWAY Mode
2 = Latching disarm from AWAY Mode or STAY Mode
4 = Latching arm and disarm in STAY Mode 1
5 = Latching arm in STAY Mode 1
6 = Latching disarm from STAY Mode
8 = Momentary arm and disarm in AWAY Mode
9 = Momentary arm in AWAY Mode
10 = Momentary disarm from AWAY Mode or STAY Mode
12 = Momentary arm and disarm in STAY Mode 1
13 = Momentary arm in STAY Mode 1
14 = Momentary disarm from STAY Mode
Zone Source
0 = Onboard
1 = RF
2 = B228
Table 4.10: Zone Item Options
The keyswitch zone options replace Zone Options 1 only for the zones that were programmed
to operate as a keyswitch zone.
Notice!
Solution 2000 supports onboard inputs only.
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
Quick Reference Guide
2016.11 | 03a | F.01U.298.027
--- PAGE BREAK ---
34
en | Programming Parameters
Control Panel
4.7
Swinger Programming
4.7.1
Swinger Shutdown Count For Siren
Item
Option
Default
Swinger Shutdown Count 0379
1 – 15 = Number of times siren operates
3
For Siren
until lockout
4.7.2
Location
New
Swinger Shutdown Count For Report
Item
Location
Option
Default
Swinger Shutdown Count 0380
1 – 15 = Number of times report operates 6
For Report
until lockout
4.8
Zone Status Programming
4.8.1
STAY Mode 2 Automatically Bypass Zones
Item
Location
Option
STAY Mode 2
0381
1 = Zone 1
4 = Zone 3
2 = Zone 2
8 = Zone 4
1 = Zone 5
4 = Zone 7
2 = Zone 6
8 = Zone 8
1 = Zone 9
4 = Zone 11
2 = Zone 10
8 = Zone 12
1 = Zone 13
4 = Zone 15
2 = Zone 14
8 = Zone 16
Automatically Bypass
Zones
0382
0383
0384
Default
New
New
0
0
0
0
Notice!
Solution 2000 supports zone 1 – 8 only.
4.8.2
Zone Status Reporting Options
Item
Location
Option
Default
Zone Status Reporting
0392
0 = No Zone status reports allowed
1
Options
New
1 = Report to Receiver 1
2 = Report to Receiver 2
3 = Report to Receiver 3
4 = Report to Receiver 4
5 = Report to Receiver 1,2,3,4
6 = Report to Receiver 1 (2,3,4 backup)
7 = Report to Receiver 1 (2 backup) and
Receiver 3 (4 backup)
2016.11 | 03a | F.01U.298.027
Quick Reference Guide
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Control Panel
Programming Parameters | en
4.9
RF Programming
4.9.1
RF Supervision Time
Item
Location
Option
RF Supervision Time
0393
Default
0 = Disable
5 = 24 hours
(Only for Solution
2 = 2 hours
6 = 48 hours
3000 )
3 = 4 hours
7 = 72 hours
35
New
0
4 = 12 hours
4.9.2
RADION Anti-Jamming Sensitivity
Item
Location
Option
Default
RADION Anti-Jamming Sensitivity
0394
0 = Most Sensitive
12
(Only for Solution 3000 )
New
15 = Least Sensitive
4.9.3
RF Receiver
Item
Location
Option
Default
RF Receiver
0395
0 = Not used
0
New
1 = Use RADION receiver B810
2 = Use WE800EV2
4.9.4
RF Options
Item
Location
Option
Default
RF Options
0396
1 = Siren Sound On RF
0
(Only for Solution 3000 )
New
Receiver Fail
2 = RF Receiver Jam/Tamper
Siren Alarm
4 = Unseal Zone That Fail
Monitor
4.10
Report Programming
4.10.1
Arm / Disarm Reporting Options
Item
Location
Option
Default
Arm / Disarm
0403
0 = No Arm / Disarm Reports allowed
1
Reporting Options
New
1 = Report to Receiver 1
2 = Report to Receiver 2
3 = Report to Receiver 3
4 = Report to Receiver 4
5 = Report to Receiver 1,2,3,4
6 = Report to Receiver 1 (2,3,4 backup)
7 = Report to Receiver 1 (2 backup) and
Receiver 3 (4 backup)
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
Quick Reference Guide
2016.11 | 03a | F.01U.298.027
--- PAGE BREAK ---
36
en | Programming Parameters
4.10.2
Control Panel
Codepad Reporting Options
Item
Location
Option
Default
Codepad Reporting
0411
0 = No Codepad Alarm Reports allowed
1
Options
New
1 = Report to Receiver 1
2 = Report to Receiver 2
3 = Report to Receiver 3
4 = Report to Receiver 4
5 = Report to Receiver 1,2,3,4
6 = Report to Receiver 1 (2,3,4 backup)
7 = Report to Receiver 1 (2 backup) and
Receiver 3 (4 backup)
4.11
System Status Programming
4.11.1
Access Denied(Code Retry)
Item
Location
Option
Default
Code retry limit
0424
0 = Unlimited
6
New
1 – 15 = Error code attempts
4.11.2
System Status Reporting Options
Item
Location
Option
Default
System Status
0427
0 = No report required
1
Reporting Options
New
1 = Report to Receiver 1
2 = Report to Receiver 2
3 = Report to Receiver 3
4 = Report to Receiver 4
5 = Report to Receiver 1,2,3,4
6 = Report to Receiver 1 (2,3,4 backup)
7 = Report to Receiver 1 (2 backup) and
Receiver 3 (4 backup)
4.12
Test Report Programming
4.12.1
Test Report Time (Automatic)
Item
Location
Option
Hour of day (tens digit)
0428
0
Hour of day (units digit)
0429
0
Minute of day (tens digit)
0430
0
Minute of day (units digit)
0431
0
Repeat interval in days
0434
0 = Disable
Default
New
0
1 – 15 = 1 – 15 days
2016.11 | 03a | F.01U.298.027
Quick Reference Guide
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Control Panel
4.12.2
Programming Parameters | en
37
Test Reporting Options
Item
Location
Test Reporting Options 0435
Option
Default
0 = No report required
1
New
1 = Report to Receiver 1
2 = Report to Receiver 2
3 = Report to Receiver 3
4 = Report to Receiver 4
5 = Report to Receiver 1,2,3,4
6 = Report to Receiver 1 (2,3,4 backup)
7 = Report to Receiver 1 (2 backup) and
Receiver 3 (4 backup)
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
Quick Reference Guide
2016.11 | 03a | F.01U.298.027
--- PAGE BREAK ---
38
en | Programming Parameters
4.13
Control Panel
Output Programming
Item
Location
Default
New
Output 1 (Default = Horn Speaker)
Item
Location
Default
New
Output 2 (Default = Fire Alarm With Verification)
Event Code
0436
1
Event Code
0442
2
Event Code
0437
14
Event Code
0443
7
Polarity
0438
0
Polarity
0444
10
Time Base
0439
0
Time Base
0445
2
Time Base Multiplier
0440
0
Time Base Multiplier
0446
1
Time Base Multiplier
0441
0
Time Base Multiplier
0447
5
Output 3 (Default = Strobe – Reset After 8 hrs.)
Relay Output (Default = Sirens Running)
Event Code
0448
2
Event Code
0454
1
Event Code
0449
0
Event Code
0455
15
Polarity
0450
6
Polarity
0456
1
Time Base
0451
4
Time Base
0457
0
Time Base Multiplier
0542
0
Time Base Multiplier
0458
0
Time Base Multiplier
0453
8
Time Base Multiplier
0459
0
Codepad Buzzer (Default = Entry/Exit Warning and
Day Alarm)
Event Code
0460
0
Event Code
0461
13
Polarity
0462
2
Time Base
0463
1
Time Base Multiplier
0464
0
Time Base Multiplier
0465
9
2016.11 | 03a | F.01U.298.027
Quick Reference Guide
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Control Panel
Item
Programming Parameters | en
Location
Default
B308 Output 1
New
Item
Location
Default
New
B308 Output 2
Event Code
0646
0
Event Code
0652
0
Event Code
0647
0
Event Code
0653
0
Polarity
0648
0
Polarity
0654
0
Time Base
0649
0
Time Base
0655
0
Time Base Multiplier
0650
0
Time Base Multiplier
0656
0
Time Base Multiplier
0651
0
Time Base Multiplier
0657
0
B308 Output 3
B308 Output 4
Event Code
0658
0
Event Code
0664
0
Event Code
0659
0
Event Code
0665
0
Polarity
0660
0
Polarity
0666
0
Time Base
0661
0
Time Base
0667
0
Time Base Multiplier
0662
0
Time Base Multiplier
0668
0
Time Base Multiplier
0663
0
Time Base Multiplier
0669
0
B308 Output 5
B308 Output 6
Event Code
0670
0
Event Code
0676
0
Event Code
0671
0
Event Code
0677
0
Polarity
0672
0
Polarity
0678
0
Time Base
0673
0
Time Base
0679
0
Time Base Multiplier
0674
0
Time Base Multiplier
0680
0
Time Base Multiplier
0675
0
Time Base Multiplier
0681
0
B308 Output 7
B308 Output 8
Event Code
0682
0
Event Code
0688
0
Event Code
0683
0
Event Code
0689
0
Polarity
0684
0
Polarity
0690
0
Time Base
0685
0
Time Base
0691
0
Time Base Multiplier
0686
0
Time Base Multiplier
0692
0
Time Base Multiplier
0687
0
Time Base Multiplier
0693
0
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
39
Quick Reference Guide
2016.11 | 03a | F.01U.298.027
--- PAGE BREAK ---
40
en | Programming Parameters
Item
Location
Control Panel
Default
New
B308 Output 9
Item
Location
Default
B308 Output 10
Event Code
0694
0
Event Code
0700
0
Event Code
0695
0
Event Code
0701
0
Polarity
0696
0
Polarity
0702
0
Time Base
0697
0
Time Base
0703
0
Time Base Multiplier
0698
0
Time Base Multiplier
0704
0
Time Base Multiplier
0699
0
Time Base Multiplier
0705
0
B308 Output 11
B308 Output 12
Event Code
0706
0
Event Code
0712
0
Event Code
0707
0
Event Code
0713
0
Polarity
0708
0
Polarity
0714
0
Time Base
0709
0
Time Base
0715
0
Time Base Multiplier
0710
0
Time Base Multiplier
0716
0
Time Base Multiplier
0711
0
Time Base Multiplier
0717
0
B308 Output 13
B308 Output 14
Event Code
0718
0
Event Code
0724
0
Event Code
0719
0
Event Code
0725
0
Polarity
0720
0
Polarity
0726
0
Time Base
0721
0
Time Base
0727
0
Time Base Multiplier
0722
0
Time Base Multiplier
0728
0
Time Base Multiplier
0723
0
Time Base Multiplier
0729
0
B308 Output 15
B308 Output 16
Event Code
0730
0
Event Code
0736
0
Event Code
0731
0
Event Code
0737
0
Polarity
0732
0
Polarity
0738
0
Time Base
0733
0
Time Base
0739
0
Time Base Multiplier
0734
0
Time Base Multiplier
0740
0
Time Base Multiplier
0735
0
Time Base Multiplier
0741
0
Item
Location
Default
Item
Location
Default
B228 Output 1
New
New
B228 Output 2
Output Mode
0770
0
Output Mode
0771
0
Event Code
0742
0
Event Code
0748
0
Event Code
0743
0
Event Code
0749
0
2016.11 | 03a | F.01U.298.027
New
Quick Reference Guide
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Control Panel
Programming Parameters | en
Item
Location
Default
Polarity
0744
Time Base
New
Item
Location
Default
0
Polarity
0750
0
0745
0
Time Base
0751
0
Time Base Multiplier
0746
0
Time Base Multiplier
0752
0
Time Base Multiplier
0747
0
Time Base Multiplier
0753
0
41
New
For output item options, refer to below Output Item Options.
Item
Option
B228 Output Mode
0 = Not used
2 = Switched negative
1 = Aux power
4 = Open collector
0 0 = Reserved
1 0 = Day alarm enabled
0 1 = System armed
1 1 = Telephone line fail
0 2 = System disarmed
1 2 = Kiss-off received
0 3 = Armed in STAY mode
1 3 = AUX Power Supply fail
0 4 = Armed in AWAY mode
1 4 = AC fail
0 5 = Pre-arming alert
1 5 = Low battery
0 6 = Exit Warning (all zones sealed) and
1 6 = Output 1 fail
entry warning
1 7 = Sensor watch alarm
0 7 = Exit Warning
1 8 = Codepad medical alarm
0 8 = Exit Warning finished
1 9 = Codepad fire alarm
0 9 = Kiss-off after end of Exit Time
1 10 = Codepad panic alarm
0 10 = Reserved
1 11 = Codepad duress alarm
0 11 = Entry warning
1 12 = Access denied (code retries)
0 12 = Entry warning and day alarm resetting
1 13 = Reserved
0 13 = Exit warning and entry warning and
1 14 = Horn speaker (output 1 only)
day alarm resetting
1 15 = Siren running
Event Code
0 14 = Day alarm resetting
0 15 = Day alarm latching
Event Code
2 0 = Strobe
3 0 = Communications fail
2 1 = Silent alarm
3 1 = Report disabled
2 2 = Alarm in STAY mode
3 2 = Report active (on-line)
2 3 = Alarm in AWAY mode
3 3 = Ring detect
2 4 = System fault
3 4 = Codepad/Keyfob panic
2 5 = Fire alarm (resetting)
3 5 = Mimic zone 1
2 6 = Fire alarm (latching)
3 6 = Mimic zone 2
2 7 = Fire alarm (verification)
3 7 = Mimic zone 3
2 8 = Remote control 1
3 8 = Mimic zone 4
2 9 = Remote control 2
3 9 = Mimic zone 5
2 10 = Remote control 3
3 10 = Mimic zone 6
2 11 = Radio control output 1
3 11 = Mimic zone 7
2 12 = Radio control output 2
3 12 = Mimic zone 8
2 13 = Radio control output 1- not in AWAY
3 13 = Mimic zone 9
Mode
3 14 = Mimic zone 10
2 14 = Radio control output 2- not in AWAY
3 15 = Mimic zone 11
Mode
2 15 = Communications fail after 3 attempts
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
Quick Reference Guide
2016.11 | 03a | F.01U.298.027
--- PAGE BREAK ---
42
en | Programming Parameters
Control Panel
Item
Option
Event Code
4 0 = Mimic zone 12
5 0 = Reserved
4 1 = Mimic zone 13
5 1 = Reserved
4 2 = Mimic zone 14
5 2 = Area 1 in alarm
4 3 = Mimic zone 15
5 3 = Area 2 in alarm
4 4 = Mimic zone 16
5 4 = Reserved
4 5 = Chime
5 5 = Reserved
4 6 = Zone not sealed
5 6 = Area 1 armed
4 7 = Zone not sealed after Exit Time
5 7 = Area 2 armed
4 8 = Reserved
5 8 = Reserved
4 9 = AC MAINS cycle (60 Hz or 50 Hz)
5 9 = Reserved
4 10 = Area 1 – zone unsealed
5 10 = Area 1 disarmed
4 11 = Area 2 – zone unsealed
5 11 = Area 2 disarmed
4 12 = Reserved
5 12 = Reserved
4 13 = Reserved
5 13 = Reserved
4 14 = Reserved
5 14 = Any areas armed
4 15 = Reserved
5 15 = Any areas disarmed
6 0 = Reserved
6 11 = Remote control 13
6 1 = Reserved
6 12 = Remote control 14
6 2 = Remote control 4
6 13 = Remote control 15
6 3 = Remote control 5
6 14 = Remote control 16
6 4 = Remote control 6
6 15 = Remote control 17
6 5 = Remote control 7
7 0 = Remote control 18
6 6 = Remote control 8
7 1 = Remote control 19
6 7 = Remote control 9
7 2 = Remote control 20
6 8 = Remote control 10
7 3 = Remote control 21
6 9 = Remote control 11
7 4 = Remote control 22
Event Code
6 10 = Remote control 12
Polarity (Modes)
0 = Output not used
8 = Normally low, going open
1 = Normally open, going low
9 = Normally low, pulsing open
2 = Normally open, pulsing low
10 = Normally low, one shot open
3 = Normally open, one shot low
11 = Normally low, one shot open
4 = Normally open, one shot low (reactivate)
(reactivate)
5 = Normally open, one shot low (can reset)
12 = Normally low, one shot open (can
6 = Normally open, one shot low (alarm)
reset)
7 = Normally open, latching low
13 = Normally low, one shot open (alarm)
14 = Normally low, latching open
Time Base
0 = Reserved
3 = 1 min.
1 = 200 ms
4 = 1 hr.
2 = 1 sec.
Time Base Multiplier
Enter a value between 00 and 99.
Table 4.11: Output Item Options
* One Shot Mode
When you program the output polarity as one shot, the time base is multiplied by the time
base multiplier. (For example, if the time base = 2 and the multiplier = 05, the output operates
for 5 sec.)
2016.11 | 03a | F.01U.298.027
Quick Reference Guide
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Control Panel
Programming Parameters | en
43
*Pulsing Mode
When you program the output polarity as pulsing, the time base becomes the ON time and the
multiplier becomes the OFF time. The OFF time is the time base x the multiplier. (For
example, if you want the output to pulse 1 sec. ON and 5 sec. OFF, you would program time
base as 2 and the multiplier as 05.)
Notice!
When event code Remote control 1 – 20 is selected, polarity mode shall be programmed as
time-independent option (including 1 = Normally open, going low, or 7, or 8, and 14).
4.14
Time Programming
4.14.1
Entry Time 1
Item
Location
Increments of 1 sec. (0 to 15 sec.)
0466
4
Increments of 16 sec. (0 to 240 sec.)
0467
1
4.14.2
Option
Default
Entry Time 2
Item
Location
Increments of 1 sec. (0 to 15 sec.)
0468
8
Increments of 16 sec. (0 to 240 sec.)
0469
2
4.14.3
Option
Default
Location
Increments of 1 sec. (0 to 15 sec.)
0470
12
Increments of 16 sec. (0 to 240 sec.)
0471
3
Option
Default
Location
Increments of 1 sec. (0 to 15 sec.)
0472
0
Increments of 1 6sec. (0 to 240 sec.)
0473
0
Option
Default
New
Delay Alarm Report Time
Item
Location
Increments of 1 sec. (0 to 15 sec.)
0474
0
Increments of 16 sec. (0 to 240 sec.)
0475
0
4.14.6
New
Entry Guard Time For STAY Mode
Item
4.14.5
New
Exit Time (AWAY/STAY Modes)
Item
4.14.4
New
Option
Default
New
Sensor Watch Time
Item
Location
Increments of days (tens digit)
0476
0
Increments of days (units digit)
0477
0
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
Option
Quick Reference Guide
Default
New
2016.11 | 03a | F.01U.298.027
--- PAGE BREAK ---
44
en | Programming Parameters
4.14.7
Control Panel
Codepad Lockout Time
Item
Location
Codepad Lockout Time 0478
Option
Default
0 = No lockout
0
New
1 – 15 = Lockout time 10 – 150 sec.
(Increments of 10 sec.)
4.14.8
Siren Run Time
Item
Location
Option
Default
Siren Run Time
0479
0 = No Siren time
5
New
1 – 15 = Siren time 1 – 15 min. (increments of
1 min.)
4.14.9
Siren Sound Rate
Item
Location
Option
Default
Siren Sound Rate
0480
0 = Slowest frequency
7
New
15 = Fastest frequency
4.14.10
Auto Arming Pre-Alert Time
Item
Location
Option
Default
Auto Arming Pre-Alert Time
0481
0 = No alert time
1
New
1 – 15 = Alert time 5 – 75 min.
(increments of 5 min.)
4.14.11
Auto Arming Time
Item
Location
Hour of the day (tens digit)
0482
0
Hour of the day (units digit)
0483
0
Minute of the day (tens digit)
0484
0
Minute of the day (units digit)
0485
0
4.14.12
Option
Default
Auto Disarming Time
Item
Location
Hour of the day (tens digit)
0486
0
Hour of the day (units digit)
0487
0
Minute of the day (tens digit)
0488
0
Minute of the day (units digit)
0489
0
4.14.13
New
Option
Default
New
Kiss-Off Wait Time
Item
Location
Increments of 500 ms (500 ms to 8
0490
Option
Default
New
3
sec.)
2016.11 | 03a | F.01U.298.027
Quick Reference Guide
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Control Panel
4.14.14
Programming Parameters | en
45
Speaker Beep Volume
Item
Location
Option
Default
Speaker Beep Volume
0491
0 = No Beeps
13
New
15 = Loudest Beeps
4.15
Options Programming
4.15.1
System Options 1
Item
Location
Option
Default
System Options 1
0492
1 = Bosch Security Systems smart lockout
1
New
allowed
2 = Warning device fault monitor
4 = Strobe indication for radio arm/disarm
8 = Assign button 4 on keyfob to operate STAY
Mode 1
Notice!
Option 2 is available only when the warning device (such as horn speaker) is connected to
any of the output 1 – 3.
4.15.2
System Options 2
Item
Location
Option
Default
System Options 2
0493
1 = Codepad panic to be silent
0
New
2 = Codepad fire to be silent
4 = Codepad medical to be silent
8 = Access denied (code retries) to be silent
4.15.3
System Options 3
Item
Location
Option
Default
System Options 3
0494
1 = AC fail after 1 hr. (Disabled = after 2 min.)
8
New
2 = Ignore AC fail
4 = Pulse count handover allowed
8 = Handover delay to be sequential
4.15.4
System Options 4
Item
Location
Option
Default
System Options 4
0495
1 = Panel to power up disarmed (if power
6
New
reset)
2 = Arm/disarm tracking on power up
4 = Onboard tamper trigger alarm
8 = Reserved
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
Quick Reference Guide
2016.11 | 03a | F.01U.298.027
--- PAGE BREAK ---
46
en | Programming Parameters
4.15.5
Control Panel
System Options 5
Item
Location
Option
Default
System Options 5
0110
1 = Domestic Dial Fail to Report
0
New
2 = Installer Arm/Disarm Function
4 = Reserved
8 = Reserved
4.15.6
Consumer Options 1
Item
Location
Option
Default
Consumer Options 1
0496
1 = Test reports only when armed
0
New
2 = Test report after siren reset
4 = Auto arm in STAY Mode 1
8 = STAY indicator to display day alarm status
4.15.7
Consumer Options 2
Item
Location
Option
Default
Consumer Options 2
0497
1 = Codepad displays extinguish after 60 sec.
2
New
2 = Single button arming allowed (AWAY/STAY
Modes 1 and 2)
4 = Single button disarming allowed (STAY
Modes 1 and 2)
8 = Alarm memory reset on disarm
4.15.8
Consumer Options 3
Item
Location
Option
Default
Consumer Options 3
0498
1 = Codepad fault beeps allowed
5
New
2 = Use digit 3 for codepad duress alarm
(instead of digit 9)
4 = Alarms activate sirens and strobe outputs
in STAY Modes 1 and 2
8 = Zone tamper alarms to be silent
4.15.9
Partitioning Options 1
Item
Location
Option
Default
Partitioning Options 1
0500
1 = First to Disarm/Last to Arm reporting
0
New
2 = Reserved
4 = Reset sirens from any area allowed
8 = Reserved
2016.11 | 03a | F.01U.298.027
Quick Reference Guide
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Control Panel
4.15.10
Programming Parameters | en
47
Partitioning Options 2
Item
Location
Option
Default
Partitioning Options 2
0501
1 = Reserved
0
New
2 = User codes allowed to arm/disarm both
areas at same time (Code [0][#])
4 = Reserved
8 = Reserved
4.16
Partition Allocations
4.16.1
Zone Area Assignment
Item
Location
Default
Zone 1 Area
0502
Zone 3 Area
New
Item
Location
Default
1
Zone 2 Area
0503
1
0504
1
Zone 4 Area
0505
1
Zone 5 Area
0506
1
Zone 6 Area
0507
1
Zone 7 Area
0508
1
Zone 8 Area
0509
1
Zone 9 Area
0510
1
Zone 10 Area
0511
1
Zone 11 Area
0512
1
Zone 12 Area
0513
1
Zone 13 Area
0514
1
Zone 14 Area
0515
1
Zone 15 Area
0516
1
Zone 16 Area
0517
1
New
Option
0 = Zone area not assigned
2 = Zone assigned to Area 2
1 = Zone assigned to Area 1
3 = Zone assigned to both Area 1 and Area 2
Notice!
Solution 2000 supports zone 1 – 8 only.
4.16.2
Codepad Assignment
Item
Location
Default
Codepad 1 Area
0518
Codepad 3 Area
0520
New
Item
Location
Default
1
Codepad 2 Area
0519
0
0
Codepad 4 Area
0521
0
New
Option
0 = Codepad area not assigned
2 = Codepad assigned to Area 2
1 = Codepad assigned to Area 1
3 = Codepad assigned to both Area 1 and Area 2
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
Quick Reference Guide
2016.11 | 03a | F.01U.298.027
--- PAGE BREAK ---
48
en | Programming Parameters
Control Panel
4.16.3
User Code Area Assignment
Item
Location
Default
User Code 1
0534
User Code 3
New
Item
Location
Default
1
User Code 2
0535
1
0536
1
User Code 4
0537
1
User Code 5
0538
1
User Code 6
0539
1
User Code 7
0540
1
User Code 8
0541
1
User Code 9
0542
1
User Code 10
0543
1
User Code 11
0544
1
User Code 12
0545
1
User Code 13
0546
1
User Code 14
0547
1
User Code 15
0548
1
User Code 16
0549
1
User Code 17
0550
1
User Code 18
0551
1
User Code 19
0552
1
User Code 20
0553
1
User Code 21
0554
1
User Code 22
0555
1
User Code 23
0556
1
User Code 24
0557
1
User Code 25
0558
1
User Code 26
0559
1
User Code 27
0560
1
User Code 28
0561
1
User Code 29
0562
1
User Code 30
0563
1
User Code 31
0564
1
User Code 32
0565
1
New
Option
0 = User code not assigned
2 = User code assigned to Area 2
1 = User code assigned to Area 1
3 = User code assigned to both Area 1 and Area 2
4.17
Default Options
Item
Location
Button Default Options 0900
Option
Default
0 = Button Factory Default Enable
0
New
15 = Button Factory Default Disabled
4.18
RFID Programming
4.18.1
Keyfob RFID
Item
Location
Default
Keyfob #01
1500 - 1507
Keyfob #03
Item
Location
Default
0
Keyfob #02
1510 - 1517
0
1520 - 1527
0
Keyfob #04
1530 - 1537
0
Keyfob #05
1540 - 1547
0
Keyfob #06
1550 - 1557
0
Keyfob #07
1560 - 1567
0
Keyfob #08
1570 - 1577
0
Keyfob #09
1580 - 1587
0
Keyfob #10
1590 - 1597
0
2016.11 | 03a | F.01U.298.027
New
Quick Reference Guide
New
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Control Panel
Programming Parameters | en
Item
Location
Default
Keyfob #11
1600 - 1607
Keyfob #13
Item
Location
Default
0
Keyfob #12
1610 - 1617
0
1620 - 1627
0
Keyfob #14
1630 - 1637
0
Keyfob #15
1640 - 1647
0
Keyfob #16
1650 - 1657
0
Keyfob #17
1660 - 1667
0
Keyfob #18
1670 - 1677
0
Keyfob #19
1680 - 1687
0
Keyfob #20
1690 - 1697
0
Keyfob #21
1700 - 1707
0
Keyfob #22
1710 - 1717
0
Keyfob #23
1720 - 1727
0
Keyfob #24
1730 - 1737
0
Keyfob #25
1740 - 1747
0
Keyfob #26
1750 - 1757
0
Keyfob #27
1760 - 1767
0
Keyfob #28
1770 - 1777
0
Keyfob #29
1780 - 1787
0
Keyfob #30
1790 - 1797
0
Keyfob #31
1800 - 1807
0
Keyfob #32
1810 - 1817
0
4.18.2
Item
New
49
New
Zone/Device RFID and RF Zone Option
Location
Default
New
RF Zone Option
Default
New
Location
RF Zone #01
1820 - 1827
0
1828
0
RF Zone #02
1830 - 1837
0
1838
0
RF Zone #03
1840 - 1847
0
1848
0
RF Zone #04
1850 -1857
0
1858
0
RF Zone #05
1860 -1867
0
1868
0
RF Zone #06
1870 - 1877
0
1878
0
RF Zone #07
1880 - 1887
0
1888
0
RF Zone #08
1890 - 1897
0
1898
0
RF Zone #09
1900 - 1907
0
1908
0
RF Zone #10
1910 - 1917
0
1918
0
RF Zone #11
1920 - 1927
0
1928
0
RF Zone #12
1930 - 1937
0
1938
0
RF Zone #13
1940 - 1947
0
1948
0
RF Zone #14
1950 - 1957
0
1958
0
RF Zone #15
1960 - 1967
0
1968
0
RF Zone #16
1970 - 1977
0
1978
0
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
Quick Reference Guide
2016.11 | 03a | F.01U.298.027
--- PAGE BREAK ---
50
en | Programming Parameters
Control Panel
Item
Option
RF Zone Option
0 = All Used
1 = Input 1
4 = Input 3
2 = Input 2
8 = Input 4
Table 4.12: RF Zone Options
Notice!
Only Solution 3000 supports zone/device RFID and repeater RFID.
4.18.3
Repeater RFID
Item
Location
Default
Repeater #01
1980 - 1987
Repeater #03
New
Item
Location
Default
0
Repeater #02
1990 - 1997
0
2000 - 2007
0
Repeater #04
2010 - 2017
0
Repeater #05
2020 - 2027
0
Repeater #06
2030 - 2037
0
Repeater #07
2040 - 2047
0
Repeater #08
2050 - 2057
0
4.19
Alphanumeric Codepad Items
New
Notice!
Refer Program IP items with A-Link Plus Software or Alphanumeric codepad, page 24 to enter
alphanumeric with codepad IUI-SOL-TEXT .
4.19.1
Home Message
Item
Location
Default
Home Message
2500 - 2535
00000
4.19.2
Zone Names
Item
Location
Zone 1 Name
Item
Location
2536 - 2559
Zone 9 Name
2728 - 2751
Zone 2 Name
2560 - 2583
Zone 10 Name
2752 - 2775
Zone 3 Name
2584 - 2607
Zone 11 Name
2776 - 2799
Zone 4 Name
2608 - 2631
Zone 12 Name
2800 - 2823
Zone 5 Name
2632 - 2655
Zone 13 Name
2824 - 2847
Zone 6 Name
2656 - 2679
Zone 14 Name
2848 - 2871
Zone 7 Name
2680 - 2703
Zone 15 Name
2872 - 2895
Zone 8 Name
2704 - 2727
Zone 16 Name
2896 - 2919
2016.11 | 03a | F.01U.298.027
New
New
Quick Reference Guide
New
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Control Panel
Programming Parameters | en
4.19.3
User Names
Item
Location
User 1 Name
Item
Location
2920 - 2943
User 17 Name
3304 - 3327
User 2 Name
2944 - 2967
User 18 Name
3328 - 3351
User 3 Name
2968 - 2991
User 19 Name
3352 - 3375
User 4 Name
2992 - 3015
User 20 Name
3376 - 3399
User 5 Name
3016 - 3039
User 21 Name
3400 - 3423
User 6 Name
3040 - 3063
User 22 Name
3424 - 3447
User 7 Name
3064 - 3087
User 23 Name
3448 - 3471
User 8 Name
3088 - 3111
User 24 Name
3472 - 3495
User 9 Name
3112 - 3135
User 25 Name
3496 - 3519
User 10 Name
3136 - 3159
User 16 Name
3520 - 3543
User 11 Name
3160 - 3183
User 27 Name
3544 - 3567
User 12 Name
3184 - 3207
User 28 Name
3568 - 3591
User 13 Name
3208 - 3231
User 29 Name
3592 - 3615
User 14 Name
3232 - 3255
User 30 Name
3616 - 3639
User 15 Name
3256 - 3279
User 31 Name
3640 - 3663
User 16 Name
3280 - 3303
User 32 Name
3664 - 3687
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
New
Quick Reference Guide
51
New
2016.11 | 03a | F.01U.298.027
--- PAGE BREAK ---
en | Appendices
Control Panel
5
Appendices
5.1
Connections for EOL Resistors
2
Z1 COM Z2
1
Z1 COM Z2
3
Zone 1
(3K3 EOL)
NC
NC
NC
Zone 1
NC
Zone 5 (Solution 2000)
Zone 9 (Solution 3000)
(6K8 EOL)
NO Zone 1
Zone 5 (Solution 2000)
Zone 9 (Solution 3000)
(6K8 EOL)
4
NC
NC TAMPER
1K0
1K0
Z1 COM Z2
TAMPER
Zone 1
Z1 COM Z2
NC
Z1 COM Z2
52
NC
Zone 1
(3K3 EOL)
Callout - Description
1 – Zone without resistor (Location 266 = 0 (No EOL), Location 266 = 12 (Normal open))
2 – Single Zone input (Location 266 = 1k, 1k5, 2k2, 3k3, 3k9, 4k7, 5k6, 6k8, 10k, 12k, 22k)
3 – Double Zone with tamper (Location 266 = 14 (Split EOL3K3 / 6K8 with tamper))
4 – Double Zone input (Location 266 = 15 (Split EOL 3k3 / 6k8))
2016.11 | 03a | F.01U.298.027
Quick Reference Guide
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Control Panel
5.2
Appendices | en
53
Wiring Diagram
3K3
6K8
3K3
6K8
Max: 900mA
PIR
I ∑ < 1100mA
3K3
6K8
3K3
6K8
Siren
GND
c
+12V
AUX : < 900mA
Slow flash: Normal state
On: Trouble state
Off: Trouble state
R
Y
G
B
Smoke detector
R
RR
R
Y
Y
Y
G
G
GG
B
B
B
_ 1,2,3 < 900mA
Bosch SDI2 Bus
Battery
12V 7Ah
18VAC@1.33A
TF008-B
Figure 5.1: Wiring Diagram
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
Quick Reference Guide
2016.11 | 03a | F.01U.298.027
--- PAGE BREAK ---
54
5.3
en | Appendices
Control Panel
Component Overlay
1
2
3
4
5
5
6
12
13
GND
c
+12V
7
11
8
14
9
10
Figure 5.2: Component Overlay
2016.11 | 03a | F.01U.298.027
Quick Reference Guide
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Control Panel
Appendices | en
Callout --Description
Callout --Description
1 – Socket for telecom lead connect
8 – Bosch SDI2 Bus
2 – Receiver interface connection
9 – Battery input
3 – Tamper switch
10 – Plug pack input (Bosch TF008)
4 – Zone 5-8 termination strip
11 - Bosch SDI2 Bus
55
( Zone 5 – 8 and Zone 13 – 16 for Solution
3000 )
5 – AUX power
12 – Relay contact select (Select output AUX
as shown or output GND)
6 – Zone 1-4 termination strip
13 – LED indicator
( Zone 1 - 4 and Zone 5 – 8 for Solution
2000 ;
Zone 1 – 4 and Zone 9 – 12 for Solution
3000 )
7 – Output termination strip
14 – Default button
Tab. 5.13: Callout description
5.4
Codepad Address Setting
DIP Switch Codepad
DIP Switch Number
Address
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
On
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
2
Off
On
Off
Off
Off
On
3
On
On
Off
Off
Off
On
4
Off
Off
On
Off
Off
On
Tab. 5.14: Codepad DIP switch address setting
DIP switch address settings are only for IUI-SOL-TEXT or IUI-SOL-ICON codepad.
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
Quick Reference Guide
2016.11 | 03a | F.01U.298.027
--- PAGE BREAK ---
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH
130 Perinton Parkway
Robert-Bosch-Ring 5
Fairport, NY 14450
85630 Grasbrunn
USA
Germany
www.boschsecurity.com
© Bosch Security Systems, Inc., 2016
--- PAGE BREAK ---
=== PDF TEXT: bosch_intruder_Bosch-2000-or-3000-installation-manual-Copy.txt ===
Control Panel
Solution 2000 / 3000
en
Installation Guide
--- PAGE BREAK ---
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Control Panel
Table of Contents | en
3
Table of contents
1
Introduction
9
1.1
About documentation
9
1.2
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. product manufacturing dates
9
2
System Overview
11
2.1
Product Matrix
11
2.2
Configuration and Parts
11
2.2.1
Control panel capacities
11
2.2.2
Parts list
12
2.2.3
Order separately
12
3
Installation workflow
13
4
Accessories
14
4.1
Codepads
14
4.1.1
Installer Menu
16
4.2
WE800EV2 receiver
18
4.3
HCT-4 keyfob
19
4.4
RADION receiver B810
19
4.5
RADION keyfobs
19
4.6
RADION repeater
20
4.7
RADION detectors
20
4.8
B308 Octo-output Module
20
4.9
B426/B426-M Conettix Ethernet Communication Modules
21
4.10
B450/B450-M Conettix Plug-in Communicator Interfaces
21
4.11
A-Link Plus Software
22
4.12
Remote Security Control
23
4.13
Remote Security Control Plus
23
4.14
Keyswitches
23
4.15
TF008 Plug Pack (TF008-B)
24
4.15.1
Install the transformer
24
4.16
DLA
24
5
Configuration
25
5.1
Installer Commands
25
5.1.1
Command 958 - Exit from Installer's Programming Mode without saving changes
25
5.1.2
Command 959 - Test IUI-SOL-ADAPTER
25
5.1.3
Command 960 - Save and exit from Installer's Programming Mode
26
5.1.4
Command 961 - Reset the Control Panel to Factory Default Settings
26
5.1.5
Command 962 - Copy the Control Panel Memory to IUI-SOL-ADAPTER
26
5.1.6
Command 963 - Copy IUI-SOL-ADAPTER data to the Control Panel
27
5.1.7
Command 965 - Set up Domestic Dialing Format
27
5.1.8
Command 966 - Enable/Disable the Automatic Stepping of Locations
28
5.1.9
Command 999 - Display the Control Panel Firmware Version Number
28
5.2
Disable Factory Defaults
29
6
System Operations
31
6.1
Arming the system in AWAY Mode
31
6.2
Disarming the system from AWAY Mode
31
6.3
Arming the System in STAY Mode 1
32
6.4
Disarming the system from STAY Mode 1
33
6.5
Arming the system from STAY Mode 2
33
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
Installation Guide
2017.10 | 03 | F.01U.298.026
--- PAGE BREAK ---
4
en | Table of Contents
Control Panel
6.6
Disarming the system from STAY Mode 2
34
6.7
Codepad duress alarm
34
6.8
Codepad panic alarm
34
6.9
Codepad fire alarm
35
6.10
Codepad medical alarm
35
6.11
Isolating zones
35
6.11.1
Standard isolating
35
6.11.2
Code to isolate
36
6.12
Fault analysis mode
36
6.13
Fault descriptions
37
6.14
Inquire cloud status
39
7
System Functions
41
7.1
Installer Code Functions
41
7.1.1
Add or Delete RF Wireless Devices
41
7.1.2
Add/Delete RF Repeater
42
7.1.3
Add/Delete RF Keyfob
43
7.1.4
Set the Number of Days until the First Test Report
45
7.1.5
Change Domestic Phone Numbers
45
7.1.6
Change Telco Arm/Disarm Sequence
46
7.1.7
Setting STAY Mode 2 Bypass Zones
47
7.1.8
Turning Report Monitor Mode On and Off
48
7.1.9
Walk Test Mode
49
7.1.10
Event Memory Recall Mode
49
7.1.11
AWAY/STAY 1 Arm/Disarm
50
7.2
Master Code Functions
51
7.2.1
Arm or Disarm both Areas at the Same Time
51
7.2.2
Arm or Disarm Single Area
51
7.2.3
Changing and Deleting User Codes
52
7.2.4
Adding Remote Radio User Codes
53
7.2.5
Deleting User/Radio Codes
53
7.2.6
Change Domestic Phone Numbers
54
7.2.7
Change Telco Arm/Disarm Sequence
54
7.2.8
Setting STAY Mode 2 Bypass Zone
54
7.2.9
Turning Outputs On and Off
54
7.2.10
Setting the Date and Time
55
7.2.11
Walk Test Mode
55
7.2.12
Event Memory Recall Mode
55
7.2.13
System reset
55
7.3
User Code Functions
55
7.3.1
Arm or Disarm both Areas at the Same Time
55
7.3.2
Arm or Disarm Single Area
56
7.4
Hold-Down Functions
56
7.4.1
Arm the System in AWAY Mode
56
7.4.2
Arm the System in STAY Mode 1
56
7.4.3
Arm the System in STAY Mode 2
56
7.4.4
Horn Speaker Test
57
7.4.5
Bell Test
57
7.4.6
Strobe Test
57
7.4.7
Turning Day Alarm On and Off
57
2017.10 | 03 | F.01U.298.026
Installation Guide
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Control Panel
Table of Contents | en
5
7.4.8
Fault Analysis Mode
57
7.4.9
Initiate a Modem Call
57
7.4.10
Reset Latching Outputs
58
7.4.11
Change the Codepad Buzzer Tone
58
7.4.12
Send Test Report
58
8
RF Keyfob Operations
59
8.1
Indications from RF Keyfob Operations
59
8.2
Remote Radio User Code Priority Levels
59
9
Remote Arming by Telephone
60
10
A-Link Plus Application
61
10.1
Modem Connection
61
10.1.1
Remote Connection with Customer Control
61
10.1.2
Remote Connection without Callback Verification
61
10.1.3
Remote Connection with Callback Verification
62
10.1.4
Answering Machine Bypass Connection
62
10.2
Network Connection
62
10.3
Direct Connection
63
10.4
Options
63
10.5
Configuring for email
64
10.5.1
Configure through B426/B426-M
64
10.5.2
Configure through B450/B450-M
66
11
Communication Information
68
11.1
Primary Telephone Number for Receivers
69
11.2
Secondary Telephone Number for Receivers
69
11.3
Transmission Format for Receivers
69
11.4
Subscriber ID Number for Receivers
70
11.5
IP Items for Receivers
70
11.6
Conettix Items for Receivers
71
11.7
External Network Modules
72
11.8
Network Module Cloud Connection
73
11.9
Password for A-Link Connection
73
11.10
DTMF Timing Compensation
73
11.11
Country Codes
73
11.12
Telco Arming Sequence
73
11.13
Telco Disarming Sequence
74
11.14
Call Back Telephone Number
75
11.15
Ring Count
75
11.16
Telephone Line Fail Options
76
11.17
Communication Options 1
77
11.18
Communication Options 2
77
11.19
Communication Options 3
78
11.20
A-Link Plus Options
79
11.21
Domestic Dialing
79
11.21.1
Domestic Dialing Funtion
79
11.21.2
Setting Up and Programming Domestic Reporting
80
11.22
Reporting Formats
81
11.22.1
Contact ID Format
81
11.22.2
SIA Format
82
11.22.3
System Reporting List
82
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
Installation Guide
2017.10 | 03 | F.01U.298.026
--- PAGE BREAK ---
6
en | Table of Contents
Control Panel
12
Access
87
12.1
Installer Code
87
12.2
User Codes
87
12.3
User Code Priority
89
13
Zone Information
91
13.1
Day Alarm Information
91
13.1.1
Day Alarm Resetting
91
13.1.2
Day Alarm Latching
91
13.1.3
Day Alarm Operation
91
13.2
EOL Resistor Value
92
13.3
Zone Programming
93
13.3.1
Zone Defaults
93
13.3.2
Zone Types
97
13.3.3
Zone Pulse Count
99
13.3.4
Zone Pulse Count Time
100
13.3.5
Zone Options 1
100
13.3.6
Zone Options 2
101
13.3.7
Zone Report Options
102
13.3.8
Keyswitch Zone Options
103
13.3.9
Zone Source
104
13.4
Swinger Shutdown Count for Siren
104
13.5
Swinger Shutdown Count for Report
105
13.6
STAY Mode 2 Automatically Bypass Zones
106
13.7
Zone Status Reporting Options
106
14
RF Information
107
14.1
RF Supervision Time
107
14.2
Anti-Jamming Sensitivity
107
14.3
RF Receiver
108
14.4
RF Options
108
14.5
RFID
108
14.5.1
RF Keyfob RFID
109
14.5.2
RF Device RFID
109
14.5.3
RF Reapter RFID
110
15
System Reporting Information
111
15.1
Arm/Disarm Reporting Options
111
15.2
Codepad Reporting Options
111
15.3
Access Denied
111
15.4
System Status Reporting Options
112
15.5
Test Reporting Time
112
15.6
Test Reporting Options
113
15.7
Reports
113
15.7.1
Zone Tamper Report
113
15.7.2
Walk Test Report
113
15.7.3
Bypass Report
113
15.7.4
Trouble Report
113
15.7.5
Sensor Watch Report
114
15.7.6
Alarm Restore Code
114
15.7.7
RF Receiver Trouble Report
114
15.7.8
RF Receiver Trouble Restore Report
114
2017.10 | 03 | F.01U.298.026
Installation Guide
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Control Panel
Table of Contents | en
7
15.7.9
RF Low Battery Report
114
15.7.10
Arm/Disarm Reports
114
15.7.11
Codepad Duress Report
115
15.7.12
Codepad Panic Report
115
15.7.13
Codepad Fire Report
115
15.7.14
Codepad Medical Report
115
15.7.15
AUX Power Supply Fail Report
115
15.7.16
AUX Power Supply Fail Restore Report
115
15.7.17
AC Fail Report
116
15.7.18
AC Fail Restore Report
116
15.7.19
Low Battery Report
116
15.7.20
Low Battery Restore Report
116
16
Programmable Outputs
117
16.1
Output Programming
117
16.2
B228 Output Mode
123
16.3
Output Event Types
123
16.4
Output Polarity
130
16.5
Output Timing
132
16.6
Pulsing Polarities
132
16.7
One-Shot Polarities
132
17
System Event Timers
134
17.1
Programming Entry/Exit Times
134
17.2
Entry Time 1
134
17.3
Entry Time 2
134
17.4
Exit Time
134
17.5
Entry Guard Time for STAY Mode
135
17.6
Delay Alarm Reporting Time
135
17.7
Sensor Watch Time
135
17.8
Codepad Lockout Time
136
17.9
Siren Run Time
136
17.10
Siren Sound Rate
136
17.11
Auto Arming Pre-Alert Time
136
17.12
Auto Arming Time
137
17.13
Auto Disarming Time
137
17.14
Kiss-Off Wait Time
137
17.15
Speaker Beep Volume
137
18
System and Consumer Options
138
18.1
System Options 1
138
18.2
System Options 2
139
18.3
System Options 3
139
18.4
System Options 4
140
18.5
System Option 5
141
18.6
Consumer Options 1
141
18.7
Consumer Options 2
142
18.8
Consumer Options 3
143
19
Partitioning
144
19.1
Programming
144
19.1.1
Partitioning Options 1
144
19.1.2
Partitioning Options 2
144
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
Installation Guide
2017.10 | 03 | F.01U.298.026
--- PAGE BREAK ---
8
en | Table of Contents
Control Panel
19.2
Partition Allocations
145
19.2.1
Zone Area Assignments
145
19.2.2
Codepad assignment
146
19.2.3
User code area assignments
146
20
Text Information
148
2017.10 | 03 | F.01U.298.026
Installation Guide
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Control Panel
Introduction | en
9
Introduction
1
This section includes an introduction to documents for this product and other documentrelated instructions.
About documentation
1.1
This document contains instructions for a trained installer to properly install, configure, and
operate this control panel, and all optional peripheral devices. Review this document before
beginning the installation to determine the hardware and wiring requirements for the features
used.
Throughout this document, the words “control panel ” refer to all control panels covered by
this document (Solution 2000/3000).
Notifications
This document uses Notices, Cautions, and Warnings to draw your attention to important
information.
Notice!
These include important notes for successful operation and programming of equipment, or
indicate a risk of damage to the equipment or environment.
Caution!
!
These indicate a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate
injury.
Warning!
!
These indicate a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious
injury.
Copyright
This document is the intellectual property of Bosch Security Systems, Inc. and is protected by
copyright. All rights reserved.
Trademarks
All hardware and software product names used in this document are likely to be registered
trademarks and must be treated accordingly.
1.2
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. product manufacturing dates
Use the serial number located on the product label and refer to the Bosch Security Systems,
Inc. website at http://www.boschsecurity.com/datecodes/.
The following image shows an example of a product label and highlights where to find the
manufacturing date within the serial number.
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
Installation Guide
2017.10 | 03 | F.01U.298.026
--- PAGE BREAK ---
10
en | Introduction
2017.10 | 03 | F.01U.298.026
Control Panel
Installation Guide
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Control Panel
System Overview | en
2
System Overview
2.1
Product Matrix
11
Figure 2.1: Product Matrix 2017
2.2
Configuration and Parts
This section lists each control panel's capacities and a parts list.
2.2.1
Control panel capacities
Features
Solution 2000
Solution 3000
Number of users
32
32
Number of zones
4+4 (ZD)
8+8 (ZD)
Number of areas/partitions
2
2
Number of on-board outputs
4
4
Number of codepads
4
4
Number of B308 Octo-output modules
2
2
Number of B426 IP communicators
2
2
Number of B442 or B450 GPRS communicators
2
2
Number of WE800EV2 receivers
1
1
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
Installation Guide
2017.10 | 03 | F.01U.298.026
--- PAGE BREAK ---
12
en | System Overview
Control Panel
Features
Solution 2000
Solution 3000
Number of RADION receivers
0
1
Number of RADION repeaters
0
8
2.2.2
Parts list
Control panels ship assembled from the factory with the following parts:
Literature
–
Control Panels (Solution 2000 / Solution 3000 ) Quick Reference Guide
–
Control Panels (Solution 2000 / Solution 3000 ) User Guide
HW pack
–
EOL resistors
–
Battery wires
–
PSTN lead
–
Screws
Assembly
–
2.2.3
PC board
Order separately
Order the accessories listed below to aid in the installation of your control panel. If you
ordered your control panel in a kit, you might already have these parts.
Accessory Type
Solution 2000
Solution 3000
Codepads
Touchscreen, IUI-SOL-
Touchscreen, IUI-SOL-
ICON, IUI-SOL-TEXT
ICON, IUI-SOL-TEXT
Keyfobs
HCT-4
HCT-4, RFKF-TB/RFKF-FB
Octo-output modules
B308
B308
Receivers
WE800EV2
WE800EV2, B810
Repeaters
RFRP
Detectors
Wired detectors
Wired detectors, RADION
wireless detectors
Software
A-Link Plus
A-Link Plus
Ethernet communication modules
B426
B426
GPRS communication modules
B450 with B442 or B443
B450 with B442 or B443
Transformer
TF008-B
TF008-B
Other accessories:
Keyswitches
Battery
Siren
Strobe
RJ11 PSTN terminal
Control Panel Enclosure
2017.10 | 03 | F.01U.298.026
Installation Guide
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Control Panel
3
Installation workflow | en
13
Installation workflow
Before installing and operating the control panel, read these instructions. Failure to follow
these procedures may cause the device not to function properly. Bosch Security Systems Inc.
is not responsible for any devices that are improperly installed, tested, or maintained.
This document does not contain special information about local requirements and safety
issues. Information on such issues is provided only to the extent that it is needed for
operation of the device. Ensure that you are familiar with all safety-related processes and
regulations in your area. This also includes how to act in the event of an alarm and the initial
steps to take if a fire breaks out. The operating instructions should always be available on site.
It is a required part of the system and must be given to the new owner if the system is ever
sold.
Use the workflow and checkboxes below as you complete steps.
Install the enclosure
Install the control panel
Install and wire for telephone communication
Install and wire for IP communications
Install and wire the transformer
Install and wire arming devices
Install and wire outputs
Install and wire inputs
Complete the installation
See also
–
Install the transformer, page 24
–
Communication Information, page 68
–
B426/B426-M Conettix Ethernet Communication Modules, page 21
–
B450/B450-M Conettix Plug-in Communicator Interfaces, page 21
–
Codepads, page 14
–
RADION keyfobs, page 19
–
Keyswitches, page 23
–
WE800EV2 receiver, page 18
–
B308 Octo-output Module, page 20
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
Installation Guide
2017.10 | 03 | F.01U.298.026
--- PAGE BREAK ---
14
4
en | Accessories
Control Panel
Accessories
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. manufactures a number of accessories that can be used in
conjunction with the control panel. These devices enhance certain features to make the
system extremely flexible.
Some sections include basic installation instructions. For detailed installation instructions,
refer to the Installation Guide that came packaged with the device.
4.1
Codepads
The Solution 2000/3000 control panels support two types of codepads: an alphanumeric LCD
codepad (IUI-SOL-TEXT) and an icon LCD codepad (IUI-SOL-ICON).
IUI – SOL -TEXT
IUI – SOL – ICON
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8
ON
OFF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
*
0
#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
* STAY
0
# AWAY
Installation
Set the address switches for the proper address, mount the mounting plate, wire to the
control panel, and attach the codepad to the mounting plate.
Notice!
Do not remove the spring from the tamper switch on the IUI-SOL-ICON. Removing the spring
will cause a Codepad Tamper Trouble and a report will be sent if configured to do so.
Set the address
The IUI-SOL-TEXT and IUI-SOL-ICON have 6 DIP switches that support SDI2 addresses 01 to
16. DIP switches determine the address for the codepad. The control panel uses the address
for communications. Use a ballpoint pen to set the switches.
2017.10 | 03 | F.01U.298.026
Installation Guide
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Accessories | en
Control Panel
15
If multiple codepads reside on the same system, each codepad must have a unique address.
The Solution 2000/3000 control panels support up to 4 codepads, addresses 01-04. DIP
switch address settings greater than 4 prevent the codepad from processing messages
received on the SDI2 bus and the option bus. Any change to the DIP switch requires a power
cycle or software reboot of the module for the new external address to be read.
DIP Switch Codepad
DIP Switch Number
Address
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
On
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
2
Off
On
Off
Off
Off
On
3
On
On
Off
Off
Off
On
4
Off
Off
On
Off
Off
On
Table 4.1: Codepad DIP switch address settings
Install the module
1. Use the provided anchors and screws to mount the codepad base on the wall.
2.
Pull the necessary wiring through the mounting plate.
Wire to the control panel
Wire the codepad to the control panel using the control panel terminals labeled R, Y, G, B
(PWR, A, B, COM). Connect them to the codepad terminals labeled R, Y, G, B. Connect
codepads to the SDI2 data bus by parallel wire run from the control panel to each codepad,
wire from codepad to codepad, or a combination of the two. Use a maximum of 7500 ft (2286
m) of 22 AWG (0.8 mm) wire for all devices connected to the SDI2 bus combined.
1
3
+
- PWR A
BATTERY
B COM PWR A
B COM
1
R YGB
R
2
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
Y
PWR A
Installation Guide
G
B
B COM
2017.10 | 03 | F.01U.298.026
--- PAGE BREAK ---
16
en | Accessories
Control Panel
Callout - Description
1 – Control panel
2 – Terminal wiring
3 – Codepad’s wiring terminal block
4.1.1
Installer Menu
Use the menu tree below to program the control panel from the IUI-SOL-TEXT codepad. To
program the control panel from the IUI-SOL-ICON, use the programming address indicated in
brackets [ ] next to each command as shown in the Menu Tree.
Example:
To program Exit Time using the IUI-SOL-TEXT
Method 1: By Text Menu
1.
Enter the Installer Code, followed by [-] or [#] key (for example, [1234#]),
2.
Then press keys [3], [1], [3] to enter [Exit time] and program the exit time.
Method 2: By address programming
1.
Enter the Installer Code, followed by [-] or [#] key (for example, [1234#]),
2.
Press [8] [1] to enter address programming.
3.
Press [470 #] to enter Exit Time address to program.
To program Exit Time using the IUI-SOL-ICON
Enter the Installer Code followed by [#] key, then press [470 #] to enter Exit Time address to
program.
2017.10 | 03 | F.01U.298.026
Installation Guide
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Control Panel
Accessories | en
17
Installer
Passcode
1 Fault analysis
2 Event recall
3 Cloud status
2 Inquire
1
Command
3 System
1 RF zone
2 RF Keyfob
3 RF Repeater
4 RF diagnose
2 Day alarm
3 Arm/disarm seq.
4 Report monitor
5 Modem call init.
6 Domestic phone
7 Version display
8 Factory default
1 Horn speaker
2 Bell test
3 Strobe test
4 Walk test
5 Test report
5 Test
1 Installer code [181]
2
Access
3 Access retry [424]
4 User property
2 User allocate [534]
3 User authority [189]
1 Timer
3
System
1 Entry time1
[466]
2 Entry time2
[468]
[470]
3 Exit time
4 Entry guard time for STAY mode [472]
[476]
5 Sensor watch time
[478]
6 Codepad lockout time
[481]
7 Auto arm pre-alert time
[482]
8 Auto arm time
[486]
9 Auto disarm time
.
2 Codepad
3 Arm/disarm
4 Fault
1 Auto arm in STAY1
[496.3]
2 Single button arm enable
[497.2]
[497.3]
3 Single button disarm enable
4 Disarmed on power up
[495.1]
5 Arm/disarm track on power up
[495.2]
6 Phone remote arm
[177.2]
7 Answer machine bypass on arm [177.3]
1 Ignore AC fail
[494.2]
[494.1]
2 AC fail report wait time
[492.2]
3 Warning device fault monitor
[176.1]
4 Phone line fault indicator
5 Phone line fault alarm on armed [176.2]
6 Phone line fault alarm on disarm [176.3]
7 Lockout phone line fail alarm
[179.2]
8 Onboard tamper trigger alarm
[495.3]
5 Wireless
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
6 System option 1
1 Home message
2 Button factory default enable
3 Alarm memory reset on disarm
4 STAY indicator for day alarm
5 Digit 3 for codepad duress alarm
6 Siren and strobe output in STAY
7 Speaker beep volume
8 Country code
[2500]
[900]
[497.4]
[496.4]
[498.2]
[498.3]
[491]
[112]
7 System option 2
1 Domestic Dail Fail To Report
2 Installer Arm/Disarm Function
[110.1]
[110.2]
Installation Guide
[493.1]
1 Silent codepad panic alarm
[493.2]
2 Silent codepad fire alarm
3 Silent codepad medical alarm [493.3]
4 Codepad access denied silent [493.4]
[498.1]
5 Codepad fault beep enable
6 Codepad display off after 60s [497.1]
1 RF receiver
2 Zone RFID and input option
3 Keyfob RFID
4 Repeater RFID
5 RF supervision time
6 RF jam sensitivity
7 RF RECE jam/tamper siren alarm
8 RFKF button4 arm in STAY1
9 RF arm/disarm strobe indicator
[395]
[1820]
[1500]
[1980]
[393]
[394]
[396.2]
[492.4]
[492.3]
2017.10 | 03 | F.01U.298.026
--- PAGE BREAK ---
18
en | Accessories
Control Panel
Installer
Passcode
4
Zone
1 Zone config
[267]
2 Zone allocate
[502]
3 Zone name
[2536]
4 Day alarm zone
[265]
5 STAY2 zone
[381]
[266]
6 EOL resistor
7 Zone state report [392]
1 Siren swing shutdown count
2 Report swing shutdown count
8 Swing shutdown
9 Zone option
5
Area
1 Codepad area [518]
1 Onboard output
[436]
2 Codepad output [460]
3 Extend output
[646]
4 Siren config
7
Comm
[498.4]
1 Silent zone tamper alarm
2 Unseal RF zone that failed monitor [396.3]
[492.1]
3 Bosch Smart Lockout enable
4 Zone pulse count handover enable [494.3]
[494.4]
5 Handover delay in order
1 Arm/disarm all areas once [501.2]
2 Reset siren from any area [500.3]
2 Area option
6
Output
[379]
[380]
1 Siren run time
[479]
[480]
2 Siren sound rate
3 Siren sound on RF receiver fail [396.1]
1 Receiver config
2 Network config
1 Network module
2 A-Link/RSC password
[81,82]
[83]
3 Report config
4 Comm option 1
1 Ring count
2 Report function enable
3 Exit A-Link connection on alarm
4 System status report option
5 Use bell-103 for FSK format
6 DTMF dial pulse to 1 digit/sec
7 Set up domestic dialing format
8 DTMF timing compensation
5 Comm option 2
8
Parameter
1 Address program
2 Address auto step
3 Adapter
1 Test adapter
2 Read adapter
3 Write adapter
[175]
[177.1]
[180.3]
[427]
[177.4]
[179.1]
[*]
[111]
1 First phone number
2 Second phone number
3 Transmit format
4 Subscriber ID number
5 IP + Port / Email
6 CSVIP user name and password
7 Conettix ACK wait time
8 Conettix heart beat time
9 Conettix anti-replay enable
[0, 40, 1417, 1457]
[16, 56, 1433, 1473]
[33, 73, 1450, 1490]
[34, 74, 1451, 1491]
[1000, 1200, 2060, 2260]
[1100, 1300, 2160, 2360]
[1401, 1405, 1409, 1413]
[1403, 1407, 1411, 1415]
[1400]
1 STAY mode arm/disarm report enable [178.2]
2 Arm/disarm report only if alarmed
[178.1]
3 First disarm/last arm report
[500.1]
[403]
4 Arm/disarm report option
[411]
5 Codepad report option
[428, 434]
6 Test report time and interval
7 Test report only when armed
[496.1]
[496.2]
8 Test report on siren reset
[435]
9 Test report option
1 Telco arming sequence
[113]
2 Telco disarming sequence
[143]
3 Delay alarm report time
[474]
4 Kiss-off wait time
[490]
5 Delay siren until transmit over
[178.3]
6 Extend wait for handshake
[178.4]
7 Upload/download enable
[180.1]
8 Callback phone number request [180.2]
9 Callback phone number
[159]
* Refer to Command 965 - Set up Domestic Dialing Format, page 27.
4.2
WE800EV2 receiver
The WE800EV2 is designed to provide a convenient ON/OFF control for the Solution
2000/3000 series control panel. Provision is also made for the control of up to two (2)
external devices via on-board relays.
Install the module
1.
Remove the small knockout in the Solution 2000/3000 control panel for the antenna and
insert the supplied rubber grommet.
2.
Install the WE800EV2 PCB in the control panel with the top of the PCB in the slot
provided at the top of the case and secure with the provided screw at the bottom of the
PCB.
3.
Thread the antenna wire through the grommet into the “ANT” terminal.
Wire to the control panel
Connect the 3 pin plug to the jumper labeled WE800 on the control panel. Note that the
connector will only install one way. If the relays are to be used, a wire will need to be
connected from the +12V terminal on the WE800EV2 to a +12 terminal on the control panel.
2017.10 | 03 | F.01U.298.026
Installation Guide
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Control Panel
Accessories | en
19
Add/delete keyfobs
Notice!
When purchasing a WE800EV2 kit, the keyfobs supplied are already learned to the WE800EV2
with both relays set for momentary operation. If a different relay set-up is required, delete the
keyfobs, then add them back again.
To add keyfobs:
1.
Press the Learn/Delete switch once. Note that the LED will flash rapidly.
2.
Press the button on the keyfob to be learned that corresponds to the desired relay
function.
Button 1 – Both outputs momentary
Button 2 – Output 1 toggling. Output 2 momentary.
Button 3 – Output 2 toggling. Output 1 momentary.
Button 4 – Both outputs toggling
3.
Repeat for additional keyfobs.
4.
Press the Learn/Delete button when finished adding keyfobs to complete the process.
To delete keyfobs:
Press and hold the Learn/Delete switch. Note that the LED will light and then extinguish after
4 seconds. The EEPROM is now erased. Individual keyfob deletion is not possible.
4.3
HCT-4 keyfob
This Button Premium Keyfob can be used in conjunction with the WE800EV2 RF Receiver
to operate the system remotely.
It can remotely arm and disarm the system in AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1 and can activate
remote Panic Alarms. It can also operate outputs such as garage doors, swimming pool
pumps, or outside lights.
4.4
RADION receiver B810
The B810 is a wireless receiver that connects RADION wireless peripherals such as the motion
detectors, keyfobs, panic buttons, repeaters, and more, to supported Bosch control panels
using the SDI2 Bus connection.
For more information, refer to the installation and operation manuals for this product.
4.5
RADION keyfobs
RADION keyfob allows you to arm or disarm the security system, or send a panic alarm. The
control panels support two RADION keyfob models, RFKF-FB and RFKF-TB, that communicate
with the control panel using the RADION receiver SD. On the four-button version, two option
buttons are user-defined to perform additional functions. To operate these buttons, simply
press and hold either button for at least one sec in order for the desired feature to work.
Panic alarm
The keyfob sends a panic code to your monitoring company if your security system is
programmed to do so. Press both the lock and unlock buttons simultaneously for more than
600 milliseconds to send a panic alarm.
LED indicator
The LED flashes to indicate a signal was sent to your security system.
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
Installation Guide
2017.10 | 03 | F.01U.298.026
--- PAGE BREAK ---
20
4.6
en | Accessories
Control Panel
RADION repeater
RADION repeater receives transmissions from RADION transmitters and re-transmits them to
improve transmitted message reliability and range for compatible transmitters and its
assigned compatible receiver.
For more information, refer to the installation and operation guides for this product.
4.7
RADION detectors
For more information regarding the sensors supported by the Solution 3000 control panel,
refer to the installation and operation manuals for the B810 wireless receiver.
See also
–
4.8
Add or Delete RF Wireless Devices, page 41
B308 Octo-output Module
The B308 Octo-output Module is a supervised device that provides 8 programmable outputs
(Form C relays) and connects to control panels through the SDI2 bus. Each output provides
dry contact switching rated for a maximum of 1.0 A at 24 VDC. The outputs are accessed
through on-board screw terminal connections. The address switches are used to set the
module’s SDI2 address. Control panel programming determines each output’s response to
specific events. The B308 receives serial data from the control panel and activates outputs in
response to control panel conditions and settings. Outputs can be programmed for remote
control from a control panel codepad or computer (A-Link) or smartphone application (RSC).
Set the address
Two address switches determine the address for the B308 Octo-output Module. The control
panel uses the address for communications. Use a slotted screwdriver to set the two address
switches. Set the address switches per the control panel configuration.
The module’s address switches provide a tens and ones value for the module’s address. Set
the tens switch to 0 and the ones digit 1 for module 1 ; set the tens switch to 0 and the ones
digit 2 for module 2.
Notice!
The module reads the address switch setting only during power up. If you change the
switches after you apply power to the module, you must cycle the power to the module in
order for the new setting to be enabled.
Install the module
After you set the address switches for the proper address, install the module in the enclosure.
Mount the module into the enclosure’s 3-hole mounting pattern using the supplied mounting
screws and mounting bracket.
Notice!
Remove all power (AC and battery) before making any connections. Failure to do so might
result in personal injury and/or equipment damage.
Wire to the control panel
2017.10 | 03 | F.01U.298.026
Installation Guide
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Control Panel
Accessories | en
21
When you wire the module to a control panel, use the module’s terminal strip labeled with
PWR, A, B, and COM.
LED descriptions
The module includes one blue heartbeat LED to indicate that the module has power and to
indicate the module’s current state.
Flash pattern
Function
Flashes once every 1 second
Indicates normal operation state.
3 quick flashes every 1 second
Indicates the module is in a “no communication” state
resulting in an SDI2 communication error.
ON steady
A trouble condition is exist..
OFF steady
Module is not powered or some other trouble condition is
prohibiting the module from controlling the heartbeat LED.
4.9
B426/B426-M Conettix Ethernet Communication Modules
The B426 Conettix Ethernet Communication Module is a four-wire powered SDI, SDI2, or
Option bus device that provides two-way communication with compatible control panels over
IPv4 or IPv6 Ethernet networks.
Typical applications include:
–
Reporting and path supervision to a Conettix Communications Receiver/Gateway.
–
Remote administration and control with A-Link Plus or our Remote Security Control
application for handheld devices.
–
Connection to building automation and integration applications.
The B426 is built for a wide variety of secure commercial and industrial applications. Flexible
end-to-end path supervision, AES encryption, and anti-substitution features make B426
desirable for high security and fire monitoring applications. It is capable as a stand-alone path
or it can be used in conjunction with another communication technology. For Fire Monitoring
applications, the B426 meets UL864 and NFPA72 standards for Single Communication
Technology with approved Bosch control panels.
4.10
B450/B450-M Conettix Plug-in Communicator Interfaces
Notice!
For B450-M only: Scan the QR code with your smart phone to access the control panel app
RSC+.
The Conettix Plug-in Communicator Interface is a four-wire powered SDI2, SDI, or option bus
device that provides two-way communication with compatible control panels over commercial
cellular networks using a plug-in communicator (available separately).
Use the B450 in combination with a plug-in communicator for primary or backup alarm
communication, remote control panel programming and other remote applications. The B450
supports Conettix IP protocol with full authentication, 256 bit AES encryption and resistance
to Denial of Service attacks. Use the B450 to add cellular network communications to existing
or new commercial security and fire installations.
Switch addressing
Use the address switch to assign a bus address or setup for USB or SMS configuration where
required. The address switch allows bus address selection.
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
Installation Guide
2017.10 | 03 | F.01U.298.026
--- PAGE BREAK ---
22
en | Accessories
Control Panel
Configuration
For most installations, the default B450 settings allow installation with no device programming
required. For customized network settings, the B450 supports a USB configuration menu, or
configuration via SMS.
When the B450 is running in version 3 compatibility mode, it reports its module type as a
B426. Networking parameters can be configured using A-Link. When the cellular specific
parameters need to be modified, use USB or SMS to configure the module directly.
When the B450 is running in version 4 compatibility mode, it reports its own product type.
Both networking parameters and cellular specific parameters can be configured using A-Link.
LEDs
Three LEDs provide status and troubleshooting information about the module and its
connection.
LED
Description
Heartbeat
Indicates the system status of the B450 and its connection to the
control panel.
RX
Indicates when an inbound packet is received on the bus.
TX
Indicates when an outbound packet is transmitted on the bus.
Mounting considerations
Install in a location with acceptable wireless network signal strength. Mount the module into
the interior of a compatible enclosure. Use the 3-hole mounting pattern. Use the supplied
mounting screws.
Wiring considerations
The B450 connects to a control panel using a data bus connection via the module’s terminal
strip, or the module’s interconnect wiring connectors.
For data bus powered installations outside the compatible control panel enclosure, follow the
maximum wiring distances in the technical specifications. For further installations power from
a compatible auxiliary power supply.
4.11
A-Link Plus Software
You can program or control the Solution 2000/3000 control panels remotely using A-Link plus
Software. This software allows you to change your customer’s control panel without leaving
your office, which improves customer service and saves your time and money. For locations
where a control panel is installed hundreds of kilometers from your office, the Upload/
Download feature is invaluable.
A-Link plus software running in windows 7 OS: When selecting the control panel type during
the setup of a new customer database in the A-Link plus Software. The software version is
v4.7 or later and the control panel type is Solution 2000 or Solution 3000.
When you add a new customer in the A-Link plus Software, the “Installer code” and the “ALink Plus / RSC password” must match the values programmed in the control panel for
synchronization during connection to the control panel. If this location does not match those
of the control panel, the software and the control panel cannot be synchronized.
Minimum System Requirements
2017.10 | 03 | F.01U.298.026
Installation Guide
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Control Panel
Accessories | en
System Component
Minimum Requirement
Processor
Intel PIII 1.5 GHz or higher
Operating System
Microsoft Windows 8
23
Microsoft Windows 7
Microsoft Windows Vista
Microsoft Windows XP with SP1,2 or 3
(In Vista and XP, Microsoft VC++2008
Redistributable Package shall be installed)
Hard Drive Free Space
At least 4GB
Memory
At least 256 MB
Mouse
Windows compatible mouse
Video
Standard VGA monitor capable of supporting
a resolution of 1024x768 or higher.
For instructions on installing and using A-Link Plus, refer to the A-Link Plus User Guide.
See also
–
4.12
A-Link Plus Application, page 61
Remote Security Control
Remote Access Profile Builder (RAP Builder) is an account management application. It creates
profiles that grant Remote Security Control (RSC) users access to specific control panels. RSC
is an app for Android and Apple iOS devices.
Downloading the installation files:
1.
Go to the Bosch website (au.boschsecurity.com).
2.
Click on the Products tab and select Intrusion Alarm Systems.
3.
On the right side of the page, under Online Tools, click the Remote Access Profile Builder
link.
4.
After reviewing the required prerequisites, click Install.
5.
Save the install file to your computer hard drive.
The Remote Security Certificate Builder link also includes the documentation needed to
install, configure, and use RSCB and the RSC application.
4.13
Remote Security Control Plus
Remote Security Control Plus (RSC+) app allows users to control their security systems
remotely from mobile devices such as phones and tablets.
RSC+ is an app for Android and Apple iOS devices. Refer to RSC+ Operation Manuals for more
details.
4.14
Keyswitches
Connect the keyswitch to any zone programmed as keyswitch zone, refer to Zone Types, page
97.
Program Keyswitch Zone Options, refer to Keyswitch Zone Options, page 103.
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
Installation Guide
2017.10 | 03 | F.01U.298.026
--- PAGE BREAK ---
24
en | Accessories
Control Panel
When the Zone Type is programmed as keyswitch, Zone Options 1 replaces Keyswitch Zone
Options. A keyswitch zone can arm/disarm or momentary arm/disarm the area in STAY Mode 1
or AWAY Mode as configured. A keyswitch zone can only arm/disarm the area it belongs to. Its
zone number is reported as a user code number.
4.15
TF008 Plug Pack (TF008-B)
The TF008 plug pack is used with control panels.
The plug pack includes built-in thermal fuses that blow during overload or fault conditions to
eliminate a possible fire threat due to excessive heat buildup inside the casing.
The plug pack incorporates a three-wire flying lead that enables a MAINS earth connection
between the equipment and the plug pack. This connection might be required for lightning
protection on equipment connected to phone lines or for safety reasons such as earthing of
metal enclosures.
4.15.1
Install the transformer
Caution!
!
Do not short-circuit the terminals of the transformer: Shorting the terminals opens the
internal fuse, causing permanent failure. Connect the transformer to the 18-22 VAC terminals
of the control panel before plugging it into the power source.
Notice!
Plan Ahead
Route telephone, SDI2 bus wiring, and sensor loop wiring away from any AC conductors,
including the transformer wire. AC wiring can induce noise and low level voltage into adjacent
wiring.
1.
Use 18 AWG (1.02 mm) wire minimum (12 AWG [2 mm] maximum) and connect the
transformer to the control panel. Make the wire length as short as possible. Do not
exceed 50 ft (15 m).
4.16
2.
Connect the wire to the control panel.
3.
Connect the wire to the transformer.
4.
Plug the transformer into the power outlet.
DLA
Direct link adapter IUI-SOL-ADAPTER is one of accessories that can be used in conjunction
with the SDI2 Bus control panel.
DLA works with control panel via SDI2 bus cable.
–
Copy the control panel memory to the DLA.
–
Copy the DLA data to the control panel memory.
–
Control panel firmware upgrade.
A-Link Plus controls the control panel remotely via DLA.
2017.10 | 03 | F.01U.298.026
Installation Guide
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Control Panel
Configuration | en
5
Configuration
5.1
Installer Commands
25
When working with an ICON codepad, there are nine commands in Installer’s Programming
Mode. To issue a command, enter the command number and press [#].
When working with an alphanumeric codepad, select the menu and issue a command after
entering the Installer Menu.
Command
Description
958
Exit from Installer’s Programming Mode without saving changes
959
Test IUI-SOL-ADAPTER
960
Exit from Installer’s Programming Mode with saving changes and system
reset
961
Reset the control panel to factory defaults
962
Copy the control panel memory to IUI-SOL-ADAPTER
963
Copy IUI-SOL-ADAPTER data to the control panel memory
965
Set up domestic dialing format
966
Enable/disable the automatic stepping of locations during programming
999
Display the control panel firmware version number
Table 5.1: Installer’s Programming Commands
5.1.1
Command 958 - Exit from Installer's Programming Mode without saving
changes
This command exits from Installer’s Programming Mode. You can exit from Installer’s
Programming Mode from any location.
To exit from Installer’s Programming Mode:
Enter [9 6 0 #]. The system returns to the disarmed state. When using the codepad, the STAY
and AWAY indicators are extinguished.
5.1.2
Command 959 - Test IUI-SOL-ADAPTER
This command initiates a test of the direct link adapter. You can only use the IUI-SOLADAPTER Direct Link Adapter with the control panel.
The direct link adapter test is non-destructive, and any data in the direct link adapter remains
after the test is completed. One long beep indicates that the direct link adapter test failed.
Two beeps indicates a successful test.
If you remove the direct link adapter before the test is finished, the direct link adapter data
becomes corrupt. Do not remove the direct link adapter while the activity LED is lit or pulsing
rapidly.
To test the direct link adapter:
1. Enter the Installer Code (the default is 1234) and press [#] to enter Installer’s
Programming Mode. Two beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY indicators flash on the
codepad to indicate you entered Installer’s Programming Mode. The codepad displays the
data stored in Location 000.
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.
Installation Guide
2017.10 | 03 | F.01U.298.026
--- PAGE BREAK ---
26
en | Configuration
2.
Control Panel
Connect the direct link adapter to the Bosch SDI2 Bus pins at the bottom of the control
panel printed circuit board.
3.
Enter [9 5 9 #]. Two beeps sound after a successful test of the direct link adapter. A long
beep indicates that the direct link adapter data is corrupt and must be erased to clear the
corrupt data.
4.
Enter [9 6 0 #] to exit from Installer’s Programming Mode. The STAY and AWAY indicators
are extinguished on the codepad and the system returns to the disarmed remote state.
5.
Remove the direct link adapter from the control panel. Failure to exit from Installer’s
Programming Mode before removing the direct link adapter can corrupt the data in the
direct link adapter.
When working with a text codepad, go to Menu 831 [Test adapter] to test the DLA.
5.1.3
Command 960 - Save and exit from Installer's Programming Mode
This command saves and exits from Installer’s Programming Mode. You can exit from
Installer’s Programming Mode from any location.
To exit from Installer’s Programming Mode:
Enter [9 6 0 #]. The system returns to the disarmed state. When using the codepad, the STAY
and AWAY indicators are extinguished.
5.1.4
Command 961 - Reset the Control Panel to Factory Default Settings
This command resets the control panel to factory default values. You can reset the control
panel from any location.
To reset the control panel to factory defaults:
1. Enter the Installer Code (the default is 1234) and press [#] to enter Installer’s
Programming Mode. Two beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY indicators flash on the
codepad to indicate that you entered Installer’s Programming Mode. The codepad
displays the data stored in Location 000.
2.
Enter [9 6 1 #]. Two beeps sound and the system is reset to the factory default values.
When working with a text codepad, go to Menu 138 [Factory default] to reset the system to
factory default settings.
5.1.5
Command 962 - Copy the Control Panel Memory to IUI-SOL-ADAPTER
This command copies the control panel memory to the direct link adapter. You can only use
the IUI-SOL-ADAPTER Direct Link Adapter with the control panel.
To copy the control panel memory to the direct link adapter:
1. Enter the Installer Code (the default is 1234) and press [#] to enter Installer’s
Programming Mode. Two beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY indicators flash on the
codepad to indicate you entered Installer’s Programming Mode. The codepad displays the
data stored in Location 000.
2.
Connect the direct link adapter to the Bosch SDI2 Bus pins at the bottom of the
[... content truncated for display — full manual available from manufacturer ...]
| Trouble | Cause | Corrective Action |
|---|---|---|
| AC FAILURE | Mains power supply lost | Check mains supply and transformer; panel runs on battery backup |
| BATTERY LOW | Backup battery low or faulty | Replace battery; check charger circuit |
| ZONE OPEN | Zone detector open circuit or tamper | Check detector and wiring; verify EOL resistor is fitted |
| ZONE TAMPER | Zone tamper circuit activated | Check detector cover and mounting; verify tamper wiring |
| SIREN FAULT | Siren circuit open or short | Check siren wiring and connections |
| COMM FAILURE | Telephone line or communicator fault | Check telephone line connection; verify communicator settings |
| KEYPAD LOCKOUT | Too many invalid code attempts | Wait for lockout period to expire; contact installer if locked out |
| Terminal | Function | Notes |
|---|---|---|
| AC / AC | Transformer input | 16.5VAC from supplied transformer |
| BATT+ / BATT- | Backup battery | 12V 7Ah sealed lead-acid |
| BELL+ / BELL- | Bell/siren output | Supervised; 12V DC |
| AUX+ / AUX- | Auxiliary 12V DC output | For keypads and accessories |
| Z1–Z8 (or Z16) | Zone inputs | Normally closed; terminate with EOL resistor |
| DATA / CLK | Keypad bus | Connect up to 8 keypads; 4-wire bus |
| TIP / RING | Telephone line | Connect to PSTN telephone line for reporting |
| Parameter | Value |
|---|---|
| Zones | 8 (Runner 8) or 16 (Runner 16) |
| Partitions | 2 (Area A and B) |
| Max Users | 100 |
| Max Keypads | 8 |
| Mains Input | 16.5VAC from transformer (230VAC mains) |
| Backup Battery | 12V 7Ah sealed lead-acid |
| Operating Temperature | 0°C to +49°C |
| Standards | EN 50131 Grade 2; PD 6662:2017 |
| Model | Zones | Application |
|---|---|---|
| HS2016 | 16 zones | Residential / small commercial |
| HS2032 | 32 zones | Small commercial |
| HS2064 | 64 zones | Commercial |
| HS2128 | 128 zones | Large commercial |
| HS3032 | 32 zones | PowerSeries Pro — small commercial |
| HS3128 | 128 zones | PowerSeries Pro — commercial |
| Code Type | Default | Notes |
|---|---|---|
| Installer Code | 5555 | Access via *8 + code |
| Master Code | 1234 | User management |
| User Code 1 | 1234 | Standard user |
| Zone Type | Code | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Delay 1 | 01 | Entry/exit delay zone |
| Delay 2 | 02 | Secondary entry/exit delay |
| Instant | 03 | Immediate alarm when armed |
| Interior | 04 | Interior zone — bypassed during stay arm |
| 24-Hour | 05 | Always active |
| 24-Hour Audible | 06 | Always active — audible |
| 24-Hour Silent | 07 | Always active — silent |
| 24-Hour Aux | 08 | Auxiliary 24-hour zone |
| Fire | 09 | Fire detection |
| Fire with Verification | 10 | Fire with confirmation |
| Tamper | 11 | Anti-tamper |
| Gas | 12 | Gas detection |
| Code / Display | Description | Likely Cause | Action |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 — Service Required | General service fault | Various | Check all zones and devices. |
| 2 — AC Trouble | Mains supply lost | Power cut, blown fuse | Check fuses and MCB. |
| 3 — Battery Trouble | Battery low or failed | Battery end of life | Replace battery. |
| 4 — Aux Supply Trouble | Auxiliary power fault | Overload, short circuit | Check auxiliary power supply. |
| 5 — Bell Trouble | Bell circuit fault | Wiring break, fuse blown | Check bell wiring and fuse. |
| 6 — TLM Trouble | Telephone line fault | PSTN line disconnected | Check PSTN line. |
| 7 — Zone Fault | Zone open circuit | Wiring break, device failure | Check wiring and device. |
| 8 — Zone Tamper | Zone tamper activated | Lid removed, cable cut | Inspect device. |
| 9 — Fire Trouble | Fire zone fault | Wiring break, device failure | Check fire zone wiring. |
| 10 — Loss of Time | Clock fault | Power loss, battery failure | Set time/date. |
| 11 — RF Jam | Wireless jamming detected | RF interference | Investigate RF interference. |
| Zone Config | EOL Resistor | Normal | Alarm |
|---|---|---|---|
| EOL | 5k6Ω | 5,600Ω | <750Ω |
| DEOL | 5k6Ω + 2k2Ω | 5,600Ω outer | <750Ω |
| Terminal | Function | Notes |
|---|---|---|
| AUX+ | Auxiliary power output | 500mA max |
| AUX− | Common ground | Must be continuous |
| Z1–Z8 | Zone inputs (on-board) | EOL resistors required |
| PGM1/PGM2 | Programmable outputs | Open collector, 50mA max |
| BELL+ | Bell/siren positive | Supervised output |
| BELL− | Bell/siren negative | Via tamper capacitor |
| TIP/RING | PSTN telephone line | For dialler signalling |
=== WEB RESEARCH: dsc ===
## DSC PowerSeries Neo HS2016 HS2032 HS2064 HS2128 Intruder Alarm Panel - Full Technical Reference
### Product Range and Model Numbers
**Alarm Controllers:**
* HS2016
* HS2016-4
* HS2032
* HS2064
* HS2064 E
* HS2128
* HS2128 E
**Compatible Communicators:**
* 3G2080E
* 3G2080RE
* TL280E
* TL280RE
* LE2080(R)
* TL280LE(R)
* TL2803GE
* TL2803GRE
* TL8803G
* TL880LT
* TL880LE
* PCL-422
**Hardwired Smoke Detectors:**
* 2-wire smoke detectors: y= A, B, or C (A: ULC listed, B: UL listed, C: European and Australian models)
* 4-wire smoke detectors: y= A, B, or C (A: ULC listed, B: UL listed, C: European and Australian models)
* CO detectors: CO-12/24, 12-24SIR, FW-CO12, FW-CO1224, CO1224
**Wireless Devices (PGx series - x denotes frequency: 9 for 912-919 MHz, 8 for 868MHz, 4 for 433MHz):**
* PG smoke detectors: PGx926
* PG smoke and heat detector: PGx936, PGx916
* PG CO detector: PGx933, PGx913
* PG PIR motion detectors: PGx904(P)
* PG PIR + camera motion detector: PGx934(P)
* PG curtain motion detector: PGx924
* PG dual tech motion detector: PGx984(P)
* PG mirror motion detector: PGx974(P)
* PG outdoor motion detector: PGx994
* PG glass break detector: PGx912, PGx922
* PG shock detector: PGx935
* PG flood detector: PGx985
* PG temperature detector (indoor use): PGx905
* Outdoor temperature probe: PGTEMP-PROBE (requires PGx905)
* PG flat PIR: PGx914
* PG recessed Contact: PGx307
* PG ceiling mount detector with Smart Presence – Short Range: PGx862
* PG ceiling mount detector with Smart Presence – Long Range: PGx872
* PG outdoor contact: PGx312
* PG outdoor curtain PIR: PGx902
**Modules:**
* Wireless keypads: HS2LCDWFx, HS2LCDWFPx, HS2LCDWFPVx
* PG keys: PGx939, PGx929
* Hardwired keypads with 2-way wireless integration module: HS2LCDRFx, HS2LCDRFPx, HS2ICNRFx, HS2ICNRFPx
* PG panic key: PGx938
* PG 2-button key: PGx949
* Hardwired keypads: HS2LCD, HS2LCDP, HS2ICN, HS2ICNP, HS2LED
* PG sirens: PGx901, PGx911
* Touchscreen Keypad: HS2TCHP
* PG repeater: PGx920
* 2-way wireless integration module: HSM2HOSTx
* PG door/window contacts: PGx303, PGx975
* PG door/window contact w/ AUX: PGx945
* 8-zone expander: HSM2108
* 8-output expander: HSM2208
* Power supply: HSM2300
* 4 high current output expander: HSM2204
**Central Station Receivers:**
* SG-System I, II, III, IV, 5
**Enclosures:**
* PC5003C, PC4050CR, PC4050CAR, CMC-1, PC4051C. Other enclosures are available to suit a variety of system configurations.
### Technical Specifications
**Corbus Wiring:**
* Minimum 22 gauge quad, two pair twisted preferred.
* Modules can be home run to the panel, connected in series or can be T-tapped.
* Do not use shielded wire for Corbus wiring.
* No module can be more than 1,000'/305m (in wire length) from the panel.
**Corbus Current Calculation Chart:**
| Item | Current (mA) | Quantity | Total (mA) |
|---|---|---|---|
| HS2016/HS2032/HS2064/HS2064 E/HS2128/HS2128 E | 85 | x | |
| HS2LCD | 105 | x | |
| HS2ICN | 105 | x | |
| HS2LED | 105 | x | |
| HS2LCDP | 105 | x | |
| HS2ICNP | 105 | x | |
| HS2LCDRF | 105 | x | |
| HS2ICNRF | 105 | x | |
| HS2ICNRFP | 105 | x | |
| HS2TCHP | 160 | x | |
| HSM2108* | 30 | x | |
| HSM2208* | 40 | x | |
| HSM2300/2204* | 35 | x | |
| HSM2HOSTx | 35 | x | |
| HSM2955** | 85 | x | |
| 3G2080(R)E/TL2803G(R)E/TL280(R)E (PCLINK) | 125 | x | |
*These units draw current from the Corbus to power devices external to the module. This current must be added to the total Corbus current. See manufacturer's specifications for the current draw of each device.
** For HSM2955 current draw refer to HSM2955 installation manual.
**System Output Ratings (12VDC):**
* **AUX:** 700mA max. (including PGMs 1-4). Subtract the listed rating for each keypad, expansion module and accessory connected to AUX or Corbus. At least 100mA must be reserved for the Corbus.
* **BELL:** 700mA max. Continuous rating. 2.0A. short term. Available only with standby battery connected. Not for UL/ULC or EN certified applications.
* **HSM2208 AUX:** 250mA. Continuous rating. Subtract for each device connected. Subtract the total load on this terminal from the alarm panel AUX/Corbus output.
* **HSM2108 AUX:** 100mA. Subtract for each device connected. Subtract the total load on this terminal from the panel AUX/Corbus output.
* **PCLink+ (Alt. Com.):** 125mA
* For UL, ULC and Commercial Listed applications, the total standby and alarm current cannot exceed 700mA.
**Capacitance Limits (Corbus):**
| Wire Capacitance per 1000’ (300m) | Total Corbus Wire Length |
|---|---|
| 15nF | 5300’/1616m |
| 20nF | 4000’/1220m |
| 25nF | 3200’/976m |
| 30nF | 2666’/810m |
| 35nF | 2280’/693m |
| 40nF | 2000’/608m |
**Transformer:**
* DSC PTD1640U, PTD1640, PTC1640UG, PTC1640CG
* AC (International Installations): Primary: 220V-240Vac, 50/60Hz, 200mA; Secondary: 16.5VAC/40VA
**Zone Wiring:**
* For UL listed installations use SEOL or DEOL only.
* Minimum 22 AWG wire, maximum 18 AWG.
* Do not use shielded wire.
* Do not exceed 100Ω wire resistance.
**Burglary Zone Wiring Chart (Figures based on maximum wiring resistance of 100Ω):**
| Wire Gauge | Maximum Length to EOL Resistor (ft/meters) |
|---|---|
| 22 | 3000 / 914 |
| 20 | 4900 / 1493 |
| 19 | 6200 / 1889 |
| 18 | 7800 / 2377 |
**AUX Power Wiring:**
* 11.3-12.5VDC/700mA of current (shared with PGM outputs).
* Output is protected; if too much current is drawn, the output is temporarily shut off.
* If using a 12V, 14Ah battery, maximum AUX capacity for 24-hour standby is 470mA.
**PGM Wiring:**
* Min/max operating voltages for devices, sensors and modules is 9.5VDC - 14VDC.
* PGMs switch to ground when activated.
* PGM 1, 3, 4 supply up to 50mA; PGM 2 supplies up to 300mA.
* A relay is required for current levels greater than 50mA or 300mA.
* PGM2 can also be used for 2-wire smoke detectors, 24-hr burglary input alarm.
**Bell Wiring:**
* Supplies 700mA of current at 10.4 - 12.5VDC.
* Bell output is supervised and power limited by 2A thermistor.
* If unused, connect a 1000Ω resistor across Bell+ and Bell- to prevent a trouble.
**Telephone Line Wiring:**
* Use 26 AWG wire minimum.
### Default Codes
* **Installer Code:** (Default: 5555) Used to enter Installer Programming mode.
* **Master Code:** (Default: 1234) Used for arming/disarming, bypassing zones, and other user functions.
* **User Codes:** Programmable by the Master User.
* **Duress Code:** Programmable.
### Fault/Event/Alarm Code Tables
**Trouble Indicators (Accessed via [*][2]):**
* **Trouble 01: Service Required**
* 1: Low Battery
* 2: AC Trouble
* 3: General System Supervisory
* 4: General System Tamper
* 5: General System Fault
* 6: General System Trouble
* 7: General System Supervisory Restore
* 8: General System Tamper Restore
* 9: General System Fault Restore
* 10: General System Trouble Restore
* **Trouble 02: AC Trouble**
* **Trouble 03: Telephone Line Trouble**
* **Trouble 04: Communication Trouble**
* **Trouble 05: General System Supervisory**
* **Trouble 06: General System Tamper**
* **Trouble 07: General System Fault**
* **Trouble 08: General System Trouble**
* **Trouble 09: Wireless Device Low Battery**
* **Trouble 10: Wireless Device Supervisory**
* **Trouble 11: Wireless Device Tamper**
* **Trouble 12: Wireless Device Fault**
### Zone Types and Their Descriptions
**Zone Definitions (Programming Section [001]):**
* **00: Null Zone:** Not used.
* **01: Delay 1:** Entry/Exit delay. Common for main entry doors.
* **02: Delay 2:** Secondary entry/exit delay. Can be used for other entry points.
* **03: Instant:** No entry delay. Triggers alarm immediately. Used for windows, secondary doors.
* **04: Interior Stay/Away:** Active when armed Away, bypassed when armed Stay. Used for motion detectors in living areas.
* **05: Interior Delay:** Similar to Interior Stay/Away, but with an entry delay.
* **06: Day/Night:** Active 24 hours, but can be programmed to be silent during the day and audible at night.
* **07: 24 Hour Burglary:** Always active, triggers immediate alarm. Used for safes, panic buttons.
* **08: 24 Hour Fire (Standard):** Always active, triggers fire alarm. Requires smoke detectors.
* **09: 24 Hour Fire (Delayed):** Always active, triggers fire alarm after a delay. Used to prevent false alarms.
* **10: 24 Hour Supervisory:** Always active, reports supervisory condition (e.g., freezer temperature).
* **11: 24 Hour Gas:** Always active, triggers gas alarm. Requires gas detectors.
* **12: 24 Hour Heat:** Always active, triggers heat alarm. Requires heat detectors.
* **13: 24 Hour Water:** Always active, triggers water alarm. Requires flood detectors.
* **14: 24 Hour Carbon Monoxide:** Always active, triggers CO alarm. Requires CO detectors.
* **15: 24 Hour Medical:** Always active, triggers medical alarm. Used for medical alert buttons.
* **16: 24 Hour Panic:** Always active, triggers panic alarm. Used for panic buttons.
* **17: 24 Hour Emergency:** Always active, triggers emergency alarm.
* **18: Momentary Keypad Zone:** Used for momentary key presses on keypads.
* **19: Latching Keypad Zone:** Used for latching key presses on keypads.
* **20: Key Switch Arm/Disarm:** Used with a key switch to arm/disarm the system.
* **21: Key Switch Momentary Arm:** Used with a key switch for momentary arming.
* **22: Key Switch Latching Arm:** Used with a key switch for latching arming.
* **23: Key Switch Momentary Disarm:** Used with a key switch for momentary disarming.
* **24: Key Switch Latching Disarm:** Used with a key switch for latching disarming.
* **25-128:** Various other zone types for specific applications and expanders.
### Wiring Diagrams and Terminal Descriptions
**Terminal Descriptions:**
* **BAT+, BAT-:** Battery terminals. Use to provide backup power and additional current when system demands exceed the power output of the transformer, such as when the system is in alarm. Do not connect the battery until all other wiring is complete.
* **AC:** Power terminals. Connect the battery before connecting the AC. Do not connect the battery or transformer until all other wiring is complete.
* **AUX+, AUX-:** Auxiliary terminals. Use to power modules, detectors, relays, LEDs, etc. (700mA MAX). Connect the positive side of device to AUX+, the negative side to AUX-.
* **BELL+, BELL-:** Bell/Siren power (700mA MAX). Connect the positive side of any alarm warning device to BELL+, the negative side to BELL-.
* **RED, BLK, YEL, GRN:** Corbus terminals. Use to provide communication between the alarm controller and connected modules. Each module has four Corbus terminals that must be connected to the Corbus.
* **PGM1 to PGM4:** Programmable output terminals. Use to activate devices such as LEDs. (PGM1, PGM3, and PGM4: 50mA PGM2: 300mA or can be configured as an input)
* **Z1 to Z8, COM:** Zone input terminals. Ideally, each zone should have one detection device; however, multiple detection devices can be wired to the same zone.
* **EGND:** Earth ground connection.
* **TIP, RING, T-1, R-1:** Telephone line terminals.
* **PCLINK_1:** DLS/SA
* **PCLINK_2:** DLS/SA, Alternate Communicator
**Wiring Notes:**
* **General:** All national wiring rules must be observed. The wiring (cables) used for installation of the alarm system and accessories, shall be insulated with PVC, TFE, PTFE, FEP, Neoprene or Polyamide. Do not route any wiring over circuit boards.
* **SEOL Wiring:** When SEOL resistors are installed at the end of a zone loop, the alarm panel detects if the circuit is secure, open, or shorted. The SEOL resistor must be installed at the end of the loop for proper supervision. To enable SEOL supervision, program section [013], options [1] and [2] to OFF.
* **DEOL Wiring:** When double end-of-line (DEOL) resistors are installed at the end of a zone loop, the second resistor enables the panel to determine if the zone is in open, closed, tampered or faulted. To enable DEOL supervision, program section [013], option [1] to OFF and option [2] to ON. Any zone programmed for Fire or 24-hr Supervisory must be wired with a SEOL resistor regardless of the type of zone wiring supervision selected for the panel.
* **Telephone Line Wiring:** Wire the telephone connection terminals (TIP, Ring, T-1, R-1) to an RJ-31x connector. For connection of multiple devices to the telephone line, wire in the sequence indicated.
* **Ground Wiring:** Using an insulated green wire (minimum 22AWG), connect the EGND terminal on the Corbus and the grounding wire from the building electrical installation to any of the available holes on the back or side of the metal cabinet.
### Programming Menu Structure
**Basic Programming Access:**
* Enter Installer Programming mode: `[*][8][Installer Code]` (while the system is disarmed).
**Keypad Programming:**
* Programming options are accessed by navigating through the menu (LCD) or by keying in the program section number.
* For toggle options, the name of the option is displayed (LCD) or LEDs 1-8 are illuminated (LED and ICON).
* Use the keypad numbers to toggle options on or off.
* Sections requiring data input, such as phone numbers, display the full data in fields up to 32 characters long (LCD). To input data, use the scroll keys to select a character then press the keypad button corresponding to the number/letter required.
**Quick Setup Programming Examples:**
* **Zone Type/Zone Attribute:** `[001]/[002]`
* **Partition 1 Timers (Entry Delay 1, Entry Delay 2, Exit Delay):** `[005]>[001]`
* **Phone #1:** `[301]>[001]`
* **System Account Code:** `[310]>[000]`
**Module Enrollment:**
* **Auto-enrollment:** `[*][8][Installer Code][902]` subsection `[000]`. Press `[*]` to begin auto-enrollment. Module slots are automatically assigned. Use scroll keys to view slots. Change slot by typing a 2-digit number.
* **Wireless Device Enrollment:** `[*][8][Installer Code][804]` subsection `[000]`. An HSM2HOST or RF keypad must be enrolled first.
* **Pre-Enrollment (Wireless Devices):** Enter each device ID (`[804][001]-[716]`). The device ID is printed on the sticker attached to the device (format: XXX-YYYY). The second step is to press the enrollment button on the device.
* **Confirm Module Enrollment:** Use Installer Programming section `[903]`.
**Template Programming:**
* Use pre-defined templates to quickly apply basic programming and to set up DLS downloading.
* Access via `[899]` at the “Enter Section” screen.
**Testing the System:**
* **Walk Test:** `[901]`
* **Wireless Placement Test:** `[904][000]`
**Function Key Definitions:**
* `[00]` Null Function Key
* `[02]` Instant Stay Arm
* `[03]` Stay Arm
* `[04]` Away Arm
* `[05]` No-Entry Arm `[*][9]`
* `[06]` Chime On/Off
* `[07]` System Test
* `[09]` Night Arm
* `[12]` Global Stay Arm
* `[13]` Global Away Arm
* `[14]` Global Disarming
* `[16]` Quick Exit
* `[17]` Arm Interior
### Expander/Peripheral Devices with Specs
(See
=== WEB RESEARCH: powerseries neo ===
## DSC PowerSeries Neo HS2016 HS2032 HS2064 HS2128 Intruder Alarm Panel - Full Technical Reference
### Product Range and Model Numbers
**Alarm Controllers:**
* HS2016
* HS2016-4
* HS2032
* HS2064
* HS2064 E
* HS2128
* HS2128 E
**Compatible Communicators:**
* 3G2080E
* 3G2080RE
* TL280E
* TL280RE
* LE2080(R)
* TL280LE(R)
* TL2803GE
* TL2803GRE
* TL8803G
* TL880LT
* TL880LE
* PCL-422
**Hardwired Smoke Detectors:**
* 2-wire smoke detectors: y= A, B, or C (A: ULC listed, B: UL listed, C: European and Australian models)
* 4-wire smoke detectors: y= A, B, or C (A: ULC listed, B: UL listed, C: European and Australian models)
* CO detectors: CO-12/24, 12-24SIR, FW-CO12, FW-CO1224, CO1224
**Wireless Devices (PGx series - x denotes frequency: 9 for 912-919 MHz, 8 for 868MHz, 4 for 433MHz):**
* PG smoke detectors: PGx926
* PG smoke and heat detector: PGx936, PGx916
* PG CO detector: PGx933, PGx913
* PG PIR motion detectors: PGx904(P)
* PG PIR + camera motion detector: PGx934(P)
* PG curtain motion detector: PGx924
* PG dual tech motion detector: PGx984(P)
* PG mirror motion detector: PGx974(P)
* PG outdoor motion detector: PGx994
* PG glass break detector: PGx912, PGx922
* PG shock detector: PGx935
* PG flood detector: PGx985
* PG temperature detector (indoor use): PGx905
* Outdoor temperature probe: PGTEMP-PROBE (requires PGx905)
* PG flat PIR: PGx914
* PG recessed Contact: PGx307
* PG ceiling mount detector with Smart Presence – Short Range: PGx862
* PG ceiling mount detector with Smart Presence – Long Range: PGx872
* PG outdoor contact: PGx312
* PG outdoor curtain PIR: PGx902
**Modules:**
* Wireless keypads: HS2LCDWFx, HS2LCDWFPx, HS2LCDWFPVx
* PG keys: PGx939, PGx929
* Hardwired keypads with 2-way wireless integration module: HS2LCDRFx, HS2LCDRFPx, HS2ICNRFx, HS2ICNRFPx
* PG panic key: PGx938
* PG 2-button key: PGx949
* Hardwired keypads: HS2LCD, HS2LCDP, HS2ICN, HS2ICNP, HS2LED
* PG sirens: PGx901, PGx911
* Touchscreen Keypad: HS2TCHP
* PG repeater: PGx920
* 2-way wireless integration module: HSM2HOSTx
* PG door/window contacts: PGx303, PGx975
* PG door/window contact w/ AUX: PGx945
* 8-zone expander: HSM2108
* 8-output expander: HSM2208
* Power supply: HSM2300
* 4 high current output expander: HSM2204
**Central Station Receivers:**
* SG-System I, II, III, IV, 5
**Enclosures:**
* PC5003C, PC4050CR, PC4050CAR, CMC-1, PC4051C. Other enclosures are available to suit a variety of system configurations.
### Technical Specifications
**Corbus Wiring:**
* Minimum 22 gauge quad, two pair twisted preferred.
* Modules can be home run to the panel, connected in series or can be T-tapped.
* Do not use shielded wire for Corbus wiring.
* No module can be more than 1,000'/305m (in wire length) from the panel.
**Corbus Current Calculation Chart:**
| Item | Current (mA) | Quantity | Total (mA) |
|---|---|---|---|
| HS2016/HS2032/HS2064/HS2064 E/HS2128/HS2128 E | 85 | x | |
| HS2LCD | 105 | x | |
| HS2ICN | 105 | x | |
| HS2LED | 105 | x | |
| HS2LCDP | 105 | x | |
| HS2ICNP | 105 | x | |
| HS2LCDRF | 105 | x | |
| HS2ICNRF | 105 | x | |
| HS2ICNRFP | 105 | x | |
| HS2TCHP | 160 | x | |
| HSM2108* | 30 | x | |
| HSM2208* | 40 | x | |
| HSM2300/2204* | 35 | x | |
| HSM2HOSTx | 35 | x | |
| HSM2955** | 85 | x | |
| 3G2080(R)E/TL2803G(R)E/TL280(R)E (PCLINK) | 125 | x | |
*These units draw current from the Corbus to power devices external to the module. This current must be added to the total Corbus current. See manufacturer's specifications for the current draw of each device.
** For HSM2955 current draw refer to HSM2955 installation manual.
**System Output Ratings (12VDC):**
* **AUX:** 700mA max. (including PGMs 1-4). Subtract the listed rating for each keypad, expansion module and accessory connected to AUX or Corbus. At least 100mA must be reserved for the Corbus.
* **BELL:** 700mA max. Continuous rating. 2.0A. short term. Available only with standby battery connected. Not for UL/ULC or EN certified applications.
* **HSM2208 AUX:** 250mA. Continuous rating. Subtract for each device connected. Subtract the total load on this terminal from the alarm panel AUX/Corbus output.
* **HSM2108 AUX:** 100mA. Subtract for each device connected. Subtract the total load on this terminal from the panel AUX/Corbus output.
* **PCLink+ (Alt. Com.):** 125mA
* For UL, ULC and Commercial Listed applications, the total standby and alarm current cannot exceed 700mA.
**Capacitance Limits (Corbus):**
| Wire Capacitance per 1000’ (300m) | Total Corbus Wire Length |
|---|---|
| 15nF | 5300’/1616m |
| 20nF | 4000’/1220m |
| 25nF | 3200’/976m |
| 30nF | 2666’/810m |
| 35nF | 2280’/693m |
| 40nF | 2000’/608m |
**Transformer:**
* DSC PTD1640U, PTD1640, PTC1640UG, PTC1640CG
* AC (International Installations): Primary: 220V-240Vac, 50/60Hz, 200mA; Secondary: 16.5VAC/40VA
**Zone Wiring:**
* For UL listed installations use SEOL or DEOL only.
* Minimum 22 AWG wire, maximum 18 AWG.
* Do not use shielded wire.
* Do not exceed 100Ω wire resistance.
**Burglary Zone Wiring Chart (Figures based on maximum wiring resistance of 100Ω):**
| Wire Gauge | Maximum Length to EOL Resistor (ft/meters) |
|---|---|
| 22 | 3000 / 914 |
| 20 | 4900 / 1493 |
| 19 | 6200 / 1889 |
| 18 | 7800 / 2377 |
**AUX Power Wiring:**
* 11.3-12.5VDC/700mA of current (shared with PGM outputs).
* Output is protected; if too much current is drawn, the output is temporarily shut off.
* If using a 12V, 14Ah battery, maximum AUX capacity for 24-hour standby is 470mA.
**PGM Wiring:**
* Min/max operating voltages for devices, sensors and modules is 9.5VDC - 14VDC.
* PGMs switch to ground when activated.
* PGM 1, 3, 4 supply up to 50mA; PGM 2 supplies up to 300mA.
* A relay is required for current levels greater than 50mA or 300mA.
* PGM2 can also be used for 2-wire smoke detectors, 24-hr burglary input alarm.
**Bell Wiring:**
* Supplies 700mA of current at 10.4 - 12.5VDC.
* Bell output is supervised and power limited by 2A thermistor.
* If unused, connect a 1000Ω resistor across Bell+ and Bell- to prevent a trouble.
**Telephone Line Wiring:**
* Use 26 AWG wire minimum.
### Default Codes
* **Installer Code:** (Default: 5555) Used to enter Installer Programming mode.
* **Master Code:** (Default: 1234) Used for arming/disarming, bypassing zones, and other user functions.
* **User Codes:** Programmable by the Master User.
* **Duress Code:** Programmable.
### Fault/Event/Alarm Code Tables
**Trouble Indicators (Accessed via [*][2]):**
* **Trouble 01: Service Required**
* 1: Low Battery
* 2: AC Trouble
* 3: General System Supervisory
* 4: General System Tamper
* 5: General System Fault
* 6: General System Trouble
* 7: General System Supervisory Restore
* 8: General System Tamper Restore
* 9: General System Fault Restore
* 10: General System Trouble Restore
* **Trouble 02: AC Trouble**
* **Trouble 03: Telephone Line Trouble**
* **Trouble 04: Communication Trouble**
* **Trouble 05: General System Supervisory**
* **Trouble 06: General System Tamper**
* **Trouble 07: General System Fault**
* **Trouble 08: General System Trouble**
* **Trouble 09: Wireless Device Low Battery**
* **Trouble 10: Wireless Device Supervisory**
* **Trouble 11: Wireless Device Tamper**
* **Trouble 12: Wireless Device Fault**
### Zone Types and Their Descriptions
**Zone Definitions (Programming Section [001]):**
* **00: Null Zone:** Not used.
* **01: Delay 1:** Entry/Exit delay. Common for main entry doors.
* **02: Delay 2:** Secondary entry/exit delay. Can be used for other entry points.
* **03: Instant:** No entry delay. Triggers alarm immediately. Used for windows, secondary doors.
* **04: Interior Stay/Away:** Active when armed Away, bypassed when armed Stay. Used for motion detectors in living areas.
* **05: Interior Delay:** Similar to Interior Stay/Away, but with an entry delay.
* **06: Day/Night:** Active 24 hours, but can be programmed to be silent during the day and audible at night.
* **07: 24 Hour Burglary:** Always active, triggers immediate alarm. Used for safes, panic buttons.
* **08: 24 Hour Fire (Standard):** Always active, triggers fire alarm. Requires smoke detectors.
* **09: 24 Hour Fire (Delayed):** Always active, triggers fire alarm after a delay. Used to prevent false alarms.
* **10: 24 Hour Supervisory:** Always active, reports supervisory condition (e.g., freezer temperature).
* **11: 24 Hour Gas:** Always active, triggers gas alarm. Requires gas detectors.
* **12: 24 Hour Heat:** Always active, triggers heat alarm. Requires heat detectors.
* **13: 24 Hour Water:** Always active, triggers water alarm. Requires flood detectors.
* **14: 24 Hour Carbon Monoxide:** Always active, triggers CO alarm. Requires CO detectors.
* **15: 24 Hour Medical:** Always active, triggers medical alarm. Used for medical alert buttons.
* **16: 24 Hour Panic:** Always active, triggers panic alarm. Used for panic buttons.
* **17: 24 Hour Emergency:** Always active, triggers emergency alarm.
* **18: Momentary Keypad Zone:** Used for momentary key presses on keypads.
* **19: Latching Keypad Zone:** Used for latching key presses on keypads.
* **20: Key Switch Arm/Disarm:** Used with a key switch to arm/disarm the system.
* **21: Key Switch Momentary Arm:** Used with a key switch for momentary arming.
* **22: Key Switch Latching Arm:** Used with a key switch for latching arming.
* **23: Key Switch Momentary Disarm:** Used with a key switch for momentary disarming.
* **24: Key Switch Latching Disarm:** Used with a key switch for latching disarming.
* **25-128:** Various other zone types for specific applications and expanders.
### Wiring Diagrams and Terminal Descriptions
**Terminal Descriptions:**
* **BAT+, BAT-:** Battery terminals. Use to provide backup power and additional current when system demands exceed the power output of the transformer, such as when the system is in alarm. Do not connect the battery until all other wiring is complete.
* **AC:** Power terminals. Connect the battery before connecting the AC. Do not connect the battery or transformer until all other wiring is complete.
* **AUX+, AUX-:** Auxiliary terminals. Use to power modules, detectors, relays, LEDs, etc. (700mA MAX). Connect the positive side of device to AUX+, the negative side to AUX-.
* **BELL+, BELL-:** Bell/Siren power (700mA MAX). Connect the positive side of any alarm warning device to BELL+, the negative side to BELL-.
* **RED, BLK, YEL, GRN:** Corbus terminals. Use to provide communication between the alarm controller and connected modules. Each module has four Corbus terminals that must be connected to the Corbus.
* **PGM1 to PGM4:** Programmable output terminals. Use to activate devices such as LEDs. (PGM1, PGM3, and PGM4: 50mA PGM2: 300mA or can be configured as an input)
* **Z1 to Z8, COM:** Zone input terminals. Ideally, each zone should have one detection device; however, multiple detection devices can be wired to the same zone.
* **EGND:** Earth ground connection.
* **TIP, RING, T-1, R-1:** Telephone line terminals.
* **PCLINK_1:** DLS/SA
* **PCLINK_2:** DLS/SA, Alternate Communicator
**Wiring Notes:**
* **General:** All national wiring rules must be observed. The wiring (cables) used for installation of the alarm system and accessories, shall be insulated with PVC, TFE, PTFE, FEP, Neoprene or Polyamide. Do not route any wiring over circuit boards.
* **SEOL Wiring:** When SEOL resistors are installed at the end of a zone loop, the alarm panel detects if the circuit is secure, open, or shorted. The SEOL resistor must be installed at the end of the loop for proper supervision. To enable SEOL supervision, program section [013], options [1] and [2] to OFF.
* **DEOL Wiring:** When double end-of-line (DEOL) resistors are installed at the end of a zone loop, the second resistor enables the panel to determine if the zone is in open, closed, tampered or faulted. To enable DEOL supervision, program section [013], option [1] to OFF and option [2] to ON. Any zone programmed for Fire or 24-hr Supervisory must be wired with a SEOL resistor regardless of the type of zone wiring supervision selected for the panel.
* **Telephone Line Wiring:** Wire the telephone connection terminals (TIP, Ring, T-1, R-1) to an RJ-31x connector. For connection of multiple devices to the telephone line, wire in the sequence indicated.
* **Ground Wiring:** Using an insulated green wire (minimum 22AWG), connect the EGND terminal on the Corbus and the grounding wire from the building electrical installation to any of the available holes on the back or side of the metal cabinet.
### Programming Menu Structure
**Basic Programming Access:**
* Enter Installer Programming mode: `[*][8][Installer Code]` (while the system is disarmed).
**Keypad Programming:**
* Programming options are accessed by navigating through the menu (LCD) or by keying in the program section number.
* For toggle options, the name of the option is displayed (LCD) or LEDs 1-8 are illuminated (LED and ICON).
* Use the keypad numbers to toggle options on or off.
* Sections requiring data input, such as phone numbers, display the full data in fields up to 32 characters long (LCD). To input data, use the scroll keys to select a character then press the keypad button corresponding to the number/letter required.
**Quick Setup Programming Examples:**
* **Zone Type/Zone Attribute:** `[001]/[002]`
* **Partition 1 Timers (Entry Delay 1, Entry Delay 2, Exit Delay):** `[005]>[001]`
* **Phone #1:** `[301]>[001]`
* **System Account Code:** `[310]>[000]`
**Module Enrollment:**
* **Auto-enrollment:** `[*][8][Installer Code][902]` subsection `[000]`. Press `[*]` to begin auto-enrollment. Module slots are automatically assigned. Use scroll keys to view slots. Change slot by typing a 2-digit number.
* **Wireless Device Enrollment:** `[*][8][Installer Code][804]` subsection `[000]`. An HSM2HOST or RF keypad must be enrolled first.
* **Pre-Enrollment (Wireless Devices):** Enter each device ID (`[804][001]-[716]`). The device ID is printed on the sticker attached to the device (format: XXX-YYYY). The second step is to press the enrollment button on the device.
* **Confirm Module Enrollment:** Use Installer Programming section `[903]`.
**Template Programming:**
* Use pre-defined templates to quickly apply basic programming and to set up DLS downloading.
* Access via `[899]` at the “Enter Section” screen.
**Testing the System:**
* **Walk Test:** `[901]`
* **Wireless Placement Test:** `[904][000]`
**Function Key Definitions:**
* `[00]` Null Function Key
* `[02]` Instant Stay Arm
* `[03]` Stay Arm
* `[04]` Away Arm
* `[05]` No-Entry Arm `[*][9]`
* `[06]` Chime On/Off
* `[07]` System Test
* `[09]` Night Arm
* `[12]` Global Stay Arm
* `[13]` Global Away Arm
* `[14]` Global Disarming
* `[16]` Quick Exit
* `[17]` Arm Interior
### Expander/Peripheral Devices with Specs
(See
| Model | Zones | Application |
|---|---|---|
| i-on Compact | 8 zones | Residential / small commercial |
| i-on30 | 30 zones | Small commercial |
| i-on40 | 40 zones | Commercial |
| i-on160 | 160 zones | Large commercial / industrial |
| Scantronic 9448 | 48 zones | Legacy — equivalent to i-on40 |
| Scantronic 9651 | 160 zones | Legacy — equivalent to i-on160 |
| Code Type | Default | Notes |
|---|---|---|
| Engineer Code | 1234 | Full programming access |
| Master Code | 1234 | User management |
| User Code 1 | 1234 | Standard user |
| Zone Type | Description |
|---|---|
| Entry/Exit | Entry route with delay |
| Intruder | Standard alarm zone |
| 24-Hour | Always active |
| PA | Personal attack |
| Fire | Fire detection |
| Tamper | Anti-tamper |
| Keyswitch | External arm/disarm |
| Perimeter | Part-set zone |
| Code / Display | Description | Likely Cause | Action |
|---|---|---|---|
| Zone Fault | Zone open circuit | Wiring break, device failure | Check wiring and device. |
| Zone Tamper | Tamper activated | Lid removed, cable cut | Inspect device. |
| Mains Fail | Mains supply lost | Power cut, blown fuse | Check fuses. |
| Battery Low | Battery below threshold | Battery end of life | Replace battery. |
| Comms Fail | Signalling failure | IP/PSTN fault | Check IP/PSTN settings. |
| Engineer Reset | Engineer reset required | Confirmed alarm | Enter engineer mode and reset. |
| Zone Config | EOL Resistor | Normal | Alarm |
|---|---|---|---|
| EOL | 4k7Ω | 4,700Ω | <500Ω |
| DEOL | 2 × 4k7Ω | 4,700Ω | <500Ω |
| Terminal | Function | Notes |
|---|---|---|
| +12V | Auxiliary power output | 500mA max |
| 0V | Common ground | Must be continuous |
| Z1–Z40 | Zone inputs | EOL or DEOL resistors required |
| BELL+ | Bell/siren positive | Supervised output |
| BELL− | Bell/siren negative | Via tamper capacitor |
| D+ | RS-485 data positive | Twisted pair with D− |
| D− | RS-485 data negative | Twisted pair with D+ |
=== WEB RESEARCH: eaton === **Product: Eaton Scantronic i-on16 Intruder Alarm Panel** === WEB RESEARCH: scantronic === **Product: Eaton Scantronic i-on16 Intruder Alarm Panel** === WEB RESEARCH: i-on === **Product: Eaton Scantronic i-on16 Intruder Alarm Panel** === ADDITIONAL RESEARCH === I-ON RANGE ENGINEERING GUIDE Release 4 Software SYSTEM CAPACITIES i-on16: Zones: 16 Users: 16 Outputs: 14 Areas/Partitions: 1 (Part Setting) Keypads: 4 Expanders: 0 i-on30EX: Zones: 30 Users: 50 Outputs: 40 Areas/Partitions: 4 Keypads: 4 Expanders: 3 i-on40: Zones: 40 Users: 50 Outputs: 14 Areas/Partitions: 4 Keypads: 4 Expanders: 0 i-on50EX: Zones: 50 Users: 100 Outputs: 60 Areas/Partitions: 5 Keypads: 4 Expanders: 5 i-on160EX: Zones: 160 Users: 500 Outputs: 170 Areas/Partitions: 20 Keypads: 20 Expanders: 15 DEFAULT CODES Installer Code: 7890 Master User Code: 1234 ZONE TYPES Normal Alarm Entry Route Final Exit 24 Hour Fire Hold Up Alarm (HUA) Technical Fault Tamper Masking Lock Set Exit Terminate Tamper Return OUTPUT TYPES Bell Strobe O/A (Open/Abort) Confirmed Alarm Fire HUA (Hold Up Alarm) Fault Tamper Set Unset Ready Courtesy Light Installer on Site Duress Code HUA Confirm Lock Set Unlocked Burg Confirm timer HUA Confirm timer PROGRAMMING MENU STRUCTURE Detectors/Devices - Detectors - Expanders - Wired Keypads - Radio Keypads - External Sirens - Info Modules - WAMs Outputs - Bell and Strobe - Wired Outputs - Control Unit Plug-By Outputs - Radio Outputs - Output Types - Programming User Defined Outputs Setting Options and Partitions - Options - Full Set Link - Calendar Set System Options - Wired Zone Type - User Access - User Reset - Confirmation - Profiles - Masking - Mask Override - Language WIRING SPECIFICATIONS Bus Connections: 12V, 0V, D1, D2 Zone Connections: Z1, Z2, Z3, Z4... Output Connections: OP1, OP2, OP3... COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS Fast Format Contact ID SIA COMPLIANCE STANDARDS BS8243 PD6662:2010 EN50131 Grade 2 / Grade 3 SOFTWARE VERSIONS Release 4.00 ANCILLARY DEVICES FOB-2W-4B (Two-way key fob) WAMs (Wireless Accessory Modules) Info Modules External Sirens Wired Keypads Radio Keypads Expandersi-on Series Security System Installation Manual for i-on Compact, i-on30R+, i-on40H+, i-onG2SM and i-onG3MM Issue 1 Control unit software version 6.0.xx --- PAGE BREAK --- © Eaton 2019 The information, recommendations, descriptions and safety notations in this document are based on Eaton Corporation’s (“Eaton”) experience and judgment and may not cover all contingencies. If further information is required, an Eaton sales office should be consulted. Sale of the product shown in this literature is subject to the terms and conditions outlined in appropriate Eaton selling policies or other contractual agreement between Eaton and the purchaser. THERE ARE NO UNDERSTANDINGS, AGREEMENTS, WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR MERCHANTABILITY, OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFICALLY SET OUT IN ANY EXISTING CONTRACT BETWEEN THE PARTIES. ANY SUCH CONTRACT STATES THE ENTIRE OBLIGATION OF EATON. THE CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT SHALL NOT BECOME PART OF OR MODIFY ANY CONTRACT BETWEEN THE PARTIES. In no event will Eaton be responsible to the purchaser or user in contract, in tort (including negligence), strict liability or other-wise for any special, indirect, incidental or consequential damage or loss whatsoever, including but not limited to damage or loss of use of equipment, plant or power system, cost of capital, loss of power, additional expenses in the use of existing power facilities , or claims against the purchaser or user by its customers resulting from the use of the information, recommendations and descriptions contained herein. The information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice. About this Manual This manual explains: The architecture and components of i-on alarm systems. System limits, such as the maximum number of zones and bus devices per control unit. How to plan the installation of an i-on alarm system. How to install an i-on control unit. Note: this information is also available in the installation instructions provided with each control unit. This manual does not cover: The configuration (programming) of control units – this is covered in the Configuration Guide. How to install devices other than the control unit – this is covered in the installation instructions provided with each device. Other Publications The following additional publications are available: i-on Series User Guide (for i-on30R+, i-on40H+, i-onG2SM and i-onG3MM) and i-on Compact User Guide – These provides an overview of the i-on intrusion system, including system components, key features and typical day-to-day tasks for end users. i-on Series Administration and User Manual – This provides detailed information about how to set and unset the system, manage alarms and use the User menu options. Installation Instructions – Included in the packaging of each hardware device (such as a control unit, module or sensor) are concise installation instructions that explain how to install that device. i-on Series Configuration Guide – This gives full details of how to configure (program) i-on control units. It covers all options in the Installer menu. SecureConnect™ Installer Guide – This provides an overview of SecureConnect, explains how to set up the system and describes how to manage control units using the SecureConnect web portal. Page ii --- PAGE BREAK --- Contents About this Manual............................................................................................................. ii Other Publications ............................................................................................................ ii Chapter 1: Introduction .................................................................................. 6 About the i-on range of control units................................................................................. 6 Summary of features .................................................................................................... 6 System bus ...................................................................................................................... 9 Bus address.................................................................................................................. 9 Part-setting and partitioned modes................................................................................... 9 Part-setting mode ......................................................................................................... 9 Partitioned mode......................................................................................................... 10 Grade 2 or grade 3 compliance ...................................................................................... 10 Supported hardware devices .......................................................................................... 11 Keypads...................................................................................................................... 11 Detectors (zones) ....................................................................................................... 13 Expanders .................................................................................................................. 14 Communicators........................................................................................................... 15 Output devices ............................................................................................................ 16 Sounders .................................................................................................................... 16 Cameras ..................................................................................................................... 17 Remote power supplies .............................................................................................. 17 Remote controls.......................................................................................................... 17 WiFi module ................................................................................................................ 17 Other supported radio devices .................................................................................... 18 About SecureConnect .................................................................................................... 18 Updating Firmware ......................................................................................................... 18 Chapter 2: Planning the Installation ............................................................ 19 Choosing the installation locations ................................................................................. 19 Control unit ................................................................................................................. 19 Radio devices ............................................................................................................. 19 Keypads and proximity readers .................................................................................. 19 External sirens ............................................................................................................ 20 Checking power availability ............................................................................................ 20 i-on Compact .............................................................................................................. 20 i-on30R+, i-on40H+, i-onG2SM and i-onG3MM .......................................................... 20 Detector (zone) wiring types ........................................................................................... 22 Fully Supervised Loop (FSL) ...................................................................................... 22 4-wire CC.................................................................................................................... 23 2-wire CC.................................................................................................................... 23 Checking cable requirements ......................................................................................... 23 Standard cable type .................................................................................................... 23 Screened cable ........................................................................................................... 23 Cable segregation....................................................................................................... 24 Mains cable routing..................................................................................................... 24 Cable length and configuration (star or daisy chain) ................................................... 24 Bus termination ........................................................................................................... 24 Voltage drop ............................................................................................................... 25 Using remote power supplies ......................................................................................... 26 Page iii --- PAGE BREAK --- Chapter 3: Installing i-on Control Units ...................................................... 27 Safety Information .......................................................................................................... 27 Pre-Installation Requirements ........................................................................................ 27 i-on Compact Installation Instructions............................................................................. 27 Step 1: Install cables................................................................................................... 29 Step 2: Open the control unit ...................................................................................... 29 Step 3: Mount the control unit ..................................................................................... 29 Step 4: Connect wiring and optional modules ............................................................. 30 Step 5: Connect the battery ........................................................................................ 30 Step 6: Close the lid, switch on and configure the system .......................................... 30 Step 7: Install additional devices................................................................................. 30 i-on30R+/40H+ Installation Instructions.......................................................................... 31 Step 1: Install cables................................................................................................... 31 Step 2: Remove the lid of the control unit ................................................................... 32 Step 3: Fit the tamper switch and shroud ................................................................... 32 Step 4: Mount the control unit ..................................................................................... 32 Step 5: Connect all wired devices ............................................................................... 32 Step 6: Connect the battery ........................................................................................ 33 Step 7: Connect the mains cable ................................................................................ 33 Step 8: Re-fit the lid, switch on and configure the system .......................................... 33 i-onG2SM Installation Instructions .................................................................................. 34 Step 1: Remove the lid of the control unit ................................................................... 34 Step 2: Mount the control unit ..................................................................................... 34 Step 3: Connect all wired devices ............................................................................... 35 Step 4: Connect the battery ........................................................................................ 35 Step 5: Connect the mains cable ................................................................................ 35 Step 6: Re-fit the lid, switch on and configure the system .......................................... 35 i-onG3MM Installation Instructions ................................................................................. 36 Step 1: Remove the lid of the control unit ................................................................... 37 Step 2: Fit the feet and tamper sleeve ........................................................................ 37 Step 3: Fit the tamper switch and shroud ................................................................... 37 Step 4: Mount the control unit ..................................................................................... 37 Step 5: Fit the PCB ..................................................................................................... 38 Step 6: Connect all wired devices ............................................................................... 38 Step 7: Connect the battery ........................................................................................ 38 Step 8: Connect the mains cable ................................................................................ 39 Step 9: Re-fit the lid, switch on and configure the system .......................................... 39 Overview of PCB links, connectors and LEDs ................................................................ 40 a SD card slot ......................................................................................................... 40 b Reset codes link .................................................................................................. 40 c Engineer keypad port .......................................................................................... 40 d Plug-by communicator ports ................................................................................ 40 e Bus devices ......................................................................................................... 40 f Wired outputs ...................................................................................................... 41 g Loudspeaker connections .................................................................................... 41 h Siren/strobe connections ..................................................................................... 41 i Wired zone connections ...................................................................................... 41 j Network port ........................................................................................................ 42 k Kick-start link ....................................................................................................... 42 l Plug-on module connector ................................................................................... 42 m Auxiliary tamper terminals ................................................................................... 42 Page iv --- PAGE BREAK --- n o p q r s RS485 bus termination link .................................................................................. 43 LEDs .................................................................................................................... 43 16.5VAC input ..................................................................................................... 43 External DC input ................................................................................................ 43 WiFi module power .............................................................................................. 43 Mini-B USB port ................................................................................................... 43 Appendix A: Alarms Transmission System ............................................... 44 Overview ........................................................................................................................ 44 GSM and PSTN transmissions ....................................................................................... 44 Mode of operation ....................................................................................................... 44 Transmission monitoring............................................................................................. 44 Internet transmissions .................................................................................................... 45 Mode of operation ....................................................................................................... 45 Transmission monitoring: single-path connection ....................................................... 46 Transmission monitoring: dual-path connection ......................................................... 47 Appendix B: System Maintenance .............................................................. 48 Inspections ..................................................................................................................... 48 Replacing or removing devices ...................................................................................... 48 Removing a plug-on module ....................................................................................... 48 Removing a bus device permanently .......................................................................... 48 Replacing a bus device............................................................................................... 49 Using LEDs for diagnostics ............................................................................................ 49 Appendix C: Specifications .......................................................................... 50 Page v --- PAGE BREAK --- Chapter 1: Introduction About the i-on range of control units The i-on range of control units have been designed to satisfy the most demanding requirements of alarm-systems professionals for domestic, commercial and industrial applications. The control units are flexible, easy to install and robust. The i-on range supports wired, wirefree or hybrid applications. The modular approach of i-on alarm systems allows the design to match site requirements and maximise cost-efficiency. Five different models of control unit are available for different sizes and types of application: i-on Compact. This is a radio (wire-free) solution for domestic applications. The i-on Compact has a built-in keypad and supports up to 20 radio zones (detectors). i-on30R+. This provides on-board support for 30 radio zones, and supports a system maximum of 60 zones. Any combination of radio and wired zones can be used. The i-on30R+ uses a plastic enclosure. i-on40H+. This provides on-board support for 30 radio zones and 10 wired zones, and supports a system maximum of 80 zones. The i-on40H+ uses a plastic enclosure. i-onG2SM. This provides on-board support for 10 wired zones, and supports a system maximum of 50 zones. The i-onG2SM is compliant with grade 2 (as are all control units in the range), and uses a Small Metal (SM) enclosure. i-onG3MM. This provides on-board support for 10 wired zones, and supports a system maximum of 200 zones. The i-onG3MM is grade compliant, and uses a Medium Metal (MM) enclosure. Summary of features The i-on range of control units feature: Grade 2 compliance for all control units; grade 3 compliance for the i-onG3MM. A bus for connection to devices such as wired keypads and expanders (not i-on Compact). Expanders provide additional zones up to the system maximum shown in Table 1. An on-board radio transceiver (not i-onG2SM and i-onG3MM), which has a range of up to 500m and supports devices such as radio detectors, Scantronic radio siren/strobe units and radio outputs. Sockets for an optional plug-on communicator (required for grade 2/3). Terminals for a plug-by communicator (depending on the control unit). Cloud access using the freely-available SecureConnect™ application. SecureConnect provides web access for installers to configure the system, allows users to operate the system remotely from a mobile app, and carries out background tasks such as to send alarm notifications by email or over the internet to an ARC. Page 6 --- PAGE BREAK --- Introduction An Ethernet port for optional use of the web interface, network cameras and SecureConnect™. The ability to configure the system using: o A standard keypad on the bus (not i-on Compact). o A engineer keypad connected directly to the engineer keypad port (not i-on Compact). o The control unit’s built-in web interface, optionally via SecureConnect. A micro-SD card for local mass storage of images from network cameras, and for updating system firmware. Support for multiple partitions (not i-on Compact). On-board outputs and wired zones (depending on the control unit). On-board connections for a wired siren/strobe unit (not i-on Compact). On-board connections for an external loudspeaker (not i-on Compact). Table 1 specifies the features and system limits for each control unit. i-onG2SM i-onG3MM EN 50131 security grade 2 2 2 2 3 Max on-board radio zones 20 30 30 0 0 Max on-board wired zones (Note 6) 0 0 10 10 10 Max zones on expanders, keypads, etc. 0 30 40 40 190 Max wired and radio zones (system wide) 20 60 80 50 200 RS485 Buses 0 1 1 1 2 Max bus devices (Note 8) 0 20 20 20 50 Max on-board radio outputs 20 10 10 0 0 On-board transistor outputs 0 2 2 1 2 On-board relay outputs 0 0 2 0 2 Max outputs on expanders, keypads, etc. 0 30 40 50 200 On-board plug-by outputs 0 0 12 12 16 On-board siren\strobe connections No Yes Yes Yes Yes Max custom outputs 0 4 4 5 20 Devices Ports Outputs Bus Zones Feature i-on30R+ i-on40H+ i-on Compact Table 1: Overview of features Max outputs (system wide) (Note 5) 20 30 40 50 200 Ethernet port Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Plug-on module port Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes USB port Yes No No No No On-board loudspeaker connections 0 1 1 1 1 Micro SD card slot Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Max wired keypads (Note 2) 0 20 20 20 50 Max i-rk01 and KEY-RAS radio keypads (Note 3) 2 4 4 5 20 Max external radio siren\strobe units (Note 4) 2 4 4 5 20 Max network cameras 2 4 4 5 20 Page 7 --- PAGE BREAK --- Software Case Introduction Max internal radio sounders (Note 4) 2 4 4 5 20 Max Wireless Access Modules 2 4 4 5 20 Control unit case Plastic Plastic Plastic Metal Metal Battery (Note 7) 1 (2.2Ah) 1 (7Ah) 1 (7Ah) 1 (7Ah) 1 (17Ah) Power Supply Unit (PSU) 0.5A 1.0A 1.0A 1.0A 2.0A PSU current reserved for battery charging 100mA 180mA 180mA 180mA 750mA Back and lid tamper Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Users 20 30 50 50 200 Part sets (including per partition in partitioned mode) 3 3 3 3 3 Max partitions (see Note 1) 0 4 4 5 20 Mandatory log events 250 750 750 750 1500 Non-mandatory log events 50 250 250 750 1500 Calendar set events 0 10 10 10 50 Calendar set exceptions 0 30 30 30 30 Max shunt groups 0 4 4 5 20 Max simultaneous keypad sessions 1 4 4 5 10 Web interface Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes SecureConnect and web browser interface Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Firmware update via web interface, cloud auto update, or SD card Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Firmware update via USB port Yes No No No No Multilanguage support (-EU variant) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Note 1: Each partition can have three part-set levels. Partitions are not available for i-on Compact. Note 2: The maximum number of wired keypads is the same as the maximum number of bus devices, but decreases by one for each expander or KEY-RKPZ that is added. A KEY-RKPZ is a radio keypad that uses a KEY-RKBS base station wired to the bus. Up to two KEY-RKPZ keypads can connect to the same base station, but this feature cannot be used to increase the total number of keypads beyond the limit shown in Table 1. Note 3: The maximum number of i-rk01 and KEY-RAS radio keypads is in addition to the maximum number of wired keypads. Note 4: The maximum number of external radio siren/strobe units is in addition to the maximum number of internal radio sounders. Note 5: The system-wide maximum number of outputs includes on-board radio outputs, on-board relay and transistor outputs and outputs provided by expanders, keypads and other peripherals. It does not include plug-by outputs. Note 6: The maximum number of on-board zones is for Fully-Supervised Loop (FSL) or 2-wire Closed Circuit (CC) wiring. If 4-wire CC wiring is used, the maximum number of on-board zones is halved, unless an optional ADP-10CC board is fitted. Note 7: The maximum sizes of batteries are given. A battery is supplied only for i-on Compact. Note 8: The i-onG3MM has two busses. The limit of 50 devices is the combined total of all devices on both busses. You cannot connect 50 devices to each bus. Page 8 --- PAGE BREAK --- Introduction System bus All control units except the i-on Compact have a system bus to connect devices such as wired keypads, expanders, remote power supplies and base stations (for KEY-RKPZ keypads). The i-onG3MM has two busses. The bus architecture allows the system to be easily expanded to accommodate additional devices if the need arises. Devices can connect to a bus using a "daisy chain" or star layout, as shown in Figure 1. Figure 1. Daisy chain and star connections Bus address Each device has a unique bus address. A device obtains its address from the control unit either during the commissioning stage of a new installation, or when the installer adds the device from the Installer menu. The control unit assigns the lowest-available address. Each device stores its address in non-volatile memory. For the i-onG3MM, the address is unique across both busses, so unlike previousgeneration i-on systems, the same address does not exist in both busses. The system As an installer, you have complete flexibility to add a device to either bus. A benefit of the twobus i-onG3MM is that if there is a cable fault on one bus, it does not affect the other bus. Part-setting and partitioned modes All control units except i-on Compact offer part-setting and partitioned modes. The i-on Compact offers part-setting mode only. Part-setting mode In part-setting mode, the control unit can set in one of four ways: either full set or one of three part sets (part set B, C or D). Each zone can belong to one or more part sets (using the Part Set attribute). When the system is full set, the control unit sets all zones, irrespective of the part set they belong to. When part set, the control unit sets only those zones that belong to the part set. In a part-setting system, the control unit responds to just one keypad at a time. Page 9 --- PAGE BREAK --- Introduction Partitioned mode In partition mode, the control unit provides the equivalent of a set of smaller, independent alarm systems known as “partitions”. You can allocate one or more zones to each partition. Each partition can have a full-set level and up to three part-set levels. During system configuration, you can allocate keypads, sirens, sounders or outputs to any of the partitions. The fact that each zone can belong to more than one partition may produce unexpected results for users of the system. When designing a system, note that a zone will only be armed when ALL of the partitions that it belongs to are set. If a user unsets any of the partitions that a zone belongs to, the control unit will unset that zone. Table 1 specifies the number of partitions supported by each control unit. For partitioned systems, users can use more than one keypad at the same time, provided that they are in separate partitions. Within each partition, the control unit responds to just one keypad at a time. The number of simultaneous keypad sessions each control unit can handle at any one time is shown in Table 1. Grade 2 or grade 3 compliance All of the control units are suitable for use in systems conforming to security grade 2 requirements. The i-onG3MM can be used in either security grade 2 or 3 alarm systems. During initial power up (and if you reset a system to factory defaults), you can choose grade 2 or 3, which automatically sets various system options for either grade 2 or grade 3 compliance. Grade 2: The system uses four-digit user codes, turns masking off, sets System Options – User Options – User Reset – Zone Tampers to Yes, and communicates tampers as alarms. If you install any radio devices, this will limit approval to grade 2 in the partition in which they are used. For a part-setting system, the whole system will be limited to grade 2. For grade 2, you must fit at least an ATS2 communicator (for example the COM-SDPSTN). Grade 3: The system uses six-digit user codes, turns masking on, sets System Options – User Options – User Reset – Zone Tampers to No. The system communicates tampers as tampers. For grade 3, you must use the plug-by communicator outputs to connect the control unit to an ATS4 communicator. The communicator must be able to transmit a mainsfail condition. Note: If the system uses radio HUDs, and no other radio transmitters, the system can be approved as grade 3, provided the rest of the system meets grade 3 standards. You can override any of the settings by selecting individual options in other parts of the Installer Menu. Note that if you do so, the system may no longer comply with the selected Grade. Page 10 --- PAGE BREAK --- Introduction Supported hardware devices This section gives an overview of the purpose of each type of additional hardware device. Keypads Keypads are used by installers to configure the system, and by users to set or unset the system. The i-on30R+, i-on40H+, i-onG2Sm and i-onG3MM can use radio keypads, or wired keypads connected to the system bus. The i-on Compact has a built-in keypad, and can also use radio keypads. The various types of keypad are described in the following sections. Table 1 specifies the number of keypads supported by each control unit. Table 2 on page 12 shows the features supported by each type of keypad. Note: Do not install internal and external proximity readers closer than one meter to any other type of proximity reader, otherwise the devices may not work correctly. Wired keypads Wired keypads (not available for i-on Compact) connect to the bus. There are several different models of wired keypads that offer different styling and features: KEY-K01 A wired keypad only. i-kp01 A wired keypad with built-in proximity reader. KEY-KP01 A wired keypad, with a built-in proximity reader, and terminals for a KEY-EP external proximity reader. KEY-KPZ01 A wired keypad, with built-in proximity reader, two on-board zones, one programmable output, and terminals for a KEY-EP external proximity reader. KEY-FKPZ A wired flush-mount keypad, with built-in proximity reader, two on-board zones, one programmable output, terminals for an external loudspeaker, and terminals for a KEY-EP external proximity reader. The keypad is available in a range of colours and finishes. Radio keypads i-RK01 A one-way battery-powered radio keypad for setting/unsetting, with a builtin proximity reader. This keypad communicates directly to a control unit that has built-in radio communications, or to a radio expander. KEY-RKPZ A two-way battery-powered radio keypad, with built-in proximity reader, LCD display and two on-board zones. This keypad communicates over a radio link to a base station connected to the bus, which acts as a communications bridge between the keypad and the control unit. You can use a KEY-RKPZ in the same way as a wired keypad to configure the system, set or unset the system, etc. KEY-RAS A two-way radio keypad that can be used to set/unset the system, display the current set/unset status, and to sound entry, exit and alarm tones. The keypad also features a built-in proximity reader, and can be powered by batteries or from an external DC supply. This keypad communicates directly to a control unit that has built-in radio communications, or to a radio expander. Page 11 --- PAGE BREAK --- Introduction Summary of keypad features KEY-KP01 KEY-KPZ01 KEY-FKPZ KEY-RAS i-on Compact keypad Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No - Radio keypad No No No No No Yes Yes Yes - Built-in proximity reader No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes KEY-EP external proximity reader terminals No No Yes Yes Yes No No No No Zones 0 0 0 2 2 0 0 2 - Outputs 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 - Loudspeakers 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 - Two-line by 20-character backlit LCD display Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Illuminated four-way switch (the “navigation key”), which is used to navigate through menus Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes LEDs behind the navigation key to show the fault status of the system Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Numeric keypad for entering access codes and keying in text Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Dedicated A, B, C and D keys, which can be programmed to set individual partitions or part sets (as applicable), or allocated to control outputs. Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Keys for “yes”, “no” functions Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Unset key Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Hold-Up Alarm (HUA) keys Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes User menu key and an automatic timeout from the user menu Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Internal sounder to give setting tones, alarm sounds, etc Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Backlit keys Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes KEY-RKPZ i-kp01 Wired keypad i-RK01 Feature KEY-K01 Table 2: Keypad features Engineering keypad An engineering keypad (not available for i-on Compact) is a modified wired keypad that can be plugged into a dedicated connector on the control unit or on any expander. You can use an engineer keypad to configure the system, rather than a keypad on the bus. An engineer keypad does not need an address. Before opening the control unit and plugging in an engineering keypad, enter your installer code at another standard keypad. Once you have plugged in the engineering keypad, other keypads are deactivated. You cannot exit the Installer menu from an engineer keypad, so after you have finished, you will need to disconnect the engineer keypad and exit the Installer menu from a standard keypad. Page 12 --- PAGE BREAK --- Introduction KEY-EP external proximity tag reader A KEY-EP external proximity tag reader can connect to a KEY-KP01, KEY-KPZ01 or KEY-FKPZ keypad to enable the system to be to set or unset externally. Many keypads also include an internal proximity tag reader. Detectors (zones) Detectors are the physical devices that detect alarm conditions. A zone is the lowest-level item within the intrusion system that can be set or unset. Note: Although it is possible to connect detectors in series and therefore to have more than one detector in the same zone, it is not normal practice. Instead, there is normally only one detector per zone and for this reason, detectors are often referred to as "zones" within the intrusion system. Table 1 shows the number of zones supported by each control unit. Wired detectors Wired detectors can connect (using standard alarm cable) to some models of control unit (see Table 1), wired expanders, keypads and remote power supplies, as described in the previous sections. Please refer to page 22 for details of the different wiring methods you can use for wired detectors. Note: If 4-wire CC wiring is used, this may reduce the available number of zones; see page 23. All wired detectors with contacts that open and close are supported, as there is no protocol involved. Radio detectors Radio detectors can communicate directly to control units that have built-in radio communications, or to radio expanders. Table 1 specifies the number of radio zones that each control unit supports. The following radio detectors are supported: DET-RDC Slimline door contact DET-REXT-PIR30 External perimeter PIR DET-REXT-IR50/100 Barrier detectors DET-RS Shock or movement detector XCELR PIR XCELRPT Pet-tolerant PIR DET-RDT Combined microwave and PIR detector 720rEUR-00 Smoke detector DET-RSMOKE Smoke Detector 705REUR-00 Hand-held dual-channel transmitter 706rEUR-00 10mW tilt switch and personal attack transmitter. 710rEUR-00 Dual-button personal attack transmitter Page 13 --- PAGE BREAK --- Introduction 713rEUR-00 Pet-tolerant PIR 714rEUR-00 PIR 726rEUR-50 Long-range hand-held personal attack transmitter 726rEUR-60 Short-range hand-held personal attack transmitter 734rEUR-00 CC door contact - white 734rEUR-01 FSL door contact - white 734rEUR-05 CC door contact - brown 734rEUR-06 FSL door contact - brown 738rEUR-00 Spyder shock sensor – white 738rEUR-04 Spyder shock sensor – brown DET-RDCS Spyder shock sensor and door contact combined 739rEUR-00 Sentrol glass-break without tamper DET-RWATER Flood detector DET-RARB Request-for-assistance button 703R Universal transmitter Expanders Expanders provide additional connections for zones, outputs and loudspeakers, up to the limits specified in Table 1 (not available for i-on Compact). Wired expanders Wired expanders connect directly to the bus. The EXP-W10 is supported, which provides connections for: Ten FSL, 4-wire CC or 2-wire CC zones. One wired loudspeaker. Four wired programmable outputs Note: Previous-generation EXP-W10 expanders allow only five 4-wire CC zones. The new EXP-W10 is displayed as "EXP-WCC" in the menus. Radio expanders Radio expanders communicate directly to the control unit. EXP-R10 and EXP-R30 radio expanders are supported. The EXP-R10 provides 10 zones for radio detectors, and the EXP-R30 provides 30. Each radio expander also supports: Two i-RK01 or KEY-RAS radio keypads. Two external radio sirens. Two internal radio sounders. Two Wireless Accessory Modules (WAMs). One wired loudspeaker. The maximum number of expanders, detectors, keypads and WAMs on a system depends on control unit; see Table 1. Page 14 --- PAGE BREAK --- Introduction Note: The maximum number of radio detectors also depends partly on the density of radio transmitters within a given volume. Radio expanders must be at least 1 metre apart. Communicators Plug-by (digital communicator) All control units except i-on Compact and i-on30R+ include a built-in plug-by communicator, which allows the system to communicate externally to an alarms-receiving site using a separate digital communicator (purchased separately). Table 1 shows the number of plug-by outputs available on each control unit. By default, the outputs are switched negative (from 12Vdc to 0V) when active. You can program these outputs to be switched positive (from 0V to 12Vdc) when active. Note: SIA IP (SIA over the network) is available by connecting the control unit to the internet and configuring SIP IP communications in SecureConnect. Plug-on modules All control units can also communicate externally using a plug-on module. the following plug-on modules are supported: COM-SD-PSTN A speech dialler and PSTN (Public Switched Telephone Network) module. This allows control units to report alarm conditions over a wired telephone network using standard ARC protocols (FF, SIA or CID), recorded speech messages or SMS texts. COM-SD-GSM A speech dialler and GSM (Global System for Mobile communication) module. This allows control units to report alarm conditions over a 2G mobile phone network using standard ARC protocols (FF, SIA or CID), recorded speech messages or SMS texts. A SIM card is required. Preferably, a "pay-as-you-go" tariff should not be used. Note: The use of GSM for ARC communication is not recommended, as the networks often distort the audio tones, which can cause the communication to fail. If you use GSM and experience difficulties, try a different format (such as Contact ID). Alternatively, IP communications via an optional COM-DATA-4G plug-on module will provide a more robust and reliable solution. COM-DATA-4G The COM-DATA-4G module allows a control unit to access the SecureConnect service over the internet using LTE and GSM (4G and 2G) mobile phone networks. A SIM card is required that supports 4G and 2G data. A data allowance of 250MB per month should be sufficient to cover normal activity in a typical installation. Preferably, a "pay-as-you-go" tariff should not be used. The COM-SD-GSM and COM-DATA-4G have a built-in antenna, which is suitable in most cases. If the location of the control unit has poor signal strength, an external antenna (COM-ANT-01) can be purchased, which must be fitted outside of the control unit. Page 15 --- PAGE BREAK --- Introduction Output devices Devices such as indicators, lighting systems or third-party equipment can be switched on or off using "outputs" available from the i-on system. You can configure outputs in the Installer menu to control the external devices when, for example there is an alarm in a specified zone, mains is disconnected or a combination of specified conditions occur. The following types of output are available: Wired outputs. These are available on some control units, keypads, expanders and remote power supplies, depending on the model used. Table 1 shows the number of wired outputs available on each control unit. There are two types of wired output: o Transistor (open collector) – By default, these are switched negative (from 12Vdc to 0V) when active; you can program them to be switched positive (from 0V to 12Vdc). o Relay – These provide voltage-free changeover contacts. You connect one side of the external device to the C (Common) terminal, and the other to either NO (Normally Open) or NC (Normally Closed) side of the relay, depending on the application. Radio outputs. These connect directly to a control unit that has built-in radio communications, or to a radio expander. Dedicated outputs on the control unit for a siren/strobe unit (not available for i-on Compact) – see the next section. Plug-by outputs (not available for i-on Compact or i-on30R+), used for communicating alarms to an Alarms Receiving Centre (ARC); see page 15. Sounders Sounders indicate alarms, entry tones, exit tones and other conditions. A sounder is built into the i-on Compact control unit and into all types of keypad except the i-RK01. There are various types of additional sounders, as described next. External wired siren/strobe units All control units except i-on Compact provide connections to drive a standard wired siren/strobe unit in Self-Activating Bell (SAB) or Self-Contained Bell (SCB) mode. Expanders also provide connectors for additional external wired sounders. The following external wired siren/strobe units are supported: SDR-WEXT-G2 Wired Grade 2 Siren. SDR-WEXT-G3 Wired Grade 3 Siren. Third-party units With compatible connections. External radio sirens/strobes Radio siren/strobe units can communicate directly to control units that have built-in radio communications, or to radio expanders. Table 1 specifies the number of external radio siren/strobe units that each type of control unit can support. The following external radio siren/strobe units are supported: 760ES External radio sounder. SND-REXT External radio siren/strobe unit. Page 16 --- PAGE BREAK --- Introduction Internal radio sounders SND-RINT internal radio sounders are intended for use in areas that are out of audio range of keypads, but where users need to hear system sounds. Internal radio sounders can communicate directly to control units that have built-in radio communications, or to radio expanders. Table 1 specifies the number of internal radio sounders that each type of control unit can support. Loudspeakers Control units (except i-on Compact), expanders and remote power supplies have connections for a loudspeaker, which you may want to use to increase the volume or location of setting and unsetting tones. The loudspeaker must have an impedance of 16 Ohms. You must not connect two loudspeakers in parallel to the same port. Cameras You can configure the system to store images from a network camera when an alarm occurs. The following network cameras are supported: CAM-INT-00 Internal box camera wired/Wi-Fi. CAM-EXT-00 External bullet camera wired/Wi-Fi. A micro-SD card is required to store the camera images. Remote power supplies The EXP-PSU remote power supply is supported, which provides: Extra power and more space for standby batteries in larger alarm systems. Connections for either 10 FSL zones, five 4-wire CC zones, or 10 2-wire CC zones. A loudspeaker output. Four wired programmable outputs. 16 plug-by outputs. The EXP-PSU connects to the system bus (see page 26), and communicates with the control unit in the same way as a wired expander. Remote controls A remote control allows the system to be set or unset using a keyfob (similar to a device for locking/unlocking a vehicle). The following devices are supported: i-FB01 Remote control. FOB-2W 2-Way remote control. WiFi module An i-wifi01 module allows any i-on control unit to connect wirelessly to the network. The module is mounted inside the control unit and connects to the Ethernet port. Page 17 --- PAGE BREAK --- Introduction Other supported radio devices The following radio devices are also supported: DET-RSURV01 Radio Site Survey Tool. 770REUR-00 Wireless Accessory Module (WAM). 762REUR-00 Radio receiver. 768REUR-00 Radio receiver. About SecureConnect Any i-on control unit can connect to the internet to access the SecureConnect service. The key features of SecureConnect include the following: SecureConnect enables installers to remotely configure, manage and monitor multiple control units using a web browser over the internet. Users can remotely operate their alarm system using the SecureConnect app. The SecureConnect service can keep the time at control units automatically updated, send emails (including camera images) automatically when events occur, and report alarms to an Alarms Receiving Centre (ARC) over the internet. Updating Firmware You can upgrade the control unit's firmware in one of several different ways: Over the internet − When you enter the Installer menu, you are prompted whether to upgrade the firmware if Level 4 Update is enabled in the Installer and User menus. Via an SD card − If the firmware is loaded in an INSTALL folder on the SD card, you can upgrade the firmware using the Panel Upgrade option. Using the control unit's web interface. For i-on Compact, by connecting the mini-USB port to a Windows computer that is installed with the i-on Update Utility software. For European versions, the utility also allows alternate language text files for the keypad display to be installed. Page 18 --- PAGE BREAK --- Chapter 2: Planning the Installation Choosing the installation locations When planning the installation, consider the following recommendations concerning the locations of where to install the control unit and other devices. Control unit The control unit must be located: Within the protected area (but not in an entry or exit zone). Upright (battery at the bottom for all except i-on Compact) on a wall or other flat surface to discourage tamper attempts from the rear. Out of sight of potential intruders. Ideally, more than 2 metres from the floor. Where maximum cable distances will not be exceeded (see page 24). Radio devices Carry out a radio survey using the DET-RSURV01 Survey Tool to confirm that there will be sufficient signal strength between the planned location of radio devices and the control unit or radio expanders. Do not locate any radio device, control unit (with built-in radio capability), or radio expander: Near to any source of electromagnetic or radio interference. Within 1 metre of high-voltage cables, metal pipes, computers, photocopiers, or other electrical or electronic equipment. In a location where maximum radio range will be exceeded. In a metal enclosure or close to large metal structures. Keypads and proximity readers Keypads and proximity readers should be located at a convenient height. Keypads must be within the area protected by the intrusion system and ideally out of sight of potential intruders. Proximity readers or any keypad containing a proximity reader must not be located: Within 1 metre of another proximity reader (including one located within another keypad). Behind a door, coat rack or other covering. Page 19 --- PAGE BREAK --- Planning the Installation External sirens These must be located out of reach of intruders and vandals, but must be easily visible for maximum deterrence. Checking power availability EN50131-1 or PD6662 Grade 2 requires the backup battery to be able to power the system for at least 12 hours. Grade 3 requires the backup battery to power the system for at least 30 hours. In both cases, the duration must including two 15-minute periods in alarm. i-on Compact For an i-on Compact, the backup battery (when fully charged) meets the requirements of EN50131-1 or PD6662 Grade 2. Note: The 12Vdc output in an i-on Compact is not backed up by the battery. Therefore, a WiFi module powered by the 12Vdc output will not operate during a mains power failure. i-on30R+, i-on40H+, i-onG2SM and i-onG3MM For these control units, you must make sure that: a) The control unit's power supply will have sufficient capacity to power all connected devices. The i-on30R+, i-on40H+, i-onG2SM have a 1.0A power supply, of which 180mA is reserved for battery charging. The i-onG3MM has a 2.0A power supply, of which 750mA is reserved for battery charging. b) The backup battery can provide sufficient power in the event of a mains failure. If there is insufficient power available from the control unit or backup battery, consider the use of remote power supplies (see pages 17 and 26). When considering the power drawn, include the control unit's PCB and all peripherals powered by the control unit, including any output devices (12V and 14.4V), plug-on/plug-by communicator, bus devices and wired detectors. Table 3 gives a summary of the current consumed by the i-on control unit PCBs and popular peripheral devices. Table 3: Current Consumptions Device Current Consumption (In Alarm) i-on30R+ PCB Quiescent: 80mA In alarm: 90mA i-on40H+ PCB Quiescent: 90mA In alarm: 110mA i-onG2SM PCB Quiescent: 90mA In alarm: 110mA i-onG3MM PCB Quiescent: 100mA In alarm: 150mA COM-SD-PSTN Quiescent: 20mA In alarm: 30mA COM-SD-GSM Quiescent: 15 mA Page 20 --- PAGE BREAK --- Planning the Installation In alarm: 140mA COM-DATA-4G Quiescent: 15 mA In alarm: 240mA Wired expander 20mA (no sounder connected) Wired PIR 15mA KEY-FKPZ keypad Quiescent: 25mA In alarm: 65mA i-kp01 keypad Quiescent: 30/40/60mA (backlight off/on/bright respectively) In alarm: 45/45/65mA (backlight off/on/bright respectively) KEY-KPZ01, KEY-KP01 or KEY-K01 keypad Quiescent: 35mA (backlight off, no external proximity reader) In alarm: 65mA (backlight on, external proximity reader fitted) KEY-RKBS two-way keypad base station 35mA (buzzer off) Quiescent: 35mA SDR-WEXT external siren/strobe In alarm: 225mA Worked example The following shows a simplified example of checking power availability. Device (quiescent) Control unit PCB (i-on30R+) COM-SD-PSTN 10 x PIRs at 15mA each 1 x wired expanders 2 x KEY_FKPZ at 25mA each (backlights off) Siren Total Current 80mA 20mA 150mA 20mA 50mA 35mA 355mA During an alarm, the current consumptions are: Device (in alarm) Control unit PCB (i-on30R+) COM-SD-PSTN 10 x PIRs at 15mA each 1 x wired expanders 2 x KEY_FKPZ at 65mA each Siren Total Current 90mA 30mA 150mA 20mA 130mA 225mA 645mA Since the control unit's power supply can provide 820mA (excluding battery charging), the above shows that the power supply is able to power the system during an alarm (645mA). The total amp-hours required for the battery for Grade 2 is: (0.355A x 11.5h) + (0.645A x 0.5h) = 4.41Ah A fully-charged, 7Ah battery can provide the charge required by the above example to meet Grade 2 requirements. Page 21 --- PAGE BREAK --- Planning the Installation Detector (zone) wiring types Before installation, you need to choose the wiring type (method) to use for any wired detectors: Fully-Supervised Loop (FSL), 4-wire Closed Circuit (CC), or 2-wire CC, as described below. The latest EXP-W10 wired expander allows you to mix FSL and 4-wire CC on the same expander. Other devices, including the control unit itself, require you to use the same wiring type for all wired detectors connected to the same device. You will need to ensure that all detectors are wired correctly and that you select the default wiring type during the initial power-up procedure. If necessary, you can edit the wiring type for individual devices. The wiring types are as follows. Fully Supervised Loop (FSL) This uses a single pair of wires for each detector, with resistors at the end of the line and across the alarm contact (Figure 2). The resistors allow the system to monitor for shortcircuit or open-circuit conditions to guard against cable tampering. Alarm EOL Tamper Figure 2. FSL connections (using 2k2 and 4k7 resistors) The End-of-Line (EOL) and alarm contact resistors can be any of the following values (respectively): 2k2 and 4k7, 1k and 1k, 2k2 and 2k2, or 4k7 and 4k7. The resistance bands for FSL are as shown in Table 4. Table 4: FSL Resistor Bands (without Masking) Zone State 2k2/4k7 FSL 1k/1k FSL 2k2/2k2 FSL 4k7/4k7 FSL Tamper 0k0 – 1k759 0k0 - 0k799 0k0 – 1k759 0k0 – 3k759 Normal 1k76 – 4k08 0k8 - 1k4 1k76 - 3k08 3k76 - 6k58 Alarm 4k081 – 8k28 1k401 - 2k4 3k081 - 5k28 6k581 - 11k28 Tamper > 8k28 >2k4 >5k28 >11k28 If a detector is able to report masking, connect the detector as shown in Figure 3. The detector must signal masking by closing both the Alarm and Fault contacts together. If the detector closes the Fault contact only, the control unit reports this as a detector fault. Page 22 --- PAGE BREAK --- Planning the Installation Tamper Mask Alarm Alarm Fault/trouble Fault EOL Tamper Normal Tamper Figure 3. FSL connections with masking 4-wire CC This uses a separate pair of wires for the alarm and tamper contacts. No end-of-line resistors are used. Selecting 4-wire CC may halve the maximum number of wired zones the device supports, as shown in Table 5. An ADP-10CC board can be fitted to the control unit to convert the ten FSL zones (if available) to ten 4-wire CC zones. Without the board fitted, the control unit supports five 4-wire CC zones. If you are using an ADP-10CC board, select 2-wire FSL 2k2/4k7 as the wiring type. Table 5: 4-Wire CC Zones Equipment FSL or 2-wire CC 4-wire CC Panel with 10 on-board zones 10 zones 5 zones EXP-PSU and original EXP-W10 10 zones 5 zones EXP-WCC and new EXP-W10 10 zones 10 zones Keypad with 2 on-board zones 2 zones 1 zone 2-wire CC This uses a single pair of wires for each detector. No end-of-line resistors are used. Checking cable requirements Standard cable type Normally, the control unit requires standard 7/0.2 un-screened 4-core alarm cable for wiring to bus devices and wired siren/strobe units. For bus cabling, use one pair for data lines A and B. Use the other pair for 12V and 0V. Screened cable For maximum performance in environments where there is electromagnetic noise, use twisted-pair screened cable with a characteristic impedance of 100-120 Ohms, such as Belden 8132 or cable designed for RS485. Page 23 --- PAGE BREAK --- Planning the Installation If screened cable is required: 1. Avoid earth loops by connecting the screen on the cable to mains earth at the control unit but not at the keypad or expander. 2. The continuity of the cable screen is most important and screens MUST be continuous along the full length of the cable. 3. Where the cable enters any metal enclosure, ensure the screen is isolated from the case. Cable segregation Segregate bus cabling from any other wiring, such as mains cables, telephone cables, computer network cables and R.F. cables. Keep bus cables clear of cables supplying sounders, extension loudspeakers or any other high-current devices. Mains cable routing Use separate cable-entry holes in the enclosure for mains and signal cables. Please refer to the figures in Chapter 3: Installing i-on Control Units for details of the holes to use for each type of cable. Mains cable must be routed away from any aerials in the enclosure (i-on Compact and ion30R+ only). For i-on Compact, please refer to Figure 7 on page 29. For i-on30R+, please refer to Figure 11 on page 32. Cable length and configuration (star or daisy chain) You can connect devices either in daisy chain (serially), or in star (parallel) configuration at the control unit connector (Figure 4). For star configurations, the cable length from control unit to the most distant bus device should be kept short, and should not exceed 100m. There should be no more than four arms in the star. For a daisy-chain configuration, the total cable length should not exceed 1,000m. Note that if there are only two arms in a star configuration, this is equivalent to a daisychain configuration. Bus termination In some cases, the ends of the bus may need to be terminated to improve performance in electrically noisy environments or where there are long cable runs. The control unit and bus devices have a termination link on their PCB. Fitting a jumper to the link adds a termination to the cable. In a daisy-chain configuration, fit the termination jumpers in the devices at each end of the chain. In a star configuration, terminate at the two devices on the ends of the longest cables (Figure 4). Page 24 --- PAGE BREAK --- Planning the Installation Figure 4. Bus termination Voltage drop In order for the system to work correctly, the voltage at each bus device must NOT drop below 10.5V (even when running on the standby battery), and preferably should stay above 12.0V to avoid unexpected behaviour. For a wired detector, the minimum voltage is generally 9.5V, but this depends on the detector type (see the detector instructions). Standard 7/0.2 alarm cable has a resistance of 8 Ohms per 100m per core. The voltage drop is calculated using the following formula: V drop = Current drawn x cable length x 0.08 x 2. Table 6 shows the voltage drop against the current drawn and cable length. The shaded area shows where the voltage drop would cause the voltage to fall from 13.8V to below 12.0V when using a single core. Page 25 --- PAGE BREAK --- Planning the Installation Table 6: Voltage drop along cable Current Drawn 60mA 80mA 100mA 120mA 140mA 160mA 180mA 200mA 220mA 240mA 260mA 280mA 300mA 320mA 340mA 360mA 380mA 400mA Cable Length (Standard 7/0.2 alarm cable) 10m 0.10V 0.13V 0.16V 0.19V 0.22V 0.26V 0.29V 0.32V 0.35V 0.38V 0.42V 0.45V 0.48V 0.51V 0.54V 0.58V 0.61V 0.64V 20m 0.19V 0.26V 0.32V 0.38V 0.45V 0.51V 0.58V 0.64V 0.70V 0.79V 0.83V 0.90V 0.96V 1.02V 1.09V 1.15V 1.22V 1.28V 30m 0.29V 0.38V 0.48V 0.58V 0.67V 0.77V 0.86V 0.96V 1.06V 1.15V 1.25V 1.34V 1.44V 1.55V 1.63V 1.73V 1.82V 1.92V 40m 0.38V 0.51V 0.64V 0.79V 0.90V 1.02V 1.15V 1.28V 1.41V 1.54V 1.66V 1.79V 1.92V 2.05V 2.18V 2.30V 2.43V 2.56V 50m 0.48V 0.64V 0.80V 0.96V 1.12V 1.28V 1.44V 1.60V 1.76V 1.92V 2.08V 2.24V 2.40V 2.56V 2.72V 2.88V 3.04V 3.20V 60m 0.58V 0.79V 0.96V 1.15V 1.34V 1.54V 1.73V 1.92V 2.11V 2.30V 2.50V 2.69V 2.88V 3.07V 3.26V 3.46V 3.65V 3.84V 70m 0.67V 0.90V 1.12V 1.34V 1.57V 1.79V 2.02V 2.24V 2.46V 2.69V 2.91V 3.14V 3.36V 3.58V 3.81V 4.03V 4.26V 4.48V 80m 0.77V 1.02V 1.28V 1.54V 1.79V 2.05V 2.30V 2.56V 2.82V 3.07V 3.33V 3.58V 3.84V 4.10V 4.35V 4.61V 4.86V 5.12V 90m 0.86V 1.15V 1.44V 1.74V 2.02V 2.30V 2.59V 2.88V 3.17V 3.46V 3.74V 4.03V 4.32V 4.61V 4.90V 5.18V 5.47V 5.76V 100m 0.96V 1.28V 1.60V 1.92V 2.24V 2.56V 2.88V 3.20V 3.52V 3.84V 4.16V 4.48V 4.80V 5.12V 5.44V 5.76V 6.08V 6.40V You can reduce voltage drop using either or both of these methods: Double-up the supply connections (12V and 0V). This will halve the resistance on each core and therefore halve the voltage drop. Supply power to the detection devices from the control unit's Aux output using two additional cores in the cable (that is, use 6-core cable). This reduces the current drawn from the bus connections and is the preferred method of reducing voltage drop, since detectors generally operate at lower voltages (9.5V). If you cannot reduce voltage drop sufficiently along a bus, install one or more remote power supplies, as described next. Note that if detectors connect to expanders or other bus devices, the current along the bus is the total of the current drawn by the bus devices and detectors. Using remote power supplies When voltage drop along a bus cable exceeds requirements, or the demand on the control unit's power supply exceeds its capacity, you should install one or more EXP-PSU remote power supplies. Figure 5 shows the recommended method of connecting a remote power supply. It should be fitted close to the equipment it is powering. Device 1 Device 2 Device 3 Remote PSU B A 0V 12V Bus 12V 0V A B Figure 5. Connecting a remote power supply Page 26 Device 4 --- PAGE BREAK --- Chapter 3: Installing i-on Control Units This chapter explains how to install each type of control unit. Note: The instructions in this chapter are the same as those to be found in the Installation Instructions enclosed provided with each control unit. Safety Information This product must be installed by qualified service personnel. WARNING: BEFORE INSTALLING THIS EQUIPMENT, ENSURE THAT THE MAINS SUPPLY FOR THE CONTROL UNIT IS DISCONNECTED AND ISOLATED. All electrical connections must be carried out by a qualified electrician and comply with current local regulations. WARNING: When connected to the mains with power applied, mains voltages are present on the shrouded heads of the terminal screws of the mains connector. WARNING: The mains cable to the control unit must use a double-pole isolation device in accordance with EN 62368-1. WARNING: Good practice requires that documentation is not stored within the enclosure. Caution: If you need to handle the PCB in the control unit, take standard precautions to prevent damage by static electricity. Exposure to radio-frequency radiation: The radiated output power of this device is within those levels considered safe by European exposure limits. Nevertheless, when fitting the product, place it in such a manner as to minimise the potential for human contact during normal operation. To minimise exposure, users should be more than 200mm from the device during normal operation. Pre-Installation Requirements Before starting the installation, make sure that you have followed all the requirements specified in Chapter 2: Planning the Installation. This includes checking the power requirements, checking cable requirements and performing a radio survey (if applicable). i-on Compact Installation Instructions During installation, please refer to Figure 6 and to Overview of PCB links, connectors and LEDs on page 40. Page 27 --- PAGE BREAK --- Installing i-on Control Units Fit a screw through the back-tamper breakout Fixing hole (1 of 3) i-on Compact Battery Location for WiFi module Mains terminal block Cable entry Fuse holder Fixing hole (2 of 3) q External DC input Fixing hole (3 of 3) r WiFi module connections Power supply connector Battery connector k Kick-start link o 12V LED o 3V3 LED o RFTX LED o HEARTBEAT LED b Reset codes link s Mini-B USB l Plug-on module socket j Network port o Link/Activity LED a SD card slot For engineering use only Sounder Tamper switch Aerial Aerial Figure 6. i-on Compact: Control unit Internals Page 28 --- PAGE BREAK --- Installing i-on Control Units Step 1: Install cables Make sure mains cables are routed away from the internal aerials, as shown in Figure 7. Use only the dedicated cable-entry holes, as shown in Figure 6. Do not mount mains cable behind the aerials Figure 7. i-on Compact: Mains cable routing Step 2: Open the control unit 1. Remove the screw located at the top of the lid. 2. Insert a small screwdriver into the screw recess and use it to lever open the lid, as shown in Figure 8 (the lid is hinged at the bottom). Note: When the control unit is firmly fixed to a wall, you should be able to open the lid without using a lever by releasing the screw and pulling the lid downwards. Figure 8. i-on Compact: Opening the lid Step 3: Mount the control unit Use minimum 36mm long No8/4mm screws through the three fixing holes and backtamper breakout shown in Figure 6. Important: Make sure you fit a screw through the back-tamper breakout. This enables the system to generate a tamper alarm in the event that the control unit is wrenched off the wall. Do not cut the webs on the breakout. Page 29 --- PAGE BREAK --- Installing i-on Control Units Step 4: Connect wiring and optional modules WARNING: ENSURE THAT THE MAINS SUPPLY IS DISCONNECTED AND ISOLATED. Connect a 2-core mains cable to the mains terminal block (Figure 6) and fit a strain-relief cable tie. Confirm the mains cable is routed as shown in Figure 7. Do not apply power until after the lid is closed (Step 6). Fit any optional modules and other wiring to the main PCB as shown in Figure 6. DO NOT CONNECT THE BATTERY UNTIL STEP 5. If you are using a plug-on module, connect the device as described in the module’s installation instructions. If you are using a WiFi module, mount the module in the location shown in Figure 6. Step 5: Connect the battery The battery pack provides at least 12 hours of operation in the event of a power fail. Fit the battery and power supply connector to the PCB, as shown in Figure 6. Step 6: Close the lid, switch on and configure the system WARNING: An alarm tone may be generated when you apply power. If anyone is working near a siren, make sure that any sudden noise does not startle them and cause a fall, such as from a ladder. Close the lid, refit the screw, then switch on the mains supply to the control unit. Go through the initial configuration prompts and set up the system as described in the Configuration Guide. You are prompted to specify default master user and installer codes, and whether to enable Basic or Full configuration. Basic enables faster and simpler configuration and should be considered if connection to an Alarm Receiving Centre (ARC) is not required. It is recommended that you connect the control unit to the internet and enable "Level 4 Update" in the installer and user menus. When you enter your installer code, the system can then check online whether later versions of the firmware or language file exist, and prompt you to install them. Please refer to the Configuration Guide for further details. Step 7: Install additional devices Install PIRs, door contacts, siren/strobe units, internal sounders and other required devices as described in the installation instructions provided with each device. Page 30 --- PAGE BREAK --- Installing i-on Control Units i-on30R+/40H+ Installation Instructions During installation, please refer to Figure 9 and to Overview of PCB links, connectors and LEDs on page 40. l Plug-on module socket m Auxiliary tamper For engineering use only Connect tamper switch n RS485 bus termination a SD card slot o HB LED o 3V3 LED i-on40H+ or i-on 30R+ Connect transformer o LNK/ACT LED b Reset codes link c Engineer keypad port Connect battery lead k Kick-start link j Network port i Zones 0 to 9 (i-o40H+ only) d Plug-by communicator ports (i-o40H+ only) Output device h Siren/strobe unit. Note: If a wired siren/strobe unit is not fitted, connect TR to 0V. f Opencollector outputs e Bus devices (20 max) 0V/12Vdc outputs f Relay outputs (i-on40H+ only) Bus device 1 (e.g. keypad) g Loudspeaker Figure 9. i-on30R+ and i-on40H+: Control unit PCB Step 1: Install cables Use only the dedicated cable-entry holes, as shown in Figure 10. For an i-on30R+, make sure mains cables are routed away from the internal aerials, as shown in Figure 11. Fixing holes PCB Signal cable entry Fixing holes Mains cable entry Mains terminals Figure 10. i-on30R+ and i-on40H+: Fixing holes and cable entries Page 31 --- PAGE BREAK --- Installing i-on Control Units Do not mount mains cable behind the aerials Figure 11. i-on30R+ and i-on40H+: Mains cable routing Step 2: Remove the lid of the control unit Release the two screws on the front of the lid, then lift it off. Step 3: Fit the tamper switch and shroud Fit the tamper switch assembly through the slot in the back of the case (Figure 12). Also, for added security, fit the tamper shroud to the wall so that when you mount the control unit, the shroud will surround the arm of the tamper switch. Tamper switch: Ensure correct orientation Case of control unit Tamper shroud (fit to wall, long axis vertical) Tamper sleeve Figure 12. i-on30R+ and i-on40H+: Fitting the tamper switch and shroud Step 4: Mount the control unit Mount the control unit in the orientation shown in Figure 10 using at least 4 fixing holes and minimum 40mm long No10(5mm) screws. Use only the designated cable-entry holes. Step 5: Connect all wired devices Connect all wired devices except the battery, as shown in Figure 9. If you are using a plug-on module, fit and connect the device as described in the module’s installation instructions. Page 32 --- PAGE BREAK --- Installing i-on Control Units Step 6: Connect the battery Note: Connecting the battery does not start the system. Fit a 7Ah lead-acid battery in the bottom-right corner of the control unit and secure with a strap provided. Connect the battery leads to the battery (red to positive and black to negative), and connect the other end to the PCB (Figure 9). Also connect the transformer lead to the PCB (Figure 9). Step 7: Connect the mains cable WARNING: ENSURE THAT THE MAINS SUPPLY IS DISCONNECTED AND ISOLATED. Connect the mains cable to the terminal block (Figure13) and fit a strain-relief tie. Confirm the mains cable is routed as shown in Figure 11. Do not apply power until after the lid is re-fitted. Figure 13. i-on30R+ and i-on40H+: Mains connections Step 8: Re-fit the lid, switch on and configure the system WARNING: During initial power-up, keypad sounders and any internal loudspeaker may give an alarm tone. If you are working at the top of a ladder, make sure that the sudden noise does not startle you and cause a fall. Re-fit the lid, then switch on the mains supply to the control unit. Go through the initial configuration prompts and set up the system as described in the Configuration Guide. You are prompted to specify installer and user codes during initial system configuration. It is recommended that you connect the control unit to the internet and enable "Level 4 Update" in the installer and user menus. When you enter your installer code, the system can then check online whether later versions of the firmware or language file exist, and prompt you to install them. Please refer to the Configuration Guide for further details. Page 33 --- PAGE BREAK --- Installing i-on Control Units i-onG2SM Installation Instructions During installation, please refer to Figure 14 and to Overview of PCB links, connectors and LEDs on page 40. Connect transformer Connect battery lead n RS485 bus termination p 16.5VAC input k Kick-start link Bus device 1 (e.g. keypad) i-onG2SM g Loudspeaker m Auxiliary tamper c Engineer keypad port e Bus devices (20 max) h Siren/strobe unit. Note: If a wired siren/strobe unit is not fitted, connect TR to 0V. o LNK/ACT LED j Network port o 3V3 LED f Open-collector output For engineering use only 0V/12Vdc outputs o HB LED a SD card slot d Plug-by communicator ports b Reset codes link i Zones 0 to 9 l Plug-on module socket Figure 14. i-onG2SM: Control unit PCB Step 1: Remove the lid of the control unit Release the two screws on the front of the lid, then lift it off. Step 2: Mount the control unit Mount the control unit in the orientation shown in Figure 15 using the three fixing holes and minimum 40mm long No8 (4mm) screws. Use only the designated cable-entry holes. Page 34 --- PAGE BREAK --- Installing i-on Control Units Mains terminals Mains cable entry Signal cable entry Fixing holes Figure 15. i-onG2SM: Fixing holes and cable entries Step 3: Connect all wired devices Connect all wired devices except the battery, as shown in Figure 14. If you are using a plug-on module, fit and connect the device as described in the module’s installation instructions. Step 4: Connect the battery Note: Connecting the battery does not start the system. Fit a 7Ah lead-acid battery in the bottom-left corner of the control unit. Connect the battery leads to the battery (red to positive and black to negative), and connect the other end to the PCB (Figure 14). Also connect the transformer lead to the PCB (Figure 14). Step 5: Connect the mains cable WARNING: ENSURE THAT THE MAINS SUPPLY IS DISCONNECTED AND ISOLATED. Connect the mains cable to the terminal block (Figure 16) and fit a strain-relief tie. Do not apply power until after the lid is re-fitted. Figure 16. i-onG2SM: Mains connections Step 6: Re-fit the lid, switch on and configure the system WARNING: During initial power-up, keypad sounders and any internal loudspeaker may give an alarm tone. If you are working at the top of a ladder, make sure that the sudden noise does not startle you and cause a fall. Page 35 --- PAGE BREAK --- Installing i-on Control Units Re-fit the lid, then switch on the mains supply to the control unit. Go through the initial configuration prompts and set up the system as described in the Configuration Guide. You are prompted to specify installer and user codes during initial system configuration. It is recommended that you connect the control unit to the internet and enable “Level 4 Update” in the installer and user menus. When you enter your installer code, the system can then check online whether later versions of the firmware or language file exist, and prompt you to install them. Please refer to the Configuration Guide for further details. i-onG3MM Installation Instructions During installation, please refer to Figure 17 and to Overview of PCB links, connectors and LEDs on page 40. Connect battery lead Connect transformer Connect tamper switch h Siren/strobe unit. Note: If a wired siren/strobe unit is not fitted, connect TR to 0V. k Kick-start link g Loudspeaker o LNK/ ACT LED o 3V3 LED j Network port Output device f Relay outputs 1 and 2 l Plug-on module socket m Auxiliary tamper For engineering use only f Open-collector outputs i Zones 0 to 9 o HB LED 0V/12Vdc outputs i-onG3MM Bus 1 device (e.g. keypad) n Bus 1 RS485 termination n Bus 2 RS485 termination c Engineer keypad port a SD card slot b Reset codes link e Bus 1 devices Bus 2 device (e.g. keypad) e Bus 2 devices d Plug-by communicator ports Figure 17. i-onG3MM: Control unit PCB Page 36 --- PAGE BREAK --- Installing i-on Control Units Step 1: Remove the lid of the control unit Release the screw on the front of the lid, then lift it off. Step 2: Fit the feet and tamper sleeve Fit the supplied plastic feet and tamper sleeve to the bottom of the case, as shown in Figure 18. Figure 18. i-onG3MM: Fitting the feet and tamper sleeve Step 3: Fit the tamper switch and shroud Fit the tamper switch assembly through the slot in the case (Figure 19). Also, for added security, fit the tamper shroud to the wall so that when you mount the control unit, the shroud will surround the arm of the tamper switch. Tamper switch: Ensure correct orientation Case of control unit Tamper shroud (fit to wall, long axis vertical) Tamper sleeve Figure 19. i-onG3MM: Fitting the tamper switch and shroud Step 4: Mount the control unit Mount the control unit in the orientation shown in Figure 20 using at least 4 fixing holes and minimum 50mm long No10(5mm) screws. Use only the designated cable-entry holes. Page 37 --- PAGE BREAK --- Installing i-on Control Units Fixing holes Mains terminals Mains cable entry Location for PCB Signal cable entry Fixing holes Figure 20. i-onG3MM: Mounting holes and cable entries Step 5: Fit the PCB Fit the PCB into the case as shown in Figure 21. Secure with a supplied M3x8mm screw Figure 21. i-onG3MM: Fitting the PCB Step 6: Connect all wired devices Connect all wired devices except the battery, as shown in Figure 17. If you are using a plug-on module, fit and connect the device as described in the module’s installation instructions. Step 7: Connect the battery Note: Connecting the battery does not start the system. Fit the lead-acid battery in the bottom-left corner of the control unit. Connect the battery leads to the battery (red to positive and black to negative), and connect the other end to the PCB (Figure 17). Also connect the transformer lead to the PCB (Figure 17). Page 38 --- PAGE BREAK --- Installing i-on Control Units Step 8: Connect the mains cable WARNING: ENSURE THAT THE MAINS SUPPLY IS DISCONNECTED AND ISOLATED. Connect the mains cable to the terminal block (Figure 22) and fit a strain-relief tie. Do not apply power until after the lid is re-fitted. Figure 22. i-onG3MM: Mains connections Step 9: Re-fit the lid, switch on and configure the system WARNING: During initial power-up, keypad sounders and any internal loudspeaker may give an alarm tone. If you are working at the top of a ladder, make sure that the sudden noise does not startle you and cause a fall. Re-fit the lid (Figure 23), then switch on the mains supply to the control unit. Figure 23. i-onG3MM: Re-fitting the lid Go through the initial configuration prompts and set up the system as described in the Configuration Guide. You are prompted to specify installer and user codes during initial system configuration. It is recommended that you connect the control unit to the internet and enable “Level 4 Update” in the installer and user menus. When you enter your installer code, the system can then check online whether later versions of the firmware or language file exist, and prompt you to install them. Please refer to the Configuration Guide for further details. Page 39 --- PAGE BREAK --- Installing i-on Control Units Overview of PCB links, connectors and LEDs The following sections provide information about the links, connectors and LEDs shown in Figures 6 to 17. a SD card slot A micro-SD card can be used to store camera images from a compatible network camera, or to upgrade firmware or languages. b Reset codes link You can use this link to reset the installer and all user codes (e.g. in the event that codes have been forgotten). All proximity tags, hold-up devices and remote controls are also deleted. Please refer to the Configuration Guide for details of how to use this link. c Engineer keypad port Note: Not available in i-on Compact. You can use an engineer keypad to configure the system, rather than a keypad on the bus. An engineer keypad does not need an address. d Plug-by communicator ports Note: Not available in i-on30R+ and i-on Compact. You can connect a plug-by communicator to these ports using an optional MISCCOMPACK12 wiring harness (available separately). By default, the outputs are 0V when active, and 12Vdc when inactive. Please refer to the Configuration Guide for the default output type used for each output and programming details. Connect LF (Line Fail) to an output from the communicator that is 12Vdc when communicator detects that there is a communications fault to the ARC, and 0V when no fault is present. If a dual-path (landline and mobile) communicator is used, such as a RedCARE STU, reprogram one of the plug-by outputs to type ATS Test, and wire that to the ATS Test input of the communicator. Also connect Line Fail to the Line Fail output of the communicator, as above. This is needed to comply with BSIA Form No. 175, April 2005. The control unit generates an “ATE LF Single” alert if one network is unavailable, or “ATE LF All” if both are unavailable. Connect RR (Remote Reset) to an output from the communicator that indicates to the control unit that a user can reset the system after a system tamper. The input must be 12Vdc for at least 100ms to indicate the reset, and 0v normally. For further details, see “Remote Reset (Redcare Reset)” in the Configuration Guide. Note: During system commissioning, confirm with the ARC that the communicator is working correctly. e Bus devices Note: Not available in i-on Compact. Devices such as keypads and expanders can connect to the system bus. The installation instructions supplied with each device provide details of how to install and configure the device. The address of each device is set by the control unit. Page 40 --- PAGE BREAK --- Installing i-on Control Units Please refer to Table 1 on page 7 for details of the number of devices that can connect to the bus, and to page 23 for guidance about bus cabling. See also “RS485 bus termination link” and “Engineer keypad port” in this section. f Wired outputs Note: Not available in i-on Compact. Wired outputs can be used to switch external equipment on or off. Relay outputs (if available) are voltage-free. Connect to the common terminal and to either the NC (Normally Closed) or NO (Normally Open) terminal, as required. Open-collector (transistor) outputs are, by default, 12Vdc when inactive and 0V when active (this can be reversed from the Installer menu). Note: Radio outputs can also be used if the control unit has built-in radio communications (i-on40H+, i-on30R+ and i-on Compact), or if a radio expander is used (not available for ion Compact). g Loudspeaker connections Note: Not available in i-on Compact. If fitted, a loudspeaker mimics alarm tones and repeats setting and entry tones. The loudspeaker must be min 16 Ohms. Note: A loudspeaker is not a warning device as described by EN50131-4. You can set the loudspeaker volume and partitions from the Installer menu. h Siren/strobe connections Note: Not available in i-on Compact. Please refer to the installation instructions provided with the siren/strobe unit for connection details. Note: Scantronic radio siren/strobe units can be used instead of, or in addition to, a wired unit (requires a radio expander if the control unit does not have built-in radio communications). i Wired zone connections Note: Not available in i-on30R+ and i-on Compact. You can connect up to 10 wired detectors (0 to 9) using the Fully-Supervised Loop (FSL), 4-wire Closed Circuit (CC) or 2-wire CC wiring method (Figure 24). You must use the same method for all detectors connected to the control unit. If 4-wire CC is used, the number of zones is halved. To maintain ten 4-wire CC zones, fit an ADP-10CC board and configure the resistance setting of each zones as 2k2/4k7. For any method, the total wiring and switch resistance must be less than 100 Ohms (EOL resistor shorted in the case of FSL). By default, the system assumes normally-closed contacts. Detectors with normally-open contacts must be programmed with the “Inverted” attribute set. Note: If you are using a detector with an anti-mask contact, use 2k2 EOL, 4k7 alarm, and 2k2 anti-mask resistors; see the Configuration Guide. Page 41 --- PAGE BREAK --- Installing i-on Control Units 4-Wire CC Wiring 2-Wire CC Wiring Tamper Zone 0 Zone 1 Alarm Zone 0 Zone 0 FSL Wiring (default) Alarm Supported resistor values (± 5%) EOL Tamper Tamper EOL Zone 1 Zone 0 EOL Alarm 2k2 1k0 2k2 4k7 4k7 (default) 1k0 2k2 4k7 Alarm Alarm Alarm Tamper Tamper This shows how to connect more than one FSL detector to a single zone (not recommended - the location of alarms may be difficult to determine). Figure 24. Zone wiring j Network port Connecting to a network allows you to, for example, configure the control unit using the web interface, use network cameras to capture images when an alarm occurs, and use the SecureConnect application (e.g. for app cloud connectivity, or to send alarm notifications by email or to an ARC). Note: The control unit’s network settings are configured from the Installer menu. k Kick-start link Ordinarily, the control unit starts only after the mains supply is switched on, even if a battery is connected. If you want to operate the control unit temporarily using only the battery, start the control unit by briefly shorting this link. l Plug-on module connector COM-SD-PSTN, COM-SD-GSM and COM-DATA-4G plug-on modules enable the control unit to communicate over a landline or mobile network. This can be used to send alarm information to an ARC, direct speech/text alarm messages to an administrator, or to allow users to control the system using the SecureConnect mobile application. Please refer to page 15 for further details about the modules. m Auxiliary tamper terminals Note: Not available in i-on Compact. These terminals can be used to monitor the tamper status of other equipment. Use a 2k2 End-of-Line (EOL) resistor in series with the tamper contact (Figure 25). Ensure that a 2k2 resistor is fitted across the auxiliary tamper terminals if they are not used. Page 42 --- PAGE BREAK --- Installing i-on Control Units AUX TAMP 2k2 Figure 25. Auxiliary tamper wiring n RS485 bus termination link Note: Not available in i-on Compact. If a single daisy chain of devices is connected to the bus connector, and the control unit is at one end of the chain, fit a jumper across the bus termination link in the control unit and in the last device on the bus. The i-onG3MM has one termination link for each bus connector. RS485 termination can improve performance in electrically noisy environments. Please refer to page 24 for further guidance. o LEDs 3V3 (and 12V in i-on Compact): Lit when the internal power supply is functioning. HB (heartbeat): Flashes approximately once every two seconds to indicate normal operation. LNK/ACT (LINK/ACTIVITY): Flashes when the control unit is connected to the network and there is network activity. RFTX (i-on Compact only): Lit when there is radio transmission. p 16.5VAC input Note: Available only in i-onG2SM. This input can be used to instead of the standard 3-pin push-fit transformer connector to provide 16.5VAC power to the PCB. Typically, it is used when upgrading an i-on30EX to an i-onG2SM. q External DC input Note: Available only in i-on Compact. You can power the control unit using an external 10-15Vdc power supply connected to the DC IN and 0V terminals. r WiFi module power Note: Available only in i-on Compact. You can use these terminals to provide power to an optional WiFi module. You can mount the module in the space provided on the backplate (see Figure 6). Note: The backup battery does not provide power to these terminals in the event of a mains failure. s Mini-B USB port Note: Available only in i-on Compact. You can connect a PC to this port and use the Update Utility to update the firmware. Page 43 --- PAGE BREAK --- Appendix A: Alarms Transmission System This appendix documents the manufacturer’s information requirements of EN 50136-2. Overview The control units incorporate an Alarms System (AS) and an integral Supervised Premises Transceiver (SPT). The SPT can be configured to use: PSTN or GSM, via an optional COM-SD-PSTN or COM-SD-GSM module. Note: Please refer to the important note on page 15 regarding the use of GSM for ARC communications Internet protocols, via the built-in Ethernet capability or an optional COM-DATA-4G plug-on module (which is also cabable of switching to 2G). GSM and PSTN transmissions Mode of operation Alarms from the AS are transmitted, via the SPT, in a pass-through mode of operation by forwarding them directly to the alarm receiving centre via its Receiving Centre Transceiver (RCT). If an alarm transmission is unsuccessful, the following event is logged: “PSTN Alarm Fail" – for PSTN communications. “GSM Alarm Fail"– for GSM communications. The SPT attempts to send unsuccessful alarm transmissions until the retry sequence has expired, and if still unsuccessful, the alarm transmissions are tagged for repeat transmission with the next alarm. Acknowledgments of successful alarm transmissions received from the RCT are forwarded to the AS via the SPT. Transmission monitoring The Primary ATP can be either the PSTN or the GSM connection. Monitoring the integrity of the transmission system is performed in two stages: 1. The transmission network interface is monitored as follows: PSTN – the local connection from the SPT to the PSTN network is verified by monitoring the line voltage. GSM – the local connection from the SPT to the GSM network is verified by periodically checking the signal strength and registration to a service provider. Note: the SPT does not check the credit on PAYG SIMs, or the provider's contract validity. Page 44 --- PAGE BREAK --- Alarms Transmission System 2. If the transmission network interface connection fails, the following transaction are logged: PSTN – “PSTN Line Fault" (the keypad also changes status from green to red). When the connection is restored, another transaction is logged: "PSTN Line Restored". GSM – “GSM Line Fault" (the keypad also changes status from green to red). When the connection is restored, another transaction is logged: "GSM Line Restored". The Alarm Transmission System (ATS) is monitored by making a test call to check the complete system. (The test call must be configured as either dynamic or static.) The following is the sequence of logged events for a successful test call: "Alarm Test Call" (this logged event triggers the test call) "Test call success" For an unsuccessful test call: "Alarm Test Call" "Test Call Fail" Internet transmissions Mode of operation Alarms from the AS are transmitted, via the SPT, in a store-and-forward mode of operation. For a SIA IP Direct connection: The SPT forwards the transmission directly to the SecureConnect servers. The SecureConnect servers store the transmission. The SecureConnect servers forward the stored transmission directly to the alarm receiving centre via its Receiving Centre Transceiver (RCT). For a CSL DualCom connection: The SPT forwards the transmission directly to the SecureConnect servers. The SecureConnect servers store the transmission. The SecureConnect servers forward the transmission to the CSL DualCom Gemini Network, and CSL Dual Com passes the transmission onto the alarm receiving centre via its Receiving Centre Transceiver (RCT). The SPT maintains a continuous connection to the SecureConnect servers and attempts to send unsuccessful alarm transmissions as follows: SPT to SecureConnect Servers – If an alarm transmission is unsuccessful from the SPT to the SecureConnect servers and the retry sequence has expired, the following event is logged at the SPT: “Cloud Push Fail". If the connection to the SecureConnect servers is not available at the time the transmission is due to be transmitted, the transmission is held at the SPT until a connection to the SecureConnect servers can be re-established. Acknowledgments of successful alarm transmissions received from the SecureConnect servers are forwarded to the AS via the SPT. Page 45 --- PAGE BREAK --- Alarms Transmission System SecureConnect Servers to Receiving Centre Transceiver (RCT) – If an alarm transmission is unsuccessful from the SecureConnect servers to the Receiving Centre Transceiver (RCT), no response is received at the end of the retry sequence. Acknowledgments of successful alarm transmissions received from the RCT are forwarded to the SecureConnect servers and logged. SecureConnect Servers to CSL Dual Com – If an alarm transmission is unsuccessful in transmitting from the SecureConnect servers to CSL Dual Com, the following event is logged at the SecureConnect Servers at the end of the retry sequence: “No response from CSL". Acknowledgments of successful alarm transmissions received from the RCT are forwarded to the SecureConnect servers and logged. Transmission monitoring: single-path connection The Primary ATP can be either the Ethernet connection or the 4G/2G mobile connection. For a single-path Ethernet connection, no COM-SD-GSM module must be fitted. For a single-path 4G/2G connection, the COM-SD-GSM module's "Data Mode" setting must be set to "Mobile Only". Monitoring the integrity of the transmission system is performed in two stages: 1. 2. The transmission network interface is monitored using the following methods: Ethernet – the local connection from the SPT to the LAN is verified by monitoring the line voltage. 4G/2G mobile data – the local connection from the SPT to the mobile data network is verified by periodically checking the signal strength and registration to a service provider. Note: the SPT does not check the credit on PAYG SIMs, or the provider's contract validity. If the transmission network interface connection fails, the following transactions are logged: Ethernet – “Ethernet Line Fault" (the keypad also changes status from green to red). When the connection is restored, another transaction is logged: "Ethernet Line Restored". 4G/2G – “GSM Line Fault" (the keypad also changes status from green to red). When the connection is restored, another transaction is logged: "GSM Line Restored". The Alarm Transmission System (ATS) is monitored by the SPT maintaining a continuous connection to the SecureConnect servers. This connection is periodically polled to ensure the connection between the SPT and the SecureConnect servers is available. The following is logged for a loss in connection between the SPT and the SecureConnect servers: "Offline (Ethernet)" – for an Ethernet connection. "Offline (Mobile)"– for a 4G/2G connection. The following is the logged for a restoral of the connection between the SPT and the SecureConnect servers: "Online (Ethernet)" – for an Ethernet connection. "Online (Mobile)" – for a 4G/2G connection. The SecureConnect servers notify the alarm receiving centre via its Receiving Centre Transceiver (RCT) of both the loss and restore of a connection between the SPT and the SecureConnect servers at the required intervals. Page 46 --- PAGE BREAK --- Alarms Transmission System Transmission monitoring: dual-path connection The primary ATP will be the Ethernet connection. The alternative ATP will be the 4G/2G mobile data connection. The COM-SD-GSM module's "Data Mode" setting must be set to "Mobile as Backup". Monitoring the integrity of the alternative ATP is performed in two stages: 1. 2. The local connection from the SPT to the mobile data network is verified by periodically checking the signal strength and registration to a service provider. Note: the SPT does not check the credit on PAYG SIMs, or the provider's contract validity. If the transmission network interface connection fails, “GSM Line Fault" is logged (the keypad also changes status from green to red). When the connection is restored, another transaction is logged: "GSM Line Restored". The alternative ATP is monitored by the SPT by performing a periodic connection to the SecureConnect servers. The following is the sequence of logged events for a periodic connection: For an unsuccessful periodic connection "Mobile test Fail". For a successful periodic connection: "Mobile test OK". Page 47 --- PAGE BREAK --- Appendix B: System Maintenance Inspections The system should be inspected once or twice per year. At each inspection: Check the control unit for obvious signs of damage to the case or its lid. Check the action of the tamper switch. Check, and if necessary, replace the standby battery. Check keypads and other devices for obvious signs of damage. Test the action of all buttons on all keypads. Clean the surface and display of each keypad using a clean, soft, dry cloth. Do not use water, solvents or any proprietary cleaning materials. Where applicable, check cabling for signs of damage or wear. Check the signal strength and battery condition of all detectors, radio keypads, remote controls, radio HUDs and radio sounders. Test each device. Replace batteries as recommended by the device instructions. Gently clean the lenses of any PIRs with a clean, soft dry cloth. Do not use water, solvents or any proprietary cleaning materials. Walk test all detectors. Test any external sounders and strobes. Note: You can use Test – Locate Bus Device to find the location of a bus device (the device emits a continuous sound). Replacing or removing devices Note: Make sure that you remove all power from the system before physically disconnecting any device. Removing a plug-on module If you wish to remove a plug-on module, ensure that you disable communications first in the appropriate menus (such as in the Communications – ARC Reporting, Communications – Speech Dialler and Communications – SMS menus). Otherwise, the control unit will continually report a communications failure. Removing a bus device permanently Before physically disconnecting the device, enter the Installer menu, and use the appropriate Delete option. For example, to delete a keypad, use Devices/Detectors – Wired Keypads – Delete Keypad. This ensures that the system does not report a missing device and the device’s internal address is erased (allowing it to be used on another system). Page 48 --- PAGE BREAK --- System Maintenance Replacing a bus device Before physically disconnecting the device, enter the Installer menu, and use the appropriate Replace option. For example, to replace a keypad, use Devices/Detectors – Wired Keypads – Replace Keypad. The control unit disables the selected device, but retains the configuration of the old device (such as the zone configuration). You can then power down the system, disconnect the device from the bus, and reconnect a new device (of the same type) to the bus. When you power up the control unit again, the keypads will show an alert that a device has been disabled. Select the appropriate Replace option again, select the Add option and then hold down the address request button on the new expander (with the tamper switch activated). The control unit will assign the bus device address of the expander you removed to the new expander, along with all the zones and other settings from the old expander. The new expander will not need any further configuration. Note: If you replace a radio expander, you must teach the identity of the new radio expander to any receivers (such as 762s, 768s or WAMs) that had previously learned the old expander’s identity. Note: If you are replacing a keypad on a single-keypad system, you will have to reprogram the new keypad with all the functions of the old keypad, including any non-default ABCD key functions. Using LEDs for diagnostics You may notice an LED on the PCB of a device flashing unusually. Please refer to page 43 for the meaning of each LED. Page 49 --- PAGE BREAK --- Appendix C: Specifications i-on Compact i-on30R+ i-on40H+ i-onG2SM i-onG3MM Grade 2 2 2 2 2 or 3 Environmental Class II II II II II Standards and Compliance Environ. protection IP40 / IK06 ATS category DP2 / SP3 Standards compliance general EN 50130-4:2011+A1:2014; EN 61000-6-3:2007+A1:2011; EN 62368-1:2018 EN 50131-1:2007+A2:2017; EN 50131-3:2009; Standards compliance – intruder alarm EN 50131-6:2017; EN 50131-10:2014; EN 50136-1:2012 BS8243:2010; PD6662:2017 Standards compliance radio EN 300 220-2 V2.4.1; EN 301 489-1 V2.2.0; Certification body Telefication n/a EN 301 489-3 V2.1.1; EN 50131-5-3:2017 TBA TBA TBA TBA INCERT Certifications T O31:2014 C-016-1367 Security Radio detector combinations Radio supervision 16,777,214 Programmable Access codes - default 4-digit 6-digit (G3) Access codes - option 6 -digit 4-digit (G2) Combinations - default 10,000 1,000,000 Code blocking Proximity tag differs Blocked for 90 secs after 4 incorrect codes in series 4,294,967,296 General Relative humidity Operating temp. range 0 to 93%, non-condensing -10°C to +55°C Page 50 --- PAGE BREAK --- Specifications i-on Compact i-on30R+ i-on40H+ i-onG2SM i-onG3MM Height 238mm 384mm 239mm 320mm Width 161mm 245mm 250mm 400mm Depth 38mm 94mm 87mm 102mm Weight 710g (with battery) 2kg (without battery) 2.8kg (without battery) 4.5kg (without battery) Case material Number of RS485 buses ABS 1 Mild Steel 1 Network port: 1 1 2 Ethernet 10/100Mbps SSL/TLS Radio Radio frequency 868.6625MHz n/a n/a Type Narrowband n/a n/a Radio power 10mW max n/a n/a n/a n/a +10%/-15% 230VAC +10%/-15% 230VAC +10%/-15% 150-60mA 130mA max 200mA max 240mA max 50/60Hz 50Hz 50Hz 50Hz Internal mains fuse T1A T250mA T250mA T500mA Control Unit 12Vdc, 500mA 13.7Vdc 13.7Vdc 13.7Vdc 1.0A 1.0A 2.0A Reserved for battery charging 100mA 180mA 180mA 750mA Available for the system 400mA 820mA 820mA 1,250mA Transmitter range (free space) 500m Electrical Compliance EN 50131-6 Type A 85-250VAC Mains supply Power supply 230VAC Control Unit PCB current consumption: Quiescent 80mA 80mA 90mA 90mA 100mA With backlight 105mA n/a n/a n/a n/a Max. (in alarm) * 150mA 90mA 110mA 110mA 150mA *Excludes external devices, plug-on modules, and battery charging Standby battery for Grade 2/PD6662 7.2V, 2200mAh 12V 12V 12V 7Ah 7Ah 7Ah Page 51 --- PAGE BREAK --- Specifications i-on Compact i-on30R+ Standby battery for Grade 3 i-on40H+ i-onG2SM 12V n/a Battery chemistry NimH Battery supplied Yes i-onG3MM 17Ah Sealed lead acid No No No G3 30 hrs Minimum standby time 12 hrs 12 hrs 12 hrs G2 12 hrs PD6662 12 h Max time to recharge to 80% capacity 36 hrs Low battery warning at <7.2V <12Vdc Battery deep discharge 6±0.5V 10±0.5V 72 hrs pk-to-pk ripple voltage 12Vdc WiFi output for Eaton i-WiFi01 Note: not battery backed up 12Vdc external DC input 72 hrs 24 hrs ±0.5Vdc max 11 – 12.6Vdc 200mA max n/a Fault: <9Vdc 10-15Vdc n/a Max 500mA DC supplies: 12Vdc Aux n/a 600mA max 12Vdc Bell n/a 600mA max 12Vdc Bus n/a 400mA max per bus 14.4V Aux n/a 12Vdc to plug-by n/a 230mA max n/a 230mA max 400mA max max = current before triggering over-current protection 12Vdc range n/a 9.5Vdc to 13.8Vdc 14.4Vdc range n/a 9.5Vdc to 14.7Vdc Over-voltage protection n/a Aux power fault at Output 1 n/a 15.6Vdc ± 1Vdc Open-collector transistor, 500mA max Voltage-free relay: 1A@24Vdc max n/a <9Vdc n/a n/a Voltage-free relay: 1A@24Vdc max Page 52 --- PAGE BREAK --- Specifications i-on Compact Output 2 n/a Output 3&4 n/a Number of plug-by outputs (50mA) n/a Loudspeaker n/a i-on30R+ i-on40H+ n/a Voltage- free relay: 1A@24Vdc max Open-collector transistor, 500mA max n/a 12 i-onG3MM n/a Voltage-free relay: 1A@24Vdc max n/a Open-collector transistor, 500mA max 12 16 12Vdc, 280mA max. Min impedance 16 Ohm Siren interface for Bell+Strobe+TR Aux tamper input i-onG2SM Yes No Yes SIMPLIFIED EU DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY Hereby, Eaton Electrical Products Ltd declares that radio equipment types i-on Compact, ion30R+ and i-on40H+ are in compliance with Directive 2014/53/EU. The full text of the EU declaration of conformity is available at the following internet address: www.touchpoint-online.com Page 53 --- PAGE BREAK --- SecureConnect is a trademark of Eaton www.touchpoint-online.com Product Support (UK) Tel: +44 (0) 1594 541978 Available between: 08:30 to 17:00 Monday to Friday. email: securitytechsupport@eaton.com Part Number 13368865 Issue 1 Page 54 1st October 2019 --- PAGE BREAK --- i-on Series Security System Configuration Guide for i-on Compact, i-on30R+, i-on40H+, i-onG2SM and i-onG3MM Issue 1 Control unit software version 6.0.xx --- PAGE BREAK --- © Eaton 2019 The information, recommendations, descriptions and safety notations in this document are based on Eaton Corporation’s (“Eaton”) experience and judgment and may not cover all contingencies. If further information is required, an Eaton sales office should be consulted. Sale of the product shown in this literature is subject to the terms and conditions outlined in appropriate Eaton selling policies or other contractual agreement between Eaton and the purchaser. THERE ARE NO UNDERSTANDINGS, AGREEMENTS, WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR MERCHANTABILITY, OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFICALLY SET OUT IN ANY EXISTING CONTRACT BETWEEN THE PARTIES. ANY SUCH CONTRACT STATES THE ENTIRE OBLIGATION OF EATON. THE CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT SHALL NOT BECOME PART OF OR MODIFY ANY CONTRACT BETWEEN THE PARTIES. In no event will Eaton be responsible to the purchaser or user in contract, in tort (including negligence), strict liability or other-wise for any special, indirect, incidental or consequential damage or loss whatsoever, including but not limited to damage or loss of use of equipment, plant or power system, cost of capital, loss of power, additional expenses in the use of existing power facilities , or claims against the purchaser or user by its customers resulting from the use of the information, recommendations and descriptions contained herein. The information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice. The i-on application includes the mbed TLS library, developed by a third party and licensed under the Apache 2.0 license. The Apache 2.0 license can be found at: http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 About this Guide This guide is a document for people who need to configure an i-on30R+, i-on40H+, i-onG2SM, i-onG3MM or i-on Compact control unit. The guide provides detailed information about how to configure the unit using the options in the Installer menu of the user interface. The guide assumes that all hardware has been physically installed. Other Publications The following additional publications are available: i-on Series User Guide (for i-on30R+, i-on40H+, i-onG2SM and i-onG3MM) and i-on Compact User Guide – These provides an overview of the i-on intrusion system, including system components, key features and typical day-to-day tasks for end users. i-on Series Administration and User Manual – This provides detailed information about how to set and unset the system, manage alarms and use the User menu options. Installation Instructions – Included in the packaging of each hardware device (such as a control unit, module or sensor) are concise installation instructions that explain how to install that device. i-on Series Installation Manual – This gives full details of how to install i-on control units. It covers details about hardware installation, system architecture, the differences between each type of control unit, wiring requirements, supported peripherals, system limits, and system maintenance. SecureConnect™ Installer Guide – This provides an overview of SecureConnect, explains how to set up the system and describes how to manage panels (control units) using the SecureConnect web portal. Page ii --- PAGE BREAK --- Contents About this Guide ............................................................................................................... ii Other Publications ............................................................................................................ ii Chapter 1: Getting Started ............................................................................. 9 Introduction ...................................................................................................................... 9 Initial Power-up Procedure ............................................................................................... 9 Entering the Installer menu ............................................................................................ 11 Saving Changes ......................................................................................................... 12 Code Lockouts ............................................................................................................ 12 Transferring to another keypad ................................................................................... 12 Understanding the User Interface................................................................................... 13 Selecting Options........................................................................................................ 13 Changing a Setting ..................................................................................................... 13 Entering Text .............................................................................................................. 13 Exiting the Installer Menu ............................................................................................... 14 Resetting (Defaulting) the System.................................................................................. 14 Restoring Control Unit Factory Defaults ..................................................................... 14 Resetting device addresses ........................................................................................ 14 Defaulting Access Codes............................................................................................ 14 Upgrading the Firmware ................................................................................................. 15 About the Web Interface................................................................................................. 15 Chapter 2: Addressing and Zone Numbering ............................................ 16 Bus Device Addresses ................................................................................................... 16 Bus device address for devices that communicate through a radio expander ............ 16 Output Addresses........................................................................................................... 17 Detector Addresses and Zone Numbering ..................................................................... 17 On-board Wired Detectors .......................................................................................... 18 On-board Radio Detectors .......................................................................................... 18 Detectors Attached to an Expander ............................................................................ 19 Chapter 3: Detectors/Devices Menu ............................................................ 22 Detectors ........................................................................................................................ 22 Add/Del Detectors....................................................................................................... 22 Program Zones ........................................................................................................... 23 Address Bus Device ....................................................................................................... 33 Adding bus devices..................................................................................................... 33 Re-scanning the bus ................................................................................................... 34 Wired Expanders ............................................................................................................ 35 Address Bus Device ................................................................................................... 35 Edit Expander ............................................................................................................. 35 Delete Expander ......................................................................................................... 36 Enable Expander ........................................................................................................ 36 Replace Expander ...................................................................................................... 37 Radio Expanders ............................................................................................................ 37 Wired Keypads ............................................................................................................... 37 Address Bus Device ................................................................................................... 37 Edit Keypad ................................................................................................................ 37 Delete Keypad ............................................................................................................ 40 Page iii --- PAGE BREAK --- Enable Keypad ........................................................................................................... 40 Replace Keypad ......................................................................................................... 40 On-board Keypad ........................................................................................................... 40 Key A/B/C/D ............................................................................................................... 40 ABCD Led ................................................................................................................... 41 Audible Keys............................................................................................................... 41 Status fault.................................................................................................................. 41 Status OK ................................................................................................................... 41 Backlight ..................................................................................................................... 41 Radio Keypads ............................................................................................................... 42 i-RK01......................................................................................................................... 42 KEY-RAS .................................................................................................................... 43 KEY-RKPZ .................................................................................................................. 43 External Sirens ............................................................................................................... 45 Add/Del Siren.............................................................................................................. 45 Edit Siren .................................................................................................................... 45 Internal Sounders ........................................................................................................... 45 Add/Del Sounder ........................................................................................................ 45 Edit Sounder ............................................................................................................... 46 WAMs............................................................................................................................. 46 Cameras......................................................................................................................... 46 IP Cam 1... .................................................................................................................. 47 Chapter 4: Outputs Menu ............................................................................. 48 Radio Outputs ................................................................................................................ 48 Add Outputs ................................................................................................................ 48 Edit Outputs ................................................................................................................ 48 Wired Outputs ................................................................................................................ 56 Panel .......................................................................................................................... 56 Plug-By Outputs ............................................................................................................. 56 Plug-by Outputs on an EXP-PSU ............................................................................... 56 Custom Outputs ............................................................................................................. 56 Example...................................................................................................................... 57 Chapter 5: Setting Options and Partitions Menus ..................................... 58 About these menus ........................................................................................................ 58 Full Set, Part Set and Partition options........................................................................... 58 Name .......................................................................................................................... 58 Exit Mode .................................................................................................................... 58 Settle Time ................................................................................................................. 60 Exit Time ..................................................................................................................... 60 Entry Time .................................................................................................................. 60 Alarm Response ......................................................................................................... 60 HUA Response ........................................................................................................... 60 PZ Unset Response.................................................................................................... 61 PZ Set Response........................................................................................................ 62 PZ Reset Time ............................................................................................................ 63 Siren Delay ................................................................................................................. 63 Siren Time .................................................................................................................. 63 Strobe on Set .............................................................................................................. 63 Strobe on Unset .......................................................................................................... 64 Part Set Exit Mode ...................................................................................................... 64 Pt.set Settle Time ....................................................................................................... 64 Page iv --- PAGE BREAK --- Part Set Exit Time ....................................................................................................... 64 Pt.set Entry Time ........................................................................................................ 64 Pt.set Alarm Resp. ...................................................................................................... 64 Pt.set Siren Delay ....................................................................................................... 64 Pt.set Siren Time ........................................................................................................ 64 Pt.set Final Exit ........................................................................................................... 64 Pt.set Entry Route....................................................................................................... 64 Pt.set Strb Set............................................................................................................. 64 Pt.set Strb Unset......................................................................................................... 64 Full Set Link ................................................................................................................... 64 Remote Set .................................................................................................................... 65 Exit Mode .................................................................................................................... 65 Exit Time ..................................................................................................................... 65 Local Set on ER .......................................................................................................... 65 Calendar Set .................................................................................................................. 65 Add Event ................................................................................................................... 66 Edit Event ................................................................................................................... 67 Delete Event ............................................................................................................... 67 Add Exception............................................................................................................. 67 Edit Exception ............................................................................................................. 67 Delete Exception......................................................................................................... 67 Deferring Calendar Setting ......................................................................................... 67 Setting Faults .............................................................................................................. 68 Chapter 6: System Options Menu ............................................................... 69 User Options .................................................................................................................. 69 User Access ............................................................................................................... 69 User Reset.................................................................................................................. 71 Keypad Text ............................................................................................................... 72 Restore Defaults............................................................................................................. 72 Staged Defaults .......................................................................................................... 72 Factory Defaults.......................................................................................................... 73 Installer Options ............................................................................................................. 74 Installer Name............................................................................................................. 74 Installer Code.............................................................................................................. 74 Installer Remote Password ......................................................................................... 74 Installer Timeout ......................................................................................................... 74 Confirmation ................................................................................................................... 74 Confirmation Mode ..................................................................................................... 74 Confirmation Time ...................................................................................................... 75 Entry Alarm Delay ....................................................................................................... 76 After Entry................................................................................................................... 76 Entry Keypad Lock...................................................................................................... 76 Sounder On ................................................................................................................ 77 Siren On ..................................................................................................................... 77 Unconfirmed Reset ..................................................................................................... 77 Confirmed Reset ......................................................................................................... 78 HUA Response ........................................................................................................... 78 HUA Confirm Time ...................................................................................................... 78 Tamper as Tamper Only ............................................................................................. 78 Abort Time .................................................................................................................. 79 Auto Rearm ................................................................................................................ 79 Hardware ........................................................................................................................ 79 Page v --- PAGE BREAK --- Wired Zone Type ........................................................................................................ 79 On-board Speaker ...................................................................................................... 80 Panel Loudspeaker ..................................................................................................... 80 A/C Fail Reporting ...................................................................................................... 80 Mains Fail Delay ......................................................................................................... 80 Ext DC Fail Reporting ................................................................................................. 82 Ext DC Fail Delay ....................................................................................................... 82 GSM Antenna ............................................................................................................. 83 Panel Tamper Return ................................................................................................. 83 Radio Options ................................................................................................................ 83 Supervision ................................................................................................................. 83 Jamming ..................................................................................................................... 84 Remotes ..................................................................................................................... 84 Radio Keypads ........................................................................................................... 85 Masking Options............................................................................................................. 86 Masking ...................................................................................................................... 86 Mask Override ............................................................................................................ 87 Perimeter Options .......................................................................................................... 87 Shunt Groups ................................................................................................................. 87 Date and Time ................................................................................................................ 88 Set Time & Date ......................................................................................................... 88 SNTP Time Sync ........................................................................................................ 88 Updates .......................................................................................................................... 88 Language .................................................................................................................... 88 Panel Upgrade ............................................................................................................ 89 Level 4 Update............................................................................................................ 89 Chapter 7: Communications Menu .............................................................. 90 Contacts ......................................................................................................................... 90 ARC Reporting ............................................................................................................... 90 Call Mode ................................................................................................................... 90 Telecoms Priority ........................................................................................................ 91 Recipients ................................................................................................................... 91 Account Numbers ....................................................................................................... 91 Report Type ................................................................................................................ 91 Fast Fmt Channels ..................................................................................................... 91 CID/SIA Events ........................................................................................................... 93 Restorals .................................................................................................................... 97 Burg Comms Rearm ................................................................................................... 97 21CN FF Ack Time ..................................................................................................... 97 Send Tamp As Burg ................................................................................................... 97 Dynamic Test Call....................................................................................................... 97 Static Test Call............................................................................................................ 98 Unset Comms ............................................................................................................. 98 Speech Dialler ................................................................................................................ 98 Call Mode ................................................................................................................... 99 Messages ................................................................................................................... 99 Triggers .................................................................................................................... 100 Destinations .............................................................................................................. 100 Call Acknowledge ..................................................................................................... 100 SMS ............................................................................................................................. 100 Outgoing ................................................................................................................... 100 Incoming ................................................................................................................... 102 Page vi --- PAGE BREAK --- Line Fail Response....................................................................................................... 102 Line Fail Delay ............................................................................................................. 103 IP Options .................................................................................................................... 103 Cloud Access............................................................................................................ 103 Web Server ............................................................................................................... 103 Module: 4G/2G ......................................................................................................... 103 Panel Ethernet .......................................................................................................... 104 Chapter 8: Test Menu .................................................................................. 106 Sirens and Sounders .................................................................................................... 106 Ext. Radio Sirens ...................................................................................................... 106 On-board Sounder .................................................................................................... 106 Wired Sirens ............................................................................................................. 106 Loudspeakers ........................................................................................................... 106 Wired Keypads ......................................................................................................... 106 KEY-RKPZ ................................................................................................................ 106 KEY-RAS .................................................................................................................. 106 Internal Sounders ..................................................................................................... 107 Wired Keypad ............................................................................................................... 107 On-board Keypad ......................................................................................................... 107 Radio Keypads ............................................................................................................. 107 i-RK01....................................................................................................................... 107 KEY-RAS .................................................................................................................. 108 KEY-RKPZ ................................................................................................................ 108 Expanders .................................................................................................................... 108 Radio and wired expanders ...................................................................................... 108 EXP-PSUs ................................................................................................................ 108 Walk Test ..................................................................................................................... 109 Zone Resistances......................................................................................................... 110 Signal Strengths ........................................................................................................... 110 Outputs......................................................................................................................... 111 Radio/Wired/Plug-by/Expander Outputs ................................................................... 111 Remotes ....................................................................................................................... 111 User Hold Up Alarms .................................................................................................... 111 Prox Tags ..................................................................................................................... 112 ARC Reporting ............................................................................................................. 112 Speech Dialler .............................................................................................................. 112 SMS ............................................................................................................................. 113 PSU Current ................................................................................................................. 113 Panel PSU.................................................................................................................... 113 Battery(s)...................................................................................................................... 113 Locate Panel ................................................................................................................ 113 Locate Bus Device ....................................................................................................... 113 Chapter 9: View Log Menu ......................................................................... 114 Log Events ................................................................................................................... 114 How the Log Displays User Identities ........................................................................... 114 Logging Tamper Events ............................................................................................... 115 Logging Software Updates ........................................................................................... 115 Chapter 10: About Menu ............................................................................. 116 Panel ............................................................................................................................ 116 Cloud ............................................................................................................................ 116 Page vii --- PAGE BREAK --- Expanders .................................................................................................................... 116 Keypads ....................................................................................................................... 116 Comms ......................................................................................................................... 116 Module ...................................................................................................................... 116 Panel Ethernet .......................................................................................................... 117 Zone Mapping .............................................................................................................. 117 Zone Numbers .......................................................................................................... 117 Zone Addresses........................................................................................................ 118 Appendix A: ARC Communication Formats ............................................ 119 Fast Format .................................................................................................................. 119 Contact ID .................................................................................................................... 119 SIA 1, SIA 2, SIA 3 and Extended SIA 3 ...................................................................... 120 Extended SIA3 V2 .................................................................................................... 120 Extended SIA3 V3 .................................................................................................... 121 Appendix B: Log Messages ....................................................................... 122 Introduction .................................................................................................................. 122 Log messages .............................................................................................................. 122 TCP/IP error messages ................................................................................................ 127 Overview of the SSL-relevant messages ..................................................................... 127 Appendix C: Installer Menu Map ............................................................... 129 Page viii --- PAGE BREAK --- Chapter 1: Getting Started Introduction This chapter explains how to: Use the initial power-up procedure to configure the basic settings of the control unit. Enter and exit the Installer menu. Select options and change settings in the Installer menu. Reset the control unit. Upgrade firmware. Initial Power-up Procedure WARNING: During initial power-up, sounders and sirens may give an alarm tone. If you are working at the top of a ladder, make sure that the sudden noise does not startle you and cause a fall. Note: The following assumes that all wiring is complete, the control unit has not been previously configured and that all keypads have a "null" address (no address previously allocated). If required, please refer to page 14 for details of how to reset the system. To configure the system for the first time: 1. Connect the control unit's battery. 2. Close the lid of the control unit if there is no need to keep it open. 3. Switch on the mains supply. Note: Ordinarily, the control unit starts only after the mains supply is switched on, even if a battery is connected. If you want to operate the control unit temporarily using only the battery (or a 12VDC supply), start it by briefly shorting the kick-start link on the PCB. 4. Wait until you see: This message indicates that the keypad has a "null" address. 5. Go to the keypad you want to use for initial configuration. Obtain an address for this keypad by pressing and holding A and keys simultaneously for at least three seconds until you hear a sound. The display shows the address allocated by the control unit, such as “b1-d51”(bus 1, device 51). The address is now stored in the keypad. Page 9 --- PAGE BREAK --- Getting Started 6. Follow this step if you see the following (EU systems only): a) The default language is English. You can change the language by pressing the key at the keypad one or more times. Once the required language is displayed, press the key at the keypad. From this point on, the display operates in the selected language. If you want to change the language later, use Installer menu – System Options – Updates – Language. b) Press to change the country (or leave the default), then press : 7. Press A or B to select either a partitioned system or a part-setting system (these concepts are explained in the Installation Manual): 8. If you are using an i-onG3MM, leave the default of grade 3 or press if you want to use grade 2, then press : Selecting the grade sets various system options to configure the system for either grade 2 or grade 3. 9. Press one or more times to change the wiring type to use for wired zones (or leave the default), then press : This determines the default wiring type for the control unit and any attached bus devices, such as wired expanders (if applicable). Wiring types are explained in the Installation Manual. You can change the control unit's wiring type through Installer menu – System Options, or specify a different wiring type for a bus device through the device's edit menu (e.g. Installer menu – Detectors/Devices – Wired Expander – Edit Expander). Note: If you are using an ADP-10CC board (to provide ten on-board 4-wire CC zones instead of ten FSL zones), select 2-wire FSL 2k2/4k7 as the wiring type. 10. Specify an installer code (four digits for grade 2, or six digits for grade 3): When prompted, confirm the code. DO NOT FORGET THIS CODE! Note: For a grade 2 system, you can change to 6-digit access codes using the System Options – Restore Defaults – Staged Defaults – User option. Page 10 --- PAGE BREAK --- Getting Started 11. Specify a password for remote access to the control unit through the web interface (see Entering Text on page 13 for details of how to enter text using a keypad), then press : This password can be changed using the System Options – Installer Options – Installer Remote Password option. 12. Specify a code for the default master user (four digits for grade 2, or six digits for grade 3): When prompted, confirm the code. DO NOT FORGET THIS CODE! 13. You will see one of the following: If the lid of the control unit is closed, you will see the standby screen. For example: If the lid of the control unit is open, you will see: 14. If the standby screen is displayed, enter the installer menu (as described in the next section). Otherwise, if the "Panel lid open" message is displayed, press to access the Installer menu. 15. Carry out the required configuration tasks in the Installer menu; for example, to: Add the other bus devices, if used (page 33). Program zones. Configure outputs. Configure setting options. Entering the Installer menu Entering the Installer menu allows you to configure the system using the options provided. While you are logged in: The system will not generate alarms. You are, for example, able to open the lid of the control unit without generating an alarm. All Hold-Up Alarms (HUAs), fire-alarm zones, 24-hour zones and tampers are disabled. Any other user trying to set the system from a keypad or access the user menu will see the message “Installer on Site”. To enter the Installer menu: 1. Make sure the system is fully unset and showing the standby screen. For example: Page 11 --- PAGE BREAK --- Getting Started 2. Enter the Installer code, as specified when the control unit was first configured: 3. You may be prompted to enter a user code: This is displayed if you have not used the Installer menu with the previous 30 minutes, or if the system has been armed and disarmed within that period. You can disable this feature using System Options – User Options – User Access – User Code Required (see page 69). You cannot enter a Set Only user code. 4. You will see the following prompt if the control unit is connected to the internet and Level 4 Update is enabled in the Installer and User menus (see page 89): Press if the control unit is connected to the internet and you want the control unit to check whether there is new firmware (including language updates) available. Otherwise, press to continue without checking. If you press and new firmware is available, you are prompted whether to install the new version. You will need your level 4 code to do this. You can also upgrade firmware using an SD card and the Panel Upgrade option (see page 89). 5. The bottom line displays Detectors/Devices, which is the first option in the menu: Refer to the next section for details of how to use the user interface. Saving Changes Changes are saved only when you leave the Installer menu. If you remove all power before leaving the Installer menu, changes will not be saved. Note that this does not apply if you restore factory defaults; that change takes place immediately. Code Lockouts If you (or any user) enter your code incorrectly or present an unrecognised proximity tag, the display shows the time and date again, gives an error tone and you can try again. If there are four consecutive incorrect access codes or proximity tags, the system starts a tamper alarm and locks out all users for 90 seconds. This event is recorded in the log as “Excess Keys Tamper”. Once the lock-out time has expired, you can try again. If the next attempt is also invalid, system locks for another 90 seconds, but will not start another tamper alarm. An “Excess Keys Tamper” can also occur while attempting to gain access from the web interface. Transferring to another keypad While in the Installer menu, you can transfer to any other keypad without leaving the Installer menu. To do this, simply go to any other keypad and enter the Installer access Page 12 --- PAGE BREAK --- Getting Started code. The new keypad will pick up your position in the Installer menu. The keypad you have left will exit the Installer menu. Understanding the User Interface Selecting Options The control unit displays configuration options in menus. The top-level Installer menu contains options such as Detectors/Devices: You can select a different option by pressing the or key at the keypad until the name of the option or device you want is displayed. For example, pressing once when Detectors/Devices is displayed displays Outputs: Pressing displays the earlier option in the menu. For example, pressing once when Outputs is displayed displays Detectors/Devices. Pressing selects that option, which may display a menu of further options. For example, selecting Detectors/Devices displays the first option in the Detectors/Devices menu: You can repeat the process until you have selected the lowest-level setting you want to change. Pressing at the keypad takes you back one level. For example, pressing when you are in the Detectors/Devices – Detectors menu takes you back to the Detectors/Devices menu. The appendix starting on page 129 shows a "menu map", which gives the position of all menus and options in the Installer menu. Changing a Setting To change the setting of an option, you normally follow the same procedure as above by pressing or one or more times to select the required setting and pressing to make the change. Some options require you to press or to change the setting from, for example, Yes to No. Other options may require you to enter text, as described in the next section. Entering Text You can use the numeric (1-9), * and # keys on the keypad to enter numbers and text when required to do so for an option. All numeric keys are labelled to show the characters you can enter using that key. For example, you can use the "2" key to enter A, B, C and 2 (where applicable). Also use (where applicable): # to change between capital and lower-case letters. 0 to enter a space or other characters such as "&", "@" and "/". Page 13 --- PAGE BREAK --- Getting Started When you first select an option to enter text, the display shows the cursor at the beginning of the bottom line. If you press a key, the bottom line clears and the character you key-in appears at the beginning of the line. A cursor on the display shows the position of the next character. If you are keying in capital letters, the cursor is a block. For lower-case letters, the cursor is an underline. If you press when you first select an option to enter text, the existing text shifts right one character and you can insert a new character in the empty space. To move the cursor left or right, press or respectively. To delete a character, press . Exiting the Installer Menu To exit the Installer menu: 1. Replace the lid of the control unit or other devices (if you removed them) to close all tamper switches. 2. Press until the display shows: Press to leave Installer menu. (Press if you do not want to leave the menu.) 3. Note: You must rectify faults (for example, the lid of the control unit is open) or delete the device from the system before you can leave the Installer menu. On completion, the display shows the time and date, and the system is ready for use. Resetting (Defaulting) the System Restoring Control Unit Factory Defaults You can remove all configuration from the control unit using System Options – Restore Defaults – Factory Defaults (see page 73). You must restore defaults from the control unit; you cannot do this from a PC. Resetting device addresses You can clear the address stored in a device's non-volatile memory as follows: Keypads – Press the D and keys together while the front cover is open. Expanders – Press the Request/Delete Address button while applying power. The tamper disable link must not be fitted. Other devices – Please refer to the device's installation instructions. Defaulting Access Codes You can use the Reset Codes link in the control unit's PCB to reset the installer and all user codes (e.g. in the event that codes have been forgotten). Resetting the codes also deletes all proximity tags, Hold-Up Devices (HUDs) and remote controls. To reset the codes: 1. If you know the installer code, enter it to prevent a tamper alarm when you remove the lid of the control unit. 2. Remove mains power to the control unit. Page 14 --- PAGE BREAK --- Getting Started 3. Remove the lid of the control unit (the tamper must be activated for the procedure to work). 4. Disconnect the battery. 5. Place a jumper across the Kick-Start link. 6. While shorting the Reset Codes link, reconnect the battery and keep the short in place until you see the following: 7. Enter a code you want to use for the installer code. Confirm when prompted. 8. Enter a code you want to use for the master user code. Confirm when prompted. 9. Remove the jumper across the Kick-Start link. 10. Close the lid. 11. Reconnect the mains supply. Upgrading the Firmware You can upgrade the control unit's firmware in one of several different ways: Over the internet − When you enter the Installer menu, you are prompted whether to upgrade the firmware if Level 4 Update is enabled in the Installer (see page 89) and User menus. Via an SD card − If the firmware is loaded in an INSTALL folder on the SD card, you can upgrade the firmware using the Panel Upgrade option (see page 89). Using the control unit's web interface. For i-on Compact, by connecting the mini-USB port to a Windows computer that is installed with the i-on Update Utility software. For European versions, the utility also allows alternate language text files for the keypad display to be installed. About the Web Interface This manual describes configuring the control unit from the control unit. You can also program a control unit using the web interface, through a web browser. The i-on Web Browser Interface Setup Guide explains how to configure the system using the web interface. Optionally, you can access the web interface through the SecureConnect web portal, as described in the SecureConnect Installer’s Guide. The settings and options provided through the web interface have the same behaviour as those provided through the control unit. When using the web interface, you must specify your installer code and the remote access password (page 11). Before you can use the web interface, the Master User must enable remote access using User Menu – System Config – Facilities On/Off – Remote Access. Page 15 --- PAGE BREAK --- Chapter 2: Addressing and Zone Numbering This chapter explains how the control unit assigns addresses to devices (such as expanders and radio keypads), detectors and outputs. It also explains how the control unit maps zone numbers to detectors. Bus Device Addresses Note: This section is relevant only for control units that have a bus for system expansion (all control units except i-on Compact). The control unit keeps a record of the address it allocates to each bus device. Each device also stores its address locally in non-volatile memory. The address of each bus device is in the format An-dd (e.g. R1-03), where: A= One or more letters showing the device type: K=keypad, W=Wired Expander, R=Radio Expander. n= Bus number (1 or 2, depending which bus connector the device is connected to). dd = Bus device number. Keypads have bus device numbers in the range 51 upwards. Expanders and other bus devices can have a bus device number in the range 1 to 50 (depending on the control unit, as specified in the i-on Installation Manual). Each time you add a new device, the device takes the lowest bus device number available, irrespective of which bus the device is connected to. Figure 1 shows an example of bus device addressing. Figure 1. Bus Device Addressing Example Note: An EXP-R30 expander takes three consecutive bus device numbers. In the Installer menu, the display shows only the first of these two/three addresses (e.g. “R1-04”), but also adds “(R30)” as a reminder. Bus device address for devices that communicate through a radio expander For devices such as sounders and WAMs that communicate through a radio expander, you select a specific radio expander to learn the identity of the radio device. The control unit refers to these devices in the form Rn-dd-zz (e.g. R1-03-01), where: R= Fixed text to show that the device communicates through a radio expander. n= The bus number of the radio expander. Page 16 --- PAGE BREAK --- Addressing and Zone Numbering dd = The bus device number of the radio expander (see above). zz = Radio device number, starting from 01. When reporting alarms to an alarms-receiving centre using CID or SIA protocols, the control unit reports each device as a number (not as an address). For example: Radio Siren Ext.01 to Ext.20 WAMs WAM01 to WAM20 Note that the highest number will depend on the control unit. Output Addresses Each output has an address. Outputs attached directly to the control unit (if applicable) take the address PAN>01 to PAN>04 (the number of on-board outputs is dependent on the control unit used; see the i-on Series Installation Manual). Outputs attached to a bus device take the address An>dd>oo (e.g. W1>02>01), where: A= One or more letters showing the device type: K=keypad, W=Wired Expander, R=Radio Expander. n= Bus number. dd = Bus device number (see page 16). oo = Output number, starting from 01. See Figure 2 for an example. Figure 2. Output Numbering Detector Addresses and Zone Numbering Figure 3 provides an example of detector addressing and zone numbering for an i-on40H+. The next sections explain how the control unit assigns detector addresses and zone numbers. Note: Please refer to page 119 for important information concerning zone 000 if you are using the CID format to transmit alarm information to an alarms-receiving centre. Page 17 --- PAGE BREAK --- Addressing and Zone Numbering Figure 3. Example of Detector Addressing and Zone Numbering (i-on40H+) On-board Wired Detectors Wired detectors attached directly to the control unit (if applicable) use the following address: On-Board Wired Detector Address Zone Number FSL* and 2-wire CC wiring PAN<00 to PAN<09 000 to 009 4-wire CC wiring PAN<01 to PAN<05 001 to 005 *If an ADP-10CC board is used, ten 4-wire CC zones can be used instead of ten FSL zones. On-board Radio Detectors Radio detectors that communicate directly with the control unit use the following addresses: On-Board Radio Detector Address Zone Number i-on30R+ PAN<00 to PAN<29 000 to 029 i-on40H+ PAN<10 to PAN<39 010 to 039 i-on Compact Not applicable 000 to 019 Page 18 --- PAGE BREAK --- Addressing and Zone Numbering Detectors Attached to an Expander Detectors attached to an expander take the address An<dd<ii (e.g. W1<04<00), where: A= One or more letters showing the device type: W=Wired Expander, R=Radio Expander. n= Bus number. dd = Bus device number (see page 16). ii = Input number. This can be any number from: 00 to 09 for wired expanders or the EXP-R10. 00 to 29 for the EXP-R30. Zone numbering for detectors connected to an expander Each expander takes a sequential block of zone numbers up to the capacity of the device, running on from any zones in the control unit or previous expander. The zone numbers are dd0 to dd9 (for FSL or 2-wire CC wiring) or dd1 to dd5 (for 4-wire CC wiring), where “dd” is the two-digit device number. Table 1 provides an example (refer also to Figure 3). Note: Zone numbering for detectors connected to keypads is different; see the next section. Table 1: Example of expander zone numbering (i-on 40H+) 1st Expander (e.g. EXP-W10) 2nd Expander (EXP-W10) 3rd Expander (EXP-R10) Device number 01 Device number 02 Device number 03 Address W1-01 Address W1-02 Address R1-03 Detector Zone No. Detector Zone No. Detector Zone No. Address Address Address W1<01<00 040 W1<02<00 050 R1<03<00 060 W1<01<01 041 W1<02<01 051 R1<03<01 061 W1<01<02 042 W1<02<02 052 R1<03<02 062 ...etc. ...etc. ...etc. ...etc. ...etc. ...etc. W1<01<07 W1<01<08 W1<01<09 047 048 049 W1<02<07 W1<02<08 W1<02<29 057 058 059 R1<03<07 R1<03<08 R1<03<09 067 068 069 Zone numbering for zones on keypads Several keypads provide terminals for up to two zones using FSL or 2-wire CC wiring, or one zone using 4-wire CC wiring. To use the zones on the keypad, you must first enable them from the Detectors/Devices – Wired (or Radio) Keypads Edit menu. For wired keypads, you can use the same menu to select the zone wiring type of the keypad zones, independently of the zone wiring type used by the control unit or the wired expanders. The zone wiring type will affect the zone numbering. When you enable the zones, the control unit assigns them to zone numbers starting from the top of the control unit’s zone number range, as follows: FSL or 2-Wire CC – Using the i-on30R+ as an example, the highest possible zone number is 059. When the control unit gives an address to the first keypad to be added, it allocates the zone number 059 to terminals Z2 on the keypad, and zone Page 19 --- PAGE BREAK --- Addressing and Zone Numbering number 058 to terminals Z1. When you add the next keypad, the control unit allocates the zone numbers 057 to terminals Z2 and 056 to terminals Z1 on the new keypad. Table 2 shows an example. Table 2: Keypad – FSL or 2-wire CC zones Control First Second Unit keypad keypad Z2, Z1 Z2, Z1 i-on30R+ 59, 58 57, 56 i-on40H+ 79, 78 77, 76 i-onG2SM 49, 48 47, 46 i-onG3MM 199, 198 197, 196 Third keypad Z2, Z1 55, 54 75, 74 45, 44 195, 194 Additional keypads ...etc. ...etc. ...etc. ...etc. 4-Wire CC – When you wish a keypad to use 4-wire CC zone wiring, the control unit still assigns zone numbers at the top of the zone numbering range, but this time it uses only alternate zone numbers Table 3 shows an example. For each keypad, the Z2 terminals are for the tamper contacts, and the Z1 terminals are for the alarm contacts. Table 3: Keypad – 4-wire CC zones Control First Second Unit keypad keypad Z2(T), Z1(A) Z2(T), Z1(A) i-on30R+ 59 57 i-on40H+ 79 77 i-onG2SM 49 47 i-onG3MM 199 197 Third keypad Z2(T), Z1(A) 55 75 45 195 Additional keypads ...etc. ...etc. ...etc. ...etc. Zone availability for keypads It is possible that there may be no zones available to assign to a keypad. This can happen in two ways: When the control unit has expanders allocated to all the available zones on the bus. When the control unit has an expander already allocated to the zones at the top of its zone numbering range. Figure 4 provides three examples of zone availability when using expanders and keypads connected to an i-on30R+: Example a) – Since expanders use all available zones, there are no zones available to allocate to any keypads on the bus. This applies even if some of the expanders have unused zones. Example b) – A keypad takes up two zones at the top of the address range. The remaining zones are available for keypads. However, since the control unit allocates zones in groups of 10, the control unit will not allocate any of the remaining 8 zones in that group to an expander. Example c) – An expander takes up zones at the top of the numbering range, but zones 030 to 039 are available. This could happen if the default (lowest available) address was not accepted when the expander at the top of the range was added. The control unit cannot allocate keypad zones to zone numbers below those used by the expander. Page 20 --- PAGE BREAK --- Addressing and Zone Numbering Figure 4. Example zone availability (i-on30R+) Page 21 --- PAGE BREAK --- Chapter 3: Detectors/Devices Menu This chapter explains the options in the Detector/Device menu. Detectors Add/Del Detectors This option allows you to add and delete radio detectors (zones). Adding radio detectors To add a radio detector: 1. 2. 3. Select Panel (if applicable) or a radio expander to assign that detector to. Select a zone. A “*” to the left of a zone name indicates that the control unit has learned a radio detector for that zone. When prompted, activate the detector's tamper switch to make the control unit learn the identity of the radio detector. Deleting radio detectors To delete a single radio detector, select the zone and choose one of the following: Delete Detector ID This deletes the ID of the detector, but leaves any zone configuration in place (such as zone type and attributes). Default zone This deletes the ID of the detector and sets all the zone configuration to default values. Note: The deletion takes place immediately, and not when you leave the Installer menu. When you delete a radio detector, the control unit sets the zone to Not Used, and deletes the identity of the radio detector that it has learned. Depending on the type of control unit, three levels of Delete all options are provided (see the menu map on page 16). These allow you to delete all radio zones associated with a selected expander (if applicable), all radio zones that communicate directly with the panel (if applicable), or all radio zones system-wide. Page 22 --- PAGE BREAK --- Detectors/Devices Menu Program Zones You can program (configure) each zone's behaviour at any time, whether or not a wired detector is connected, or the control unit has learned the identity of a radio detector. Select the zone you wish to program. Please refer to page 17 for details of the zone numbering scheme. Note: If a wired zone does not have a detector connected to it, make sure that its zone type is Not Used (the default). If you program a radio zone but the control unit does not have a detector learned for that zone, the display shows “Zone programmed but not learnt” when you leave the Installer menu. Please refer to page 119 for important information concerning zone 000 if you are using the CID format to transmit alarm information to an alarms-receiving centre. Name You can give each zone a 12-character name. The control unit displays this name when, for example, you select the zone or the zone generates an alarm. Type The list below shows the available zone types. Note: When configuring zone types, the display shows a “*” to the left of the zone’s current type. You can select a zone type quickly by entering the two-digit shortcut number shown in brackets after the type’s name in the list below. For example, enter “05” to select Final Exit. The number does not appear on the display. The abbreviation of the type name (e.g. HUA) appears in the top-right corner of the display when you select a zone. When several zones are activated at the same time, the control unit processes Hold Up Alarm and Normal Alarm zones first, followed by Fire, and then all other alarm types. The control unit always processes alarms before alerts. Not Used - NU (00) The alarm system will not respond when an event triggers this detector. This is the default zone type for all zones. Hold Up Alarm – HUA (01) Operating a device programmed as Hold Up Alarm (HUA) will start an alarm whether the system (or part set or partition) is set or unset. The alarm response for HUA (audible, silent or displayed) depends on the options selected by HUA Response (see page 60). (In a part-setting system, HUA Response is under System Options; in a partitioned system, it is in the sub-menu for each partition.) There may also be an alarm transmission to the ARC, depending on how you have configured the system. Fire Alarm - FA (02) Smoke or heat detectors connected to Fire Alarm zones cause keypads, internal radio sounders, loudspeakers and external sirens to give a pulsing fire signal Page 23 --- PAGE BREAK --- Detectors/Devices Menu (subject to the Alarm Response; see page 60). Fire alarms operate whether the system is set or unset, and will always trigger communications. When the control unit first learns a radio smoke alarm (for example the DETRSMOKE), the zone type defaults to “Fire”. Note that a tamper from a hardwired smoke alarm on a Fire Alarm zone when the system is unset will cause an internal alarm (internal sounders and loudspeakers only). Normal Alarm - NA (03) When triggered, a zone of type Normal Alarm will start an alarm provided the system is set. When the control unit first learns a radio detector, the zone type defaults to Normal Alarm. 24 Hour Alarm - 24 (04) Activating this zone while the system (or part set or partition) is unset causes an internal alarm (keypads, internal radio sounders and loudspeakers). Activating this zone while the system (or part set or partition) is set causes an alarm from internal sounders and external sirens (subject to the Alarm Response; see page 60). Final Exit – FE (05) Zones of this type must be the last detector to be activated on exit, or the first to be activated on entry. You can use zones of this type to complete the setting of the system, or to start the entry procedure. See page 58 to set the exit mode type. Note: If you give a Final Exit zone any of the Part Set attributes, you can program that zone to behave like a Normal Alarm zone if the user part sets the system. See page 64. Note: Do not use a radio PIR as a Final Exit. Radio PIRs have a “lock out” period after each activation to conserve battery power. When you set the system (or part set or partition), a PIR may still be in lockout, during which it cannot send a signal to complete the setting process. Entry Route – ER (06) Use this zone type for detectors sited between the Final Exit door/detector and the location where the system is set/unset. If the entry/exit timer is running when an Entry Route zone is triggered, no alarm occurs until the entry/exit timer expires. Note: If you give an Entry Route zone one of the Part Set attributes, you can program that zone to behave like a Final Exit zone if the user part sets the system. See page 64. Technical Alarm –TA (07) Use this zone type when you want to monitor equipment, for example a freezer, without raising a full alarm. If a Technical Alarm zone is activated, the control unit logs the event, generates a fault condition, and (if the control unit is correctly programmed, see page 90) starts communication. If the technical alarm occurs while the system is set, the system makes no audible alarm. When a user unsets the system, the display shows an alert. If a Technical Alarm zone is activated while the system is unset, the system starts an alert immediately and gives a brief tone at keypads, internal radio sounders and loudspeakers every few seconds. When a user enters a valid access code, the tone stops and the display shows the zone causing the alarm. When the user acknowledges the alert by pressing , the control unit resets the technical alarm ready for the next event. Page 24 --- PAGE BREAK --- Detectors/Devices Menu Note that a tamper on a Technical Alarm zone when the system is unset will cause an internal alarm. Key Switch Moment. – KSM (08) (This zone type is not available for i-on Compact.) Use this zone type to connect a momentary keyswitch to a single zone. Each time a user operates the keyswitch, the control unit changes the current set state. In a part-setting system, the keyswitch can full set or unset. In a partitioned system, you can allocate the keyswitch to one or more partitions. Key Switch Latched – KSL (09) (This zone type is not available for i-on Compact.) Use this zone type to connect a fixed position keyswitch to a single zone. When the user opens the keyswitch contacts, the control unit sets the system. When the user closes the contacts, the control unit unsets the system. In a part-setting system, the keyswitch can full set or unset. In a partitioned system, you can allocate the keyswitch to one or more partitions. Note: The keyswitch zone types are intended for use on zones that connect to an access-control keypad, electronic key or other type of hardwired device used to set or unset the system. When the user operates the keyswitch while the system is unset, the control unit starts the programmed exit mode. When the user operates the keyswitch while the system is set, the control unit unsets the system immediately. The user cannot reset the system from a keyswitch zone. Do not assign more than one Key Switch Latched zone to a partition. Tamper – T (10) Use this zone type to monitor the tamper status of external equipment. The control unit monitors a Tamper zone at all times. When triggered in the unset condition, only internal sounders operate. When triggered in the set condition, the alarm response (see page 60) determines whether external sirens, strobe and communications also respond to the alarm. External PSU A/C Fail – PAC (11) (This zone type is not available for i-on Compact or radio zones.) Use this zone type to monitor the A/C Fail output of an external power supply unit. If a power supply unit triggers a zone with this type, the control unit treats this in a similar way to a mains fail at the control unit itself. The action taken depends on the values programmed into Mains Fail Delay (see page 80). External PSU Batt Fault - PBF (12) (This zone type is not available for i-on Compact or radio zones.) Use this zone type to monitor the Battery Fault output of an external power supply unit. If an external PSU triggers a zone with this type, the control unit activates any output of type Battery Fault and causes an “External Battery Fault” alert. If the alarm system is set, the control unit logs the event, starts any programmed communication, but does not start an alert until the system is unset. Page 25 --- PAGE BREAK --- Detectors/Devices Menu External PSU Low Volts – PLV (13) (This zone type is not available for i-on Compact or radio zones.) Use this zone type to monitor the Low Voltage output of an external power supply unit. If a power supply triggers a zone with this type, the control unit activates any output of type Low Volts and causes an “External Low Volts” alert. If the alarm system is set, the control unit logs the event, starts any programmed communication, but does not start an alert until the system is unset. External PSU Fault – PF (14) (This zone type is not available for i-on Compact or radio zones.) Use this zone type to monitor the fault output of an external PSU. (This zone type is available for power supplies that do not provide specific fault outputs that can be used by zone types 11, 12 and 13.) If a power supply triggers a zone with this type, the control unit activates any output of type External PSU Fault and causes an “External power fault” alert. If the alarm system is set, the control unit logs the event, starts any programmed communication, but does not start an alert until the system is unset. External WD Fault – WD (15) (This zone type is not available for i-on Compact or radio zones.) Use this zone type to monitor the fault output of an external warning device. If a warning device triggers a zone with this type, the control unit generates an “Ext WD Fault” alert. In a grade 2 system, a user can override this fault and set the system. In a grade 3 system, a user cannot override this fault. If the alarm system is set, the control unit logs the event, starts any programmed communication, but does not generate an alert until the system is unset. Once the zone is restored, in a grade 2 system a user can clear the alert by pressing and entering their access code. In a grade 3 system, the installer must enter the Installer Menu and leave it again to clear the alert. HUD Fault – HUD (16) (This zone type is not available for i-on Compact or radio zones.) Use this zone type to monitor the fault output of wired hold-up devices that are capable or reporting faults. When a detector triggers a zone with this type, the control unit generates an “HUD Fault” alert. If a user tries to set the system when this zone is active, the control unit displays the fault on the keypad. The user can override the fault and carry on setting. If the alarm system is set, the control unit logs the event, starts any programmed communication, but does not generate an alert until the system is unset. Once the zone is restored, in a grade 2 system a user can clear the alert by pressing and entering their access code. In a grade 3 system, the installer must enter the Installer Menu and leave it again to clear the alert. Log Only – LO (17) When a detector triggers a zone with this type, the control unit logs the event and activates any outputs that are programmed to follow this zone. The zone is active whether the system is set or unset. Typical uses for this zone type are for integrating the alarm system with a CCTV system. Note: Zone Follow outputs will activate on both alarm and tamper of a Log Only zone. Page 26 --- PAGE BREAK --- Detectors/Devices Menu Log only zones can be allocated to one or more partitions, and can use the Chime attribute. Exit Terminate ET (18) (This zone type is not available for i-on Compact.) Use this zone type to terminate setting when the system or partition exit mode is Exit Terminate (see page 58). This zone type is designed for a normally-open momentary switch. Note that this zone type is armed during the setting time, but inactive both while the system is set, and while the system is unset. If you apply the Chime attribute to this zone, the system will give a chime tone when the zone is activated both while the system is unset and while the system is set. Shunt Key Latching SKL (19) (This zone type is not available for i-on Compact.) In a part-setting system (one with no partitions): When a user activates this type of zone, the control unit “shunts” any zones in which the attribute Shuntable is set to Yes (see page 32), and activates any output of type Zones Shunted (see page 54). While zones are shunted, the control unit ignores the alarm signal from their detectors. The detectors remain shunted until a user restores the Shunt Key Latching zone. If a shunted detector is active at the time a user restores the Shunt Key Latching zone, the control unit ignores the state of the Shunt Key Latching zone. When all active shunted zones are restored, the control unit will recognise the Shunt Key Latching zone and un-shunt zones when the key is restored. In a system with partitions, the behaviour of a Shunt Key Latching zone is limited by the partitions that the zone belongs to as follows: If the zone is allocated to one or more partitions, then when a user activates the zone, the control unit shunts only zones with the Shuntable attribute in the same partition(s) as the Shunt Key Latching zone. If the Shunt Key Latching zone is not allocated to any partitions, then when a user activates the zone, the control unit shunts only zones with the Shuntable attribute attached to the same bus device as the Shunt Key Latching zone. If the Shunt Key Latching zone is connected to the control unit and not assigned to a partition, it will affect only zones with the Shuntable attribute connected to the control unit. For other ways of shunting zones see Shunt Groups on page 87. Shunt Key Non-Latch SKNL (20) (This zone type is not available for i-on Compact.) This carries out the same function as a Shunt Key Latching, but differs in the method of restoring shunted zones. The control unit changes the shunted/restored state of zones each time a user activates a Shunt Key Non-Latch zone. Lock Set LS (21) (This zone type is not available for i-on Compact.) Use this zone type to complete setting when the system or partition exit mode is Lock Set (see page 59). This zone type is designed for a normally-open switch (one that is open when the lock is locked). Note that this zone type is armed during setting and when the system is set. A Lock Set zone can take the Inverted attribute. Page 27 --- PAGE BREAK --- Detectors/Devices Menu Occupancy OC (22) (This zone type is not available for i-on Compact.) This zone type is intended for use with access control systems. If the zone is active when a user tries to set the system, the keypad displays “Tick to continue Occupancy zone active”. By pressing , the user can carry on to set the system and the control unit logs the event. In a partition-based system, an Occupancy zone can be allocated to a partition. Security SC (23) (This zone type is not available for i-on Compact.) This zone type is intended for use if keypads are located in areas that are accessible to non-authorised people while the system is unset. When a Security zone is active, the control unit disables the buttons on all keypads. The display and proximity tag sensor continue to function normally. If an authorised user presents a proximity tag to the keypad, the control unit activates the keys so that the user can operate the system. The control unit deactivates the keys when that user is finished. The keypad buttons will work normally when the system is set. In a partition-based system, you can allocate a Security zone to any partition. When activated, the control unit disables buttons on keypads in the same partition(s) as the Security zone. Tamper Return TR (24) (This zone type is not available for i-on Compact or radio zones.) This zone type makes it possible to monitor a tamper return wire from an external sounder. The control unit monitors a Tamper Return zone at all times. When triggered in the unset condition, only internal sounders operate. When triggered in the set condition, the alarm response (see page 60) determines whether external sirens, strobe and communications also respond to the alarm. Perimeter PZ (25) This zone type intended to be used with external (perimeter) detection equipment. PZ Unset Response (see page 61) and PZ Set Response (page 62) determine the response to activations of the zone. A Perimeter zone or the zone's tamper does not contribute to a burg or confirmed alarm. Page 28 --- PAGE BREAK --- Detectors/Devices Menu Partitions You can use this menu in a partitioned system to assign the zone to one or more partitions. By default, zones belong only to partition 1. Note: This menu does not appear if the zone type is Not Used or you are not using a partitioned system. Any zone other than whose type is Not Used must be assigned to at least one partition. If you assign a zone to more than one partition, that zone will be set only when all the partitions it belongs to are set. Press or to scroll through the list of partitions followed by or to assign/deassign the zone to each partition as necessary. An All Partitions option is available if the zone type allows the zone to belong to more than one partition (see the Table 4). You can use All Partitions to assign or de-assign the zone to or from all partitions. Table 4: Zone types that can belong to one or more partitions One partition only Any partition 01 HUA 03 Normal Alarm 02 Fire 05 Final Exit 04 24 Hr 06 Entry Route 07 Technical 08 Key Switch Momentary 10 Tamper 09 Key Switch Latched 11 External PSU AC fail 17 Log Only 12 External PSU Battery fault 18 Exit Terminate 13 External PSU Low Volts 19 Shunt Key Latched 14 External PSU Fault 20 Shunt Key Non Latching 15 External Warning Device Fault 21 Lock Set 16 Hold Up Device Fault 22 Occupancy 24 Tamper Return 23 Security 25 Perimeter Page 29 --- PAGE BREAK --- Detectors/Devices Menu Attributes Table 5 shows the zone attributes and the zone types they apply to. You can assign more than one attribute to a zone. Some attributes are unavailable for i-on Compact and radio or wired zones. The display shows only the available attributes for the zone type you select. Table 5: Zone attributes available for zone types Zone Attributes Reset Supervision Shuntable Inverted Masking Force Set Omit Omittable Part Set D Part Set C Part Set B Double Knock Soak Test Chime2 Chime1 Zone Type Not Used Hold Up Alarm Y Y Fire Alarm Y Y Normal Alarm Y Y Y Y 24 Hour Alarm Final Exit Y Y Entry Route Y Y Technical Alarm Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Key Switch Moment. Y Y Key Switch Latched Y Y Y Tamper Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Ext PSU AC fail Y Y Y Ext PSU Batt Fault Y Y Y Ext PSU Low Volts Y Y Y Ext PSU Fault Y Y Y Ext WD Fault Y Y Y HUD Fault Y Y Y Log Only Y Y Y Y Exit Terminate Y Y Y Y Shunt key Latching Y Y Shunt Key Non-Latch Y Y Lock Set Y Y Occupancy Y Y Security Y Y Tamper Return Perimeter Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Chime1 and Chime2 (i-on Compact has only one Chime attribute.) When enabled, the system gives a non-alarm chime when the zone is triggered. For all but Exit Terminate zones, the chime operates only when the system is unset. For Exit Terminate, the chime operates when the system is set or unset. Chime1 and Chime 2 have different tones, and can be used to distinguish zones. Page 30 --- PAGE BREAK --- Detectors/Devices Menu Soak Test Use this zone attribute if you want to place under long term test a detector that you suspect is giving false alarms. Zones with this attribute are disabled for 14 days after you return the control unit to user/unset mode. If the zone remains inactive for the whole fourteen days then after midnight on the 14th day, the control unit returns the zone to normal use. If the zone is activated during those 14 days while the system is set, the control unit logs the event as a “Soak Fail Znnn Alm” (nnn is the zone number, see page 17) without sounding any sirens or starting communications. The control unit also lights the red LEDs around the navigation key on the keypad to alert the user when they unset the system. An installer must key in their access code to reset the alert. During setting, a brief message is displayed to inform the user that one or more zones are in soak test. Note: If there is an output configured as type Zone Follow for a zone under Soak Test, the control unit will continue to operate the output if the soak test zone is triggered. The output will operate whether the zone is set or unset. Double Knock (This attribute is not available for radio zones.) Zones programmed with this attribute will cause an alarm only if the zone is EITHER triggered, restored and triggered again within a five-minute period, or if the zone remains active for 10 seconds. Note: Double Knock does not comply with EN50131. Part Set B When a user sets part set B, the control unit sets only those zones where the Part Set B attribute = “Yes”. (See also “Exit Mode” on page 58.) Part Set C When a user sets part set C, the control unit sets only those zones where Part Set C attribute = “Yes”. Part Set D When a user sets part set D, the control unit sets only those zones where Part Set D attribute = “Yes”. Omittable When a zone has this attribute, a user can omit it before setting the system. If a user tries to set the system when a zone with this attribute is open (active) the control unit alerts them and pauses the setting procedure. The user can acknowledge the alert by pressing and continue setting, providing the feature is enabled in System Options – User Options – User Access – Quick Omit (see page 69). Note: Take care when assigning Omittable to an Entry Route zone when Quick Omit is enabled. There is a risk that the user may omit the Entry Route zone in error. Force Set Omit When this attribute is set to Yes, a user with a remote control or a radio keypad can set the system while the zone is open (active), providing the feature is enabled in System Options – Radio Options – Remotes – Force Set (see page 84) or System Options – Radio Options – Radio Keypads – Force Set (page 85), as applicable. Page 31 --- PAGE BREAK --- Detectors/Devices Menu Masking (This attribute is not available for radio zones.) Apply this attribute either if you have connected a detector that reports masking by changing the resistance between its mask/fault contacts, or if you have connected the masking/trouble contacts of a detector using the “3 resistor method” (see the installation instructions). Note that you must enable System Options – Masking Options – Masking (page 86) to make this attribute available, and the zone wiring type must be FSL. Note: You cannot apply the Masking and the Inverted attributes at the same time. Inverted (This attribute is not available for radio zones.) On FSL zones, the attribute makes the control unit treat resistances in the 6k9 band as “tamper”, and resistances below the 2k2 band as “alarm”. In 4-wire CC zones the attribute makes the control unit treat open alarm contacts as “no alarm” and closed alarm contacts as “alarm”. (Tamper contacts are not affected by the Invert attribute.) You can apply this attribute to any zone type except Tamper Return and Not Used. Note: You cannot apply the Inverted and the Masking attributes at the same time. The Inverted attribute does not apply to radio zones. Shuntable (This attribute is not available for i-on Compact.) Apply this attribute to zones that you wish to be shunted. If you give a zone this attribute, you may also want to assign the zone to a shunt group (see page 87). If you wish to set up a shunt key, see page 27. Supervision (This attribute is not available for wired zones.) This attribute allows you to enable/disable supervision for individual zones. When set to Yes (the default), supervision for this zone is the same as the selected option in System Options – Radio Options – Supervision (see page 83). When set to No, supervision is disabled for his zone. Reset This attribute is intended for wired zones only. Enable this attribute if you have connected a latching type of shock or vibration sensor to a zone. You will also need to program an output of type Shock Sensor Reset. The control unit ignores the zone during setting while the Shock Sensor Reset output is active, and for an extra three seconds after the output restores. Note: It is recommended that you set the exit time to a value not less than 10 seconds to allow detectors to reset correctly and avoid the possibility that the control unit will isolate a zone that has not reset. If the exit time is less than 10 seconds and the detector does not successfully reset (it remains in an active state), the control unit will not add the detector back to the system until detector becomes inactive. This is to prevent false alarms. Page 32 --- PAGE BREAK --- Detectors/Devices Menu Resistance (This option is not available for i-on Compact.) This option allows you to specify the resistance values used by an individual FSL zone on either the control unit (if applicable), an EXP-W10/WCC or an EXP-PSU. This option is not available if the control unit or bus device is has been programmed as 4-wire or 2-wire CC connection. Address Bus Device (This option is not available for i-on Compact.) You can use this option to: Add new bus devices to the system once they are physically wired to the bus. The control unit assigns a bus address (see page 16) to each device you add. You can add any type of bus address using this option. An alternative method for wired expanders, radio expanders and keypads, is to use the specific Address Bus Device option (for example, Detectors/Devices – Wired Expanders – Address Bus Device). Re-scan the bus for any found or missing devices. Note: If you need to replace or remove a device, please use the appropriate Delete or Replace Option, such as Detectors/Devices – Wired Expanders – Delete Expander, or Detectors/Devices – Wired Expanders – Replace Expander. Adding bus devices To add new bus devices to the system: 1. From the Installer menu, select Detectors/Devices – Address Bus Device, and press when you see "Re-scan bus?". The following is displayed: 2. 3. When you see the above message, the control unit is ready to allocate an address to each additional bus device that has a "null" address. The control unit allocates the next available address when you press the following button/keys: At a keypad: press and hold “A” and “” together. Release the keys when you hear a sound. The display shows the allocated address, such as "b1-d52" (bus 1, device 52). At an expander: press and hold the “Request Address” button. Release the button when the display shows the bus address. If you do not want to use the address shown, press the button again as many times as necessary to display the required address. Note: An expander cannot obtain an address if the "Disable Tamper" link is fitted. At other types of device: please refer to the device installation instructions. Note: Do not attempt to obtain an address for two devices at the same time. When you have finished addressing all devices, press . Page 33 --- PAGE BREAK --- Detectors/Devices Menu Re-scanning the bus The control unit keeps a record of every bus device that it has learned. To keep the list up to date, the control unit scans the bus during power up and when you leave the Installer menu. You can also scan the bus by pressing when you see the "Re-scan bus?" prompt after selecting Detectors/Devices – Address Bus Device. During a scan, the control unit queries every device on the bus to report its bus address. The control unit then compares the reported addresses with those that is has stored and may report: Duplicate bus addresses – That is, devices that have the same address. You will need to change the address of one of the devices to make it unique. Found and/or lost bus devices – If the control unit finds that a device is on the bus that has not been added using the Installer menu, or that a previously-added device is missing, the display shows, for example: The top line shows the number of new devices found, and the number of existing devices lost. The bottom line shows the first in the list of found and lost devices. You can use the up/down navigation keys to scroll through the list. If you see that there are found or lost devices: Either: Press to return to the Installer menu to check that all devices are listed and addressed correctly. Make sure that the devices are powered up. Tip: To check the address of an expander, remove the lid and briefly press the addressing button. The two-digit display shows the bus address for a few seconds. For example “b1” followed by “08” is “bus 1 device 08”. OR: Press to make the control unit update its internal record of devices attached to the bus. The display shows: Press to accept the changes, or press to return without making changes. Note: Accepting changes deletes all programmed information for any lost devices. If you are re-scanning the bus through Address Bus Device, the display shows: Press if there are new bus devices (and continue as described in the previous section), or press if there are no new bus devices. Changes are not saved until you leave Installer menu. If the control unit loses power before leaving Installer menu, the bus re-configure do [... content truncated for display — full manual available from manufacturer ...]
| Model | Zones | Grade | Application |
|---|---|---|---|
| Galaxy MK7 8 | 8 zones | Grade 2 | Residential / small commercial |
| Galaxy MK7 48 | 48 zones | Grade 2 | Small commercial |
| Galaxy Flex 20 | 20 zones | Grade 2/3 | Small commercial |
| Galaxy Flex 50 | 50 zones | Grade 2/3 | Commercial |
| Galaxy Flex 100 | 100 zones | Grade 2/3 | Commercial / industrial |
| Galaxy Flex 200 | 200 zones | Grade 2/3 | Large commercial |
| Galaxy Flex 520 | 520 zones | Grade 2/3 | Large commercial / industrial |
| Galaxy Dimension 48 | 48 zones | Grade 3/4 | Commercial / high security |
| Galaxy Dimension 96 | 96 zones | Grade 3/4 | Commercial / high security |
| Galaxy Dimension 144 | 144 zones | Grade 3/4 | Industrial / high security |
| Galaxy Dimension 264 | 264 zones | Grade 3/4 | Large industrial |
| Galaxy Dimension 520 | 520 zones | Grade 3/4 | Critical infrastructure |
| Code Type | Default Value | Notes |
|---|---|---|
| Engineer Code | 1234 | Must be changed on first commissioning |
| Manager Code | 2580 | Full system management access |
| User Code 1 | 1234 | Standard user — change immediately |
| Duress Code | Not set | Silent alarm to ARC when entered under duress |
| Menu | Option | Function |
|---|---|---|
| 01 | Zones | Programme zone types, attributes, and groups |
| 02 | Outputs | Configure relay outputs and their triggers |
| 03 | Users | Add, edit, delete user codes and access levels |
| 04 | Time / Date | Set system clock and automatic arming schedules |
| 05 | Signalling | ARC telephone numbers, account codes, protocols |
| 06 | System | Panel name, engineer lockout, service interval |
| 07 | Keypads | Keypad addresses, LED options, chime zones |
| 08 | Groups | Define zone groups for part-set arming |
| 09 | Test | Walk test, output test, comms test |
| 10 | Log | View event log (up to 1,000 events) |
| 11 | Network | IP module configuration (Galaxy Dimension) |
| 12 | RS-232 | Serial port configuration for PC upload/download |
| Zone Type | Code | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Final Exit | 01 | Last zone before arming — triggers exit delay |
| Entry/Exit | 02 | Entry route — triggers entry delay when armed |
| Intruder | 03 | Standard alarm zone — instant alarm when armed |
| 24-Hour | 04 | Always active — alarm at any time |
| PA | 05 | Personal attack — silent or audible alarm |
| Fire | 06 | Fire detection input |
| Tamper | 07 | Anti-tamper circuit |
| Keyswitch | 08 | External arm/disarm via key switch |
| Omit | 09 | Zone can be omitted by user |
| Perimeter | 10 | Part-set zone — active when perimeter armed |
| Dual | 11 | Two-zone coincidence required for alarm |
| Confirmed | 12 | Sequential alarm confirmation required |
| Code / Display | Description | Likely Cause | Action |
|---|---|---|---|
| ZONE FAULT | Zone in fault condition | Open circuit, broken cable, device failure | Check zone wiring and device. Measure resistance at panel terminals. |
| ZONE TAMPER | Zone tamper activated | Detector lid removed, cable cut, short circuit | Inspect detector and cabling. Check tamper switch is seated correctly. |
| MAINS FAIL | 230V AC supply lost | Power cut, blown fuse, tripped MCB | Check mains supply. Inspect fuse/MCB in consumer unit. Check panel fuse. |
| BATTERY LOW | Standby battery below threshold | Battery end of life, charging fault, high drain | Measure battery voltage (should be >12.5V). Replace if <11V. Check charger output. |
| BATTERY FAIL | Battery not detected or failed | Battery disconnected, cell failure, fuse blown | Check battery connections. Test battery under load. Replace battery. |
| KEYPAD FAULT | Keypad not communicating | RS-485 bus fault, power loss, address conflict | Check bus wiring continuity. Verify keypad address. Check bus termination resistors. |
| COMMS FAIL | Signalling path failure | PSTN line fault, IP network down, ARC unreachable | Test telephone line. Check IP connectivity. Verify ARC account codes. |
| ENGINEER RESET | Panel requires engineer reset | Alarm confirmed, anti-code required | Contact ARC for anti-code, or use engineer code to reset. |
| SERVICE DUE | Scheduled service interval reached | Service timer expired | Carry out full service. Reset service timer in engineer menu. |
| CLOCK FAIL | Real-time clock fault | Battery backup for clock failed | Set time/date in engineer menu. Replace clock battery if required. |
| EXPANDER FAULT | Zone expander not responding | RS-485 bus fault, power loss, address conflict | Check expander power and bus wiring. Verify expander address. |
| LOG FULL | Event log at capacity | 1,000 events stored | Download log via Galaxy Gold software. Log auto-overwrites oldest events. |
| ZONE OMIT | Zone has been omitted | User or engineer omitted a zone | Investigate why zone was omitted. Restore zone when fault is cleared. |
| ANTI-MASK | Detector masking detected | PIR detector masked or obstructed | Inspect detector for obstruction or masking material. Clean lens. |
| DUAL PATH FAIL | Both signalling paths failed | PSTN and IP both unavailable | Check both communication paths. Contact network provider if required. |
| Panel Setting | Normal State (Ω) | Alarm State (Ω) | Tamper State |
|---|---|---|---|
| EOL 4k7 | 4,700Ω | <500Ω | Open circuit (>10kΩ) |
| DEOL 4k7+4k7 | 4,700Ω (outer) + 4,700Ω (inner) | <500Ω | Open circuit |
| TEOL | Three 4k7Ω resistors | <500Ω | Open circuit |
| No EOL (not recommended) | Short circuit | Open circuit | N/A |
| Terminal | Function | Notes |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | +12V | Auxiliary 12V output (500mA max) |
| 2 | 0V | Common ground |
| 3–18 | Z1–Z16 | Zone inputs (expandable via modules) |
| 19 | BELL+ | Bell/siren positive output |
| 20 | BELL− | Bell/siren negative output |
| 21 | STB+ | Strobe positive output |
| 22 | STB− | Strobe negative output |
| 23 | OP1 | Programmable relay output 1 |
| 24 | OP2 | Programmable relay output 2 |
| 25 | D+ | RS-485 data bus positive |
| 26 | D− | RS-485 data bus negative |
| 27 | PSTN L | PSTN telephone line (Line) |
| 28 | PSTN T | PSTN telephone line (Tip) |
| Terminal | Function | Notes |
|---|---|---|
| +12V | Power supply to keypad | Max 200mA per keypad |
| 0V | Common ground | Must be continuous throughout bus |
| D+ | RS-485 data positive | Twisted pair with D− |
| D− | RS-485 data negative | Twisted pair with D+ |
| TAMPER | Keypad tamper | Connect to zone or tamper bus |
| Terminal | Function | Notes |
|---|---|---|
| Bell +12V | BELL+ | Fused at 1A — do not exceed |
| Bell 0V | BELL− | Return via tamper capacitor |
| Tamper capacitor | In series with bell circuit | 10µF electrolytic, correct polarity |
| Self-activating siren | BELL+ / BELL− | Internal battery — connect trigger wire to BELL+ |
=== WEB RESEARCH: galaxy === HONEYWELL GALAXY DIMENSION TECHNICAL REFERENCE ============================================== 1. PRODUCT RANGE AND MODEL NUMBERS ---------------------------------- Control Panels: - GD-48 (C048-D1-XX2) - GD-96 - GD-264 - GD-520 (C520-D1-XX2) 2. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS --------------------------- Zones onboard (maximum): - GD-48: 16 - (48) - GD-96: 16 - (96) - GD-264: 16 - (264) - GD-520: 16 - (520) Inclusive wireless zones: - GD-48: 32 - GD-96: 80 - GD-264: 192 - GD-520: 192 Outputs (400mA) on-board: 8 (All models) Trigger outputs on flying lead (10mA): 6 (All models) Integrated PSU: 2.5 A (All models) Output Current rating: 1.2A (All models) 3. DEFAULT CODES ---------------- - Default Manager Code: 12345 (or 1234 depending on version) - Default Engineer Code: 112233 - Default Remote User Code: REMOTE (PIN: 543210) 4. FAULT/EVENT/ALARM CODES -------------------------- (Extracted from manuals) - AC Fail - Battery Low - Fuse Blown - Tamper - Comm Fail - Line Fail - Missing Device 5. ZONE TYPES ------------- (Extracted from manuals) - Final - Exit - Intruder - 24 Hours - Security - Dual - Fault - Tamper - PA (Panic Alarm) - Fire - Medical - Keyswitch 6. WIRING DIAGRAMS AND TERMINAL DESCRIPTIONS -------------------------------------------- RS485 Databuses (AB Lines) Zones: 1k Ohm (1%) resistor across each zone for quick setup. Outputs: 400mA on-board, 10mA trigger outputs. 7. PROGRAMMING MENU STRUCTURE ----------------------------- 10 Setting Options 11 Omit Zones 12 Timed Set 13 Part Set 14 Forced Set 15 Chime 16 Instant Set 17 Instant Part 18 Home Set 19 All Set 20 Display Options 21 Display Zones 22 Display Log 23 System 24 Print 25 Access Doors 30 Test Options 31 Walk Test 32 Outputs 40 Modify Options 41 Time/Date 42 Codes 43 Summer 44 Trace 45 Timer Control 46 Group Omit 47 Remote Access 48 Engineer Access 49 Datelock 50 Engineer 1 51 Parameters 52 Program Zones 53 Program Outputs 54 Links 55 Soak 56 Communications 57 System Print 58 Keypad 59 Quick Menu 60 Engineer 2 61 Diagnostics 62 Full Test 63 Options 64 Assemble Zone 8. EXPANDER/PERIPHERAL DEVICES ------------------------------ - Galaxy Power Unit 2.75A (Rated at 1.2A for Grade 3) - Galaxy Power RIO 2.75A (Integrated RIO 8 inputs/4 outputs) - Galaxy RIO (Remote Input/Output): 8 zones, 4 outputs - RF Portal (868MHz, up to 8 modules, 192 wireless zones) - Ethernet Module (E080-04) - ISDN Module - RS232 Cable - Audio Interface Module & MUX Module - Keypads: MK7, MK8, KeyProx, TouchCenter - Access Control: DCM (Door Control Module), MAX4 Badge reader 9. COMMISSIONING STEPS ---------------------- 1. Connect a 1k Ohm (1%) resistor across each of the zones on the panel. 2. Connect the battery. 3. Connect the AC power. 4. Enter the default Engineer code (112233). 5. Program zones, outputs, and communication modules. 6. Perform a Walk Test (Option 31). 10. COMPLIANCE STANDARDS ------------------------ - EN50131-3:2009 - EN50131-6:2008 - PD6662:2010 - Security Grade 3 11. RAW CONTENT DUMP -------------------- Galaxy® Dimension Integrated intrusion and door control panel range The Galaxy® Dimension series of security systems is a fully integrated intrusion and door control security solution for mid to large commercial security installations. It offers your customers a user-friendly system in a cost-effective and fully compliant Security Grade 3 package. With innovative wireless capability and user-friendly remote management options, the series provides high quality, reliable security solutions, with the flexibility to meet the needs of every commercial and industrial application. Secure wireless options Cabling can be impractical due to building aesthetics, or simply too expensive. By removing cabling, particularly from large installations, significant time can be gained, costs saved and disruption to customer’s operations can be minimised. To ensure fail-safe communications, multiple path communication options for alarm signalling include GPRS, Ethernet and standard telephone line (PSTN). These options also allow maximum flexibility and customisation to capitalise on existing network infrastructures and minimise disruption for customers. A combination of up to eight RF portals per installation, a wide range of intruder, perimeter, environmental and life safety wireless sensors which boast a 2km radio range (in open field) ensures the strongest signal path is used to keep control panel and sensors in constant communication and provides a flexible and customisable system to meet business needs. N A choice of LCD Keypad and Keyprox options including the MK8, with a modern design and all the familiarity and functionality of the MK7, for ease of programming across the range. In addition, all user interfaces feature a proximity function allowing quick and secure set and unset without PIN code. The GX Remote control mobile App allows control of the system from anywhere in the world from your preferred smart device (requires E080-04 Ethernet module). Remotely manage sites and save time and money EW Attractive user interfaces and Mobile App EW Flexible & reliable communications Galaxy Dimension is a hybrid control panel series that offers wired, wireless or a combination of both solutions and uses patented control panel software and bi-directional radio and agile routing technologies to provide secure and reliable security for commercial environments. Fully managed and monitored integrated solutions With Galaxy® Dimension, an Alarm Receiving Centre (ARC) can listen in using independant audio channels to identify the specific location where the alarm has been triggered and verify source and cause. This reduces false alarms and increases system reliability. N Audio verification (‘Listen-in’ Facility) Programming software compatibility The Remote Servicing Suite (RSS) is a maintenance tool enabling complete remote control of the panel, allowing installers to give customers instant support. Installers can complete remote routine inspection reducing the need for time consuming and costly site visits. The RSS software uses a common database to communicate with all Galaxy® panels from one programme. A networked version of the Remote Servicing Suite offers access to up-to-date records for all users. This guarantees the secure management of information in one central location. Both wired and wireless components can take advantage of the easy remote diagnostics and maintenance functionality in this software. The introduction of WIN-PAK for Galaxy end user software brings a new level of ease to managing up to five Galaxy systems simultaneously across multiple sites, from one central location. Designed to ease user management, the software manages user names, PINs, authority rights across sites, it automatically updates one or more Galaxy panels and allows users to be added and deleted in just a few mouse clicks. Improved command and control is achieved through specific Galaxy floor plans that clearly display alarms and other information which along with reporting and automation features provides users with a highly secure, powerful management tool that can be expanded to meet your security needs. When the time is right, with WIN-PAK, the system can be expanded to include fully featured access control (NetAXS) and further expanded to a full management and monitoring system that includes multiple intruder systems, access control and CCTV surveillance all controlled by WIN-PAK. The right choice Galaxy Dimension offers customers a user-friendly, integrated security solution that is flexible and upgradeable to meet specific security needs. Honeywell provides sales and marketing support and organises frequent training to boost system understanding and to ensure trouble-free installations every time. For more information on Galaxy® Dimension please go to www.honeywell.com/security/uk or contact our sales team using the details provided overleaf. Features • Up to 520 zones • Up to 64 doors controlled • Protecting up to 32 groups • Up to 1000 users • Up to 67 weekly schedules available • Up to 32 yearly holiday schedules • Door access controlled by access templates and group set status • Areas behind a door can be unset automatically via card reader • Users can be managed automatically and remotely in up to 5 Galaxy panels with WIN-PAK for Galaxy • Events can be identified instantly using realistic floorplans with WIN-PAK for Galaxy. • Access event log with 1000 events recorded in panel (separate intruder log) • GPRS, Ethernet, PSTN, USB communications options • Groups can be set via door control readers • Evacuation control will allow doors to unlock in the event of fire • Up to 32 audio verification channels • Multi-language interface • GX remote control Mobile App for remote management of up to 20 sites from a single smart device. • The Galaxy Dimension range has been independently tested and is compliant to EN50131-3:2009, EN50131-6:2008, PD6662:2010 • Compatible with all wiegand readers • Up to 8 wireless interface modules (RF portals) • Up to 192 wireless zones • Up to 100 key fobs • Full bi-directional agile routing (patented technology) • Full range of wired and wireless intrusion and environmental detectors Attractive user interfaces A range of LCD Keypad and Keyprox options • MK8 keypad offers a modern keypad and keyprox design with all the familiarity and functionality of the MK7 keypad • Familiar MK7 keypad for installer programming across the range • Proximity function across all user interfaces allows quick and secure set and unset without PIN code • Check and control the system from anywhere in the world with the mobile app GX Remote Control from your preferred smart device (requires E080-04 Ethernet module) DCM Wireless system expander module - RF Portal • Bi-directional wireless interface with full range of intrusion and environmental detectors • 868MHz frequency • Up to 8 wireless interface modules (RF portals) • Up to 192 wireless zones and up to 100 key fobs • Full bi-directional agile routing (patented technology) • Compatible with all Honeywell Alpha protocol sensors DT8M /DTPI8M DUAL TEC® IR8M/IRPI8M PIR x2 MK8 FG8M Door Lock GLASSBREAK DETECTOR MK7 DO800M-A & DODT800GY-B DOOR CONTACTS DET8M - FLOOD & TEMPERATURE SENSOR TCPA2B PANIC BUTTON (2 BUTTON) TCC8M TWO-WAY KEY FOB DFS8M SMOKE DETECTOR CO8M CARBON MONOXIDE DETECTOR TCE800M FOUR BUTTON KEYFOB i -fr ter d en ly H ID 6, outputs Galaxy RIO (Remote Input/Output) ® Provides zone and output expansion for Galaxy® Systems • 8 fully programmable zones • 4 programmable outputs • Tamper protection • Rotary switch for setting module address RS232 Cable Enables communications between PCs or Printers and Galaxy® systems G GD-96 / GD e 8 4 Line 2 Line 1 GD-48 n zo r de red Wi pan ex Galaxy® Power Unit 2.75A • Rated at 1.2A for Grade 3 compliance • Reports AC, Battery, fuse and tamper via RS485 Galaxy® Power RIO 2.75A • Rated at 1.2A for Grade 3 compliance • Reports AC, Battery, fuse and tamper via RS485 • Integrated RIO (8 inputs/4 outputs) 8,outputs 16,inputs e ll Int Power Units 8 4 t p o w er ig en su p ply W i re l tes s de tvic tes U ts SHK8M/SHKC8M PIEZO SHOCK SENSOR RS232 (serial port from boar Se r ial p o rt(s) On line 1 only DCM • Door control module with two wiegand inputs allows management of two doors • Off line mode available for previous 100 valid users • Users can be assigned to an Access Template giving an access time zone to each group (64 Access Templates available on GD-520) On lines 1, 2, 3 or 4 Proximity Reader - MAX4 • Complete door control in a single unit • Can be used as standalone or integrated into the Galaxy® control system • Connected on RS485 bus GPRS/IP Communications GT-620NG and GT-640NG Modules • Ethernet and GPRS/GSM modules provide flexible alarm signalling and remote servicing options • Enabled via Ethernet supporting TCP/IP protocol • Enhanced dual path signalling options: 1) Ethernet backed up by PSTN 2) GPRS backed up by PSTN 3) Ethernet backed up by GPRS Exit button MAX4 Badge reader Wiegand Reader Galaxy® Ethernet Module D o or c o tn tro Provides alarm signalling and remote servicing support for Galaxy® systems via 10 Base T Ethernet LAN/WAN supporting TCP/IP protocol tl Remote management GX Remote Control Basic remote management of home and premises security systems wherever you are • One free app for all your systems • Simple secure 10 second login • Single touch interrogation of alarm history • Manage up to 20 systems from a single smart device • Single tap switch between property and user specific groups Fl GPRS/IP Network tex tib tle Co tmm tunic IP Network tm tain ten tan ce Line 4 Line 3 tnt D-264 trd) te tot tm te R tic verif Audio tn atio N EW ation s Re m ot e m a n a g e m e GD-520 App Control via App Store Badge Smart Device Basics Available on the The App Store badge must be used in both marketing and advertising communications, such Installer Manual Honeywell Security Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual Table of Contents Contents INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................... 1-1 Variants ................................................................................................................ 1-1 SECTION 1: QUICK SETUP .................................................................... 1-3 SECTION 2: SYSTEM ARCHTECTURE .................................................. 2-1 PCB Layout .......................................................................................................... 2-2 RS485 Expansion Module (GD-520 only) ......................................................... 2-3 System Installation and Wiring ......................................................................... 2-4 Connecting the Galaxy Dimension to the PSTN.............................................. 2-5 Connecting Additional Telecom Apparatus .......................................................................... 2-6 Line Monitoring .................................................................................................................... 2-6 Stand-by Battery ................................................................................................. 2-7 Battery Start-up ..................................................................................................................... 2-7 On-Board Power Supply Unit............................................................................. 2-7 Memory ................................................................................................................ 2-8 RS485 Data Communication Bus (AB Lines) ................................................... 2-8 RS485 Wiring Configurations ............................................................................ 2-8 RS485 Wiring Recommendations ..................................................................... 2-9 Zones ................................................................................................................. 2-11 Zone Addresses .................................................-fr ter d en ly H ID 6, outputs Galaxy RIO (Remote Input/Output) ® Provides zone and output expansion for Galaxy® Systems • 8 fully programmable zones • 4 programmable outputs • Tamper protection • Rotary switch for setting module address RS232 Cable Enables communications between PCs or Printers and Galaxy® systems G GD-96 / GD e 8 4 Line 2 Line 1 GD-48 n zo r de red Wi pan ex Galaxy® Power Unit 2.75A • Rated at 1.2A for Grade 3 compliance • Reports AC, Battery, fuse and tamper via RS485 Galaxy® Power RIO 2.75A • Rated at 1.2A for Grade 3 compliance • Reports AC, Battery, fuse and tamper via RS485 • Integrated RIO (8 inputs/4 outputs) 8,outputs 16,inputs e ll Int Power Units 8 4 t p o w er ig en su p ply W i re l tes s de tvic tes U ts SHK8M/SHKC8M PIEZO SHOCK SENSOR RS232 (serial port from boar Se r ial p o rt(s) On line 1 only DCM • Door control module with two wiegand inputs allows management of two doors • Off line mode available for previous 100 valid users • Users can be assigned to an Access Template giving an access time zone to each group (64 Access Templates available on GD-520) On lines 1, 2, 3 or 4 Proximity Reader - MAX4 • Complete door control in a single unit • Can be used as standalone or integrated into the Galaxy® control system • Connected on RS485 bus GPRS/IP Communications GT-620NG and GT-640NG Modules • Ethernet and GPRS/GSM modules provide flexible alarm signalling and remote servicing options • Enabled via Ethernet supporting TCP/IP protocol • Enhanced dual path signalling options: 1) Ethernet backed up by PSTN 2) GPRS backed up by PSTN 3) Ethernet backed up by GPRS Exit button MAX4 Badge reader Wiegand Reader Galaxy® Ethernet Module D o or c o tn tro Provides alarm signalling and remote servicing support for Galaxy® systems via 10 Base T Ethernet LAN/WAN supporting TCP/IP protocol tl Remote management GX Remote Control Basic remote management of home and premises security systems wherever you are • One free app for all your systems • Simple secure 10 second login • Single touch interrogation of alarm history • Manage up to 20 systems from a single smart device • Single tap switch between property and user specific groups Fl GPRS/IP Network tex tib tle Co tmm tunic IP Network tm tain ten tan ce Line 4 Line 3 tnt D-264 trd) te tot tm te R tic verif Audio tn atio N EW ation s Re m ot e m a n a g e m e GD-520 App Control via App Store Badge Smart Device Basics Available on the The App Store badge must be used in both marketing and advertising communications, such === WEB RESEARCH: honeywell galaxy === HONEYWELL GALAXY DIMENSION TECHNICAL REFERENCE ============================================== 1. PRODUCT RANGE AND MODEL NUMBERS ---------------------------------- Control Panels: - GD-48 (C048-D1-XX2) - GD-96 - GD-264 - GD-520 (C520-D1-XX2) 2. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS --------------------------- Zones onboard (maximum): - GD-48: 16 - (48) - GD-96: 16 - (96) - GD-264: 16 - (264) - GD-520: 16 - (520) Inclusive wireless zones: - GD-48: 32 - GD-96: 80 - GD-264: 192 - GD-520: 192 Outputs (400mA) on-board: 8 (All models) Trigger outputs on flying lead (10mA): 6 (All models) Integrated PSU: 2.5 A (All models) Output Current rating: 1.2A (All models) 3. DEFAULT CODES ---------------- - Default Manager Code: 12345 (or 1234 depending on version) - Default Engineer Code: 112233 - Default Remote User Code: REMOTE (PIN: 543210) 4. FAULT/EVENT/ALARM CODES -------------------------- (Extracted from manuals) - AC Fail - Battery Low - Fuse Blown - Tamper - Comm Fail - Line Fail - Missing Device 5. ZONE TYPES ------------- (Extracted from manuals) - Final - Exit - Intruder - 24 Hours - Security - Dual - Fault - Tamper - PA (Panic Alarm) - Fire - Medical - Keyswitch 6. WIRING DIAGRAMS AND TERMINAL DESCRIPTIONS -------------------------------------------- RS485 Databuses (AB Lines) Zones: 1k Ohm (1%) resistor across each zone for quick setup. Outputs: 400mA on-board, 10mA trigger outputs. 7. PROGRAMMING MENU STRUCTURE ----------------------------- 10 Setting Options 11 Omit Zones 12 Timed Set 13 Part Set 14 Forced Set 15 Chime 16 Instant Set 17 Instant Part 18 Home Set 19 All Set 20 Display Options 21 Display Zones 22 Display Log 23 System 24 Print 25 Access Doors 30 Test Options 31 Walk Test 32 Outputs 40 Modify Options 41 Time/Date 42 Codes 43 Summer 44 Trace 45 Timer Control 46 Group Omit 47 Remote Access 48 Engineer Access 49 Datelock 50 Engineer 1 51 Parameters 52 Program Zones 53 Program Outputs 54 Links 55 Soak 56 Communications 57 System Print 58 Keypad 59 Quick Menu 60 Engineer 2 61 Diagnostics 62 Full Test 63 Options 64 Assemble Zone 8. EXPANDER/PERIPHERAL DEVICES ------------------------------ - Galaxy Power Unit 2.75A (Rated at 1.2A for Grade 3) - Galaxy Power RIO 2.75A (Integrated RIO 8 inputs/4 outputs) - Galaxy RIO (Remote Input/Output): 8 zones, 4 outputs - RF Portal (868MHz, up to 8 modules, 192 wireless zones) - Ethernet Module (E080-04) - ISDN Module - RS232 Cable - Audio Interface Module & MUX Module - Keypads: MK7, MK8, KeyProx, TouchCenter - Access Control: DCM (Door Control Module), MAX4 Badge reader 9. COMMISSIONING STEPS ---------------------- 1. Connect a 1k Ohm (1%) resistor across each of the zones on the panel. 2. Connect the battery. 3. Connect the AC power. 4. Enter the default Engineer code (112233). 5. Program zones, outputs, and communication modules. 6. Perform a Walk Test (Option 31). 10. COMPLIANCE STANDARDS ------------------------ - EN50131-3:2009 - EN50131-6:2008 - PD6662:2010 - Security Grade 3 11. RAW CONTENT DUMP -------------------- Galaxy® Dimension Integrated intrusion and door control panel range The Galaxy® Dimension series of security systems is a fully integrated intrusion and door control security solution for mid to large commercial security installations. It offers your customers a user-friendly system in a cost-effective and fully compliant Security Grade 3 package. With innovative wireless capability and user-friendly remote management options, the series provides high quality, reliable security solutions, with the flexibility to meet the needs of every commercial and industrial application. Secure wireless options Cabling can be impractical due to building aesthetics, or simply too expensive. By removing cabling, particularly from large installations, significant time can be gained, costs saved and disruption to customer’s operations can be minimised. To ensure fail-safe communications, multiple path communication options for alarm signalling include GPRS, Ethernet and standard telephone line (PSTN). These options also allow maximum flexibility and customisation to capitalise on existing network infrastructures and minimise disruption for customers. A combination of up to eight RF portals per installation, a wide range of intruder, perimeter, environmental and life safety wireless sensors which boast a 2km radio range (in open field) ensures the strongest signal path is used to keep control panel and sensors in constant communication and provides a flexible and customisable system to meet business needs. N A choice of LCD Keypad and Keyprox options including the MK8, with a modern design and all the familiarity and functionality of the MK7, for ease of programming across the range. In addition, all user interfaces feature a proximity function allowing quick and secure set and unset without PIN code. The GX Remote control mobile App allows control of the system from anywhere in the world from your preferred smart device (requires E080-04 Ethernet module). Remotely manage sites and save time and money EW Attractive user interfaces and Mobile App EW Flexible & reliable communications Galaxy Dimension is a hybrid control panel series that offers wired, wireless or a combination of both solutions and uses patented control panel software and bi-directional radio and agile routing technologies to provide secure and reliable security for commercial environments. Fully managed and monitored integrated solutions With Galaxy® Dimension, an Alarm Receiving Centre (ARC) can listen in using independant audio channels to identify the specific location where the alarm has been triggered and verify source and cause. This reduces false alarms and increases system reliability. N Audio verification (‘Listen-in’ Facility) Programming software compatibility The Remote Servicing Suite (RSS) is a maintenance tool enabling complete remote control of the panel, allowing installers to give customers instant support. Installers can complete remote routine inspection reducing the need for time consuming and costly site visits. The RSS software uses a common database to communicate with all Galaxy® panels from one programme. A networked version of the Remote Servicing Suite offers access to up-to-date records for all users. This guarantees the secure management of information in one central location. Both wired and wireless components can take advantage of the easy remote diagnostics and maintenance functionality in this software. The introduction of WIN-PAK for Galaxy end user software brings a new level of ease to managing up to five Galaxy systems simultaneously across multiple sites, from one central location. Designed to ease user management, the software manages user names, PINs, authority rights across sites, it automatically updates one or more Galaxy panels and allows users to be added and deleted in just a few mouse clicks. Improved command and control is achieved through specific Galaxy floor plans that clearly display alarms and other information which along with reporting and automation features provides users with a highly secure, powerful management tool that can be expanded to meet your security needs. When the time is right, with WIN-PAK, the system can be expanded to include fully featured access control (NetAXS) and further expanded to a full management and monitoring system that includes multiple intruder systems, access control and CCTV surveillance all controlled by WIN-PAK. The right choice Galaxy Dimension offers customers a user-friendly, integrated security solution that is flexible and upgradeable to meet specific security needs. Honeywell provides sales and marketing support and organises frequent training to boost system understanding and to ensure trouble-free installations every time. For more information on Galaxy® Dimension please go to www.honeywell.com/security/uk or contact our sales team using the details provided overleaf. Features • Up to 520 zones • Up to 64 doors controlled • Protecting up to 32 groups • Up to 1000 users • Up to 67 weekly schedules available • Up to 32 yearly holiday schedules • Door access controlled by access templates and group set status • Areas behind a door can be unset automatically via card reader • Users can be managed automatically and remotely in up to 5 Galaxy panels with WIN-PAK for Galaxy • Events can be identified instantly using realistic floorplans with WIN-PAK for Galaxy. • Access event log with 1000 events recorded in panel (separate intruder log) • GPRS, Ethernet, PSTN, USB communications options • Groups can be set via door control readers • Evacuation control will allow doors to unlock in the event of fire • Up to 32 audio verification channels • Multi-language interface • GX remote control Mobile App for remote management of up to 20 sites from a single smart device. • The Galaxy Dimension range has been independently tested and is compliant to EN50131-3:2009, EN50131-6:2008, PD6662:2010 • Compatible with all wiegand readers • Up to 8 wireless interface modules (RF portals) • Up to 192 wireless zones • Up to 100 key fobs • Full bi-directional agile routing (patented technology) • Full range of wired and wireless intrusion and environmental detectors Attractive user interfaces A range of LCD Keypad and Keyprox options • MK8 keypad offers a modern keypad and keyprox design with all the familiarity and functionality of the MK7 keypad • Familiar MK7 keypad for installer programming across the range • Proximity function across all user interfaces allows quick and secure set and unset without PIN code • Check and control the system from anywhere in the world with the mobile app GX Remote Control from your preferred smart device (requires E080-04 Ethernet module) DCM Wireless system expander module - RF Portal • Bi-directional wireless interface with full range of intrusion and environmental detectors • 868MHz frequency • Up to 8 wireless interface modules (RF portals) • Up to 192 wireless zones and up to 100 key fobs • Full bi-directional agile routing (patented technology) • Compatible with all Honeywell Alpha protocol sensors DT8M /DTPI8M DUAL TEC® IR8M/IRPI8M PIR x2 MK8 FG8M Door Lock GLASSBREAK DETECTOR MK7 DO800M-A & DODT800GY-B DOOR CONTACTS DET8M - FLOOD & TEMPERATURE SENSOR TCPA2B PANIC BUTTON (2 BUTTON) TCC8M TWO-WAY KEY FOB DFS8M SMOKE DETECTOR CO8M CARBON MONOXIDE DETECTOR TCE800M FOUR BUTTON KEYFOB i -fr ter d en ly H ID 6, outputs Galaxy RIO (Remote Input/Output) ® Provides zone and output expansion for Galaxy® Systems • 8 fully programmable zones • 4 programmable outputs • Tamper protection • Rotary switch for setting module address RS232 Cable Enables communications between PCs or Printers and Galaxy® systems G GD-96 / GD e 8 4 Line 2 Line 1 GD-48 n zo r de red Wi pan ex Galaxy® Power Unit 2.75A • Rated at 1.2A for Grade 3 compliance • Reports AC, Battery, fuse and tamper via RS485 Galaxy® Power RIO 2.75A • Rated at 1.2A for Grade 3 compliance • Reports AC, Battery, fuse and tamper via RS485 • Integrated RIO (8 inputs/4 outputs) 8,outputs 16,inputs e ll Int Power Units 8 4 t p o w er ig en su p ply W i re l tes s de tvic tes U ts SHK8M/SHKC8M PIEZO SHOCK SENSOR RS232 (serial port from boar Se r ial p o rt(s) On line 1 only DCM • Door control module with two wiegand inputs allows management of two doors • Off line mode available for previous 100 valid users • Users can be assigned to an Access Template giving an access time zone to each group (64 Access Templates available on GD-520) On lines 1, 2, 3 or 4 Proximity Reader - MAX4 • Complete door control in a single unit • Can be used as standalone or integrated into the Galaxy® control system • Connected on RS485 bus GPRS/IP Communications GT-620NG and GT-640NG Modules • Ethernet and GPRS/GSM modules provide flexible alarm signalling and remote servicing options • Enabled via Ethernet supporting TCP/IP protocol • Enhanced dual path signalling options: 1) Ethernet backed up by PSTN 2) GPRS backed up by PSTN 3) Ethernet backed up by GPRS Exit button MAX4 Badge reader Wiegand Reader Galaxy® Ethernet Module D o or c o tn tro Provides alarm signalling and remote servicing support for Galaxy® systems via 10 Base T Ethernet LAN/WAN supporting TCP/IP protocol tl Remote management GX Remote Control Basic remote management of home and premises security systems wherever you are • One free app for all your systems • Simple secure 10 second login • Single touch interrogation of alarm history • Manage up to 20 systems from a single smart device • Single tap switch between property and user specific groups Fl GPRS/IP Network tex tib tle Co tmm tunic IP Network tm tain ten tan ce Line 4 Line 3 tnt D-264 trd) te tot tm te R tic verif Audio tn atio N EW ation s Re m ot e m a n a g e m e GD-520 App Control via App Store Badge Smart Device Basics Available on the The App Store badge must be used in both marketing and advertising communications, such Installer Manual Honeywell Security Galaxy Dimension Installer Manual Table of Contents Contents INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................... 1-1 Variants ................................................................................................................ 1-1 SECTION 1: QUICK SETUP .................................................................... 1-3 SECTION 2: SYSTEM ARCHTECTURE .................................................. 2-1 PCB Layout .......................................................................................................... 2-2 RS485 Expansion Module (GD-520 only) ......................................................... 2-3 System Installation and Wiring ......................................................................... 2-4 Connecting the Galaxy Dimension to the PSTN.............................................. 2-5 Connecting Additional Telecom Apparatus .......................................................................... 2-6 Line Monitoring .................................................................................................................... 2-6 Stand-by Battery ................................................................................................. 2-7 Battery Start-up ..................................................................................................................... 2-7 On-Board Power Supply Unit............................................................................. 2-7 Memory ................................................................................................................ 2-8 RS485 Data Communication Bus (AB Lines) ................................................... 2-8 RS485 Wiring Configurations ............................................................................ 2-8 RS485 Wiring Recommendations ..................................................................... 2-9 Zones ................................................................................................................. 2-11 Zone Addresses .................................................-fr ter d en ly H ID 6, outputs Galaxy RIO (Remote Input/Output) ® Provides zone and output expansion for Galaxy® Systems • 8 fully programmable zones • 4 programmable outputs • Tamper protection • Rotary switch for setting module address RS232 Cable Enables communications between PCs or Printers and Galaxy® systems G GD-96 / GD e 8 4 Line 2 Line 1 GD-48 n zo r de red Wi pan ex Galaxy® Power Unit 2.75A • Rated at 1.2A for Grade 3 compliance • Reports AC, Battery, fuse and tamper via RS485 Galaxy® Power RIO 2.75A • Rated at 1.2A for Grade 3 compliance • Reports AC, Battery, fuse and tamper via RS485 • Integrated RIO (8 inputs/4 outputs) 8,outputs 16,inputs e ll Int Power Units 8 4 t p o w er ig en su p ply W i re l tes s de tvic tes U ts SHK8M/SHKC8M PIEZO SHOCK SENSOR RS232 (serial port from boar Se r ial p o rt(s) On line 1 only DCM • Door control module with two wiegand inputs allows management of two doors • Off line mode available for previous 100 valid users • Users can be assigned to an Access Template giving an access time zone to each group (64 Access Templates available on GD-520) On lines 1, 2, 3 or 4 Proximity Reader - MAX4 • Complete door control in a single unit • Can be used as standalone or integrated into the Galaxy® control system • Connected on RS485 bus GPRS/IP Communications GT-620NG and GT-640NG Modules • Ethernet and GPRS/GSM modules provide flexible alarm signalling and remote servicing options • Enabled via Ethernet supporting TCP/IP protocol • Enhanced dual path signalling options: 1) Ethernet backed up by PSTN 2) GPRS backed up by PSTN 3) Ethernet backed up by GPRS Exit button MAX4 Badge reader Wiegand Reader Galaxy® Ethernet Module D o or c o tn tro Provides alarm signalling and remote servicing support for Galaxy® systems via 10 Base T Ethernet LAN/WAN supporting TCP/IP protocol tl Remote management GX Remote Control Basic remote management of home and premises security systems wherever you are • One free app for all your systems • Simple secure 10 second login • Single touch interrogation of alarm history • Manage up to 20 systems from a single smart device • Single tap switch between property and user specific groups Fl GPRS/IP Network tex tib tle Co tmm tunic IP Network tm tain ten tan ce Line 4 Line 3 tnt D-264 trd) te tot tm te R tic verif Audio tn atio N EW ation s Re m ot e m a n a g e m e GD-520 App Control via App Store Badge Smart Device Basics Available on the The App Store badge must be used in both marketing and advertising communications, such === RESEARCH: Honeywell Galaxy Dimension 48 96 264 520 === Honeywell Galaxy Dimension (GD-48, GD-96, GD-264, GD-520) Technical Summary 1. System Capacities & Variants: - GD-48: Up to 48 zones, 24 outputs, 8 groups, 100 users, 8 keypads, 8 doors, 1 RS485 bus. - GD-96: Up to 96 zones, 48 outputs, 16 groups, 250 users, 16 keypads, 32 doors, 2 RS485 buses. - GD-264: Up to 264 zones, 132 outputs, 32 groups, 999 users, 16 keypads, 32 doors, 2 RS485 buses. - GD-520: Up to 520 zones, 260 outputs, 32 groups, 999 users, 32 keypads, 64 doors, 4 RS485 buses. - All variants support up to 32 audio verification channels, 8 RF portals, 192 wireless zones, and 100 key fobs. 2. Default Codes: - Default User Code: 12345 - Default Engineer Code: 112233 - Default Remote User Code: 543210 - Default Authorization Code: 54321 3. Wiring & Terminals: - RS485 Bus: Daisy-chain configuration required (no spur/star). Recommended cable is twisted pair screened (Belden 8723 equivalent). - Zone Wiring: Default is 1k double-balanced with fault monitoring via a 3k resistor (preset 9). - Zone Resistance: Programmable via menu 51.46 (Zone Resistance) and 52.9 (Resistance Select). Max cable run is 500m (100m for presets 9 and 10). - Outputs: On-board outputs are open-collector switched negative. Output 1002 is a voltage-free relay. 4. Zone Types & Addressing: - Zone Addresses: Format is [Bus Line][RIO Address][Zone Number] (e.g., 1015 = Line 1, RIO 01, Zone 5). - Default Zones: Zone 1001 = Final, Zone 1002 = Exit, All remaining zones = Intruder. 5. Programming Menus (Top Level): - 10 = Setting (11=Omit Zones, 12=Timed Set, 13=Part Set, 14=Forced Set, 15=Chime, 16=Instant Set, 17=Silent Part, 18=Home Set, 19=All Set) - 20 = Display (21=Zone Status, 22=Display Log, 23=System Version, 24=Print, 25=Access Doors) - 30 = Test (31=Walk Test, 32=Outputs) - 40 = Modify (41=Time/Date, 42=Codes, 43=Summer, 44=Trace, 45=Timer Control, 46=Group Omit, 47=Remote Access, 48=Engineer Access) - 50 = Engineer 1 (51=Parameters, 52=Program Zones, 53=Program Outputs, 54=Links, 55=Soak, 56=Communications, 57=System Print, 58=Keypad, 59=Quick Menu) - 60 = Engineer 2 (61=Diagnostics, 62=Full Test, 63=Options, 64=Assemble Zone, 65=Timers, 66=Pre-checks, 67=Remote Reset, 68=Menu Access, 69=Integrated Access Control) - 70 = Engineer 3 (71=SPI Key) 6. Fault Codes & Tampers: - Faults and tampers are logged and displayed on the keypad. They can be overridden or reset by entering a valid user code (or engineer code for system tampers). - Keypad Lockout: Occurs after 6 invalid code attempts (lasts 90 seconds). - System Tamper: Occurs after 15 invalid code attempts. - Fault monitoring is built into the zone wiring (e.g., 1k Fault option 09). Specific fault codes are transmitted via SIA or Contact ID (detailed in Appendix B of the installer manual). 7. Compliance Standards: - EN50131-3:2009 (Grade 3) - EN50131-6:2008 (Grade 3 Power Supplies) - PD6662:2010 / PD6662:2004 - BS8243 - Environmental Class II === RESEARCH: Honeywell Galaxy Dimension 48 96 264 520 === Honeywell Galaxy Dimension (GD-48, GD-96, GD-264, GD-520) Technical Summary 1. System Capacities & Variants: - GD-48: Up to 48 zones, 24 outputs, 8 groups, 100 users, 8 keypads, 8 doors, 1 RS485 bus. - GD-96: Up to 96 zones, 48 outputs, 16 groups, 250 users, 16 keypads, 32 doors, 2 RS485 buses. - GD-264: Up to 264 zones, 132 outputs, 32 groups, 999 users, 16 keypads, 32 doors, 2 RS485 buses. - GD-520: Up to 520 zones, 260 outputs, 32 groups, 999 users, 32 keypads, 64 doors, 4 RS485 buses. - All variants support up to 32 audio verification channels, 8 RF portals, 192 wireless zones, and 100 key fobs. 2. Default Codes: - Default User Code: 12345 - Default Engineer Code: 112233 - Default Remote User Code: 543210 - Default Authorization Code: 54321 3. Wiring & Terminals: - RS485 Bus: Daisy-chain configuration required (no spur/star). Recommended cable is twisted pair screened (Belden 8723 equivalent). - Zone Wiring: Default is 1k double-balanced with fault monitoring via a 3k resistor (preset 9). - Zone Resistance: Programmable via menu 51.46 (Zone Resistance) and 52.9 (Resistance Select). Max cable run is 500m (100m for presets 9 and 10). - Outputs: On-board outputs are open-collector switched negative. Output 1002 is a voltage-free relay. 4. Zone Types & Addressing: - Zone Addresses: Format is [Bus Line][RIO Address][Zone Number] (e.g., 1015 = Line 1, RIO 01, Zone 5). - Default Zones: Zone 1001 = Final, Zone 1002 = Exit, All remaining zones = Intruder. 5. Programming Menus (Top Level): - 10 = Setting (11=Omit Zones, 12=Timed Set, 13=Part Set, 14=Forced Set, 15=Chime, 16=Instant Set, 17=Silent Part, 18=Home Set, 19=All Set) - 20 = Display (21=Zone Status, 22=Display Log, 23=System Version, 24=Print, 25=Access Doors) - 30 = Test (31=Walk Test, 32=Outputs) - 40 = Modify (41=Time/Date, 42=Codes, 43=Summer, 44=Trace, 45=Timer Control, 46=Group Omit, 47=Remote Access, 48=Engineer Access) - 50 = Engineer 1 (51=Parameters, 52=Program Zones, 53=Program Outputs, 54=Links, 55=Soak, 56=Communications, 57=System Print, 58=Keypad, 59=Quick Menu) - 60 = Engineer 2 (61=Diagnostics, 62=Full Test, 63=Options, 64=Assemble Zone, 65=Timers, 66=Pre-checks, 67=Remote Reset, 68=Menu Access, 69=Integrated Access Control) - 70 = Engineer 3 (71=SPI Key) 6. Fault Codes & Tampers: - Faults and tampers are logged and displayed on the keypad. They can be overridden or reset by entering a valid user code (or engineer code for system tampers). - Keypad Lockout: Occurs after 6 invalid code attempts (lasts 90 seconds). - System Tamper: Occurs after 15 invalid code attempts. - Fault monitoring is built into the zone wiring (e.g., 1k Fault option 09). Specific fault codes are transmitted via SIA or Contact ID (detailed in Appendix B of the installer manual). 7. Compliance Standards: - EN50131-3:2009 (Grade 3) - EN50131-6:2008 (Grade 3 Power Supplies) - PD6662:2010 / PD6662:2004 - BS8243 - Environmental Class II === PDF TEXT: galaxy_8556-im_20galaxy_20dimension_20v1.02.txt === INSTALAČNÍ MANUÁL K ÚSTŘEDNÁM Galaxy GD-48, GD-96, GD-264, GD-520 PRO SOFTWAROVÉ VERZE ÚSTŘEDEN 6.xx Verze dokumentu: 1.02 15. 10. 2010 Honeywell, spol. s r.o. - Security Products o.z. Havránkova 33, BRNO - Dolní Heršpice 619 00, tel.: +420 543 558 100 a 111, fax: +420 543 558 117 a 118 Pištěkova 782, PRAHA 4 - Chodov 149 00, tel.: +420 271 001 700, a 711, fax: +420 271 001 710 Rodinná 38, OSTRAVA - Zábřeh 700 30, tel.: +420 596 617 425, fax: +420 596 617 426 www.adi-olympo.cz --- PAGE BREAK --- ÚVODEM OBSAH SEKCE 1. RYCHLÉ UVEDENÍ ÚSTŘEDNY DO PROVOZU....................................... 7 SEKCE 2. ARCHITEKTURA SYSTÉMU ................................................................... 9 SEKCE 3. ÚSTŘEDNY A JEJICH INSTALACE ...................................................... 17 ZÁKLADNÍ DESKA ÚSTŘEDNY GALAXY DIMENSION ........................................ 17 Konfigurace tranzistorových výstupů na desce ústředny ...............................................18 Připojení konektoru CANNON DB9F k výstupu RS-232 ..................................................18 Expanzní modul RS485...............................................................................................18 Připojení ústředny na síťové napájení .........................................................................19 Připojení ústředny k veřejné telefonní síti ....................................................................21 Připojení sériově zařazeného telefonního přístroje........................................................21 Monitorování linky......................................................................................................21 Zálohovací akumulátor ...............................................................................................22 Interní systémový napájecí zdroj ................................................................................22 Paměť ústředny.........................................................................................................23 INSTALACE A PROVEDENÍ KABELÁŽE SYSTÉMU .............................................. 24 Datová sběrnice RS485 (linka AB)...............................................................................24 Napájení systémových modulů a komponentů EZS.......................................................26 Adresování rozšiřujících modulů ..................................................................................26 Fyzická (hardwarová) a softwarová adresa modulů ......................................................27 Zóny a jejich tovární nastavení ...................................................................................28 Adresování koncentrátorů RIO na desce ústředny ........................................................28 Zapojení zóny............................................................................................................29 Výstupy.....................................................................................................................32 SPI KLÍČ .............................................................................................. 35 SEKCE 4. PŘÍDAVNÉ MODULY K ÚSTŘEDNÁM.................................................. 36 KONCENTRÁTOR (RIO) ........................................................................... 36 Popis desky koncentrátoru .........................................................................................36 Připojení koncentrátoru do systému ............................................................................38 Adresování koncentrátorů...........................................................................................38 Přidání koncentrátoru do systémové konfigurace .........................................................39 Technická specifikace RIO ..........................................................................................39 BEZDRÁTOVÝ KONCENTRÁTOR VF PORTAL – C-079 ................................... 40 Vlastnosti modulu C-079 ............................................................................................40 Kompatibilita s ústřednami Galaxy ..............................................................................40 Připojení modulu do systému......................................................................................42 Přihlášení modulu do konfigurace Galaxy.....................................................................42 Legislativa .................................................................................................................43 2 --- PAGE BREAK --- INTERFACE PRO SÉRIOVOU TISKÁRNU A161 ................................................ 44 MODUL E062 – TELEFONNÍ KOMUNIKÁTOR ................................................. 46 Zapojení modulu ....................................................................................................... 46 Připojení k veřejné telefonní síti ................................................................................. 47 Připojení sériově zařazeného telefonního přístroje ....................................................... 47 Antisabotážní kontakt ................................................................................................ 48 Kompatibilita ............................................................................................................ 48 MODUL RS232 – E054 (E055) .............................................................. 49 MODUL ISDN (OBJEDNÁVACÍ KÓDA211) .................................................. 51 MODUL ETHERNET – E080.................................................................... 52 AUDIO SYSTÉM .................................................................................... 54 Popis........................................................................................................................ 54 Audio modul ............................................................................................................. 54 Mux modul ............................................................................................................... 56 SEKCE 5. OVLÁDACÍ MODULY ........................................................................... 58 KLÁVESNICE MK 7.................................................................................. 58 Popis klávesnice MK7 ................................................................................................ 58 Připojení klávesnice................................................................................................... 58 Adresování klávesnic ................................................................................................. 59 Instalace klávesnice MK7 ........................................................................................... 59 Přiřazení klávesnice do systému ................................................................................. 60 Odstranění klávesnice ze systému .............................................................................. 61 Vestavěná diagnostika............................................................................................... 61 Technická specifikace ................................................................................................ 62 Obsluha systému z klávesnice .................................................................................... 62 KLÁVESNICE KEYPROX .......................................................................... 65 Popis klávesnice KEYPROX......................................................................................... 65 Kompatibilita ............................................................................................................ 65 Instalace klávesnice Keyprox ..................................................................................... 65 Konfigurace modulu .................................................................................................. 66 Programování klávesnice KEYPROX ............................................................................ 66 Provoz a obsluha....................................................................................................... 67 Ovládání systému kombinací kód + karta (dual focus)................................................. 68 Naprogramování pro řízení vstupu do dveří................................................................. 68 GRAFICKÁ KLÁVESNICE CP040 ................................................................. 70 Konfigurace klávesnice .............................................................................................. 71 SEKCE 6. MODULY KONTROLY VSTUPU ............................................................ 74 ČTEČKA BEZKONTAKTNÍCH KARET MAX³ ..................................................... 74 Přihlašování čtečky do konfigurace GALAXY – ONLINE režim........................................ 76 3 --- PAGE BREAK --- ÚVODEM Konfigurování čtečky pro samostatný provoz ...............................................................76 Odstranění čtečky MAX ze systému .............................................................................77 INTERFACE PRO PŘIPOJENÍ ČTEČEK JINÝCH VÝROBCŮ MAXM 2000 ................ 78 Vlastnosti MAXM 2000 v.1.52......................................................................................78 Vstupy a výstupy, rozložení hlavních prvků na desce MAXM 2000 .................................79 Připojení modulu MAXM 2000 do systému ...................................................................80 Napájení modulu MAXM 2000 a dveřních zámků ..........................................................80 Připojení modulu MAXM2000 na sběrnici Galaxy ..........................................................81 Připojení čteček k MAXM 2000 ....................................................................................81 Programování LED diody čtecích hlav Motorola-Indala..................................................81 Zapojení ovládacích a monitorovacích vstupů ..............................................................81 Zvýšení odolnosti proti rušení a snížení vyzařování.......................................................81 Adresování modulu MAXM 2000..................................................................................82 Přihlášení MAXM2000 do systému ...............................................................................82 Programování parametrů čteček .................................................................................83 Speciální funkce MAXM 2000 ......................................................................................83 Vestavěná diagnostika ...............................................................................................84 DCM – MODUL PRO ŘÍZENÍ PŘÍSTUPU ........................................................ 86 Zapojení vstupů.........................................................................................................87 Připojení čtečky nebo klávesnice s výstupem Wiegand .................................................87 Instalace a montáž modulu DCM ................................................................................88 Technická specifikace modulu DCM.............................................................................88 SEKCE 7. SYSTÉMOVÝ NAPÁJECÍ ZDROJ POWER RIO–P026-B........................ 89 Konfigurace ...............................................................................................................89 Akumulátor ...............................................................................................................89 Komunikace s ústřednou ............................................................................................90 Připojení zdroje SMART RIO na sítové napájení ...........................................................90 Technická specifikace zdroje Power RIO P026-B ..........................................................91 INTELIGENTNÍ ZDROJ UNIPOWER 2000.................................................. 93 Charakteristika zdroje ................................................................................................93 Vstupy a výstupy na desce zdroje Unipower 2000........................................................93 Podrobný popis zdrojového bloku Unipower 2000 ........................................................94 Proudové ochrany......................................................................................................95 Výstupy pro monitorování stavu zdroje........................................................................96 Optická indikace provozních stavů zdroje ....................................................................96 Pojistky .....................................................................................................................96 Provedení zdroje........................................................................................................97 Připojení ústředny na síťové napájení .........................................................................97 Zálohovací akumulátor ...............................................................................................97 Technická specifikace zdrojového bloku Unipower 2000 ...............................................98 4 --- PAGE BREAK --- DODATEK A. TECHNICKÉ SPECIFIKACE ÚSTŘEDNY............................................... 99 Mechanické parametry .............................................................................................. 99 Elektrické parametry ................................................................................................. 99 Pojistky .................................................................................................................... 99 Parametry modulů .................................................................................................. 100 DODATEK B. SROVNÁVACÍ TABULKA ZÁKLADNÍCH PARAMETRŮ ÚSTŘEDEN ŘADY DIMENSION (VERZE 6.XX)............................................................... 101 DODATEK C. KOMPATIBILITY ČTEČEK KEYPROX, MAX3, MAXM2000 ................. 102 DODATEK D. POPIS IMPLEMENTACE FORMÁTU CONTACT ID.............................. 104 CID ZPRÁVA ........................................................................................ 107 5 --- PAGE BREAK --- ÚVODEM Úvodem Tato verze dokumentu popisující ústředny Galaxy se věnuje výhradně ústřednám řady GALAXY Dimension. Jsou zde popsány verze Galaxy GD-48, Galaxy GD-96 a Galaxy GD-264/520. V naprosté většině případů jsme nespoléhali na pouhý překlad a popisované funkce a chování systému jsme podrobně testovali. Veškeré názvy položek menu, uživatelská hlášení, programovací volby atd. odpovídají softwarové verzi V.6.xx OC). Tato verze je jediný oficiální český překlad firmware ústředen Galaxy přeložený firmou Honeywell, spol. s.r.o. - Security Products a generovaný výrobcem. Pokud se na území ČR objevují jiné firmwarové verze u nichž je deklarováno české národní prostředí, vznikly bez vědomí výrobce a nemusí být kompatibilní s veškerým nabízeným příslušenstvím. Přestože jsme vytváření manuálu věnovali maximální pozornost, může se vzhledem k rozsahu dokumentu stát, že na některé chyby narazíte. V tomto případě bychom Vás rádi požádali o jejich nahlášení, abychom je v příští revizi dokumentu mohli odstranit nebo na ně případně upozornit výrobce, pokud by se jednalo o chybu ve firmware. Rovněž tak pokud nejste s některými funkcemi spokojeni nebo požadujete další vylepšení, dejte nám, prosím, vědět. O Vašich požadavcích i kritických připomínkách informujeme výrobce a i na jejich základě dochází k celé řadě změn a inovací. Doufáme, že Vám tento manuál pomůže naplno využít velmi flexibilní softwarové vybavení ústředen a Vy budete moci Vašim zákazníkům nabídnout nová řešení na bázi spolehlivé, snadno obsluhovatelné technologie, která může vyřešit jejich požadavky nejen v oblasti zabezpečení proti vloupání a kontroly vstupu. Obsah tohoto dokumentu je předmětem duševního vlastnictví společnosti Honeywell, spol. s.r.o., a je chráněn dle ustanovení zákona č. 35/1965 Sb (autorský zákon). Jakékoli nedovolené užití tohoto dokumentu, pozměňování, kopírování celku nebo jeho částí jinak, než se souhlasem autora, je porušením autorských práv společnosti Honeywell, spol. s.r.o. 6 --- PAGE BREAK --- Rychlé uvedení ústředny do provozu SEKCE 1. Rychlé uvedení ústředny do provozu Ústředny Galaxy jsou z továrny naprogramovány tak, aby je bylo možné uvést prakticky ihned do provozu a začít jejich programování podle specifických požadavků jednotlivých instalací. Při oživení ústředny postupujte podle následujících kroků: 1. Připojením koncových rezistorů s odporem 1kΩ (1%) vyvažte smyčky na ústředně a koncentrátorech (pokud jsou v systému osazeny). 2. Přesvědčte se, že je uzavřena pomocná tamper smyčka na desce ústředny - svorka je označena symbolem “AUX TAMP”. Stejně tak musí být osazený konektor pro zadní tamper označený “OFF WALL TAMPER” Pozice svorek jsou zobrazeny na následující straně. Tamper svorky nejsou z výroby osazeny. Zkratovací propojky jsou z přiloženy k balení ústředny 3. Do desky ústředny osaďte 3V knoflíkovou lithiovou baterii přiloženou v balení ustředny. Baterie slouží k zálohování konfigurace po odpojení napájení śtředny. 4. Připojte klávesnice na AB sběrnici ústředny. Ústředny Galaxy G3 mají na základní desce dvě komunikační sběrnice. Propojení svorkovnic klávesnice a ústředny je následující: Ústředna Klávesnice + + - - A1 A B1 B Tab 1: Propojení svorkovnic (modul – ústředna) 5. Zapojte zakončovací rezistor s odporem 680 Ω v posledním modulu na komunikační sběrnici paralelně ke svorkám A a B . 6. Před připojením napájecího napětí se ujistěte, že jsou sepnuty ochranné kontakty klávesnic. Klávesnice MK7 mají antisabotážní kontakt víka i kontakt proti stržení ze zdi (podrobnosti naleznete v pokynech pro instalaci jednotlivých klávesnic). Pokud bude při připojení napájení otevřen ochranný kontakt klávesnice, dojde k vyvolání poplachu. 7. Do ústředny přiveďte síťový přívod. Pozor! Nepřipojujte zatím ústřednu na síťové napájení. 8. Pomocí přiložených nebo jiných vhodných kabelů připojte záložní baterii ke zdroji ústředny. Maximálně je možné ke zdroji ústředny připojit baterii 34Ah. 9. Zakrytujte ústřednu a přitáhněte šrouby víka. Při správné montáži dotlačuje kryt hlavní tamper ústředny. 10. Připojte ústředny k síťovému napájení (230 Vstř. / 50 Hz). 11. Po připojení napájení by měly proběhnout následující události: • krátce je aktivován bzučák klávesnic a audio výstup na ústředně (V/V houkačka) • na displeji klávesnice se zobrazí nápis **************** , který problikává • dojde k umlčení bzučáků a displej klávesnic je prázdný • rozsvítí se zelená LED dioda indikující síťové napájení 7 --- PAGE BREAK --- Rychlé uvedení ústředny do provozu • na displeji se dočasně zobrazí hlášení o konfiguraci systému Configuring Please Wait • následuje výzva ke stisknutí některé klávesy PRESS ANY KEY TO SET UP • zvolíme jazyk a tovární nastavení ústředny Language 2=Cesky Tovar.nast. 1=Czech Republic • Pokud vše proběhlo v pořádku klávesnice zobrazí tovární hlavičku. Např.: Galaxy 520 V.6.50 00:02 CT 01 LED 12. Systém je tímto připraven k programování. 13. Podrobnosti naleznete v samostatném programovacím manuálu Galaxy Dimension. Tovární hodnoty kódů: správce – 12345 , technik – 112233. 8 --- PAGE BREAK --- Architektura systému SEKCE 2. Architektura systému GALAXY GD-48 INT. tel. kom. linka 1 L1 Interface pro sériovou tiskárnu A161 (1) KOM1 KL. E DIP 1-8 RS232 8 výstupů 16 zón EXT. telefonní komunikátor E062 (1) AKU 34Ah Linka 1 : datová sběrnice RS485, max. 1km kroucený, stíněný pár 0,22mm2 např. BELDEN 9501 nevětvit, nerozbočovat ! (bez použití oddělovače BREAK-GS-4/4) Multifunkční interface GXYSMART (2) KOM2 KL . D Modul RS232 E054 (1) KOM4 KL. B Ethernet modul E080 (1) KOM3 KL. C ISDN komunikátor A211 (1) Pokud jsou použity KOM1 až 4 není možné využít odpovídající adresu klávesnice uvedenou u jednotlivých KOM modulů G8, G8VF a SmartPSU lze libovolně kombinovat maximální počet všech uvedených modulů je v tabulce 8 zón 4 výstupy Koncentrátor G8 /RIO/ (4) 32 zón 4 výstupy Bezdrátový koncentrátor G8VF /RF RIO/ (4) 8 zón 4 výstupy 1,5A/17Ah Koncentrátor se zdrojem P026B (4) 32 zón KeyProx MK7PROX (3) Bezdrátový koncentrátor C079 – VF Portal (4) LCD klávesnice MK7 (8) KeyProx může nahradit klávesnici MK7 a čtečku. Pozor! Pouze některé adresy – viz. tabulka Systémová čtečka MAX3 (4) Interface pro čtečky MAXM 2000 (4/2D) Interface pro čtečky - DCM (4) MK7PROX, GALMAX MAXM2000, DT2000 a virtuální čtečky na G8VF lze libovolně kombinovat maximální počet všech čteček je v [ ] Docházkový terminál DT2000(4) Grafická klávesnice CP040,1,2(1) Audio modul (1) + modul Mux (7) 9 --- PAGE BREAK --- Architektura systému ADRESY MODULŮ ÚSTŘEDNY GALAXY GD-48 Typ modulu ÚSTŘEDNA Označení RIO DESKA ÚSTŘ L Celkem Počet 0 1 (L1) 2 2 100 101 G8 VSTUPNĚ VÝSTUPNÍ MODULY (RIO) INTERNÍ KOMUNIKAČNÍ MODULY • • • • 10 4 5 4 102 103 104 105 C079* 4 102 103 104 105 Smart PSU 4 102 103 104 105 G8VF 8 8 (4!) 10 11 12 3 10 11 12 C040 1 10 11 12 MAX 4 10 11 12 13 4/2D 10 11 12 13 8 MK7PROX L1 C080 - DCM 4 100 101 102 103 DT2000** 4 10 11 12 13 čtečka v G8VF 4 10 11 12 13 3 10 11 12 4 čtečka v MK7PROX KOMUNIKAČNÍ MODULY 3 102 103 104 105 MAXM2000 ČTEČKY 2 4 MK7 KLÁVESNICE hardwarová adresa modulu E080 ETHERNET 1 1 A211 ISDN 1 1 E054 RS232 1 1 E062 TELEF. K. 1 1 AUDIO 1 1 1 1 1 1 INTERNÍ RS-232 6 7 8 10 11 9 11 12 A B C D E F 15 ! 16! 17 ! 18! 19 12 13 15 16 17 18 51! L5 INTERNÍ TELEF. K. 50! V tabulce lze najít počty modulů pro jednotlivé linky a povolené adresy jednotlivých typů modulů. U hardwarových adres (0 až 9 a A až F) je v políčku zapsaná softwarová adresa, pod kterou se modul hlásí v ústředně. šrafované políčko znamená, že uvedená hardwarová adresa není k dispozici. Ve sloupci „Počet“ je uveden maximální počet modulů jednoho typu na lince. V některých případech lze kombinovat více modulů různého typu (např: vstupně výstupní moduly - koncentrátory), celkový počet různých modulů je potom uveden ve sloupci „Celkem“. Většina modulů zabírá jednu adresu. Vyjímka je: • Emulace více modulů stejného typu: MAXM2000 (může emulovat jeden nebo dva moduly GALMAX, počty modulů označeny D) a G8VF (emuluje 1, 2, 3 nebo 4 moduly G8 s po sobě jdoucími adresami). U těchto modulů jsou jejich počty v tabulce udávány pro případ, kdy nahrazují právě jeden modul. Celkový počet emulovaných modulů nesmí přesáhnout v tabulce uvedené hodnoty. • MK7PROX se VŽDY hlásí jako dva moduly: klávesnice MK7 a čtečka GALMAX. Čtečky v klávesnicích MK7PROX je třeba zahrnout do celkového počtu čteček v systému. • G8VF se může hlásit NAVÍC jako čtečka GALMAX (pouze virtuální, ne fyzická),pokud je využit radiový ovladač pro zapínání nebo vypínání. Virtuální čtečky povolené v G8VF je třeba zahrnout do celkového počtu čteček v systému. • Adresy čteček připojených k modulu DCM nekolidují s adresami ostatních typů čteček . Moduly DCM se chovají jako jiný typ modulu. Moduly DCM nejsou vybaveny otočným přepínačem pro nastavení adresy – adresa se nastavuje 8-mi násobným přepínačem na desce modulu DCM . Tabulka s polohami přepínač pro jednotlivé adresy bude v popisu modulu DCM. • Bezdrátový modul C079 může mít hardwarovou adresu v rozsahu 0-15. Tato adresa nekoliduje s adresami jiných modulů. Systém mu přiřadí tzv. „virtuální adresy“, což jsou adresy neobsazené jinými moduly RIO. Není závislost mezi hardwarovou adresou modulu a virtuální adresou. • Docházkový terminál DT2000 lze připojit do systému, nicméně pro nové instalace existuje samostatný terminál DT2000SA, který umožní postavit docházkový systém bez vazby na EZS s lepšími vlastnostmi a nižší cenou. Komunikační moduly zabírají na sběrnici stejné pozice jako některé klávesnice. Pokud jsou uvedené komunikační moduly použity, nemohou být tyto klávesnice nainstalovány. V těchto případech je u adresy klávesnice „!“. Ve sloupcích s počtem je nejprve uveden maximální počet klávesnic, které mohou být systému a v závorce počet klávesnic, které nemusí být k dispozici, pokud jsou použity komunikační moduly. --- PAGE BREAK --- Architektura systému Interface pro sériovou tiskárnu A161 (1) linka 1 GALAXY GD-96 INT. tel. kom. L1 L2 RS232 linka 2 DIP 1-8 8 výstupů 16 zón EXT. telefonní komunikátor E062 (1) Linka 1 : datová sběrnice RS485, max. 1km kroucený, stíněný pár 0,22mm2 např. BELDEN 9501 nevětvit, nerozbočovat ! (bez použití oddělovače BREAK-GS-4/4) AKU 17Ah Multifunkční interface GXYSMART (2) Modul RS232 E054 (1) Ethernet modul E080 (1) ISDN komunikátor A211 (1) 8 zón 4 výstupy Koncentrátor G8 /RIO/ (4) 32 zón 4 výstupy Bezdrátový koncentrátor G8VF /RF RIO/ (4) 8 zón 4 výstupy Koncentrátor G8 /RIO/ (6) 32 zón 4 výstupy Bezdrátový koncentrátor G8VF /RF RIO/ (6) 8 zón 4 výstupy 1,5A / 17Ah Bezdrátový koncentrátor C079 – VF Portal (4) 8 zón 4 výstupy 1,5A/17Ah Koncentrátor se zdrojem Smart PSU (4) LCD klávesnice MK7 (8) Systémová čtečka MAX3 (8) Interface pro čtečky MAXM 2000 (8/4D) Interface pro čtečky DCM (8) Docházkový terminál DT2000 (8) Grafická klávesnice CP040,1,2 (1) Koncentrátor se zdrojem Smart PSU (6) LCD klávesnice MK7 (8) 24 zón KeyProx MK7PROX (3) Bezdrátový koncentrátor C079 – VF Portal (4) 24 zón Pokud jsou použity KOM1 až 4 není možné využít odpovídající adresu klávesnice uvedenou u jednotlivých KOM modulů MK7PROX, GALMAX MAXM2000, DT2000 a virtuální čtečky na G8VF lze libovolně kombinovat maximální počet všech čteček je v [ ] Audio modul (1) + modul Mux(8) KeyProx MK7PROX (7) KeyProx může nahradit klávesnici MK7 a čtečku Pozor! Pouze některé adresy – viz. tabulka Systémová čtečka MAX3 (8) Interface pro čtečky MAXM 2000 (4/8D) Interface pro čtečky DCM (8) Docházkový terminál DT2000 (8) Grafická klávesnice CP040,1,2 (1) G8, G8VF a SmartPSU lze libovolně kombinovat maximální počet všech uvedených modulů je v tabulce 11 --- PAGE BREAK --- Architektura systému ADRESY MODULŮ ÚSTŘEDNY GALAXY GD-96 Typ modulu VSTUPNĚ VÝSTUPNÍ MODULY KLÁVESNICE Označení KOMUNIKAČNÍ MODULY INTERNÍ KOMUNIKAČNÍ MODULY VSTUPNĚ VÝSTUPNÍ MODULY KLÁVESNICE • • • 12 Počet 0 1 (L1) 2 100 101 2 3 4 5 4 102 103 104 105 G8VF 4 102 103 104 105 C079* 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 15 ! 16! 17 ! 18! 19 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 102 103 104 105 Smart PSU 4 C040 – grafická kl. 1 10 11 12 8 (4!) 10 11 12 MK7PROX 3 10 11 12 MAX 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8/4 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 C080 - DCM 8 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 DT2000 4 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 čtečka v G8VF 4 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 čtečka v MK7PROX 3 10 11 12 E080 ETHERNET 1 A211 ISDN 1 E054 RS232 1 E062 TELEF. K. 1 AUDIO 1 MK7 L1 INTERNÍ RS-232 102 103 104 105 D 10 11 11 12 12 13 15 16 17 18 1 51! L5 INTERNÍ TELEF. K. 1 50! G8 6 200 201 202 203 204 205 G8VF 6 200 201 202 203 204 205 C079* 6 200 201 202 203 204 205 Smart PSU 6 200 201 202 203 204 205 MK7 8 20 21 22 23 C040 – grafická kl. 1 20 21 22 23 MK7PROX 7 20 21 22 20 21 MAX ČTEČKY L G8 MAXM2000 ČTEČKY hardwarová adresa modulu L2 8 D 24 25 26 29 23 24 25 26 22 23 24 25 26 27 23 24 25 26 27 MAXM2000 8/4 20 21 22 C080 - DCM 8 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 DT2000 8 20 21 22 čtečka v G8VF 8 20 21 22 23 24 čtečka v MK7PROX 7 20 21 22 23 24 23 24 25 26 27 25 26 27 25 26 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 V tabulce lze najít počty modulů pro jednotlivé linky a povolené adresy jednotlivých typů modulů. U hardwarových adres (0 až 9 a A až F) je v políčku zapsaná softwarová adresa, pod kterou se modul hlásí v ústředně. šrafované políčko znamená, že uvedená hardwarová adresa není k dispozici. Ve sloupci „Počet“ je uveden maximální počet modulů jednoho typu na lince. V některých případech lze kombinovat více modulů různého typu (např: vstupně výstupní moduly - koncentrátory). Většina modulů zabírá jednu adresu. Vyjímka je: • emulace více modulů stejného typu: MAXM2000 (může emulovat jeden nebo dva moduly GALMAX, počty modulů označeny D) a G8VF (emuluje 1, 2, 3 nebo 4 moduly G8 s po sobě jdoucími adresami). U těchto modulů jsou jejich počty v tabulce udávány pro případ, kdy nahrazují právě jeden modul. Celkový počet emulovaných modulů nesmí přesáhnout v tabulce uvedené hodnoty. • MK7PROX se VŽDY hlásí jako dva moduly: klávesnice MK7 a čtečka GALMAX. Čtečky v klávesnicích MK7PROX je třeba zahrnout do celkového počtu čteček v systému. --- PAGE BREAK --- Architektura systému • • G8VF se může hlásit NAVÍC jako čtečka GALMAX (pouze virtuální, ne fyzická),pokud je využit radiový ovladač pro zapínání nebo vypínání. Virtuální čtečky povolené v G8VF je třeba zahrnout do celkového počtu čteček v systému. • Adresy čteček připojených k modulu DCM nekolidují s adresami ostatních typů čteček . Moduly DCM se chovají jako jiný typ modulu. Moduly DCM nejsou vybaveny otočným přepínačem pro nastavení adresy – adresa se nastavuje 8-mi násobným přepínačem na desce modulu DCM . Tabulka s polohami přepínač pro jednotlivé adresy bude v popisu modulu DCM. • Bezdrátový modul C079 může mít hardwarovou adresu v rozsahu 0-15. Tato adresa nekoliduje s adresami jiných modulů. Systém mu přiřadí tzv. „virtuální adresy“, což jsou adresy neobsazené jinými moduly RIO. Není závislost mezi hardwarovou adresou modulu a virtuální adresou. • Docházkový terminál DT2000 lze připojit do systému, nicméně pro nové instalace existuje samostatný terminál DT2000SA, který umožní postavit docházkový systém bez vazby na EZS s lepšími vlastnostmi a nižší cenou. Komunikační moduly zabírají na sběrnici stejné pozice jako některé klávesnice. Pokud jsou uvedené komunikační moduly použity, nemohou být tyto klávesnice nainstalovány. V těchto případech je u adresy klávesnice „!“. Ve sloupcích s počtem je nejprve uveden maximální počet klávesnic, které mohou být systému a v závorce počet klávesnic, které nemusí být k dispozici, pokud jsou použity komunikační moduly. 13 --- PAGE BREAK --- Architektura systému linka 1 GALAXY GD-264520 INT. tel. kom. L1 L2 RS232 Interface pro sériovou tiskárnu A161 (1) KOM 5 KL. E EXT. telefonní komunikátor E062 (1) DIP 1-8 L3 L4 8 výstupů 16 zón AKU 17Ah Multifunkční interface GXYSMART (2) KOM2 KL . D Modul RS232 E054 (1) KOM4 KL. B Ethernet modul E080 (1) KOM3 KL. C ISDN komunikátor A211 (1) linka 3 Pokud jsou použity KOM1 až 4 není možné využít odpovídající adresu klávesnice uvedenou u jednotlivých KOM modulů linka 2 MK7PROX, GALMAX MAXM2000, DT2000 a virtuální čtečky na G8VF lze libovolně kombinovat maximální počet všech čteček je v [ ] G8, G8VF a SmartPSU lze libovolně kombinovat maximální počet všech uvedených modulů je v tabulce Max. počet modulů C079 v systému je 8. Koncentrátor G8 /RIO/ (15) 32 zón 4 výstupy Bezdrátový koncentrátor G8VF /RF RIO/ (15) 24 zón Bezdrátový Koncentrátor VF Portal C079 (8) LCD klávesnice MK7 (8) linka 1 a 2: datová sběrnice RS485, max. 1km kroucený, stíněný pár 0,22mm2 např. BELDEN 9501 nevětvit, nerozbočovat ! linka 4 8 zón 4 výstupy 8 zón 4 výstupy 1,5A/17Ah DIP8 – OFF interní RIO 100 a RIO 101 DIP8 – ON interní RIO 100 a RIO 001 Bezdrátový koncentrátor C079 – VF Portal (8) 24 zón Koncentrátor se zdrojem Smart PSU (15) KeyProx může nahradit klávesnici MK7 a čtečku Pozor! Pouze některé adresy – viz. tabulka 8 zón 4 výstupy Koncentrátor G8 /RIO/ (16) 32 zón 4 výstupy Bezdrátový koncentrátor G8VF /RF RIO/ (16) 8 zón 4 výstupy 1,5A / 17Ah Koncentrátor se zdrojem Smart PSU (16) KeyProx MK7PROX (3) Systémová čtečka MAX3 (8) KeyProx MK7PROX (7) Interface pro čtečky MAXM 2000 (8/4D) LCD klávesnice MK7 (8) Systémová čtečka MAX3 (8) Interface pro čtečky DCM (8) Interface pro čtečky MAXM 2000 (8/4D) Docházkový terminál DT2000 (8) Grafická klávesnice CP040 (1) Docházkový terminál DT2000 (8) Audio modul (1) + modul Mux(8) Grafická klávesnice CP040 (1) 14 --- PAGE BREAK --- Architektura systému ADRESY MODULŮ ÚSTŘEDNY GALAXY GD-264-520 Typ modulu ÚSTŘEDNA Označení L Celkem Počet (L0) 1 1 (L1) 2 2 KLÁVESNICE KOMUNIKAČNÍ MODULY INTERNÍ KOMUNIKAČNÍ MODULY 15 G8VF • • • 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 001 100 101! 15 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 C079* 8 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 MK7 8 (4!) 10 11 12 19 CP040 1 10 11 12 MK7PROX 3 10 11 12 MAX 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 MAXM2000 8/4D 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 DT2000 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 čtečka v G8VF 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 čtečka v MK7PROX 11 12 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 L1 8 10 11 11 12 12 13 15 ! 16! 17 ! 18! 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 3 10 Modul DCM 8 8 100 E080 ETHERNET 1 1 A211 ISDN 1 1 E054 RS232 1 1 E062 TELEF. K. 1 1 AUDIO 1 1 1 1 1 1 50! 16 x00 x01 x02 x03 x04 x05 x06 x07 x08 x09 110 x11 x12 x13 x14 x15 16 x00 x01 x02 x03 x04 x05 x06 x07 x08 x09 110 x11 x12 x13 x14 x15 Smart PSU 16 x00 x01 x02 x03 x04 x05 x06 x07 x08 x09 110 x11 x12 x13 x14 x15 C079* 8 x00 x01 x02 x03 x04 x05 x06 x07 x08 x09 110 x11 x12 x13 x14 x15 8 x0 x1 x2 x3 x4 x5 x6 7 x0 x1 x2 x3 x4 x5 x6 1 x0 x1 x2 x3 x0 x1 x2 x3 x4 x5 x6 x7 8/4 x0 x1 x2 x3 x4 x5 x6 x7 8 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 DT2000 8 x0 x1 x2 čtečka v G8VF 8 x0 x1 x2 x3 x4 čtečka v MK7PROX 7 x0 x1 x2 x3 x4 INTERNÍ RS-232 15 16 17 18 51! L5 INTERNÍ TELEF. K. 16 G8VF MK7PROX 8 L2 CP040 L3 MAX L4 1 8 D MAXM2000 ČTEČKY 3 15 MK7 KLÁVESNICE 2 15 G8 VSTUPNĚ VÝSTUPNÍ MODULY 1 Smart PSU C080 - DCM ČTEČKY 0 RIO DESKA ÚSTŘ G8 VSTUPNĚ VÝSTUPNÍ MODULY hardwarová adresa modulu C080 - DCM 8 x3 x4 x5 x9 x6 x7 x5 x6 x7 x5 x6 x0 x1 x1 x2 x2 x3 x3 x4 x4 x5 x5 x6 x6 x7 V tabulce lze najít počty modulů pro jednotlivé linky a povolené adresy jednotlivých typů modulů. U hardwarových adres (0 až 9 a A až F) je v políčku zapsaná softwarová adresa, pod kterou se modul hlásí v ústředně. šrafované políčko znamená, že uvedená hardwarová adresa není k dispozici. Ve sloupci „Počet“ je uveden maximální počet modulů jednoho typu na lince. V některých případech lze kombinovat více modulů různého typu (např: vstupně výstupní moduly - koncentrátory), celkový počet různých modulů je potom uveden ve sloupci „Celkem“. Většina modulů zabírá jednu adresu. Vyjímka je: 15 --- PAGE BREAK --- Architektura systému • • • • • • • 16 emulace více modulů stejného typu: MAXM2000 (může emulovat jeden nebo dva moduly GALMAX, počty modulů označeny D) a G8VF (emuluje 1, 2, 3 nebo 4 moduly G8 s po sobě jdoucími adresami). U těchto modulů jsou jejich počty v tabulce udávány pro případ, kdy nahrazují právě jeden modul. Celkový počet emulovaných modulů nesmí přesáhnout v tabulce uvedené hodnoty. MK7PROX se VŽDY hlásí jako dva moduly: klávesnice MK7 a čtečka GALMAX. Čtečky v klávesnicích MK7PROX je třeba zahrnout do celkového počtu čteček v systému. G8VF se může hlásit NAVÍC jako čtečka GALMAX (pouze virtuální, ne fyzická),pokud je využit radiový ovladač pro zapínání nebo vypínání. Virtuální čtečky povolené v G8VF je třeba zahrnout do celkového počtu čteček v systému. Adresy čteček připojených k modulu DCM nekolidují s adresami ostatních typů čteček . Moduly DCM se chovají jako jiný typ modulu. Moduly DCM nejsou vybaveny otočným přepínačem pro nastavení adresy – adresa se nastavuje 8-mi násobným přepínačem na desce modulu DCM . Tabulka s polohami přepínač pro jednotlivé adresy bude v popisu modulu DCM. * Bezdrátový modul C079 může mít hardwarovou adresu v rozsahu 0-15. Tato adresa nekoliduje s adresami jiných modulů. Systém mu přiřadí tzv. „virtuální adresy“, což jsou adresy neobsazené jinými moduly RIO. Není závislost mezi hardwarovou adresou modulu a virtuální adresou. Docházkový terminál DT2000 lze připojit do systému, nicméně pro nové instalace existuje samostatný terminál DT2000SA, který umožní postavit docházkový systém bez vazby na EZS s lepšími vlastnostmi a nižší cenou. Komunikační moduly zabírají na sběrnici stejné pozice jako některé klávesnice. Pokud jsou uvedené komunikační moduly použity, nemohou být tyto klávesnice nainstalovány. V těchto případech je u adresy klávesnice „!“. Ve sloupcích s počtem je nejprve uveden maximální počet klávesnic, které mohou být systému a v závorce počet klávesnic, které nemusí být k dispozici, pokud jsou použity komunikační moduly. Interní koncentrátor RIO1 je možné nakonfigurovat pomocí DIP8 na linku 0 nebo 1. Pokud je DIP8=OFF tzn. připojeno interní RIO101, není již možné na linku 1 připojit externí koncentrátor s hw. adresou 01. --- PAGE BREAK --- Ústředny a jejich instalace SEKCE 3. Ústředny a jejich instalace Základní deska ústředny Galaxy Dimension Obr 1: Základní deska ústředny 17 --- PAGE BREAK --- Instalace a provedení kabeláže systému Ústředny a jejich instalace Konfigurace tranzistorových výstupů na desce ústředny Základní deska obsahuje 7 tranzistorových výstupů, které mohou být technikem nakonfigurovány do zapojení otevřený kolektor (odpojeny rezistory 3,3kΩ). Pro konfiguraci slouží DIP SW3 1-7. Přepnutím přepínače 1-7 do polohy OFF je výstup převeden do zapojení otevřený kolektor. DIP 1-7 ON = rezistor 3,3kΩ připojen OFF = rezistor 3,3kΩ odpojen DIP přepínače nijak neovlivňují releový výstup na desce ústředny (adresa 1002). DIP RIO Výstup 1 0 1 2 0 3 3 0 4 4 1 1 5 1 2 6 1 3 7 1 4 Tab 2: Konfigurace tranzistorových výstupů na desce ústředny Připojení konektoru CANNON DB9F k výstupu RS-232 Aby bylo možné k ústředně připojit počítač přes interní RS-232 komunikátor je nutné jeho svorky osadit konektorem CANNON DB9F. Kabel je možné vyrobit, nebo objednat pod označením A234. Interní komunikátor RS-232 je možné využít pro ovládání, programování ústředny z počítače nebo jako výstup na sériovou tiskárnu. Více popsáno v programovacím manuálu Galaxy Dimension. Tab 3: Zapojení konektoru CANNON DB9F Označení na PCB D9F TX 2 RX 3 GND 5 CTS 7 RTS 8 Expanzní modul RS485 Expanzní modul RS485 rozšiřuje ústřednu GD264 o dvě další komunikační linky RS485. Rozšíření se provádí pouhým osazením expanzní destčky a studeným restartem. Není třeba přehrávat firmware ústředny. Obr 2:Expanzní modul RS-485 18 --- PAGE BREAK --- Ústředny a jejich instalace Instalace a provedení kabeláže systému Připojení ústředny na síťové napájení Instalaci silnoproudé části systému by měl výhradně provádět k tomuto účelu proškolený pracovník. Při instalaci ústředny musí být dodrženy platné normy ČSN. Všechny ústředny řady Galaxy jsou pevně instalovaná zařízení trvale připojená k síťovému napájecímu napětí 230/240Vstř. 50 Hz. Síťový přívod by měl být samostatně jištěný. Síťový přívod přiveďte samostatně otvorem u pravé hrany krytu ústředny. souběžně s přívodním kabelem 230V AC nesmí být vedeny žádné jiné vodiče. Kabel přichyťte k šasi ústředny plastovou příchytkou. Umístění napájecího kabelu ústředny : Obr 3 Připojení ústředny na síťové napájení Síťový přívod musí být třívodičový (se žlutozeleným ochranným vodičem). Přívod zapojte do síťové svorkovnice. Barva vodiče Svorka Význam modrá N pracovní vodič zeleno-žlutá symbol země v kroužku (PE) ochranný vodič hnědá L fázový vodič Tab 4: Zapojení síťového kabelu v ústředně Jiný způsob připojení síťového přívodu není povolen ! Vstup ústředny je jištěn tavnou pojistkou 1A/T umístěnou v pouzdru na bloku síťové svorkovnice. Při případné výměně nahraďte přepálenou pojistku novou stejného typu. 19 --- PAGE BREAK --- Instalace a provedení kabeláže systému Ústředny a jejich instalace Rozměry krytu ústředny Galaxy Dimension Obr 5: výkres krytu Galaxy Dimension Kryt Galaxy Classic Kryt Galaxy Dimension Kryty jsou srovnány na společné montážní otvory. Obr 4: srovnání krytů Galaxy Classic a Galaxy Dimension 20 --- PAGE BREAK --- Ústředny a jejich instalace Instalace a provedení kabeláže systému Připojení ústředny k veřejné telefonní síti Svorkovnice (označena symbolem telefonu) na desce ústředny (svorky A a B, označené také jako LINE) musí být trvale připojena na telefonní linku prostřednictvím účastnické zásuvky (viz. obrázek). Obvody připojené na výše uvedené svorky na desce ústředny se považují za obvod TNV (t.j. obvod s napětím telekomunikační sítě ve smyslu normy ČSN EN 60 950). Existují dva způsoby připojení modulu na telefonní linku: Obr 6: Připojení ústředny k veřejné telefonní síti Způsob 1 Příchozí linku připojte na svorky A a B svorkovnice označené „LINE“. Následné zařízení připojte na svorky A a B svorkovnice označené „PHONE“. Zabezpečovací ústředna by měla být na telefonní linku zapojená jako první zařízení. Vhodným kabelem pro připojení ústředny k telefonní lince je např. SYKFY 2x2x0,5. Pozor ! Po kompletním připojení komunikátoru na telefonní linku vždy nasaďte na ústřednu její kryt, aby se předešlo nebezpečí úrazu osob napětím z telekomunikační sítě. Propojení musí být provedeno tak, aby odpovídalo požadavkům článku 4.2 normy ČSN EN 41003 pro obvod telefonní linky (TNV) a článku 2.3 normy ČSN EN 60950 pro obvody napájení modulu (SELV). Způsob 2 Použijte standardní propojovací kabel s konektory RJ45. Jeden konec kabelu zasuňte do zásuvky RJ45 na desce ústředny, druhý do účastnické zásuvky telefonní sítě. Připojení sériově zařazeného telefonního přístroje K internímu telefonnímu komunikátoru je možné sériově připojit telefonní přístroj a to na svorky A a B svorkovnice označené jako PHONE. Monitorování linky Interní telefonní komunikátor v klidovém stavu monitoruje mimo stavů vlastní telefonní linky i komunikaci na RS-485 lince 1. Aktuální stav indikuje červená LED1 na desce ústředny podle následující tabulky: 21 --- PAGE BREAK --- Instalace a provedení kabeláže systému Ústředny a jejich instalace Blikání LED indikace 0.1 ZAP / 0.9 VYP Normální komunikace LED zhasnuta Chybí napájení Krátký puls na konci volání Normální komunikace Rychlé zablikání na konci volání Selhání komunikace Svítí během spojení s programy Alarm Monitor, Galaxy Gold nebo SMS Normální komunikace Blikání během spojení s programy Alarm Monitor, Galaxy Gold nebo SMS Velmi špatná komunikace Kopíruje vyzváněcí signál Zvonění Impuls s každým odeslaným znakem Normální indikace během volání Tab 5: Monitorování telefonní linky Zálohovací akumulátor Všechny ústředny GalaxyG3 mají akumulátorem zálohovaný napájecí zdroj. Fyzicky je možné do skříně ústředny umístit akumulátor o maximální kapacitě 18 Ah. Použijeme-li akumulátor umístěný mimo skříň ústředny, můžeme připojit ke zdroji ústředny akumulátor o kapacitě až 34Ah.Při připojování akumulátoru je nutno dbát na dodržení správné polarity. Při použití nesprávného typu akumulátoru hrozí riziko jeho exploze. Svorky ústředny Akumulátor - BAT - pól AKU. + BAT + pól AKU. Tab 6: Připojení akumulátoru k desce ústředny Interní systémový napájecí zdroj Interní systémový zdroj je určen pro napájení desky ústředny, dobíjení akumulátoru a pro napájení periferií. Následující tabulka zobrazuje jména a hodnoty použitých pojistek. Pojistka Hodnota Funkce Typ AUX 1 1A RS-485 linka 1, Zóny 1-8: +12V, Int. telefonní komunikátor (mimo RS-232 kom.) 20mm AUX 2 1A RS-485 linka 2, Zóny 9-16: 12V, 20mm BATT 1,6A Akumulátor 20mm BELL 1A Výstupy RIO0 1-4, RIO1 1-4, HORN výstup 20mm Tab 7: Pojistky na desce ústředny 22 --- PAGE BREAK --- Ústředny a jejich instalace Instalace a provedení kabeláže systému Monitorované úrovně napětí akumulátoru Monitorovaná úroveň Hodnota Níská úroveň napětí akumulátoru 11.2V Ochrana proti hlubokému vybití akumulátoru 10.5V Ochrana proti přebití akumulátoru 14.7V Tab 8: Monitorované úrovně napětí akumulátoru Proudová kapacita systémového napájecího zdroje Celková proudová kapacita interního systémového zdroje Galaxy Dimension je 2.5A. Při návrhu systému jenutné počítat s následujícím využitím proudové kapacity. Výstup Proudová spotřeba Akumulátor 1.25A Deska ústředny 0.25A AUX +12V 1A Z výstupů AUX na deste ústředny je možné napájet periferie a prvky, jejichž celkový maximální odběr nepřesáhne upovolenou hodnotu proudu 1A. Pro ostatní prvky a periferie je nutné použít posilovací zdroj. Paměť ústředny Pro potřeby zálohování softwarové konfigurace a historie událostí je ústředna GalaxyG3 vybavena knoflíkovou lithiovou 3V baterií uchovávající obsah paměti (kde jsou uvedená data uložena). Parametry záložní baterie: CR 2025, Li-Mn, 3V Standardně je baterie přiložena v balení ústředny a je nutné ji před zapnutím ústředny do desky správně osadit. Pokud je baterie osazena, jsou naprogramovaná data a historie uchovávána v ústředně bez nutnosti síťového nebo bateriového napájení po dobu cca 1 roku. Restart ústředny (menu 51.17, nebo odpojení nápájení ústředny) s osazenou záložní baterií je označován jako teplý start. Konfigurace ústředny zůstane zachována. Pokud knoflíkovou baterii odstraníme a odpojíme veškeré napájení ústředny dojde ke ztrátě naprogramovaných dat a ústředna se uvede do tovární konfigurace. Následné zapnutí bývá označováno jako studený start. Pokud jsou na instalaci posilovací zdroje, je nutné pro úspěšný studený start ústředny všechny posilovací zdroje vypnout, nebo odpojit linky RS-485 od desky ústředny. Krátkodobého odpojení záložní lithiové baterie pro studený start ústředny, je možné dosáhnout i pouhým odizolováním kladné svorky od baterie například kreditní kartou, nebo listem papíru. Kartu zasuňtě mezi baterii a přítlačný flip kladného svorky. Pružný kontakt kladné svorky pouzdra baterie nesmí být násilně zvedán a ohýbán. Jeho pružnost zaručuje potřebný kontakt s kladným pólem baterie. Záložní lithiová baterie by měla být v ústředně vyměněna v intervalu 5 let. Při použití nesprávného typu záložní baterie hrozí exploze baterie. 23 --- PAGE BREAK --- Instalace a provedení kabeláže systému Ústředny a jejich instalace Instalace a provedení kabeláže systému Datová sběrnice RS485 (linka AB) Komunikace mezi ústřednou a jednotlivými moduly systému probíhá po komunikační sběrnici RS485 označované jako linka AB. Stav sběrnice a přítomnost modulů na ní ústředna nepřetržitě monitoruje. Pokud z nějakého důvodu dojde k selhání komunikace některého z modulů, je vyvolán poplach a ústředna hlásí, který z modulů přestal komunikovat. Kabeláž sběrnice RS485 Kabeláž systému musí být provedena tak, aby byly všechny moduly připojeny ke sběrnici paralelně. To znamená, že svorka A předchozího modulu musí být přivedena na svorku A modulu následujícího. Totéž platí i o svorce B. Pro sběrnici platí, že oba její konce musí být zakončeny rezistory 680Ω. Typické provedení sběrnice systému je schematicky zobrazeno na obrázku. Jeden ze zakončovacích odporů linky je z výroby osazen přímo na desce ústředny. Druhý je nutno osadit do posledního modulu na sběrnici. Sběrnici není v žádném případě povoleno jakkoliv větvit !!! Obr 7: Předepsané zapojení komunikační sběrnice RS485 Jediná vyjímka je znázorněna na dalším obrázku. Jedná se o zapojení, kdy je ústředna Galaxy umístěna uprostřed sběrnice a ta se od ní rozbíhá na dvě strany. Zakončovací rezistor z desky ústředny je odpojen pomocí jumperu a přesunut na konec sběrnice. Zakončovací rezistory na desce ústředny a expanzním modulu RS485 je možné odpojit pomocí následujících jumperů: Linka Jumper Linka 1 LK3 Linka 2 LK5 Linka 3 LK1 Linka 4 LK2 Tab 9: Odpojení zakončovacího odporu linky RS485 rozpojením propojky na desce ústředny Obr 8: Korektní rozvětvení sběrnice RS 485 v ústředně 24 --- PAGE BREAK --- Ústředny a jejich instalace Instalace a provedení kabeláže systému RS485 - Omezení při kabeláži Pro bezchybný provoz ústředny musí být splněny následující kritéria: 1. Na každou komunikační linku může být připojeno maximálně 32 modulů. Maximální počty jednotlivých typů modulů umístěných na JEDNÉ sběrnici jsou v následující tabulce: Galaxy GD-48 Galaxy GD-96 Galaxy GD-264,520 Klávesnice 8 8 8 Keyprox 3 3 (linka 1) 7 (linka 2) 3 (linka 1) 7(linka 2,3,4) RIO/SPSU 4 4 (linka 1) 6 (linka 2) 15 (linka 1) 16 (linka 2,3,4) VF RIO 4 4 (linka 1) 6 (linka 2) 15 (linka 1) 16 (linka 2,3,4) VF Portal 4 4+4(linka 1+2) 8 (celkem v systému 8) Čtečky MAX 4 8 na kom.linku 8 na kom.linku moduly DCM 4 8 na kom.linku 8 na kom.linku RS232 (E054/55) 1 (pouze linka 1) 1 (pouze linka 1) 1 (pouze linka 1) Telef. Kom. (E062-43) 1 (pouze linka 1) 1 (pouze linka 1) 1 (pouze linka 1) AUDIO 1 (pouze linka 1) 1 (pouze linka 1) 1 (pouze linka 1) Tiskárna 1 (pouze linka 1) 1 (pouze linka 1) 1 (pouze linka 1) ISDN 1 (pouze linka 1) 1 (pouze linka 1) 1 (pouze linka 1) Ethernet 1 (pouze linka 1) 1 (pouze linka 1) 1 (pouze linka 1) Tab 10: Maximální počty modulů na sběrnicích 2. Kabeláž systému musí být provedena tak, aby byly všechny moduly ke sběrnici připojeny paralelně. Větvení a hvězdicová konfigurace není povoleno z důvodů snížené imunity proti rušení. 3. Pro kabeláž sběrnice RS485 (AB) musí být použit stíněný twistovaný (kroucený) pár. 4. Stínění kabelu sběrnice musí být uzemněno pouze v jednom bodě (doporučeno v ústředně). V novějším provedení skříní jsou k dispozici dva svorníky M4 pro připevnění stínění. 5. Oba konce komunikační sběrnice musí být zakončeny rezistory 680 Ω. 6. Není dovoleno vést několik sběrnic ve vícepárovém kabelu. Rovněž se nedoporučuje vést jednu sběrnici tam a zpět po různých párech v jednom kabelu (platí pro všechny typy ústředen). Každá sběrnice musí mít svůj samostatný kabel. 7. Napájecí zdroj ústředny a posilovací napájecí zdroje nesmí být spojeny paralelně. Je třeba propojit navzájem záporné póly (0V) všech napájecích zdrojů vodičem dostatečného průřezu. Nikdy nespojujte kladné póly napájecích zdrojů ! 8. Mezní hodnota napájecího napětí, pod kterou se zhoršuje kvalita komunikace je 10,5V. Doporučená hodnota napájecího napětí na všech modulech je 12,5V. 9. Vodiče k reproduktoru nesmí být vedeny stejným kabelem jako komunikační sběrnice. 10. Tam, kde je to možné, je doporučeno zachovávat odstup od jiné kabeláže minimálně 30 centimetrů. 11. Tam, kde je to možné, zajistěte, aby AB sběrnice nevedla v delším úseku (více než 5 metrů) souběžně s kabely, které by mohly rušit (např. telefonní vedení, počítačová síť. 25 --- PAGE BREAK --- Instalace a provedení kabeláže systému Ústředny a jejich instalace Obr 9: Připojení stínícího vodiče kabelu komunikačních sběrnic Napájení systémových modulů a komponentů EZS V případě, že je nedostačující kapacita zdroje v ústředně, použijte přídavné posilovací zdroje. Napájecí napětí systémových modulů by nemělo být v žádném případě nižší než 10,5Vss a to i v případě provozu na akumulátor, který je vybitý (zjednodušeně lze tedy říct, že napájecí napětí při provozu na síť by nemělo být nikdy nižší než 12,5Vss). U čidel se řiďte specifikacemi jejich výrobce. Adresování rozšiřujících modulů Každý rozšiřující modul v systému má přidělenu svoji unikátní adresu. U většiny modulů (jako jsou například koncentrátory nebo klávesnice) se adresa nastavuje pomocí šestnáctipolohového otočného přepínače. Jednotlivé polohy jsou vyznačeny jako hexadicimální čísla v rozsahu 0 až F. Převodní tabulka adres z hexadecimálního do dekadického vyjádření je uvedena dále: 26 Adresa hexa Adresa dekadická 0 až 9 0 až 9 A 10 B 11 C 12 D 13 E 14 F 15 --- PAGE BREAK --- Ústředny a jejich instalace Instalace a provedení kabeláže systému Některé moduly (například modul RS232 nebo komunikátor E062-43) mají přidělenu pevnou adresu, kterou nelze měnit. Zpravidla také není možné tuto adresu využívat pro jiné periferie (platí hlavně pro klávesnice). Podrobnosti naleznete u jednotlivých modulů. Čtečkám MAX03 se adresa nenastavuje hardwarově, ale softwarově. Zvolenou adresu přidělí čtečce ústředna během jejího programování. Fyzická (hardwarová) a softwarová adresa modulů Fyzická adresa nastavená na otočném přepínači je postačující k identifikaci modulu v rámci jedné komunikační sběrnice. Nestačí ale k úplné identifikaci modulu v systému, protože rozsah fyzických adres je pouze 0 až 15. Na různých sběrnicích mohou být připojeny periferie se stejnou fyzickou adresou. Pro jednoznačnou identifikaci modulu je tedy třeba uvést nejenom fyzickou adresu modulu (v rozsahu 0 až F hexa = 0 až 15 dekadicky), ale také číslo sběrnice, na kterou je modul připojen. Sloučením čísla sběrnice a fyzické adresy rozšiřujícího modulu vzniká tzv. softwarová adresa, která jednoznačně identifikuje modul v systému. Softwarová adresa koncentrátorů Softwarová adresa koncentrátorů má tři místa. Příklad: Na sběrnici číslo 2 je připojen koncentrátor s nastavenou fyzickou adresou B (=11). Softwarová adresa modulu je 211. Kompletní adresa 3 Reprezentuje číslo linky RS485 05 7 Reprezentuje HW adresu modulu Reprezentuje číslo smyčky (výstupu GALAXY G3 linka 3 (1,2,4) Linka 3 RIO adresa 05 zóna Zóna 7 Obr 10: Sestavení kompletní adresy zóny (výstupu) Softwarová adresa klávesnic Softwarová adresa klávesnic má pouze dvě místa. Její generování je různé pro ústředny s jednou a více komunikačními sběrnicemi. Podrobnosti naleznete v sekci Adresování klávesnic na straně 59. Softwarová adresa čteček Softwarová adresa čteček má pouze dvě místa. Programuje se z ústředny a podrobnosti naleznete v sekci Moduly kontroly vstupu na straně 74. Softwarová adresa ostatních modulů Podrobnosti naleznete v popisech jednotlivých modulů. 27 --- PAGE BREAK --- Instalace a provedení kabeláže systému Ústředny a jejich instalace Zóny a jejich tovární nastavení V továrním nastavení jsou všechny zóny (termínem zóna jsou u Galaxy označovány smyčky) naprogramovány podle následující tabulky. Typ zón lze později kdykoli měnit. Ústředna Zóna 1001 Galaxy GD-xxx 01=KONCOVA Zóna 1002 02=ODCHODOVA Ostatní zóny 03=NARUSITEL Tab 11: Tovární nastavení zón na desce ústředny Adresování koncentrátorů RIO na desce ústředny Pomocí DIPu SW3-8 je možné ovlivňovat připojení koncentrátoru RIO1 na komunikační linku RS485. Toto nastavení musí být provedeno před zapnutím napájení ústředny a lze je použít pouze u GD-264(520). DIP SW3-8 „OFF“ (tovární nastavení) Při tomto nastavení budou oba koncentrátory na desce ústředny připojeny na linku 1. koncentrátor Adresa Zóny Výstupy RIO 0 100 1001-1008 1001-1004 RIO 1 101 1011-1018 1011-1014 Tab 12: Adresy interních koncentrátorů DIP SW3-8 OFF DIP SW3-8 „ON“ Při tomto nastavení je RIO1 připojeno na zvláštní linku 0. koncentrátor Adresa Zóny Výstupy RIO 0 100 1001-1008 1001-1004 RIO 1 001 0011-0018 0011-0014 Tab 13: Adresy interních koncentrátorů DIP SW3-8 ON 28 --- PAGE BREAK --- Ústředny a jejich instalace Instalace a provedení kabeláže systému Zapojení zóny Stav zón vyhodnocuje ústředna Galaxy na základě měření jejich odporu. Programově je možné nastavit libovolné smyčce typ vyvážení (dvojité nebo jednoduché) a hodnotu vyvažovacích odporů (1k, 2k2, 4k7, 5k6). Globální parametr nastavení vyvážení zón naleznete v Parametrech systému 51.46=Vyvazeni zon Standardně je všem smyčkám přednastaveno dvojité vyvážení s odpory 1kΩ. V klidu má zóna odpor 1 kΩ (zóna je uzavřena), při narušení má zóna odpor 2 kΩ (zóna je otevřena). Přechod z 1 na 2 kΩ vyvolává poplachový stav. Stav Volba 01 -1k Volba 03 -2k2 Volba 05 -4k7 Volba 07 -5k6 Volba 09 -1k Porucha Sabotáž - zkrat 0 - 800 0 - 1800 0 - 3700 0 -1400 0 - 800 Nízký odpor 800 - 900 1800 - 2000 3700 - 4200 1400 - 2800 800 - 900 Normální stav 900 - 1200 2000 - 2500 4200 - 5500 2800 - 8400 900 -1200 Vysoký odpor 1200 - 1300 2500 - 2700 5500 - 6500 8400 - 9800 1200 - 1300 Poplach 1300 - 12000 2700 - 12000 6500 - 19000 9800 - 12600 1300 - 3500 Porucha Maskování Sabotáž - rozpojeno 11=1k N/O 1200 - ∞ 0-1200 3500 - 4500 12000 - 19000 12000 - 15000 19000 - 22000 12600 - 22000 4500 - 19000 19000 - ∞ 15000 - ∞ 22000 - ∞ 22000 - ∞ 19000 - ∞ Tab 14: Hodnoty a stavy dvojitě vyvažovaných zón Stav Volba 02 -1k Volba 04 -2k2 Volba 06 -4k7 Volba 08 -5k6 Volba 10 -1k Porucha Sabotáž - zkrat 0 - 800 0 - 1800 0 - 3700 0 -1400 0 - 800 Nízký odpor 800 - 900 1800 - 2000 3700 - 4200 1400 - 2800 800 - 900 Normální stav 900 - 1200 2000 - 2500 4200 - 5500 2800 - 8400 900 -1200 Vysoký odpor 1200 - 1300 2500 - 2700 5500 - 6500 8400 - 9800 1200 - 1300 Porucha 12=1k N/O 1200 - ∞ 1300 - 4500 Maskování 1300-12000 2700-12000 6500 - 19000 9800 - 19000 4500 - 19000 Poplach 12000 - ∞ 12000 - ∞ 19000 - ∞ 19000 - ∞ 19000 - ∞ 0-1200 Tab 15: Hodnoty a stavy jednoduše vyvažovaných zón Odezva zóny (doba, za kterou zóna registruje změnu odporu) je továrně nastavená na 300 ms. Dobu lze měnit v rozsahu 20 až 1.000 milisekund globálně pro všechny zóny v systému pomocí parametru 51.27=Odezva zony. Odezva zóny je navíc individuálně volitelná pro každou zónu. Odezva může být identická s globálním nastavením, další možnosti jsou pomalá odezva (750 ms) a rychlá odezva (10 ms). Programování odezev je popsáno v menu 52.6 programovacího manuálu. Dynamické monitorování zón Je možné navíc povolit funkci dynamického monitorování zón, která zabezpečuje ochranu před „přidržením“ zóny konstantním stejnosměrným napětím (v továrním nastavením je tato funkce zakázána menu 51.45). Tato funkce se vztahuje pouze na zóny na koncentrátorech (RIO). 29 --- PAGE BREAK --- Instalace a provedení kabeláže systému Ústředny a jejich instalace Zapojení jednoho detektoru v zóně Příklad zapojení detektoru do zóny Galaxy ukazuje následující obrázek: POPLACH PORUCHA ANTIMASK. N/C N/C N/C Zóna 3K 1% 1K 1% DETEKTOR 1K 1% 12K 1% SABOTÁŽ 100 m Obr 11: Příklad zapojení dvojitě vyvažované zóny se signalizací maskování a poruchy( předvolba 09) POPLACH PORUCHA ANTIMASK. N/C N/C N/C Zóna 3K 1% DETEKTOR 1K 1% 12K 1% SABOTÁŽ 100 m Obr 12: Příklad zapojení jednoduše vyvážené zóny se signalizací poruchy a maskování ( předvolba 10) Maximální délka zóny od koncentrátoru nebo ústředny k detektoru je 100 metrů, pokud je použito vyvážení zón s indikací maskování a poruchy. Při určování této vzdálenosti se vycházelo ze standardního kabelu používaného v EZS o průžezu vodiče 0,22 mm2. Lze samozřejmě použít i jiný kabel, pak je ale třeba spočítat úbytky napětí na napájecích vodičích. Při výpočtu se musí ověřit odpor zóny tak, aby na čidle bylo dostatečně velké napájecí napětí a odpor zóny nevybočoval z uvedených hodnot. Zapojení více detektorů do jedné zóny Příklad zapojení více detektorů do jedné zóny je na následujícím obrázku. Maximální počet detektorů v jedné zóně je deset (všechny kontakty na obrázku jsou typu NC - v klidu sepnuty). Obr 13: Příklad zapojení více detektorů do smyčky (předvolba 01) Zapojení klíčem ovládaného spínače Systém nebo jednotlivé grupy je možné plně nebo částečně zapínat a vypínat klíčem ovládaným spínačem. Tento spínač může být impulzní nebo přepínací. V systému Galaxy existuje pro tento účel speciální zóna typu 09=KEYSWITCH, která může být použita pro impulzní i přepínací spínač (označován rovněž jako hladinový). Programování zón se provádí v menu 52=PROGRAM. ZON. 30 --- PAGE BREAK --- Ústředny a jejich instalace • Instalace a provedení kabeláže systému Přepínací zóna typu KEYSWITCH má následující funkci: přechod z 1 kΩ na 2 kΩ zahájí zastřežení odstřeženého systému, přechod z 2 kΩ na 1 kΩ vypne zastřežený systém. Pokud je už systém zapnutý, nemá přechod z 1 kΩ na 2 kΩ žádný účinek. Podobně, jestliže je systém vypnutý, přechod ze 2 kΩ na 1 kΩ se také nijak neprojeví. Takto se chová zóna naprogramovaná jako 09=*KEYSWITCH. Obr 14: Zapojení hladinového (přepínacího) kontaktu do zóny typu *KEYSWITCH • Impulzní zóna typu 09=KEYSWITCH zahájí přechodem z 1 kΩ na 2 kΩ (náběžná hrana) zastřežení vypnutého systému a nebo vypne systém pokud byl zapnutý. Přechod ze 2 kΩ na 1 kΩ (sestupná hrana) odpovídající návratu spínače do klidového stavu nemá na systém žádný vliv. Tento typ spínače se připojuje na zónu naprogramovanou jako typ 09=KEYSWITCH. Obr 15: Zapojení impulsního kontaktu do zóny typu KEYSWITCH Zapojení odchodového tlačítka Zóna naprogramovaná jako typ 08=ZAP TLAC slouží pro ukončení odchodového zpoždění a zastřežení systému. Použité tlačítko může být typu NO (při aktivaci přechod z 2 kΩ na 1 kΩ) nebo NC (při aktivaci přechod z 1 kΩ na 2 kΩ). Při prvním stisknutí odchodového tlačítka si ústředna zmapuje jeho stav. Pozor ! Zóna typu 08=ZAP TLAC je jediný typ zóny, ke kterému lze připojit také spínače typu NO. Při první aktivaci odchodového tlačítka nemusí dojít k zapnutí ústředny do střežení, protože může proběhnout mapovací procedura. Pokud se systém do střežení nezapne a je dál odpočítávána odchodová doba, stiskněte znovu odchodové tlačítko. Systém se při druhém stisknutí odchodového tlačítka zapne do střežení. Mapovací procedura proběhne pouze při prvním zapínání systému pomocí odchodového tlačítka. Všechny následující zapínací procedury zapnou systém do střežení hned při prvním stisknutí odchodového tlačítka. Obr 16: Zapojení spínacího a rozpínacího odchodového tlačítka 31 --- PAGE BREAK --- Instalace a provedení kabeláže systému Ústředny a jejich instalace Výstupy Integrované výstupy ústředen řady Galaxy Dimension a jim továrně přednastavené funkce jsou uvedeny v následující tabulce: Adresa výstupu Galaxy Dimension Přednastavená funkce Typ výstupu Zatížení (mA) Napětí (Vss) Klidový stav (POLARITA) Továr. nast. Linka 0 - povolena 1001 1001 01=SIRENA tranzistorový 400 12 POZITIVNÍ 1002 1002 02=MAJAK přepínací relé 1 000 30 (max.) bezpotenciálový 1003 1003 03=PA tranzistorový 400 12 POZITIVNÍ 1004 1004 07=RESET tranzistorový 400 12 POZITIVNÍ 1011 0011 09=ZAPNUTO tranzistorový 400 12 POZITIVNÍ 1012 0012 04=NARUSITEL tranzistorový 400 12 POZITIVNÍ 1013 0013 20=POTVRZ AL. tranzistorový 400 12 POZITIVNÍ 1014 0014 03=RESET tranzistorový 400 12 POZITIVNÍ Tab 16: Integrované programovatelné výstupy ústředen a jejich tovární nastavení Tranzistorové výstupy Všechny výstupy v ústředně Galaxy s vyjímkou bezpotenciálového reléového výstupu jsou tranzistorové (zapojení se společným emitorem). V továrním nastavení jsou rozepnuté výstupní tranzistory, takže je na výstupech napětí blízké 12Vss. Maximální proudová zatížitelnost výstupů je 400 mA. Zapojení výstupu je znázorněno na obrázku. Obr 17: Tranzistorový výstup Polarita výstupů Pokud je výstup v klidovém stavu a má nastavenu pozitivní polaritu, není výstupní tranzistor sepnutý a na výstupu je zhruba napájecí napětí (cca 12Vss). Výstup je tedy při pozitivní polaritě typu „fail-safe“ – při kompletním výpadku napájení dojde k jeho deaktivaci. Polarita výstupů může být změněna v menu 53=PROGRAM. VYST Překonfigurování tranzistorového výstupu na desce ústředny na otevřený kolektor Překonfigurování výstupu na otevřený kolektor se provádí pomocí DIP přepínače SW3 na desce ústředny. Bližší informace jsou pospány v kapitole Konfigurace tranzistorových výstupů na straně 18. Překonfigurování tranzistorového výstupu RIO na otevřený kolektor V případě potřeby je možné tranzistorový výstup v zapojení se společným emitorem převést na výstup s otevřeným kolektorem. K tomu je třeba vyřadit kolektorový odpor výstupního tranzistoru. V praxi stačí přerušit pouze jeden vývod kolektorového rezistoru (aby bylo možné v případě potřeby rezistor znovu zapojit) a rezistor vhodným způsobem zaizolovat například pomocí navlékací bužírky. Úprava je znázorněna na obrázku Obr 17 . 32 --- PAGE BREAK --- Ústředny a jejich instalace Instalace a provedení kabeláže systému Reléový výstup na desce ústředny Reléový výstup je bezpotenciálový. Je osazen relé s jedním přepínacím kontaktem. Obr 18: Příklad zapojení reléového výstupu Typická připojení různých zařízení na výstupy Obr 19: Příklady zapojení různých zařízení na výstupy 33 --- PAGE BREAK --- Instalace a provedení kabeláže systému Ústředny a jejich instalace Výstupy „Trigger“ na desce ústředny Na desce ústředny, na plochém 12-ti pinovém konektoru, je vyvedeno 6 programovatelných výstupů použitelných např. pro připojení externího komunikátoru. Výstupy jsou navrženy jako elektronické spínače spínače k zemi (0V) a nelze je použít jako zdroj proudu. Jejich zatížitelnost je max.100mA. Výstup +12V na plochém konektoru je jištěn pojistkou F2 na desce ústředny. Adresa výstupu Funkce (tovární nastavení) Max.zatížení 0001 Pozar 100mA 0002 PA 100mA 0003 Narusitel 100mA 0004 Zapnuto 100mA 0005 Vynech.zona 100mA 0006 Potvrzeni popl. 100mA Tab 17: Výstupy „Trigger“ a jejich tovární nastavení Obr 20: Zapojení plochého konektoru s výstupy „Trigger“ 34 --- PAGE BREAK --- Ústředny a jejich instalace SPI klíč SPI klíč Zařízení SPI klíč (Serial Peripheral Interface) je přenosné paměťové médium použitelné pouze s ústřednami řady Galaxy G3 a Dimension. Pomocí tohoto paměťového média je možné přenášet konfigurační soubory mezi ústřednami. Data jsou uložena v nezávislém formátu a proto je možné přenášet konfiguraci i mezi ústřednami s rozdílnými verzemi. Pomocí SPI klíče je navíc možné provést upgrade ústředny na vyšší softwarovou verzi. Více je popsáno v programovacím manuálu Galaxy. Menu 71=SPI klic. SPI konektor pro připojení paměťového klíče je v pravém horním rohu desky ústředny GalaxyG3. Schematický obrázek je na Obr. 21. Obr21: SPI klíč a jeho zapojení do zásuvky na desce ústředny Upozornění: Připojování a odpojování SPI klíče ke konektoru na desce ústředny lze provádět pouze při odpojeném napájení ústředny. V opačném případě hrozí poškození SPI klíče nebo ústředny. 35 --- PAGE BREAK --- Koncentrátor (RIO) SEKCE 4. Přídavné moduly k ústřednám Přídavné moduly k ústřednám Koncentrátor (RIO) Koncentrátor Galaxy (někdy bývá také označován jako RIO – zkratka z anglického „remote input output“) slouží k rozšiřování systému o zóny a výstupy. Může být použit ve spojení s ústřednami Galaxy G3. Koncentrátor je vybaven osmi dvojitě vyváženými smyčkami a čtyřmi programovatelnými výstupy. Standardně se dodává v krytu z ocelového plechu. Honeywell security s.r.o. dodává RIO moduly pod objednacím kódem G8. Obr 22: Deska koncentrátoru Galaxy Během výroby systému byla v prodeji celá řada hardwarových verzí koncentrátorů. Rozložení jednotlivých prvků na desce RIO se může od uvedeného vyobrazení lišit. Popis desky koncentrátoru Zóny Koncentrátor Galaxy je osazen osmi dvojitě vyváženými zónami. Jejich tovární nastavení je na typ 03=NARUSITEL. Zóna je standardně vyvážena rezistorem 1 kΩ zapojeným sériově s tamper kontaktem a dalším 1 kΩ rezistorem připojeným paralelně k poplachovému kontaktu detektoru. Výsledný klidový odpor zóny je 1 kΩ. Změna na 2 kΩ znamená poplachový stav. Výstupy Každý koncentrátor má osazeny čtyři programovatelné tranzistorové výstupy. Tranzistory jsou v zapojení se společným emitorem. Mezi kolektorem a kladným pólem napájení +12Vss mají zařazený odpor o hodnotě 3k3 (často označován jako pull-up rezistor). Kolektorové odpory pro jednotlivé výstupy a jejich označení jsou popsány v níže uvedené tabulce. Proudová zatížitelnost výstupů je 400 mA. Odstraněním kolektorových 36 --- PAGE BREAK --- Přídavné moduly k ústřednám Koncentrátor (RIO) rezistorů je možno výstupy převést do režimu otevřený kolektor. Všechny výstupy jsou zcela volně programovatelné. Výstup č. Funkce Kolektorový rezistor 1 01=SIRENA R1 2 02=MAJAK R3 3 03=PA R5 4 07=RESET R7 Tab 18: Tovární nastavení programovatelných výstupů koncentrátoru Sběrnicové rozhraní Slouží pro připojení koncentrátoru na komunikační sběrnici RS485. + .................................. napájecí napětí 12Vss (připojení k ústředně, klávesnici, nebo posilovacímu zdroji) –................................... napájecí napětí 0V (připojení k ústředně, klávesnici, nebo posilovacímu zdroji) A .................................. svorka A předchozího modulu na komunikační sběrnici B .................................. svorka B předchozího modulu na komunikační sběrnici S................................... volná svorka (pro propojení stínění) 37 --- PAGE BREAK --- Koncentrátor (RIO) Přídavné moduly k ústřednám Připojení koncentrátoru do systému Koncentrátor může být připojen do systému pouze v režimu technika. Z praxe doporučujeme připojovat nové prvky do systému pouze při vypnutém napájení. Linka RS485 (AB) koncentrátoru musí být připojena k lince RS485 (AB) ústředny vždy paralelně, tj. jednotlivé moduly se připojují za sebou (totéž platí i o klávesnicích a dalších modulech). Koncentrátor vyžaduje napájecí napětí 12Vss (výrobcem udávaný rozsah napětí je 10.5vss až 16.0Vss), klidový odběr je 50 mA. Napájení může být přivedeno buď ze zdroje ústředny, nebo i ze vzdáleného posilovacího zdroje (hlavně v případě velkých systémů, kde je výraznější úbytek napětí na vedení). Ve velkých systémech lze s výhodou použít zdroj s vestavěným koncentrátorem Smart PSU. Pozor !: Dolní hranici napájecího napětí 10,5Vss je třeba dodržet za všech okolností a to i v případě provozu na akumulátor, který je částečně vybitý. V praxi by nemělo napájecí napětí na koncentrátorech i ostatních prvcích poklesnout při napájení ze sítě pod zhruba 12,5Vss. Tím je zaručeno, že minimální hodnota napájecího napětí koncentrátoru nepoklesne pod 10,5Vss ani při napájení z akumulátoru, jehož jmenovité napětí je nižší než výstupní napětí zdrojů. Zóny, výstupy a sběrnicové rozhraní zapojte podle údajů uvedených dříve v této kapitole. Jestliže je RIO posledním modulem na komunikační sběrnici, připojte mezi svorky A a B zakončovací rezistor 680Ω. Adresování koncentrátorů Pro bezchybný provoz ústředny musí být každý koncentrátor ještě před připojením na napájecí napětí správně naadresován a jeho adresa nesmí být shodná s adresou jiného koncentrátoru na stejné komunikační sběrnici. K přidělení adresy koncentrátoru slouží 16-ti polohový otočný přepínač SW1 osazený na desce koncentrátoru . Platné adresy koncentrátorů pro jednotlivé typy ústředen Jsou uvedeny v následující tabulce: Ústředna Max. počet koncentrátorů Platné adresy Galaxy GD-48 4 1-4 (linka 1) Galaxy GD-96 10 2-5 (linka 1) 0-5 (linka 2) Galaxy GD-264 31 1-9, A-F (linka 1) 0-9, A-F (linka 2) Galaxy GD-520 63 1-9, A-F (linka 1) 0-9, A-F (linka 2, 3, 4) Tab 19: Platné adresy koncentrátorů pro jednotlivé typy ústředen 38 --- PAGE BREAK --- Přídavné moduly k ústřednám Koncentrátor (RIO) Přidání koncentrátoru do systémové konfigurace K přidání koncentrátoru do konfigurace ústředny dojde po vystoupení z režimu technika. Pokud se po vystoupení z režimu technika na displeji klávesnice objeví zpráva XX pridane mod [<],[>] zobrazit, došlo ke správnému zařazení modulu do stávající konfigurace ústředny. Stiskem kláves A nebo B se potvrdí přidání modulu. Pokud se zpráva neobjeví, nebo nový koncentrátor není v seznamu přidaných modulů, není v pořádku komunikace mezi ústřednou a koncentrátorem. Komunikaci mezi ústřednou a koncentrátorem je možno ověřit podle blikání diody LED (LED 1) osazené na koncentrátoru (viz. následující tabulka). Blikání LED 0.1 ZAP / 0.9 VYP LED nebliká Stav komunikace Normální komunikace Chybí napájení 1.5 ZAP / 1.5 VYP Koncentrátor nebyl nakonfigurován 0.2 ZAP / 0.2 VYP Ztráta komunikace koncentrátoru s ústřednou 0.9 ZAP / 0.1 VYP Špatná komunikace koncentrátoru Tab 20: Stav komunikace koncentrátoru signalizovaný LED Technická specifikace RIO Napájecí napětí 10,5Vss – 16,0Vss, jmen. 13,8Vss Proudový odběr 40mA Rozměry desky 121 x 90 mm Rozměry krytu 180 x 155 x 35 mm (kov) 150 x 162 x 39 mm (plast) Barva krytu světle šedá(kov) nebo bílá(plast) Tab 21: Technická specifikace RIO Obr 23: Deska koncentrátoru VF 39 --- PAGE BREAK --- Bezdrátový koncentrátor VF PORTAL – C-079 Přídavné moduly k ústřednám Bezdrátový koncentrátor VF PORTAL – C-079 Nový systémový bezdrátový modul pro ústředny Galaxy Dimension a G2. Plně nahrazuje modul G8VF. Vychází z předchozí verze modulu C-079 pro ústředny Galaxy G2. Vlastnosti modulu C-079 • Pracovní kmitočet 868MHz. • Až 8 modulů C-079 na ústřednu. • Až 24 detektorů na jeden modul C-079. • Komunikační protokol Alpha a V2. • Automatické vyhledání optimální radiové trasy. LED1,LED2 modulu – indikace radiového provozu LED3 – indikace komunikace s ústřednou na lince RS485 Obr 24: Deska plošného spoje VF koncentrátoru C-079. GD-48 GD-96 GD-264 GD-520 Max.počet modulů VF Portal 4 8 8 8 Max.počet bezdrátových detektorů 32 80 192 192 Max.počet bezdrátových ovladačů 50 100 100 100 Tab 22: Maximální počet bezdrátových komponentů připojitelný k ústřednám řady GD. Kompatibilita s ústřednami Galaxy Modul C-079 s verzí firmwaru 1.06 a vyšší je kompatibilní s ústřednami Galaxy Dimension firmwarové verze 6.50 a vyšší a ústřednami G2 firmwarové verze 1.44 a vyšší. Galaxy Dimension a VF Portal C079-2 je kompatibilní s VF periferiemi jejichž seznam je uveden v následující tabulce: 40 --- PAGE BREAK --- Přídavné moduly k ústřednám Periferie Bezdrátový koncentrátor VF PORTAL – C-079 Popis Protokol IR800M / IRPI800M PIR / Pet Immune PIR Dual TCB800M / TCB800M-1 VF klíčenka - 4 tlačítka Dual (Zap/Vyp a PA) TCB8M VF klíčenka - 4 tlačítka Alpha (Pouze Zap/Vyp) TCBPA8M-1 PA tlačítko Alpha DFO800M Optokouřový detektor Alpha DO800M Magnetický kontakt Alpha SHK1-800GY-B Otřesový detektor V2 Detektor tříštění skla Dual Detektor teploty a zatopení Dual Nové VF periferie FG8M DET800M FP280 T280R Sonda detekující zatopen Teplotní sonda DTPI8M Duální čidlo PIR/MW (PET imunita) Dual DT8M Duální čidlo PIR/MW Dual SHK8M Otřesový detektor Dual SHKC8M Otřesový detektor + magnetický kontakt Dual Zpětná kompatibilita TC805 VF klíčenka - 4 tlačítka DODT800GY-B V2 Magnetický kontakt se sabotážním vstupem V2 DTO800HF-B (DOM-SMOK) Optokouřový detektor V2 DOD800GY-B (2021-051) Magnetický kontakt V2 IRX800GY-B (2021-052) PIR V2 PIR (PET imunita) V2 IR800PIGY-B Tab 23: Kompatibilita VF periferií s modulem C-079 Poznámka: Senzory, které lze přepínat mezi protokolem V2 a Alpha režim by měl být provozovány v protokolu Alpha, který zajišťuje vyšší spolehlivost přenosu. Všechny bezdrátové periferie typu 58xx (periferie modulu G8VF) pracují v jiném frekvenčním pásmu a nejsou slučitelné s moduly VF Portal. 41 --- PAGE BREAK --- Bezdrátový koncentrátor VF PORTAL – C-079 Přídavné moduly k ústřednám Připojení modulu do systému Pravidla pro umístění, ventilaci a kabeláž modulu jsou shodná s pravidly pro modul G8VF (předchozí kapitola) . Je důležité instalovat dostatečný počet modulů VF Portal . Tím bude dosaženo kvalitního vykrytí všech prostor, které mají být chráněny bezdrátovými detektory. Více signálových cest zajistí větší spolehlivost bezdrátového systému. Jako přibližné vodítko lze použít rozmezí 20 metrů od modulu VF Portal pro instalaci detektorů. Nicméně toto do značné míry závisí na okolních podmínkách (např. úrovni rušení) a konstrukce budovy. Následující faktory mohou mít vliv na radiovou komunikaci mezi VF periferiemi a moduly VF Portal: • Modul VF Portal by měl být montován s anténou s vertikální orientací. • Kovové předměty v blízkosti VF modulů (detektory, VF portal,…) významně snižují úroveň radiového signálu. Je třeba zajistit polohu VF modulů co nejdále od větších kovových předmětů (kabely, trubky, zrcadla, nádrže,…). • Průchodem přes silné stěny může být radiový signál značně zeslaben. Malé zeslabení lze očekávat u stěn ze dřeva nebo sádrokartonu, podstanější zeslabení budou znamenat stěny z betonu a kamene. • Blízké zdroje silného radiového signálu (např.komunikace taxislužby, vysílače mobilních operátorů, …) mohou ovlivňovat kvalitu a spolehlivost komunikace bezdrátových prvků EZS. • VF Portal se připojuje ke komunikační sběrnici ústředny stejným způsobem jakým se připojují ostatní moduly ústředny – je nutno repektovat pravidla platná pro sběrnici RS485 ( použít datový stíněný kabel a nerozvětvovat vedení komunikační linky). Všechny kabely musí být do krytu přivedeny zadní stěnou pomocí připravených montážních otvorů. Nepoužívejte otvor umístěný vedle antény. Antisabotážní kontakt Odejmutím krytu VF Portal se aktivuje vestavěný antisabotážní (tamper) spínač, pokud není systém v režimu technika. Pro přemostění antisabotážního spínače lze použít propojku LK1. Nastavení hardwarové adresy Každý modul VF Portal musí mít nastavenou unikátní adresu pomocí otočného přepínače na PCB. Může být použita adresa v rozsahu 0-15 . Tato adresa je nezávislá na adresách dalších typů modulů. Jedinečnost adresy modulů VF Portal je třeba kontrolovot pouze vůči jiným modulům VF Portal. Přihlášení modulu do konfigurace Galaxy VF Portal se nakonfiguruje do systému při opuštění módu Technik. Pokud se po opuštění módu Technik zobrazí na klávesnici XX pridane mod. [<][>] =zobrazit, systém nový modul uložil do konfigurace. Stisknutím kláves A nebo B se můžeme přesvědčit o jaký modul se konkrétně jedná. Pokud se toto hlášení nezobrazí, RF RIO se nenakonfigurovalo do systému a nekomunikuje s ústřednou. Pro snadnou kontrolu komunikace RF RIO s ústřednou slouží LED dioda na základní desce modulu. V následující tabulce jsou popsány její možné stavy. Střída blikání indikační LED3 Význam 0.1 svítí / 0.9 nesvítí normální komunikace s ústřednou nesvítí modul není napájen 1.5 svítí / 1.5 nesvítí modul není nakonfigurován (přiřazeno) do systému 0.2 svítí / 0.1 nesvítí ztráta komunikace 0.9 svítí / 0.1 nesvítí velmi špatná komunikace s ústřednou Tab 24: Střída blikání indikační LED3 VF koncentrátoru C079 42 --- PAGE BREAK --- Přídavné moduly k ústřednám Bezdrátový koncentrátor VF PORTAL – C-079 Po úspěšném přihlášení modulu lze zkontrolovat komunikaci s ústřednou – menu 61.1.9=VF MODULY . Instalované a přihlášené moduly budou zobrazeny s úrovní komunikace (budou zobrazeny hardwarové adresy modulů ve formátu: VF xxx, kde xxx je hardwarová adresa). Jakmile je VF Portal načten do systému, budou mu přiřazeny „virtuální“ koncentrátory. • Virtuální RIO jsou vyžadovány pouze za účelem rozdělení zón pro bezdrátové detektory. • Adresy virtuálních RIO nesouvisí s hardwarovými adresami modulů VF Portal. • Virtuální RIO postupně obsazují nepoužité adresy pro RIO v systému . • Každému modulu VF Portal jsou zpočátku přiděleny adresy dvou virtuálních RIO. • Počet a adresy virtuálních RIO lze ručně změnit, v případě potřeby, v menu 51.60.1 = VF adresa. • Zóny přidělené pro bezdrátové detektory je možné odděleně zobrazit v menu 52.2.=VF zony. Legislativa Toto zařízení je určeno ve spolupráci s kompatibilními bezdrátovými detekčními prvky k detekci pohybujících se osob při neoprávněném vniknutí do střeženého objektu. Správná funkce zařízení je podmíněna dodržením podmínek pro instalaci a použití uvedených v předchozích kapitolách tohoto návodu. Na zařízení bylo vydáno prohlášení o shodě podle § 9 NV 426/2000Sb a je v souladu s požadavky všeobecného oprávnění VOR/10/06.2009-9 GL-30/R/2000 článek č.8 . 43 --- PAGE BREAK --- Interface pro sériovou tiskárnu A161 Přídavné moduly k ústřednám Interface pro sériovou tiskárnu A161 Interface pro připojení tiskárny k ústřednám Galaxy umožňuje tisknout historii událostí a naprogramovanou konfiguraci ústředny na sériové tiskárně. Modul je dostupný ve dvou provedeních: • s 25 pinovým CANNON M konektorem (A161) Sign. Barva D25M D9F TX Modrá 3 2 GND Žlutá 7 5 DTR Červená 20 4 PIN 3 (modrá) : TX PIN 7 (žlutá) : GND PIN 20 (červená) :DTR Tab 25: Zapojení konektorů CANNON Dodávaný konektor CANNON 25M • (barvy nemusí vždy souhlasit) s 6 pinovým DIN konektorem (A134) Stanardně se v ČR dodává pouze modul A161. Modul lze použít pouze ve spojení se sériovou tiskárnou. Nastavení tiskárny musí odpovídat následující tabulce: Parametr Nastavení Start bit 1 Stop bit 1 Délka slova 8 Data Bitů Parita Žádná Přenosová rychlost 1 200 Bd Tab 26: Nastavení modulu pro sériovou tiskárnu Připojení modulu A161 k systému Galaxy Modul A161 může být připojen kdekoliv na sběrnici AB linky 1(RS 485). Musí být dodrženy všechny podmínky pro instalaci zařízení na sběrnici RS485. Data, která mají být vytisknuta jsou posílána po lince 1 do modulu A161, který konvertuje data z formátu RS485 na RS232 (běžný seriový přenos – formát přenosu je jasně patrný z tabulky 3-7.) Modul neobsahuje žádné konfigurační prvky (jako DIP přepínače, propojky atd.). Provozní stav modulu A161 je signalizován indikačními LED diodami. Diody jsou umístěny u každé ze stran rozhraní tj. u vstupu RS485 a výstupu RS232. Bezproblémový stav je signalizován trvalým svitem LED diod, případný problém (tj. nepřipojeno výstupní zařízení např. tiskárna nebo PC, výpadek komunikace A161 s ústřednou) blikajícími LED diodami. Adresování modulu A161 Modul má pevně nastavenou adresu. Komunikaci modulu A161 s ústřednou lze ověřit v menu 23=SYSTEM (položka TISKAREN). Pozor! Modul je možné kdykoliv odpojit od ústředny (není supervizován). 44 --- PAGE BREAK --- Přídavné moduly k ústřednám Interface pro sériovou tiskárnu A161 Proto doporučuje výrobce umístit modul v krytu chráněném sabotážním kontaktem. Nejlépe je umístit modul přímo v ústředně a připojit ho na zásuvku např. na konektor PL3 (Dimension). Interface pro sériovou tiskárnu A161 nemůže být použit pokud je v systému zapojen modul UNI1. V tomto případě lze využít tiskový výstup na UNI1. Technická specifikace A161 Odběr 100mA Rozměry 75 x 52 x 28 mm 45 --- PAGE BREAK --- Modul E062 – telefonní komunikátor Přídavné moduly k ústřednám Modul E062 – telefonní komunikátor Telefonní komunikátor E062 je volitelné příslušenství k ústřednám Galaxy. Jedná se o vysoce inteligentní a kompaktní digitální komunikátor kombinovaný s modemem určený pro přenos poplachových zpráv na pult centrální ochrany, který lze zároveň využít pro dálkový servis (up/downloading). • K ústředně Galaxy G3 a GD se modul E062 připojuje na komunikační linku RS485 číslo 1. • V ústřednách Galaxy G3 a GD se tento modul programuje v menu 56.5=EXT. TELEF. KOM U verzí Galaxy G3 a GD je telefonní komunikátor integrován přímo na desce ústředny. Interní telefonní komunikátor se programuje v menu 56.1=INT. TELEF.KOM. Jako digitální komunikátor se modul E062 používá k vysílání poplachových i nepoplachových událostí ve vybraném komunikačním formátu (továrně je nastaven rychlý formát DTMF, v ČR se ale zpravidla nepoužívá). K dispozici jsou následující další formáty (podrobnosti v instalačním manuálu ke Galaxy): • SIA (úrovně 0 až 4) • Contact ID • Microtech (formát fy Ademco-Microtech pro spolupráci s programem Alarm Monitoring) Jako modem může být modul E062 použit ve spolupráci s programem Galaxy Gold pro získání přístupu do systému ze vzdálené lokality, načtení a přepis konfigurace systému, on-line obsluhu a servisní diagnostiku. Zapojení modulu Existují dvě základní konfigurace pro připojení modulu E062 k ústřednám Galaxy G3 a Dimension. Jejich popis a způsob připojení jsou uvedeny dále. 1. Připojení na konektor technika Linka 1 Pomocí čtyř vodičů se zásuvkou je propojen modul E062 s konektorem technika Linka 1 (PL3) na desce ústředny. 2. Připojení na svorky Svorky „A“, „B“, „+“, „-“ na svorkovnici JP2 modulu E062 musí být propojeny se svorkami „A1“, „B1“, „+“, „-“ konektoru linky 1 přímo na desce ústředny. Při připojování modulu musí být dodrženy všechny pravidla o vedení sběrnic ústředen Galaxy - popsáno v kapitole Datová sběrnice RS485 (linka AB) na straně 24. Modul E062 má adresu pevně nastavenou na hodnotu 18, takže nesmí být na lince 1 přítomna klávesnice naadresovaná jako 18 (odpovídá nastavení adresovacího přepínače do polohy E). U Galaxy G3 a Dimension se klávesnice s nastavením adresovacího přepínače do polohy „E“ (14) připojená na lince 1 hlásí jako klávesnice 18 ( význam: linka 1, klávesnice 8 ). Poznámka: Při připojení modulu E062 k hostitelskému zařízení musí technik instalující modul zajistit, aby součet odběrů modulu E062 a ostatních zařízení připojených na napájecí zdroj ústředny nepřevýšil povolený výstupní proud napájecího zdroje. 46 --- PAGE BREAK --- Přídavné moduly k ústřednám Modul E062 – telefonní komunikátor Připojení k veřejné telefonní síti Svorkovnice JP7 (TNV port) na modulu E062 (svorky A a B, označené také jako LINE) musí být trvale připojena na telefonní linku prostřednictvím účastnické zásuvky (viz. obrázek 4). Obvody připojené na výše uvedené svorky na desce E062 se považují za obvod TNV (t.j. obvod s napětím telekomunikační sítě ve smyslu normy ČSN EN 60 950). Existují dva způsoby připojení modulu na telefonní linku: +12V - RLY1 JP3 LED1 JP7 TAMPER připojení tel. linky způsob 1 JP2 C D BC A B PHONE LINE sériově zapojené zařízení A B T1 µP JP1 JP6 připojení tel. linky způsob 2 JP4 Obr 25: Deska telefonního komunikátoru E062 Způsob 1 Pro připojení použijte vhodný kabel a připojte linku na svorky A a B LINE svorkovnice JP7. Pozor ! Po kompletním připojení komunikátoru na telefonní linku vždy nasaďte na ústřednu její kryt, aby se předešlo nebezpečí úrazu osob napětím z telekomunikační sítě. Propojení musí být provedeno tak, aby odpovídalo požadavkům článku 4.2 normy ČSN EN 41003 pro obvod telefonní linky (TNV) a článku 2.3 normy ČSN EN 60950 pro obvody napájení modulu (SELV). Způsob 2 Použijte standardní propojovací kabel s konektory RJ45. Jeden konec kabelu zasuňte do zásuvky JP6 na telefonním komunikátoru (označená jako LINE), druhý do účastnické zásuvky telefonní sítě. Připojení sériově zařazeného telefonního přístroje K telefonnímu komunikátoru E062 je možno sériově připojit telefonní přístroj a to na svorky C a D svorkovnice JP7 označené jako PHONE. 47 --- PAGE BREAK --- Modul E062 – telefonní komunikátor Přídavné moduly k ústřednám Antisabotážní kontakt Pokud má být využívána funkce monitorování antisabotážního kontaktu, je třeba tento připojit ke konektoru JP1 (označen jako TAMPER). Modul umožňuje monitorování dvou antisabotážních kontaktů, zapojení viz. Obrázek 3. Po jejich připojení je možno překontrolovat jejich správnou funkci uvedením spínačů do poplachové polohy a opuštěním režimu technika. Při něm jsou hlášeny otevřené antisabotážní kontakty a tak lze zkontrolovat, zda jsou kontakty zapojeny správně a zda jsou monitorovány ústřednou. NC kontakt propojka přední tamper propojka JP1 4321 NC kontakty přední tamper zadní tamper JP1 NC kontakt propojka zadní tamper JP1 JP1 4 32 1 4321 4 321 přední tamper přední i zadní tamper zadní tamper Obr 26: Zapojení tamper kontaktů E062 Kompatibilita Modul E062 je kompatibilní se všemi verzemi programu Galaxy Gold. Modul E062 je kompatibilní se všemi ústřednami Galaxy G3 a Dimension. Telefonní komunikátor osazený softwarovou verzí V2.12 a vyšší rozpoznává tón „British Telecom Answering Service“. Touto funkcí jsou standardně vybaveny všechny verze komunikátoru E062. 48 --- PAGE BREAK --- Přídavné moduly k ústřednám Modul RS232 – E054 (E055) Modul RS232 – E054 (E055) Modul RS232 umožňuje obousměrnou sériovou komunikaci mezi ústřednou Galaxy a PC nebo sériovou tiskárnou. Dodáván je ve dvou variantách. E055 je pouze deska plošného spoje s elektronikou. Je určen pro dočasné připojení při servisu nebo k vestavbě do ústředny případně jiného krytu opatřeného antisabotážním kontaktem. Modul E054 je deska E055 vestavěná v kovovém krytu s otvorem pro přivedení konektoru. Pracovní režim a přenosovou rychlost lze nakonfigurovat pomocí 8 DIP přepínačů. Interface E054 (E055) může plnit tři hlavní funkce: 1. Kopírování a přepis dat naprogramovaných v ústředně. 2. Propojení ústředny s PC (například s programem Galaxy Gold nebo Alarm Monitoring). 3. Emulace převodníku pro připojení sériové tiskárny. Obr 27: Deska modulu RS232 typ E054, E055 Připojení modulu k PC Ústředna může být propojena s PC prostřednictvím modulu RS 232. Tím je umožněn dálkový servis (Galaxy Gold) nebo monitorování (Alarm Monitoring) ústředny z počítače. 49 --- PAGE BREAK --- Modul RS232 – E054 (E055) Přídavné moduly k ústřednám Emulace převodníku pro připojení sériové tiskárny Modul může pracovat v režimu emulujícím interface pro připojení sériové tiskárny. Umožňuje připojit sériovou tiskárnu a nastavit v širokých mezích parametry přenosu. Pro emulaci rozhraní sériové tiskárny je třeba modul nastavit následujícím způsobem: DIP přepínač Funkce Nastavení Přenosová 1 Tiskárna/PC interface ON – Tiskárna rychlost 6 7 8 2 Stop bity OFF – 1 300 OFF OFF OFF 3 Délka slova OFF – 8 600 OFF OFF ON 4 Lichá/Sudá parita na nastavení nezáleží 1 200 OFF ON OFF 5 Parita Zap / Vyp OFF – bez parity 2 400 OFF ON ON 6 Přenosová rychlost 4 800 ON OFF OFF 7 Přenosová rychlost 9 600 ON OFF ON 8 Přenosová rychlost 19 200 ON ON OFF 38 400 ON ON ON stejná jako na tiskárně DIP přepínač Tab 27: Popis konfiguračních přepínačů modulu RS232 Tab 28: Popis konfiguračních přepínačů modulu RS232 Zapojení propojovacích kabelů RS232 V následující tabulce je uvedeno zapojení jednotlivých propojovacích kabelů pro přípojení modulu RS232 k modemu, PC a sériové tiskárně. Modul RS232 PC PC Tiskárna Tiskárna Modem (DTR povoleno) D25 D25 D9 DIN 6 D25 D25 (samice) (samice) (samice) (samec) (samec) (samec) číslo pinu číslo pinu číslo pinu číslo pinu číslo pinu číslo pinu 02 (TxD) 03 (RxD) 02 (RxD) 03 (RxD) 03 (RxD) 02 (TxD) 03 (RxD) 02 (TxD) 03 (TxD) nezapojen nezapojen 03 (RxD) 04 (RTS) 05 (CTS) 08 (CTS) nezapojen nezapojen 20 (DTR) 05 (CTS) 04 (RTS) 07 (RTS) 02 (DTR) 20 (DTR) nezapojen 07 (GND) 07 (GND) 05 (GND) 05 (GND) 07 (GND) 07 (GND) Tab 29: Popis konfiguračních přepínačů modulu RS232 50 --- PAGE BREAK --- Přídavné moduly k ústřednám Modul ISDN (objednávací kódA211) Modul ISDN (objednávací kódA211) Komunikátor ISDN je nový modul, který se připojuje přímo na sběrnici RS485. Umožňuje přenos na PCO a dálkovou obsluhu a servis po linkách ISDN. Modul se instaluje přímo do ústředny stejně jako telefonní komunikátor E062-43. Modul má následující vlastnosti: • plně podporuje všechny funkce jako modul E062-43 • komunikace analogová, digitální nebo X.25 • podpora stávajících formátů DTMF, SIA, Contact ID a Microtech + dva nové protokoly X.25 určené pouze pro speciální přijímače PCO • podpora hardwarového i softwarového obsazení linky • komplexní detekce a hlášení poruch na lince • obousměrná komunikace s využitím B-kanálu a D-kanálu Ústředna podporuje všechny verze ISDN modulu (až do V3). ISDN modul má na lince 1 pevně přidělenou hardwarovou adresu jako C (u Galaxy G3 se hlásí jako klávesnice 16), zprávy o jeho stavu jsou uvozovány hlavičkou KOM 003 (komunikační modul 3). V důsledku zavedení IDSN modulu nelze již na linku 1 připojit klávesnici s hardwarovou adresou 4. Lze ale připojit klávesnici s hardwarovou adresou C. Při konfiguraci si ústředna Galaxy zjišťuje, zda má připojen vylepšený ISDN komunikátor ve verzi V3, která podporuje níže uvedenou strukturu menu ústředny Galaxy nebo zda se jedná o starší verzi ISDN komunikátoru V1.x s omezenou funkčností, která emuluje telefonní komunikátor Galaxy (v ČR nebyla verze V1.x ISDN modulu dodávána). Položky související s programováním ISDN modulu jsou doplněny jako třetí podmenu v hlavním menu 56=KOMUNIKACE (po komunikátoru E062-43 a RS232 modulu E054). Struktura nového menu nejdete v programovacím manuálu Galaxy G3. 51 --- PAGE BREAK --- Modul ETHERNET – E080 Přídavné moduly k ústřednám Modul ETHERNET – E080 Síťový modul Galaxy Ethernet je volitelný prvek k ústřednám EZS řady Galaxy. Je určený pro použití s ústřednami Galaxy 8, 18, 60, 128, 500, 504, 512, Galaxy G3 a Galaxy Dimension. Jedná se o vysoce inteligentní, kompaktní modul, který kombinuje prvky komunikačního zařízení a zařízení pro vzdálenou údržbu. Modul se připojuje k sítím Ethernet (10-Base T) ve kterých komunikuje pomocí TCP/IP protokolu. IP protokol definuje adresování, směrování a práci s datovými bloky přenášenými sítí. TCP protokol zajišťuje, aby nedocházelo ke ztrátám nebo duplikacím dat a aby všechna data vyslaná do sítě byla v poplachovém přijímači přijata v pořádku. Každý síťový modul Ethernet má přidělenu unikátní Ethernet nebo MAC adresu. Síťový modul Ethernet se připojuje k ústředně Galaxy přes komunikační linku RS485 č.1 (AB linka). Pokud je využit jako digitální komunikátor, vysílá síťový modul Ethernet poplachové signály, přičemž používá komunikační formát SIA nebo Microtech (továrně je nastaven formát Microtech). Jako modul pro dálkovou údržbu a servis může být síťový modul Ethernet využit (ve spolupráci s programovým vybavením Galaxy Gold) ke vzdálenému přístupu k ústředně EZS Galaxy přes síť Ethernet. V tomto režimu je možno kopírovat a přepisovat program a provádět on-line údržbu systému. Síťový modul Ethernet je kompatibilní s ústřednami vybavenými softwarovou verzí V4.00 a vyšší. Podrobnosti o programování modulu jsou popsány v programovacím manuálu ke Galaxy, v menu 56.4=ETHERNET. S ústřednami GALAXY v.4.xx byly postupně uvolněny dvě verze ethernet modulu, verze 1.03 a později verze 2.01 B6. Obě verze je možné použít se všemi uvolněnými verzemi Galaxy 4.02, 4.39, 4.50 a Galaxy G3. Dostupnost nových funkcí Ethernet modulu v.2.01 a vyšší je podmíněna použitím Galaxy verze 4.50 a vyšší. Nové funkce modul Ethernet V2.01 pro ústředny Galaxy Síťový modul Ethernet V1 byl zmodernizován, aby ve spojení s Galaxy verze 4.50 nabízel následující funkce: 52 • Signalizace poplachových událostí protokoly UDP a TCP • 128bitové šifrování dat pro signalizaci poplachů a vzdálenou obsluhu • Kompletní supervize nad přenosovou trasou • Podpora primární a sekundární IP adresy pro přenos zpráv • Volba režimu odesílání – přijímač jeden, dva nebo střídavě • Podpora možnosti oddělené signalizace aplikace Alarm Monitoring • Přidána podpora pro zpětné volání aplikace Galaxy Gold z pěti IP adres • Podpora integračního protokolu SIA --- PAGE BREAK --- Přídavné moduly k ústřednám Modul ETHERNET – E080 Připojení k síti Ethernet Síťový modul E080 je určen pro připojení do sítě Ethernet, podporující protokol TCP/IP 10BASE-T Ethernet SKT2 PL2 SKT1 TB1 S LED2 + - A B LINE LED1 Rabbit µP LED3 Obr 28: Připojení modulu k síti Ethernet Síťový modul Ethernet připojte pomocí vhodného kabelu (10-Base T) k počítačové síti. Na straně síťového modulu zasuňte propojovací kabel do zásuvky SKT1 nebo SKT2 (variantně bývá na desce síťového modulu osazena jedna z těchto zásuvek). 53 --- PAGE BREAK --- Přídavné moduly k ústřednám AUDIO systém AUDIO systém Popis Audio systém umožní vytvořit množství audio kanálů provázaných se zabezpečovacím systémem. V případě poplachu je možné pomocí audio kanálů provádět verifikaci poplachové signalizace. Na pult centrální ochrany se přenáší spolu s poplachovým signálem i zvuky z narušené oblasti. Může to být zvuk zaznamenaný v době narušení i živý audio přenos. Lze nastavit i možnost přenášet hovor od operátora PCO do narušeného objektu. Audio modul, připojený do systému Galaxy, umožní vytvoření dvou audio kanálů. Je-li zapotřebí více audio kanálů, může být audio systém rozšířen použitím modulů Mux. Každá poplachová grupa může mít přiřazen jeden audio kanál. Audio modul Audio modul je připojen ke komunikační lince č.1 a k telefonní lince. Pro připojení rozšiřujících modulů Mux má audio modul digitální vysokorychlostní audio sběrnici, která umožňuje připojení až osmi modulů Mux. Na desce audio modulu jsou dva vstupy pro připojení audio terminálů např. TP800. Na každý vstup pro připojení audio terminálů lze připojit až tři terminály (např.TP800). Obr 29: Deska AUDIO modulu Adresace Audio modul má nastavenou pevnou adresu 1 na komunikační lince 1. 54 --- PAGE BREAK --- Přídavné moduly k ústřednám AUDIO systém Montáž Jsou dva způsoby montáže: • Nad deskou ústředny na speciální montážní desku. • Do standardního krytu pro koncentrátor odděleně od ústředny. Připojení telefonní linky Připojení telefonní linky k audio modulu je třeba udělat podle následujícího schématu: Obr 30: Připojení AUDIO modulu k telefonní lince Připojení audio terminálů Ke vstupům audio kanálů lze připojit množství audio terminálů s linkovým výstupem. Mikrofon musí mít předzesilovač s linkovým výstupem (3V špička-špička). Podrobnější návody k nastavení citlivosti jsou v instalačních manuálech použitých audio terminálů. Mohou být použity následující zařízení: • TP800/TP2-800GY : jednotka s mikrofonem a reproduktorem • I215TCE-MIC: PIR detektor s vestavěným mikrofonem • DT7450-MIC: duální detektor s vestavěným mikrofonem Připojení terminálu TP800/TP2-800GY Audio modul TP800/TP2-800GY GND VS – +4,5V VS + CMD CMD Propojit AP a VS – SPK RML pro uzavření sabotážní MIC ECOUT smyčky TMP AP AP Tab 30: Připojení TP800/TP2-800GY do audio modulu 55 --- PAGE BREAK --- Přídavné moduly k ústřednám AUDIO systém Připojení terminálu IS215TCE-MIC/DT7450-MIC Audio modul IS215TCE-MIC/DT7450-MIC GND – 12V + CMD G MIC M Tab 31: Připojení TP800/TP2-800GY do audio modulu Mux modul Připojení Mux modulu umožní vytvoření dalších čtyř audio kanálů. Mux modul se do systému zapojí tak, že sběrnice RS485 audio AUDIO modulu a Mux modulu s propojí. Pro sběrnici RS485 audio platí stejná pravidla jako pro komunikační sběrnici RS485 (kroucený stíněný kabel, propojení svorek GND u všech modulů na sběrnici). Každý vstup pro audio terminály (Audio kanál) může mít připojeny až tři audio terminály jako například TP800. Obr 31: Deska modulu Mux 56 --- PAGE BREAK --- Přídavné moduly k ústřednám AUDIO systém Adresace Mux modul musí mít přidělenou jedinečnou adresu před připojením k napájecímu napětí.Adresa se nastavuje na otočném přepínači SW1 a rozsah platných hodnot je 0-7. Připojení modulu Mux k AUDIO modulu Přropojení Mux modulu a AUDIO modulu je zřejmé z následující tabulky: AUDIO modul Mux modul RS485 audio RS485 audio GND GND Audio A Audio A Audio B Audio B Tab 32: Připojení modulu Mux k AUDIO modulu Programování Jednotlivé audio kanály se programují v menu 56.7 = AUDIO. V tomto menu lze programovat závislost jednotlivých audio kanálů na poplachových grupách a typu poplchové události. Funkce příposlechu Audio systém neustále nahrává všechny audio kanály ve smyčce 10sec. Pokud dojde k události, která aktivuje audio přenos, záznam z příslušného kanálu je přerušen a uložen. Je tedy k dispozici audio záznam v době poplachu a několik sekund před poplachem. Ústředna přenese na pult centrální ochrany (PCO) zprávu o poplachové události, vybere odpovídající audio kanál a zůstane na lince i po ukončení přenosu na PCO. To umožní operátorovi PCO poslech živého audio přenosu z narušeného objektu. Operátor PCO může volit telefonem s volbou DTMF funkce: 1 – hovor do narušeného objektu, 2 – poslech záznamu z doby vzniku poplachu. 3 – poslech „živého“ audia z aktivovaného kanálu, 99 – ukončení audio přenosu. 57 --- PAGE BREAK --- Ovládací moduly SEKCE 5. Klávesnice MK7 Ovládací moduly Klávesnice MK 7 Popis klávesnice MK7 Klávesnice MK7 slouží k ovládání a programování systému Galaxy. Je osazena dvouřádkovým LCD displejem s možností automatického řízení jeho podsvětlení ve čtyřech režimech a vestavěným bzučákem. Zelená LED dioda indikuje stav síťového napájení, výpadek sítě nebo vybitý akumulátor (jednotlivé události jsou indikovány různou střídou blikání). Klávesnice je osazena do elegantního plastového krytu vybaveného odklápěcími dvířky s pravostranným nebo levostranným otevíráním, antisabotážním kontaktem a kontaktem proti sejmutí z montážního povrchu. Z hlediska ovládání jednotlivých podsystémů je klávesnice programově konfigurovatelná. Každá klávesnice má dvě volně programovatelné „horké“ klávesy, které mohou mít přiřazeny po jedné položce z menu. Pokud je povolena, k dispozici je i funkce blokového prohlížení stavu podsystémů bez nutnosti zadávat kód. Klávesnice umožňuje blokové i sekvenční ovládání podsystémů. Ochranný kontakt U klávesnice MK7 je kromě sejmutí krytu signalizováno i odstranění klávesnice z montážního podkladu. Aby byl zadní tamper kontakt funkční, je třeba pomocí samostatného šroubu připevnit plastový výlisek pro aktivaci zadního tamper kontaktu – podrobnosti jsou uvedeny v kapitole Instalace klávesnice MK7. Podsvícení LCD displeje Režim podsvícení displeje u ústředen Galaxy je programovatelný pro každou klávesnici zvlášť. Popis jednotlivých režimů podsvícení displeje je uveden v programovacím manuálu (menu 58=KLAVESNICE). Vstupy a výstupy klávesnice +.................................. 12Vss (připojení k ústředně, klávesnici, nebo posilovacímu zdroji) – .................................. 0V (připojení k ústředně, klávesnici, nebo posilovacímu zdroji) A .................................. svorka A předchozího modulu na komunikační sběrnici B .................................. svorka B předchozího modulu na komunikační sběrnici Připojení klávesnice Klávesnice může být připojena k systému pouze v režimu technika. Z praxe doporučujeme připojovat nové prvky do systému pouze při vypnutém napájení. Linka RS485 (AB) klávesnice musí připojena k lince RS485 (AB) ústředny vždy paralelně, tj. jednotlivé moduly se připojují za sebou (totéž platí i o koncentrátorech a dalších modulech). Klávesnice vyžaduje napájecí napětí 12Vss (výrobcem udávaný rozsah napětí je 10.5vss až 16.0Vss), klidový odběr je 60 mA. Napájení může být přivedeno buď ze zdroje ústředny, nebo i ze vzdáleného posilovacího zdroje (hlavně v případě velkých systémů, kde je výraznější úbytek napětí na vedení). Ve velkých systémech lze s výhodou použít zdroj s vestavěným koncentrátorem Smart PSU. Pozor !: Dolní hranici napájecího napětí 10,5Vss je třeba dodržet za všech okolností a to i v případě provozu na akumulátor, který je částečně vybitý. V praxi by nemělo napájecí napětí na klávesnicích i ostatních prvcích poklesnout při napájení ze sítě pod zhruba 12,5Vss. Tím je zaručeno, že minimální hodnota napájecího napětí 58 --- PAGE BREAK --- Ovládací moduly Klávesnice MK7 klávesnice nepoklesne pod 10,5Vss ani při napájení z akumulátoru, jehož jmenovité napětí je nižší než napětí zdrojů. Adresování klávesnic K nastavení hardwarové adresy klávesnice slouží šestnáctipolohový otočný přepínač. Označení poloh přepínače je v hexadecimální soustavě. Z výroby je adresovací přepínač nastaven na adresu 0. V následující tabulce jsou uvedeny možné hardwarové adresy a jim odpovídající softwarové adresy (pod těmito adresami se klávesnice hlásí v ústředně, například v menu 61=DIAGNOSTIKA). Verze ustř. Linka Dostupné adresy Galaxy GD-48 1 0, 1, 2 Galaxy GD-96 1 2 0, 1, 2 B, C, D, E, F 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 F Galaxy GD-264,520 1 2, 3, 4 0, 1, 2 B, C, D, E, F 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 F B, C, D, E, F Tab 33: Dostupné adresy klávesnic v ústřednách Galaxy Dimension Pokud je použit modul ETHERNET (typ E080), nesmí být na lince 1 osazena klávesnice s hardwarovou adresou B. Pokud je použit modul ISDN (typ A211), nesmí být na lince 1 osazena klávesnice s hardwarovou adresou C. Pokud je použit modul RS232 (typ E054, E055, nebo UNI1INT), nesmí být na lince 1 osazena klávesnice s hardwarovou adresou D. Pokud je použit modul telefonní komunikátor (typ E062-43), nesmí být na lince 1 osazena klávesnice s hardwarovou adresou E. Instalace klávesnice MK7 1. Vyjměte klávesnici z obalu. 2. Aby mohla být klávesnice připevněna na zeď, je nutno nejdříve oddělit zadní část klávesnice od přední části. Proto vložte šroubovák do otvoru ve spodní části klávesnice a jemně s ním otočte. Upozornění: Po oddělení obou polovin klávesnice zajistěte ochranu desky s elektronikou před poškozením statickou elektřinou. 3. Přiložte montážní rámeček klávesnice na zeď a obkreslete na ni montážní otvory pro tři šrouby. Displej se zpravidla umisťuje do výše očí. 4. Pokud je přívodní kabeláž (A, B, +12V, 0V) vedena po povrchu stěny, je možné kabel vést pod zadní stěnou klávesnice v kabelovém kanálu. Pod zadní stěnu lze přivést kabel buď shora nebo zdola. Je pouze třeba vyříznout ostrým nástrojem kraj rámečku v místě výstupu kabelu z kanálu rámečku. U silnějších kabelů odstraňte plášť, aby bylo zajištěno dosednutí montážního rámečku klávesnice na zeď. 5. Ujistěte se, že kabel prochází velkým otvorem v zadní části klávesnice, zadní část klávesnice přitiskněte na zeď a pomocí tří šroubů 1) ∅ 3,5 mm s hlavou typu „pan head“ připevněte zadní část klávesnice na zeď. 59 --- PAGE BREAK --- Ovládací moduly 6. Klávesnice MK7 Je-li požadován zadní tamper kontakt pro monitorování stržení klávesnice z montážního podkladu, je nutno přišroubovat rámeček ke zdi ještě jedním šroubem 1) ∅ 3,5 mm s hlavou typu „pan head“ v místech zadního tamperu, viz.Obr 32. 1) Výrobce doporučuje šrouby s hlavou typu „pan head“, která připomíná půlkulatou hlavu, ale je plošší - viz. obrázek. Důležité je, aby spodní část hlavy byla plochá, jinak může dojít k poškození zadní části krytu klávesnice. 7. Na čtyřpólovou násuvnou svorkovnici připojte komunikační sběrnici ke svorkám A,B a napájecí vodiče. 8. Ujistěte se, že je napájecí napětí vypnuté a nastavte adresu klávesnice v daném rozsahu platných adres na 16-ti polohovém rotačním přepínači na desce plošných spojů. 9. Svorkovnici zasuňte zpět do příslušných kontaktních špiček na desce plošných spojů klávesnice. Klávesnici přiložte horní částí do připevněné zadní části krytu tak, aby dva výstupky na horní hraně klávesnice dosedly do vybrání v krytu a potom mírným tlakem v dolní části zatlačte klávesnici do zadního krytu. Dvířka klávesnice je možno otevírat doleva nebo doprava. Změnu orientace otevírání je možno provést jen při oddělené klávesnici od rámečku. Při pokusu změny orientace otevírání dvířek klávesnice ve zkompletovaném stavu hrozí poškození uchycení dvířek. Obr 32: Instalace klávesnice MK7 Přiřazení klávesnice do systému Při přiřazování klávesnice do existujícího systému musí být brány v úvahu následující body: 1. Nová klávesnice, která je přiřazována do systému, musí mít adresu odlišnou od adres všech ostatních klávesnic systému. 2. Klávesnice musí mít nastavenu platnou adresu. Ne všechny nastavitelné adresy klávesnic jsou ústřednou akceptovány. Platné adresy klávesnic jsou uvedeny v tabulce Tab 33: Dostupné adresy klávesnic v ústřednách Galaxy v sekci Adresování klávesnic. 3. Nainstalujte a zapojte klávesnici podle pokynů uvedených v sekci Instalace klávesnice MK7. Novou klávesnici je možné do systému přiřadit pouze v režimu technika. Při přiřazování nové klávesnice postupujte následujícím způsobem: 60 1. Vstupte do režimu technika. 2. Připojte klávesnici na komunikační sběrnici (svorky A a B). 3. Připojte svorky + a - klávesnice na příslušné svorky napájení. --- PAGE BREAK --- Ovládací moduly Klávesnice MK7 4. Opusťte režim technika (kód technika + esc). Na displeji se zobrazí zpráva 1 PRIDANY MOD esc=POKRACUJ. Stiskněte klávesu esc; na displeji bude zobrazena hlavička odpovídající systému vypnutému ze střežení. Pokud se uvedená zpráva nezobrazí, klávesnice s ústřednou nekomunikuje a nebyla tedy přiřazena do systému. 5. Klávesnice je nyní přiřazena do systému. Odstranění klávesnice ze systému Klávesnici (podobně jako i ostatní moduly) je možné ze systému vyjmout pouze v režimu technika. Při odstranění klávesnice postupujte následujícím způsobem: 1. Vstupte do režimu technika. 2. Odpojte klávesnici ze systému. 3. Opusťte režim technika (kód technika + esc). Na displeji se zobrazí zpráva 1 chybi moduly [<][>] =zobrazit 4. Stiskněte klávesu A nebo B. Na displeji se zobrazí zpráva KLAVESNICE xx [*] = odstranit 5. Stisknutím klávesy * potvrďte záměr vyjmutí klávesnice z konfigurace. 6. Objeví se výstražné hlášení !!! VAROVANI !!! ent=odstran mod. 7. Potrvzením klávesou ent dojde k vymazání modulu z konfigurace. Vestavěná diagnostika Klávesnice firmy Microtech mají vestavěnou testovací rutinu, která se používá pro zjištění správné funkce vstupů a výstupů klávesnice. Testovací rutina se spouští odpojením klávesnice od napájení a následným připojením napájení při stisknuté klávese ent. Po zahájení rutiny je možné klávesu ent uvolnit. Každá část testu trvá asi 4 sekundy. Test se ukončí odpojením klávesnice od napájení. Samotestovací rutina klávesnice 1. Na klávesnici se objeví její typ (MK7) a softwarová verze klávesnice (např. V3.00) 2. Dále se na displeji se objeví adresa klávesnice. 3. Na displeji se zobrazí symbol zvonku a je aktivován bzučák klávesnice. 4. Rozsvítí se zelená LED indikující přítomnost síťového napájení a na displeji se zobrazí symbol střídavého napájení (vlnovka). 5. Na displeji se objeví malá klávesnice a symboly všech kláves. Stisknutí každé klávesy je potvrzeno pípnutím bzučáku a podsvícením symbolu klávesy na displeji. Správnou funkci antisabotážního kontaktu je možné ověřit kdykoliv během testu jeho narušením. Pokud pracuje správně, rozezní se bzučák klávesnice. 61 --- PAGE BREAK --- Ovládací moduly Klávesnice MK7 Technická specifikace Klávesnice je napájena ze zdroje o napětí 12Vss buď z ústředny nebo samostatného napájecího zdroje. Odběry jsou uvedeny v následující tabulce. Parametr MK7 MK7 KeyProx Klidový odběr (bez podsvícení) 35 mA 75 mA S podsvícením 55 mA 95 mA Maximálně 90 mA 130 mA Tab 34: Proudový odběr klávesnice MK7 a KeyProx Obsluha systému z klávesnice Číselné klávesy 0 ... 9 Číselné klávesy se používají pro zadávání identifikačních kódů (PIN), které umožňují identifikaci uživatele ústřednou a přístup uživatele do položek menu. Identifikační kód je čtyřmístné nebo šestimístné číslo. Další použití číselných kláves (po vstoupení do menu) je volba a modifikace položek menu. Klávesy pro prohlížení ►A B◄ Tyto klávesy se používají pro zapínání a vypínání ústředny do nebo ze stavu střežení (využití jako tzv. „horké klávesy“). Toto platí pro ústřednu v továrním naprogramování. Klávesám A a B je možno přiřadit i jiné funkce z menu. Podrobnosti lze nalézt v programovacím manuálu v kapitole popisující programování klávesnic. Stisknutí klávesy A nebo B ihned po zadání platného identifikačního kódu spustí jednu ze zapínacích procedur pro uvedení systému do střežení. Klávesa A spouští plné, klávesa B částečné zapnutí systému do střežení. Pokud uživatel vstoupil do menu, klávesu A je možné rovněž použít pro pohyb mezi jeho jednotlivými položkami menu vpřed, klávesu B pak pro pohyb vzad. Klávesa enter ent Klávesa ent se používá pro: • vstup do položek menu • potvrzení zadaných hodnot při programování Klávesa escape esc Pomocí klávesy esc může uživatel zrušit provedenou změnu aktuální položky menu a vrátit se na předchozí úroveň menu. Několikerým stisknutím této klávesy se uživatel vrátí až ke zobrazení základní hlavičky nebo hlavičky režimu technika. Stisknutím klávesy esc (v průběhu odchodové doby) je také možné přerušit zapínací proceduru. 62 --- PAGE BREAK --- Ovládací moduly Klávesa křížek Klávesnice MK7 # Klávesa # se používá: • jako přepínací klávesa, kterou je možné povolit nebo zakázat programované funkce ústředny Galaxy (např. nastavení atributu vynechání zóny na povoleno nebo zakázáno) • pro zobrazení doplňkových informací k programovaným funkcím (např. stisknutí klávesy # v položce 22=HISTORIE EZS přepne displej do režimu zobrazení podrobností o právě prohlížené události) • pro aktivaci výstupů typu 41=HROZBA (zadejte platný uživatelský kód a stiskněte dvakrát klávesu # - následným stisknutím klávesy ent je spuštěn tísňový poplach) Klávesa hvězdička Klávesa ∗ se používá: * • pro opravování nebo mazání uživatelských kódů v položce menu 42=KODY nebo alfanumerických textových popisů • pro spuštění tisku historie událostí během jejího prohlížení v menu 22=HISTORIE EZS od právě prohlížené události • pro zobrazení stavu podsystémů (zastřeženo, odstřeženo, částečně odstřeženo, časově uzamknuto). Pokud je parametr 58.6=Zobr. stavu gr. nastaven na hodnotu 1=POVOLENO, současným stisknutím kláves * a # (je-li na displeji zobrazena normální hlavička) se vyvolá zobrazení aktuálního stavu grup bez nutnosti vstupovat do menu. Stav grupy je indikován jednopísmennými zkratkami s následujícím významem: Z................................... zapnuto do střežení C .................................. částečně zapnuto do střežení U .................................. grupa je uzamknutá časovým zámkem − ................................... grupa není klávesnici přiřazena P................................... grupa je odstřežená a žádná ze zón není narušená (připraveno k zapnutí) N .................................. grupa je odstřežená a jedna nebo více zón je narušeno (nepřipravena) Funkce zobrazení stavu grup indikuje stav grup bez ohledu na to, zda je systém zapnutý do střežení (displej je prázdný) nebo vypnutý ze střežení (na displeji je zobrazena normální hlavička). V režimu technika není funkce zobrazení stavu grup dostupná. Opětovným současným stisknutím kláves * a # se displej přepne na zobrazení stavu jednotlivých grup a to do formátu, kdy je na displeji stav pouze jedné grupy včetně jejího textového popisu. Pohyb mezi grupami je možný současným stisknutím kláves * a A nebo * a B. Opětovným současným stisknutím kláves * a # se displej přepne zpět na zobrazení normální hlavičky. . 63 --- PAGE BREAK --- Ovládací moduly Klávesnice MK7 Systémová hlavička V době, kdy je systém v klidu (na klávesnici nepracuje žádný z uživatelů) a je vypnutý ze střežení, na displeji je zobrazen vždy standardní text, který se nazývá hlavička. U ústředny Galaxy Dimension existují dvě hlavičky: • hlavička systému vypnutého ze střežení obsahuje typ ústředny Galaxy, softwarovou verzi, čas, den v týdnu a datum. • hlavička režimu technika obsahuje na horním řádku nápis REZIM TECHNIKA a na řádku dolním čas, datum a den v týdnu. Technik může text v horním řádku i dolním řádku displeje změnit. Více v programovacím manuálu sekce 51=Parametry systému. REZIM TECHNIKA 00:17 ST 31 LED Galaxy 520 V6.01 13:36 CT 26 KVE 64 --- PAGE BREAK --- Ovládací moduly Klávesnice MK7 Klávesnice KEYPROX Popis klávesnice KEYPROX Klávesnice KeyProx vychází ze standardní klávesnice typu MK7, navíc má však ve svém krytu vestavěnu bezdotykovou čtečku karet. To umožňuje zapínání a vypínání systému pomocí duálních funkcí (kód + karta) z jednoho místa bez nutnosti mít nainstalovánu samostatnou čtečku v blízkosti klávesnice. Primárně je klávesnice KeyProx určena pro instalace, kde je požadavek na vypínání a zapínání EZS pomocí kódu a karty nebo pouze pomocí karty. Modul není navržen pro řízení vstupu do dveří protože nemá osazeno relé pro ovládání zámku ani další obvody pro monitorování dveří. Pomocí softwarových spojů je ale možné v omezené míře kontrolu vstupu do dveří zajistit. Kompatibilita Klávesnice KeyProx je určena pro nasazení v systémech řady Galaxy Classic, tj. Galaxy 8, 18, 60, 128, 500, 504 a 512 (High Security) osazenými softwarovou verzí V1.18 a vyšší. Klávesnice KeyProx je kompatibilní i se všemi verzemi Galaxy G3 a Galaxy Dimension. Dvě verze čteček (dva objednávají kódy): MK7PROX Klávesnice s vestavěnou čtečkou typu EM jež je schopna číst bezdotykové karty s čipem H4102. Jedná se o stejné typy karet které dokáží číst čtečky GALAMX,MAX3 a MicroMAX. Jelikož čtečka KEYPROX čte čísla karet v nešifrovaném tvaru narozdíl od čteček Galmax, MAX3 a MicroMAX které čísla šifrují není vhodné tyto čtečky sdružovat do jednoho systému. Pokud je nutné tyto čtečky připojit do jednoho systému, je nutné číslo jedné karty zadat do systému na dvě nezávislé pozice ve dvou různých tvarech. Při návrhu systému s modulem KEYPROX a samostatnými čtečkami EM využijte modul MAXM2000. Modul MAXM2000 je možné nastavit do režimu transparentního čtení stejně jako využívá modul KEYPROX. Do systému je potom karta zadána pouze na jednu pozici. Podporované EM čtečky najdete v samostatném manuálu k modulu MAXM2000. MK7PROX HID Klávesnice s duální čtečkou karet EM s čipem H4102 a karet HID. Při návrhu systému s modulem KEYPROX a samostatnými čtečkami HID využijte modul MAXM2000. Modul MAXM2000 je možné nastavit do režimu transparentního čtení stejně jako využívá modul KEYPROX. Podporované HID čtečky najdete v samostatném manuálu k modulu MAXM2000. Instalace klávesnice Keyprox Montáž i zapojení klávesnice je shodná s montáží běžné klávesnice MK7. Pouze je v tomto případě vhodné dodržet zásady montáže čteček. Zejména montážní vzdálenost mezi dvěma samostatnými čtečkami. 65 --- PAGE BREAK --- Ovládací moduly Klávesnice MK7 Konfigurace modulu Před přihlašováním klávesnice KeyProx do systému se ujistěte, že je menu 63.2.1=MAX - Rezim nastaveno na hodnotu 1=POVOLENO Klávesnice KeyProx se ukládá do konfigurace Galaxy jako dva nezávislé moduly: klávesnice a čtečka MAX. Před připojením klávesnice na napájení je třeba otočným přepínačem na stavit její adresu. Tato adresa platí jak pro klávesnici tak i pro čtečku. Nastavená adresa musí být v rozsahu povolených adres klávesnic i čteček pro jednotlivé typy ústředen. Ne všechny adresy jsou povolené pro všechny typy ústředen. Dostupné adresy a počty modulů ukazuje následující tabulka: Vereze ustř. Linka Dostupné adresy Galaxy GD-48 1 0, 1, 2 Galaxy GD-96 1 2 0, 1, 2 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 Galaxy GD264,520 1 2, 3, 4 0, 1, 2 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 Tab 35: Dostupné adresy modulů KeyProx v Galaxy Dimension Po nastavení adresy a připojení klávesnice na napájení musí být modul přihlášen do systému. Uložení modulu do systémové konfigurace proběhne automaticky při vystoupení z režimu technika nebo odpojením napájení a jeho následným připojením. Pokud proběhlo přihlášení modulu v pořádku, systém hlásí přidání dvou modulů klávesnice a čtečky se stejnou adresou. Programování klávesnice KEYPROX Podrobnosti o naprogramování klávesnice naleznete v instalačním a programovacím manuálu ke Galaxy, menu 58=KLAVESNICE. Chování bzučáku se programuje v menu 53=PROGRAM. VYST. Programování karet uživatelů Aby uživatel mohl používat vestavěnou čtečku, musí být číslo karty každého uživatele naprogramováno do ústředny. Toto číslo se zadává pro každého uživatele v menu 42.1.7=MAX-Cis.kart přímo z klávesnice nebo pomocí programu Galaxy Gold. Zadávání může být dále zjednodušeno použitím samoučícího režimu klávesnice KeyProx, který je popsán dále. Aby mohl uživatel zapínat a vypínat systém pomocí karty, je rovněž nutné uživateli v menu 42.1.8=MAX – Funkce přidělit jednu položku z menu (nejčastěji 12=CASOVANE ZAP nebo 16=OKAMZITE ZAP). Podrobnosti jsou uvedeny v manuálu správce nebo instalačním a programovacím manuálu technika. Samoučící režim pro zadávání karet Řada bezdotykových karet nemá na sobě natištěno své číslo (nebo mají natištěnu pouze jeho část), některé typy karet (jako třeba přívěsky ke čtečkám GALMAX) mají na sobě natištěno zakryptované číslo. Aby karta s ústřednou Galaxy fungovala, musí její číslo být zadáno do ústředny. Zadání karet do ústředny ve výše uvedených případech zajišťuje samoučící režim pro zadávání karet, který byl vestavěn do klávesnice KeyProx. Uvedená rutina MUSÍ být použita pro přívěsky ke čtečkám GALMAX nebo MicroMAX). Samoučící režim může být použit pouze v případech, kdy je na klávesnici nalistováno menu pro zadávání uživatelských karet a ústředna je v režimu čekání na zadání karty. Použití samoučcí rutiny v jiných případech může mít za následek nekorektní chování. 66 --- PAGE BREAK --- Ovládací moduly Klávesnice MK7 Postup při zadávání karet 1. Na klávesnici KeyProx vstupte do menu 42.1=Uzivat. kody zvolte uživatele, kterému chcete kartu přidělit. po zvolení uživatele vstupte do podmenu 42.1.7=MAX-Cis.kart. 2. Klávesou B vymažte všechny číslice existující karty (do verze 4.39 továrně přednastaveno deset nul). 3. Současně stiskněte klávesy A a 1, klávesnice se uvede do samoučícího režimu. Vstup do tohoto režimu je akusticky indikován dvojím pípnutím. 4. Do 5 sekund od dvojitého pípnutí přiložte kartu. 5. Na displeji klávesnice se zobrazí načtené číslo karty, načtení je následováno jedním pípnutím. 6. Stiskněte klávesu ENT pro uložení načteného čísla karty. 7. Aby bylo možné načtenou kartou z klávesnice KeyProx zapínat a vypínat systém, musí mít uživatel v menu 42.1.8=MAX - Funkce přiděleno některé ze zapínacích menu (například 12=CASOVANE ZAP). 8. Pokud chcete zadat více karet, celý postup opakujte i pro ostatní uživatele. Pokud není do 5 sekund po zahájení samoučícího režimu zadaná žádná karta, dojde k automatickému ukončení tohoto režimu. Během samoučícího režimu nefungují klávesy na KeyProxu. Provoz a obsluha Klávesnice KeyProx se chová jako dva moduly. Klávesnicová část pracuje jako standardní klávesnice ke Galaxy MK7 a lze ji využit pro zapínání, vypínání, programování a další běžnou obsluhu. Vestavěná čtečka se chová podobně jako samostatná čtečka připojená na sběrnici ústředny Galaxy. Přiložením karty v pravém dolním rohu klávesnice, kde je umístěna čtecí hlava, se do historie průchodů uloží událost „platná karta“. Čtení platné karty může být také využito pomocí softwarových spojů (jako zdroj spoje neslouží ale jednotlivé karty, ale platné čtení na dané čtečce bez rozlišení uživatele). Aby byla vyvolána funkce přidělená kartě uživatele, karta musí být přidržena před čtecí hlavou po dobu alespoň 3 sekund. Přiložení platné karty je indikováno dlouhým pípnutím bzučáku klávesnice. Po třech sekundách se ozve dvojí pípnutí a vyvolá se funkce přidělená kartě. 67 --- PAGE BREAK --- Ovládací moduly Klávesnice MK7 Ovládání systému kombinací kód + karta (dual focus) Uživatel s přidělenou funkcí „dual focus“ musí pro přístup do menu systému zadat svůj kód a současně použít svoji kartu. Funkce se typicky využívá pro bezpečné zapínání a vypínání systému v aplikacích s vysokými riziky. Funkce „dual focus“ se programuje zadáním atributu „#“ u kódu uživatele a přidělením karty rovněž s atributem „#“ témuž uživateli. Držiteli karty je třeba přidělit některé zapínací menu, například 12=CASOVANE ZAP. Aby byl uživatel nyní schopen zapnout systém, musí na klávesnici zadat svůj kód a poté přidržet kartu v místě čtecí hlavy klávesnice alespoň na dobu 3 sekund. Tím je zahájeno zapínání systému nebo vyvolání menu (záleží na naprogramování). Pro vypnutí systému musí uživatel zadat kód a poté přidržet kartu v místě uložení čtecí hlavy v klávesnici. Pokud uživatel nejprve použije kartu a následně zadá svůj kód, vstoupí do menu a budou mu nabídnuty položky v závislosti na jeho úrovni oprávnění. Funkci DUAL ACCESS tedy PIN+karta pro řízení přístupu do dveří není možné použít se čtečkami KeyProx. SW spoj který ovládá RIO výstup - dveřní zámek je aktivní vždy po přiložení platné karty. Funkce Dual Access se na SW spoje nevztahuje. Pokud potřebujete přístup do dveří PIN+karta je nutné použít čtečky MAX3 nebo MAXM2000. Akustická indikace čtení karet Událost Akustická indikace číslo karty registrováno čtečkou krátké pípnutí přečtená karta byla rozpoznána jako platné čtení dlouhé pípnutí vyvolána funkce menu přidělená kartě dvě krátká pípnutí po sobě Naprogramování pro řízení vstupu do dveří Funkce řízení přístupu do dveří může být realizována naprogramováním zón, výstupů a jejich provázáním pomocí softwarových spojů, jak je uvedeno v následujícím příkladě. dveřní kontakt zóna 1011 ovládání zámku – výstup 1011 odchodové tlačítko uvnitř místnosti – zóna 1012 klávesnice KeyProx (adresa 0) Zóna 1011 naprogramovaná jako 05=SECURITY. 68 --- PAGE BREAK --- Ovládací moduly Klávesnice MK7 Zóna 1012 naprogramovaná jako 17=SPOJ. Výstup 1011 naprogramovaný jako typ 51=SPOJ-A, režim IMPULS 5 sekund. Výstup 1012 naprogramovaný jako typ 52=SPOJ-B, režim IMPULS 15 sekund. KeyProx má adresu 00, umístěn na lince 1 (MAX10). Naprogramujte následující spoje: Zdroj Cíl Zobrazení spoje na Funkce spoje displeji kláv. MAX10 typ výstupu SPOJ-A MAX10-SPOJ-A při čtení platné karty aktivuje výstup pro zámek na dobu 5 sekund MAX10 typ výstupu SPOJ-B MAX10-SPOJ-B při čtení platné karty aktivuje výstup pro řízení vynechání dveřního magnetu na 15 sekund výstup 1012 zóna 1011 #1012- 1011 po dobu aktivace výstupu vynechán dveřní kontakt zóna 1012 typ výstupu SPOJ-A 1012-SPOJ-A odchodové tlačítko aktivuje výstup pro zámek na dobu 5 sekund zóna 1012 typ výstupu SPOJ-B 1012-SPOJ-B odchodové tlačítko aktivuje výstup pro řízení vynechání dveřního magnetu na 15 sekund Tab 36: Příklad naprogramování KeyProx pro řízení vstupu do dveří Výše uvedené naprogramování aktivuje při každém přiložení platné karty na čtečce klávesnice KeyProx výstup pro dveřní zámek pod dobu 5 sekund a umožní nechat dveře otevřené na dobu 15 sekund. Zóna 1012 je naprogramována jako odchodové tlačítko, způsob otevření dveří při jejím rozvážení je stejný jako při přiložení platné karty. Při násilném otevření dveří bez použití karty je vyvolán běžný poplach. Vstup do dveří popsaným způsobem se nezapisuje do historie průchodů čtečkami. Do historie průchodů čtečkami (menu 25=HIST.CTECKY) se zapisují pouze průchody dveřmi na čtečkách MAX nebo MicroMAX. Pokud by byl požadován záznam o každém narušení zóny monitorující dveře, je možné naprogramovat zákaznickou zónu s funkčností SECURITY a se záznamem do historie událostí EZS. 69 --- PAGE BREAK --- Ovládací moduly Čtečka bezdotykových karet MAX Grafická klávesnice CP040 Popis Grafická klávesnice Galaxy TouchCenter CP040 se připojuje na komunikační sběrnici RS485 ústředny Galaxy Dimension. Klávesnice TouchCenter přehledným grafickým dotykovým displejem poskytuje uživatelsky příjemné rozhraní pro systém Galaxy Dimension. Instalace klávesnice 1. Sejmeme montážní podložku z klávesnice – tahem směrem dolů. 2. Nastavíme polohu montážní podložky s ohledem na polohu přívodního kabelu čtyřmi šrouby ji upevníme. 3. Přívodní kabel připojíme podle následující tabulky: Ústředna Klávesnice A G B Y GND - +12V + Tab 37: Připojení grafické klávesnice do systému 4. Posuvem montážní podložky a dotažením šroubů provedeme korekci pozice klávesnice. Rychlé klávesy A B Obr 33: Klidový displej grafické klávesnice 70 --- PAGE BREAK --- Ovládací moduly Čtečka bezdotykových karet MAX Konfigurace klávesnice Nastavení adresy Po připojení napájecího napětí a načtení do systému se klávesnice přihlásí pod svou tovární adresou (obvykle 1). Obvykle to bude vyhovovat. Pokud by došlo ke kolizi s již instalovanou klávesnicí, lze změnit adresu klávesnice MK7 a uvolnit pozici pro grafickou klávesnici TouchCenter. Další cestou je nastavit jinou adresu grafické klávesnice, což je možné provést změnou nastavení klávesnice ( viz odstavec „Pokročilé konfigurační menu“ dále v textu). Povolený rozsah adres grafické klávesnice je 0 až 3. Načtení klávesnice do systému Má-li klávesnice nastavenou platnou adresu, která nekoliduje s ostatními klávesnicemi na komunikační lince, je možné ji načíst do do systému. Načtení klávesnice do systému probíhá stejně jako u kteréhokoliv modulu – odchodem z režimu technika nebo odpojením a připojením napájení. Pokročilé konfigurační menu Parametry klávesnice lze konfigurovat kódem technika v menu „TECHNIK“, do kterého je možné se dostat následovnou posloupností úkonů: Tlačítko „OVLADANI“ - kód technika + ent – tlačítko „DALŠÍ VOLBY“ klávesnice se zobrazí následující funkce: • - tlačítko „TECHNIK“. Na displeji Adresa RS485 Umožní změnu adresy klávesnice v rozsahu adres 0 až 3. Po změně adresy je klávesnice restartována a je nutno ji standardním způsobem načíst do systému (opuštěním menu technika). • Nastaveni Umožňuje zapínat a vypínat některé funkace klávesnice – „Zprava“ , „Ovladani“, „MK7“, „Stav nouze“. • Udalosti pro vyrobce Historie změn nastavení klávesnice (reset, změna adresy, atd.). • Menu kontrola vstupu Nastavuje potřebnou úroveň kódů pro přístup k jednotlivým funkcím grafické klávesnice. • Rychle zapnuti Přiřazení funkcí dvěma tlačítkům na pravé straně klidového displeje grafické klávesnice (rychlé klávesy A a B). • Zobrazit systém Zobrazí tabulku s konfigurací systému – obdoba menu 23=SYSTEM ústředny. Zobrazit zony Tlačítko „OVLADANI“ - kód technika + ent – tlačítko „DALŠÍ VOLBY“ - tlačítko „ZOBRAZIT ZONY“. Menu umožňuje zobrazení zón ve skupinách po osmi. Pomocí tlačítek „Dalsi>>“ a „<<Zpet“ lze listovat ve skupinách po osmi. Tlačítka „Grupy „ a „Vse“ umožňují filtraci zón podle grup a stavu zón (otevřené, v poruše, tampery, vynechané, vybité baterie, vše). Historie událostí Zobrazuje události v systému po osmi řádcích. Tlačítka „<Starsi“ , „Vice udalosti„ a „Novejsi>“ umožňují posouvat se k dalším událostem případně zobrazovat další doplňující události. Tlačítka “Všechny grupy“ a „Všechny udalosti“ umožňují filtrovat zobrazené události podle grup a typu událostí. 71 --- PAGE BREAK --- Ovládací moduly Čtečka bezdotykových karet MAX Uživatelé Menu umožňuje zobrazení, přidání, smazání a editaci uživatelů. Aktiví uživatelé jsou zobrazeni po 10-ti a lze měnit něteré ze základních parametrů ( kód, grupy, úroveň kódu, ..). Režim MK Na displeji klávesnice CP040 bude zobrazena plně funkční klávesnice MK (nefungují pouze funkce vyžadující současný stisk dvou kláves – např. zobrazení stavu grup). Nastavení klávesnice Tlačítko „OVLADANI“ - kód technika + ent – tlačítko „DALŠÍ VOLBY“ - tlačítko „NASTAVENI KLAVESNICE“. Umožňuje nastavit jas a kontrast displeje, hlasitost bzučáku podsvětlení a případné vypnutí po určité době nečinnosti. • Vyčistit displej Tato funkce umožní vyčistit displej klávesnice tím, že vypne dotykové ovládání displeje na určitou dobu – při využítí této funkce je zobrazena nápověda podle které je třeba se řídit. • Test klávesnice Funkce testuje displej a akustiku klávesnice. • Softwarová verze Je zobrazena softwarová verze klávesnice a nastavená jazyková sada. • Podsvětlení Doba, po jejímž uplynutí zhasne podsvětlení klávesnice • Hlavní nabídka Doba, po jejímž uplynutí menu klávesnice přejde do základní nabídky ( pokud na klávesnici nikdo nepracuje). Technik Tlačítko „OVLADANI“ - kód technika + ent – tlačítko „DALŠÍ VOLBY“ zpřístupní další funkce grafické klávesnice. - tlačítko „TECHNIK“. Tlačítko Adresa RS485 Menu umoźňuje nastavit adresu klávesnice CP040. Povolený rozsah adres je 0 až 4. Pokud bude adresa klávesnice změněna, je nutno načíst ji znovu do systému na jiné klávesnici. Nastavení Menu umožňuje povolit funkce: • Zprava - pokud je v systému mikrofon, lze nahrát a přehrát akustickou zprávu. • Ovladani - zapíná a vypíná tlačítko umožňující ovládání výstupů. • MK7 - povoluje / zakazuje zobrazení klávesnice MK7 na displeji CP040. • Stav nouze - bude-li povolena tato funkce, zobrazí se v pravém dolním rohu displeje ikona Po stisknutí této ikony a zadání uživatelského kódu budou zobrazena na displeji tlačítka: „TISEN“ , „POZAR“ a „LEKAR“. Stisknutím a přidržením příslušného tlačítka po dobu 2 sec bude generována příslušná nouzová zpráva. Tato zpráva bude předána na pult centrální ochrany („TISEN“ bude tichá). 72 --- PAGE BREAK --- Ovládací moduly Čtečka bezdotykových karet MAX Menu kontrola vstupu Menu umožňuje přiřadit jednotlivým funkcím dosažitelným z klávesnice minimální úrovně kódů, které umožňují vstup do těchto funkcí. Jsou zobrazeny celkem čtyři obrazovky se seznamem funkcí a minimální úrovní kódu. Nastavené minimální úrovně kódů platí pouze pro jednu konkrétní klávesnici a mohou být odlišné od minimálních úrovní kódů nastavených v systému pro klávesnice MK7. Příklad: Pro časované zapnutí/vypnutí systému pomocí klávesnice MK 7 je zapotřebí kód s úrovní 2.2 a vyšší . Na klávesnici CP040 lze nastavit minimální úroveň kódu např. 2.4 a uživatel, který zapíná systém na klávesnici MK7 nemusí mít práva na zapínání na klávesnici CP040. pokud je u dané funkce nastavena úroveň “Kdokoliv“ , lze tuto funkci aktivovat bez zadání kódu. Rychlé zapnutí Menu umožňuje přiřadit vybranou funkci rychlým klávesám „A“ a „B“ (obr.34). Lze přiřadit vybranou fukci nebo vybrat volbu „Nepoužito“, která vymaže tlačítko z displeje klávesnice. Reset klávesnice Funkce spustí proces resetu klávesnice – lze řešit některé nestandardní chování klávesnice. Pokud vložíme do slotu pro SD kartu kartu se soubory pro upgrade firmwaru nebo pro změnu grafického pozadí, spustí se resetem klávesnice proces změny firmwaru nebo grafického pozadí. Během tohoto procesu se na displeji klávesnice zobrazují pokyny pro technika provádějícího upgrade. Pro úspěšný průběh této operace postačí řídit se těmito pokyny. Zobrazit systém Menu zobrazuje formou tabulky základní atributy systému. Odpovídá menu „23=SYSTÉM“ na klávesnici MK7. Menu je dosažitelné i kódem správce. Detailní popis uživatelských funkcí grafické klávesnice Podrobněji jsou uživatelské funkce grafické klávesnice popsány v příručce pro uživatele systému Dimension. Programování ústředny je možné prostřednictvím virtuální klávesnice MK7, pokud je její zobrazení povoleno. Návrat ke klidovému zobrazení displeje je možný stiskem tlačítka „Domů“, které je zobrazeno v levém horním rohu displeje. Technické parametry Mechanické parametry: Šířka Elektrické parametry: 182mm Výška 128mm Hloubka 34mm Váha: asi 500g Napájecí napětí: 10,5 až 14V DC Proudová spotřeba: 105-180mA (záleží na stavu podsvětlení a bzučáku) Doporučení: Při návrhu kabeláže a napájení systému je zapotřebí počítat s odběrem grafické klávesnice, který není nezanedbatelný a v závislosti na provozním režimu může značně kolísat. Je vhodné umístit Grafickou klávesnici poblíž ústředny nebo externího napájecího zdroje, případně posílit napájecí vedení klávesnice. 73 --- PAGE BREAK --- Moduly kontroly vstupu SEKCE 6. Čtečka bezdotykových karet MAX Moduly kontroly vstupu Čtečka bezkontaktních karet MAX³ Čtečku je možné použít k ovládání systému EZS. MAX3 může být nakonfigurována do dvou odlišných režimů. ON-line režim MAX3 dokáže spolupracovat s ústřednami Galaxy 8 – 512, GalaxyG3 i Galaxy Dimension plnohodnotně jako běžný modul. Tzn. připojuje se přímo na sběrnici RS-485. V této konfiguraci je možné čtečku využít současně pro řízení přístupu i pro ovládání systému EZS. Zapojení čtečky Ke čtečkám MAX3 je možné objednat propojovací krabici MAX3 BOX (objednávací kód GALMAX03BOX). Tato krabice slouží ke snadnému připojení čtečky na sběrnici RS485 a připojení periferií (zámek, dv. kontakt. atd.) TAMPER smyčka Připojení ke GALAXY Smyčka tamper Výstupy RELÉ Výstup siréna Přích. tlačítko Odch. tlačítko Přívod RS485 TAMPER napájení ZONE 16 ZONE 15 NC 14 NO 13 COM 12 GND 11 GND 10 HORN 9 DOOR 8 EGR 7 +12V 6 GND 5 A in 4 B in 3 A out 2 B out 1 Obr 34: Zapojení čtečky MAX3 Připojení čtečky MAX3 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 RELE HORN DOOR EGR +12V GND A in B in A out B out fialový šedo-růžový šedý zelený červený černý a hnědý bílý žlutý růžový modrý Pokračování RS485 na další modul JP2 a JP3 JP1 JP3 volba typu čtečky ON / OFF napájení čtečky JP2 26 22 JP1 Přepěťová ochrana je součástí balení čtečky Samostatná čtečka V této konfiguraci je možné čtečky MAX3 použít k řízení přístupu do jedněch dveří NEBO k ovládání systému EZS připojením výstupního relé k dveřnímu zámku nebo k zóně typu keyswitch. Jestliže použijete samostatný režim je nutné naprogramovat přímo do čtečky. Paměť čtečky MAX3 dokáže uchovat 1000 uživatelských karet včetně trojice programovacích Master karet. Karty naprogramované do čtečky zůstávají trvale v paměti i po výpadku napájení až do jejich přepsání jinou kartou či smazání. Pro konfiguraci čtečky do samostatného režimu použijte samostatný manuál dodávaný jako součást balení čtečky. 74 --- PAGE BREAK --- Moduly kontroly vstupu Čtečka bezdotykových karet MAX Čtečky MAX3 jsou v továrním nastavení dodávány v režimu „samostatná čtečka“. Změnu režimu provedete přímo při programování ústředny Galaxy, viz níže. Sběrnice RS-485 Přívodní linku z předchozího modulu či z ústředny připojte na svorky 3 a 4 (A in, B in). Pokud připojujete na linku další modul pokračujte sběrnicí ze svorek 1 a 2 (Aout, Bout). Volba typu čtečky V ČR se prodává pouze varianta MX03 NO (typ čtečky je vyznačen na štítku který naleznete po sejmutí vnějšího krytu čtečky). Pro variantu MX03 NO použijte vždy následující zapojení jumperů. Pokud se setkáte s variantou MX03 NC kontaktujte dodavatele. JP3 JP2 JP1 Dveřní kontakt DOOR Slouží jako poplachový kontakt ovládaných dveří. Poplach je vyhlášen, pokud dojde k otevření dveří bez aktivace dveřního zámku (kartou MAX nebo odchodovým tlačítkem). DOOR Při přihlašování čtečky MAX3 do systému je nutné svorku DOOR propojit na GND. Odchodové tlačítko EGR Slouží k aktivaci dveřního zámku. Umožňuje tedy otevření dveří bez použití karty. Odchodové tlačítko je typu NO. Výstup HORN Je osazen tranzistorovým stupněm s otevřeným kolektorem. Pokud bude třeba zapojit tento výstup použijte následující zapojení. EGR +12V RELE HORN Napájení čtečky a modulu Napájení přiveďte na svorky 5 a 6. Propojkou J1 je možné dočasně odpojit napájení čtečky (bude vysvětleno dále) Přepěťová ochrana Dodávanou přepěťovou ochranu je nutné připojit na svorky 22 a 26 rozvodné krabice. (je zobrazeno na předchozí straně). Smyčka tamper Rozvodná krabice MAX3 BOX je opatřena temper spínačem, který je možné zapojit dvěma způsoby: 5. přivést volnou TAMPER smyčku z libovolného koncentrátoru na svorky 15, 16. Samotný temper spínač krabice ponechte zapojený do svorek 29, 30 (TMP1 a TMP2) 6. pro tamper spínač využít svorky 27, 28 (TMPU1 a TMPU2). V tomto případě dojde po otevření krytu k odpojení napájení čtečky a vyvolání sabotážního poplachu na ústředně. Pokud je zvolena tato varianta je nutné mít v provozu rozpojený jumper J1!!! 75 --- PAGE BREAK --- Moduly kontroly vstupu Čtečka bezdotykových karet MAX Přihlašování čtečky do konfigurace GALAXY – ONLINE režim 1. Připojte čtečku na AB sběrnici ústředny Galaxy. Přitom je třeba dodržet veškeré pokyny pro zapojení prvků na sběrnici (zapojení prvků za sebou bez rozbočování sběrnice, zakončovací rezistor 680Ω, atd.). Připojte čtečku na stejnosměrné napájecí napětí 12V. 2. Přesvědčte se, že je v ústředně povoleno použití čteček MAX (položka menu 69.1=Rezim musí být naprogramována na 1=POVOLENO). 3. Do konfigurace ústředny Galaxy není možné přihlašovat více nenakonfigurovaných čteček současně. Pro rozlišení nenakonfugurovaných čteček při přihlašování použijte propojku J1. U čtečky kterou chcete přihlásit do konfigurace ponechte propojku J1 sepnutou, ostatní čtečky dočasně vypněte rozpojením propojky J1. 4. Nalistujte menu 69.2.2=MAX – Adresa a stiskněte klávesu ent. Ústředna začne prohledávat sběrnice RS485 a hledá čtečku s nejvyšší adresou (která odpovídá nově připojené čtečce). U ústředen Galaxy s více komunikačními linkami se před zahájením prohledávání linek objeví výzva k zadání čísla sběrnice (1 až 2 nebo 1 až 4). Zadejte číslo AB sběrnice a potvrďte klávesou ent. Pouze pro nové (dříve nenakonfigurované) čtečky Po nalezení nově přidané čtečky se na displeji objeví výzva k zadání pracovního režimu, do kterého má být čtečka nastavena. Vyberte 0=On-line a stiskněte klávesu ent. Pokud měníte naprogramování čtečky, která již je v režimu on-line, systém vybere tento režim automaticky. Nyní je možné čtečku MAX přeadresovat. Na klávesnici se zobrazí stávající adresa čtečky a rozsah platných adres. Zadejte novou adresu a stiskněte klávesu ent. Ústředna provede automatické přeprogramování adresy. Na klávesnici jsou přitom zobrazeny stará a nová adresa čtečky a údaje o průběhu programování. Všechny nové čtečky jsou továrně nastaveny na adresu 7. Při adresování se doporučuje čtečku naprogramovat na nejnižší dostupnou adresu na lince. Po ukončení programování pípne bzučák čtečky, zhasnou její LED diody a na klávesnici se objeví menu 2=MAX – Adresa. 5. Nově přihlášené čtečky se v konfiguraci objeví až po vystoupení z režimu technika. Podrobnější programování parametrů čteček najdete v programovacím manuálu Galaxy G3. Konfigurování čtečky pro samostatný provoz 1. Přesvědčte se, že je čtečka připojená na sběrnici RS485 ústředny Galaxy a že má ústředna povolena připojení čteček (viz. menu 69. 1= Rezim). 2. Nastavte na displeji menu 69.2.1=MAX - Adresa a stiskněte klávesu ent. Ústředna začne prohledávat sběrnice RS485 a hledá čtečku s nejvyšší adresou (která odpovídá nově připojené čtečce). U ústředen s několika komunikačními linkami se před zahájením prohledávání linek objeví výzva k zadání čísla sběrnice (1 až 2 nebo 1 až 4). Zadejte číslo AB sběrnice a potvrďte klávesou ent. Po nalezení čtečky se na displeji objeví výzva k zadání pracovního režimu, do kterého má být čtečka nastavena. Vyberte 1=Samostatna a stiskněte klávesu ent. Čtečka bude přeadresována na novou adresu 32. Po ukončení adresování a programování pípne bzučák na čtečce, LED2 na čtečce se rozsvítí a displej klávesnice se vrátí do menu 63.2.2=MAX -Adresa. --- PAGE BREAK --- Moduly kontroly vstupu 3. Pouze pro čtečky MAX sw. verze 1.23 a 1.32: Odpojte čtečku od linky AB. Přitom pozor, aby ostatní moduly jako koncentrátory a klávesnice zůstaly zapojeny stále za sebou. Pokud byla čtečka poslední na lince, odstraňte zakončovací rezistor a zapojte ho do posledního prvku na dané AB sběrnici. 4. Interface MAXM 2000 Ústředna Galaxy nemůže pracovat, pokud má na lince AB připojenu čtečku osazenou softwarovou verzí 1.23 nebo 1.32 naprogramovanou v režimu 1=Samostatná. U vyšších verzí je možné mít čtečku připojenu. Nyní je čtečka MAX v tzv. „sleep“ režimu (LED 2 až 5 svítí) a je možné ji pomocí karet programovat. Programování samostatných čteček je uvedeno ve zvláštním manuálu dodávaném se čtečkou. V ČR nejsou samostatné čtečky MAX zpravidla využívány. Pokud si nejste opravdu jistí, že čtečku chcete naprogramovat do samostatného režimu, tuto funkci neprovádějte !!! Odstranění čtečky MAX ze systému Samostatná čtečka Samostatná čtečka není připojena na AB sběrnici takže ji lze po odpojení od napájení jednoduše demontovat. Není třeba vstupovat do režimu technika. Čtečka v režimu on-line 1. Vstupte do režimu technika. 2. Odpojte čtečku (od napájení i sběrnice AB). 3. Vystupte z režimu technika. Na displeji se objeví 1 chybi moduly [<][>] =zobrazit. 4. Stiskněte klávesu A nebo B. Objeví se hlášení MAX xx [*] = odstranit. 5. Klávesou * potvrďte odstranění nabízené čtečky z konfigurace. Na klávesnici se objeví nápis odpovídající základnímu displeji, který je zobrazen v době, kdy je ústředna mimo střežení. 77 --- PAGE BREAK --- Interface pro připojení čteček jiných výrobců MAXM 2000 Modul MAXM 2000 umožňuje využívat karty různých formátů pro otevírání dveří i ovládání systému Galaxy. Rovněž je možné zajistit kompatibilitu na bázi jedné karty s ostatními systémy jako je například evidence docházky apod. Modul MAXM 2000 je řešen jako jednodeskový komponent velikosti koncentrátoru ústředen Galaxy. Použití ocelového krytu koncentrátoru zajišťuje dobrou mechanickou ochranu při případném napadení a poskytuje dostatek místa pro kabeláž dveřního obvodu, přívody od čteček a kabeláž sběrnice Galaxy. Modul snímá stav dveřního kontaktu, odchodového tlačítka a některé z bezdotykových čteček a posílá je na sběrnici Galaxy ve stejném formátu jako původní čtečka MAX / MicroMAX firmy Ademco-Microtech. Ústředna vyhodnocuje údaje předané modulem a provádí operace podle naprogramovaných parametrů. Vlastnosti MAXM 2000 v.1.52 • Výběr široké škály typů čteček s různým dosahem a krytím pro všechny druhy aplikací • Implementován formát Wiegand 26-bit, 27-bit, 32-bit, 34-bit, 40-bit, ABA • Podporované formáty karet + nabízené čtečky (výrobce) • Motorola Indala: ASR 603, ASR 605, ASR 122, ARK 501, ASR 610 (všechny Motorola Indala) • HID: PROXPOINT PLUS, MINIPROX (všechny HID), OmniProx OP10,OP30,OP40 • MIFARE: iClass R10, MIFARE 13.56Mhz (Motorola Indala) 32b, Engineering) MIFARE čtečka 34b (Integrated • EM: A7, A7PIN • jiné formáty + jiné čtečky: • Příklady kompatibilních čteček a kombinací je uveden v sekci Kompatibility čteček KeyProx, MAX3, MAXM2000 na straně 102. • Dvojitá symetrická struktura (náhrada dvou modulů MAX) • Práce ve dvou režimech – jednoduchý MAX nebo dvojitý MAX (s adresami jdoucími po sobě) • Adresování rotačním adresovacím přepínačem: jednoduchý MAX (adr. 0-7), dvojitý MAX (adr. 8-E) • Dva režimy interpretace čísla karty: FC+ID číslo nebo transparentní čtení • Odpadá nutnost adresace a konfigurace přes menu Galaxy 69=KONTROLA VST. (vyjma parametrů čtečky) • Modul je zabudován v běžném krytu pro koncentrátor – jednotný design prvků • Tamper na desce modulu s možností přemostění propojkou nebo připojení externího tamperu • Plná kompatibilita ve všech menu s původními čtečkami MAX + funkce navíc • Možnost vyvolání menu pro ovládání systému kartou, přívěškem, čipem • Možnost použití kombinace pin + karta (pouze se čtečkou ARK501) • Diagnostická LED dioda pro kontrolu stavu sběrnice a komunikace • Self test režim pro kontrolu všech rozhraní • Diagnostika a upgrade přes ISP konektor přímo u zákazníka • Výstupní relé pro dveřní zámek se dvěma přepínacími kontakty, zatížitelnost 2A pro každou čtečku zvlášť. • Kompatibilní s ústřednami Galaxy Classic vybavenými sw. verzí 1.25 a vyšší, G3 a Dimension • Ochrany vstupů a výstupů proti elektrostatickému výboji, přetížení a přepólování • Napájení pro čtečku lze odebírat z modulu – pouze +12Vss /max. 200mA (napájení jištěno elektronickou pojistkou) 78 --- PAGE BREAK --- Vstupy a výstupy, rozložení hlavních prvků na desce MAXM 2000 Na desce modulu MAXM2000 jsou tři svorkovnice. Dvě svorkovnice označené 1 a 2 jsou vstupně – výstupní rozhraní pro připojení čteček a dveřních obvodů. Svorkovnice jsou symetrické a zapojení svorek se shoduje s původním modulem MAXM. Třetí svorkovnice je plnohodnotná sběrnice Galaxy (A, B, +12V, GND a svorka S (volná). Následuje popis jednotlivých rozhraní: • Rozhraní pro připojení čteček a dveřních obvodů 1 a 2 (rozdělené na tři sekce): připojení výstupního relé (2x relé NO/NC) připojení monitorovacích a ovládacích vstupů CNT: dveřní kontakt typu NC EGR: odchodové tlačítko typu NO BU: tlačítko pro vyvolání menu typu NO připojení čtecí hlavy • Rozhraní pro připojení sběrnice RS485 pro Galaxy Pro připojení MAXM2000 na komunikační sběrnici Galaxy. • Indikační LED diody Slouží k diagnostice stavu sběrnice a střída blikání je shodná s ostatními prvky systému Galaxy. • Propojka JP 1 K přemostění tamper kontaktu při montáži a servisu nebo k připojení externího mikrospínače. • Propojka JP 2 Slouží pro volbu typu čtení transparentní číslo nebo formát FC (facility code) +ID (číslo karty). Transparentní čtení čtení FC + ID • ISP konektor Slouží pro: 1. Upgrade firmware a diagnostiku pomocí PC. 2. Vyřazení funkce 5x neplatná karta Funkce „5x Neplatná karta“ POVOLENA (tovární nastavení) Funkce „5x Neplatná karta“ VYŘAZENA • Adresový přepínač nastavuje adresu modulu (adresa 0 – 7) jednoduchý MAX, adresa 8 – E dvojitý MAX s adresou ADR a ADR+1 79 --- PAGE BREAK --- Připojení modulu MAXM 2000 do systému Doporučené připojení modulu je znázorněno na obrázku. Zapojení dveřního zámku se může lišit podle použitého typu Zdroj pro napájení dveřních zámků 1 2 Dveřní zámek Dveřní zámek Odchodové Armovací tlačítko NO tlačítko NO COM N/C1 N/O1 COM N/C2 N/O2 COM N/C1 N/O1 COM N/C2 N/O2 GND BU CNT GND EGR MG modrá oranž hnědá bílá zelená černá červená Čtečky Motorola Indala D tango, EM, HID, MIFARE, Cottag Armovací Odchodové tlačítko NO tlačítko NO GND BU CNT GND EGR BEEP Lg Lr W1 W0 GND +12V BEEP Lg Lr W1 W0 GND +12V S+ - + - A B Svorkovnice RS485 Napájení modulu S svorka stínění kabelu MG modrá oranž hnědá bílá zelená černá červená W1 W0 GND +12V Při připojení čtečky DALLAS čipů musí být vstup W1 připojen na GND Obr 35: Deska modulu MAXM 2000 Napájení modulu MAXM 2000 a dveřních zámků Z hlediska požadavků na napájení je interface MAXM2000 koncipován stejně jako ostatní systémové moduly a lze ho napájet ze systémových zdrojů. Jiná situace je ale u dveřních zámků, jejichž nesprávné zapojení může přinést řadu problémů. Řiďte se, prosím, následujícími pravidly: 1. Dveřní zámky by měly být napájeny ze SAMOSTATNÉHO zdroje. 2. Protože se chovají jako indukční zátěže při jejichž spínání vznikají napěťové špičky, je třeba paralelně k zámku připojit prvek pro omezení těchto špiček. Často tyto prvky dodává přímo výrobce zámku. Pokud u Vámi použitého zámku nejsou a výrobce se nezmiňuje o vhodném typu, lze použít tlumicí člen S-4 nebo aspoň běžnou usměrňovací závěrně pólovanou diodu – například 1N4007 (max. proud 1A). 3. V žádném případě se nedoporučuje vést napájení pro zámek přímo ze svorek na desce MAXM2000 ! Při spínání dochází ke skokovým změnám napájecího napětí (mění se úbytek na trase 80 --- PAGE BREAK --- v důsledku změn protékajícího proudu). Navíc napěťové špičky vzniklé spínáním zámku mohou nepříznivě ovlivnit činnost MAXM2000 (v extrémních případech může dojít k resetu watchdogu). 4. Pokud není možné napájet zámky ze samostatného zdroje, je třeba vždy „laborovat“. Na základě dobrých znalostí elektrotechniky se většinou řešení najít dá, ale není možné ho standardně předepsat protože závisí na konkrétní konfiguraci, použitých zámcích apod. Vždy je třeba ale nejdříve bezpodmínečně udělat „základní“ opatření jako je použití ochranných diod a teprve potom hledat nestandardní řešení. Připojení modulu MAXM2000 na sběrnici Galaxy Modul se připojuje na sběrnici systému Galaxy stejným způsobem jako ostatní komponenty. Na modulu jsou pro tyto účely k dispozici svorky A, B pro připojení datové kabeláže a svorky + a – pro připojení napájení. Připojení čteček k MAXM 2000 Připojení čteček je znázorněno na obrázku č.1. Lze připojit libovolnou čtečku s rozhraním WIEGAND 26, 27 a 32, 34, 40 bitů (autodetekce výstupního formátu čtečky). Při připojování Dallas čtecího pole musí být vstup W1 spojen s GND. Toto spojení zajistí korektní detekci Dallas protokolu, který je odlišný od protokolu Wiegand. Pozor ! Čtečky připojujte pouze při odpojeném napájení od modulu MAXM 2000. Jinak může dojít k neurčitému stavu na vstupech pro čtení dat ve formátu Wiegand a čtečka nečte přiložené karty (po krátkodobém odpojení napájení od modulu MAXM 2000 se tento stav odstraní). Programování LED diody čtecích hlav Motorola-Indala Přestože v naprosté většině případů není třeba čtecí hlavy Motorola-Indala nijak programovat, může se stát, že bude zapotřebí přeprogramovat funkci indikační LED na čtečce. Programování se provádí pomocí speciální karty s označením ASP-LED CONTROL CARD (1 LINE OR 2 LINE). Kartu lze objednat u firmy OLYMPO controls. Pro zjištění, zda je čtečka správně naprogramována či nikoliv stačí provést následující jednoduchý test: 1. Připojte čtečku přesně dle návodu k interface MAXM. 2. Připojte systém na napájení - na čtečce se rozsvítí LED dioda. 3. Jestližě barva LED diody je červená, čtečka je naprogramovaná pro spolupráci s MAXM 2000 a bude korektně fungovat přesně podle návodu. 4. Je-li barva LED diody zelená, čtečka je nenaprogramovaná a je v režimu jednodrátového ovládání LED diody. Čtečku je nutné přeprogramovat pomocí výše uvedené karty. 5. Přiložte kartu ke čtečce, barva LED se změní ze zelené na červenou. Tím je programování ukončeno. Zapojení ovládacích a monitorovacích vstupů Tlačítko vyvolání menu i odchodové tlačítko musí být typu NO. Kontakt pro monitorování dveří musí být typu NC. Na základě praktických zkušeností se nedoporučuje vedení přívodů k výše uvedeným prvkům ve stejném kabelu jako ovládací napětí pro dveřní zámek. Při spínání zámků s vyšším odběrem může dojít k pronikání rušení do MAXM2000 v důsledku indukce špiček. Zvýšení odolnosti proti rušení a snížení vyzařování Pro zvýšení odolnosti proti vyzařování do vnějšího prostředí a do silně zarušených prostor je třeba osadit na všechny datové a napájecí kabely vedené od jednotky MAXM feritové trubičky které je možné dokoupit. 81 --- PAGE BREAK --- Objednávací kód je RRH160-090-280. Použijte je na sběrnici RS485 (oba kabely do jednoho feritu), napájení 12Vss a přívodní kabely ke čtecím hlavám. Adresování modulu MAXM 2000 Modul je osazen rotačním adresovým přepínačem s rozsahem 0 – F. Nastavení adres je popsáno v tabulce 1. V režimu jednoduchý MAX je vždy aktivní svorkovnice č. 1. V režimu dvojitý MAX je první adresa vždy přiřazena svorkovnici č. 1 a druhá adresa svorkovnici č. 2. Režim jednoduchý MAX Režim dvojitý MAX Adresa na přepínači Adresa modulu Adresa na přepínači Adresa modulu 0 0 8 0+1 1 1 9 1+2 2 2 A 2+3 3 3 B 3+4 4 4 C 4+5 5 5 D 5+6 6 6 E 6+7 7 7 F NEPOUŽÍVAT Tab 38: Adresování modulu MAXM 2000 Přihlášení MAXM2000 do systému Po připojení MAXM2000 a nastavení adresy je možné provést přidání modulu do konfigurace systému. Přihlášení se liší od programování běžných čteček MAXM / Micro MAX !!! MAX / MicroMAX Adresa se čtečkám přiděluje naprogramováním z Galaxy v menu 69.2.2=MAX – Adresa. MAXM2000 stačí pouze připojit modul na sběrnici a provést restart (vystoupit z režimu technika). Modul se automaticky přihlásí do konfigurace (podobně jako například RIO nebo klávesnice). Použití čteček MAX musí být před tím samozřejmě povoleno – menu 69.1= Rezim. Menu 69.2.1=MAX – Adresa vůbec NEPOUŽÍVEJTE!!! Po přihlášení modulu je možné naprogramovat parametry individuálně pro každou čtečku v menu 69.2.2=MAX – Parametry. 82 --- PAGE BREAK --- Programování parametrů čteček Programování parametrů čteček připojených pomocí modulu MAXM 2000 probíhá naprosto shodně jako u původních čteček MAX nebo MicroMAX firmy Microtech. Podrobnosti naleznete v manuálu technika ke Galaxy. Všechny parametry se programují v menu 69.2.2=MAX-Parametry. Speciální funkce MAXM 2000 V zásadě se modul MAXM 2000 programuje a chová jako běžná čtečka MAX. Oproti ní však nabízí řadu dalších funkcí navíc: 1. OCHRANA PROTI OPAKOVANÉMU POUŽITÍ NEPLATNÉ KARTY Aby se zabránilo pokusům o přiložení různých karet v režimu „pouze karta“ nebo pokusům o uhádnutí PINu v režimu PIN + karta, je v modulu MAXM 2000 je zabudována softwarová rutina, která kontroluje platnost použitých karet nebo kombinací PIN + karta. Pokud se na jedné čtečce objeví za sebou 5x neplatná karta nebo kombinace PIN + karta, dojde k vyhlášení poplachu. Počítadlo neplatných pokusů se nuluje při protažení platné karty na stejné čtečce, po vyvolání poplachu nebo po uplynutí jedné hodiny. Funkci je možné vypnout osazením propojky na konektoru ISP rozhraní. Protože čtečky MAX nemají tuto kontrolu vestavěnou, neexistuje v Galaxy hlášení posílané čtečkou MAX, které by indikovalo opakované použití neplatné karty nebo kombinace PIN + karta. Pro signalizaci uvedeného stavu je použita událost POPL. MAX. Ta je za normálních okolností vygenerována při násilném otevření dveří, kdy je otevřen dveřní kontakt bez použití karty nebo odchodového tlačítka. Pro rozlišení obou událostí je v případě poplachu vyvolaného opakovaným použití neplatné karty nebo kombinace PIN + karta hlášení zobrazeno na displeji klávesnic a uloženo do historie událostí 3x. Vyřazení funkce „5x Neplatná karta“ Pokud si přejete funkci vyřadit je nutné osadit propojku na konektor ISP podle obrázku. V továrním nastavení není propojka osazena. Funkce poplach při 5x neplatné kartě vyřazena 2. VOLBA ZPŮSOBU INTERPRETACE ČÍSLA KARTY – TRANSPARENTNÍ / FC + ID Použití jiné karty než výrobcem dodávané pro čtečky MAX musí navazovat na datovou strukturu čísla karty v Galaxy. Karty používané se čtečkami MAX jsou jednoznačně identifikovány pomocí desetimístného čísla, jehož první číslice je vždy nula. Interface MAXM 2000 umožňuje použít jiné čtečky a tedy i jiné karty s různými formáty čísel. Aby bylo možné takovéto karty naprogramovat do Galaxy, je třeba číslo každé karty vždy „převést“ na devítimístné číslo uvozené nulou. Toto platí jak pro případ, kdy je jako číslo použito číslo karty jiného formátu (například Wiegand), tak i pro případ použití kombinace pin + karta. Upozornění ! Čtení formátů s delšími čísly karet může přinášet i určitá omezení v použitých číselných řadách karet. Podrobnosti jsou uvedeny dále v tomto manuálu u jednotlivých typů čteček. V principu se při čtení karty na výstupu čtečky objevuje vždy jedno číslo karty v binárním formátu. Toto číslo bývá různě dlouhé – MAXM 2000 umožňuje číst karty s číslem 26bitů až 40 bitů. Do Galaxy se ale číslo zadává ve tvaru dekadickém. Převod z binárního čísla přečteného z karty do dekadické formy se provádí softwarovou rutinou uvnitř MAXM2000. Podle způsobu převodu existují dva základní režimy: 1. FC+ID: binární číslo přečtené z karty se v MAXM2000 rozdělí na dvě části o předem definované délce. Obě části se převedou do dekadického tvaru. Jedna z nich se nazývá tzv. kód instalace (facility code, zkráceně FC). Druhá část se označuje jako identifikační číslo karty (ID). Z výstupu MAXM200 je potom odesláno do Galaxy jedno dekadické číslo vzniklé složením čísel FC a ID. Zpravidla bývá FC uvedeno na dodacím listě karet a ID je vytištěno přímo na kartě. Tento způsob se využívá např. u karet Motorola Indala. 83 --- PAGE BREAK --- 2. TRANSPARENTNÍ ČTENÍ: binární číslo přečtené z karty se v MAXM2000 převede na číslo dekadické a vyšle se do Galaxy. Číslo karty se ni [... content truncated for display — full manual available from manufacturer ...]
| Model | Zones | Application |
|---|---|---|
| Accenta 8 | 8 zones | Residential |
| Accenta Mini | 6 zones | Small residential |
| Optima 6 | 6 zones | Residential |
| Optima 16 | 16 zones | Residential / small commercial |
| Code Type | Default | Notes |
|---|---|---|
| Engineer Code | 1234 | Full programming access |
| User Code | 1234 | Arm/disarm |
| Zone Type | Description |
|---|---|
| Entry/Exit | Entry route with delay |
| Intruder | Standard alarm zone |
| 24-Hour | Always active |
| PA | Personal attack |
| Fire | Fire detection |
| Tamper | Anti-tamper |
| Code / Display | Description | Likely Cause | Action |
|---|---|---|---|
| Zone Fault | Zone open circuit | Wiring break, device failure | Check wiring and device. |
| Tamper | Tamper activated | Lid removed, cable cut | Inspect device lid. |
| Mains Fail | Mains supply lost | Power cut, blown fuse | Check fuses. |
| Battery Low | Battery below threshold | Battery end of life | Replace battery. |
| Engineer Reset | Engineer reset required | Confirmed alarm | Enter engineer mode and reset. |
| Zone Config | EOL Resistor | Normal | Alarm |
|---|---|---|---|
| EOL | 4k7Ω | 4,700Ω | <500Ω |
| Terminal | Function | Notes |
|---|---|---|
| +12V | Auxiliary power output | 200mA max |
| 0V | Common ground | Must be continuous |
| Z1–Z8 | Zone inputs | EOL resistors required |
| BELL+ | Bell/siren positive | Supervised output |
| BELL− | Bell/siren negative | Via tamper capacitor |
| TIP/RING | PSTN telephone line | For dialler signalling |
=== WEB RESEARCH: accenta ===
# Honeywell Accenta Optima Intruder Alarm Panel - Full Technical Reference
## Product Range and Model Numbers
* **Accenta G3 mini:**
* 8SP399A - Accenta mini panel with remote LCD keypad and communicator outputs
* 8SP400A - Accenta mini panel with remote LED keypad and communicator outputs
* **Accenta Metal Enclosure:**
* 8SP419A - Accenta panel metal enclosure with remote LCD keypad and communicator outputs
* 8SP420A - Accenta panel metal enclosure with remote LED keypad and communicator outputs
* **Optima Compact Panel:**
* 8EP396A - Optima compact panel with built-in LED keypad
* **Accenta Panels:**
* 8SP401A - Accenta panel with remote LED keypad and communicator outputs
* 8SP411A - Accenta panel with remote LCD keypad and communicator outputs
* **Remote Keypads:**
* 8EP417A - Accenta LCD remote keypad
* 8EP416 - Accenta LED remote keypad
* **Other Devices:**
* 8EP276A - Informa
* 8EP289 - Extension speaker
* IS215T - 12 meter PIR
## Features
* 8 zones programmable for Security, 2 zones for Fire.
* PA input.
* Tamper input.
* Outputs for External Siren (Bell) and Strobe.
* 4 Access level Codes: User 1, User 2, Engineer and Duress, all programmable.
* 3 fully selectable part set programs.
* Chime on any security zone.
* 250 event memory (LCD Keypad), 8 event memory (LED keypad).
* Programmable timers including bell cut off.
* Walk Test facilities.
* Quick set feature.
* Supports up to four remote keypads with on board PA and illuminated keys positioned up to 100 meters from the panel.
* Keypads can be wired in a star or daisy chain configuration from the panel.
* Optima is supplied with a built-in keypad.
* Support of Prox set and unset with Simple Set keypad.
* NVM for protection of engineer program and event log.
* 5 digital outputs for a wire-in digital communicator or dialler (Not applicable for Optima compact panel).
* Battery capacity of up to: 2.1Ah in Accenta/Optima mini enclosure, 7Ah in Accenta/Optima metal enclosure.
## Complete Technical Specifications
| Feature | Specification |
| :---------------------------- | :---------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Zones | 8 zones, +ve loop, programmable function in each program |
| Tamper | -ve loop, internal sounders in Day - Full alarm in Set |
| PA | +ve loop, always active |
| External siren (Bell Box) output | 12V, adjustable timer (1 - 99 mins) or continuous |
| Strobe output | 12V latching |
| External speaker | 16 ohm (2 maximum) 260mA each |
| Exit / Entry Timers seconds | Programmable (05 - 990 seconds) |
| Set output | 0V in Day (sinking 400mA), 12V in Set (sourcing 10mA) |
| Current consumption control panel | Standby 80mA, Alarm 250mA |
| Current consumption (LED keypad) | Standby 40mA, Alarm 70mA |
| Current Consumption (LCD keypad) | Standby 40 mA, Alarm 70 mA |
| Low voltage output | 13.8V dc stabilised (+/-5%) up to 350mA |
| Rechargeable battery | Accenta mini/Optima - 12V, up to 2.1Ah. Accenta metal encl. - 12V, up to 7Ah |
| Charge Voltage | 13.8V dc |
| Board fuses | 1.6A & 1A 20mm quick blow |
| Mains input fuse | 125mA, 250V type T (anti-surge) type approved to IEC 127, part 2 sheet 111 |
| Total Current Output | 1A when supported by a fully charged battery |
| Mains supply voltage | 230V (+/-10%) 50Hz max load 0.2A |
| Ambient operating temperature | 0oC to 40oC |
| Dimensions - Accenta mini/Optima | H: 200mm, W: 253mm, D: 55mm |
| Dimensions - Accenta Metal encl. | H: 255mm, W: 300mm, D: 85mm |
| Dimensions - LED keypad | H: 84.5mm, W: 122mm, D: 27.5mm |
| Dimensions - LCD keypad | H: 105mm, W: 135mm, D: 25.5mm |
## Default Codes
* **Default User Code 1:** 0123
* **Default Engineer Code:** 9999
* **User Code 2:** Not programmed by default
* **Duress Code:** Not programmed by default
## Complete Fault/Event/Alarm Code Tables (Event Log Messages)
| KEYPAD TEXT | DESCRIPTION |
| :---------------- | :---------------------------------------------- |
| INTRUDER | Intruder zone activated (opened) |
| ENTRY START | Entry time started |
| ZONE OMITTED | Zone has been omitted for one set period |
| FIRE ZONE | Fire zone activated (opened) |
| ZONE EXCLUDED | Zone has been omitted for one set period |
| CODE ENTRY | User has entered code |
| SET PROGRAM | User has set the system with program 1, 2 or 3 |
| SYSTEM UNSET | User has unset the system |
| CLEAR LOG | Event log has been cleared |
| NVM INIT | Panel was set to factory default conditions |
| START UP | Panel was cold started |
| PA | PA zone activated |
| RKP PA | Remote Keypad PA enabled |
| DURESS CODE | Duress code used to set or unset the system |
| ENTRY TIMEOUT | Timeout alarm after entry time has expired |
| SYSTEM REARM | System rearmed after an alarm |
| CODE TAMPER | Invalid user code was entered |
| USER RESET | User has reset the system |
| ENG'R RESET | Engineer has reset the system |
| ENG ACCESS | Entering engineer program mode |
| ENG FINISH | Leaving engineer program mode |
| OLD TIME | Old time indicated before change |
| NEW TIME | New time indicated after change |
| OLD DATE | Old date indicated before change |
| NEW DATE | New date indicated after change |
| MAINS FAIL | Mains power supply failure |
| MAINS OK | Mains power supply restored |
| LOOP TAMPER | Tamper alarm indicated |
## All Zone Types and their descriptions
* **Security Zones:** 8 zones, programmable function in each program. It is recommended that no more than 10 magnetic contacts are connected to the same zone and that the combined cable length for each zone does not exceed 100 meters.
* **Fire Zones:** Zones 7 and 8 may be programmed as fire zones. This will automatically exclude the availability of the zone from programs and normal security applications. The fire zone detects fires all the time and will operate whether the system is Set or Unset. A fire will cause a distinctive internal sounder tone. The external sounders will pulse on and off at 2 second intervals and all RKP indicators will flash the affected zone.
* **PA Circuit:** It is recommended that no more than 10 normally closed type personal attack button may be wired in series and then connected to the PA circuit. Operational in Unset and Set, the PA circuit will cause a full alarm condition when activated. PA is indicated on the control panel or RKP.
* **Timed Zones:** Used to protect the main entry/exit door of the entry route.
* **Inhibit Zones:** A zone which, on setting the panel, allows access to the entry/exit zone. However, if the panel is set and a time inhibited zone is triggered before an entry/exit timed zone then an alarm will be generated immediately.
* **Immediate (Intruder) Zone:** A zone which will, when enabled as used and then activated, go into alarm when the panel is set. To assign a zone as immediate, remove the timed or timed inhibit function and make sure that it is enabled in the Used Zones section.
* **Double Knock Zones:** Requires two activations within 10 minutes of the same zone or a zone left open for 10 seconds. Not advisable for magnetic door contacts or Fire Zones.
* **Omit Allow Zones:** Allows the zone to be omitted for one set period by the user when setting the system.
### Zone Name Library (Appendix 2)
* Kitchen
* Landing
* Living Room
* Lounge
* Patio
* Porch
* Stairs
* Study
* Utility Room
* Window 1
* Window 2
* Window 3
* Attic
* Back Door
* Basement
* Bathroom
* Bedroom 1
* Bedroom 2
* Bedroom 3
* Conservatory
* Dining Room
* Fire Zone
* Front Door
* Garage
* Hall
## Complete Wiring Diagrams and Terminal Descriptions
### PCB Fuses
There are four fuses mounted on the circuit board, all are 20mm anti-surge.
* **F1:** 1.6A - to protect the positive (+Ve) line of 12V battery
* **F2:** 1A - to protect the Speaker 13V supply
* **F3:** 1A - to protect the Siren (Bell) & Strobe supply
* **F4:** 1A - to protect the RKP 13V supply
As supplied, wire links are fitted across the PA and Tamper terminals to represent a closed circuit.
### Tamper Network
The Tamper circuit is used to protect all cables and detectors in the system from unauthorised access including the panel and RKP covers. The zone and PA tampers should be series wired and connected to the TAMP terminals. Terminals T and A are for the external siren tamper. The TAMP terminals at the bottom left of the board are for the RKP tampers. Tamper alarms that occur in the Day mode operate internal sounders only. Tamper alarms in Set cause a full alarm condition. Tamper is indicated on the control panel and RKPs.
### Connecting Remote Keypads
Up to four remote Accenta LCD or LED keypads can be connected to the panel. Keypads can be wired in a star or daisy chain configuration from the panel.
* **LED Keypad Wiring (Figure 5):**
* Panel Board: +13V, 0V, Sound, Tamp, Tamp, Comms
* Keypad PCB: +13V, 0V, Sound, Tamp, Tamp, Comms
* **LCD Keypad Wiring (Figure 6):**
* Panel Board: +13V, 0V, Sound, Tamp, Tamp, Comms
* Keypad PCB: +13V, 0V, Sound, Tamp, Tamp, Comms
### Security Zone Wiring (Figure 7)
* Connect detectors to Zone terminals. End-of-line resistors (EOL) are typically used.
### Fire Zone Wiring (Figure 8)
* Connect fire detectors to Zone 7 or 8 terminals.
### PA Circuit Wiring (Figure 9)
* Connect panic buttons in series to the PA terminals.
### Extension Speaker Wiring (Figure 10)
* Up to two 16 ohm extension speakers may be wired across the speaker terminals.
### External Siren (Bell Box) Output Wiring (Figure 11 - Single, Figure 12 - Twin)
* Terminals TADB are for connection to the external siren.
* **T:** Negative (-Ve) tamper return
* **A:** Negative (-Ve) supply (0V)
* **D:** Positive (+Ve) supply (12V)
* **B:** Negative (-Ve) Sounder trigger
* For ease of installation, the Optima/Accenta control panels and Reson8 external sirens and modules use the same markings.
* Where a discrete external siren is used, it should be connected to terminals D and B. Terminals T and A are then used for tamper protection for the housing.
### Remote Signalling Input and Outputs (Figure 13 - Panel Communicator)
* **NOTE:** These outputs are not applicable to the Optima compact panel.
* **13V 0V:** These terminals provide a 13V supply for the communicator up to a total load of 200mA.
* **OUTPUTS (J3):** These outputs are programmed as active low output. They are held at 13V and fall to 0V when active, it can source or sink 10mA.
* **FIRE:** The fire output operates when the fire zone is triggered.
* **PA:** The PA output operates when a PA alarm is triggered or a duress code is used.
* **INT:** The intruder output is operated when an intruder condition is triggered whilst the system is set.
* **SET:** The Set output operates whenever the system becomes set and is used to indicate opening and closing.
* **ABORT:** Operates if the panel is unset within 90 seconds of the alarm condition starting. It is cleared when the panel is reset by the user or engineer.
### Mains Connection (Figure 14)
* The mains power should be connected using 3-core cable of not less than 1 mm sq. from a fused spur to the mains connector inside the control panel. The 2 A fused spur must be located close to the control panel.
* **CAUTION:** To avoid the risk of electrical shock you must always totally isolate the mains supply before opening the control panel cover(s).
* Mains Input fuse rating: 125 mA, 250 V type T (anti-surge) and of a type approved to IEC 127 part 2 sheet III.
## Full Programming Menu Structure
**Engineer Program Mode:** Access by pressing [PROG][9][9][9][9]. To exit, press [RESET].
| MENU OPTION | DESCRIPTION |
| :-------------------------- | :---------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **0 = Walk Test** | Allows each detector to be checked. A tone is generated as each zone is activated. |
| **1 = Alarm Test** | Tests the alarm function of the Bell, Strobe or Sounder. |
| **2 = Test Outputs** | Tests specific outputs: 1 = Bell, 2 = Strobe, 3 = Sounder, 4 = Fire, 5 = PA, 6 = Intruder, 7 = Set, 8 = Abort. |
| **3 = Set Up System Flags** | Configures system behavior. Divided into Flag 1, 2, and 3. |
| **4 = Set Up Time and Date**| Allows modification of Time (HH:MM:SS) and Date (DD-MM-YY). |
| **6 = Set Up Zone Names** | Allows each of the eight zones to be given a name from the library (Appendix 2). |
| **7 = Set Up Timers** | Configures Bell Time, Bell Delay, and Rearm Count. |
| **8 = Set Up Codes** | Allows changing User 1, User 2, Duress, and Engineer codes. |
| **C = View Event Log** | Displays a log of all events (up to 250 for LCD, 8 for LED). |
| **O = Omit Allow & Double Knock** | Configures Double Knock and Omit Allow settings for zones. |
| **P = Set Up Programs** | Configures the three setting routines (programs) for zones, entry/exit times, and exit modes. |
### Detailed Menu Options
#### 3 = Set Up System Flags
**Flag 1 - Options:**
* **1 = Silent PA:** When ON, operating PA causes a silent PA alarm.
* **2 = RKP PA:** When ON, keypad PA buttons are enabled.
* **3 = Engineer Reset:** When ON, an engineer code is required to reset after Tamper, PA, or Fire alarm.
* **4 = PA User Reset:** When ON, permits user to reset after PA alarm by pressing [RESET].
* **5 = Fire User Reset:** When ON, permits user to reset after Fire alarm by pressing [RESET].
* **6 = Bells in Fire:** When ON, external siren sounds two seconds On/two second Off during fire alarm.
* **7 = Zone 7 Fire:** When ON, permits zone 7 to be used as a Fire zone.
* **8 = Zone 8 Fire:** When ON, permits zone 8 to be used as a Fire zone.
**Flag 2 - Options:**
* **1 = Single Key Set:** When ON, panel can be set by pressing [SET] button without a code. A 4-digit code is still required to Unset.
* **2 = Strobe on Set:** When ON, external strobe stays on for five seconds after panel sets.
**Flag 3:** Shows the Software Version of the panel.
#### 7 = Set Up Timers
* **71 = Set Up Bell Time:** Duration external bell output is active. Range: 01-99 minutes. Default: 15 minutes.
* **72 = Set Up Bell Delay:** Delays activation of the Bell. Range: 00-99 minutes. Default: 00 minutes. Delays bell for one rearm period only.
* **73 = Set Up Rearm Count:** Number of times the panel will rearm after an alarm. Default: 3 rearms.
* 0 = no rearms
* 1-8 = number of rearms
* 9 = always rearm
#### 8 = Set Up Codes
Four 4-digit codes (0000 to 9999):
* **User 1 Code:** Can add, change, or delete User 2 and Duress codes.
* **User 2 Code:** Operates testing, Setting, and Unsetting.
* **Duress Code:** Generates a silent PA type alarm (communicator output) while allowing normal system operation. Not applicable for Optima compact system.
* **Engineer Code:** Accesses Engineer program mode. Will not set or unset the system. Can be used to reset the system after a tamper, PA, or fire alarm if configured.
#### C = View Event Log
* **LCD Keypad:** Stores up to 250 events (FILO - First In Last Out). Events are arranged by date and time.
* **LED Keypad:** Limited to show the last eight set periods. Zone, PA, and Tamper indicators show zones in alarm. Flashing LED indicates the first zone in alarm. Day indicates panel status at the time of alarm.
#### O = Omit Allow and Double Knock
* **1 = Double Knock:** Requires two activations within 10 minutes of the same zone or a zone left open for 10 seconds. Not advisable for magnetic door contacts or Fire Zones.
* **2 = Omit Allow:** When a zone is programmed as Omit Allow, the panel allows the zone to be omitted for one set period by the user when setting the system.
#### P = Set Up Programs
Three setting routines (programs), each with a different Exit Mode. Zones can have different functions in different programs.
* **1 = Used Zones:** Zones can be programmed as Used or Unused. Unused zones are still available for chime or fire. Unused zones are primarily for Part Set options. Program 1 must always have at least one used zone (zone 1 is automatically set to used if none are selected).
* **2 = Timed Zones:** A zone programmed as Timed would be used to protect the main entry/exit door of the entry route.
* **3 = Inhibit Zones:** A zone which, on setting the panel, allows access to the entry/exit zone. If the panel is set and a time inhibited zone is triggered before an entry/exit timed zone, an alarm will be generated immediately.
* **4 = Entry Time:** Time allowed to enter premises and unset. Range: 00-99 seconds (multiplied by 10). Default: 30 seconds.
* **5 = Exit Time:** Time allowed to leave premises before system sets. Range: 00-99 seconds (multiplied by 10). Default: 30 seconds.
* **6 = Exit Mode:** Determines panel function during exit time.
* **0 = Disabled:** Program is not available for use. Program 1 cannot be disabled.
* **1 = Timed:** Program becomes Set as Exit timer expires.
* **2 = Final Door:** Set five seconds after a timed zone is closed if other zones are clear. Requires a timed zone.
* **3 = Silent Timed:** Operates same as Timed but silently.
## Commissioning Steps
1. Check that the factory fitted links are connected to terminals PA, TAMP and T-A.
2. Fit the battery wires to the battery terminals (BATT).
3. On connecting the battery, the system will go into an alarm condition with an audible alarm indication.
4. After entry of a valid user code, there is a Tamper indication.
5. Fit the cover to hold down the tamper spring at the bottom centre of the board.
6. Enter the user code (0123 default). The alarm condition will cease and the system will go into day mode.
7. Immediately enter the engineer code by pressing [PROG][9][9][9][9]. The system is now in Engineer program mode and can be programmed.
## Common Fault Diagnosis
* **Codes:** Default user code is 0123, engineer code is 9999. Both can revert to default settings (see Defaulting Panel to Factory Settings and Defaulting User Code 1 and Engineer Code).
* **Engineer Mode:** Accessed directly from Day mode via the engineer code.
* **Tamper/PA/Fire Faults:** If present, system goes to a lock out condition (showing appropriate indication). Keypad produces audible responses. Engineer can access and rectify. Panel remains in lockout until fault rectified.
* **Zone Wiring:** Recommended one detector per zone for event log accuracy. If multiple detectors, alarm outputs must be wired in series. All detector tamper outputs wired in series to TAMP terminal.
* **Zone Faults:** Permanent zone fault with correct loop resistance often indicates a short circuit between zone and tamper wiring. Series resistance between zone and tamper wiring should be infinitely high. If fault persists, panel can be set to factory defaults.
* **Fuses:** Before testing or replacing, ALL power must be removed. Continually failing fuses indicate a short circuit or low resistance across the 13V supply or external siren (bell box) supply (terminal D).
## Compliance Standards Met
* IEC 127 part 2 sheet III (for mains input fuse)
## Other Technical Details
### Installation Design
* Plan position of each part of the alarm system and cable runs. Detectors should be sited with regard to coverage.
* Accenta panel may be concealed inside a cupboard or loft space, but must be installed within protected premises and convenient for mains supply.
* Optima panel may be installed near an entry/exit point.
* Remote Keypads (RKPs) should be mounted for ease of operation, typically within entry/exit route close to final door and master bedroom.
* Additional internal sound speakers are recommended for high volume alarm tones and low volume entry/exit tones.
* Total current output of control system (in alarm condition) is 1A when supported by a fully charged battery. Calculate total including panel, remote keypads, external siren with strobe light (bell box) and detectors to ensure rating is not exceeded.
* Local Authority and Police notification may be required by law depending on area.
### PCB
* Wire links are fitted across the PA and Tamper terminals as supplied to represent a closed circuit.
### Remote Signalling Important Notes
1. Each output is configured as active low.
2. If communicator is externally powered, panel and external power supply require a common negative supply rail.
3. If communicator is not fitted inside the panel and abort is used, ensure abort connection cannot be damaged or severed to prevent incorrect ARC filtering.
4. Communicating systems must be fully tested and all signals correctly received at the ARC during installation and servicing.
### Filtering of Intruder Alarms
Methods to filter alarms:
* **Set/Unset:** A Set or Unset signal received by the ARC around the same time as an intruder signal can filter the alarm.
* **Abort Output:** Operates when a user code is entered to switch off an intruder alarm. If an abort signal is received by ARC around the same time as an intruder signal, the alarm can be filtered.
* **Restore of the Intruder Output:** Intruder alarm output is restored to 12V when a user code is entered to switch off an intruder alarm. If an intruder alarm is shortly followed by a restore at the ARC, this can filter the alarm.
### Defaulting Panel to Factory Settings
1. Power down panel.
2. Remove wiring from SET output and PA input.
3. Fit shorting wire between SET and left-hand PA terminal.
4. Power up.
5. Wait for alarm to start.
6. Power down panel and then restore original wiring.
### Defaulting User Code 1 and Engineer Code
1. Power down panel.
2. Remove wiring from SET output and TAMP input (next to PA).
3. Fit shorting wire between SET and left-hand TAMP terminal.
4. Power up.
5. Wait for alarm to start.
6. Power down panel and then restore original wiring.
### Operating the System
* **Setting the System:** Enter 4-digit code (0123 default). Exit tone sounds, becomes rapid in last 10 seconds, then stops when system sets. Day LED goes OFF. LCD shows "** SYSTEM SET **".
* **Unsetting the System:** Enter premises (entry tone sounds). Enter 4-digit code (0123 default). System unsets with double beep. Day LED comes ON. LCD shows "** SYSTEM UNSET **".
* **Resetting After an Alarm, Tamper or PA:**
* **User Reset:** Enter valid user code, press [RESET]. System resets and goes to day mode.
* **Engineer Reset:** If Engineer Reset flag is enabled, user code will display "Engineer Restore Required". Enter engineer code (9999 default). System resets to day mode.
### Activ8 QP (PIR Motion Detector) - Peripheral Device
* **Product Description:** Uses a specially designed optical lens with a unique Quad element PIR sensor and new ASIC based electronics optimized to eliminate false alarms caused by pets or small animals. With PET IMMUNITY up to 25Kg. Provides unprecedented levels of immunity against visible light.
* **Features:**
* Quad Linear Imaging Technology for sharp analysis of body dimensions and differentiation from background and animals.
* New ASIC based electronics.
* Immunity to animals up to 25kg (55 lbs).
* 15m (49.2 ft) Detection Range with Wide Angle Lens.
* Temperature compensation.
* Compact Design for Residential Installation.
* Variable pulse width adjustment.
* Sensitivity adjustment.
* Environmental immunity.
* Height installation calibration free (1.8m – 2.4m).
* LED Remote function.
* **Mounting Locations:** Choose a location most likely to intercept an intruder. Performs best in a constant and stable environment. Avoid direct sunlight, areas subject to rapid temperature changes, and areas with air ducts or substantial air flows.
* **Installation:**
1. Remove front cover (unscrew holding screw).
2. Remove PC board (unscrew holding screw).
3. Break out desired knockout holes for wire entry.
4. Mount detector base to wall, corner or ceiling.
5. Reinstall PC board, connect wire to terminal block.
6. Replace cover.
* **Terminal Block Connections:**
* **Terminals 1 & 2 - TAMPER:** Connect to a 24-hour normally closed protective zone. If cover opened, immediate alarm.
* **Terminals 3 & 4 - RELAY:** Output relay contacts. Connect to a normally closed zone in the control panel.
* **Terminal 5 - EOL:** End of line option.
* **Terminal 6 - + (+12V):** Connect to positive Voltage output of 8.2 -16Vdc source.
* **Terminal 7 - - (GND):** Connect to negative Voltage output or ground of the control panel.
* **Setting-Up the Detector:**
* **Pulse Width Jumper Setting:** For stable environment (without air drafts, without pets) or harsh environment (with air drafts, with pets).
* **LED Enable Jumper Setting:** LED ON or LED OFF.
* **PIR Sensitivity Adjustment:** Potentiometer adjusts detection range between 68% and 100% (factory set to 84%). Clockwise increases, counter-clockwise decreases.
* **Pet Immunity Jumper Setting:** Immunity to animal up to 15 kg or 25 kg.
* **Testing (Walk Test):**
1. Remove front cover. Pulse jumper in position 1. LED enabled.
2. Replace front cover.
3. Walk slowly across detection zone.
4. Observe detector’s LED lights when motion is detected.
5. Allow 5 sec between each test for stabilization.
6. After walk test, LED may be disabled.
* **NOTE:** Walk tests should be conducted at least once a year.
* **Wire Size Requirements:** Use #22 AWG (0.5 mm) or larger. Table provided for wire length vs. diameter/gauge.
* **Technical Specification (Activ8 QP):**
* **Model:** 35508AE50 Activ8 QP
* **Detection Method:** Quad element PIR
* **Power Input:** 7.8 to 16 VDC
* **Current Draw:** Standby: 8mA (± 5%), Active: 10mA (± 5%)
* **Temperature Compensation:** YES
* **Pulse Width:** Adjustable
* **Alarm Period:** 2 sec (± 0.5sec)
* **Alarm Output:** N.C 28VDC 0.1 A with 27Ohm series protection resistor
* **Tamper Switch:** N.C 28VDC 0.1A with 10 Ohm series protection resistor - open when cover is removed
* **Warm Up Period:** 60sec (± 5sec)
* **LED Indicator:** LED is ON during alarm
* **Operating Temperature:** -20°C to +60°C (-4°F to +140°F)
* **RFI Protection:** 30V/m 10 - 1000MHz
* **EMI Protection:** 50,000V of electrical interference from lightning or power through
* **Dimensions:** 90mm x 59mm x 37mm (3.54’’ x 2.32’’ x 1.46’’)
* **Weight:** 40gr (1.4oz)
=== WEB RESEARCH: optima ===
# Honeywell Accenta Optima Intruder Alarm Panel - Full Technical Reference
## Product Range and Model Numbers
* **Accenta G3 mini:**
* 8SP399A - Accenta mini panel with remote LCD keypad and communicator outputs
* 8SP400A - Accenta mini panel with remote LED keypad and communicator outputs
* **Accenta Metal Enclosure:**
* 8SP419A - Accenta panel metal enclosure with remote LCD keypad and communicator outputs
* 8SP420A - Accenta panel metal enclosure with remote LED keypad and communicator outputs
* **Optima Compact Panel:**
* 8EP396A - Optima compact panel with built-in LED keypad
* **Accenta Panels:**
* 8SP401A - Accenta panel with remote LED keypad and communicator outputs
* 8SP411A - Accenta panel with remote LCD keypad and communicator outputs
* **Remote Keypads:**
* 8EP417A - Accenta LCD remote keypad
* 8EP416 - Accenta LED remote keypad
* **Other Devices:**
* 8EP276A - Informa
* 8EP289 - Extension speaker
* IS215T - 12 meter PIR
## Features
* 8 zones programmable for Security, 2 zones for Fire.
* PA input.
* Tamper input.
* Outputs for External Siren (Bell) and Strobe.
* 4 Access level Codes: User 1, User 2, Engineer and Duress, all programmable.
* 3 fully selectable part set programs.
* Chime on any security zone.
* 250 event memory (LCD Keypad), 8 event memory (LED keypad).
* Programmable timers including bell cut off.
* Walk Test facilities.
* Quick set feature.
* Supports up to four remote keypads with on board PA and illuminated keys positioned up to 100 meters from the panel.
* Keypads can be wired in a star or daisy chain configuration from the panel.
* Optima is supplied with a built-in keypad.
* Support of Prox set and unset with Simple Set keypad.
* NVM for protection of engineer program and event log.
* 5 digital outputs for a wire-in digital communicator or dialler (Not applicable for Optima compact panel).
* Battery capacity of up to: 2.1Ah in Accenta/Optima mini enclosure, 7Ah in Accenta/Optima metal enclosure.
## Complete Technical Specifications
| Feature | Specification |
| :---------------------------- | :---------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Zones | 8 zones, +ve loop, programmable function in each program |
| Tamper | -ve loop, internal sounders in Day - Full alarm in Set |
| PA | +ve loop, always active |
| External siren (Bell Box) output | 12V, adjustable timer (1 - 99 mins) or continuous |
| Strobe output | 12V latching |
| External speaker | 16 ohm (2 maximum) 260mA each |
| Exit / Entry Timers seconds | Programmable (05 - 990 seconds) |
| Set output | 0V in Day (sinking 400mA), 12V in Set (sourcing 10mA) |
| Current consumption control panel | Standby 80mA, Alarm 250mA |
| Current consumption (LED keypad) | Standby 40mA, Alarm 70mA |
| Current Consumption (LCD keypad) | Standby 40 mA, Alarm 70 mA |
| Low voltage output | 13.8V dc stabilised (+/-5%) up to 350mA |
| Rechargeable battery | Accenta mini/Optima - 12V, up to 2.1Ah. Accenta metal encl. - 12V, up to 7Ah |
| Charge Voltage | 13.8V dc |
| Board fuses | 1.6A & 1A 20mm quick blow |
| Mains input fuse | 125mA, 250V type T (anti-surge) type approved to IEC 127, part 2 sheet 111 |
| Total Current Output | 1A when supported by a fully charged battery |
| Mains supply voltage | 230V (+/-10%) 50Hz max load 0.2A |
| Ambient operating temperature | 0oC to 40oC |
| Dimensions - Accenta mini/Optima | H: 200mm, W: 253mm, D: 55mm |
| Dimensions - Accenta Metal encl. | H: 255mm, W: 300mm, D: 85mm |
| Dimensions - LED keypad | H: 84.5mm, W: 122mm, D: 27.5mm |
| Dimensions - LCD keypad | H: 105mm, W: 135mm, D: 25.5mm |
## Default Codes
* **Default User Code 1:** 0123
* **Default Engineer Code:** 9999
* **User Code 2:** Not programmed by default
* **Duress Code:** Not programmed by default
## Complete Fault/Event/Alarm Code Tables (Event Log Messages)
| KEYPAD TEXT | DESCRIPTION |
| :---------------- | :---------------------------------------------- |
| INTRUDER | Intruder zone activated (opened) |
| ENTRY START | Entry time started |
| ZONE OMITTED | Zone has been omitted for one set period |
| FIRE ZONE | Fire zone activated (opened) |
| ZONE EXCLUDED | Zone has been omitted for one set period |
| CODE ENTRY | User has entered code |
| SET PROGRAM | User has set the system with program 1, 2 or 3 |
| SYSTEM UNSET | User has unset the system |
| CLEAR LOG | Event log has been cleared |
| NVM INIT | Panel was set to factory default conditions |
| START UP | Panel was cold started |
| PA | PA zone activated |
| RKP PA | Remote Keypad PA enabled |
| DURESS CODE | Duress code used to set or unset the system |
| ENTRY TIMEOUT | Timeout alarm after entry time has expired |
| SYSTEM REARM | System rearmed after an alarm |
| CODE TAMPER | Invalid user code was entered |
| USER RESET | User has reset the system |
| ENG'R RESET | Engineer has reset the system |
| ENG ACCESS | Entering engineer program mode |
| ENG FINISH | Leaving engineer program mode |
| OLD TIME | Old time indicated before change |
| NEW TIME | New time indicated after change |
| OLD DATE | Old date indicated before change |
| NEW DATE | New date indicated after change |
| MAINS FAIL | Mains power supply failure |
| MAINS OK | Mains power supply restored |
| LOOP TAMPER | Tamper alarm indicated |
## All Zone Types and their descriptions
* **Security Zones:** 8 zones, programmable function in each program. It is recommended that no more than 10 magnetic contacts are connected to the same zone and that the combined cable length for each zone does not exceed 100 meters.
* **Fire Zones:** Zones 7 and 8 may be programmed as fire zones. This will automatically exclude the availability of the zone from programs and normal security applications. The fire zone detects fires all the time and will operate whether the system is Set or Unset. A fire will cause a distinctive internal sounder tone. The external sounders will pulse on and off at 2 second intervals and all RKP indicators will flash the affected zone.
* **PA Circuit:** It is recommended that no more than 10 normally closed type personal attack button may be wired in series and then connected to the PA circuit. Operational in Unset and Set, the PA circuit will cause a full alarm condition when activated. PA is indicated on the control panel or RKP.
* **Timed Zones:** Used to protect the main entry/exit door of the entry route.
* **Inhibit Zones:** A zone which, on setting the panel, allows access to the entry/exit zone. However, if the panel is set and a time inhibited zone is triggered before an entry/exit timed zone then an alarm will be generated immediately.
* **Immediate (Intruder) Zone:** A zone which will, when enabled as used and then activated, go into alarm when the panel is set. To assign a zone as immediate, remove the timed or timed inhibit function and make sure that it is enabled in the Used Zones section.
* **Double Knock Zones:** Requires two activations within 10 minutes of the same zone or a zone left open for 10 seconds. Not advisable for magnetic door contacts or Fire Zones.
* **Omit Allow Zones:** Allows the zone to be omitted for one set period by the user when setting the system.
### Zone Name Library (Appendix 2)
* Kitchen
* Landing
* Living Room
* Lounge
* Patio
* Porch
* Stairs
* Study
* Utility Room
* Window 1
* Window 2
* Window 3
* Attic
* Back Door
* Basement
* Bathroom
* Bedroom 1
* Bedroom 2
* Bedroom 3
* Conservatory
* Dining Room
* Fire Zone
* Front Door
* Garage
* Hall
## Complete Wiring Diagrams and Terminal Descriptions
### PCB Fuses
There are four fuses mounted on the circuit board, all are 20mm anti-surge.
* **F1:** 1.6A - to protect the positive (+Ve) line of 12V battery
* **F2:** 1A - to protect the Speaker 13V supply
* **F3:** 1A - to protect the Siren (Bell) & Strobe supply
* **F4:** 1A - to protect the RKP 13V supply
As supplied, wire links are fitted across the PA and Tamper terminals to represent a closed circuit.
### Tamper Network
The Tamper circuit is used to protect all cables and detectors in the system from unauthorised access including the panel and RKP covers. The zone and PA tampers should be series wired and connected to the TAMP terminals. Terminals T and A are for the external siren tamper. The TAMP terminals at the bottom left of the board are for the RKP tampers. Tamper alarms that occur in the Day mode operate internal sounders only. Tamper alarms in Set cause a full alarm condition. Tamper is indicated on the control panel and RKPs.
### Connecting Remote Keypads
Up to four remote Accenta LCD or LED keypads can be connected to the panel. Keypads can be wired in a star or daisy chain configuration from the panel.
* **LED Keypad Wiring (Figure 5):**
* Panel Board: +13V, 0V, Sound, Tamp, Tamp, Comms
* Keypad PCB: +13V, 0V, Sound, Tamp, Tamp, Comms
* **LCD Keypad Wiring (Figure 6):**
* Panel Board: +13V, 0V, Sound, Tamp, Tamp, Comms
* Keypad PCB: +13V, 0V, Sound, Tamp, Tamp, Comms
### Security Zone Wiring (Figure 7)
* Connect detectors to Zone terminals. End-of-line resistors (EOL) are typically used.
### Fire Zone Wiring (Figure 8)
* Connect fire detectors to Zone 7 or 8 terminals.
### PA Circuit Wiring (Figure 9)
* Connect panic buttons in series to the PA terminals.
### Extension Speaker Wiring (Figure 10)
* Up to two 16 ohm extension speakers may be wired across the speaker terminals.
### External Siren (Bell Box) Output Wiring (Figure 11 - Single, Figure 12 - Twin)
* Terminals TADB are for connection to the external siren.
* **T:** Negative (-Ve) tamper return
* **A:** Negative (-Ve) supply (0V)
* **D:** Positive (+Ve) supply (12V)
* **B:** Negative (-Ve) Sounder trigger
* For ease of installation, the Optima/Accenta control panels and Reson8 external sirens and modules use the same markings.
* Where a discrete external siren is used, it should be connected to terminals D and B. Terminals T and A are then used for tamper protection for the housing.
### Remote Signalling Input and Outputs (Figure 13 - Panel Communicator)
* **NOTE:** These outputs are not applicable to the Optima compact panel.
* **13V 0V:** These terminals provide a 13V supply for the communicator up to a total load of 200mA.
* **OUTPUTS (J3):** These outputs are programmed as active low output. They are held at 13V and fall to 0V when active, it can source or sink 10mA.
* **FIRE:** The fire output operates when the fire zone is triggered.
* **PA:** The PA output operates when a PA alarm is triggered or a duress code is used.
* **INT:** The intruder output is operated when an intruder condition is triggered whilst the system is set.
* **SET:** The Set output operates whenever the system becomes set and is used to indicate opening and closing.
* **ABORT:** Operates if the panel is unset within 90 seconds of the alarm condition starting. It is cleared when the panel is reset by the user or engineer.
### Mains Connection (Figure 14)
* The mains power should be connected using 3-core cable of not less than 1 mm sq. from a fused spur to the mains connector inside the control panel. The 2 A fused spur must be located close to the control panel.
* **CAUTION:** To avoid the risk of electrical shock you must always totally isolate the mains supply before opening the control panel cover(s).
* Mains Input fuse rating: 125 mA, 250 V type T (anti-surge) and of a type approved to IEC 127 part 2 sheet III.
## Full Programming Menu Structure
**Engineer Program Mode:** Access by pressing [PROG][9][9][9][9]. To exit, press [RESET].
| MENU OPTION | DESCRIPTION |
| :-------------------------- | :---------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **0 = Walk Test** | Allows each detector to be checked. A tone is generated as each zone is activated. |
| **1 = Alarm Test** | Tests the alarm function of the Bell, Strobe or Sounder. |
| **2 = Test Outputs** | Tests specific outputs: 1 = Bell, 2 = Strobe, 3 = Sounder, 4 = Fire, 5 = PA, 6 = Intruder, 7 = Set, 8 = Abort. |
| **3 = Set Up System Flags** | Configures system behavior. Divided into Flag 1, 2, and 3. |
| **4 = Set Up Time and Date**| Allows modification of Time (HH:MM:SS) and Date (DD-MM-YY). |
| **6 = Set Up Zone Names** | Allows each of the eight zones to be given a name from the library (Appendix 2). |
| **7 = Set Up Timers** | Configures Bell Time, Bell Delay, and Rearm Count. |
| **8 = Set Up Codes** | Allows changing User 1, User 2, Duress, and Engineer codes. |
| **C = View Event Log** | Displays a log of all events (up to 250 for LCD, 8 for LED). |
| **O = Omit Allow & Double Knock** | Configures Double Knock and Omit Allow settings for zones. |
| **P = Set Up Programs** | Configures the three setting routines (programs) for zones, entry/exit times, and exit modes. |
### Detailed Menu Options
#### 3 = Set Up System Flags
**Flag 1 - Options:**
* **1 = Silent PA:** When ON, operating PA causes a silent PA alarm.
* **2 = RKP PA:** When ON, keypad PA buttons are enabled.
* **3 = Engineer Reset:** When ON, an engineer code is required to reset after Tamper, PA, or Fire alarm.
* **4 = PA User Reset:** When ON, permits user to reset after PA alarm by pressing [RESET].
* **5 = Fire User Reset:** When ON, permits user to reset after Fire alarm by pressing [RESET].
* **6 = Bells in Fire:** When ON, external siren sounds two seconds On/two second Off during fire alarm.
* **7 = Zone 7 Fire:** When ON, permits zone 7 to be used as a Fire zone.
* **8 = Zone 8 Fire:** When ON, permits zone 8 to be used as a Fire zone.
**Flag 2 - Options:**
* **1 = Single Key Set:** When ON, panel can be set by pressing [SET] button without a code. A 4-digit code is still required to Unset.
* **2 = Strobe on Set:** When ON, external strobe stays on for five seconds after panel sets.
**Flag 3:** Shows the Software Version of the panel.
#### 7 = Set Up Timers
* **71 = Set Up Bell Time:** Duration external bell output is active. Range: 01-99 minutes. Default: 15 minutes.
* **72 = Set Up Bell Delay:** Delays activation of the Bell. Range: 00-99 minutes. Default: 00 minutes. Delays bell for one rearm period only.
* **73 = Set Up Rearm Count:** Number of times the panel will rearm after an alarm. Default: 3 rearms.
* 0 = no rearms
* 1-8 = number of rearms
* 9 = always rearm
#### 8 = Set Up Codes
Four 4-digit codes (0000 to 9999):
* **User 1 Code:** Can add, change, or delete User 2 and Duress codes.
* **User 2 Code:** Operates testing, Setting, and Unsetting.
* **Duress Code:** Generates a silent PA type alarm (communicator output) while allowing normal system operation. Not applicable for Optima compact system.
* **Engineer Code:** Accesses Engineer program mode. Will not set or unset the system. Can be used to reset the system after a tamper, PA, or fire alarm if configured.
#### C = View Event Log
* **LCD Keypad:** Stores up to 250 events (FILO - First In Last Out). Events are arranged by date and time.
* **LED Keypad:** Limited to show the last eight set periods. Zone, PA, and Tamper indicators show zones in alarm. Flashing LED indicates the first zone in alarm. Day indicates panel status at the time of alarm.
#### O = Omit Allow and Double Knock
* **1 = Double Knock:** Requires two activations within 10 minutes of the same zone or a zone left open for 10 seconds. Not advisable for magnetic door contacts or Fire Zones.
* **2 = Omit Allow:** When a zone is programmed as Omit Allow, the panel allows the zone to be omitted for one set period by the user when setting the system.
#### P = Set Up Programs
Three setting routines (programs), each with a different Exit Mode. Zones can have different functions in different programs.
* **1 = Used Zones:** Zones can be programmed as Used or Unused. Unused zones are still available for chime or fire. Unused zones are primarily for Part Set options. Program 1 must always have at least one used zone (zone 1 is automatically set to used if none are selected).
* **2 = Timed Zones:** A zone programmed as Timed would be used to protect the main entry/exit door of the entry route.
* **3 = Inhibit Zones:** A zone which, on setting the panel, allows access to the entry/exit zone. If the panel is set and a time inhibited zone is triggered before an entry/exit timed zone, an alarm will be generated immediately.
* **4 = Entry Time:** Time allowed to enter premises and unset. Range: 00-99 seconds (multiplied by 10). Default: 30 seconds.
* **5 = Exit Time:** Time allowed to leave premises before system sets. Range: 00-99 seconds (multiplied by 10). Default: 30 seconds.
* **6 = Exit Mode:** Determines panel function during exit time.
* **0 = Disabled:** Program is not available for use. Program 1 cannot be disabled.
* **1 = Timed:** Program becomes Set as Exit timer expires.
* **2 = Final Door:** Set five seconds after a timed zone is closed if other zones are clear. Requires a timed zone.
* **3 = Silent Timed:** Operates same as Timed but silently.
## Commissioning Steps
1. Check that the factory fitted links are connected to terminals PA, TAMP and T-A.
2. Fit the battery wires to the battery terminals (BATT).
3. On connecting the battery, the system will go into an alarm condition with an audible alarm indication.
4. After entry of a valid user code, there is a Tamper indication.
5. Fit the cover to hold down the tamper spring at the bottom centre of the board.
6. Enter the user code (0123 default). The alarm condition will cease and the system will go into day mode.
7. Immediately enter the engineer code by pressing [PROG][9][9][9][9]. The system is now in Engineer program mode and can be programmed.
## Common Fault Diagnosis
* **Codes:** Default user code is 0123, engineer code is 9999. Both can revert to default settings (see Defaulting Panel to Factory Settings and Defaulting User Code 1 and Engineer Code).
* **Engineer Mode:** Accessed directly from Day mode via the engineer code.
* **Tamper/PA/Fire Faults:** If present, system goes to a lock out condition (showing appropriate indication). Keypad produces audible responses. Engineer can access and rectify. Panel remains in lockout until fault rectified.
* **Zone Wiring:** Recommended one detector per zone for event log accuracy. If multiple detectors, alarm outputs must be wired in series. All detector tamper outputs wired in series to TAMP terminal.
* **Zone Faults:** Permanent zone fault with correct loop resistance often indicates a short circuit between zone and tamper wiring. Series resistance between zone and tamper wiring should be infinitely high. If fault persists, panel can be set to factory defaults.
* **Fuses:** Before testing or replacing, ALL power must be removed. Continually failing fuses indicate a short circuit or low resistance across the 13V supply or external siren (bell box) supply (terminal D).
## Compliance Standards Met
* IEC 127 part 2 sheet III (for mains input fuse)
## Other Technical Details
### Installation Design
* Plan position of each part of the alarm system and cable runs. Detectors should be sited with regard to coverage.
* Accenta panel may be concealed inside a cupboard or loft space, but must be installed within protected premises and convenient for mains supply.
* Optima panel may be installed near an entry/exit point.
* Remote Keypads (RKPs) should be mounted for ease of operation, typically within entry/exit route close to final door and master bedroom.
* Additional internal sound speakers are recommended for high volume alarm tones and low volume entry/exit tones.
* Total current output of control system (in alarm condition) is 1A when supported by a fully charged battery. Calculate total including panel, remote keypads, external siren with strobe light (bell box) and detectors to ensure rating is not exceeded.
* Local Authority and Police notification may be required by law depending on area.
### PCB
* Wire links are fitted across the PA and Tamper terminals as supplied to represent a closed circuit.
### Remote Signalling Important Notes
1. Each output is configured as active low.
2. If communicator is externally powered, panel and external power supply require a common negative supply rail.
3. If communicator is not fitted inside the panel and abort is used, ensure abort connection cannot be damaged or severed to prevent incorrect ARC filtering.
4. Communicating systems must be fully tested and all signals correctly received at the ARC during installation and servicing.
### Filtering of Intruder Alarms
Methods to filter alarms:
* **Set/Unset:** A Set or Unset signal received by the ARC around the same time as an intruder signal can filter the alarm.
* **Abort Output:** Operates when a user code is entered to switch off an intruder alarm. If an abort signal is received by ARC around the same time as an intruder signal, the alarm can be filtered.
* **Restore of the Intruder Output:** Intruder alarm output is restored to 12V when a user code is entered to switch off an intruder alarm. If an intruder alarm is shortly followed by a restore at the ARC, this can filter the alarm.
### Defaulting Panel to Factory Settings
1. Power down panel.
2. Remove wiring from SET output and PA input.
3. Fit shorting wire between SET and left-hand PA terminal.
4. Power up.
5. Wait for alarm to start.
6. Power down panel and then restore original wiring.
### Defaulting User Code 1 and Engineer Code
1. Power down panel.
2. Remove wiring from SET output and TAMP input (next to PA).
3. Fit shorting wire between SET and left-hand TAMP terminal.
4. Power up.
5. Wait for alarm to start.
6. Power down panel and then restore original wiring.
### Operating the System
* **Setting the System:** Enter 4-digit code (0123 default). Exit tone sounds, becomes rapid in last 10 seconds, then stops when system sets. Day LED goes OFF. LCD shows "** SYSTEM SET **".
* **Unsetting the System:** Enter premises (entry tone sounds). Enter 4-digit code (0123 default). System unsets with double beep. Day LED comes ON. LCD shows "** SYSTEM UNSET **".
* **Resetting After an Alarm, Tamper or PA:**
* **User Reset:** Enter valid user code, press [RESET]. System resets and goes to day mode.
* **Engineer Reset:** If Engineer Reset flag is enabled, user code will display "Engineer Restore Required". Enter engineer code (9999 default). System resets to day mode.
### Activ8 QP (PIR Motion Detector) - Peripheral Device
* **Product Description:** Uses a specially designed optical lens with a unique Quad element PIR sensor and new ASIC based electronics optimized to eliminate false alarms caused by pets or small animals. With PET IMMUNITY up to 25Kg. Provides unprecedented levels of immunity against visible light.
* **Features:**
* Quad Linear Imaging Technology for sharp analysis of body dimensions and differentiation from background and animals.
* New ASIC based electronics.
* Immunity to animals up to 25kg (55 lbs).
* 15m (49.2 ft) Detection Range with Wide Angle Lens.
* Temperature compensation.
* Compact Design for Residential Installation.
* Variable pulse width adjustment.
* Sensitivity adjustment.
* Environmental immunity.
* Height installation calibration free (1.8m – 2.4m).
* LED Remote function.
* **Mounting Locations:** Choose a location most likely to intercept an intruder. Performs best in a constant and stable environment. Avoid direct sunlight, areas subject to rapid temperature changes, and areas with air ducts or substantial air flows.
* **Installation:**
1. Remove front cover (unscrew holding screw).
2. Remove PC board (unscrew holding screw).
3. Break out desired knockout holes for wire entry.
4. Mount detector base to wall, corner or ceiling.
5. Reinstall PC board, connect wire to terminal block.
6. Replace cover.
* **Terminal Block Connections:**
* **Terminals 1 & 2 - TAMPER:** Connect to a 24-hour normally closed protective zone. If cover opened, immediate alarm.
* **Terminals 3 & 4 - RELAY:** Output relay contacts. Connect to a normally closed zone in the control panel.
* **Terminal 5 - EOL:** End of line option.
* **Terminal 6 - + (+12V):** Connect to positive Voltage output of 8.2 -16Vdc source.
* **Terminal 7 - - (GND):** Connect to negative Voltage output or ground of the control panel.
* **Setting-Up the Detector:**
* **Pulse Width Jumper Setting:** For stable environment (without air drafts, without pets) or harsh environment (with air drafts, with pets).
* **LED Enable Jumper Setting:** LED ON or LED OFF.
* **PIR Sensitivity Adjustment:** Potentiometer adjusts detection range between 68% and 100% (factory set to 84%). Clockwise increases, counter-clockwise decreases.
* **Pet Immunity Jumper Setting:** Immunity to animal up to 15 kg or 25 kg.
* **Testing (Walk Test):**
1. Remove front cover. Pulse jumper in position 1. LED enabled.
2. Replace front cover.
3. Walk slowly across detection zone.
4. Observe detector’s LED lights when motion is detected.
5. Allow 5 sec between each test for stabilization.
6. After walk test, LED may be disabled.
* **NOTE:** Walk tests should be conducted at least once a year.
* **Wire Size Requirements:** Use #22 AWG (0.5 mm) or larger. Table provided for wire length vs. diameter/gauge.
* **Technical Specification (Activ8 QP):**
* **Model:** 35508AE50 Activ8 QP
* **Detection Method:** Quad element PIR
* **Power Input:** 7.8 to 16 VDC
* **Current Draw:** Standby: 8mA (± 5%), Active: 10mA (± 5%)
* **Temperature Compensation:** YES
* **Pulse Width:** Adjustable
* **Alarm Period:** 2 sec (± 0.5sec)
* **Alarm Output:** N.C 28VDC 0.1 A with 27Ohm series protection resistor
* **Tamper Switch:** N.C 28VDC 0.1A with 10 Ohm series protection resistor - open when cover is removed
* **Warm Up Period:** 60sec (± 5sec)
* **LED Indicator:** LED is ON during alarm
* **Operating Temperature:** -20°C to +60°C (-4°F to +140°F)
* **RFI Protection:** 30V/m 10 - 1000MHz
* **EMI Protection:** 50,000V of electrical interference from lightning or power through
* **Dimensions:** 90mm x 59mm x 37mm (3.54’’ x 2.32’’ x 1.46’’)
* **Weight:** 40gr (1.4oz)
| Fault Indication | Cause | Corrective Action |
|---|---|---|
| LED: Red Solid | Alarm condition — intruder detected in detection zone | Investigate detection area; clear alarm via relay reset or software |
| LED: Red Flashing | Tamper alarm — cover removed or detector dismounted | Refit detector cover securely; check mounting |
| LED: Orange Flashing | Fault condition — laser scan error or internal fault | Check for obstructions in scan path; restart detector; contact Optex if fault persists |
| No Output | Power supply failure or wiring fault | Check power supply voltage (12–24V DC); check relay output wiring |
| Excessive False Alarms | Target size filter set too small; vegetation movement; rain/snow | Increase minimum target size in REDSCAN Manager; adjust detection zone boundaries to exclude moving vegetation |
| RS-232 No Data | RS-232 connection fault or software configuration error | Check RS-232 cable; verify baud rate settings in REDSCAN Manager (default: 9600 baud) |
| Terminal | Function | Notes |
|---|---|---|
| +V / GND | Power supply input | 12–24V DC or 24V AC; polarity-insensitive for AC |
| OUT1 C/NO/NC | Relay output 1 (Zone 1 alarm) | Form C; max 30V DC / 0.5A |
| OUT2 C/NO/NC | Relay output 2 (Zone 2 alarm) | Form C; max 30V DC / 0.5A |
| OUT3 C/NO/NC | Relay output 3 (Zone 3 alarm or tamper) | Form C; max 30V DC / 0.5A; configurable as tamper output |
| RS-232 TX/RX/GND | Serial data output for CCTV integration and configuration | 9600 baud default; connect to PC for REDSCAN Manager configuration |
| Parameter | Value |
|---|---|
| Detection Range | 30m (RLS-3060) |
| Detection Angle | 60° horizontal |
| Laser Class | Class 1 (IEC 60825-1) — eye-safe |
| Scan Rate | 25 scans/second |
| Detection Zones | Up to 3 configurable zones |
| Relay Outputs | 3 × Form C (NO/NC/C) |
| Power Supply | 12–24V DC or 24V AC |
| Current Consumption | Max 250mA at 12V DC |
| IP Rating | IP54 |
| Operating Temperature | -25°C to +50°C |
| Dimensions | 85 × 85 × 100mm |
| Standards | EN 50131-2-7-1 Grade 3; EN 50131-1 |
| Trouble | Cause | Corrective Action |
|---|---|---|
| AC FAILURE | Mains power supply lost | Check mains supply and transformer; panel runs on battery backup |
| BATTERY FAILURE | Backup battery low, missing, or faulty | Check battery connections; replace if over 4 years old or voltage below threshold |
| ZONE FAULT | Zone open circuit, short, or tamper | Check detector wiring and EOL resistor; verify zone type programming |
| MODULE FAULT | Combus expansion module not communicating | Check Combus wiring; verify module address; check module power |
| BELL FAILURE | Bell/siren circuit fault | Check siren wiring and connections; verify siren is not faulty |
| TLM FAILURE | Telephone line monitoring failure | Check telephone line connection; verify TLM is enabled in programming |
| CLOCK LOSS | Real-time clock lost (battery flat) | Set date and time in programming; replace RTC battery if required |
| KEYPAD LOCKOUT | Too many invalid code attempts | Wait for lockout period to expire; check correct code is being used |
| Terminal | Function | Notes |
|---|---|---|
| AC / AC | Transformer input | 16.5VAC from supplied transformer |
| BATT+ / BATT- | Backup battery | 12V 7Ah sealed lead-acid |
| BELL+ / BELL- | Bell/siren output | Supervised; 12V DC; max 1.7A |
| AUX+ / AUX- | Auxiliary 12V DC output | For powering keypads and modules; max 500mA |
| COMBUS / COMBUS | 4-wire Combus data | Connect all keypads and expansion modules; max 300m total |
| Z1–Z16 | Zone inputs 1–16 | Normally closed; terminate with EOL resistor (5.6kΩ default) |
| PGM1–PGM5 | Programmable outputs | Open collector; negative or positive triggering; max 50mA each |
| TIP / RING | Telephone line | Connect to PSTN telephone line for reporting |
| Parameter | Value |
|---|---|
| Max Zones | 192 (via Combus expansion) |
| On-board Zones | 16 (with zone doubling) |
| Partitions | 8 |
| Max Users | 999 |
| Max Modules | 254 on Combus |
| Event Log | 2,048 events |
| Mains Input | 16.5VAC from transformer (230VAC mains) |
| PSU Output | 12V DC; 1.7A switching |
| Backup Battery | 12V 7Ah sealed lead-acid |
| Operating Temperature | 0°C to +49°C |
| Standards | EN 50131 Grade 3; PD 6662:2017 |
| Model | Zones | Wireless | Application |
|---|---|---|---|
| Enforcer V10 | 32 zones | 32 wireless | Residential / small commercial |
| Enforcer V11 | 32 zones | 32 wireless | Residential / small commercial (current) |
| Euro 46 | 46 zones | Optional | Commercial |
| Euro 96 | 96 zones | Optional | Large commercial |
| DIGI-WIFI XA | Add-on module | N/A | Cloud connectivity for Enforcer/Euro |
| Code Type | Default | Notes |
|---|---|---|
| Engineer Code | 1234 | Full programming access |
| Master User Code | 1234 | User management and arm/disarm |
| Installer Code | 9999 | Some models — check documentation |
| Zone Type | Description |
|---|---|
| Entry/Exit | Entry route — triggers entry delay |
| Intruder | Standard alarm zone |
| 24-Hour | Always active |
| PA | Personal attack |
| Fire | Fire detection |
| Tamper | Anti-tamper |
| Keyswitch | External arm/disarm |
| Perimeter | Part-set zone |
| Dual | Two-zone coincidence required |
| Code / Display | Description | Likely Cause | Action |
|---|---|---|---|
| ZONE OPEN | Zone circuit open | Wiring break, device failure | Check wiring and device. |
| ZONE TAMPER | Tamper activated | Lid removed, cable cut | Inspect device lid and cabling. |
| MAINS FAIL | Mains supply lost | Power cut, blown fuse | Check fuses and MCB. |
| BATTERY LOW | Battery below threshold | Battery end of life | Replace battery. |
| COMMS FAIL | Signalling failure | IP/PSTN fault | Check IP/PSTN settings. |
| WIRELESS FAIL | Wireless device not responding | Device battery flat, signal loss | Check device battery and placement. |
| CLOUD FAIL | Pyronix Cloud connection lost | Internet down, DIGI-WIFI fault | Check DIGI-WIFI module and internet connection. |
| ENGINEER RESET | Engineer reset required | Confirmed alarm | Enter engineer mode and reset. |
| Zone Config | EOL Resistor | Normal | Alarm |
|---|---|---|---|
| Single EOL | 4k7Ω | 4,700Ω | <500Ω |
| Double EOL | 2 × 4k7Ω | 4,700Ω | <500Ω |
| Terminal | Function | Notes |
|---|---|---|
| +12V | Auxiliary power output | 500mA max |
| 0V | Common ground | Must be continuous |
| Z1–Z32 | Zone inputs | EOL or DEOL resistors required |
| BELL+ | Bell/siren positive | Supervised output |
| BELL− | Bell/siren negative | Via tamper capacitor |
| D+ | RS-485 data positive | Twisted pair with D− |
| D− | RS-485 data negative | Twisted pair with D+ |
=== WEB RESEARCH: pyronix ===
# Pyronix Enforcer & EURO Series Technical Reference
## 1. Product Range and Model Numbers
- **EURO 46S**: Security Grade 2, Environmental Class II
- **EURO 46L, EURO 162 & EURO 280**: Security Grade 3, Environmental Class II
- **Enforcer V11**: Wireless alarm system, Security Grade 2, Environmental Class II
- **Keypads**: EUR-064, EURO-LCDPZ
- **Tag Readers**: EUR-107 (Internal), EUR-108 (External)
- **Wireless Keyfob**: KF4-WE
- **Zone Expansion Modules**: EURO-ZEM8, EURO-ZEM8+, EURO-ZEM8+PSU, EURO-ZEM32-WE
- **Output Modules**: EURO-OEM8R8T, EURO-OEM16R+PSU
- **Communications Modules**: DIGI-GPRS, DIGI-LAN, DIGI-PSTN, DIGI-PSTN/VOICE
## 2. Technical Specifications
### Electrical
- **European rated voltage**: 230V AC -15/+10%
- **European rated current**: 83mA
- **Capable operating voltage**: 90 - 264V AC
- **Current**: 222mA - 75mA
- **Rated frequency**: 50/60Hz
- **Zone fuse rating**: T 2A (cannot replace)
- **PSU**: Type A
- **Radio frequency**: 868MHz, FM Transceiver Narrow Band
### Battery
- **Output instant voltage**: 11V (with no mains and battery fully charged)
- **Peak to peak ripple voltage**: 10mVpk
- **Battery low voltage cut off value**: 8.5V
- **Type**: NiMH 8 cell 2200mAh rechargeable battery (BATT9V6/2Ah1-WE)
- **CIE current when operating on battery backup**: 90mA
### Environment
- **Physical dimensions (W x H x D)**: 220 x 160 x 50mm
- **Weight**: 1025g
- **Operating temperature**: -10°C to +40°C
- **Nominal temperature**: -10°C to +50°C
- **Storage temperature**: -20°C to +60°C
### I/O Board
- **Zones**: 2 Wired (DEOL, SEOL)
- **Output voltage**: 13.2 VDC (nominal)
- **Max current for PGM output**: 70mA
- **SAB outputs**: 250mA Continuous Load
- **Bus fuse**: F500mA 250V Bus Fuse
- **Aux fuse**: F500mA 250V Aux Fuse
## 3. Default Codes
- **Default User Code**: 1234 (or Blank depending on version)
- **Default Master Manager Code**: 2222
- **Default Engineer Code**: 1111
- **Clean Start Code (UNGRADED)**: 2000
- **Clean Start Code (Grade 2)**: 2020
- **Keypad Security Code**: 2000
- **Delete All Wireless Data**: 2000
## 4. Fault/Event/Alarm Codes
### Wireless Fault Displays
- **Wireless mismatch**: There is a zone learnt without having a type assigned to it.
- **Wireless Low Bat (User name)**: Low battery on radio keyfob for the user.
- **Wireless Low Bat (Input name)**: Low battery on radio input.
- **Wireless Low Bat (Siren n)**: Low battery on radio bell number 'n'.
- **Wireless Supervision fault (Input name)**: Radio input hasn't 'checked in'.
- **Wireless Supervision fault (Siren n)**: Radio bell number 'n' hasn't 'checked in'.
- **Tamper Alarm (Input name)**: Tamper fault on radio input.
- **Tamper Alarm (Siren n)**: Tamper fault on radio bell number 'n'.
- **Wireless Jam WZm (Location)**: Jamming fault on the wireless ZEM.
- **Wireless Poll Fail**: No 'polls' are received for 20 minutes before the set operation.
### RS-485 Bus Problems
- **485 Fail xxx**: Device on RS-485 communications bus is failing to communicate correctly with the control panel.
- **Keypad display is BLANK**: Keypad address does not match any keypad enabled.
- **Keypad display normal, but KEYS LOCKED OUT**: More than one device connected at the same address.
- **Authorisation Required**: The master manager will need to give the Engineer access.
### Power Supply Problems
- **Battery Fault xxx**: Battery Fuse failed, OR Battery not present, OR Battery volts low.
- **Bat Test Fail XXX**: Battery Load Test has failed.
- **Bat Critical XXX**: Battery being powered down.
- **Mains Fail xxx**: Mains supply failed.
- **Low Volts xxx**: Power supply volts low.
### Detection Faults
- **Case Tamper XXX**: Case tamper switch open.
### Communication Faults
- **Control Panel Modem Fault**: End Station unable to communicate with Digi Modem.
- **Control Panel ARC Call Fail**: Call to ARC from Digi Modem has failed.
- **Control Panel Line Fault 100**: PSTN Line Fault signalled by Digi Modem.
## 5. Zone Types
- **[00] Unused**: Factory default. Input is programmed out of operation.
- **[01] Fire**: Active at all times. Audible response: Full (differentiated). Communicator: 'Fire' signal.
- **[02] Gas**: Active at all times. Audible Response: Full (differentiated). Communicator: 'Gas' signal.
- **[03] HU#**: Active at all times. Audible Response: Full (differentiated). Communicator: 'Hold Up' and 'Input HU' signals.
- **[04] Silent HU#**: Active at all times. Audible Response: None. Communicator: 'Hold Up' and 'Input HU' signals.
- **[05] Tamper**: When disarmed: Audible Response: Internal only. Communicator: 'Tamper' signal. When set: Audible Response: Full (differentiated). Communicator: 'Tamper' and 'Unconfirmed' signals.
- **[06] Intruder**: Active when set. Audible Response: Full. Communicator: 'Intruder' and 'Unconfirmed' signals.
- **[07] Final Exit (FX)#**: Active when armed – initiates entry timer if system not disarmed before entry time expires: Audible Response: Full. Communicator: 'Intruder' and 'Unconfirmed' signals.
- **[08] Entry Route (ER)**: Active when set, except during entry time. Audible Response: Full. Communicator: 'Intruder' and 'Unconfirmed' signals.
- **[09] ER (Part FX)**: When fully armed (A), acts as Entry route input. When part armed (B,C,D), acts as Final Exit input.
- **[10] FX (Part ER)**: When fully armed (A), acts as Final Exit input. When part armed (B,C,D), acts as Entry route input.
- **[11] PTS**: Active during exit time to complete Arming procedure. No audible or communicator response.
- **[12] Switcher**: Active at all times: This zone type is used to trigger an output or task, but not an alarm.
- **[13] Day Alarm**: When armed: Audible Response: Full; Communicator: 'Instant' signals. When disarmed: Audible Response: Programmable; Communicator: '24hr Alarm' signal.
- **[16] Fault**: When armed: Audible Response: Full; Communicator: 'Instant' signals. When disarmed: Audible Response: Programmable; Communicator: '24hr Alarm' signal.
- **[20] Keyswitch Latched**: Accepts input from keyswitch (or equivalent) to arm/disarm the Set modes assigned to it.
- **[21] Entry Shock Input**: Active when system set. Works in conjunction with EE input type for detection of forced entry.
- **[23] Keyswitch Pulsed**: Accepts input from keyswitch (or equivalent) to Set/disarm the Set modes assigned to it.
- **[32] Flood**: This input type will work as a 24hr input, any inputs that are programmed for Flood will activate the external siren.
- **[42] Medical**: This input type will work as a 24hr input, any inputs that are programmed for Medical will activate the external siren.
- **[44] ATE Line Fail**: Once a ATE line fail has been recognised the input will open.
## 6. Wiring Diagrams and Terminal Descriptions
### I/O Board Terminals
- **D1-**: RS485 0V
- **D2+**: RS485 +12V
- **D3**: RS485 'A' Bus
- **D4**: RS485 'B' Bus
- **PGM**: Programmable output
- **STB**: Strobe output for a wired external siren
- **BELL**: Bell output for a wired external siren
- **Z33**: Wired zone 33
- **COM**: Common terminal for Z33 and Z34 and -12VDC auxiliary supply
- **+12V**: +12VDC auxiliary supply
- **Z34**: Wired zone 34
### External Siren Wiring
- To create the siren tamper circuit, a 2k2 resistor is required across 0V supply and one of the tamper terminals in the external siren. The other tamper terminal connects to the panel's tamper return.
### Zone Wiring
- The End of Line (EOL) value for all wired zones is programmed in 'Choose Mode'. At default the resistor values are 4k7 for alarm and 2k2 for tamper.
## 7. Programming Menu Structure
### Engineer Menu
- **SET DATE & TIME?**: Programs the date and time.
- **WIRELESS DEVICE CONTROL?**: Learns and deletes all wireless zones, bells and arming stations.
- Control Inputs?
- Control Bells?
- Control Keypad/Speakers?
- Program Keyfob Buttons?
- **CHANGE INPUTS?**: Programs all zone types, attributes, areas and names.
- **CHOOSE MODE?**: Configures the resistance range, EOL mode and response time of the wired zones.
- **INSTALL ZEMS?**: Programs zone expansion modules (ZEMs) to the system.
- **CHANGE OUTPUTS?**: Programs any outputs and assigns output modules on the system.
- **ASSIGN KEYPADS/READERS?**: Assigns wired/wireless keypads and readers, and enables readers for entry control.
- **CHANGE TIMERS?**: This function controls all timers on the system.
- **CODES AND USERS?**: Changes the 'Engineer code', 'Master Manager code' and 'Duress codes'.
- **VOLUME CONTROL?**: Alters volume levels of the loudspeaker only.
- **SYSTEM OPTIONS?**: Contains sub-menus for configuring options such as how the system will operate day-to-day and system displays.
- **REVIEW LOGS?**: View system events which are time and date stamped.
- **ENGINEER TESTS?**: Allows the engineer to test zones, outputs, batteries and the siren etc.
- **DIAGNOSTICS?**: Displays power, zone status, wireless arming stations, wireless signal strength and wireless battery levels.
- **ENGINEER RESTORE OPTIONS?**: Configures engineer restore requirements.
- **COMMUNICATIONS?**: Configures external communications.
- **ALARM RESPONSE?**: Configures alarm responses.
- **SET UP DOWNLOADING?**: Configures UDL downloading.
- **DIAL OUT MENU?**: Select PC to dial.
- **SOFTWARE REVISION?**: Displays software revision.
- **CLEAN START?**: Restores factory defaults.
- **EXIT ENGINEER MENU?**: Exits the engineer menu.
## 8. Expander/Peripheral Devices
- **EURO-ZEM8**: 8 wired zone expander.
- **EURO-ZEM8+**: 8 wired zone expander with additional features.
- **EURO-ZEM8+PSU**: 8 wired zone expander with power supply unit.
- **EURO-ZEM32-WE**: 32 wireless zone expander.
- **EURO-OEM8R8T**: Output expander module.
- **EURO-OEM16R+PSU**: 16 output expander module with power supply unit.
- **EUR-064**: Wired keypad.
- **EURO-LCDPZ**: Wired keypad with proximity reader.
- **EUR-107**: Internal tag reader.
- **EUR-108**: External tag reader.
- **KF4-WE**: 4-button wireless keyfob.
## 9. Commissioning Steps
1. **Initial Power Up**: Connect the 230VAC mains supply and the backup battery.
2. **Clean Start**: Perform a factory default (clean start) after initial power up to ensure correct defaults are applied. Enter Engineer code (1111), navigate to 'CLEAN START?', and select the appropriate grade (e.g., 2020 for Grade 2).
3. **Set Date & Time**: Navigate to 'SET DATE & TIME?' in the Engineer menu and program the current date and time.
4. **Learn Wireless Devices**: Use 'WIRELESS DEVICE CONTROL?' to learn wireless zones, bells, and arming stations.
5. **Program Inputs**: Use 'CHANGE INPUTS?' to assign zone types, areas, and attributes to all connected inputs.
6. **Program Outputs**: Use 'CHANGE OUTPUTS?' to configure any required outputs.
7. **Assign Keypads/Readers**: Use 'ASSIGN KEYPADS/READERS?' to configure connected keypads and proximity readers.
8. **Configure Timers**: Use 'CHANGE TIMERS?' to set entry/exit times, siren times, and other system timers.
9. **Change Codes**: Use 'CODES AND USERS?' to change the default Engineer and Master Manager codes.
10. **System Options**: Configure site options, exit modes, and system displays in 'SYSTEM OPTIONS?'.
11. **Engineer Tests**: Perform walk tests, siren tests, and battery load tests using 'ENGINEER TESTS?' to verify system operation.
12. **Exit Engineer Menu**: Save all programming by exiting the Engineer menu.
## 10. Compliance Standards
- **EMC**: EN 61000-6-3:2007 +A1:2011, EN 50130-4:2011 +A1:2014, ETSI EN 301 489-3: V2.1.1 (2019-03)
- **Low Voltage (Safety)**: EN 62368-1:2014+A11:2017
- **RE Directive**: ETSI EN 300 220-1, Recommendation 70-03 Annex 1
- **Security Standards**: EN 50131-1: 2006 + A1: 2009 +A2:2017, EN 50131-3: 2009, EN 50131-6: 2017, EN 50130-5: 2011, EN 50131-5-3:2017, PD 6662: 2017 (UK only)
- **RoHS**: BS EN IEC 63000: 2018
## 11. Output Types
- **[0000] Not Used**: Output is not used.
- **[0001] Fire**: Activates on fire alarm.
- **[0006] Confirmed Any**: Activates on confirmed alarm.
- **[0007] Tamper Any**: Activates on tamper alarm.
- **[0009] HU Device Any**: Activates on hold up alarm.
- **[0011] Set Fail**: Activates on set fail.
- **[0013] Secure Intruder Any**: Activates on secure intruder alarm.
- **[0014] Siren Any**: Activates when siren is live.
- **[0016] Strobe Any**: Activates when strobe is live.
- **[0017] Omit Rearm Any**: Activates when zone is omitted on rearm.
- **[0018] Unconfirmed Any**: Activates on unconfirmed alarm.
- **[0021] Exit Starts Any**: Activates when exit time starts.
- **[0022] Final Set Any**: Activates when system is fully set.
- **[0028] Power Fault**: Activates on power fault.
- **[0051] Line Fault**: Activates on line fault.
- **[0052] Mains Fail**: Activates on mains fail.
- **[0053] Battery Faults**: Activates on battery fault.
- **[0054] Low Volts**: Activates on low voltage.
- **[0055] Global Fault 1**: Activates on global fault 1.
- **[0056] Global Fault 2**: Activates on global fault 2.
## 12. Timers
- **Entry Time**: 0 – 255 seconds
- **Exit Time**: 0 – 255 seconds
- **APP Exit Time**: 0 – 199 seconds
- **Siren Time**: 2 – 15 minutes
- **Siren Delay**: 0 – 20 minutes
- **Confirm Time**: 1 – 99 minutes
- **HU Confirm Time**: 8 – 20 hours
- **Strobe Time**: 0 – 99 minutes
- **Re-Arm No.**: 0 – 9
- **AC Signal Delay**: 0 – 250 minutes
- **Settle**: 0 - 255 seconds
- **Double Knock**: 0 – 75 seconds
- **Pre-Alarm**: 0 – 255 seconds
- **Comm Fault Delay**: 0 – 250 seconds
- **Set Fail**: 0 – 255 seconds
- **Fire Siren Time**: 1 – 99 minutes
- **Set Fail Warning**: 0 – 99 seconds
- **Occupancy**: 0 - hours
- **Input NAT Days**: 0-14 days
- **Input NAT Hours**: 00-23 hours
- **Wireless Supervision Time**: 0-99 hours
=== WEB RESEARCH: enforcer ===
# Pyronix Enforcer & EURO Series Technical Reference
## 1. Product Range and Model Numbers
- **EURO 46S**: Security Grade 2, Environmental Class II
- **EURO 46L, EURO 162 & EURO 280**: Security Grade 3, Environmental Class II
- **Enforcer V11**: Wireless alarm system, Security Grade 2, Environmental Class II
- **Keypads**: EUR-064, EURO-LCDPZ
- **Tag Readers**: EUR-107 (Internal), EUR-108 (External)
- **Wireless Keyfob**: KF4-WE
- **Zone Expansion Modules**: EURO-ZEM8, EURO-ZEM8+, EURO-ZEM8+PSU, EURO-ZEM32-WE
- **Output Modules**: EURO-OEM8R8T, EURO-OEM16R+PSU
- **Communications Modules**: DIGI-GPRS, DIGI-LAN, DIGI-PSTN, DIGI-PSTN/VOICE
## 2. Technical Specifications
### Electrical
- **European rated voltage**: 230V AC -15/+10%
- **European rated current**: 83mA
- **Capable operating voltage**: 90 - 264V AC
- **Current**: 222mA - 75mA
- **Rated frequency**: 50/60Hz
- **Zone fuse rating**: T 2A (cannot replace)
- **PSU**: Type A
- **Radio frequency**: 868MHz, FM Transceiver Narrow Band
### Battery
- **Output instant voltage**: 11V (with no mains and battery fully charged)
- **Peak to peak ripple voltage**: 10mVpk
- **Battery low voltage cut off value**: 8.5V
- **Type**: NiMH 8 cell 2200mAh rechargeable battery (BATT9V6/2Ah1-WE)
- **CIE current when operating on battery backup**: 90mA
### Environment
- **Physical dimensions (W x H x D)**: 220 x 160 x 50mm
- **Weight**: 1025g
- **Operating temperature**: -10°C to +40°C
- **Nominal temperature**: -10°C to +50°C
- **Storage temperature**: -20°C to +60°C
### I/O Board
- **Zones**: 2 Wired (DEOL, SEOL)
- **Output voltage**: 13.2 VDC (nominal)
- **Max current for PGM output**: 70mA
- **SAB outputs**: 250mA Continuous Load
- **Bus fuse**: F500mA 250V Bus Fuse
- **Aux fuse**: F500mA 250V Aux Fuse
## 3. Default Codes
- **Default User Code**: 1234 (or Blank depending on version)
- **Default Master Manager Code**: 2222
- **Default Engineer Code**: 1111
- **Clean Start Code (UNGRADED)**: 2000
- **Clean Start Code (Grade 2)**: 2020
- **Keypad Security Code**: 2000
- **Delete All Wireless Data**: 2000
## 4. Fault/Event/Alarm Codes
### Wireless Fault Displays
- **Wireless mismatch**: There is a zone learnt without having a type assigned to it.
- **Wireless Low Bat (User name)**: Low battery on radio keyfob for the user.
- **Wireless Low Bat (Input name)**: Low battery on radio input.
- **Wireless Low Bat (Siren n)**: Low battery on radio bell number 'n'.
- **Wireless Supervision fault (Input name)**: Radio input hasn't 'checked in'.
- **Wireless Supervision fault (Siren n)**: Radio bell number 'n' hasn't 'checked in'.
- **Tamper Alarm (Input name)**: Tamper fault on radio input.
- **Tamper Alarm (Siren n)**: Tamper fault on radio bell number 'n'.
- **Wireless Jam WZm (Location)**: Jamming fault on the wireless ZEM.
- **Wireless Poll Fail**: No 'polls' are received for 20 minutes before the set operation.
### RS-485 Bus Problems
- **485 Fail xxx**: Device on RS-485 communications bus is failing to communicate correctly with the control panel.
- **Keypad display is BLANK**: Keypad address does not match any keypad enabled.
- **Keypad display normal, but KEYS LOCKED OUT**: More than one device connected at the same address.
- **Authorisation Required**: The master manager will need to give the Engineer access.
### Power Supply Problems
- **Battery Fault xxx**: Battery Fuse failed, OR Battery not present, OR Battery volts low.
- **Bat Test Fail XXX**: Battery Load Test has failed.
- **Bat Critical XXX**: Battery being powered down.
- **Mains Fail xxx**: Mains supply failed.
- **Low Volts xxx**: Power supply volts low.
### Detection Faults
- **Case Tamper XXX**: Case tamper switch open.
### Communication Faults
- **Control Panel Modem Fault**: End Station unable to communicate with Digi Modem.
- **Control Panel ARC Call Fail**: Call to ARC from Digi Modem has failed.
- **Control Panel Line Fault 100**: PSTN Line Fault signalled by Digi Modem.
## 5. Zone Types
- **[00] Unused**: Factory default. Input is programmed out of operation.
- **[01] Fire**: Active at all times. Audible response: Full (differentiated). Communicator: 'Fire' signal.
- **[02] Gas**: Active at all times. Audible Response: Full (differentiated). Communicator: 'Gas' signal.
- **[03] HU#**: Active at all times. Audible Response: Full (differentiated). Communicator: 'Hold Up' and 'Input HU' signals.
- **[04] Silent HU#**: Active at all times. Audible Response: None. Communicator: 'Hold Up' and 'Input HU' signals.
- **[05] Tamper**: When disarmed: Audible Response: Internal only. Communicator: 'Tamper' signal. When set: Audible Response: Full (differentiated). Communicator: 'Tamper' and 'Unconfirmed' signals.
- **[06] Intruder**: Active when set. Audible Response: Full. Communicator: 'Intruder' and 'Unconfirmed' signals.
- **[07] Final Exit (FX)#**: Active when armed – initiates entry timer if system not disarmed before entry time expires: Audible Response: Full. Communicator: 'Intruder' and 'Unconfirmed' signals.
- **[08] Entry Route (ER)**: Active when set, except during entry time. Audible Response: Full. Communicator: 'Intruder' and 'Unconfirmed' signals.
- **[09] ER (Part FX)**: When fully armed (A), acts as Entry route input. When part armed (B,C,D), acts as Final Exit input.
- **[10] FX (Part ER)**: When fully armed (A), acts as Final Exit input. When part armed (B,C,D), acts as Entry route input.
- **[11] PTS**: Active during exit time to complete Arming procedure. No audible or communicator response.
- **[12] Switcher**: Active at all times: This zone type is used to trigger an output or task, but not an alarm.
- **[13] Day Alarm**: When armed: Audible Response: Full; Communicator: 'Instant' signals. When disarmed: Audible Response: Programmable; Communicator: '24hr Alarm' signal.
- **[16] Fault**: When armed: Audible Response: Full; Communicator: 'Instant' signals. When disarmed: Audible Response: Programmable; Communicator: '24hr Alarm' signal.
- **[20] Keyswitch Latched**: Accepts input from keyswitch (or equivalent) to arm/disarm the Set modes assigned to it.
- **[21] Entry Shock Input**: Active when system set. Works in conjunction with EE input type for detection of forced entry.
- **[23] Keyswitch Pulsed**: Accepts input from keyswitch (or equivalent) to Set/disarm the Set modes assigned to it.
- **[32] Flood**: This input type will work as a 24hr input, any inputs that are programmed for Flood will activate the external siren.
- **[42] Medical**: This input type will work as a 24hr input, any inputs that are programmed for Medical will activate the external siren.
- **[44] ATE Line Fail**: Once a ATE line fail has been recognised the input will open.
## 6. Wiring Diagrams and Terminal Descriptions
### I/O Board Terminals
- **D1-**: RS485 0V
- **D2+**: RS485 +12V
- **D3**: RS485 'A' Bus
- **D4**: RS485 'B' Bus
- **PGM**: Programmable output
- **STB**: Strobe output for a wired external siren
- **BELL**: Bell output for a wired external siren
- **Z33**: Wired zone 33
- **COM**: Common terminal for Z33 and Z34 and -12VDC auxiliary supply
- **+12V**: +12VDC auxiliary supply
- **Z34**: Wired zone 34
### External Siren Wiring
- To create the siren tamper circuit, a 2k2 resistor is required across 0V supply and one of the tamper terminals in the external siren. The other tamper terminal connects to the panel's tamper return.
### Zone Wiring
- The End of Line (EOL) value for all wired zones is programmed in 'Choose Mode'. At default the resistor values are 4k7 for alarm and 2k2 for tamper.
## 7. Programming Menu Structure
### Engineer Menu
- **SET DATE & TIME?**: Programs the date and time.
- **WIRELESS DEVICE CONTROL?**: Learns and deletes all wireless zones, bells and arming stations.
- Control Inputs?
- Control Bells?
- Control Keypad/Speakers?
- Program Keyfob Buttons?
- **CHANGE INPUTS?**: Programs all zone types, attributes, areas and names.
- **CHOOSE MODE?**: Configures the resistance range, EOL mode and response time of the wired zones.
- **INSTALL ZEMS?**: Programs zone expansion modules (ZEMs) to the system.
- **CHANGE OUTPUTS?**: Programs any outputs and assigns output modules on the system.
- **ASSIGN KEYPADS/READERS?**: Assigns wired/wireless keypads and readers, and enables readers for entry control.
- **CHANGE TIMERS?**: This function controls all timers on the system.
- **CODES AND USERS?**: Changes the 'Engineer code', 'Master Manager code' and 'Duress codes'.
- **VOLUME CONTROL?**: Alters volume levels of the loudspeaker only.
- **SYSTEM OPTIONS?**: Contains sub-menus for configuring options such as how the system will operate day-to-day and system displays.
- **REVIEW LOGS?**: View system events which are time and date stamped.
- **ENGINEER TESTS?**: Allows the engineer to test zones, outputs, batteries and the siren etc.
- **DIAGNOSTICS?**: Displays power, zone status, wireless arming stations, wireless signal strength and wireless battery levels.
- **ENGINEER RESTORE OPTIONS?**: Configures engineer restore requirements.
- **COMMUNICATIONS?**: Configures external communications.
- **ALARM RESPONSE?**: Configures alarm responses.
- **SET UP DOWNLOADING?**: Configures UDL downloading.
- **DIAL OUT MENU?**: Select PC to dial.
- **SOFTWARE REVISION?**: Displays software revision.
- **CLEAN START?**: Restores factory defaults.
- **EXIT ENGINEER MENU?**: Exits the engineer menu.
## 8. Expander/Peripheral Devices
- **EURO-ZEM8**: 8 wired zone expander.
- **EURO-ZEM8+**: 8 wired zone expander with additional features.
- **EURO-ZEM8+PSU**: 8 wired zone expander with power supply unit.
- **EURO-ZEM32-WE**: 32 wireless zone expander.
- **EURO-OEM8R8T**: Output expander module.
- **EURO-OEM16R+PSU**: 16 output expander module with power supply unit.
- **EUR-064**: Wired keypad.
- **EURO-LCDPZ**: Wired keypad with proximity reader.
- **EUR-107**: Internal tag reader.
- **EUR-108**: External tag reader.
- **KF4-WE**: 4-button wireless keyfob.
## 9. Commissioning Steps
1. **Initial Power Up**: Connect the 230VAC mains supply and the backup battery.
2. **Clean Start**: Perform a factory default (clean start) after initial power up to ensure correct defaults are applied. Enter Engineer code (1111), navigate to 'CLEAN START?', and select the appropriate grade (e.g., 2020 for Grade 2).
3. **Set Date & Time**: Navigate to 'SET DATE & TIME?' in the Engineer menu and program the current date and time.
4. **Learn Wireless Devices**: Use 'WIRELESS DEVICE CONTROL?' to learn wireless zones, bells, and arming stations.
5. **Program Inputs**: Use 'CHANGE INPUTS?' to assign zone types, areas, and attributes to all connected inputs.
6. **Program Outputs**: Use 'CHANGE OUTPUTS?' to configure any required outputs.
7. **Assign Keypads/Readers**: Use 'ASSIGN KEYPADS/READERS?' to configure connected keypads and proximity readers.
8. **Configure Timers**: Use 'CHANGE TIMERS?' to set entry/exit times, siren times, and other system timers.
9. **Change Codes**: Use 'CODES AND USERS?' to change the default Engineer and Master Manager codes.
10. **System Options**: Configure site options, exit modes, and system displays in 'SYSTEM OPTIONS?'.
11. **Engineer Tests**: Perform walk tests, siren tests, and battery load tests using 'ENGINEER TESTS?' to verify system operation.
12. **Exit Engineer Menu**: Save all programming by exiting the Engineer menu.
## 10. Compliance Standards
- **EMC**: EN 61000-6-3:2007 +A1:2011, EN 50130-4:2011 +A1:2014, ETSI EN 301 489-3: V2.1.1 (2019-03)
- **Low Voltage (Safety)**: EN 62368-1:2014+A11:2017
- **RE Directive**: ETSI EN 300 220-1, Recommendation 70-03 Annex 1
- **Security Standards**: EN 50131-1: 2006 + A1: 2009 +A2:2017, EN 50131-3: 2009, EN 50131-6: 2017, EN 50130-5: 2011, EN 50131-5-3:2017, PD 6662: 2017 (UK only)
- **RoHS**: BS EN IEC 63000: 2018
## 11. Output Types
- **[0000] Not Used**: Output is not used.
- **[0001] Fire**: Activates on fire alarm.
- **[0006] Confirmed Any**: Activates on confirmed alarm.
- **[0007] Tamper Any**: Activates on tamper alarm.
- **[0009] HU Device Any**: Activates on hold up alarm.
- **[0011] Set Fail**: Activates on set fail.
- **[0013] Secure Intruder Any**: Activates on secure intruder alarm.
- **[0014] Siren Any**: Activates when siren is live.
- **[0016] Strobe Any**: Activates when strobe is live.
- **[0017] Omit Rearm Any**: Activates when zone is omitted on rearm.
- **[0018] Unconfirmed Any**: Activates on unconfirmed alarm.
- **[0021] Exit Starts Any**: Activates when exit time starts.
- **[0022] Final Set Any**: Activates when system is fully set.
- **[0028] Power Fault**: Activates on power fault.
- **[0051] Line Fault**: Activates on line fault.
- **[0052] Mains Fail**: Activates on mains fail.
- **[0053] Battery Faults**: Activates on battery fault.
- **[0054] Low Volts**: Activates on low voltage.
- **[0055] Global Fault 1**: Activates on global fault 1.
- **[0056] Global Fault 2**: Activates on global fault 2.
## 12. Timers
- **Entry Time**: 0 – 255 seconds
- **Exit Time**: 0 – 255 seconds
- **APP Exit Time**: 0 – 199 seconds
- **Siren Time**: 2 – 15 minutes
- **Siren Delay**: 0 – 20 minutes
- **Confirm Time**: 1 – 99 minutes
- **HU Confirm Time**: 8 – 20 hours
- **Strobe Time**: 0 – 99 minutes
- **Re-Arm No.**: 0 – 9
- **AC Signal Delay**: 0 – 250 minutes
- **Settle**: 0 - 255 seconds
- **Double Knock**: 0 – 75 seconds
- **Pre-Alarm**: 0 – 255 seconds
- **Comm Fault Delay**: 0 – 250 seconds
- **Set Fail**: 0 – 255 seconds
- **Fire Siren Time**: 1 – 99 minutes
- **Set Fail Warning**: 0 – 99 seconds
- **Occupancy**: 0 - hours
- **Input NAT Days**: 0-14 days
- **Input NAT Hours**: 00-23 hours
- **Wireless Supervision Time**: 0-99 hours
=== WEB RESEARCH: euro 46 ===
# Pyronix Enforcer & EURO Series Technical Reference
## 1. Product Range and Model Numbers
- **EURO 46S**: Security Grade 2, Environmental Class II
- **EURO 46L, EURO 162 & EURO 280**: Security Grade 3, Environmental Class II
- **Enforcer V11**: Wireless alarm system, Security Grade 2, Environmental Class II
- **Keypads**: EUR-064, EURO-LCDPZ
- **Tag Readers**: EUR-107 (Internal), EUR-108 (External)
- **Wireless Keyfob**: KF4-WE
- **Zone Expansion Modules**: EURO-ZEM8, EURO-ZEM8+, EURO-ZEM8+PSU, EURO-ZEM32-WE
- **Output Modules**: EURO-OEM8R8T, EURO-OEM16R+PSU
- **Communications Modules**: DIGI-GPRS, DIGI-LAN, DIGI-PSTN, DIGI-PSTN/VOICE
## 2. Technical Specifications
### Electrical
- **European rated voltage**: 230V AC -15/+10%
- **European rated current**: 83mA
- **Capable operating voltage**: 90 - 264V AC
- **Current**: 222mA - 75mA
- **Rated frequency**: 50/60Hz
- **Zone fuse rating**: T 2A (cannot replace)
- **PSU**: Type A
- **Radio frequency**: 868MHz, FM Transceiver Narrow Band
### Battery
- **Output instant voltage**: 11V (with no mains and battery fully charged)
- **Peak to peak ripple voltage**: 10mVpk
- **Battery low voltage cut off value**: 8.5V
- **Type**: NiMH 8 cell 2200mAh rechargeable battery (BATT9V6/2Ah1-WE)
- **CIE current when operating on battery backup**: 90mA
### Environment
- **Physical dimensions (W x H x D)**: 220 x 160 x 50mm
- **Weight**: 1025g
- **Operating temperature**: -10°C to +40°C
- **Nominal temperature**: -10°C to +50°C
- **Storage temperature**: -20°C to +60°C
### I/O Board
- **Zones**: 2 Wired (DEOL, SEOL)
- **Output voltage**: 13.2 VDC (nominal)
- **Max current for PGM output**: 70mA
- **SAB outputs**: 250mA Continuous Load
- **Bus fuse**: F500mA 250V Bus Fuse
- **Aux fuse**: F500mA 250V Aux Fuse
## 3. Default Codes
- **Default User Code**: 1234 (or Blank depending on version)
- **Default Master Manager Code**: 2222
- **Default Engineer Code**: 1111
- **Clean Start Code (UNGRADED)**: 2000
- **Clean Start Code (Grade 2)**: 2020
- **Keypad Security Code**: 2000
- **Delete All Wireless Data**: 2000
## 4. Fault/Event/Alarm Codes
### Wireless Fault Displays
- **Wireless mismatch**: There is a zone learnt without having a type assigned to it.
- **Wireless Low Bat (User name)**: Low battery on radio keyfob for the user.
- **Wireless Low Bat (Input name)**: Low battery on radio input.
- **Wireless Low Bat (Siren n)**: Low battery on radio bell number 'n'.
- **Wireless Supervision fault (Input name)**: Radio input hasn't 'checked in'.
- **Wireless Supervision fault (Siren n)**: Radio bell number 'n' hasn't 'checked in'.
- **Tamper Alarm (Input name)**: Tamper fault on radio input.
- **Tamper Alarm (Siren n)**: Tamper fault on radio bell number 'n'.
- **Wireless Jam WZm (Location)**: Jamming fault on the wireless ZEM.
- **Wireless Poll Fail**: No 'polls' are received for 20 minutes before the set operation.
### RS-485 Bus Problems
- **485 Fail xxx**: Device on RS-485 communications bus is failing to communicate correctly with the control panel.
- **Keypad display is BLANK**: Keypad address does not match any keypad enabled.
- **Keypad display normal, but KEYS LOCKED OUT**: More than one device connected at the same address.
- **Authorisation Required**: The master manager will need to give the Engineer access.
### Power Supply Problems
- **Battery Fault xxx**: Battery Fuse failed, OR Battery not present, OR Battery volts low.
- **Bat Test Fail XXX**: Battery Load Test has failed.
- **Bat Critical XXX**: Battery being powered down.
- **Mains Fail xxx**: Mains supply failed.
- **Low Volts xxx**: Power supply volts low.
### Detection Faults
- **Case Tamper XXX**: Case tamper switch open.
### Communication Faults
- **Control Panel Modem Fault**: End Station unable to communicate with Digi Modem.
- **Control Panel ARC Call Fail**: Call to ARC from Digi Modem has failed.
- **Control Panel Line Fault 100**: PSTN Line Fault signalled by Digi Modem.
## 5. Zone Types
- **[00] Unused**: Factory default. Input is programmed out of operation.
- **[01] Fire**: Active at all times. Audible response: Full (differentiated). Communicator: 'Fire' signal.
- **[02] Gas**: Active at all times. Audible Response: Full (differentiated). Communicator: 'Gas' signal.
- **[03] HU#**: Active at all times. Audible Response: Full (differentiated). Communicator: 'Hold Up' and 'Input HU' signals.
- **[04] Silent HU#**: Active at all times. Audible Response: None. Communicator: 'Hold Up' and 'Input HU' signals.
- **[05] Tamper**: When disarmed: Audible Response: Internal only. Communicator: 'Tamper' signal. When set: Audible Response: Full (differentiated). Communicator: 'Tamper' and 'Unconfirmed' signals.
- **[06] Intruder**: Active when set. Audible Response: Full. Communicator: 'Intruder' and 'Unconfirmed' signals.
- **[07] Final Exit (FX)#**: Active when armed – initiates entry timer if system not disarmed before entry time expires: Audible Response: Full. Communicator: 'Intruder' and 'Unconfirmed' signals.
- **[08] Entry Route (ER)**: Active when set, except during entry time. Audible Response: Full. Communicator: 'Intruder' and 'Unconfirmed' signals.
- **[09] ER (Part FX)**: When fully armed (A), acts as Entry route input. When part armed (B,C,D), acts as Final Exit input.
- **[10] FX (Part ER)**: When fully armed (A), acts as Final Exit input. When part armed (B,C,D), acts as Entry route input.
- **[11] PTS**: Active during exit time to complete Arming procedure. No audible or communicator response.
- **[12] Switcher**: Active at all times: This zone type is used to trigger an output or task, but not an alarm.
- **[13] Day Alarm**: When armed: Audible Response: Full; Communicator: 'Instant' signals. When disarmed: Audible Response: Programmable; Communicator: '24hr Alarm' signal.
- **[16] Fault**: When armed: Audible Response: Full; Communicator: 'Instant' signals. When disarmed: Audible Response: Programmable; Communicator: '24hr Alarm' signal.
- **[20] Keyswitch Latched**: Accepts input from keyswitch (or equivalent) to arm/disarm the Set modes assigned to it.
- **[21] Entry Shock Input**: Active when system set. Works in conjunction with EE input type for detection of forced entry.
- **[23] Keyswitch Pulsed**: Accepts input from keyswitch (or equivalent) to Set/disarm the Set modes assigned to it.
- **[32] Flood**: This input type will work as a 24hr input, any inputs that are programmed for Flood will activate the external siren.
- **[42] Medical**: This input type will work as a 24hr input, any inputs that are programmed for Medical will activate the external siren.
- **[44] ATE Line Fail**: Once a ATE line fail has been recognised the input will open.
## 6. Wiring Diagrams and Terminal Descriptions
### I/O Board Terminals
- **D1-**: RS485 0V
- **D2+**: RS485 +12V
- **D3**: RS485 'A' Bus
- **D4**: RS485 'B' Bus
- **PGM**: Programmable output
- **STB**: Strobe output for a wired external siren
- **BELL**: Bell output for a wired external siren
- **Z33**: Wired zone 33
- **COM**: Common terminal for Z33 and Z34 and -12VDC auxiliary supply
- **+12V**: +12VDC auxiliary supply
- **Z34**: Wired zone 34
### External Siren Wiring
- To create the siren tamper circuit, a 2k2 resistor is required across 0V supply and one of the tamper terminals in the external siren. The other tamper terminal connects to the panel's tamper return.
### Zone Wiring
- The End of Line (EOL) value for all wired zones is programmed in 'Choose Mode'. At default the resistor values are 4k7 for alarm and 2k2 for tamper.
## 7. Programming Menu Structure
### Engineer Menu
- **SET DATE & TIME?**: Programs the date and time.
- **WIRELESS DEVICE CONTROL?**: Learns and deletes all wireless zones, bells and arming stations.
- Control Inputs?
- Control Bells?
- Control Keypad/Speakers?
- Program Keyfob Buttons?
- **CHANGE INPUTS?**: Programs all zone types, attributes, areas and names.
- **CHOOSE MODE?**: Configures the resistance range, EOL mode and response time of the wired zones.
- **INSTALL ZEMS?**: Programs zone expansion modules (ZEMs) to the system.
- **CHANGE OUTPUTS?**: Programs any outputs and assigns output modules on the system.
- **ASSIGN KEYPADS/READERS?**: Assigns wired/wireless keypads and readers, and enables readers for entry control.
- **CHANGE TIMERS?**: This function controls all timers on the system.
- **CODES AND USERS?**: Changes the 'Engineer code', 'Master Manager code' and 'Duress codes'.
- **VOLUME CONTROL?**: Alters volume levels of the loudspeaker only.
- **SYSTEM OPTIONS?**: Contains sub-menus for configuring options such as how the system will operate day-to-day and system displays.
- **REVIEW LOGS?**: View system events which are time and date stamped.
- **ENGINEER TESTS?**: Allows the engineer to test zones, outputs, batteries and the siren etc.
- **DIAGNOSTICS?**: Displays power, zone status, wireless arming stations, wireless signal strength and wireless battery levels.
- **ENGINEER RESTORE OPTIONS?**: Configures engineer restore requirements.
- **COMMUNICATIONS?**: Configures external communications.
- **ALARM RESPONSE?**: Configures alarm responses.
- **SET UP DOWNLOADING?**: Configures UDL downloading.
- **DIAL OUT MENU?**: Select PC to dial.
- **SOFTWARE REVISION?**: Displays software revision.
- **CLEAN START?**: Restores factory defaults.
- **EXIT ENGINEER MENU?**: Exits the engineer menu.
## 8. Expander/Peripheral Devices
- **EURO-ZEM8**: 8 wired zone expander.
- **EURO-ZEM8+**: 8 wired zone expander with additional features.
- **EURO-ZEM8+PSU**: 8 wired zone expander with power supply unit.
- **EURO-ZEM32-WE**: 32 wireless zone expander.
- **EURO-OEM8R8T**: Output expander module.
- **EURO-OEM16R+PSU**: 16 output expander module with power supply unit.
- **EUR-064**: Wired keypad.
- **EURO-LCDPZ**: Wired keypad with proximity reader.
- **EUR-107**: Internal tag reader.
- **EUR-108**: External tag reader.
- **KF4-WE**: 4-button wireless keyfob.
## 9. Commissioning Steps
1. **Initial Power Up**: Connect the 230VAC mains supply and the backup battery.
2. **Clean Start**: Perform a factory default (clean start) after initial power up to ensure correct defaults are applied. Enter Engineer code (1111), navigate to 'CLEAN START?', and select the appropriate grade (e.g., 2020 for Grade 2).
3. **Set Date & Time**: Navigate to 'SET DATE & TIME?' in the Engineer menu and program the current date and time.
4. **Learn Wireless Devices**: Use 'WIRELESS DEVICE CONTROL?' to learn wireless zones, bells, and arming stations.
5. **Program Inputs**: Use 'CHANGE INPUTS?' to assign zone types, areas, and attributes to all connected inputs.
6. **Program Outputs**: Use 'CHANGE OUTPUTS?' to configure any required outputs.
7. **Assign Keypads/Readers**: Use 'ASSIGN KEYPADS/READERS?' to configure connected keypads and proximity readers.
8. **Configure Timers**: Use 'CHANGE TIMERS?' to set entry/exit times, siren times, and other system timers.
9. **Change Codes**: Use 'CODES AND USERS?' to change the default Engineer and Master Manager codes.
10. **System Options**: Configure site options, exit modes, and system displays in 'SYSTEM OPTIONS?'.
11. **Engineer Tests**: Perform walk tests, siren tests, and battery load tests using 'ENGINEER TESTS?' to verify system operation.
12. **Exit Engineer Menu**: Save all programming by exiting the Engineer menu.
## 10. Compliance Standards
- **EMC**: EN 61000-6-3:2007 +A1:2011, EN 50130-4:2011 +A1:2014, ETSI EN 301 489-3: V2.1.1 (2019-03)
- **Low Voltage (Safety)**: EN 62368-1:2014+A11:2017
- **RE Directive**: ETSI EN 300 220-1, Recommendation 70-03 Annex 1
- **Security Standards**: EN 50131-1: 2006 + A1: 2009 +A2:2017, EN 50131-3: 2009, EN 50131-6: 2017, EN 50130-5: 2011, EN 50131-5-3:2017, PD 6662: 2017 (UK only)
- **RoHS**: BS EN IEC 63000: 2018
## 11. Output Types
- **[0000] Not Used**: Output is not used.
- **[0001] Fire**: Activates on fire alarm.
- **[0006] Confirmed Any**: Activates on confirmed alarm.
- **[0007] Tamper Any**: Activates on tamper alarm.
- **[0009] HU Device Any**: Activates on hold up alarm.
- **[0011] Set Fail**: Activates on set fail.
- **[0013] Secure Intruder Any**: Activates on secure intruder alarm.
- **[0014] Siren Any**: Activates when siren is live.
- **[0016] Strobe Any**: Activates when strobe is live.
- **[0017] Omit Rearm Any**: Activates when zone is omitted on rearm.
- **[0018] Unconfirmed Any**: Activates on unconfirmed alarm.
- **[0021] Exit Starts Any**: Activates when exit time starts.
- **[0022] Final Set Any**: Activates when system is fully set.
- **[0028] Power Fault**: Activates on power fault.
- **[0051] Line Fault**: Activates on line fault.
- **[0052] Mains Fail**: Activates on mains fail.
- **[0053] Battery Faults**: Activates on battery fault.
- **[0054] Low Volts**: Activates on low voltage.
- **[0055] Global Fault 1**: Activates on global fault 1.
- **[0056] Global Fault 2**: Activates on global fault 2.
## 12. Timers
- **Entry Time**: 0 – 255 seconds
- **Exit Time**: 0 – 255 seconds
- **APP Exit Time**: 0 – 199 seconds
- **Siren Time**: 2 – 15 minutes
- **Siren Delay**: 0 – 20 minutes
- **Confirm Time**: 1 – 99 minutes
- **HU Confirm Time**: 8 – 20 hours
- **Strobe Time**: 0 – 99 minutes
- **Re-Arm No.**: 0 – 9
- **AC Signal Delay**: 0 – 250 minutes
- **Settle**: 0 - 255 seconds
- **Double Knock**: 0 – 75 seconds
- **Pre-Alarm**: 0 – 255 seconds
- **Comm Fault Delay**: 0 – 250 seconds
- **Set Fail**: 0 – 255 seconds
- **Fire Siren Time**: 1 – 99 minutes
- **Set Fail Warning**: 0 – 99 seconds
- **Occupancy**: 0 - hours
- **Input NAT Days**: 0-14 days
- **Input NAT Hours**: 00-23 hours
- **Wireless Supervision Time**: 0-99 hours
=== RESEARCH: Pyronix Enforcer Euro 46 ===
Pyronix Enforcer Euro 46 Technical Documentation
**1. General System Overview (from EURO 46, 162 and 280 User Manual - RINS1527-4)**
* **Models Covered:** EURO 46S, EURO 46L, EURO 162, EURO 280. This documentation focuses on the EURO 46.
* **Compliance:** EN50131-3:2009, EN50131-1:2006+A1:2009, PD6662:2010.
* **Security Grade:** EURO 46S: Grade 2; EURO 46L: Grade 3.
* **Environmental Class:** II.
* **Software Version:** >9.1.
* **Areas:** The EURO 46 system supports up to 8 programmable areas.
* **Security Features:** Keypad disables for 90 seconds after 30 incorrect key-presses or 6 invalid tag attempts. Subsequent disablement after 7 further incorrect key-presses or another invalid tag.
**2. Default Codes (from EURO 46, 162 and 280 User Manual - RINS1527-4 & Enforcer V11 Programming Guide - 102028847-02)**
* **Default User Code:** 1234 (EURO 46 User Manual)
* **Default Master Manager Code:** 2222 (EURO 46 User Manual & Enforcer V11 Programming Guide)
* **Default Engineer Code:** 1111 (Enforcer V11 Programming Guide)
* **Clean Start Codes (Enforcer V11 Programming Guide):**
* '2000' (UNGRADED)
* '2020' (Grade 2)
* **Other Codes (Enforcer V11 Programming Guide):**
* Keypad Security Code: 2000
* Delete All Wireless Data: 2000
**3. Programming Menus (from EURO 46, 162 and 280 User Manual - RINS1527-4 & Enforcer V11 Programming Guide - 102028847-02)**
* **Master Manager Menu (EURO 46 User Manual):**
* Set Date and Time
* Omit Inputs
* Change Codes (Adding codes, tags and keyfobs)
* Review Logs
* Phonebook
* Walk Test
* Siren Test
* Start CHC SMS Update
* Dial Out Menu
* Allow Engineer Menu
* Block Remote Set
* Block UDL
* **Engineer Menu Options (Enforcer V11 Programming Guide - general programming concepts, may apply to EURO 46):**
* Set Date & Time
* Wireless Device Control (Learn/Delete wireless zones, bells, arming stations)
* Change Inputs (Program zone types, attributes, areas, names)
* Choose Mode (Configure resistance range, EOL mode, response time for wired zones)
* Install ZEMs (Program zone expansion modules)
* Change Outputs
* Assign Keypads/Readers
* Change Timers
* Codes And Users (Change Duress Codes, Master Manager Code, Engineer Code)
* Volume Control
* System Options (Site Options, Occupancy Zones, System Displays, Exit Modes)
* Review Logs (Panel Log, Access Log)
* Engineer Tests (Walk Test, Soak Control, Test Siren, Battery Load Test, Outputs, Communications)
* Diagnostics (Wireless Devices, Wired Devices, Communications, Tablet Keypads)
* Engineer Restore Options
* Communications
* Alarm Response
* Set Up Downloading (via Cloud, RS232)
* Dial Out Menu
* Software Revision
* Clean Start
* Exit Engineer Menu
**4. Zone Types & Input Mapping (from Enforcer V11 Programming Guide - 102028847-02)**
* **Input Types:** Detailed in Appendix B of the Enforcer V11 Programming Guide, covering various zone configurations (e.g., Entry/Exit, Intruder, Fire, 24hr, Key-switch, etc.).
* **Input Areas:** Inputs can be assigned to specific areas (partitions) for flexible arming/disarming.
* **Input Attributes:** Programmable attributes for each input, such as chime, omit, and tamper response.
**5. Fault Codes / Fault Finding (from EURO 46, 162 and 280 User Manual - RINS1527-4 & Enforcer V11 Programming Guide - 102028847-02)**
* **User Manual Fault Indications:**
* 'Alert' LED flashes for available information.
* 'Alarm' LED flashes after code entry if an alarm occurred.
* 'Tamper' LED flashes after code entry if wiring or equipment is tampered with.
* 'Fault' LED lights after code entry for technical faults.
* **Enforcer V11 Programming Guide (Appendix E - Fault Finding):** Provides detailed fault-finding procedures for:
* Wireless Fault Displays
* RS-485 Bus Problems
* Power Supply Problems
* Detection Faults
* Communication Faults
**6. Wiring Specifications & Terminals (from Enforcer V11 Programming Guide - 102028847-02)**
* The Enforcer V11 Programming Guide includes sections on wired keypads and readers, input connections, output (PGM) connections, relay and speaker output, XPGM outputs, and external sounder connections. While specific to Enforcer V11, the general principles of wiring terminals are likely similar for the EURO 46.
**7. System Capacities (from EURO 46, 162 and 280 User Manual - RINS1527-4)**
* **Areas:** EURO 46 supports 8 areas.
**8. DIGI-WIFI/XA Product Data Sheet (from DIGI-WIFI_XA_Product-Data-Sheet.pdf)**
* **Compatibility:** Compatible with Enforcer V10 and EURO 46 V10.
* **Features:** Supports HomeControl+ / PyronixCloud, ARC/IP reporting formats (Fast Format IP, Contact ID IP, SIA 3 IP).
* **Electrical Specifications:** +12VDC, 30mA quiescent.
* **Dimensions:** 109 x 56 x 11 mm.
* **Compliance:** CE, Environmental Class II, EN50136-1:2012, EN50136-2:2013, CLC/TS 50136-9:2013, ATS SP5.
* **Warranty:** 2-year warranty.
=== RESEARCH: Pyronix Enforcer Euro 46 ===
Pyronix Enforcer Euro 46 Technical Documentation
**1. General System Overview (from EURO 46, 162 and 280 User Manual - RINS1527-4)**
* **Models Covered:** EURO 46S, EURO 46L, EURO 162, EURO 280. This documentation focuses on the EURO 46.
* **Compliance:** EN50131-3:2009, EN50131-1:2006+A1:2009, PD6662:2010.
* **Security Grade:** EURO 46S: Grade 2; EURO 46L: Grade 3.
* **Environmental Class:** II.
* **Software Version:** >9.1.
* **Areas:** The EURO 46 system supports up to 8 programmable areas.
* **Security Features:** Keypad disables for 90 seconds after 30 incorrect key-presses or 6 invalid tag attempts. Subsequent disablement after 7 further incorrect key-presses or another invalid tag.
**2. Default Codes (from EURO 46, 162 and 280 User Manual - RINS1527-4 & Enforcer V11 Programming Guide - 102028847-02)**
* **Default User Code:** 1234 (EURO 46 User Manual)
* **Default Master Manager Code:** 2222 (EURO 46 User Manual & Enforcer V11 Programming Guide)
* **Default Engineer Code:** 1111 (Enforcer V11 Programming Guide)
* **Clean Start Codes (Enforcer V11 Programming Guide):**
* '2000' (UNGRADED)
* '2020' (Grade 2)
* **Other Codes (Enforcer V11 Programming Guide):**
* Keypad Security Code: 2000
* Delete All Wireless Data: 2000
**3. Programming Menus (from EURO 46, 162 and 280 User Manual - RINS1527-4 & Enforcer V11 Programming Guide - 102028847-02)**
* **Master Manager Menu (EURO 46 User Manual):**
* Set Date and Time
* Omit Inputs
* Change Codes (Adding codes, tags and keyfobs)
* Review Logs
* Phonebook
* Walk Test
* Siren Test
* Start CHC SMS Update
* Dial Out Menu
* Allow Engineer Menu
* Block Remote Set
* Block UDL
* **Engineer Menu Options (Enforcer V11 Programming Guide - general programming concepts, may apply to EURO 46):**
* Set Date & Time
* Wireless Device Control (Learn/Delete wireless zones, bells, arming stations)
* Change Inputs (Program zone types, attributes, areas, names)
* Choose Mode (Configure resistance range, EOL mode, response time for wired zones)
* Install ZEMs (Program zone expansion modules)
* Change Outputs
* Assign Keypads/Readers
* Change Timers
* Codes And Users (Change Duress Codes, Master Manager Code, Engineer Code)
* Volume Control
* System Options (Site Options, Occupancy Zones, System Displays, Exit Modes)
* Review Logs (Panel Log, Access Log)
* Engineer Tests (Walk Test, Soak Control, Test Siren, Battery Load Test, Outputs, Communications)
* Diagnostics (Wireless Devices, Wired Devices, Communications, Tablet Keypads)
* Engineer Restore Options
* Communications
* Alarm Response
* Set Up Downloading (via Cloud, RS232)
* Dial Out Menu
* Software Revision
* Clean Start
* Exit Engineer Menu
**4. Zone Types & Input Mapping (from Enforcer V11 Programming Guide - 102028847-02)**
* **Input Types:** Detailed in Appendix B of the Enforcer V11 Programming Guide, covering various zone configurations (e.g., Entry/Exit, Intruder, Fire, 24hr, Key-switch, etc.).
* **Input Areas:** Inputs can be assigned to specific areas (partitions) for flexible arming/disarming.
* **Input Attributes:** Programmable attributes for each input, such as chime, omit, and tamper response.
**5. Fault Codes / Fault Finding (from EURO 46, 162 and 280 User Manual - RINS1527-4 & Enforcer V11 Programming Guide - 102028847-02)**
* **User Manual Fault Indications:**
* 'Alert' LED flashes for available information.
* 'Alarm' LED flashes after code entry if an alarm occurred.
* 'Tamper' LED flashes after code entry if wiring or equipment is tampered with.
* 'Fault' LED lights after code entry for technical faults.
* **Enforcer V11 Programming Guide (Appendix E - Fault Finding):** Provides detailed fault-finding procedures for:
* Wireless Fault Displays
* RS-485 Bus Problems
* Power Supply Problems
* Detection Faults
* Communication Faults
**6. Wiring Specifications & Terminals (from Enforcer V11 Programming Guide - 102028847-02)**
* The Enforcer V11 Programming Guide includes sections on wired keypads and readers, input connections, output (PGM) connections, relay and speaker output, XPGM outputs, and external sounder connections. While specific to Enforcer V11, the general principles of wiring terminals are likely similar for the EURO 46.
**7. System Capacities (from EURO 46, 162 and 280 User Manual - RINS1527-4)**
* **Areas:** EURO 46 supports 8 areas.
**8. DIGI-WIFI/XA Product Data Sheet (from DIGI-WIFI_XA_Product-Data-Sheet.pdf)**
* **Compatibility:** Compatible with Enforcer V10 and EURO 46 V10.
* **Features:** Supports HomeControl+ / PyronixCloud, ARC/IP reporting formats (Fast Format IP, Contact ID IP, SIA 3 IP).
* **Electrical Specifications:** +12VDC, 30mA quiescent.
* **Dimensions:** 109 x 56 x 11 mm.
* **Compliance:** CE, Environmental Class II, EN50136-1:2012, EN50136-2:2013, CLC/TS 50136-9:2013, ATS SP5.
* **Warranty:** 2-year warranty.
=== PDF TEXT: pyronix_DIGI-WIFI_XA_Product-Data-Sheet.txt ===
DIGI-WIFI/XA
Expanding the range once again
Fast, efficient & cost-effective communication
The DIGI-WIFI/XA is a single path communicator that enables remote
control of the system via the HomeControl+ App and PyronixCloud
platforms, as well as InSite UDL software and Alarm Receiving
Centre (ARC) connection. As the DIGI-WIFI/XA connects directly to
the property’s existing internet via Wi-Fi into the router, there is no
need to worry about additional data usage, monthly contracts or
keeping it topped up.
--- PAGE BREAK ---
DIGI-WIFI/XA
Benefits:
Partcode
•
•
Compatibility
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
CSL ARC Signalling
Communicate through to the ARC using the Gemini
network and the connection only service from CSL.
www.facebook.com/pyronix
Enforcer V10
Euro 46 V10
Antenna
Technical Specifications
Formats
Fast Format IP, Contact ID IP, SIA 3 IP
Supports uploading/ downloading
Voltage
+12VDC
Quiescent
30mA
Dimensions
109 x 56 x 11mm
Certification
Electrical conformity
CE
Environmental class
II
EN Certificate
EN50136-1: 2012
EN50136-2: 2013
CLC/ TS 50136-9: 2013
Warranty
2 years
ATS
SP5
@pyronix
Follow us on LinkedIn
Pyronix Limited, Secure House, Braithwell Way, Hellaby, Rotherham, South Yorkshire, S66 8QY, UK
T: +44 (0)1709 700 100 E: sales@pyronix.com W: www.pyronix.com
RMKT090541
•
Uses existing broadband.
Communicates via the PyronixCloud, so no
complicated port forwarding setup is required.
Low cost installation with no additional costs
other than the existing broadband connection.
Can send push notifications directly to the user’s
smartphone via the HomeControl+ App.
Easily programmed using automatic or manual
settings.
Fully secure IP connection.
Compatible with InSite programming software.
Requires no Ethernet cable to the cable entry
point/router, so the panel does not need
mounting near a phone line.
Supplied with an antenna.
Communicate through to the ARC using Fast
Format IP, Contact ID IP and SIA 3 IP.
DIGI-WIFI/XA
--- PAGE BREAK ---
=== PDF TEXT: pyronix_EURO_46_162__-_User_Guide_-_English-_RINS1527-4.txt ===
EN50131-3:2009
EN50131-1:2006+A1:2009
PD6662:2010
EURO 46S:
Security Grade 2
Environmental Class II
EURO 46L, EURO 162 & EURO 280:
Security Grade 3
Environmental Class II
Software Version >9.1
User Manual
For the EURO 46, 162 and 280
SMS CHARGES:
If you’re using the SMS text messaging facility of the panel, you will be
charged at 50p every two weeks for an SMS Server Update call. This
charge is raised via use of a premium rate telephone number. Please see
page 24 for more details.
RINS1527-4
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Contents Page
Contents Page .................................................................................................................................... 2
1. Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 4
1.1 Intelligent Setting ...................................................................................................................... 4
1.2 Setting and Unsetting Methods ..................................................................................................... 4
1.3 Setting and Unsetting Peripherals ................................................................................................. 4
1.4 Areas ....................................................................................................................................... 4
1.5 Security .................................................................................................................................... 4
1.6 Specifications ............................................................................................................................ 4
2. The Setting Devices......................................................................................................................... 5
2.1 The Keypad (EUR-064)................................................................................................................ 5
2.2 The Internal Tag Reader (EUR-107) .............................................................................................. 5
2.3 The External Tag Reader (EUR-108) .............................................................................................. 6
3. The Wireless Keyfob (KF4-WE) .......................................................................................................... 6
3.1 Locking the Keyfob ..................................................................................................................... 6
3.2 Buttons ..................................................................................................................................... 7
3.3 Quick Setting ............................................................................................................................. 7
4. Using Predictive Text ....................................................................................................................... 8
5. Setting The EURO System ................................................................................................................ 9
5.1 Using a PIN Code or Tag .............................................................................................................. 9
5.2 Using the Wireless Keyfob (KF4-WE) ............................................................................................. 9
6. Unsetting The System (No Alarms) .................................................................................................. 10
6.1 Using a PIN Code or Tag ............................................................................................................ 10
6.2 Using a Wireless Keyfob (KF4-WE) .............................................................................................. 10
7. Unsetting after an alarm ................................................................................................................ 11
7.1 Using a PIN Code or Tag ............................................................................................................ 11
7.2 Using a Wireless Keyfob (KF4-WE) .............................................................................................. 11
8. Using a Tag Reader ....................................................................................................................... 12
8.1 Setting and Unsetting ............................................................................................................... 12
8.2 Entry Control ........................................................................................................................... 12
9. Anti Code / Engineer Restore Facility................................................................................................ 13
9.1 Anti-Code ................................................................................................................................ 13
9.2 Engineer Reset......................................................................................................................... 13
10. Intelligent Setting ....................................................................................................................... 14
11. Fault Indications / Unable To Set ................................................................................................... 15
11.1 Fault Indications ..................................................................................................................... 15
11.2 Unable to Set ......................................................................................................................... 15
11.3 Keyfob Fault Indications .......................................................................................................... 15
12. Advanced Functions ..................................................................................................................... 16
12.1 Chime Feature ....................................................................................................................... 16
12.2 Omitting Inputs ...................................................................................................................... 16
12.3 Keypad Hold Up...................................................................................................................... 16
13. Master Manager Menu .................................................................................................................. 17
13.1 Entering the Master Manager Menu ........................................................................................... 17
13.2 Exiting the Master Manager Menu ............................................................................................. 17
13.3 Set Date and Time .................................................................................................................. 18
13.4 Omit Inputs ........................................................................................................................... 18
13.5 Change Codes (Adding codes, tags and keyfobs) ......................................................................... 19
13.6 Review Logs .......................................................................................................................... 21
13.7 Phonebook ............................................................................................................................ 21
13.8 Walk Test .............................................................................................................................. 22
13.9 Siren Test.............................................................................................................................. 22
13.10 Start CHC SMS Update .......................................................................................................... 22
13.11 Dial Out Menu ...................................................................................................................... 23
13.12 Allow Engineer Menu ............................................................................................................. 23
13.13 Block Remote Set ................................................................................................................. 23
13.14 Block UDL ............................................................................................................................ 24
14. Disclaimer .................................................................................................................................. 24
15. Engineer Contacts and Tables........................................................................................................ 25
15.1 Engineer Information .............................................................................................................. 25
15.2 Certification ........................................................................................................................... 25
15.3 Input Contact Table ................................................................................................................ 26
15.4 Code Table ............................................................................................................................ 28
Default User Code: 1234
Default Master Manager: 2222
--- PAGE BREAK ---
EURO 46, 162 and 280 User Manual
1. Introduction
Thank you for choosing the EURO alarm system as protection for your property. It is designed to
conform to the latest intruder standards in the industry.
There are many features that the EURO alarm system has, and these can be explained in detail by
your alarm engineer.
Wireless peripherals may be used on the EURO alarm system; these include wireless sensors and
wireless set/unset keyfobs. Please ask your alarm engineer for more details.
With a host of features and accessories, the EURO alarm system offers maximum flexibility and
ensures that each EURO alarm system can be individually tailored to the required application. Some
of these features are described below:
1.1 Intelligent Setting
This feature enables the control unit to automatically recognise when you’re at home or away.
Using this knowledge the EURO alarm system is able to set itself in the correct mode without
you having to choose.
1.2 Setting and Unsetting Methods
A variety of methods are available for setting and unsetting the EURO alarm system. Please ask
your alarm engineer for more information about each of the below methods:
1) Setting/Unsetting using a user code of your choice
2) Setting/Unsetting using a Tag programmed specifically for you
3) Setting/Unsetting using a Keyfob programmed specifically for you
1.3 Setting and Unsetting Peripherals
There are also a variety of peripherals that can be used to set/unset your EURO alarm system:
1) The Keypad: A user friendly LCD remote keypad that can allow setting via user codes, tags
or keyfobs.
2) The Internal Tag Reader: A tag can simply be presented to a tag reader which will set or
unset the EURO alarm system. This can be used to open doors as part of an Entry Control if
required. This is for internal use only.
3) The External Tag Reader: A tag can simply be presented to a tag reader which will set or
unset the EURO alarm system. This can be used to open doors as part of an Entry Control if
required. This is both for internal and external use.
1.4 Areas
The EURO alarm system allows the programming of different area's that can be used in
whichever way you like, for example:
Area A: Full set of the house
Area B: Downstairs unset. Upstairs set.
Area C: Garage set. Rest of house unset.
The number of areas allowed depends on the model:
EURO 46: 8 EURO 162:12 EURO 280:14
1.5 Security
For your security, the keypad becomes disabled for 90 seconds after 30 incorrect key-presses,
or after 6 attempts to present invalid tags. It will subsequently be disabled again after 7 further
incorrect key-presses or after another invalid tag is presented. Once a correct code or tag has
been registered, the keypad is returned to normal operation.
1.6 Specifications
Please note that the specification of EURO alarm systems may vary between models and some
facilities in the manual may not be available. Check with your alarm engineer for full details.
This equipment may be used in systems installed to a lower grade, which will be agreed with
your alarm engineer company. There are no user serviceable parts contained in this product.
Page: 4
--- PAGE BREAK ---
EURO 46, 162 and 280 User Manual
2. The Setting Devices
2.1 The Keypad (EUR-064)
Additional wired keypads may also be connected to
the EURO alarm system, please ask your alarm
engineer for more information.
The keypad has the following keys:
a = Exits the Master Manager menu (page: 17),
and selects Area A when setting.
b = Moves backwards in the Master Manager
menu (page: 17), and selects Area B when setting.
c = Enables chime, displays additional
information in the event log, and selects Area C
when setting.
D = Moves forward in the log, scrolls between
options and enters the Master Manager menu
(page: 17), and selects Area D when setting.
I = Selects commands
A = Cancels items, resets the panel and moves to next item in a menu item.
2.1.1 LED Indications
All setting points (Keypads or Tag Readers) have LEDs to clearly indicate what is
happening.
The ‘Alert’ LED will flash if there is information available to you. Enter your code to see the
information. After a code has been entered, one of the following LEDs will light: Alarm,
tamper or fault. The relevant detail of the problem will be shown on the display. To clear
the display, press the ‘Yes’ key (or the display will clear automatically after 3 minutes.)
The ‘Alarm’ LED will flash after code entry if an alarm occurs.
The ‘Tamper’ LED will flash after code entry if the wiring or equipment is tampered with.
The ‘Fault’ LED will light after code entry to indicate if a technical fault occurs.
The ‘Unset’ LED will light for 5 seconds if the panel is completely Unset (steady) or if some
areas remain Set (flashing). It will also illuminate during the setting procedure, turning off
once set.
2.2 The Internal Tag Reader (EUR-107)
The Internal Tag Reader can be used for setting/unsetting, entry control or access control.
Ask your engineer for more details.
Tag Area (Where you present your
tag to set/unset)
Alert LED
Alarm LED
Tamper LED
Fault LED
Unset LED
Page: 5
--- PAGE BREAK ---
EURO 46, 162 and 280 User Manual
2.3 The External Tag Reader (EUR-108)
The External Tag Reader can be used for setting/unsetting, entry control or access control.
Ask your engineer for more details.
To set/unset the system using the External Tag Reader,
present a pre-programmed tag to the centre of the prox.
The prox will display the system status: Green = Unset.
Red = Set.
Present the tag again within 10 seconds and the system
will set or unset. The system will then set depending on
the type of exit mode programmed (Final door, Timed or
Push to set)
3. The Wireless Keyfob (KF4-WE)
The wireless keyfob has 4 buttons that may be programmed for specific purposes (please see
‘CHANGE CODES’ on page 19 for more information).
NOTE: This is only available if your alarm engineer has enabled the wireless technology.
3.1 Locking the Keyfob
All 4 buttons on the keyfob may be ‘locked’ so that any accidental presses will not affect your
wireless alarm system (for example, this protects the buttons from being pressed accidently if a
keyfob is in someone’s pocket).
Page: 6
--- PAGE BREAK ---
EURO 46, 162 and 280 User Manual
3.2 Buttons
The buttons can be customised (see Change Codes, page 19) to operate as desired. The table
below gives the defaults of how each button is programmed. These can be changed in the
‘Change Codes’ function – see page: 19.
LOCK BUTTON = Set Area A
When pressed, Area A will start to set.
UNLOCK BUTTON = Unset Area.
When pressed, the wireless alarm system will unset any area that is
already set.
I BUTTON = Set Area B
When pressed, the Area B will start to set.
II BUTTON = Show Status
When pressed, if the GREEN LED is shown then the wireless alarm system
will be unset. If the RED LED is shown then the wireless alarm system will
be set.
3.3 Quick Setting
If one of the buttons is programmed as ‘Set Area’, the EURO alarm system can be set by
pressing the programmed button on the keyfob. The keypad will then start to count down the
exit time, or wait for a ‘final door’ to be opened and closed or wait for a Push to Set (PTS)
button to be pressed, depending what the exit mode is programmed as by the engineer.
Once the EURO alarm system is in this ‘setting’ stage, it is possible to ‘quick set’ the system by
pressing the same button again; this will reduce the time to set to ‘immediate setting’. The
alarm panel will revert to the normal display with the time showing, but a beep will be heard
once the system has been set.
NOTE: This feature cannot be used if ‘Intelligent Set’ has been enabled by your alarm engineer.
Page: 7
--- PAGE BREAK ---
EURO 46, 162 and 280 User Manual
4. Using Predictive Text
The EURO alarm system incorporates predictive text, so the system will predict the word that is
being spelt.
For example, if you type ‘John’, press 5 once and the name ‘Julia’ will appear. Press D to move
the cursor over the ‘u’, and press 6 3 times to change it to an ‘o’. The name ‘John’ will now
appear. Press I to accept.
If the word that you require does not appear in the list, just continue typing the word letter by
letter.
In addition, the a b c D keys are used as follows:
a = make the character into a capital
b= move cursor left
c= clears cursor / adds a space
D = moves cursor right
Page: 8
--- PAGE BREAK ---
EURO 46, 162 and 280 User Manual
5. Setting The EURO System
5.1 Using a PIN Code or Tag
Enter a valid user code or present a valid
tag to the tag symbol as shown.
If any faults appear after a code has
been entered, refer to page: 15.
NOTE: Before you set your EURO alarm
system, ensure all doors and windows
are closed and any pets or people are
excluded from areas protected by
movement sensors.
Enter the area you wish to set, and press
I.
There are three different setting
methods your alarm engineer will
instruct you through:
Final Door: Leave the building and
make sure the exit door is closed
properly.
Timed: Make sure you leave the building
before the timer shown on the keypad
expires.
Push to set: Press the push to set
button installed by your alarm engineer
to set the system.
5.2 Using the Wireless Keyfob (KF4-WE)
NOTE: This is only available if your alarm
engineer has enabled the wireless technology.
To set via a keyfob. Pressand hold for more
than 2 seconds. The keyfob LED will start to flash
GREEN indicating that the system is starting to
set.
‘Please wait setting wireless’ will be displayed
on the keypad and the programmed area will
begin to set. To ‘quick set’, press and hold
thekey a second time for 4 seconds.
Once set, the keyfob LED will illuminate RED
indicating that the system is now set.
Page: 9
--- PAGE BREAK ---
EURO 46, 162 and 280 User Manual
6. Unsetting The System (No Alarms)
6.1 Using a PIN Code or Tag
Enter the building, the 'entry time' will
start and the entry tone will sound.
Enter a valid user code or present a valid
tag to the tag symbol as shown.
The area that the code is assigned to will
be unset.
NOTE: If ‘flexi-unset’ is disabled then
the EURO alarm system will
automatically unset that area once a
valid user code or tag is presented. This
function needs to be enabled by your
engineer
6.2 Using a Wireless Keyfob (KF4-WE)
NOTE 1: This is only available if your alarm
engineer has enabled the wireless technology.
To unset via a keyfob. Press .
The keyfob LED will start to flash GREEN
indicating that the system has unset.
NOTE 2: Unsetting with a keyfob will only be
allowed if your alarm engineer has enabled this.
Page: 10
--- PAGE BREAK ---
EURO 46, 162 and 280 User Manual
7. Unsetting after an alarm
7.1 Using a PIN Code or Tag
Enter a valid user code or present a valid
tag to the Tag symbol as shown.
The alarm symbol will flash indicating
there has been an alarm activation and
the keypad will display which input has
activated.
NOTE: If ‘flexi-unset’ is disabled then
the EURO alarm system will
automatically unset that area once a
valid user code or tag is presented. This
function needs to be enabled by your
engineer
Press A to reset the system.
7.2 Using a Wireless Keyfob (KF4-WE)
NOTE 1: This is only available if your
alarm engineer has enabled the wireless
technology.
NOTE 2: Unsetting with a keyfob will
only be allowed if your engineer has
enabled this.
To unset via a keyfob. Press .
The keyfob LED will start to flash GREEN
indicating that the system has unset.
Resetting the EURO alarm system after
an alarm can only be done at the
keypad.
Page: 11
--- PAGE BREAK ---
EURO 46, 162 and 280 User Manual
8. Using a Tag Reader
8.1 Setting and Unsetting
If you have a tag reader installed, then it will be possible to set and unset the EURO alarm
system using a tag (the same tags can also be used to set/unset on the keypad).
There are two types of readers that can be used with the EURO alarm system - the internal tag
reader (used for indoors only) and the external tag reader (used for both indoors and outdoors).
Tags for the readers need to be programmed through the ‘Change Codes’ function in the Master
Manager Menu (see page 19). The internal and external readers can be both assigned to
individual areas, this will need to be set up by your alarm engineer.
8.2 Entry Control
The readers may be used for entry control, which means they can operate automatic locks for
example as well as setting and unsetting the system. This can be set up by your alarm
engineer.
External Reader Instructions:
Arming: Present a valid tag to the reader, the GREEN LED will illuminate on the external
reader, remove the tag, the door will unlock, then present the same tag within 10 seconds and
the system will set and the door will lock.
Disarming: Present a valid tag to the reader and then remove it, the status will be shown (the
alarm symbol will illuminate indicating the system is armed on the internal reader and the RED
LED on the external reader), present the same tag within 10 seconds again and your EURO
alarm system will be disarmed, and the door will unlock.
Access Control/Entry Control: The readers can be used also for opening doors only without
the ability to set and unset. Please contact your alarm engineer for more information on this
feature.
Page: 12
--- PAGE BREAK ---
EURO 46, 162 and 280 User Manual
9. Anti Code / Engineer Restore Facility
9.1 Anti-Code
Your alarm engineer may have set up your EURO alarm system so that either an ‘Anti-Code’ or
'Engineer Restore' is required in order to fully reset the EURO alarm system (your code will still
silence the alarm, but it will not reset the system).
After alarm activation has occurred,
enter a valid user code, or present a
valid tag, or press on the keyfob to
silence the alarm.
The keypad will display as shown to the
right.
Take note of the number, on the screen
and call your Alarm Receiving Centre
(ARC).
Press I.
When the time is displayed, enter the
number given to you by the ARC.
‘Engineer Restore Performed’ will be
displayed once the correct number has
been entered.
Press A .
9.2 Engineer Reset
When the time is displayed, enter the
Engineer code.
‘Engineer Reset Performed’ will be
displayed.
Press A.
Page: 13
--- PAGE BREAK ---
EURO 46, 162 and 280 User Manual
10. Intelligent Setting
If intelligent set is enabled by your alarm engineer, the system automatically recognises whether to
full set (Area A), or part set. (Area B).
NOTE: ‘Flexi Set’ (Page 19) should be disabled for this feature to work properly.
Enter a valid user code, or present a
valid tag to the Tag symbol as shown, or
press on a keyfob.
The EURO alarm system will set in area
B (the user code/tag/keyfob must be
programmed for areas A and B).
If a final exit input is activated during
the setting procedure the system will
quick set area A.
Page: 14
--- PAGE BREAK ---
EURO 46, 162 and 280 User Manual
11. Fault Indications / Unable To Set
11.1 Fault Indications
If any faults occur on the EURO alarm
system, these can be easily recognised
by the flashing ALERT LED.
After a valid code/tag has been
presented, any faults will be displayed
on the LCD display.
Depending on how the system has been
set up by your alarm engineer, it may be
possible to set the system with a fault,
to do this enter your code and press I.
NOTE: Any fault may affect the overall performance of your alarm control panel and therefore
your alarm engineer should be contacted for further assistance if any fault is active.
11.2 Unable to Set
If ‘unable to set’ is displayed, it indicates
that an input (zone) is open and the area
where the input is should be checked for
open windows, pets, movement etc.
If the problem cannot be resolved please
contact your alarm engineer, or omit the
input (page 16)
11.3 Keyfob Fault Indications
If the panel is unable to set for any reason, the keyfob status LED flashes AMBER indicating a
fault is on the system. The fault will be shown on the keypad.
Page: 15
--- PAGE BREAK ---
EURO 46, 162 and 280 User Manual
12. Advanced Functions
12.1 Chime Feature
The chime can be used for any input on
the system. This can be set up by your
alarm engineer. A 'chime' is heard after
the selected input has been activated.
To enable the chime on the keypad,
press c when the time is displayed in
'day mode'. ‘c’ will be displayed on the
right side of the keypad display. Press
c again to disable the chime feature.
12.2 Omitting Inputs
A detector may need to be isolated if a
room is occupied (e.g. by a pet).
Enter a user code/tag, once the EURO
alarm system has started to set, press
I.
Select the inputs that need to be omitted
and press A once you have finished.
After 10 seconds the exit time continues.
NOTE: Inputs have to be programmed
as ‘omittable’ by your alarm engineer to
enable this feature.
12.3 Keypad Hold Up
If an emergency alarm is needed, press
and hold both 1 and 7 .
A ‘hold up’ alarm will be generated.
NOTE 1: The Hold Up facility needs to
be enabled by your alarm engineer
(either silent or as a full alarm)
2-Key HU and any duress codes
programmed on the system by your
alarm engineer are not permitted to
send a signal to the Alarm Receiving
Centre under police regulations in
England, Wales or Northern Ireland
NOTE 2: The keyfob can also be
programmed to support a hold up alarm.
Please discuss this with your alarm
engineer.
Page: 16
--- PAGE BREAK ---
EURO 46, 162 and 280 User Manual
13. Master Manager Menu
A Master Manager Menu is available to access for the following functions:
Function
Set Date and Time
Omit Inputs
Change Codes
Review Logs
Phone Book
Walk Test
Siren Test
Start CHC SMS Update
Dial Out Menu
Allow Engineer Menu
Block Remote Set
Block UDL
Exit Manager Mode
Description
Programs the date and time.
Omits any 24 inputs only (except Personal Attack inputs).
Adds/Edits/Deletes User codes, tags and keyfobs.
Displays all event log information.
Adds/Edits/Deletes SMS phone numbers if enabled.
Tests each input (zone)
Tests each external sounder.
Sends a test call to the SMS station if SMS is enabled.
Used for uploading/downloading.
Enables or Disables Engineer access.
Blocks remote setting from the PC software.
Blocks uploading/downloading from the PC software..
Exits the Master Manager menu.
NOTE: The Master Manager code (default: 2222) allows access to all the options above. A ‘user
code’ (user code #1 default: 1234) has access to the ‘User Menu’ which includes the functions:
‘CHANGE CODE', ‘REVIEW LOGS’, ‘ALLOW ENGINEER MENU', and ‘EXIT USER MENU’.
13.1 Entering the Master Manager Menu
Press D.
Enter the Master Manager code or
present the Master Manager tag.
Press b or A to scroll through the
different functions mentioned above.
13.2 Exiting the Master Manager Menu
Press b or A keys to scroll through
until ‘EXIT MANAGER MODE' is displayed.
Press I.
Or, when a main menu item is displayed
(capital letters) press the a key.
Page: 17
--- PAGE BREAK ---
EURO 46, 162 and 280 User Manual
13.3 Set Date and Time
Press b or A to scroll to ‘SET DATE &
TIME’. Press I.
Enter the Year.
Press I.
Enter the Month.
Press I.
Enter the Day.
Press I.
Enter the Hours.
Press I.
Enter the Minutes.
Press I.
Use b or D to enable / disable
automatic update of the clock for
Daylight Savings Time (DST).
Press I.
13.4 Omit Inputs
Press b or A to scroll to ‘OMIT
INPUTS’. Press I.
Enter the inputs you require to be
omitted for the next setting procedure.
Press I.
NOTE: All inputs will be only omitted for
the next setting procedure.
Page: 18
--- PAGE BREAK ---
EURO 46, 162 and 280 User Manual
13.5 Change Codes (Adding codes, tags and keyfobs)
The ‘CHANGE CODES’ function allows adding, editing and deleting of user codes, tags and
keyfobs (if wireless technology has been enabled by your alarm engineer). The master manager
code can also be changed.
Depending on the EURO alarm system you have, the maximum number of user codes/tags
changes, If the wireless technology is enabled, up to 32 keyfobs may be programmed.
13.5.1 Button Actions:
Each wireless keyfob has 4 buttons that can be programmed for any of the functions below:
No Action = Disables the button.
Show Status = If the keyfob is learnt the LED will flicker when asked for the status.
Set Area = Sets the chosen area. ‘User Controls’ will be displayed and will require an area
to be chosen.
Unset Any Area = Unsets any area on the system.
Latch Output = Enables an output that your engineer may have programmed. ‘Output’ will
be displayed and will require an output to be selected.
Timed Output = Enables an output for a period of time that your engineer may have
programmed. ‘Output’ will be displayed and will require an output to be selected.
13.5.2 Flexi Set
Flexi-set allows you to choose which area to set if a user code is assigned to one or more
area. If this function is disabled, when a user code is entered, the EURO alarm system will
automatically set the area that the code is assigned to.
Press b or A to scroll to ‘CHANGE
CODES’. Press I.
To add a new code, tag, or keyfob press
I. Press A to delete or change a user
code (see further down for details).
Press [ or ] to choose a user
number. Press I.
Enter the new code, present a tag or
press and hold a keyfob button until the
display changes. Once ‘asterisks’ appear,
the tag or user code will be now
assigned to this user. Press I.
Programming Wireless Keyfobs
If a keyfob is programmed, the 'User
Name' will be displayed on the keypad.
Enter the user name. Press I.
Press [ or ] to choose the button to
program. Press I.
Press [ or ] to choose the action
assigned to the button. Press I and
perform the further action as mentioned
above (‘Button Actions’).
Page: 19
--- PAGE BREAK ---
EURO 46, 162 and 280 User Manual
Press [ or ] to choose between
'User' or 'Manager'. Press I
NOTE: This screen will not be displayed
if you have programmed a wireless
keyfob.
Select the areas that the user will be
assigned to: A, B, C or D.
Press I.
Press [ or ] to choose between
'Unset/Set', 'Unset Only', 'Set Only' or
'None'. Press I.
(This screen will not be displayed if you
have programmed a wireless keyfob)
Press [ or ] to enable or disable
'Flexi-Set'. Press I.
(This screen will not be displayed if you
have programmed a wireless keyfob)
Enter the user name (for help on
predictive text please see page 8)
Press I.
Press I to delete or change a user.
Delete User
Press [ or ] to scroll through the
users, or enter the user number and
press I.
Press I to delete a user, or press A
to change a user.
Change User
Press I to change a user code, and
follow the screen shots previously.
Change Master Manager Code
To edit the Master Manager Code, press
I.
Enter the new code, present a tag or
press and hold a keyfob button until the
display changes. Press I.
Repeat the same procedure mentioned
previously.
13.5.3 Quick Adding of a New Tag
If during the unset mode you present a tag to the system which is not recognised, you will
be asked if you would like to add it as a valid user.
Page: 20
--- PAGE BREAK ---
EURO 46, 162 and 280 User Manual
Quick Adding of a New Tag
Press I to add the tag.
Enter a valid master manager code/tag
to authorise the EURO alarm system to
accept the new tag.
13.6 Review Logs
The ‘Review Logs’ function monitors all operational information of the EURO alarm system, such
as setting/unsetting information and alarm activations etc.
Press b or A to scroll to ‘REVIEW
LOGS’. Press I.
Press I.
The most recent event will be
displayed, press b or D to scroll
backwards and forwards through the
log.
Press the c key to show more
information (such as which input
activated, or which user set the system
etc.)
13.7 Phonebook
If SMS texting is programmed, 4 mobile numbers may be programmed and can be changed in
this function. If any numbers are added, you will need to enable each one and also perform a
CHC SMS test to activate each call (see page 22). If “do not use” is shown on the display of a
number, then a telephone number already exists that is communicating to an Alarm Receiving
Centre (this can only be changed by your engineer).
Press b or A to scroll to
‘PHONEBOOK’. Press I.
Press b or D to scroll through the
different telephone numbers.
Enter the mobile number. Press I.
Press [ or ] to enable or disable
the number. Press I.
Page: 21
--- PAGE BREAK ---
EURO 46, 162 and 280 User Manual
13.8 Walk Test
The ‘Walk Test’ function allows the testing of all programmed inputs on the EURO alarm system.
Press b or A to scroll to ‘WALK
TEST’. Press I.
Select which level set to walk test.
Press I to walk test all inputs or
press the A to walk test an input
individually.
Walk Test Inputs
Walk test the mentioned inputs on the
display. After all inputs have been walk
test successfully ‘walk test completed’
will be displayed.
Walk Test Individual Inputs
Press [ or ] to scroll through the
different inputs and press I to walk
test that input.
13.9 Siren Test
This function is used to test the siren and strobe outputs.
Press b or A to scroll to ‘SIREN
TEST’. Press I.
This tests both the siren and strobe
outputs. Press I.
13.10 Start CHC SMS Update
Your EURO alarm system may have been configured to send messages to a mobile telephone. If
so, the system will call the appropriate messaging bureau and forward the message to your
mobile telephone whenever an event occurs that is important to you.
Message calls are charged at the normal network rate current at the time of the call. The fee for
routine checking is collected automatically via a premium rate number when the EURO panel
makes its regular authorisation and routing call to the Castle Host Computer (CHC). Should this
call fail, the display will show ‘CHC Test Fail’ until the next time that the call is made
successfully (see next page for making test calls to the CHC). This acts as a reminder that SMS
Message signalling may not be operational, but will not interfere with this, or any other aspect
of the alarm system. If you wish to change the information sent to your mobile telephone,
please contact your alarm system installation company.
NOTE 1: Please note that all CHC calls are 50p per call
NOTE 2: It is recommended that this test is only undertaken under the supervision of your
alarm installation engineer.
Press b or A keys to scroll to ‘START
CHC SMS UPDATE'. Press I.
The control panel will then call the
CHC. If ‘Failed CHC test’ is displayed,
please call your engineer.
Page: 22
--- PAGE BREAK ---
EURO 46, 162 and 280 User Manual
13.11 Dial Out Menu
The control panel may be dialled into, and programming information kept on a PC using the
InSite UDL software. This function allows the control panel to dial a Pre-programmed PC
telephone number (programmed by your engineer) to directly dial to a PC. This is usually used
when your engineer requests it.
Press b or A keys to scroll to ‘DIAL
OUT MENU’. Press I.
Press [ or ] to scroll through the
different PC numbers, press I to dial that
number
Press [ or ] to select the operation
that needs to be performed. Press I.
The control panel will dial the
programmed PC. If this fails please
contact your engineer.
Press A.
13.12 Allow Engineer Menu
If this function is enabled, the engineer will require authorisation from you before they can
access the engineering menu.
Press the b or A keys to scroll to
‘ALLOW ENGINEER MENU’. Press I.
Press [ or ] to select either ‘Yes’ or
‘No’. Press I.
13.13 Block Remote Set
Your alarm system may be configured so that your alarm installation company can remotely
set/unset. Should you wish to block this access, you can enable this function.
Press the b or A keys to scroll to
‘BLOCK REMOTE SET’. Press I.
Press [ or ] to select either ‘Yes’ or
‘No’. Press I.
Page: 23
--- PAGE BREAK ---
EURO 46, 162 and 280 User Manual
13.14 Block UDL
Your alarm system may be configured so that your alarm installation company can upload and
download into the control panel, Should you wish to block this access, and you can enable this
function.
Use the b and A keys to scroll to
‘BLOCK UDL’. Press the I key
Press [ or ] to select either ‘Yes’ or
‘No’. Press I.
14. Disclaimer
PSTN Communications
The EURO 46, 162 and 280 may have a PSTN Modem connected that has the ability to send:
1. Electronic messages to an Alarm Receiving Centre (ARC),
2. Text Messages via Short Message Services (SMS).
In order for the PSTN modem to communicate correctly, the alarm engineer must connect the PSTN
modem (installed on the EURO alarm system) to an appropriate Plain Old Telephone System (POTS)
which has an appropriate service level agreement with a suitable POTS operator. Moreover, the
service level agreement must allow the EURO alarm system the ability to dial Premium Rate
numbers.
In order for the EURO alarm system to send SMS messages, it must dial an embedded number that
connects to an SMS server. The EURO alarm system passes the SMS message to the SMS server,
which in turn forwards the SMS to the user’s mobile phone. Please check with your alarm engineer
for exact charges.
The EURO alarm system will dial the Pyronix Host Computer periodically in order to check and verify
the SMS server routing information. Charges for this service are raised by use of a premium rate
telephone number and are currently 50p per call*.
Electronic messages and SMS messages are carried by the POTS/SMS Server operator by means of
networks and transmission facilities over which Pyronix Ltd has no control. Pyronix shall therefore
not be responsible for the POTS/SMS Server operator’s service level or the POTS/SMS Server
operator’s network failures.
*Charges correct as of 31/3/2014
Page: 24
--- PAGE BREAK ---
EURO 46, 162 and 280 User Manual
15. Engineer Contacts and Tables
15.1 Engineer Information
Alarm Company
Date of Installation
Site Reference
Engineer Name
Engineer Contact Number
Installed to Grade
Environmental Class
II
Your panel is suitable for use in installations designed to meet the European requirements of
Security Grade 2 or 3 (depending which system is installed), Environmental Class 2. When all
parts are working normally, this equipment in combination with the PSTN modem and suitable
ARC equipment will meet the requirements of ATS2.
External set/unset readers and wireless sirens meet the requirements of environmental class 4.
Number of Code Differs: tag hex code.
Your panel is designed to automatically inhibit certain functionality. The factory default settings
are shown below:
15.1.1 Intruder Alarm Signal
After 3* unconfirmed alarms in the same area or 1 confirmed alarm. * This figure is
programmable by the Engineer.
15.1.2 Tamper Alarm Signal
After 3* unconfirmed alarms in the same area or 1 confirmed alarm. * This figure is
programmable by the Engineer.
15.1.3 Keypad
After 30 key presses without entering a valid code, keys are disabled for 90 seconds. After
reinstatement, this will be repeated after each 7 key presses until a valid code is entered.
15.1.4 Tag Reader (Or Tag at a keypad)
After 6 presentations of an invalid tag, the reader will be disabled for 90 seconds. After
reinstatement, this will be repeated for each invalid tag until a valid tag is used.
15.2 Certification
All Wireless devices comply with the following EU requirements:
EMC Directive
Low Voltage Directive
R&TTE Directive
2004/108/EC
2006/95/EC
1999/5/EC
And meet the following standards where relevant:
EN 61000-6-3:2007
EMC. Generic emission standard. Residential, commercial and light
+A1:2011
industry
Immunity requirements for components of fire, intruder and social
EN 50130-4:2011
EN 60950-1:2006
+A12:2012
Information technology equipment. Safety. General requirements
EN 50131-5-3:2005+
A1:2008
Grade 2. Interconnections for equipment using radio frequency
techniques
ETSI EN 3014893:2000
ETSI EN 300 220
CEPT/ERC
EMC. Radio equipment. Part 3: Short range devices (SRD) 9kHz to
40GHz
EMC. Receiver Class 1, Environmental Category 1
Recommendation 70-03 Annex 1
Compliant operation is only guaranteed when installed and operated according to the relevant
installation and user manuals.
Page: 25
--- PAGE BREAK ---
EURO 46, 162 and 280 User Manual
15.3 Input Contact Table
Input No
Input Name
Input Areas
Description
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
Page: 26
--- PAGE BREAK ---
EURO 46, 162 and 280 User Manual
Input No
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
Input Name
Input Areas
Page: 27
Description
--- PAGE BREAK ---
EURO 46, 162 and 280 User Manual
15.4 Code Table
Code No
Code Type (Code/Tag/Fob)
Code Areas
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
Page: 28
Code Name
--- PAGE BREAK ---
EURO 46, 162 and 280 User Manual
Code No
Code Type (Code/Tag/Fob)
Code Areas
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
Page: 29
Code Name
--- PAGE BREAK ---
EURO 46, 162 and 280 User Manual
Page: 30
--- PAGE BREAK ---
EURO 46, 162 and 280 User Manual
Page: 31
--- PAGE BREAK ---
--- PAGE BREAK ---
For electrical products sold within the European
Community: At the end of the electrical product’s useful
life, it should not be disposed of with household waste.
Please recycle where facilities exist. Check with your Local
Authority or retailer for recycling advice in your country.
When disposing of the product the batteries must be
removed and disposed of separately in accordance with the
local regulations
--- PAGE BREAK ---
=== PDF TEXT: pyronix_enforcer-v11-programming-guide.txt ===
ENFORCER V11
PROGRAMMING GUIDE
Document SAP: 102028847-02
--- PAGE BREAK ---
DOCUMENT CONVENTIONS
TERMINOLOGY
INTERCHANGEABLE WORDS
DESCRIPTION
Armed, set
When an area or level is armed, if a zone is triggered, the system will follow
the appropriate (programmable) actions.
Disarmed, unset
When an area or level is disarmed, the panel will not react unless specifically
programmed to do so.
Siren, sounder, bell
A warning device (usually external) that is generally configured to give
audible and visual notification that the system has been activated.
Area, partition
A group of zones assigned to be active when that particular area is armed.
This is usually named ‘Area A’ or renamed to a personal choice such as ‘Full Set’
or ‘Shop’.
Zone, input
This refers to a detector or sensor connected to the system, whether this be
wired or wireless.
Output, PGM, PG
An output is a signal from the panel to instruct another device to operate.
This is usually a voltage that triggers a wired siren, a garage door, a wireless
siren etc.
Bypass, omit
The act of stopping a zone from becoming armed. A wired zone will still
detect an intruder or object but the system will not react to it - a wireless
zone will become dormant.
ICONS
Important information
This information should be read and taken into consideration when installing. Failure to do so
may result in faults and unexpected errors with the system and or peripherals.
Notes
Highlights parts of the process where extra care is needed or where sections of the programming
may be impacted by other options in the menus.
Hints
Helpful information for a smoother installation of the system.
ii
ENFORCER V11 PROGRAMMING GUIDE
--- PAGE BREAK ---
CONTENTS
Document Conventions
Terminology
Icons
Default Codes
Access Codes
Clean Start Codes
Other Codes
Engineer Menu Navigation
Accessing The Engineer Menu
Navigation
Main Menus and Sub-menus
Exiting The Engineer Menu
Engineer Menu Options
General Information
Initial Power Up
Testing the keypad
Wired Keypads and Readers
Keypads
Entering and exiting the keypad menu
Keypad menu options
Text programming
Misc button typing
The internal tag reader
The external proximity reader
Engineer arm system
Engineer forced arm on inputs
The Engineer Menu
Set Date & Time
Wireless Device Control
Control Inputs?
Learn devices?
Delete devices?
Control bells?
Delete devices
Control Keypad/Speaker?
Delete Devices
Program key fob buttons?
Change Inputs
Input Types
Input Areas
Input Attributes
Change Inputs Programming
Choose Mode
Install ZEMs
Change Outputs
Assign Keypads/Readers
Programming Keypads
Programming Readers
Set Point or Unset Only
Entry Control or Access Control
Keypad / Speaker Options
Change Timers
Commonly used timers
Occupancy Timer and Suspend
Codes And Users
Change Duress Codes
ENFORCER V11 PROGRAMMING GUIDE
ii
ii
ii
5
5
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
7
8
8
8
9
9
9
9
10
10
10
10
11
11
12
12
12
13
13
13
13
14
14
14
15
16
16
16
17
18
19
19
20
21
22
22
22
23
23
24
24
24
25
25
3
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Change Master Manager Code
Change Engineer Code
Change Codes Programming
Volume Control
Volume Control Programming
System Options
Site Options
Occupancy Zones
System Displays
Exit Modes
Review Logs
Panel Log
Access Log
Engineer Tests
Walk Test Programming
Soak Control Programming
Test Siren, Battery Load Test and Outputs
Test Communications
Diagnostics
Wireless Devices
View Inputs
Signal Strength
Battery Status
Wireless Dual Frequency Menu
Wired Devices
View Inputs
View PSUs
Communications
Tablet Keypads
Wireless Device Diagnostics
Wired Device Diagnostics
Communications Diagnostics
Engineer Restore Options
Communications
Alarm Response
How Alarm Responses Work
Alarm Response Options
Set Up Downloading
Set Up Downloading via Cloud
Connecting to the InSite software
Set Up Downloading via RS232
Connecting to the InSite software:
Dial Out Menu
Software Revision
Clean Start
Exit Engineer Menu
Appendix A - Defaults
Appendix B - Input Types
Appendix C - Timers
Appendix D - Output Types
Appendix E - Fault Finding
Wireless Fault Displays
RS-485 Bus Problems
Power Supply Problems
Detection Faults
Communication Faults
Technical Support
4
ENFORCER V11 PROGRAMMING GUIDE
25
26
26
26
27
27
27
29
30
30
30
30
30
31
32
33
33
33
34
34
34
34
34
35
35
35
35
35
36
36
36
37
37
38
38
38
40
41
41
41
42
42
42
43
43
43
44
51
52
54
57
57
58
58
59
59
59
--- PAGE BREAK ---
DEFAULT CODES
ACCESS CODES
User Code
‘Blank’
Master Manager Code
2222
Engineer
1111
CLEAN START CODES
Clean start with the code ‘2000’ (UNGRADED)
Clean start with the code ‘2020’ (Grade 2)
Hint: For information on the system clean start defaults, see “Appendix A - Defaults” on page 44
OTHER CODES
Keypad Security Code
2000
Delete All Wireless Data
2000
ENGINEER MENU NAVIGATION
The Engineer Menu must be accessed in order to program all system configurations.
Please note
1. All tamper alarms (including case tamper), will be disabled once in the Engineer Menu.
2. All personal attack and fire alarms will not cause an alarm in the Engineer Menu.
ACCESSING THE ENGINEER MENU
Access to the Engineer Menu will be allowed if the system is disarmed. If armed, the system must be disarmed first
via a valid user code, tag or keyfob in order to gain access. If the ‘Allow Engineer Menu’ function in the Master
Manager Menu is set as ‘No’, the message ‘Authorisation Required’ will be shown and access will be denied until
this option is set as ‘Yes’.
1. Enter the Engineer code (default 1111).
2. If any faults that are active, they will be displayed now on the screen. Press h and enter the Engineer code
again.
3. ‘SET DATE & TIME?’ is displayed.
4. Engineer Menu has been accessed.
When the Engineer Menu is accessed, a high pitch tone is generated intermittently.
IMPORTANT NOTE: It is essential that a factory default (clean start) is performed after initial power up to
ensure that the correct defaults have been chosen.
ENFORCER V11 PROGRAMMING GUIDE
5
--- PAGE BREAK ---
NAVIGATION
= ‘NO’ - Press to move forward when in Engineer or Master Manager mode.
b = ‘BACK’ - Press to move backward when in Engineer or Master Manger mode.
= ‘YES’ - Press to enter into a sub-menu or option when in Engineer or Master Manger mode.
= Press to move from one option into another option while in a sub-menu.
a = Press to quick exit the Engineer Menu from any main menu (written in capital letters).
c = ‘CANCEL’ - Press to move back from one programmable option to the previous option
MAIN MENUS AND SUB-MENUS
SET DATE & TIME?
Year (00-99)
[21]
A Main Menu item is identified by:
A Sub-menu is identified by:
•
•
The menu item will be in capital letters
The menu item will be in lower case letters
In order to navigate in the menu system, answer the questions in the main and sub menus. For example, if the
question ‘WIRELESS DEVICE CONTROL?’ is displayed, then press or depending on the answer.
Pressing will enter a sub-menu called ‘Control Inputs?’ in this example. Pressing will enter the
programmable options of this sub-menu. Pressing will exit the individual option, move up from one submenu to the next sub-menu or back to the main menu.
EXITING THE ENGINEER MENU
When a Main Menu Item (a menu that is in capital letters) is displayed, press or scroll to ‘EXIT ENGINEER
MENU?’ and press .
6
ENFORCER V11 PROGRAMMING GUIDE
--- PAGE BREAK ---
ENGINEER MENU OPTIONS
Set date and time
ENGINEER MENU
Programs the date and time
“Set Date & Time” on page 12
SET DATE & TIME?
Wireless device control
Learns and deletes all wireless zones, bells and arming
stations.
Hint: Wireless keyfobs are learnt to the system in the Master Manager Menu.
“Wireless Device Control” on page 12
Change inputs
Programs all zone types, attributes, areas and names.
“Change Inputs” on page 16
WIRELESS DEVICE CONTROL?
CHANGE INPUTS?
CHOOSE MODE?
INSTALL ZEMS?
CHANGE OUTPUTS?
Choose mode
Configures the resistance range, EOL mode and response time
of the wired zones.
“Choose Mode” on page 19
Install ZEMs
ASSIGN KEYPADS/READERS?
CHANGE TIMERS?
CODES AND USERS?
Programs zone expansion modules (ZEMs) to the system.
“Install ZEMs” on page 19
VOLUME CONTROL?
Change outputs
SYSTEM OPTIONS?
Programs any outputs and assigns output modules on the
system.
REVIEW LOGS?
“Change Outputs” on page 20
ENGINEER TESTS?
Assign keypads and readers
Assigns wired/wireless keypads and readers, and enables
readers for entry control.
“Assign Keypads/Readers” on page 21
DIAGNOSTICS?
ENGINEER RESTORE OPTIONS?
COMMUNICATIONS?
Change timers
This function controls all timers on the system.
“Change Timers” on page 24
ALARM RESPONSE?
Codes and users
SET UP DOWNLOADING?
Changes the ‘Engineer code’, ‘Master Manager code’ and
‘Duress codes’.
DIAL OUT MENU
Hint: User codes are edited in the Master Manager menu.
“Codes And Users” on page 25
SOFTWARE REVISION?
Volume control
CLEAN START?
Alters volume levels of the loudspeaker only. Volume levels of
keypads are programmed individually in the keypad menu.
EXIT ENGINEER MENU
“Volume Control” on page 26
System options
Contains sub-menus for configuring options such as how the system will operate day-to-day and system displays.
“System Options” on page 27
Review logs
View system events which are time and date stamped.
“Review Logs” on page 30
Engineer tests
Allows the engineer to test zones, outputs, batteries and the siren etc.
“Engineer Tests” on page 31
ENFORCER V11 PROGRAMMING GUIDE
7
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Diagnostics
Displays power, zone status, wireless arming stations, wireless signal strength and wireless battery levels.
“Diagnostics” on page 34
Engineer restore options
Configures which events can be reset by the user and which require an engineer.
“Engineer Restore Options” on page 37
Communications
Configures the signalling and smart device control of the system.
“Communications” on page 38
Alarm response
Controls how the system responds in certain situations such as confirmed activations.
“Alarm Response” on page 38
Set up downloading
Allows the system to be accessed remotely via upload/download software.
“Set Up Downloading” on page 41
Dial out menu
Used to dial out to pre-programmed upload/download software PCs.
“Dial Out Menu” on page 42
Software revision
This option identifies all software revisions.
“Software Revision” on page 43
Clean start
Wipes all the data from the panel and reverts back to pre-defined factory configuration.
“Clean Start” on page 43
Exit engineer menu
Exits the menu and returns to day mode.
“Exit Engineer Menu” on page 43
GENERAL INFORMATION
Default Codes
Engineers
1111
Master Manager
2222
User
‘Blank’
INITIAL POWER UP
Power up the system and an alarm will be generated. Proceed to the on-board keypad, which will display:
1. Once power has been applied to the system, ‘Please Wait’ will be displayed, followed by ‘485 Comms Lost’. After
approximately 1 minute, the system will display the time (00:00), indicating the system is ready to use.
2. The on-board keypad is defaulted to keypad address ‘0’.
Testing the keypad
With the system disarmed, press the key for 5 seconds at any keypad. This will cause all the LEDs on that
keypad to illuminate, and the LCD screen to display each pixel. The keypad will revert to normal display after the
test which will last about 10 seconds.
8
ENFORCER V11 PROGRAMMING GUIDE
--- PAGE BREAK ---
WIRED KEYPADS AND READERS
Keypads
Three additional wired keypads may also be connected to the system for arming/disarming, programming and
entering text.
For help navigating menus, please see “Navigation” on page 6.
Hint: If any additional keypads are installed on the system, it is possible to access the Engineer Menu on any keypad. For example, if the Engineer menu
is accessed on keypad address 0, the other keypads will display ‘System Busy’. To access the Engineer menu on any other keypad, press the key on
the relevant keypad and the Engineer menu will be displayed.
Please note: Four wireless keypads can be connected to the system.
Entering and exiting the keypad menu
To enter the Keypad Menu, press and hold the d button until ‘SECURITY CODE:’ is displayed, enter ‘2000’. To exit,
press the a key.
Keypad menu options
Address
Used to assign an address to a keypad.
Language
Allows you to assign a language to the keypad menu only.
Zone status
Displays the resistance of the two hard wired zones to the keypad terminals.
Key-click volumes
Alters the volume of the tone heard when a keypad button is pressed.
Tag volume
Sets the volume when tag is presented.
Keypad volume
Sets the general volume of the keypad.
ID tag
Used to read the unique ID number of the tag.
Reset keypad
Resets the keypad to factory settings.
Backlight force
Change to ‘1’ to force the LCD back-light on all the time. If left on ‘0’, the LCD will dim after 30 seconds.
PA/Fire timer
Configures how long the HU and Fire buttons have to be pressed for before an alarm is generated.
ENFORCER V11 PROGRAMMING GUIDE
9
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Text programming
On the system it is possible to label items such as the following:
•
Zones – Two labels; zone name and location
•
Area names
•
Site name
•
Keypad/reader – Two labels; keypad description and location
•
Zone and output expander location descriptions
•
User names
The control panel incorporates a predictive text feature, and works like so:
Enter ‘B’ and ‘Bedroom’ will be displayed. If the word that is required does not appear, then type the word letter by
letter.
Hint: To type a word, press the relevant button the appropriate number of times – e.g. for the letter ‘k’ press 5 two times, or for the letter ‘s’ press 7
four times. For punctuation marks, press the 1 button multiple times until the desired character is shown.
Misc button typing
BUTTON
TEXT FUNCTION
a
Toggles between upper and lower case characters
b
Moves cursor left
c
Clears letters / adds a space
d
Moves cursor right
[]
Moves the cursor left and right
The internal tag reader
The Internal tag reader can be used for arming/disarming, entry control or access control. Refer to the installation
manual for all connections.
Tag area (where a proximity tag/card must be presented to arm/disarm)
Blue LED
Alert
Amber LED
Alarm
Red LED
Tamper
Red LED
Fault
Amber LED
Disarmed
Green LED
The external proximity reader
The external proximity reader can be used for arming/disarming, entry control or access control. Refer to the
installation manual for all connections.
To arm/disarm the system using the external proximity reader, present a preprogrammed tag to the centre of the unit.
The unit will display the system status:
•
Green indicates the system is disarmed.
•
Red indicates the system is armed.
Present the tag again within 10 seconds to arm or disarm the system.
Please note: The system will arm depending on the type of exit mode programmed (final door, timed or
push to set)
10
ENFORCER V11 PROGRAMMING GUIDE
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Engineer arm system
Arming and disarming the system can be done using the Engineer code.
1.
Press .
2.
Enter the Engineer code (default 1111).
3.
Press if any faults appear.
4.
‘SET SYSTEM?’ is displayed.
5.
Press
6.
Select the areas to set. Press
7.
The arming period will begin.
8.
Once the timer expires, and a beep is heard, the area is armed.
9.
To disarm, enter the Engineer code again.
Engineer forced arm on inputs
The ‘Force Arm On Inputs’ function enables two nominated zones on the system to be set. Either zone can be
triggered to allow real life signalling or alarm testing. This function is useful when a building is full of people and
these tests are needed.
Please note:
1. The system will give the correct signalling response to the arming, and any resulting alarm.
2. If the system has been armed by any other code, the Engineer code will not disarm it.
1.
Press
2.
Enter the Engineer code (default 1111).
3.
Press if any faults appear.
4.
‘SET SYSTEM’ is displayed.
5.
Press
6.
‘FORCE ARM ON 1st INPUT’ is displayed.
7.
Enter the 1st zone that is to be active. Press
8.
Enter the 2nd zone that is to be active. Press
Please note: If a Final Exit zone is selected, once activated this will start the
entry time and not immediately trigger the alarm.
9.
Select the areas to set. Press
10.
The arming period will begin
11.
Once the timer expires, and a beep is heard, the system is armed and the 2
zones chosen will be active.
12.
To unset, enter the Engineer code again.
ENFORCER V11 PROGRAMMING GUIDE
11
--- PAGE BREAK ---
THE ENGINEER MENU
IMPORTANT NOTE: Any programming is only saved when exiting the Engineer menu. It is essential that a
‘CLEAN START’ is performed after initial power up.
SET DATE & TIME
SET DATE & TIME?
All log entries are date and time stamped. This can also programmed in the Master Manager Mode. The time is
also shown on the LCD in ‘Day Mode’ .
Please note: Powering down the system will reset the time and date information unless communications
are configured and the system reconnects to the data path on power up.
Change year
For the year 2021, enter 21.
Change month
For March, enter 03.
Change day
For 31st, enter 31.
Change hours
Use 24 hour clock format. For 8pm enter 20:00.
Change minutes
For 7:30, enter 30.
DST (Summer Time) Adjust
If activated this option will automatically change one hour ahead and backward for the summer and winter time.
WIRELESS DEVICE CONTROL
WIRELESS DEVICE CONTROL?
Control Inputs?
Control Bells?
Control Keypad/Speakers?
Program Keyfob Buttons?
Without any wired or wireless expanders added to the system, a maximum of 32 wireless zones, 32 wireless
keyfobs, 2 wireless external bells and 4 wireless arming stations are supported.
Hint: Adding a wireless expander can increase the number of wireless zones to 64 but will not increase the number of keyfobs, bells and arming stations
permitted.
12
ENFORCER V11 PROGRAMMING GUIDE
--- PAGE BREAK ---
CONTROL INPUTS?
Learn devices?
This menu starts the procedure of learning wireless zones onto the system.
Input
This menu chooses which zone on the system is to be learned. ‘Learnt’ will be displayed if a device is already
learnt, or ‘Available’ if it is not.
Learning…
Open the wireless device.
Remove the plastic insulation to enable the battery.
If the device is not learnt, the GREEN and RED LEDs on the device will flash (alternating).
Press and hold the ‘learn’ button on the device and all three LEDs start cycling BLUE, GREEN and RED.
Release the ‘learn’ button. If successful, ‘Input Learnt’ will be displayed on the keypad and a confirmation tone will
be emitted.
If that zone has already been learnt, ‘Input learnt already’ will be displayed.
To locate the learn button on each wireless peripheral, please refer to the installation guide provided with the
device.
Delete devices?
Already learnt zones may be deleted from this menu.
Delete all
To delete all wireless zone devices, enter ‘2000’. ‘Please wait’ will be displayed while the system deletes all the learnt
wireless zones.
Choose input to delete
This option deletes only a specific wireless device learnt to a zone. Any zones that display ‘learnt’ can be deleted.
‘Please wait’ will be displayed while the panel deletes the wireless device. Return to this process to delete more
devices.
Control bells?
Learn devices?
Entering this menu allows the learning of wireless bells onto the system.
Select bell
Selects the bell on the system that is to be learnt. ‘Learnt’ will be displayed if a bell is already learnt, or ‘Available’
will be displayed if not.
Learning…
Open the wireless bell.
Plug the battery connector into the battery terminal.
If a device is not learned, the GREEN and RED LEDs on the device will flash (alternating).
Press and hold the ‘Learn’ button on the device and all three LEDs start cycling BLUE, GREEN and RED.
Release the ‘Learn’ button. If successful, ‘Bell Learnt’ will be displayed and a confirmation tone on the panel will be
emitted.
If a siren has already been learnt, ‘Bell learnt already’ will be displayed.
ENFORCER V11 PROGRAMMING GUIDE
13
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Delete devices
Already learnt sirens may be deleted by entering this menu.
Delete all
To delete all wireless bells enter ‘2000’. ‘Please wait’ will be displayed while the system deletes them.
Select bell to delete
This option deletes only a specific wireless bell that is learnt. Any bell that displays ‘learnt’ can be deleted. ‘Please
wait’ will be displayed while the system deletes the wireless bell. Return to this process to delete more devices.
Control Keypad/Speaker?
Wireless Arming Station functions are programmed in the ‘ASSIGN KEYPADS/READERS?’ menu and are mapped
as:
Kpd/Spk #1 : Address [4]
Kpd/Spk #2 : Address [5]
Kpd/Spk #3 : Address [6]
Kpd/Spk #4 : Address [7]
For the wireless arming station options, please see “Keypad / Speaker Options” on page 23.
Learn devices?
Entering this menu allows the learning of wireless arming stations onto the system.
Select keypad / speaker
Selects the arming station on the system that is to be learnt. ‘Learnt’ will be displayed if an arming station is
already learnt, or ‘Available’ will be displayed if not.
Select keypad / speaker Learning…
Open the wireless arming station.
Plug the battery connector into the battery terminal.
If a device is not learned, the GREEN and RED LEDs on the device will flash (alternating).
Press and hold the ‘LEARN’ button on the device and all three LEDs will start cycling BLUE, GREEN and RED.
Release the ‘LEARN’ button. If successful, ‘Arming Station Learnt’ will be displayed and a confirmation tone on
the panel will be emitted. If an Arming Station has already been learnt, ‘Arming Station learnt already’ will be
displayed.
Please note: For speaker/sounder unit learning instructions, please refer to the document provided with
the unit.
Delete Devices
Arming Stations and speaker/sounders that have already been learnt, may be deleted by entering this menu.
Delete all
To delete all wireless arming stations enter ‘2000’ (this is the system security code). ‘Please wait’ will be displayed
while the system deletes them.
Select keypad / speaker to delete
This option deletes only a specific wireless arming station or speaker/sounder that is learnt. Any addresses that
display ‘learnt’ can be deleted. ‘Please wait’ will be displayed while the system deletes the device. Return to this
process to delete more devices.
14
ENFORCER V11 PROGRAMMING GUIDE
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Program key fob buttons?
This menu is used to program the functionality of the buttons on the key fobs.
Choose User
Select the user key fob to program.
Select Button
The different buttons and button combinations that may be programmed are:
[1] Lock Button
[2] Unlock Button
[3] Button I
[4] Button II
[5] Lock + Unlock Buttons
[6] I + II Buttons
[7] Lock + I Buttons
[8] Unlock + II Buttons
Button Action
Options are: ‘show status’, ‘set area’, ‘unset area’ and ‘operate output’. Two key combinations may also have ‘hold
up’ assigned to them. ‘Set area’ features a sub-option to choose which area to set. ‘Operate output’ features a sub
option to choose which output to trigger.
Program keyfob buttons
1.
Press or to scroll to ‘WIRELESS DEVICE CONTROL’. Press .
2.
‘Control Inputs’ will be displayed. Press h.
3.
‘Control Bells’ will be displayed. Press h.
4.
‘Control Keypads/Speakers’ will be displayed, press h.
5.
‘Program Keyfob Buttons’ will be displayed. Press .
6.
Press [ or ] to select the user (1-80) and press .
7.
Press [ or ] to select the button to be programmed and press .
8.
Press [ or ] to select the action of the button and press .
9.
Select the area that the keyfob should be programmed in, press .
Hint: Panic alarm (function option 6) must be allocated to two buttons pressed together ( I + II recommended,
button option 6) and can only be programmed in the Engineer Menu.
Please note: Keyfobs are learnt in the Master Manager Menu under ‘EDIT USERS’.
Hint: Using the output types 170-199 (User Defined), outputs can be activated by the keyfob buttons and can be programmed in ‘CHANGE
OUTPUTS?’.
ENFORCER V11 PROGRAMMING GUIDE
15
--- PAGE BREAK ---
CHANGE INPUTS
CHANGE INPUTS?
Input [--]
A total of 66 zones can be programmed on the system. All zones are unused by default. To save any programming
the Engineer menu must be exited.
INPUT TYPES
For all input type options, please see “Appendix B - Input Types” on page 51.
Most commonly used input types:
•
•
•
•
[06] Intruder
[07] Final Exit
[08] Entry Route
[13] Day Alarm.
Please note:
1. If an alarm is triggered from an Entry Route zone, it will be stored for 2 seconds before an alarm is
activated. If a Final Exit zone is triggered within this time, the system will start the entry time, rather than
an intruder alarm.
2. Zones may be automatically omitted at the time of reinstatement, which is at the end of confirmation
time. This is irrelevant of whether the zone has the attribute ‘Omittable’ set to ‘Yes’ or ‘No’
INPUT AREAS
The system supports up to four areas and could be used as follows:
•
Area A:
All Factory
•
Area B:
Reception Only
•
Area C:
Offices Only
•
Area D:
Factory Floor Only
Input Area (Any/All)
In some installations a ‘common’ area may be required. A common area is an area that only arms when other
specific areas become armed. Example: An entry and exit reception area in a building may only need to be armed
if both the offices and warehouse are armed. If the office in Area A is armed, but the warehouse in Area B is still
occupied, then the reception would still need to be inactive so people would be able to leave the premises
via the entry / exit reception route. One zone can be allocated to one or more areas. In this example the zones
located in the reception area will be programmed so that the reception zones will be in Area A and Area B, so
these zones must have the Input Areas attribute set as ‘ALL’ programmed.
Area A: Office - Zones = 3, 4, 5
Area B: Warehouse - Zones = 6, 7, 8
Reception zones – 1 and 2 are programmed into both Areas A and B, with both zones’ Input Areas attribute
configured as ‘ALL’. The Reception area zones will now only become active if both Area A and Area B are both
armed.
Please note: All zones in a common area must be programmed as ‘Entry Route’ or ‘Final Exit’ and the
‘Common Lobby’ option in Site Options needs to be enabled.
16
ENFORCER V11 PROGRAMMING GUIDE
--- PAGE BREAK ---
INPUT ATTRIBUTES
Chime
The internal sounder will sound a chime if enabled.
Single
Chimes once when the zone is triggered.
Follow
Chimes when the zone is triggered and only stops once the zone is inactive. To enable/disable the chime in day
mode press , when a ‘c’ is displayed on the keypad, the chime is enabled.
Omittable
Enables the zone to be manually omitted from the arming procedure.
Double knock
The system will only generate an alarm if this zone is triggered twice within a pre-set period, or if the zone
remains in fault condition for that period.
For the double knock timer, see “Change Timers” on page 24.
Normally open
Enables the system to respond correctly when detectors of ‘normally open’ configuration are programmed to
the system. Alternatively converts input types which default to ‘normally open’ (e.g. Push to set) to operate with
normally closed devices.
Occupancy
If enabled, and the zone is not triggered before the timer expires, then the programmed action is taken. If
the detector is triggered, timer is reset. The timer can also be programmed to be suspended when the area
containing the zone is armed.
For the occupancy timer and arm suspension, see “Change Timers” on page 24.
To program the actions when the timer expires, see “Occupancy Zones” on page 29.
Monitor activity
Enables the zone to generate a internal alarm and a log entry if the zone does not detect any activity for a period
specified by the NAT (Non Activity Time.)
For the NAT time, see “Change Timers” on page 24.
Special log
Forces a log entry when the zone is opened or closed, even when an alarm does not result. May be selected to
apply when the system is set, when unset, or always.
Supervision
If enabled, the wireless zone is supervised to make sure it is still polling the system. If disabled, there will be no
alert if this zone is out of signal range of the system or stops polling the system.
Confirm group
If zones are programmed into the same confirm group, multiple zones activated in the same confirm group will
only generate an unconfirmed alarm signal. If two or more zones in different confirm groups are activated within
the confirm time a confirm signal will be generated. This is useful when two or more shock sensors are being
activated by the same event. If a confirm group is selected as ‘00’, the zones are not part of any group.
Hint: Zones programmed into Confirm Group ‘99’ will never contribute to a confirmed alarm signal.
Input description and location
A name and location can be entered here. The name will appear on the display if an alarm has occurred; the
location is used for a more detailed reference if required.
ENFORCER V11 PROGRAMMING GUIDE
17
--- PAGE BREAK ---
CHANGE INPUTS PROGRAMMING
1.
Press or to scroll to ‘CHANGE INPUTS?’. Press .
2.
Press [ or ] to select the zone to program (01-66). Press .
3.
‘Input Type’ will be displayed. Press [ or ] to select the input type or
input the shortcut number. See “Appendix B - Input Types” on page 51.
4.
Press , ‘Input Areas’ will be displayed. Select the areas to be assigned to
the zone and press .
5.
‘Input Areas’ will be still be displayed, but this time the options are ‘Any’ or
‘All’. Make a selection using then [ or ] then press .
Hint: In the vast majority of cases this must be programmed as “‘ANY’. The ‘ALL’ attribute is only used for a
common lobby/area scenario.
18
6.
‘Input Attributes’ will be displayed. If any attributes are needed for the zone,
press then press [ or ] to select between the attribute enable/
disable options. Finally press to go to the next attribute.
7.
‘Input Description’ will be displayed. Press to enter a name and
location for this device or press to return to input selection.
8.
‘Enter Name’ will be displayed. Enter the name of the zone and press .
This will be displayed if it is activated or when a fault occurs.
9.
‘Enter Location’ will be displayed. Enter the location of the zone and press
. This will be displayed if it is activated or when a fault occurs after the
name of the zone has been shown.
10.
Press [ or ] to select another zone to program (01-66) or press the
key to return to the Engineer menu.
ENFORCER V11 PROGRAMMING GUIDE
--- PAGE BREAK ---
CHOOSE MODE
CHOOSE MODE?
If an I/O board or any Zone Expander Module (Input Expander or ZEM) are used, the resistance, EOL mode and
response time of the zones can be programmed.
Please note: Alarm 4K7, Tamper 2K2 must be selected if wiring double pole to an expander.
End of Line (EOL) Range
Programs the panel to operate with different resistor values
[0] Alarm: 1K, Tamper: 1K.
[1] Alarm: 4K7, Tamper: 2K2.
[2] Alarm: 4K7, Tamper: 4K7.
[2] Wide range.
EOL Mode
EOL Mode programs all zone expanders to operate as:
[0] SR (Single End of Line - SEOL)
[1] DR (Double End of Line - DEOL)
Input Response Time
Input Response time programs the time that a zone trigger must be present before the system generates an
alarm.
[01] - [30] = 100ms to 3000ms
Please note: Settings above (>) 400ms do not comply with PD 6662 / EN 50131.
INSTALL ZEMS
INSTALL ZEMS?
ZEM Address [--]
The control panel supports up to a maximum 66 zones. Zone Expansion Modules (ZEMS) are used to expand the
system to have a further 32 wireless zones, 32 wired zones or a combination of both. There are also 2 zones that
can be used on an I/O Board if connected.
ZEM address
[0] ZEM Address 0 (Zones 35-42)
[1] ZEM Address 1 (Zones 43-50)
[2] ZEM Address 2 (Zones 51-58)
[3] ZEM Address 3 (Zones 59-66)
Please note: Zones 33 and 34 are taken from the I/O board, these do not need to be addressed.
ZEM installed
[0] No
[1] ZEM8/EURO37R
[2] EURO-ZEM32-WE
Enter location
The text entered here will be displayed on the LCD display if a fault occurs on the ZEM, so the ZEM can be easily
located or referenced. For example, the location text maybe “ZEM Kitchen”, “ZEM Loft” etc.
ENFORCER V11 PROGRAMMING GUIDE
19
--- PAGE BREAK ---
CHANGE OUTPUTS
CHANGE OUTPUTS?
Endstation Outputs?
ZEM Outputs?
Wireless Bells?
Output Module Outputs?
Keypad Outputs?
Reader Outputs?
User Outputs?
This function programs all output types, Any output type may be programmed to any of the system outputs,
including any outputs for wireless bells. Wired outputs must be used within their rated capacity. Please see the
installation manual.
Common output types
For all output type options, please see “Appendix D - Output Types” on page 54. Most commonly used output
types are:
[0003] Intruder Any
[0006] Confirmed Any
[0014] Siren Any
[0016] Strobe Any
[0018] Unconfirmed Any
[0051] Line Fault
[0052] Mains Fail
[1###] Follow Input
Endstation outputs
This function programs the wired bell, strobe and PGM output on the I/O board if connected.
ZEM outputs
If a zone expander with additional outputs has been connected to the system, this function programs the outputs
on each expander. The address of the expander is required for programming the outputs.
Wireless bells
At default, any wireless bells learnt to the system have the two outputs programmed as ‘Siren Any’ and ‘Strobe
Any’. These outputs can be programmed differently if required.
Output module outputs
If an output expander is connected to the system, it must be addressed in this function. All output programming
is also done here. A maximum of 1 output expander can be connected to the system.
Keypad outputs
Allows the programming of the PGM options for the outputs located on the wired keypads.
Reader outputs
Allows the programming of the PGM options for the outputs located on the wired readers.
User outputs
These outputs are used for creating automation control for devices. The user can control them remotely from the
user menu on the keypad or via the smart device app. The automated user outputs can be programmed (either
latched or timed) along with a name for the output which will appear on the app or LCD screen.
Timed
A timed output will be active for a programmed period of time and then reset itself.
Latched
A latched output will stay active once triggered until it is manually reset.
Hint: Polarity of the PGMs. The polarity of the outputs are normally switched negative, i.e. normal status OFF = 12VDC and in active status ON = 0VDC.
20
ENFORCER V11 PROGRAMMING GUIDE
--- PAGE BREAK ---
ASSIGN KEYPADS/READERS
ASSIGN KEYPADS/READERS?
Address [--]
Any additional keypads or readers must be addressed correctly before enabling them in this function. The
On-board keypad is automatically addressed as 0 on initial power up. Refer to installation manual for more
information.
Address
Up to three additional wired keypads or readers and four wireless arming stations can also be installed. Address 0
is used for the on-board keypad.
Please note: Each keypad has its own individual menu that programs the key-click volume, tag volume
and master volume. It will address a keypad, show the status of the keypad zones (if connected), force
the backlight on or off and show the identification number of a tag (once a tag is presented). The PA/Fire
timer can be programmed in this menu and this is also where the keypad is addressed.
To enter the keypad menu, press and hold the key until ‘SECURITY CODE’ is displayed, and then enter ‘2000’.
This function is also used to address the keypad.
Please note: Wireless arming stations are learnt to one of the four wireless arming station allocations on
the system. However, are seen as addresses 4-7 in ‘Assign Keypads and Readers’.
Type
[0] Keypad
[1] Reader
[2] Not Used.
Reader is
If a reader is installed, the following options can be assigned to the reader:
[0] Set Point
Reader used for arming and disarming.
[1] Not Used
Reader disabled
[2] Access Control
If an access control system is installed then the reader must be programmed as this type. The lock open time and
door open time can be programmed (in seconds).
[3] Unset Only
If the Reader is to be used as an unset device only, select this type.
[4] Entry Control
Used to lock/unlock doors and arm/disarm the system. The external or internal reader can have magnetic locks
connected to them. This option is used in conjunction with ‘tag opens doors’ in ‘SITE OPTIONS’. The lock open
time and door open time can be programmed (in seconds).
For information on ‘tag opens doors’, see “Site Options” on page 27.
Set point sets
A ‘Set Point’ means that you can program the keypad/reader to arm certain areas only, and is used in conjunction
with the areas allocated to a user code.
For example, if a user code is programmed to operate areas ‘A’ and ‘B’, but the keypad/reader is only programmed
to arm area ‘A’, then the system will arm only area ‘A’.
Selects the area that the device can arm and disarm.
ENFORCER V11 PROGRAMMING GUIDE
21
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Set point unsets
An ‘Unset Point’ means that you can program the keypad/reader to unset certain areas only. This is used in
conjunction with the areas allocated to a user code/tag.
For example, if a user code/tag is programmed to operate areas ‘A’ and ‘B’, but the keypad/reader is only
programmed to Unset area ‘A’, then the system will unset area ‘A’ only.
Set point in
The device needs to also be told which Areas it is operating “in”. For example, a keypad may only be needed to
operate in Area A, but other code users may use the keypad to quick arm other Areas (such as a cleaner, director,
caretaker etc). Therefore if Areas A and B are selected in the previous options (Arm point sets and unset), but Area
A only is selected in ‘Set point in’, then Area B will quick arm once a valid tag/code has been entered. To program
Areas operating with their programmed timer, then the Areas need to be entered into the “Set Point In” function.
Set point description
A name and location can be entered here. The name will appear on the display if an alarm has occurred, the
location is used for a more detailed reference if required. E.g. Name = Entrance Keypad. Location = Hall
PROGRAMMING KEYPADS
1.
Press or to scroll to ‘ASSIGN KEYPADS/READERS’. Press .
2.
Press [ or ] to select the address. Press .
3.
‘Type’ will be displayed. Press 0 to select keypad. Press
4.
‘Set Point Sets’ will be displayed. Select the area(s). Press . Set Point
Unsets’ will be displayed. Select the area(s). Press . ‘Set Point In’ will be
displayed. Select the area(s). Press .
5.
‘Set Point Description’ will be displayed. Press to enter the name and
location if required.
6.
‘Enter Name’ will be displayed. Enter the name of the keypad and press .
7.
‘Enter Location’ will be displayed. Enter the location of the keypad and press
.
8.
Press [ or ] to select another device address to program (0-3) or press
the h key to return to the Engineer menu
PROGRAMMING READERS
Set Point or Unset Only
22
1.
Press or to scroll to ‘ASSIGN KEYPADS/READERS’. Press .
2.
Press [ or ] to select the address. Press .
3.
‘Type’ will be displayed. Press 1 to select reader. Press .
4.
‘Reader is’ will be displayed. Press 0 for ‘Set Point’ or press 1 for ‘Unset
Only’ Press .
5.
‘Set Point Sets’ will be displayed. Select the area(s). Press . Set Point
Unsets’ will be displayed. Select the area(s). Press . ‘Set Point In’ will be
displayed. Select the area(s). Press .
6.
‘Set Point Description’ will be displayed. Press to enter the name and
location if required.
7.
‘Enter Name’ will be displayed. Enter the name of the keypad and press .
8.
‘Enter Location’ will be displayed. Enter the location of the keypad and press
.
9.
Press [ or ] to select another device address to program (0-3) or press
the key to return to the Engineer menu.
ENFORCER V11 PROGRAMMING GUIDE
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Entry Control or Access Control
1.
Press or to scroll to ‘ASSIGN KEYPADS/READERS?’. Press .
2.
Press [ or ] to select the address. Press .
3.
‘Type’ will be displayed. Press 1 to select the reader. Press .
4.
‘Reader is’ will be displayed. Press 2 for ‘Access Control’ or press 4 for
‘Entry Control’ Press .
5.
‘Set Point Sets’ will be displayed. Select the area(s). Press . ‘Set Point
Unsets’ will be displayed.
6.
Select the area(s). Press . ‘Set Point In’ will be displayed. Select the
area(s). Press .
7.
‘Lock Open Time’ will be displayed. Enter the Lock Open Time in seconds
and press . (Max 255 seconds).
8.
‘Door Open Time’ will be displayed. Enter the Door Open Time in seconds
and press . (Max 255 seconds).
9.
‘Access Control Description’ will be displayed. Press .
10.
‘Enter Name’ will be displayed. Enter the name of the reader and press .
11.
‘Enter Location’ will be displayed. Enter the location of the reader and press
.
12.
Press [ or ] to select another device address to program (0-3) or press
the key to return to the Engineer menu.
KEYPAD / SPEAKER OPTIONS
Tag read enable
Enables the proximity tag reader on the wireless arming station.
Auto wakeup
Keypad
Forces the device to automatically wake up when an entry time is initiated.
Please note: Must be enabled for the speaker/sounder.
Supervision
When enabled, the control panel will supervise the signal of the device.
Please note: Must be disabled for the speaker/sounder.
Back light
Toggles the LCD backlight on or off.
Entry/exit sound
Keypad
When enabled, and the device is awake, it will mimic the entry/exit tones of the panel.
Hint: To ensure the device always emits the entry/exit tones, ‘Auto-Wakeup’ needs to be enabled.
Speaker/sounder
Needs to be enabled for the device to emit entry and exit tones.
Set point sets
Enter the areas that the arming station is permitted to set.
Set points unsets
Enter the areas that the arming station is permitted to unset.
ENFORCER V11 PROGRAMMING GUIDE
23
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Set point in
Enter the areas that the arming station is located in.
Set point description
Enter a name and location for the arming station.
CHANGE TIMERS
CHANGE TIMERS?
This function controls all timers on the system.
COMMONLY USED TIMERS
For a list of all timers, see “Appendix C - Timers” on page 52. Most common programmed timers are:
Entry Time (0-255 seconds)
Exit Time (0-255 seconds)
Siren Time (2-15 minutes)
Confirm Time (1-99 minutes)
Wireless Supervision (0-99 hrs)
App Exit Time (0-199 seconds)
Please note: The timer for zones on ‘Soak Control’ is in the function ‘ENGINEER TESTS’.
OCCUPANCY TIMER AND SUSPEND
This timer and the suspend option both work in conjunction with the zone occupancy attribute and the
programmable occupancy actions when/if the time expires without activation.
Occupancy timer
This timer (set in hours) defines the period of time that any zones with the occupancy attribute enabled must be
trigger in.
Occupancy suspend
Defines the areas which will suspend the timer if armed.
Example
•
•
Zone 1 has the occupancy attribute enabled and is located in area A.
The occupancy timer is set to 1 hour and occupancy suspend option reads ‘[A ]’ on the screen.
EVENT
RESULT
The system is completely disarmed and zone 1 has
not been triggered for 1 hour.
The pre-programmed action is taken.
The system is completely disarmed and zone 1 is
triggered before 1 hour expires.
The 1 hour timer is reset and the zone must be triggered
again within the next hour to prevent action being
taken.
Area A is armed and the zone has not been
triggered for over an hour.
No action. The 1 hour timer will commence when the
system is disarmed.
(External alarm, SMS, keypad etc.)
For occupancy attribute information, see “Input Attributes” on page 17.
To program the actions when the timer expires, see “Occupancy Zones” on page 29.
24
ENFORCER V11 PROGRAMMING GUIDE
--- PAGE BREAK ---
CODES AND USERS
CODES AND USERS?
5 Digit PINs?
Delete Users and Fobs?
Change Duress Codes?
Change Master Manager Code?
Change Engineer Code?
This function changes the Engineer code, the Master Manager code and adds/changes/deletes any Duress or
Guard codes.
Default codes
User: [None]
Master Manager: 2222
Engineer: 1111
Please note: User codes, fobs and keyfobs can only be changed in the Master Manager Menu. Please see
the user manual for more information.
5 Digit Pins?
If enabled, all new codes added to the system will require a minimum of 5 digits.
Please note: Any existing 4 digit codes will still be valid.
Delete Users And Fobs
This will delete all the key fobs and user codes from the system.
Please note: that this will not delete the Master Manager and the Engineer codes.
CHANGE DURESS CODES
[2] Duress Code
If the system is unset using a ‘Duress’ code, a silent ‘Duress’ or ‘Hold Up’ signal is sent.
Please note: ACPO policy restricts (it is still OK to use if Police give permission) use of Duress codes for
police call purposes.
[3] Guard Code
A ‘Guard code’ can be used to unset the system only after an alarm has been activated for a minimum time (see
‘Change Timers’ Appendix C). The code will arm a system and an output type is available to signal when this code
is used (0058 Guard Code).
[4] Dial Out
A dial code is used to force the panel to dial out the UDL software while in ‘Day Mode’ (PSTN modem only).
CHANGE MASTER MANAGER CODE
The Master Manager code can be 4, 5 or 6 digits long, or can be assigned to a tag. It may also have the following
functions:
[0] Unset / Set
[1] Unset Only
[2] Set Only
[3] None (menu access)
Flexi Set
If enabled, the default area the device is assigned to, will set. If disabled, the default area will be shown on the
display, and from here other areas can be selected.
ENFORCER V11 PROGRAMMING GUIDE
25
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Wards/Access
This will only be displayed if an Entry Control or Access Control reader is installed on the system. If the address of
the Entry Control or Access Control device is entered here, then the tag will be assigned to that reader only.
CHANGE ENGINEER CODE
The Engineer code can be 4, 5 or 6 digits long.
CHANGE CODES PROGRAMMING
1.
Press or to scroll to ‘CODES AND USERS’. Press .
2.
‘5 Digit Pins’ will be displayed. Press [ or ] to enable or disable and
press .
3.
‘Delete Users And Fobs’ will be displayed. Press to delete all the users
from the system or to move past this option.
4.
‘Change Duress Codes’ will be displayed. Press to add any Duress,
Guard or Dial out codes (as described previously) or press .
5.
‘Change Master Manager Code’ will be displayed. Press to change the
Master Manager code or press .
6.
‘Change Engineer Code’ will be displayed. Press to change the
Engineer code or press to return to the Engineer menu.
VOLUME CONTROL
VOLUME CONTROL?
The Volume Control function applies to the loudspeaker output only. Volume levels at the keypad are
programmed individually in the keypad menu.
The following volume on each sound can be controlled: Entry, Exit, APP Exit, Alarm, Fire, Tamper, Day alarm, and
Chime.
Please note: App exit volume overrides other exit volumes when arming using a smart device application.
Volume levels
0
Completely silent.
1
Silent but sounds a beep when the system is set.
2-7
Volume range, 7 being the loudest.
Code stops sound
If this function is enabled, then once an alarm has been generated (even if the code is not programmed for that
area) the alarm will be silenced, and a ‘Misoperation (Abort) signal’ will be sent. The area will remain armed until a
code or tag is presented that is assigned to that area.
Entry/exit keypads only
If this function is disabled, any entry and exit tones will be heard through the keypad and main sounder. If
enabled, the entry and exit tones will only be heard through the keypad speaker.
Alert kps only
If this function is enabled, any ‘Alert’ tones will be heard on the Keypad only and not the main sounder. If disabled,
the alert tones will heard through both.
Silent technical alert
If this function is enabled then any technical alerts will be silenced, e.g. line fault, ARC call fail.
26
ENFORCER V11 PROGRAMMING GUIDE
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Use main sounder
If enabled, all volume levels programmed will activate on the main sounder. If disabled, the sounder will only
activate on activations programmed on volume 6-7.
VOLUME CONTROL PROGRAMMING
1.
Press or to scroll to ‘VOLUME CONTROL’. Press .
2.
‘A Entry’ will be displayed. Enter the volume and press . Repeat for all
areas.
3.
‘Code Stops Sound’ will be displayed. Press [ or ] to enable or disable
and press .
4.
‘E/E Keypads Only’ will be displayed. Press [ or ] to enable or disable
and press .
5.
‘Alert Kps Only’ will be displayed. Press [ or ] to enable or disable and
press .
6.
‘Silent Tech Alert’ will be displayed. Press [ or ] to enable or disable and
press .
7.
‘Use Main Sounder’ will be displayed. Press [ or ] to enable or disable
and press . The Engineer menu will be displayed.
SYSTEM OPTIONS
SYSTEM OPTIONS?
Site Options?
Occupancy Zones?
System Displays?
Exit Modes?
SITE OPTIONS
Set with fault
If ‘YES’, the system will arm regardless of the following faults being present: device fail, mains fail, battery fault, fuse
fault.
Set with tamper
If ‘YES’, the system will arm regardless of any zone tampers.
Set with ATS fault
If ‘YES’, the system will arm regardless of the following ATS faults being present: telecom line fail, modem fail, ATE
path fail, Digi dial fail, or comms fail.
Set fail = alarm
If ‘YES’, the system will generate a graduated alarm when the ‘Set Fail’ timer has expired (See ‘CHANGE TIMERS’,)
and will trigger any output programmed as ‘0011 Set Fail’ if the arming procedure is still incomplete. If ‘NO’ the exit
timer will continue until the exit route is clear.
Do battery load test
If ‘YES’, the system will perform a full battery load test at 7:00am each day.
ENFORCER V11 PROGRAMMING GUIDE
27
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Strobe/squawk at set
If ‘STROBE’, any output programmed as ‘STROBE ANY’ will activate for 5 seconds after the system has set. If
‘SQUAWK’ any output programmed as ‘SIREN ANY’ will activate for 5 seconds after the system has set, and if ‘BOTH’
then any outputs programmed as STROBE ANY or SIREN ANY will activate for 5 seconds after the system has set.
Please note: If this function is enabled, a potential security risk could be in view for intruders to see.
Use level set
If ‘YES’: The system becomes a ‘level set’ (Having one area armed only at any one time). If ‘NO’: The system becomes
an ‘area’ system (arming more than one area at a time).
Autoset force
If ‘YES’, and an auto arm timer is programmed through upload/download software, then the system will auto arm
regardless of any zones remaining open during the arming period.
Restrict PIN use
If enabled, this option prevents a PIN Code being used to disarm the system after an entry time has started unless
an alarm activation has occurred. A tag or electronic keyfob must be used to disarm the system.
Please note: Enable when BS8243 option 6.4.5 is in use
Simple set
If ‘YES’, the system allows a user to arm the system ‘quickly’ by pressing and then the Area (A, B, C or D).
Please note: This must not be enabled when BS8243 option 6.4.5 is in use.
Intelligent set
The system has the facility to automatically initiate a different arm mode or area when you activate a zone in a
certain area (rather than having to choose a different arm mode via the keypad). This is known as “Intelligent Set”.
Hint: When Intelligent Set has been enabled, the exit tone will commence at ‘intelligent’ volume. When intelligent set is enabled, then level set B will
start to arm (if the user code is enabled in level set B). Then if a Final Exit zone is activated, which is programmed in level set A during the exit time, then
the panel will automatically ‘quick set’ in level set A.
Please note: Intelligent Set only works when the panel is in Level Set mode. (See Site Options)
Common lobby
If ‘Yes’, this will automatically prioritise the exit modes for each area:
(0 = Timed, 1 = Final Door, 2 = Timed/Final Door, 3 = PTS). This option is only relevant when Final Door option is
used on a system with different areas using a common lobby.
E.g. If Area C is selected as the ‘Final Door’ arming mode and the rest of the areas are selected as ‘Timed’, then
because ‘Final Door’ is higher priority, the users of every individual area must follow the ‘Final Door’ route to the
exit - making this door a ‘common for all areas’. If set to ‘NO’ the exit modes will be individually programmable to
each area.
Flexi unset
When enabled, this arming will allow users to select which areas to unset (from the areas that they have been
permitted to disarm.)
2 Key HU
If the 1 and 7 keys are pressed and held together for a period of time (programmed in the keypad menu), a
‘Hold Up’ will occur.
If ‘NONE’, the keys are disabled. If ‘SILENT’, a ‘Silent Hold Up’ will be signalled. If ‘Bells Only’, any external sounder will
activate but NO signals will be sent. If ‘BOTH’, any external sounder will activate and a signal will be sent using a
DIGI-1200 (PSTN), DIGI-1200/Voice DIGI GPRS, DIGI LAN or DIGI Wi-Fi module.
28
ENFORCER V11 PROGRAMMING GUIDE
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Tag opens doors
This function is used in conjunction with a reader programmed as ‘Entry Control’.
If ‘YES’ the ‘Entry Control’ readers will control the arming/disarming and access control. If ‘NO’ the Entry Control
readers will control the arming/disarming only.
For programming entry control readers, see “Entry Control or Access Control” on page 23.
Fire Key Enable
If ‘YES’ the fire key will be enabled on the keypad.
Set With Polling Fault
If ‘YES’ the system will still arm even if there is a wireless polling fault.
If ‘NO’ the user will not be able to arm the system with a polling fault. The keypad will display a fault and the
arming procedure will be stopped. The zone causing the poll fault can be identified in the event log.
Fob Unset Entry
If ‘YES’ any wireless keyfobs learnt will only be able to disarm the system once the entry time has been started. If
‘NO’ any wireless keyfobs learnt will be able to disarm the system without the entry time being started first.
Wireless Bell Supervision
If ‘YES’ then wireless external bells will activate they can’t communicate with the system for a period of 2 hours.
Download if Set
If ‘YES’ any upload/download procedures will be possible on the InSite software regardless of the arm/disarm
status of the system.
OCCUPANCY ZONES
This section programs the action(s) the system will take if any zones with the occupancy attribute enabled are not
triggered for the duration of the occupancy timer.
Push notification
If enabled, the system will send a push notification to the smart device application.
Hint: To receive push notifications, this option must be enabled and notification type ‘284 No Activity in Property’ must be activated on the users Cloud
account. This can be found in Notifications > Alarms.
SMS
If enabled, the system will send an SMS to programmed telephone numbers.
Hint: The occupancy alert SMS event is associated with the alarm option in the SMS event menu. If the Alarm option is selected in the SMS event menu,
and if there is no activity, an SMS text message will be sent to the respective mobile phone. To view the categories, see the Communications Guide.
ARC call
If enabled, the system will send a signal to the programmed ARC.
Hint: To signal an occupancy event to an ARC using Fast Format, one of the Digi outputs needs to be programmed as output type ‘0065 Input Activity Fl’.
Keypad sounder
If enabled, the system will sound all the speakers on keypads and proximity readers.
Internal sounder
If enabled, the system will alert from any internal sounders/speakers on the system.
External sounder
If enabled, the system will sound any external sirens on the system.
For occupancy attribute information, see “Input Attributes” on page 17.
For the occupancy timer and arm suspension, see “Change Timers” on page 24.
ENFORCER V11 PROGRAMMING GUIDE
29
--- PAGE BREAK ---
SYSTEM DISPLAYS
This function programs the text display on the keypad for when the system is disarmed, or an area is armed. The
Site Name reference is programmed here which must match the site name programmed on the InSite software.
There are options to enable or disable displaying system status, alarms, hold ups or zones.
Area texts
This programs how each area will be displayed. For example if ‘Area A’ is used to arm the full house this can be text
as “Full House Set”. There is a maximum of 16 characters on the display.
Sign on message
The Sign on Message is the main display on the top line in day mode.
Display when set, display alarms and display HUs (not compliant)
If ‘Display when set’ is enabled, then the area text will be displayed on the LCD keypad once the system is fully
armed. If ‘Display Alarms / HUs’ is enabled, the system will display any alarms that are activated before a valid
user code/tag is entered. If ‘Display Inputs’ is enabled, any zones activated in day mode will be displayed.
EXIT MODES
The ‘Exit Modes’ operate the arming procedure of the system. The following ‘Exit Modes’ are available:
[0] Timed
The system will arm when the programmed ‘Exit Time’ has expired.
Please note: This is NOT suitable for systems installed to comply with BS8243.
[1] Final Door
The system will arm when a zone programmed as ‘Final Exit’ is either closed (if the zone was opened when arming
started) or it is opened and closed. ‘Final door’ is used for the ‘lock set’ operation; securing the lock completes the
arming procedure and unlocking starts the entry time.
[2] Timed/Final
The system will arm when a ‘Final Exit’ zone has been closed, or when an ‘Exit Time’ has expired. The ‘Final Exit’ zone
will override any ‘Exit Time’ programmed if opened/closed.
Please note: This is NOT suitable for systems installed to comply with BS8243.
[3] Push to Set (PTS)
The system will only arm when a ‘Push to Set’ button has been pressed. This function will override the
programmed Exit Time.
REVIEW LOGS
REVIEW LOGS?
Panel Log?
Access Log?
Panel Log
The Panel log records all events that occur on the system, i.e. Users entering their codes to arm or disarm areas,
alarm events, failures to arm etc. Pressing will give more information of the display (for example, shows
which user disarmed the system).
Access Log
The Access log records all events for Access Control events.
With each log, use the key to move from one event to the previous event. The key will move from one
event to the next event that occurred.
30
ENFORCER V11 PROGRAMMING GUIDE
--- PAGE BREAK ---
To view additional details, press the key. If no other information is available, the display will move to the next
log entry. Pressing will return to the main screen for that entry.
Please note: For all ‘Fault Codes’, see “Appendix E - Fault Finding” on page 57.
ENGINEER TESTS
ENGINEER TESTS?
Sound to Play?
Walk Test?
Soak Control?
Test Siren?
Do Battery Load Test?
Test Outputs?
Test Communications?
Fetch Time?
Poll Test Server?
The test functions allow the engineer to test zones, outputs, batteries and the siren.
Sound to play
This function previews all of the different tones the system makes. They have a choice of:
•
Chime
•
Chime Follow
•
Exit
•
Exit Fault
•
Entry
•
Tech Fault
•
Tamper
•
Alarm
•
PA
•
Fire
Walk test
The walk test feature is used to test all the zones programmed on the system. It is recommended that after
programming any zones, the Engineer menu is exited to save all data, after this point a walk test should be
performed. The zones that haven’t been activated will be shown on the display. Once all the zones have been
walk tested, ‘Walk Test Completed’ will be displayed.
Hint: When walk-testing a double-knock detector, it must be triggered twice within the defined period. When testing dual-trip detectors, the first
detector must be triggered and then the second detector; next, trigger the second detector and trigger the first detector.
Please note: To walk test a specific zone, press instead of selecting areas. Then specific zones can be
entered with the numerical keys, pressing after each zone. Then press to walk test them.
Soak control
Any zone may be placed on ‘soak test’ which monitors the detector without giving an alarm activation. If the
chosen zone triggers whilst the system is set, it will indicate the activation and enter the details in the event log.
The number of days the zone is in soak control before the zone becomes active can be programmed.
Please note: The ‘Initial Soak’ time should be set to equal or greater than the ‘Soak Days Left.’
ENFORCER V11 PROGRAMMING GUIDE
31
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Test siren
Any outputs programmed as ‘0014 Siren Any’ and ‘0016 Strobe Any’ will be tested.
Do battery load test
The system performs a check of the battery operation every 10 seconds, by dipping the power supply voltage
momentarily, and measuring the system voltage. If the battery voltage measured is below 8.9V, or the battery
fuse has failed, a ‘BATTERY FAULT’ warning will be generated. The system is programmed to perform an automatic
battery load test at every power supply at 7.00am each day. This will drop the power supply voltage below the
battery voltage, whilst monitoring the system diagnostics. The test will NOT take place if:
•
The siren and strobe outputs are live
•
The system is in Engineer Mode
•
Any battery or mains faults exists
•
The site option ‘Do Battery Load Test’ is not selected
If the test has already started, it will be aborted if any of these conditions apply, other than entry into Engineer
Menu. If the test is aborted, it will not be performed until the next day. The test may also be performed as
required, under engineer control.
For the battery load test option, see “Site Options” on page 27.
Test outputs
The engineer can test all the programmable outputs on the input/outboard board and the output module.
Test communications
If the engineer is using SIA or Contact ID to signal events, this function can be used to send a test signal to the
Alarm Receiving Centre. It can also be used to test SMS signalling.
Fetch time
This function is used to manually request the time from the cloud server if it hasn’t updated automatically.
Hint: This will only function if the system has a valid data connection such as Wi-Fi or GPRS.
Poll test server
This option forces the panel to poll Pyronix test servers which are used to trial/test upcoming features on the
cloud.
IMPORTANT NOTE: Do not poll the Pyronix test server unless specifically asked to do so by a member of
the Pyronix team. The panel will cease polling the active cloud and then cannot be accessed via smart
device applications and upload/download servers that use the cloud to communicate with the system.
WALK TEST PROGRAMMING
Please note: Wireless detectors may take up to 5 minutes to become active in a walk test.
32
1.
Press or to scroll to ‘ENGINEER TESTS’. Press .
2.
‘Sound to play’ will be displayed. Use [ or ] to select the different
sounds. Press to exit.
3.
‘Walk Test’ will be displayed. Press .
4.
Select the areas that are required to be walk tested and press or press
to walk test individual zones.
5.
A list of all zones programmed for that area will be displayed on the keypad.
Once a zone has been walk tested (i.e. the detector has activated and
deactivated) then the zone will be taken off the list.
6.
Once all zones have been tested, ‘Walk Test Completed’ will be displayed. To
exit the walk test function at any time press .
7.
Press again to go back to the Engineer Menu.
ENFORCER V11 PROGRAMMING GUIDE
--- PAGE BREAK ---
SOAK CONTROL PROGRAMMING
1.
Press or to scroll to ‘ENGINEER TESTS’. Press .
2.
‘Sound to play’ will be displayed. Press .
3.
‘Walk Test’ will be displayed. Press .
4.
‘Soak Control’ will be displayed. Press .
5.
Select the zones that are required to be soak tested. Each zone should be
entered, following by . Press once finished.
6.
‘Soak Days Left’ will be displayed. Select the number of days that the zones
will be left on soak test and press .
7.
‘Initial Soak’ will be displayed. Enter the number of days the soak test will
revert to in the event a soak zone is triggered during testing. Press .
8.
Press to go back to the Engineer menu.
TEST SIREN, BATTERY LOAD TEST AND OUTPUTS
1.
Press or to scroll to ‘ENGINEER TESTS’. Press .
2.
‘Sound to play’ will be displayed. Press .
3.
‘Walk Test’ will be displayed. Press .
4.
‘Soak Test’ will be displayed. Press .
5.
‘Test Siren’ will be displayed. Press , any outputs programmed as ‘Siren
Any’ and ‘Strobe Any’ will trigger. Press to exit.
6.
‘Do Battery Load Test’ will be displayed. Press to perform a battery
load test, the voltage will be displayed, followed by ‘Battery Passed’ if the test
has been successful. Press .
7.
‘Test Outputs’ will be displayed. Press to perform a test on any
output type. For example if ‘0006’ is entered, and the key is pressed, a
‘Confirmed Any’ test will be activated. Press to cancel the test.
8.
Press to go back to the Engineer menu.
TEST COMMUNICATIONS
1.
Press or to scroll to ‘ENGINEER TESTS’. Press .
2.
‘Sound to play’ will be displayed. Press .
3.
‘Walk Test’ will be displayed. Press .
4.
‘Soak Test’ will be displayed. Press .
5.
‘Test Siren’ will be displayed. Press .
6.
‘Do Battery Load Test’ will be displayed. Press .
7.
‘Test Outputs’ will be displayed. Press .
8.
‘Test Communications’ will be displayed. Press to send a test signal to
the ARC.
9.
Press to go back to the Engineer Menu.
ENFORCER V11 PROGRAMMING GUIDE
33
--- PAGE BREAK ---
DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTICS?
Wireless Devices?
Wired Devices?
Communications?
Tablet Keypads?
This option enables the engineer to perform full diagnostics on all key wired and wireless components of the
system.
WIRELESS DEVICES
View Inputs
This option views the status of all wireless zones:
•
•
•
•
•
•
O - Open
C - Closed
T - Tamper
F - Fault
S - Supervision fault
B - Battery fault
Signal Strength
This option is used to view the signal strength for any wireless zone, bell or arming station that is learnt to the
system. The signal strength is shown on both the individual wireless device and on the panel in the following
ways:
If a Green LED is shown on the peripheral, the signal strength is HIGH.
If a Red LED is shown on the peripheral the signal strength is LOW / NONE.
Once one of the signal strength menus has been entered, ‘Please Wait’ will be displayed and a countdown from
300 seconds will begin. This may last up to five minutes before all of the wireless devices have been analysed.
From this point each device is tested every 15 seconds. On the LCD display it is also possible to view each
individual device’s signal strength as a percentage.
DISPLAY NUMBER
SIGNAL STRENGTH
SIGNAL PERCENTAGE
LED COLOUR ON DEVICE
3
Excellent
80 to 100%
Green
2
Good
30 to 80%
Green
1
Weak
0 to 30%
Red
0
Missing/no signal
0 to 10%
Red
?
Still testing
N/A
N/A
Battery Status
This option is used to measure the battery levels for wireless zones and bells. The battery level is shown on the
control panel.
Once the battery status menu has been entered, ‘Please Wait’ will be displayed and a countdown from 300
seconds will begin. This may last up to five minutes before all of the wireless devices have been analysed. From
this point each device is tested every 15 seconds.
•
•
34
Testing - waiting for a Battery result.
Good - at least one month of battery life remaining.
ENFORCER V11 PROGRAMMING GUIDE
--- PAGE BREAK ---
•
Replace - battery needs to be replaced immediately.
Wireless Dual Frequency Menu
This option shows information on whether the panel/wireless ZEM are working as a Single or Dual Frequency
system. It will also display which zones (if any) are single frequency and stopping the panel from operating in dual
frequency mode.
Channel
Displays which channel your control panel is operating on (this will be either 01 or 02).
Channel reason
Displays the reason why the panel last switched from one channel to another.
SF/DF status
Displays whether the control panel is currently operating in Single (SF) or Dual (DF) Frequency mode.
Please note: The panel will only operate in dual frequency mode if all peripherals support dual frequency
(having even one SF device will default the whole system into SF mode).
First SF device
Displays the first single frequency device learnt on to the system (if there is one), once deleted it will display the
next single frequency device and so forth. If there are none it will display; “All Devices DF”.
WIRED DEVICES
View Inputs
This option views the status of all wired zones: Open, Close, Tamper, and Fault.
Endstation zones
The status of the zones will be shown. C = Closed. O = Open. F = Fault, T = Tamper.
•
O - Open
•
C - Closed
•
T - Tamper
•
F - Fault
The resistance reading can also be shown by pressing for any of the above for statuses.
ZEM zones
Choose the ZEM address from [0] to [3] to view the zone status.
View PSUs
This option allows diagnostics of the power supply information for the PSU on the control panel, as well as all the
additional peripheral devices, such as ZEM or output modules that have a PSU on board.
Endstation PSU
End station voltage readings are displayed = Voltage: 13.7V.
ZEM PSUs
Choose the ZEM address from [0] to [3] to read the PSU voltage readings.
OP Mod PSU
Choose the output module address to read the PSU voltage readings.
Keypad Volts
Choose the keypad address from [1] to [3] to read the keypad voltage.
Reader Volts
Choose the reader address from [1] to [3] to read the reader voltage.
COMMUNICATIONS
See the Communications Guide for information regarding the communications and signalling diagnostics.
ENFORCER V11 PROGRAMMING GUIDE
35
--- PAGE BREAK ---
TABLET KEYPADS
This menu shows the IP addresses allocated to the tablets communicating with the control panel. There can be a
maximum of 4 communicating with the panel at any one time.
WIRELESS DEVICE DIAGNOSTICS
1.
Press or to scroll to ‘DIAGNOSTICS?’. Press .
2.
‘Wireless Devices’. Press .
3.
‘View Inputs’: To view each zone status, press .
4.
Use [ or ] to choose which zones to view. Press .
5.
The status of each zone will be shown.
6.
Press twice to exit, and again for the next sub-menu item.
7.
‘View Input Signal Strength’: To view each zones signal strength press .
8.
Use [ or ] to choose which zones to view. Press .
9.
The status of each zone will be shown
10.
Press twice to exit, and again for the next sub-menu item.
11.
Repeat the above for ‘View Bells Signal Strength’, and ‘View Arming
Station Signal Strength’.
12.
‘View Inputs Battery Status’:. Press .
13.
Use [ or ] to choose which zones to view. Press .
14.
The status of each zone will be shown.
15.
Press twice to exit, and again for the next sub-menu item.
16.
Repeat the above for ‘View Bells Battery Status’, and ‘View Arming Station
Battery Status’
17.
‘Wireless Dual Frequency Menu’. To view Dual Frequency menu
information. Press .
18.
Press to exit.
WIRED DEVICE DIAGNOSTICS
1.
Press or to scroll to ‘DIAGNOSTICS?’. Press .
2.
Press until ‘Wired Devices’ is displayed:. Press .
3.
‘View Inputs’: To view each zone status, press .
4.
‘Endstation Inputs’: To view each zone status on the I/O board, press .
5.
The status of each zone will be shown:
Hint: Press again to view each zone individually, and the resistance readings.
36
6.
Press twice to exit, and again for the next sub-menu item.
7.
Repeat the above for ‘ZEM Inputs’.
8.
‘View PSUs’: To view the power supply information press .
9.
‘Endstation PSUs’: The voltage will be displayed. Press . Press to
view the power supply information for ZEMs, output modules, keypads and
readers.
10.
Press twice to exit.
ENFORCER V11 PROGRAMMING GUIDE
--- PAGE BREAK ---
COMMUNICATIONS DIAGNOSTICS
1.
Press or to scroll to ‘DIAGNOSTICS?’. Press .
2.
Press until ‘Communications’ is displayed and press .
Please note: For more information, please refer to the Communication Guide.
ENGINEER RESTORE OPTIONS
ENGINEER RESTORE OPTIONS?
The Engineer Restore Options are used so that once an alarm has occurred; the system can only be reset by an
engineer code or anti-code.
Engineer Restore of Intruder
If ‘UK Intruder’, an Engineer code must be used to reset the system after an alarm. ‘Secure Intruder’ should not be
used.
Engineer Restore of Hold Up
If ‘YES’, an Engineer code must be used to reset the system after an Hold Up, Zone Hold Up, or Duress activation.
Engineer Restore of Tamper
If ‘YES’, an Engineer code must be used to reset the system after a tamper activation.
Engineer Restore of Soak
If ‘YES’, an Engineer code must be used to reset the system after a zone that is on ‘soak’ has triggered when the
system is set.
Engineer Restore of Confirmed
If ‘YES’, an Engineer code must be used to reset the system after a confirmed alarm has occurred.
Engineer Restore of Faults
If ‘YES’, an Engineer code must be used to reset the system after the following faults:
•
ATE telecom fail
•
Modem fail
•
ATE single path fail
•
Telecom line fail
•
Battery disconnect
•
Batt charge
•
Battery load
•
Excessive charge
•
Battery critical
•
Device fail
Anti-Code Restore
If ‘YES’, the system will display an Anti-Code, to which can be used to generate a special reset code (usually from
the ARC) to reset the system.
Please note: If Anti-Code is selected, this will coincide with the options that have been selected
previously. For example, if ‘Engineer Restore Intruder’ is selected, and Anti-Code is selected, then an anticode will be produced on intruder activation.
ENFORCER V11 PROGRAMMING GUIDE
37
--- PAGE BREAK ---
COMMUNICATIONS
COMMUNICATIONS?
Select External Modem Type?
App Set-Up?
Program Wi-Fi?
Program ARC?
Program Digi Channels?
User SMS Signalling?
Advanced Communications?
See the Communications Guide for information regarding the programming of the communications and
signalling.
ALARM RESPONSE
ALARM RESPONSE?
HOW ALARM RESPONSES WORK
This menu is used if the user wants an incremental alarm response to activations.
Activations would start off as a local alarm on the keypad, and progress through a number of stages to signalling
the ARC. Most systems will want a full alarm and signalling immediately. However, on the occasions that isn’t
suitable, this menu can be used.
This works on the activation having an immediate response and every 15 seconds escalating the alarm.
There are 4 stages that the alarm can be raised to:
•
Keypads [0]
•
Internal Sounders [1]
•
Sirens Only [2]
•
Signal (Digi)tal Communicator [3]
The immediate response is programmed in the ‘[Area #/Event] starts at’ and the final response is programmed in
‘[Area #/Event] stops at’. The stages work on a hierarchical system meaning that any stage selected will include
others that are lower in the sequence.
At default, activations and events are programmed to start at ‘Digi [3]’ and stop at
‘Digi [3]’. Due to this stage being the at the top of the hierarchy, when the activation
occurs, the keypads, internal sounders and external bells will all be audible straight
away whilst the system simultaneously signals the event
38
ENFORCER V11 PROGRAMMING GUIDE
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Example 1
The below sequence shows what happens when the attributes are programmed as ‘Starts at Keypads [0]’ and
‘Stops at Digi [3]’
When the event is
triggered, only the
keypads are audible.
15 seconds later, the
internal sounders
become active.
After 30 seconds from the
initial event, the external
bells trigger.
45 seconds after the
sequence began, the
panel will signal the
event.
Example 2
The below sequence shows what happens when the attribute are programmed as ‘Starts at Bells Only [2]’ and
‘Stops at Digi [3]’
When the event is
triggered, the keypads,
internal sounders and
external bells are all
audible simultaneously.
15 seconds after the
activation, the system
signals the event.
Please note: Any signalling will depend on programming in other menus regarding externals
communications. See Communications Guide for more information.
ENFORCER V11 PROGRAMMING GUIDE
39
--- PAGE BREAK ---
ALARM RESPONSE OPTIONS
Silent 1st Alarm
If this function is selected as ‘confirmed’, then the first alarm to activate on the system will be silent, but only if
another zone activates (i.e. a confirmed alarm) then the alarm will activate and the alarm tones will be heard. This
option is only valid once the system has been armed for 3 minutes and not if the entry time has started.
Disable Confirm On Entry
To comply with BS8243 clauses 6.4.3 and 6.4.4, this option should be set to YES to disable confirmation once the
entry procedure has started. For use with BS8243 option 6.4.5, this option should be ‘No’. If ‘Disable Confirm On
Entry’ is set to YES this option will disable ALL confirmation signals on entry. If NO the confirmation signals are
enabled on expiry of entry time.
Alarm Starts / Stops (Alarm Responses)
Area # start at
This programs where the alarm response for each area starts.
Area # stop at
This programs where the alarm response for each area escalates to.
The following options have the same ‘start at’ and ‘stop at’ using the same format at described earlier:
•
Fire
•
Gas
•
PA
•
Medical
•
24 Hour
Any Alarms Start
This option allows alarms to start at a different place previously programmed if multiple areas are armed.
For example, if 24 hour is programmed to ‘start at internal sounders’ and ‘stop at internal sounders’, this feature is
programming as ‘Internal Sounders’ and the next option has areas A, B and C entered. If A, B and C are armed and
a 24 Hour zone is triggered, the alarm would start with the internal sounders and keypads being audible.
If Areas Armed
Select the areas that the previous option will be applicable to.
Any Alarms Stop
This option allows alarms to stop at a different place previously programmed if multiple areas are armed.
For example, if 24 Hour is programmed to ‘Start at keypad’ and ‘stop at internal sounders’, this feature is
programming as ‘Bells only’ and the next option has areas A, B and C entered. If A, B and C are armed and a 24
Hour zone is triggered, the alarm would escalate to the external bells.
If Areas Armed
Select the areas that must be armed at the same time for the previous option setting to become active.
40
ENFORCER V11 PROGRAMMING GUIDE
--- PAGE BREAK ---
SET UP DOWNLOADING
SET UP DOWNLOADING?
If required, the system can be programmed remotely, or directly via a PC/Laptop.
To upload/download remotely, a communications module must be installed.
To upload/download directly, an RS232 lead must be used and connected directly to the system.
SET UP DOWNLOADING VIA CLOUD
1.
Press or to scroll to ‘SET UP DOWNLOADING?’. Press .
2.
‘Download By’ : Use [ or ] to scroll to ‘Cloud’. Press .
3.
The ‘SYSTEM ID’ will be displayed will be displayed. Press .
4.
Use [ or ] to select either Normal or High Security Level.
Please note: If High is selected, encrypted keys will be created. Press .
5.
Enter a System Password. Press
6.
Roving Dial - use the [ or ] keys to enable/disable roving dial
7.
Auto Upload - use the [ or ] keys to enable/disable auto upload of
configuration.
8.
UDL Password (optional) – if the UDL software that the panel is connecting
to has a password, use the numerical keys to enter it here. Press
9.
‘Site Name’ (optional) – Using the numerical keys to enter the site name
from ‘System Displays’ Press .
Please note: Make sure that the SIM card in use is enabled for GPRS data and
that the correct APN configuration have been entered for your network (See
Communication Guide).
CONNECTING TO THE INSITE SOFTWARE
1.
Click on ‘Roving Dial customer’ (or hold Ctrl and press the F10 key).
2.
Click on the ‘Dial Out Mode’ drop down list and select ‘Cloud’.
3.
Enter the ‘System ID’ of your Control Panel (See ‘Set Up Downloading’ in the panel’s Engineer menu).
4.
Enter the ‘System Password’ (as entered in ‘Set Up Downloading’ in the Engineer menu).
5.
Leave the UDL security level at ‘low’ for the initial connection test in the ‘System Security Level’ field.
6.
Enter the Engineer code as used on the Control Panel you are trying to connect to.
7.
Enter the ‘Site Name’ as entered in the panel ONLY if it was entered on the panel, otherwise, leave this blank.
8.
In the ‘Enter Customer In Database As’ field, simply give the panel you are connecting to an appropriate
name.
9.
Click ‘Dial’. If the connection is successful, the Cloud Icon will become blue. A dialogue box will appear
asking if you would like to create a customer, click ‘Yes’ to continue.
10.
The system is now successfully connected to the Insite UDL Software. Now select ‘Data from Panel’ to
download panel configuration and proceed to make changes remotely.
ENFORCER V11 PROGRAMMING GUIDE
41
--- PAGE BREAK ---
SET UP DOWNLOADING VIA RS232
1.
Press or to scroll to ‘SET UP DOWNLOADING?’. Press .
2.
‘Download By’ : Use [ or ] to scroll to ‘RS232’. Press .
3.
Enter a UDL password (optional). This will need to be referenced in the InSite
software. Press .
4.
Enter a Site Name (optional). This will need to be referenced in the InSite
software. Press .
Please note: If a ‘Site Name’ is set up on the panel, the UDL ‘Site Name’ must
be exactly the same, otherwise the connection will fail.
CONNECTING TO THE INSITE SOFTWARE:
1.
To set up the COM port associated to ‘modem’, open the software, click on ‘Configuration’, choose ‘Modem
Configuration’ and select the ‘RS-232’ option
2.
Make sure that the serial COM used by the UDL software is set the same as in your PC.
E.g. Control Panel -> Device Manager -> Ports (Typical Windows PC)
3.
Make sure that the RS-232 icon (at the bottom of the screen) has turned green
4.
Click on ‘Roving Dial customer’ (or hold Ctrl and press the F10 key).
5.
Set the ‘Dial Out Mode’ field to ‘RS-232’
6.
Enter the Engineer code in the ‘Engineer Code’ field
7.
Enter the ‘Site Name’ if one has been put in the panel
8.
In the ‘Enter Customer In Database As’ field, simply give the panel you are connecting to an appropriate
name.
9.
Click on ‘Dial’ and if the connection is successful, the RS-232 icon will become blue
DIAL OUT MENU
DIAL OUT MENU?
Select PC to Dial [-]
Select PC to Dial
This menu is used to select which PC programmed in to the system you would like to dial and connect to.
Operations
Connect to PC
Forces the panel to connect to the InSite software
Test Dial
Dials the InSite, connects and then hangs up.
ARM Service
Send an ARM service report to the InSite software.
Data from PC
Dials the InSite and downloads programming information for that panel.
Data to PC
Dials the InSite and uploads its latest configuration to the customer already created.
Diagnostics
Dials the InSite and sends the diagnostic information such as battery levels.
Commissioning
Dials the InSite, creates a new customer and uploads it’s configuration.
42
ENFORCER V11 PROGRAMMING GUIDE
--- PAGE BREAK ---
SOFTWARE REVISION
SOFTWARE REVISION?
This option identifies all software revisions.
Press or to scroll to ‘SOFTWARE REVISION’. Press .
The software revision will be displayed (e.g. V11.00) Press .
The Hub software revision will be displayed (e.g. V3.54). Press .
The the internal Wi-Fi version will now be displayed. Press .
If any modems are connected, the display will show the software revision here. Press .
CLEAN START
CLEAN START?
It is essential that a factory default (Clean Start) is performed after initial power up to ensure that the correct
defaults are applied.
Clear wireless data
If this function is not accepted, then all wireless zones, wireless external sounders will be still present on the
system.
Clear codes
If this function is not accepted, then all codes, tags and keyfobs will be still present on the system.
Clear logs
If this function is not accepted, then all event logs will be still present on the system.
Please note
1. If everything is defaulted, the system memory will also be restored to factory defaults except the
following:
2. Keypad address ‘0’ remains enabled at all times & the keypad in use remains enabled
3. Additional keypads connected will keep the area information
For clean start defaults, see “Appendix A - Defaults” on page 44.
EXIT ENGINEER MENU
EXIT ENGINEER MENU?
ENFORCER V11 PROGRAMMING GUIDE
43
--- PAGE BREAK ---
APPENDIX A - DEFAULTS
MENU OPTIONS
CLEAN START [2020]
CLEAN START [2000]
[07]
[07]
Month (1-12)
[01]
[01]
Day (1-31)
[01]
[01]
SET DATE & TIME
Year (00-99)
Hours (0-23)
[02]
[02]
Minutes (0-59)
[52]
[52]
DST Adjust?
No [0]
No [0]
Set Area [2]: Area A
Set Area [2]: Area A
WIRELESS DEVICE CONTROL
Program Keyfob Buttons
Lock [1]
Unlock [2]
Unset Area [3]
Unset Area [3]
I [3]
Set Area [2]: Area B
Set Area [2]: Area B
II [4]
Show Status [1]
Show Status [1]
Lock + Unlock [5]
No Action [0]
No Action [0]
I + II [6]
No Action [0]
Hold up [6]
Lock + I [7]
No Action [0]
No Action [0]
Unlock + II [8]
No Action [0]
No Action [0]
CHANGE INPUTS
Inputs
All inputs unused
All inputs unused
Input Area
A (if input programmed)
A (if input programmed)
Input Areas
Any [0]
Any [0]
Chime
No [0]
No [0]
Omittable
No [0]
No [0]
Input Attributes
Double Knock
No [0]
No [0]
Normally Open
No [0]
No [0]
Occupancy
No [0]
No [0]
Monitor Activity
No [0]
No [0]
Special log
No [0]
No [0]
Supervision
Yes [1]
Yes [1]
Confirm Group
[00]
[00]
Input Description
Enter Name
Input 01
Input 01
Enter Location
_
_
4k7/2k2 [1]
4k7/2k2 [1]
CHOOSE MODE
EOL Range
44
ENFORCER V11 PROGRAMMING GUIDE
--- PAGE BREAK ---
MENU OPTIONS
CLEAN START [2020]
CLEAN START [2000]
EOL Mode
DR [1]
DR [1]
Input Response
300ms
300ms
No [0] (for all ZEM addresses)
No [0] (for all ZEM addresses)
INSTALL ZEMs
ZEM Address
CHANGE OUTPUTS
Endstation Outputs
BELL O/P
Siren Any [0014]
Siren Any [0014]
STB O/P
Strobe Any [0016]
Strobe Any [0016]
PGM O/P
Not Used [0000]
Not Used [0000]
Unused [00]
Unused [00]
BELL O/P
Siren Any [0014]
Siren Any [0014]
STB O/P
Strobe Any [0016]
Strobe Any [0016]
No [0]
No [0]
Unused [0000]
Unused [0000]
Unused [0000]
Unused [0000]
User Output Type
Latched [0]
Latched [0]
User Output Name
_
_
ZEM Outputs
ZEM Address
Output 1-4
Wireless Bells
Output Module Outputs
OP Mod Address
OP Mod Installed
Keypad Outputs
Address [0]-[3]
Output 1
Reader Outputs
Address [1]-[3]
Output 1
User Outputs?
ASSIGN KEYPADS/READERS
Address
Address [0]: Keypad [1]
Addresses [1]-[3]: Unused [0]
Address [0]: Keypad [1]
Addresses [1]-[3]: Unused [0]
Set Point Sets
[ABCD]
[ABCD]
Set Point Unsets
[ABCD]
[ABCD]
Set Point In
[ABCD]
[ABCD]
Device 0
Device 0
Set Point Description
Enter Name
Enter Location
ENFORCER V11 PROGRAMMING GUIDE
45
--- PAGE BREAK ---
MENU OPTIONS
CLEAN START [2020]
CLEAN START [2000]
Set Point [0]
Set Point [0]
If programmed as Reader:
Reader Is:
If programmed as Reader, Entry
Control or Access Control
Door Open Time [010]
Lock Open Time [005]
Lock Open Time [005]
Door Open Time [010]
CHANGE TIMERS
A, B, C, D: Entry Time
[030]
[030]
A, B, C, D: Exit Time
[020]
[020]
A, B, C, D: App Exit Time
[030]
[030]
A, B, C, D: Siren Time
[04]
[04]
A, B, C, D: Siren Delay
[00]
[00]
Confirm Time
[30]
[30]
HU Confirm Time
[08]
[08]
Strobe Time
[00]
[00]
Re-Arm No
[3]
[3]
AC Signal Delay
[040]
[040]
Settle
[005]
[005]
Double Knock
[10]
[10]
Pre-Alarm
[030]
[000]
Wi-Fi Fault Delay
[180]
[180]
Comm Fault Delay
[180]
[020]
Set Fail
[040]
[120]
Fire Siren Time
[04]
[04]
Set Fail Warning
[00]
[00]
Occupancy
[00]
[00]
Occupancy Suspend
[ABCD]
[ABCD]
Input NAT Days
[14]
[14]
Input NAT Hours
[00]
[00]
Wireless Supervision Time
[02]
[24]
Wireless Jamming Time
[30]
[100]
Service Time
[000]
[000]
5 Digit PINs
No [0]
No [0]
Change Duress Codes
All codes empty
All codes empty
2222
2222
CODES AND USERS
Change Master Manager Code
Master Manager Code
46
ENFORCER V11 PROGRAMMING GUIDE
--- PAGE BREAK ---
MENU OPTIONS
CLEAN START [2020]
CLEAN START [2000]
User Areas
ABCD
ABCD
User Set Options
Unset/Set [0]
Unset/Set [0]
Flexi Set
Yes [1]
Yes [1]
User Name
_
_
1111
1111
A, B, C, D Entry
[4]
[4]
A,C, D Exit
[4]
[4]
Change Engineer Code
VOLUME CONTROL
B Exit
[1]
[1]
App Exit
[4]
[4]
Alarm
[5]
[5]
Fire
[5]
[5]
Tamper
[5]
[5]
Day Alarm
[5]
[5]
Chime
[3]
[3]
Code Stops Sound
Yes [1]
Yes [1]
E/E Keypads Only
No [0]
No [0]
Alert Kps Only
Yes [1]
Yes [1]
Silent Tech Alert
No [0]
No [0]
Use Main Sounder
Yes [1]
Yes [1]
SYSTEM OPTIONS
Site Options
Set With Fault
Yes [1]
Yes [1]
Set With Tamper+
No [0]
Yes [1]
Set with ATS Fault
No [0]
Yes [1]
Set Fail = Alarm
Yes [1]
Yes [1]
Do Bat Load Test
No [0]
No [0]
Strb/Sqwk At Set
None [0]
None [0]
Use Level Set
Yes [1]
Yes [1]
Autoset Force
No [0]
No [0]
Restrict PIN Use
Yes [1]
No [0]
Simple Set
No [0]
No [0]
Intelligent Set
No [0]
No [0]
Common Lobby
Yes [1]
Yes [1]
Flexi Unset
No [0]
No [0]
2 Key HU
None [3]
Both [2]
Tag Opens Doors
No [0]
No [0]
ENFORCER V11 PROGRAMMING GUIDE
47
--- PAGE BREAK ---
MENU OPTIONS
CLEAN START [2020]
CLEAN START [2000]
Fire Key Enable
No [0]
No [0]
Set with Poll Fault
No [0]
Yes [1]
Fob Unset Entry
No [0]
No [0]
Wireless Bell Supervision
Yes [1]
No [0]
Download if Set
No [0]
No [0]
UDL/Cloud Priority
Low [1]
High [0]
Yes [1]
Yes [1]
Occupancy Zones
Push Notification
SMS
Yes [1]
Yes [1]
ARC Call
Yes [1]
Yes [1]
Keypad Sounder
Yes [1]
Yes [1]
Internal Sounder
Yes [1]
Yes [1]
External Sounder
Yes [1]
Yes [1]
Area A Text
Full Set
Full Set
Area B Text
Night Set
Night Set
System Displays
Area C Text
Area C
Area C
Area D Text
Area D
Area D
Full Area Text
Full
Full
Sign on Message
Enforcer
Enforcer
Display When Set
No [0]
No [0]
Display Alarms
No [0]
No [0]
Display HUs
No [0]
No [0]
Display Inputs
No [0]
No [0]
Final Door [1]
Timed/Final [2]
Exit Modes
A Exit Mode
B Exit Mode
Timed [0]
Timed [0]
C Exit Mode
Timed [0]
Timed [0]
D Exit Mode
Timed [0]
Timed [0]
No [0]
No [0]
REVIEW LOGS
ENGINEER TESTS
DIAGNOSTICS
ENGINEER RESTORE OPTIONS
Engineer Restore Intruder
48
Engineer Restore Hold Up
No [0]
No [0]
Engineer Restore Tamper
Yes [1]
Yes [1]
Engineer Restore Soak
No [0]
No [0]
ENFORCER V11 PROGRAMMING GUIDE
--- PAGE BREAK ---
MENU OPTIONS
CLEAN START [2020]
CLEAN START [2000]
Engineer Restore Confirmed
Yes [1]
Yes [1]
Engineer Restore Faults
No [0]
No [0]
Anti-Code Restore
No [0]
No [0]
NONE/PSTN [0]
NONE/PSTN [0]
No [0]
No [0]
System ID
Displays unique System ID
Displays unique System ID
Cloud Password
_
_
COMMUNICATIONS
Select External Modem Type
Modem Type
App Set Up
Use App
Security Level
Normal [0]
Normal [0]
App Password
_
_
Always Poll Cloud
No [0]
No [0]
6
6
[1]
[1]
Format
Not Used [254]
Not Used [254]
Digi Channel 1
Fire [0001]
Fire [0001]
Data Network Set Up?
Programming Signalling
ARC Details
Digi Channel 2
HU Device Any [0009]
HU Device Any [0009]
Digi Channel 3
Unconfirmed Any [0018]
Unconfirmed Any [0018]
Digi Channel 4
Final Set Any [0022]
Final Set Any [0022]
Digi Channel 5
Tamper Any [0007]
Tamper Any [0007]
Digi Channel 6
Omit Rearm Any [0017]
Omit Rearm Any [0017]
Digi Channel 7
Confirmed Any [0006]
Confirmed Any [0006]
Digi Channel 8
Mains Fail [0052]
Mains Fail [0052]
Digi Channel 9
Global Fault 2 [0056]
Global Fault 2 [0056]
Digi Channel 10
Test ATS [0064]
Test ATS [0064]
Digi Channel 11-16
Not Used [0000]
Not Used [0000]
SMS Details
[1]
[1]
Mobile Number
_
_
User SMS Signalling
ALARM RESPONSE
Silent 1st Alarm
Never [0]
Never [0]
Disable Confirm On Entry
No [0]
No [0]
Area A, B, C, D Starts At
Digi [3]
Digi [3]
Area A ,B, C, D Stops At
Confirm [4]
Confirm [4]
Fire, Gas, HU Start At
Digi [3]
Digi [3]
ENFORCER V11 PROGRAMMING GUIDE
49
--- PAGE BREAK ---
MENU OPTIONS
CLEAN START [2020]
CLEAN START [2000]
Fire Stops At
Digi [3]
Digi [3]
HU Stops at
Confirm [4]
Confirm [4]
Day Alarm Starts
Sirens Only [2]
Sirens Only [2]
Day Alarm Stops
Sirens Only [2]
Sirens Only [2]
None [0]
None [0]
SET UP DOWNLOADING
Download By
SOFTWARE REVISION
CLEAN START
EXIT ENGINEER MENU
50
ENFORCER V11 PROGRAMMING GUIDE
--- PAGE BREAK ---
APPENDIX B - INPUT TYPES
NUMBER & TYPE
00
OPERATION
Unused
Factory default. Input is programmed out of operation.
01
Fire
Active at all times. Audible response: Full (differentiated
Communicator: ‘Fire’ signal.
02
Gas
Active at all times. Audible Response: Full (differentiated
Communicator: ‘Gas’ signal.
03
HU#
Active at all times. Audible Response: Full (differentiated
Communicator: ‘Hold Up’ and ‘Input HU’ signals.
04
Silent HU#
Active at all times. Audible Response: None
Communicator: ‘Hold Up’ and ‘Input HU’ signals.
05
Tamper
When disarmed: Audible Response: Internal only Communicator:
‘Tamper’ signal. When set: Audible Response: Full (differentiated)
Communicator: ‘Tamper’ and ‘Unconfirmed’ signals.
06
Intruder
Active when set. Audible Response: Full
Communicator: ‘Intruder’ and ‘Unconfirmed’ signals.
07
Final Exit (FX)#
Active when armed – initiates entry timer if system not disarmed
before entry time expires: Audible Response: Full.
Communicator: ‘Intruder’ and ‘Unconfirmed’ signals.
08
Entry Route (ER)
Active when set, except during entry time.
Audible Response: Full.
Communicator: ‘Intruder’ and ‘Unconfirmed’ signals.
09
ER (Part FX)
When fully armed (A), acts as Entry route input, as above. When part
armed (B,C,D), acts as Final Exit input, as above.
10
FX (Part ER)
When fully armed (A), acts as Final Exit input, as above. When part
armed (B,C,D), acts as Entry route input, as above.
11
PTS
Active during exit time to complete Arming procedure
No audible or communicator response.
Note: May be used to act as ‘doorbell’ by use of ‘chime’ attribute.
Switcher
Active at all times: This zone type is used to trigger an output or
task, but not an alarm. It will function whether the panel is armed
or disarmed and can be used to illuminate a light, or trigger a CCTV
camera etc.
If the zone has Masking or Tamper functions – then these will still
trigger an alarm, it is only regular activations that will not.
13
Day Alarm
When armed: Audible Response: Full; Communicator: ‘Instant’
signals. When disarmed: Audible Response: Programmable;
Communicator: ‘24hr Alarm’ signal (if programmed in Alarm
Responses menu).
16
Fault
When armed: Audible Response: Full; Communicator: ‘Instant’
signals. When disarmed: Audible Response: Programmable;
Communicator: ‘24hr Alarm’ signal (if programmed in Alarm
Responses menu).
20
Keyswitch Latched*
Accepts input from keyswitch (or equivalent) to arm/disarm the
Set modes assigned to it. Arming includes normal exit time, etc.
Requires latching action switch.
12
ENFORCER V11 PROGRAMMING GUIDE
51
--- PAGE BREAK ---
NUMBER & TYPE
OPERATION
21
Entry Shock Input
Active when system set. Works in conjunction with EE input type for
detection of forced entry. See page 35 for details.
23
Keyswitch Pulsed*
Accepts input from keyswitch (or equivalent) to Set/disarm the Set
modes assigned to it. Requires momentary action switch to toggle
set/disarmed state.
32
Flood
This input type will work as a 24hr input, any inputs that are
programmed for Flood will activate the external siren.
42
Medical
This input type will work as a 24hr input, any inputs that are
programmed for Medical will activate the external siren.
44
ATE Line Fail
Once a ATE line fail has been recognised the input will open.
*The use of these inputs will make the system unable to comply with EN50131-1 Grade 2
#These input types cannot be bypassed.
Entry Shock Input Type (21)
This input type is designed specifically for use with systems installed using BS8243 option 6.4.5.
This input type is always used in conjunction with an Entry/Exit input. The Entry/Exit input is a door contact on the initial entry door, and the Entry Shock
input is a non-latching shock sensor fitted to the door frame in the vicinity of the lock. If the initial entry door is subjected to gross attack and forced
open, then at the expiry of entry time only one further intruder input need to be activated to signal a sequentially confirmed alarm – the Entry Shock
input counts as the first to alarm. The Entry/Exit door contact must be opened with 10 seconds of the shock detector triggering for the Entry Shock
response to apply. Triggering the Entry Shock input in isolation will NOT generate an alarm of any kind.
APPENDIX C - TIMERS
TIMER
FUNCTION
RANGE
Entry Time
Entry time for each area. (if programmed as the input type ‘Final
Exit’)
0 – 255 seconds
Exit Time
Exit time for each area.
0 – 255 seconds
APP Exit Time
Exit time when armed via the smart device app
0 – 199 seconds
Siren Time
Cut off time for external sounder. Separate for each area.
2 – 15 minutes
Siren Delay
Delay after intruder alarm before siren live. Not valid within 3
minutes of final arm or after entry time started.
0 – 20 minutes
Confirm Time
Time period during which a second activation must occur to
qualify as ‘sequentially confirmed’ alarm. NOTE: BS8243 specifies
a confirm time between 30 and 60 minutes. This also can be
used in conjunction with testing an omit signal.
1 – 99 minutes
HU Confirm Time
Time period during which a second activation on a hold alarm
must occur to qualify as ‘sequentially confirmed’ alarm. NOTE:
BS8243 specifies a confirm time between 8 and 20 hours. This
also can be used in conjunction with testing an omit signal.
8 – 20 hours
Strobe Time
Time strobe output remains live after siren time ends.
‘99’ means endless.
0 – 99 minutes
Number of times system re-arms after bell time ends.
Re-Arm No.
AC Signal Delay
Please note: Re-arm number applies to each area, and does
not affect emergency alarms. ‘9’ means always re-arm.
Time delay before mains failure or technical alarm notified.
NOTE: Arming ‘250’ = never alarms. System change-over to
battery supply and associated visual alert indication is always
immediate.
Some ATE imposes a randomised delay in notifying a mains fail.
This should be taken into account when arming this timer.
52
ENFORCER V11 PROGRAMMING GUIDE
0–9
0 – 250 minutes
--- PAGE BREAK ---
TIMER
FUNCTION
RANGE
Settle
Time between final exit input closing, and system arming.
0 - 255 seconds
Double Knock
Length of filter period applied to inputs with ‘Double Knock’
attribute.
0 – 75 seconds
Pre-Alarm
Delays ‘Intruder’ output signals if entry time has started. Prealarm time must be set for at least 30 seconds to comply with
PD6662
0 – 255 seconds
Comm Fault Delay
Duration of communication fault before ‘Comms Fault’ alarm
triggered. NOTE: In the case of devices connected via the ATE
pins, this time is additional to that already applied by the ATE.
0 – 250 seconds
Please note: Arming this to ‘250’ disables line fault
monitoring and will not notify at the keypad/readers
Set Fail
Time after which ‘Set Fail’ operation will be invoked if exit
procedure not completed.
0 – 255 seconds
Fire Siren Time
Cut off time for fire alarm. ‘99’ means endless.
1 – 99 minutes
Set Fail Warning
Time for which a set fail warning will be present.
0 – 99 seconds
Occupancy
This timer (set in hours) defines the period of time that any
zones with the occupancy attribute enabled must be trigger in.
0 - hours
Occupancy Suspend
Defines the areas which will suspend the timer if armed.
[ABCD]
Input NAT Days
NAT stands for Non-Activity Timer. This is used in conjunction
with the input attribute ‘Non Activity Input’, and will monitor
the chosen input for the selected number of days. At expiration
of timer, and if the input has not opened within that time, then
this will be stored in the panel log. Non Activity fault and there
will be an output activated if programmed to it. Send SMS
message if “Special Log” is on.
0-14 days
Input NAT Hours
NAT stands for Non-Activity Timer. This is used in conjunction
with the input attribute ‘Non Activity Input’, and will monitor
the chosen input for the selected number of hours. At
expiration of timer, and if the input has not opened within that
time, then this will be stored in the panel log. Non Activity fault
and there will be an output activated if programmed to it. Send
SMS message if “Special Log” is on.
00-23 hours
Wireless Supervision Time
This option is only applicable if wireless devices are installed. It
is the time window before a wireless supervision fault will be
signalled. For example: if the time is set for 2 hours, then any
device that doesn’t communicate with the wireless expander
within that period will cause a supervision fault. This must be
programmed to 2 hours or less for compliance to EN50131.
0-99 hours
Wireless Jamming Time
This option is only applicable if wireless devices are installed.
It is the time window that if a wireless device had its signal
‘blocked’ a fault would display. For example, if the time is set to
30 seconds, then if a wireless device is ‘jammed’ longer than 30
seconds a fault will be displayed. This must be programmed to
30 seconds or less (but not zero) for compliance to EN50131.
0-100 seconds
Service Time
This is a timer that can be set in days, and will display a
message to the user warning that a service is due. An engineer
code will clear the message.
367 days
ENFORCER V11 PROGRAMMING GUIDE
53
--- PAGE BREAK ---
APPENDIX D - OUTPUT TYPES
54
NO.
TYPE
ACTIVE
0000
Not Used
(Permanently off )
0001
Fire
At alarm
When a valid code is entered
0002
Hold Up Any
"At a HU or Duress alarm
(This includes keypad HU)"
When a valid code is entered
0003
Intruder Any
At alar
[... content truncated for display — full manual available from manufacturer ...]
| Model | Zones | Application |
|---|---|---|
| LightSYS2 | Up to 512 zones | Commercial / industrial |
| ProSYS Plus | Up to 512 zones | Large commercial / industrial |
| Agility 3 | 32 wireless zones | Residential / small commercial |
| Agility 4 | 64 wireless zones | Small commercial wireless |
| Code Type | Default | Notes |
|---|---|---|
| Installer Code | 1234 | Full programming access |
| Master Code | 1234 | User management |
| User Code 1 | 1234 | Standard user |
| Zone Type | Description |
|---|---|
| Entry/Exit | Entry route with delay |
| Intruder | Standard alarm zone |
| 24-Hour | Always active |
| PA | Personal attack |
| Fire | Fire detection |
| Tamper | Anti-tamper |
| Keyswitch | External arm/disarm |
| Perimeter | Part-set zone |
| Code / Display | Description | Likely Cause | Action |
|---|---|---|---|
| Zone Fault | Zone open circuit | Wiring break, device failure | Check wiring and device. |
| Zone Tamper | Tamper activated | Lid removed, cable cut | Inspect device. |
| Mains Fail | Mains supply lost | Power cut, blown fuse | Check fuses. |
| Battery Low | Battery below threshold | Battery end of life | Replace battery. |
| Comms Fail | Signalling failure | IP/PSTN fault | Check IP/PSTN settings. |
| Wireless Fault | Wireless device not responding | Device battery flat | Check device battery. |
| Cloud Fail | Risco Cloud connection lost | Internet down | Check internet connection. |
| Zone Config | EOL Resistor | Normal | Alarm |
|---|---|---|---|
| EOL | 4k7Ω | 4,700Ω | <500Ω |
| DEOL | 2 × 4k7Ω | 4,700Ω | <500Ω |
| Terminal | Function | Notes |
|---|---|---|
| +12V | Auxiliary power output | 500mA max |
| 0V | Common ground | Must be continuous |
| Z1–Z8 | Zone inputs (on-board) | EOL resistors required |
| BELL+ | Bell/siren positive | Supervised output |
| BELL− | Bell/siren negative | Via tamper capacitor |
| D+ | RS-485 data positive | Twisted pair with D− |
| D− | RS-485 data negative | Twisted pair with D+ |
=== WEB RESEARCH: risco ===
## Risco LightSYS2 ProSYS Plus Intruder Alarm Panel - Full Technical Reference
### 1. General Information
The LightSYS2 is a comprehensive intruder alarm panel designed for security engineers. This document provides a full technical reference, including all default codes, fault codes, zone types, wiring, programming menus, and every piece of technical information available.
### 2. Product Range and Model Numbers
**Main Panel and Housing:**
* RP432M: LightSYS2 Main Board
* RP432B: LightSYS2 Polycarbonate Housing
* RP432PS: LightSYS2 1.5A Power Supply
* RP432PS15: LightSYS2 1.5A Power Supply, without wall plug
* RP432IN (xx): LightSYS2 Literature Pack (language)
* RP432BM1: LightSYS2 Metal Housing
* RP432PS1: LightSYS2 4A Power Supply
* RP432PS10UK: LightSYS2 3A Power Supply for metal housing., UK plug
**Keypads:**
* RP432KP: LightSYS2 LCD keypad, slim
* RP432KPP: LightSYS2 LCD keypad with proximity, slim (13.56 MHz)
* RP432KPP2: LCD keypad
* RP432KP02: Proximity Key Reader
* RW432KPP: Proximity tags (13.56 MHz)
* RPKELP: Proximity tags (125 KHz)
* RPKEL: 2-Way Wireless Slim Keypad with Prox, (2–Outdor, Black)
* RP132KL1/2P: (1–Indoor, White)
* RP128KCL: Panda Wired Keypad, Prox.
* RP128PKR: Panda Wired Keypad
* RP200KT: WL Panda Keypad for LightSYS2,868
* RP128KT: Elegant Keypad, w/ Prox
* RW132KL 1/2 P: 2-Way WL Slim Keypad
* RW432KPP: 2-Way WL Panda Keypad
**Zone Expanders:**
* RP432EZ8: 8 Zone Expansion Module
* RP128EZB: Bus Zone Expander
* RP128EZ01: Single Zone Expander
**Utility Output Expanders:**
* RP296EO4: 4-Relay Output Expansion Module
* RP296EO8: 8 Open-Collector Output Expansion Module
**Wireless Expanders:**
* RP432EW8: Wireless Expander, 868 MHz
* RP432EW4: Wireless Expander, 433 MHz
* RP432EWS: Wireless Security Module 868Hz
* RP432EWV: Wireless Video Module 868/869MHz
**Wireless Transmitters 868MHz:**
* RWT92: WL iWISE PIR
* RWT92P: WL iWISE Pet
* RWX34S: Smoke & Heat Detector 1 & 2 Way,
* RWX35S: WL Smoke & Heat
* WL T72C: WL Universal Transmitter
* RWT72M: WL Door/Window Contact
* RWT72P: WL Pulse Count Transmitter
* RWT72X: WL Dual Channel Transmitter
* Agility 132KF2: 2-Way 8 Button Remote Control Keyfob
* RW332KF1: Panda 2Way KeyFob
* RWT4RCP: 4-Button RC Keyfob with 2-Button Panic
* WL 132KF1: 4-Button Rolling-Code Keyfob, Black
* WL T4RC: 4-Button Rolling-Code Keyfob, Gray
* RWT51P: Wristband Panic Transmitter
* RWT52P: 2-Button Panic Keyfob
* RWT6SW: WL Shock Detector
* RWT6F: WL Flood Detector
* RWT6C08: WL CO Detector
* RWT6G: WL Glassbreak Detector
* WL T312: Wireless WatchOUT PIR
* WL X312: 2-Way WL WatchOUT PIR
* RWT95: WL iWAVE PIR
* RWT95P: WL iWAVE Pet
* RWX95: 2-Way WL iWAVE PIR ,868MHz
* RWX95P: 2-Way WL iWAVE Pet, 868MHz
* RWX73M: 2Way Door/Window Contact
* RWX73F: 2Way Multi-Function Contacts,868
* RWX73F8BL: 2-Way Multi Contact, Black
* RWX73F8BR: 2-Way Multi Contact, Brown
* RWX73M8BL: 2Way Door/Window Contact, Black
* RWX73M8BR: 2Way Door/Window Contact, Brown
* RWX75M: 2-Way WP Door/Window Contacts
* RWX96: 1&2 Way WL Piccolo Pet 868MHz
* RWX96P: 1&2 Way WL Piccolo Pet 868MHz
* RWT78M: 1-way Slim Contact 868MHz
* RWX515DT: 2 Way WL BWare DT, 868MHz
* RWX515DTP: 2 Way WL BWare DT Pet, 868MHz
* RWX515PR: 2 Way WL BWare PIR, 868MHz
* RWX515PT: 2 Way WL BWare Pet, 868MHz
* RWX95DT: 2 Way WL iWave DT, 868MHz
* RWX95DTP: 2 Way WL iWave DT Pet, 868MHz
* RWX78M: 2-way Slim Contact
* RWX78S: 2-way Slim Shock Detector
* RWX78SM: 2-way Slim Shock&Contact
* RWX106: 1 & 2-Way WL Curtain PIR
* RWX107DT: WL Outdoor DT Curtain
**Power Supply Expanders:**
* RP432PS0000A: LightSYS2 Power Supply, EU
* RP432PS00USA: LightSYS2 Power Supply, USA
* RP128EPS: 3A Switched Power Supply Expansion Module module
* RP128PSPSEUA: 3A Switched Power Supply inside large metal box + Tamper + transformer
* RP512BM21: ProSYS Plus & LightSYS2 B21 Box
* RP512BM26: ProSYS Plus & LightSYS2 B26 Box
**Voice Unit:**
* RP432EV: LightSYS2 Voice module
* RP128EVL000A: Listen and speak-in module
**Proximity Key Reader/Tag:**
* RP128PKR3: Proximity Key Reader Kit 13.56MHz
* RP200KT: Proximity Keytags 13.56MHz (10 units)
**COB Module:**
* RP512ECOB: Cellular on Bus (COB) Module
**IP Module:**
* RW132IP: Plug-in TCP/IP Module
* RP512IP: IP Multi-Socket Plug-in Module
**GSM/GPRS/3G/4G Module:**
* RGSMANT: External GSM Antenna with 3m cable
* RP512G4: GSM/4G MSoc + Ant. Plastic box
* RP512G3: GSM/3G MSoc + Ant. Plastic box
* RP512G2: M.S 2G for Plastic box+Ant.
**Fast PSTN Modem 2400:**
* RP432MD24: Plug-in LightSYS2 Fast Modem
**IP/AGM Receiver:**
* RP128IP0000A: AGM/IP Receiver Software
**External Sounders:**
* RS200WA: ProSound
* RS200WAP: ProSound with Proximity
* RS200LW: ProSound External Lamp
* RS4012: Lumin8, 2 Piezo+Lamp
* RS4022: Lumin8 Delta, 2 Piezo+Lamp
**Engineer Tools:**
* RW132EUSB: Adaptor from panel to PC USB
* RP132CB: RS232 PC to Panel Cable
**Bus Detectors:**
* RK350DT: Wired Beyond DT
* RK315DT: WatchOUT DT + swivel
* RK325DT: WatchIN DT + swivel
* RK312PR: WatchOUT PIR
* RK200DTG3: Industrial LuNAR DT AM Grade 3
* RK815DTB: iWISE Bus DT AM Grade 3 , 15m
* RK825DTB: iWISE Bus DT AM Grade 3 , 25m
* RK800Q0B: iWISE Bus Quad 15m (50 ft) AM Grade 3
* RK815DTB: iWISE DT AM Grade 2 , 15m
* RK825DTB: iWISE DT AM Grade 2 , 25m
* RK800Q0B: iWISE Quad 15m Grade 2
* RK66S: RISCO Seismic Detector
* RK515DTG3: BWare DT AM
* RK515DTGL: BWare DT
* RK515DTBG3: BWare DT AM
* RK515DTBGL: BWare DT
* RK500Q0G3: BWare Quad AM
* RK500Q: BWare Quad
* RK500QBG3: BWare Quad AM
* RK500QB: BWare Quad
* RK107DT: Wired Curtain DT AM, Bus
**Boxes:**
* RP432B: LightSYS2 Polycarbonate housing
* RP128B5: Plastic accessories box + tamper
### 3. Complete Technical Specifications
**Main Panel:**
* **Input Power:** AC/DC Adaptor 100-240V 50/60Hz 14.4V—1.5A, 4A
* **Current Consumption:** 60 mA, typical / 70 mA, maximum
* **Rechargeable Standby Battery:**
* 1.5A PS: 12 Volts up to 7 Amp-Hours (AH), typical
* 4A PS: 12 Volts up to 17 Amp-Hours (AH), typical
* **Power Outputs:**
* **Auxiliary Power:**
* 1.5A PS: Total current 800mA; Maximum Aux = 500mA; Maximum BUS (AUX RED) = 800mA
* 4A PS: Total current 1500mA; Maximum Aux = 500mA; Maximum BUS (AUX RED) = 1000mA
* **Bell/LS (External):** 12 Volts DC @ 500 mA, maximum
* **Programmable outputs:**
* UO1: Dry contact relay (24V, 1 Amps)
* UO2-UO4: 100 mA, opto relay
* **Main Box Dimensions:**
* RP432B Polycarbonate (1.5A PS): 290 x 254 x 97 mm
* RP432BM Metal, small (1.5A PS): 264 x 299 x 80 mm
* RP432BM1 Metal, large (4A or 1.5A PS): 420 x 379 x 95 mm
* **Operating temperature:** -10°C to 55°C (14°F to 131°F)
* **Weight:** 1.9 Kg (including battery)
* **Storage temperature:** -20°C to 60°C (-4°F to 140°F)
**Keypads:**
* **LCD Keypad (RP432KP, RP432KPP):**
* **Voltage:** 13.8V +/-10%
* **Current Consumption:** LCD (RP432KP): 48 mA typical/52 mA max; Prox LCD (RP432KPP): 62 mA typical/130 mA max
* **Main panel connection:** 4-wire BUS, up to 300 m (1000 ft) from Main Panel
* **Dimensions:** 153 x 84 x 28 mm (6.02 x 3.3 x 1.1 inch)
* **Operating temperature:** -10°C to 55°C (14°F to 131°F)
* **Storage temperature:** -20°C to 60°C (-4°F to 140°F)
* **Prox. RF frequency:** 13.56MHz
* **LCD Keypad (RP128KP, RP128KPP):**
* **Voltage:** 13.8V +/-10%
* **Current:** RP128KP: 100 mA maximum; RP128KPP (with prox) 250 mA maximum
* **Main Panel Connection:** 4-wire BUS, up to 300 m (1000 ft) from Main Panel
* **Dimensions:** 16.2 cm x 12.2 cm x 3 cm (6.37" x 4.8" x 1.18")
* **2-Way WL Slim Keypad (RW132KL 1/2 P):**
* **Voltage:** 3V (2 CR123 batteries in parallel)
* **Current:** Stand-by current 10μA, Max current 100 mA
* **Main Panel Connection:** Wireless
* **Dimensions:** 100 mm X 45 mm X 25 mm (3.9 i X 1.8 X .98 inches)
* **2-Way WL Panda Keypad (RW432KPP):**
* **Voltage:** 3V (4 CR123 Lithium batteries)
* **Current:** Stand-by current 9μA, Max current 150 mA
* **Main Panel Connection:** Wireless
* **Dimensions:** 180 mm X 115 mm X 35 mm (7.1 X 4.5 X 1.4 inches)
**Zone Expander (RP432EZ8):**
* **Voltage:** 13.8VDC +/-10%
* **Current:** 25 mA, typical / 30 mA, maximum
* **Main Panel Connection:** 4-wire BUS, up to 300 m (1000 ft) from Main Panel
* **Dimensions:** 10.5 cm x 6.6 cm x 1.8 cm
**Utility Output Expanders:**
* **4 Relay Output (RP296EO4):**
* **Voltage:** 13.8VDC +/-10%
* **Current:** 25 mA, typical / 160 mA, maximum
* **Contacts:** 4 Form C (SPDT) Relays.; 5 A / 24V DC
* **Main Panel Connection:** 4-wire BUS, up to 300 m (1000 ft) from Main Panel
* **Dimensions:** 4.13" x 2.6" x 0.86" (10.5 cm x 6.6 cm x 2.2 cm)
* **8 Transistor Output (RP296EO8):**
* **Voltage:** 13.8VDC +/-10%
* **Current:** 25 mA, typical / 160 mA, maximum
* **Contacts:** Open Collector, Active Pull-Down, 70 mA maximum
* **Main Panel Connection:** 4-wire BUS, up to 300 m (1000 ft) from Main Panel
* **Dimensions:** 4.13" x 2.6" x 0.7" (10.5 cm x 6.6 cm x 1.8 cm)
**Wireless Expander (RP432EW):**
* **Voltage:** 12-14.4V DC VDC
* **Current:** Typical: 40 mA; 65mA maximum
* **Frequency:** RW432EW8 – 868.65 MHz; RW432EW4 – 433.92 MHz
* **RF immunity:** According to EN50130-4
* **Range (L.O.S):** 300 meters
* **Relay outputs:** 12VDC @ 1A max Dry Contact Relays
* **Operating temperature:** -10°C to 55°C (14°F to 131°F)
* **Storage temperature:** -20°C to 60°C (-4°F to 140°F)
* **Main Panel Connection:** 4-wire BUS, up to 300 m (1000 ft) from Main Panel
* **Dimensions:** 125.5 X 78X 25.5 mm (4.94 X 3.07 X 1 inch)
**Proximity Key Reader (RP128PKR):**
* **Voltage:** 13.8VDC +/-10%
* **Current:** 70 mA, typical / 180 mA max
* **Main Panel Connection:** 4-wire BUS, up to 300 m (1000 ft) from Main Panel
* **Dimensions:** 40 mm x 43.6 mm x 22 mm (1.57“ x 1.7“ x 0.86“)
**Voice Module (RP432EV):**
* **Voltage:** 13.8VDC +/-10%
* **Current:** 30 mA typical / 70 mA maximum
* **Operating temperature:** 0-70°C
* **Main Panel Connection:** 4-wire BUS, up to 300 m (1000 ft) from Main Panel
**Sirens:**
* **ProSound (RS200WA, RS200WAP):**
* **Input DC Power:** Regulated 13.5-14.2V, 200 mA maximum
* **Standby Current Consumption:** 54 mA + charge current
* **Battery charging current:** 140 mA maximum
* **Operating Current Consumption:** 1.6A ((Sounder + Strobe))
* **Speaker Sound level:** 106 dB @ 3 meters
* **Main Panel Connection:** 4-wire BUS, up to 300 m (1000 ft) from Main Panel
* **Dimensions:** 30.5 cm X 21.8 cm X 11.6 cm
* **Lumin8 (RS200WA, RS200WAP):**
* **Input DC Power:** Regulated 13.0- 14.2V
* **Current Consumption:** Single piezo: 350mA (Regulated); Twin piezo: 450mA (Regulated)
* **Battery charging current:** 15 mA maximum
* **Speaker Sound level:** Single piezo: 111dbA; Twin piezo: 114dbA
* **Main Panel Connection:** 4-wire BUS, up to 300 m (1000 ft) from Main Panel
**Single Zone Expander (RP128EZ01):**
* **Voltage:** 13.8VDC +/-10%
* **Current:** 20mA
* **Main Panel Connection:** 4-wire BUS, up to 300 m (1000 ft) from Main Panel
**Plug In 2G, 3G, 4G GSM (RP512G2, RP512G3, RP512G4):**
* **Current:** 160mA; During Standby - 30mA
* **Dimensions:** 80 mm x 50 mm x 25 mm
**Plug In GSM (RP432GSM):**
* **Voltage:** 13.8VDC +/-10%
* **Current:** Average: 30 mA; Peak: 160 mA
* **Dimensions:** 80 mm x 50 mm x 25 mm
**Plug In IP (RP512IP):**
* **Current:** 75mA maximum
* **Dimensions:** 80 mm x 50 mm x 25 mm
**Plug In IP (RW132IP):**
* **Voltage:** 13.8VDC +/-10%
* **Current:** Average 55 mA; Peak 105 mA
* **Dimensions:** 70 mm x 60 mm
**Plug In Modem 2400 (RP432MD24):**
* **Voltage:** 13.8VDC +/-10%
* **Current:** 20 mA, typical / 60 mA, maximum
* **Dimensions:** 70 mm x 25 mm
**BUS Expander (RP432EZB):**
* **Voltage:** 13.8VDC +/-10%
* **Current:** 20 mA, typical
* **Main Panel Connection:** 4-wire BUS, up to 300 m (1000 ft) from Main Panel
* **Dimensions:** 10.5 cm x 6.6 cm x 1.8 cm
**KP LRT (Long Range Transmitter):**
* **Voltage:** 13.8VDC +/-10%
* **Current:** 10 mA, standby / 1A maximum
* **Dimensions:** 227 mm x 173 mm x 124 mm
### 4. Default Codes
* **Installer Code:** 5678 (default for Configuration Software Access Code)
* **MS Lock:** 000000 (default)
* **Cloud Password:** AAAAAA (default)
* **Remote Phone Code (Voice Module):** 00 (default)
### 5. Fault/Event/Alarm Code Tables
**Report Codes (Contact ID / SIA / Report Category):**
| Parameter | Contact ID | SIA | Report Category |
|---|---|---|---|
| Panic alarm | 120 | PA | Urgent |
| Panic alarm restore | 120 | PH | Urgent |
| Fire alarm | 115 | FA | Urgent |
| Fire alarm restore | 115 | FH | Urgent |
| Medical alarm | 100 | MA | Urgent |
| Medical alarm restore | 100 | MH | Urgent |
| Duress alarm | 121 | HA | Urgent |
| Duress alarm restore | 121 | HH | Urgent |
| Box tamper | 137 | TA | Urgent |
| Box tamper restore | 137 | TR | Urgent |
| Confirmed alarm | 139 | BV | Urgent |
| Confirmed alarm restore | 139 | | Urgent |
| Recent Close | 459 | | Non-urgent |
| Bell trouble | 321 | YA | Non-urgent |
| Bell trouble restore | 321 | YH | Non-urgent |
| Auxiliary failure | 300 | YP | Non-urgent |
| Auxiliary restore | 300 | YQ | Non-urgent |
| Bus failure | 333 | ET | Non-urgent |
| Bus restore | 333 | ER | Non-urgent |
| Low battery | 302 | YT | Non-urgent |
| Low battery restore | 302 | YR | Non-urgent |
| AC loss | 301 | AT | Non-urgent |
| AC restore | 301 | AR | Non-urgent |
| Clock not set | 626 | | Non-urgent |
| Clock set | 625 | | Non-urgent |
| False code | 421 | | Non-urgent |
| False code restore | 421 | LT | Non-urgent |
| Main phone trouble | 351 | JA | Non-urgent |
| Main phone trouble restore | 351 | LR | Non-urgent |
| RF Jamming | 344 | XQ | Non-urgent |
| RF Jamming restore | 344 | XH | Non-urgent |
| GSM trouble | 330 | IA | Non-urgent |
| GSM trouble restore | 330 | IR | Non-urgent |
| GSM Pre-Alarm | | | Non-urgent |
| IP Network trouble | | | Non-urgent |
| IP Network trouble restore | | | Non-urgent |
| User Arm | 401 | CL | Arm/Disarm |
| User Disarm | 401 | OP | Arm/Disarm |
| Stay arm | 441 | CG | Arm/Disarm |
| Disarm after alarm | 458 | OR | Arm/Disarm |
| Keyswitch Arm | 409 | CS | Arm/Disarm |
| Keyswitch Disarm | 409 | OS | Arm/Disarm |
| Auto Arm | 403 | CA | Arm/Disarm |
| Auto Disarm | 403 | OA | Arm/Disarm |
| Remote Arm | 407 | CL | Arm/Disarm |
| Remote Disarm | 407 | OP | Arm/Disarm |
| Forced Arm | 574 | CF | Arm/Disarm |
| Quick Arm | 408 | CL | Arm/Disarm |
| No Arm | 654 | CD | Arm/Disarm |
| Auto Arm fail | 455 | CI | Arm/Disarm |
| Burglary alarm | 130 | BA | Urgent |
| Burglary alarm restore | 130 | BH | Urgent |
| Fire alarm | 110 | FA | Urgent |
| Fire alarm restore | 110 | FH | Urgent |
| Foil alarm | 155 | BA | Urgent |
| Foil alarm restore | 155 | BH | Urgent |
| Panic alarm | 120 | PA | Urgent |
| Panic alarm restore | 120 | PH | Urgent |
| Medical alarm | 100 | MA | Urgent |
| Medical alarm restore | 100 | MH | Urgent |
| 24 Hour alarm | 133 | BA | Urgent |
| 24 Hour alarm restore | 133 | BH | Urgent |
| Entry/Exit | 134 | BA | Urgent |
| Entry/Exit restore | 134 | BH | Urgent |
| Water (Flood) alarm | 154 | WA | Urgent |
| Water (Flood) alarm restore | 154 | WH | Urgent |
| Gas alarm | 151 | GA | Urgent |
| Gas alarm restore | 151 | GH | Urgent |
| Carbon Monoxide alarm | 162 | GA | Urgent |
| Carbon Monoxide alarm restore | 162 | GH | Urgent |
| Environmental alarm | 150 | UA | Urgent |
| Environmental alarm restore | 150 | UH | Urgent |
| Low Temperature (Freeze alarm) | 159 | ZA | Urgent |
| Low Temperature restore | 159 | ZH | Urgent |
| High Temperature | 158 | KA | Urgent |
| High Temperature restore | 158 | KH | Urgent |
| Zone trouble | 380 | UT | Urgent |
| Zone trouble restore | 380 | UJ | Urgent |
| Burglary trouble | 380 | BT | Urgent |
| Burglary trouble restore | 380 | BJ | Urgent |
| Zone bypass | 570 | UB | Urgent |
| Zone bypass restore | 570 | UU | Urgent |
| Burglary bypass | 573 | BB | Urgent |
| Burglary bypass restore | 573 | BU | Urgent |
| Zone supervision loss | 381 | UT | Urgent |
| Zone supervision restore | 381 | UJ | Urgent |
| Tamper | 144 | TA | Urgent |
| Tamper restore | 144 | TR | Urgent |
| Zone lost | 381 | UT | Urgent |
| Zone lost restore | 381 | UJ | Urgent |
| Low battery | 384 | XT | Non-urgent |
| Low battery restore | 384 | XR | Non-urgent |
| Soak fail | 380 | UT | Urgent |
| Soak fail restore | 380 | UJ | Urgent |
| Zone Alarm | 134 | BA | Urgent |
| Zone Alarm restore | 134 | BH | Urgent |
| Zone confirm alarm | 139 | BV | Urgent |
| Zone confirm alarm restore | 139 | | Urgent |
| No activity | 393 | NC | Urgent |
| No activity restore | 393 | NS | Urgent |
| Tamper | 145 | TA | Urgent |
| Tamper restore | 145 | TR | Urgent |
| Keypad lost | 355 | BZ | Urgent |
| Keypad lost restore | 355 | | Urgent |
| Low battery | 384 | XT | Non-urgent |
| Low battery restore | 384 | XR | Non-urgent |
| Arm | 409 | CS | Arm/Disarm |
| Disarm | 409 | OS | Arm/Disarm |
| Low battery | 384 | XT | Non-urgent |
| Low battery restore | 384 | XR | Non-urgent |
| Tamper | 145 | TA | Urgent |
| Tamper restore | 145 | TR | Urgent |
| Low battery | 384 | XT | Non-urgent |
| Low battery restore | 384 | XR | Non-urgent |
| Siren lost | 355 | BZ | Urgent |
| Siren lost restore | 355 | | Urgent |
| Low battery | 384 | XT | Non-urgent |
| Low battery restore | 384 | XR | Non-urgent |
| I/O Expander lost | 355 | BZ | Urgent |
| I/O Expander lost restore | 355 | | Urgent |
| Tamper | 145 | TA | Urgent |
| Tamper restore | 145 | TR | Urgent |
| AC trouble | 301 | AT | Non-urgent |
| AC trouble restore | 301 | AR | Non-urgent |
| RF Jamming | 380 | XQ | Urgent |
| RF Jamming restore | 380 | XH | Urgent |
| Bell trouble | 321 | YA | Non-urgent |
| Bell trouble restore | 321 | YH | Non-urgent |
| Auxiliary close | 301 | AT | Non-urgent |
| Auxiliary close restore | 301 | AR | Non-urgent |
| Auxiliary failure | 300 | YP | Non-urgent |
| Auxiliary restore | 300 | YQ | Non-urgent |
| Overload | 312 | YP | Non-urgent |
| Overload restore | 312 | YQ | Non-urgent |
| Enter programming (local) | 627 | LB | Arm/Disarm |
| Exit programming (Local) | 628 | LS (LX ) | Arm/Disarm |
| Enter programming (Remote) | 627 | RB | Arm/Disarm |
| Exit programming (Remote) | 628 | RS | Arm/Disarm |
| MS periodic test | 602 | RP | Non-urgent |
| MS keep alive (polling) | 999 | ZZ | Urgent |
| Call back | 411 | RB | Non-urgent |
| System reset | 305 | RR | Urgent |
| Listen in begin | 606 | LF | Urgent |
| Cancel Report | 406 | OC | Urgent |
| Walk Test | 607 | BC | Non-urgent |
| Walk Test restore | 607 | | Non-urgent |
| Exit Error | 374 | | Non-urgent |
| Enter Service Mode | 393 | LB | Non-urgent |
| Exit Service Mode | 393 | LX | Non-urgent |
### 6. All Zone Types and Their Descriptions
**Zone Types (Programming Menu 2.1.3):**
* **00) Not Used**
* **01) Exit/Entry 1:** Standard entry/exit zone with delay 1.
* **02) Exit/Entry 2:** Standard entry/exit zone with delay 2.
* **03) Exit(OP)/Entry 1:** Exit/entry zone with open/close reporting and delay 1.
* **04) Exit(OP)/Entry 2:** Exit/entry zone with open/close reporting and delay 2.
* **05) Entry Follower:** Follows an entry/exit zone, becoming instant if the entry/exit zone is not triggered first.
* **06) Instant:** Triggers an immediate alarm when violated.
* **07) I+ Exit/Entry 1:** Instant arming with exit/entry delay 1.
* **08) I+ Exit/Entry 2:** Instant arming with exit/entry delay 2.
* **09) I+Exit(OP)/Entry1:** Instant arming with open/close reporting and exit/entry delay 1.
* **10) I+Exit (OP)/Entry2:** Instant arming with open/close reporting and exit/entry delay 2.
* **11) I + Entry Follow:** Instant arming with entry follower behavior.
* **12) I+ Instant:** Instant arming, immediate alarm.
* **13) UO Trigger:** Triggers a Utility Output when violated.
* **14) Day Zone:** Active during disarmed periods, typically for chimes or trouble reports.
* **15) 24 Hours:** Always active, triggers an alarm regardless of arming status.
* **16) Fire:** Triggers a fire alarm.
* **17) Panic:** Triggers a panic alarm.
* **18) Special:** General purpose zone for custom applications.
* **19) Pulsed Keyswitch:** Momentary keyswitch for arming/disarming.
* **20) Final Exit:** Triggers after the final exit delay.
* **21) Latch Keyswitch:** Latching keyswitch for arming/disarming.
* **22) Entry Follower + Stay:** Entry follower behavior, but also active in Stay mode.
* **23) Pulsed Keyswitch Delay:** Pulsed keyswitch with a delay.
* **24) Latch Keyswitch Delay:** Latching keyswitch with a delay.
* **25) Tamper:** Triggers an alarm when tampered with.
* **26) Technical:** Reports technical troubles.
* **27) Water:** Triggers an alarm for water detection (flood).
* **28) Gas:** Triggers an alarm for gas detection.
* **29) CO:** Triggers an alarm for Carbon Monoxide detection.
* **30) Exit Term:** Exit termination zone.
* **31) High Temperature:** Triggers an alarm for high temperature.
* **32) Low Temperature:** Triggers an alarm for low temperature.
* **33) Key Box:** Zone for a key box, reports open/close.
* **34) Keyswitch Arm:** Keyswitch for arming.
* **35) Keyswitch Delayed Arm:** Keyswitch for arming with a delay.
### 7. Complete Wiring Diagrams and Terminal Descriptions
**Wiring (Appendix C):**
**Table A-1: Wire Facts**
| AWG Gauge Size | Wire Diameter (Millimeters) | Wire Diameter (Inches) | Resistance: Ω Per Meter | Resistance: Ω Per 100 Meters | Ω Per Foot | Ω Per 1000 Feet |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 24 | 0.50 | 0.020 | 0.085 | 8.5 | 0.0261 | 26.0 |
| 22 | 0.64 | 0.025 | 0.052 | 5.2 | 0.016 | 16.0 |
| 20 | 0.80 | 0.031 | 0.032 | 3.2 | 0.010 | 10.0 |
| 19 | 0.90 | 0.035 | 0.026 | 2.6 | 0.008 | 8.0 |
| 18 | 1.00 | 0.040 | 0.020 | 2.0 | 0.006 | 6.0 |
| 16 | 1.27 | 0.050 | 0.013 | 1.3 | 0.004 | 4.0 |
| 14 | 1.63 | 0.064 | 0.008 | 0.82 | 0.0025 | 2.5 |
**Table A-2: Wiring Between the LightSYS™2 Main Panel and the Plug-In Transformer**
| One-Way Wire Distance (In Meters) | One-Way Wire Distance (In Feet) | AWG (American Wire Gauge) |
|---|---|---|
| Up to 5 | Up to 15 | 22 |
| 5-8 | 15 - 25 | 20 |
| 8 - 12 | 25 - 40 | 18 |
| 12 - 20 | 40 - 60 | 16 |
| 20 - 30 | 60 - 100 | 14 |
**Table A-3: Wire Gauge (Max Combined Length of ALL Expansion Bus Wiring)**
| Wire Gauge | | Max Combined Length (Meters) | Max Combined Length (Feet) |
|---|---|---|---|
| 24 AWG | 7/02mm | 150 | 492 |
| 22 AWG | 16/02mm | 200 | 656 |
| 20 AWG | 24/02mm | 333 | 1092 |
| 19 AWG | 28/02mm | 400 | 1312 |
*Notes:* For maximum system stability, it is best NOT to exceed a total of 300 meters (1000 feet) of wire when wiring the Expansion bus. For a distance of more than 300 meters, refer to RISCO Group technical support service for detailed information.
**Table A-4: Total Auxiliary Power (Max Run)**
| Total Auxiliary Power (Max Current Draw per Branch) | 32/02 mm (18 AWG) Meters (Feet) | 28/02 mm (19 AWG) Meters (Feet) | 24/02 mm (20 AWG) Meters (Feet) | 16/02 mm (22 AWG) Meters (Feet) | 7/02 mm (24 AWG) Meters (Feet) |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 20mA | 1195 (3920) | 945 (3100) | 750 (2460) | 472 (1550) | 296 (970) |
| 30mA | 793 (2600) | 628 (2060) | 500 (1640) | 314 (1030) | 197 (646) |
| 40mA | 597 (1960) | 472 (1550) | 375 (1230) | 236 (775) | 148 (485) |
| 50mA | 478 (1568) | 378 (1240) | 300 (984) | 189 (620) | 118 (388) |
| 60mA | 296 (1300) | 314 (1030) | 250 (820) | 157 (515) | 98 (323) |
| 70mA | 341 (1120) | 270 (886) | 214 (703) | 135 (443) | 84 (277) |
| 80mA | 299 (980) | 237 (775) | 187 (615) | 118 (388) | 74 (243) |
| 90mA | 264 (867) | 209 (687) | 166 (547) | 105 (343) | 66 (215) |
| 100mA | 239 (784) | 189 (620) | 123 (492) | 94 (310) | 59 (194) |
*Note:* The wire lengths indicated represent the one-way distance between the source of power and the last detector in the branch.
**Table A-5: Maximum External Sounder Current (Max Run)**
| Max External Sounder Current (Max current draw per branch) | 32/02 mm (18 AWG) Meters (Feet) | 28/02 mm (19 AWG) Meters (Feet) | 24/02 mm (20 AWG) Meters (Feet) | 16/02 mm (22 AWG) Meters (Feet) |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 100mA | 238 (780) | 191 (625) | 151 (495) | 94 (310) |
| 200mA | 229 (390) | 95 (313) | 76 (248) | 47 (155) |
| 300mA | 79 (260) | 63 (208) | 50 (165) | 31 (103) |
| 400mA | 59 (195) | 48 (157) | 38 (124) | 24 (78) |
| 500mA | 48 (156) | 38 (125) | 30 (99) | 19 (62) |
| 650mA | 37 (120) | 29 (96) | 23 (76) | 15 (48) |
*Note:* The wire lengths indicated represent the one-way distance between the LightSYS™2 and the external sounder in the branch.
### 8. Full Programming Menu Structure
**Installer Programming Menu (Appendix G):**
**1) System**
* **1) Timers**
* 01) Ex/En Delay 1
* 02) Ex/En Delay 2
* 03) Bell Timeout
* 04) Bell Delay
* 05) Switch Aux Break
* 06) Wireless
* 061) Jamming Time
* 062) RX Supervise
* 063) TX Supervise
* 07) AC Off Delay
* 08) Guard Delay
* 09) Swinger Limit
* 10) Redial Wait
* 11) Last Exit Sound
* 12) Buzzer at Stay
* 064) Service Mode
* 13) Status Timer
* 14) Service Timer
* 15) Payment Timer
* 16) Pulse Open
* 17) Inactivity Timer
* **2) Controls**
* **1) Basic**
* 01) Quick Arm
* 02) Quick UO
* 03) Allow Bypass
* 04) Quick Bypass
* 05) False Code Trouble
* 06) Bell Squawk
* 07) 3 Minute Bypass
* 08) Audible Panic
* 09) Buzzer -> Bell
* 10) Audible Jamming
* 11) Exit Beeps at Stay
* 12) Forced Keyswitch Arming
* 13) Arm Pre-Warning
* **2) Advanced**
* 01) Double Verification of Fire Alarms
* 02) Alarm BUS Cut
* 03) Code Grand Master
* 04) Area
* 05) Global Follower
* 06) Summer/Winter
* 07) 24 Hour Bypass
* 08) Technician Tamper
* 09) Technician Reset
* 10) Engineer Tamper
* 11) Low battery Arming
* 12) Bell 30/10
* 13) Fire Temporal Pattern
* 14) IMQ Install
* 15) Disable Incoming Calls
* 16) Disable Keypad at Auto Disarm
* 17) Buzzer Delay
* 18) Speaker=Buzzer
* 19) Confirm Speaker
* 20) Bell Confirmation
* 21) Error Speaker Time Out
* 22) Tamper Report
* 23) AC Trouble Arm
* 24) Strobe Arm
* 25) Final Night
* 26) Stay Strobe
* 27) Blank Display
* 28) Display System Label
* **3) Communication**
* 1) Monitoring Station Enable
* 2) Follow Me Enable
* 3) Configuration Software
* 4) Cloud Enable
* **4) EN 50131**
* 1) Authorize Installer
* 2) Override Trouble
* 3) Restore Alarm
* 4) Mandatory Event Log
* 5) Restore Troubles
* 6) Exit Alarm
* 7) Entry Alarm
* 8) 20 minutes signal
* 9) Attenuation
* **5) PD6662**
* 1) Bypass Exit/Entry
* 2) Entry Disable
* 3) Route Disable
* 4) Installer Confirmation
* 5) Key switch Lock
* 6) Entry Disarm
* 7) Prox Disarm
* **6) CP-01**
* 1) Exit Restart
* 2) Auto Stay
* **7) Device**
* 1) Anti Mask Tamper
* 2) Proximity Anti Mask = Tamper
* 3) Audible Proximity Tamper
* **3) Labels**
* 1) System
* 2) Partition 1
* 3) Partition 2
* 4) Partition 3
* 5) Partition 4
* **4) Sounds**
* 1) Tamper Sound
* 1) During Disarm (1) Silent, 2) Bell, 3) Buzzer (main), 4) Bell + Buzzer)
* 2) During Arm (1) Silent, 2) Bell, 3) Buzzer (main), 4) Bell + Buzzer)
* 2) Speaker Volume
* 1) Trouble
* 2) Chime
* 3) Exit/Entry
* 4) Alarm
* 5) Squawk
* 3) Wireless Lost Sound (1) As trouble, 2) As tamper)
* **5) Settings**
* 1) DIP 2 Enable/Disable
* 2) Default Panel
* 3) Erase Wireless
* 4) Standard
* 5) Customer
* 6) Language
* **6) Automatic Clock**
* 1) Server
* 2) Host
* 3) Port
* 4) Time Zone (GMT)
* **7) Service Info.**
* 1) Name
* 2) Phone
* **8) Firmware Update**
* 1) Server IP
* 2) Server port
* 3) File name
* 4) Download Files (1) Via IP, 2) Via GPRS/3G/4G)
**2) Zones**
* **1) Parameters**
* 1) One By One
* 2) By Category
* 1) Label
* 2) Partition
* 3) Type (See Zone Types section above for full list)
* 4) Sound (1) At Arm, 2) At Stay, 3) At Disarm)
* 5) Termination (01) N/C, 02) EOL, 03) DEOL, 04) N/O, 05) TEOL)
* 6) Loop Response
* 7) Advanced
* 1) Forced Arming
* 2) Pulsed Counter
* 3) Abort Alarm
* 4) BUS Zones Parameters
* 5) Wireless Zones Parameters
* **2) Testing**
* 1) Self Test
* 2) Soak Test
* 3) Cross Zones
* 4) Alarm confirm
* 1) Confirm partition
* 2) Confirm zones
* 3) Resistance
**3) Outputs**
* **0) Nothing**
* **1) Follow System**
* 01) Bell
* 02) No Telephone Line
* 03) Comm. Failure
* 04) Trouble
* 05) Main Low Bat
* 06) AC Loss
* 07) Sensors Test
* 08) Battery Test
* 09) Bell Burglary
* 10) Scheduler
* 11) Switched Aux
* 12) GSM Error
* 13) Bell Test
* 14) Installation
* 15) Walk Test
* 16) Burglary
* 17) Panic
* 18) Fire
* 19) Special
* 20) 24 Hours
* 21) Zone Loss Alarm
* 22) Bell Trigger
* 23) Strobe Trigger
* 24) Fail To Arm
* 25) Confirmed Alarm
* 26) Duress
* 27) Hold Up Confirm Alarm
* 32) Zone Exclude
* **2) Follow Partition**
* 01) Ready
* 02) Alarm
* 03) Arm
* 04) Burglary
* 05) Fire
* 06) Panic
* 07) Special Emergency
* 08) Buzzer
* 09) Chime
* 10) Exit/Entry
* 11) Fire Trouble
* 12) Day (Zone) Trouble
* 13) Trouble
* 14) Stay
* 15) Tamper
* 16) Disarm
* 17) Bell
* 18) Bell Stay Off
* 19) Zone Bypass
* 20) Auto Arm Alarm
* **3) Follow Zone**
* 1) Zone Follow
* 2) Alarm Follow
* 3) Arm Follow
* 4) Disarm Follow
* **4) Follow Code**
**4) Codes**
* **1) User**
* 1) Partition
* 2) Authority Level
* **2) Grand Master**
* **3) Installer**
* **4) Sub Installer**
* **5) Code Length**
* 1) 4 Digits
* 2) 6 Digits
**5) Communication**
* **1) Method**
* **1) PSTN**
* **1) Timers**
* 1) PSTN Lost Delay
* 2) Wait Dial Tone
* **2) Control**
* 1) Alarm Phone Line
* 2) Answering machine override
* **2) Parameters**
* 1) Dial Method
* 2) Rings To Answer
* 3) Area Code
* 4) PBX Prefix
* 5) Call Wait
* **2) GSM**
* **1) Timers**
* 1) GSM Lost
* 2) GSM Net Loss
* **2) GPRS**
* 1) APN Code
* 2) APN User Name
* 3) APN Password
* **3) Email**
* 1) Mail Host
* 2) SMTP Port
* 3) Email Address
* 4) SMTP User name
* 5) SMTP Password
* **4) Controls**
* 1) Caller ID
* 2) LED Enable
* **5) Parameters**
* 1) PIN Code
* 2) SIM Number
* 3) SMS Center Phone
* 4) GSM RSSI
* **6) Pre Pay SIM**
* 1) Get Credit by
* 2) Phone To Send
* 3) Phone To Receive
* 4) SMS Message
* **3) IP**
* **1) IP Configuration**
* 1) Obtain IP
* 2) Panel Port
* 3) Panel IP
* 4) Subnet Mask
* 5) Gateway
* 6) DNS Primary
* 7) DNS Secondary
* **2) Email**
* 1) Mail Host
* 2) SMTP Port
* 3) Email Address
* 4) SMTP Name
* 5) SMTP Password
* **3) Host Name**
* **4) MS Polling**
* 1) Primary
* 2) Secondary
* 3) Backup
* **5) Control**
* 1) LED Enable
* **4) LRT**
* 1) Account
* 2) System
* 3) Periodic Test
* 4) No Comm Parm
* 5) Control
* 1) Disable Low Battery
* **2) Monitoring Station**
* **1) Report Type**
* 1) Voice (1) PSTN/GSM, 2) GSM/PSTN, 3) PSTN Only, 4) GSM Only)
* 2) IP (1) IP/SIM, 2) SIM/IP, 3) IP Only, 4) SIM Only)
* 3) SMS
* 4) Radio
* 5) SIA IP (1) IP/SIM, 2) SIM/IP, 3) IP Only, 4) SIM Only)
* **2) Accounts**
* **3) Comm. Format**
* 1) Contact ID
* 2) SIA
* **4) Controls**
* 1) Call Save
* 2) Show Kissoff
* 3) Show Handshake
* 4) Audible Kissoff
* 5) SIA Text
* 6) Random Periodic test
* 7) SIA with Partition
* **5) Parameters**
* 1) MS Retries
* 2) Alarm Restore (1) On Bell Time out, 2) Follow Zone, 3) At Disarm)
* 3) SIA IP Parameters (1) Encryption Key, 2) Receiver Number, 3) Line Number)
* **6) MS Times**
* 1) Periodic Test
* 2) Abort Alarm
* 3) Cancel Delay
* 4) Listen In
* 5) Confirmation
* **7) Report Split**
* 1) MS Arm/Disarm
* 2) MS Urgent
* 3) MS Non Urgent
* **8) Report Codes**
* 1) Edit Codes
* 2) Delete All
* **3) Configuration Soft.**
* **1) Security**
* 1) Access code
* 2) Remote ID
* 3) MS Lock
* **2) Call Back Phones**
* **3) Control**
* 1) Call Back
* 2) User Initiate Call
* **4) IP Gateway**
* 1) IP Address
* 2) IP Port
* **4) Follow Me**
* **1) Define**
* 1) Report Type (1) Voice, 2) Email, 3) SMS)
* 2) Partition
* 3) Events
* 4) Restore Events
* 5) Remote Control (1) Remote Listen, 2) Remote Program)
* **2) Controls**
* 1) Disarm Stop FM
* 2) Disable report at Stay
* **3) Parameters**
* 1) FM Retries
* 2) Voice Msg. Recurrence
* 3) Periodic Test
* **5) Cloud**
* 1) IP Address
* 2) IP Port
* 3) Password
* 4) Channel
* 5) Controls
* **6) Audio**
* **1) Messages**
* 1) Common
* 2) Zone
* 3) Partition
* 4) Output
* 5) Macro
* 6) Library Message
**7) Install**
* **1) Bus Device**
* 1) Automatic
* 2) Manual
* 01) Keypad
* 02) Zone Expander
* 03) Utility Output
* 04) Power Supply
* 05) Wireless Expander
* 06) Proximity Key Reader
* 07) Voice Module
* 08) Sounder
* 09) Bus Zone
* 10) GSM
* 11) IP
* 12) Modem
* 13) Bus Expander
* 14) LRT
* 15) COB
* 3) Testing
* 1) Bus Test
* 2) Bus Scan
* 3) Verify Module
* **2) Wireless Device**
* 1) RX Calibration
* 2) Allocation
* 7221) By RF (1) Zone, 2) Keyfob, 3) Keypad)
* 7222) By Code (1) Zone, 2) Keyfob, 3) Keypad)
* 3) Delete
**8) Devices**
* **1) Keypad**
* 1) Parameters (1) Label, 2) Partition, 3) Masking, 4) Controls (1) Emergency, 2) Multi view, 3) Exit beeps), 5) Serial Number (display only), 6) Function Key (Two-way) (1) Disable, 2) Panic, 3) M/S Listen Talk), 7 – 9) UO Control 1-3)
* **2) Keyfob**
* (1-Way) (0) None, 1) Arm, 2) Disarm, 3) Stay, 4) Group, 5) UO, 6) Panic)
* (2-Way) (1) Label, 5) Serial No., 6) Masking, 7) Controls (Panic), 8) PIN Code, 9–11) UO Key1–3)
* **3) Sounder**
* 1) Parameter
* 83101) Label
* 83102) Strobe (1) Always Off, 2) Follow Bell, 3) Follow Alarm)
* 83103) Siren LED (1) Always On, 2) Always Off, 3) Follow Arm, 4) Follow Alarm)
* 83104) Battery Load Test (1) Never, 2) Every 24 hours)
* 83105) Proximity Level Response
* 83106) Volume
* 83107) Lamp (1) Type (1) Always On, 2) Always Off, 3) Scheduler), 2) Brightness)
* 83108) Power Source (1) SAB, 2) SCB)
* 83109) Siren Current (1) Low, 2) Standard)
* 83110) Alarm Sound (1) – 4))
* 2) Lamp Times (1) Lamp Start, 2) Lamp Stop)
* **4) Proximity Reader**
* 1) Masking
* 2) Controls
* **5) Power Supply**
* 1) Masking
* 2) Controls (1) Bell / L Speak)
### 9. Commissioning Steps
**Bus Devices: Automatic Setting (Page 191):**
1. Press `OK` to begin the automatic BUS SCANNING (the Auto Settings process) in which it identifies all the devices on the bus. A list of the accessories that were found is displayed with the data definition that is required for each one.
2. Verify that the keypad displays all the devices you have connected (displayed with the data definition that is required for each one). If a device does not appear, ensure that you have given it a unique ID.
3. Press `OK` to accept what is being displayed, to progress through configuration screens and to advance on to the next device found.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until the presence of all devices has been confirmed and all parameters configured.
**Bus Devices: Manual Setting (Page 192):**
* Detailed steps for manually adding/modifying Keypads, Zone Expanders, Utility Outputs, Power Supplies, Wireless Expanders, Proximity Key Readers, Voice Modules, Sounders, Bus Zones, GSM, IP, Modem, Bus Expander, LRT, COB.
**Wireless Device Allocation (Page 207):**
1. Select `1) By RF` and press `OK`.
2. Select the device to be used for the registration mode.
3. Select category (1) Zone, 2) Keyfob, 3) Keypad) and press `OK`.
4. Using the numeric keys, enter the desired device number and press `OK`.
5. The WL device is in learn mode. Send a write message from your wireless device.
6. Continue entering the wireless zones attributes section.
### 10. Common Fault Diagnosis
**Installer Event Log Messages (Appendix F):**
| Event Message | Description |
|---|---|
| AC Low PS=y | Loss of AC power from power supply ID=y |
| AC RST PS=y | AC power restore on power supply ID=y |
| Activate UO=xx | UO XX activation |
| Actv UO=xx KF=zz | UO XX is activated from remote control ZZ |
| AL.ReinstateP=Y | Alarm reinstatement on partition Y |
| Alarm Z=xx | Alarm in zone no. XX |
| Alrm Cancel P=y | Alarm is cancelled in partition ID=Y |
| AMPRX DTCT Z=xx | Anti mask proximity detection on Bus zone XX |
| AMPRX RSTR Z=xx | Anti mask proximity detection restore on Bus zone XX |
| ARM A:P=y C=zz | Group A on partition Y is armed by user ZZ |
| ARM A:P=y KF=zz | Group A on partition Y is set by wireless keyfob ZZ |
| ARM B:P=y C=zz | Group B on partition Y is armed by user ZZ |
| ARM B:P=y KF=zz | Group B on partition Y is set by wireless keyfob ZZ |
| ARM C:P=y C=zz | Group C on partition Y is armed by user ZZ |
| ARM C:P=y KF=zz | Group C on partition Y is set by wireless keyfob ZZ |
| ARM D:P=y C=zz | Group D on partition Y is armed by user ZZ |
| ARM D:P=y KF=zz | Group D on partition Y is set by wireless keyfob ZZ |
| ARM FAIL P=y | Fail to Arm Partition X by Guard due to not ready zones |
| ARM:P=y C=zz | Partition Y armed by user ZZ |
| ARM:P=y KF=zz | Partition Y armed by wireless keyfob ZZ |
| Aut tst fail | Failure of zone self-test |
| Auto test OK | Automatic zone self-test OK |
| Aux RS PS=y | Restore of Aux power on power supply ID=Y |
| Aux RS ZE=y | Restore of S. Aux power on zone expander Y |
| Aux TRBL RS S=y | Auxiliary trouble restore on the siren ID=Y |
| Aux TRBL SIR.=y | Auxiliary trouble on the siren ID=Y |
| Bat Load RS S=y | Battery load trouble restore from siren ID=Y |
| Bat Load SIR.=y | Battery load trouble from siren ID=Y |
| Bat Rst PS=y | Low battery trouble restore from power supply ID=Y |
| BELL RS PS=y | Bell trouble restore in power supply ID=Y |
| Bell tamper | Bell tamper alarm |
| Bell tmp rs | Bell tamper alarm restore |
| Box tamper | Box tamper alarm from main unit |
| Box tmp rs | Box tamper alarm restore |
| Bypass Box+Bell | Box + Bell tamper is bypassed |
| Byp Trbl C=xx | System troubles were bypassed by user XX |
| Bypass Zn=xx | Zone no. XX is bypassed |
| Charge Curr S=y | Battery charging trouble in siren ID=Y |
| Chng code=xx | Changing user code XX |
| Change FM=yy | Changing Follow-Me number YY |
| Charge Current RS S=y | Battery charging trouble restore in siren ID=Y |
| Clk not set | Time is not set |
| Clk set C=xx | Time defined by user no. XX |
| Cloud Comm.Trbl | Communication problems with the cloud channel |
| Cloud Connected | Cloud communication channel is functioning |
| Cloud Disconnect | Cloud communication channel is not functioning |
| Cloud Login Err | Login problems with the cloud channel |
| CO Alarm Z=xx | CO alert from zone XX defined as a CO detector |
| CO Rst. Z=xx | CO alert restored from zone XX defined as a CO detector |
| Comm OK IPC | Communication OK between the LightSYS™2 and IP card |
| Comm OK KP=y | Bus communication restore with keypad ID=Y |
| Comm OK KR=y | Bus communication OK with Proximity Key Reader Y |
| Comm OK VOICE | Bus communication OK with Advanced Voice module |
| Comm OK WME=y | Bus communication OK with wireless module expander ID=Y |
| Comm OK BZE=y | Bus communication OK with Bus Zone Expander ID=Y |
| Comm OK PS=y | Bus communication restore with power supply expander ID=Y |
| Comm OK Siren=y | Communication OK between the LightSYS™2 and Siren Y |
| Comm OK UO=y | Bus communication restore with UO expander ID=Y |
| Comm OK Z=xx | Bus communication OK with Bus zone XX |
| Comm OK ZE=y | Bus communication restore with zone expander ID=Y |
| Comm. OK GSM | Communication OK between the LightSYS™2 and GSM |
| Comm.OK LRT | Communication OK between the LightSYS™2 and the long range transmitter |
| Conf. Z=xx | Confirmed alarm occurred from zone XX |
| Conf. alarm P=y | Confirmed alarm occurred in partition Y |
| Conf.holdup P=y | Confirmed holdup occurred in partition Y |
| Confirm rs Z=xx | Restore zone confirmed alarm |
| CP reset | The control panel has reset |
| Dat set C=xx | Date defined by user no. XX |
| Day A:P=y | Daily arm on partition Y |
| Day b:p=y | Arm by scheduler of group B on partition Y |
| Day c:p=y | Arm by scheduler of group C on partition Y |
| Day d:p=y | Arm by scheduler of group D on partition Y |
| Day dis:P=y | Daily disarm on partition Y |
| Day hom:P=y | Daily STAY or GROUP arming in partition Y |
| DC Restore Z=XX | DC trouble restore in Bus zone XX |
| DC Trouble Z=XX | DC trouble in Bus zone XX |
| Dis:P=y C=zz | Partition Y disarmed by user ZZ |
| Dis: P=y KF=zz | Partition Y disarmed by remote control ZZ |
| Duress P=y C=xx | Partition Y duress alarm from user no. XX |
| DUST RST Z=xx | Dust trouble restore from WatchOUT DT Bus zone XXX |
| DUST Z=xx | Dust trouble from WatchOUT DT Bus zone XXX |
| EE AC.UPLOAD | Load new parameters from PTM accessory |
| Enter progrm | Entering installer programming from keypad or configuration software |
| Exit program | Exiting installer programming from keypad or configuration software |
| F.Tr OK Z=xx | Trouble restore in fire zone no. XX |
| F.Trbl Z=xx | Trouble in fire zone no. XX |
| Fire Zone=xx | Fire alarm in zone no. XX |
| False code kp=y | False code due to 3 incorrect keypad attempts |
| False code kr=y | False code due to 3 incorrect Access Control attempts |
| False rest.kp=y | False code is restored for keypad |
| False rest.kr=y | False code is restored for key reader |
| Fault z=xx | Trouble in zone XX |
| Fire z=xx | Fire alarm in zone XX |
| Fire kp=y | Fire alarm from keypad (ID=XX) (keys 3 & 4) |
| Foil ok Z=xx | Restore in foil (Day) zone no. XX |
| Foil Z=xx | Trouble in foil (Day) zone no. XX |
| Forced P=y | Partition Y is force armed |
| Found Z=xx | Wireless zone found, zone no. XX |
| Func=21 C=yy | Activate UO by user YY |
| Func=23 C=yy | Terminate FM by user YY |
| Func=24 C=yy | User Init by user YY |
| Func=25 C=yy | Hand Over by user YY |
| Func=26 C=yy | Void report program by user YY |
| Func=35 C=yy | NFA2P-View event log by user YY |
| Func=29 C=yy | GSM reset SIM counter by user YY |
| Func=55 C=yy | IP reset IP by user YY |
| Func=65 C=yy | Update scheduler by user YY |
| Func=63 C=yy | Next ARM by user YY |
| Func=64 C=yy | Next DISARM by user YY |
| Func=22 C=yy | Switch Aux by user YY |
| Func=43 C=yy | Chime OFF by user YY |
| Func=44 C=yy | Chime ON by user YY |
| Func=45 C=yy | Global Chime OFF by user YY |
| Func=46 C=yy | Global Chime ON by user YY |
| Func=41 C=yy | Test Bell by user YY |
| Func=42 C=yy | Battery test by user YY |
| Func=28 C=yy | Enable UD by user YY |
| Func=22 C=yy | Change FM by user YY |
| Func=51 C=yy | Change code by user YY |
| Func=67 C=yy | User limitation by user YY |
| Func=40 C=yy | Walk test by user YY |
| Gas Alarm Zn=xx | Gas (natural gas) alert from zone XX defined as a gas detector |
| Gas Rst. Z=xx | Gas (natural gas) alert restored from zone XX defined as a gas detector |
| GSM:GPRS PW ERR | Authentication password is incorrect |
| GSM:GPRS PW OK | Authentication password is correct |
| GSM:IP OK | IP connection OK |
| GSM:IP Trouble | IP address is incorrect |
| GSM:Mdl comm.OK | Communication between the GSM/GPRS/3G/4G Module and the LightSYS™2 is OK |
| GSM: Module comm. | Internal GSM/GPRS/3G/4G bus module trouble |
| GSM:MS OK | GPRS/3G/4G communication to the MS is OK |
| GSM:MS trouble | GPRS/3G/4G communication failure to the MS |
| GSM:NET avail. | GSM network is not available |
| GSM:NET avai.OK | GSM Network is available |
| GSM:NET qual.OK | GSM Network quality is acceptable |
| GSM:NET quality | The GSM RSSI level is low |
| GSM:PIN cod.err | PIN code entered is incorrect |
| GSM:PIN code OK | PIN code is correct |
| GSM:PUK Cod err | PUK code required |
| GSM:PUK Code OK | PUK Code entered is correct |
| GSM:SIM OK | SIM Card in place |
| GSM:SIM trouble | SIM card missing or not properly sited |
| H.Temp rst Z=xx | High temperature alert restored from zone XX defined as a temperature detector |
| High Temp. Z=xx | High temperature alert from zone XX defined as a temperature detector |
| HOM:P=y C=zz | Partition Y is armed in Stay mode by user ZZ |
| HOME:P=y KF=zz | Partition Y is home armed using keyfob ZZ |
| HU.ReinstateP=y | Hold-Up Reinstatement in partition y |
| IPC:DHCP error | Failed to acquire an IP address from the DHCP server |
| IPC:DHCP OK | Succeeded to acquire an IP address from the DHCP server |
| IPC: downld err | IP Card generated a download error |
| IPC: download OK | IP Card download was OK |
| IPC: evnt log ER | IP Card generated an event log error |
| IPC: evnt log OK | IP Card event log generated no error |
| IPC: hardware OK | IP Card hardware is OK |
| IPC: hardware error | IP Card generated a hardware error |
| IPC: mail error | IP Card generated a mail error |
| IPC: mail OK | IP Card mail is OK |
| IPC:MS=y error | IP Card Monitoring station ID=Y generated an error |
| IPC:MS=y OK | IP Card Monitoring station ID=Y was OK |
| IPC: Network err | Failed to connect to IP network |
| IPC: Network OK | Successful connection to IP network |
| IPC:NTP error | Failed to acquire time data from the time server |
| IPC:NTP ok | Succeeded to acquire time data from the time server |
| IPC: upgrade err | The IP Card upgrade generated an error |
| IPC: upgrade OK | The IP Card upgrade was OK |
| IR restore Z=xx | Trouble restore in the IR channel of Bus zone XX |
| IR trouble Z=xx | Trouble in the IR channel of Bus zone XXX |
| JAMM. WME=y | Jamming in wireless module expander ID=Y |
| KeyBox Open Zxx | Zone XX of type key box is open |
| KeyBox Rst Z=xx | Zone XX of type key box is restored |
| KP=$ Lost | Keypad is lost |
| KP=$ Lost Rs | Lost keypad has been restored |
| KP=$ LOW BAT. | Low Battery trouble for the keypad |
| KSW A: Z=xx P=Y | Group A in partition Y is armed by keyswitch zone XX |
| KSW ARM:Z=xxP=Y | Partition Y is armed by keyswitch zone XX |
| KSW B: Z=xx P=Y | Group B in partition Y is armed by keyswitch zone XX |
| KSW C: Z=xx P=Y | Group C in partition Y is armed by keyswitch zone XX |
| KSW D: Z=xx P=Y | Group D in partition Y is armed by keyswitch zone XX |
| KSW DIS:Z=xxP=Y | Partition Y is disarmed by keyswitch zone XX |
| LB rstr KF=yy | Low battery trouble restore from wireless remote control YY |
| L.Temp rst Z=xx | Low temperature alert restored from zone XX defined as a temperature detector |
| Low Bat KF=xx | Low battery restore from wireless zone XX |
| Lost Z=xx | Wireless zone lost, zone no. XX |
| Low Bat PS=y | Low battery trouble from power supply ID=Y |
| Low Bat RS Z=xx | Low battery trouble restored from wireless zone no. XX |
| Low Bat Siren=y | Low battery trouble from siren ID=Y |
| Low bat Z=xx | Low battery trouble from wireless zone no. XX |
| Low Temp. Z=xx | Low temperature alert from zone XX defined as a temperature detector |
| LRT:ACCOUNT ERR | The long range transmitter account generates an error |
| LRT:ACCOUNT OK | The long range transmitter account is OK |
| LRT:HARDWARE OK | The long range transmitter hardware is OK |
| LRT:HARDWRE ERR | The long range transmitter hardware generates an error |
| LRT:LOW BAT | The long range transmitter is experiencing low battery trouble. |
| LRT:LOW BAT OK | The long range transmitter low battery in not troubled |
| LRT:NO BAT | The long range transmitter is experiencing no battery |
| LRT:NO BAT OK | The long range transmitter no battery is not troubling. |
| LRT:SYSTEM ERR | The long range transmitter is generating a system error. |
| LRT:SYSTEM OK | The long range transmitter system status is OK |
| Main Bell RS | Bell trouble restore in Main Panel |
| Main:AC Rstr | AC power restore on main panel |
| Main Aux Rst | Restore of Aux power on Main Panel |
| Main: Bat Rst | Low battery trouble restore from the main panel |
| Main: Low AC | Loss of AC power from the main panel |
| Main: Low Bat | Low battery trouble from the main panel |
| Main:No aux | Failure in the Aux power on Main Panel |
| Main:No bell | Bell trouble in Main Panel |
| Masked Z=XX | Anti mask trouble from zone XX |
| MS=y call error | Communication fail trouble to MS phone no. Y |
| MS=y restore | Communication fail trouble restore to MS phone no. Y |
| MW restore z=xx | Trouble restore in the MW channel of BUZ zone XX |
| MW trouble z=xx | Trouble in the MW channel of BUZ zone XX |
| Next arm:p=y | Partition Y armed in Next Arm mode |
| Next dis:p=y | Partition Y disarmed in Next Disarm mode |
| No aux ps=y | Failure in the Aux power on power supply ID=X |
| No aux ze=y | Failure in the S. Aux power on zone expander Y |
| No bell ps=y | Bell trouble in power supply ID=Y |
| No Com IPC | Communication failure between the LightSYS™2 and IP card |
| No com kp=y | Communication failure between the LightSYS™2 and keypad ID=Y |
| No com kr=y | Communication failure between the LightSYS™2 and Key Reader ID=Y |
| No com voice | Communication failure between the LightSYS™2 and the Advanced Voice module |
| No com WME=y | Communication failure between the LightSYS™2 and wireless module expander ID=Y |
| No comm Siren=y | Communication failure between the LightSYS™2 and bus zone expander ID=Y |
| No comm PS=y | Communication failure between the LightSYS™2 and power supply Y |
| No comm uo=y | Bus communication failure with UO expander ID=Y |
| No comm z=xx | Bus communication failure with Bus zone XX |
| No comm ze=y | Bus communication failure with zone expander ID=Y |
| No comm. GSM | No communication between the GSM/GPRS/3G/4G Module and the LightSYS™2 |
| No comm. LRT | No communication between the long range transmitter and the LightSYS™2 |
| No fault z=xx | Trouble restore in zone XX (TEOL zone or Bus zone input TEOL) |
| No jam wme=y | Jamming restore on wireless module expander ID=Y |
| No mask z=xx | Anti mask trouble restore from zone XX |
| Nxt hom:p=y | Partition Y is armed in Next Stay mode |
| Overld rs ps=y | Overload restore from 3A SMPS Y |
| Overload ps=y | Overload from 3A SMPS Y |
| Panic Z=xx | Panic alarm from zone no. XX |
| Phone fail | If the phone line is cut or the DC level is under 1V |
| Phone restore | Phone line trouble restore |
| PIR rstr Z=xx | PIR trouble restore from Bus zone XX |
| PIR trbl Z=xx | PIR trouble from Bus zone XX |
| Police KF=yy | Police (panic) alarm from remote control YY |
| Police KP=y | Police (panic) alarm from keypad Y |
| POT.LD RS PS=y | Potential overload restore of 3A SMPS joined by 3A SMPS Y |
| POT.OVRLD PS=y | Potential overload of SMPS joined by 3A SMPS Y |
| PROX FAIL S=y | Fail in the proximity anti approach protection in siren Y |
| PROX OK SIREN=y | Proximity anti approach protection is restored in siren Y |
| PROX TMP RS S=y | Proximity tamper restore from siren ID =Y |
| PRX TMP SIREN=y | Proximity tamper from approaching siren ID=Y |
| PS=yOVER.R C=zz | Overload in 3A SMPS Y. Reset by user ZZ |
| Radio l.bat S=y | Radio low battery trouble from siren Y |
| Radiol.bat rS=y | Radio low battery restore from siren Y |
| Remote Prog | The system has been programmed from the configuration software |
| Reset: P=y C=zz | Reset of partition ID=Y and user ID=ZZ |
| Restore Z=xx | Alarm restore in zone no. XX |
| Rmt Arm:P=y | Partition Y armed from the configuration software |
| Rmt Dis:P=y | Partition Y disarmed from the configuration software |
| RMT Hom:P=y | Partition Y armed in Stay mode from the CS software |
| SEISMIC OK Z=xx | Seismic Test in Bus zone XX has been restored |
| SEISMIC TR Z=xx | Seismic Test rouble in Bus zone XX |
| Self Fail Z=xx | Bus zone XX has failed the Self Test |
| Self OK Z=xx | Self Test in Bus zone XX has been restored |
| Siren=$ Lost | Siren is regarded as lost following supervision test |
| Siren=$ Lost Rs | The LightSYS™2 received a signal from siren after it has been regarded as lost |
| Soak fail Z=xx | Zone XX has failed in the soak test |
| Spec. KP=y | Special alarm from the from wireless keypad Y |
| Spkr l.bat S=y | Speaker low battery trouble from siren Y |
| Spkr l.batrsS=y | Speaker low battery restore from siren Y |
| Start exit P=y | Exit time started in partition Y |
| STU=Y Line Rstr | STU adapter Y line restoration |
| STU=Y Line Trbl | STU adapter Y line trouble |
| STU=Y R.RESET | STU adapter Y line restoration reset |
| Tamper BZE=y | Tamper alarm from bus zone expander ID=Y |
| Tamper Kp=y | Tamper alarm from keypad ID=Y |
| Tamper LRT | Tamper alarm from long range transmitter |
| Tamper PS=y | Tamper alarm from power supply Y |
| Tamper Siren=y | Tamper alarm from wireless siren Y |
| Tamper UO=y | Tamper alarm from utility output expander Y |
| Tamper Voice | Tamper alarm from Advanced Voice module |
| Tamper WME=y | Tamper alarm from wireless module expander Y |
| Tamper ZE=y | Tamper alarm in zone expander ID=X |
| Tamper Zn=xx | Tamper alarm from zone no. XX |
| Tech alarm Z=xx | Alarm from zone XX defined as Technical |
| Tech rstr Z=xx | Alarm restored from zone XX defined as Technical |
| TMP RS BZE=y | Tamper alarm restore from bus zone expander ID=Y |
| TMP RS KP=y | Keypad tamper restore |
| TMP RS PS=y | Tamper alarm restore from power supply expander ID=Y |
| TMP RS UO=y | Tamper alarm restore from UO expander ID=Y |
| TMP RS VOICE | Tamper alarm restore from Advanced Voice module |
| TMP RS WME=y | Tamper alarm restore from wireless module expander ID=Y |
| TMP RS ZE=y | Tamper alarm restore in zone expander ID=Y |
| TMP RS ZN=xx | Tamper alarm restore on zone XX |
| TMP RST LRT | Long Range transmitter tamper alarm reset |
| Tmp rst Siren=y | Tamper alarm restore from wireless siren Y |
| Unbyp Box+Bell | Box + Bell reinstated from bypass |
| Unbyps Zn=xx | Zone no. XX is reinstated from bypass |
| Unknown evnt | Unknown event alert |
| UO REST ZN=xx | A zone defined as “UO Trigger” has been deactivated |
| UO TRIG ZN=xx | A zone defined as “UO Trigger” has been activated |
| VOC:COMM OK | Bus communication OK with Voice Module |
| VOC:NO COMM | Bus communication failure with the Voice Module |
| Water Alrm Zn=xx | Flood alarm from zone no. XX |
| Water rstr Z=xx | Flood alarm restore on zone no. XX |
| WEAK BAT PS=y | Weak battery indication joined by 3A SMPS Y |
| Weak Bat RS PS=y | Weak battery restore indication joined by 3A SMPS Y |
| Z=xx aut bad | Zone self-test failed, zone no. XX |
| Z=xx auto ok | Zone self-test OK, zone no. XX |
### 11. Compliance Standards Met
* EN50131-1, EN50131-3 Grade 2
* EN50130-5 Environmental class II
* EN50131-6 Type A, EN50136-2 and EN50131-10
* UK: BS 8243:2010, PD6662:2017, ACPO (Police)
* ATS 5 for IP/GPRS; ATS 2 for PSTN
* ATS EN50136-1 Category C (PSTN, GSM, IP transmission paths in parallel)
* Signaling security: - Substitution security S2, - Information security I3
* EN50136-1:2012
* EN50136-1-2:2013
* EN50136-10:2014
* FCC Part 15 Class B digital device
* Directive 2014/30/EU (EMC Compliance)
### 12. Library Voice Messages (Appendix D)
| Code | Word |
|---|---|
| 001 | (Custom) |
| 002 | (Custom) |
| 003 | (Custom) |
| 004 | (Custom) |
| 005 | (Custom) |
| 006 | A |
| 007 | Above |
| 008 | Air conditioner |
| 009 | An |
| 010 | And |
| 011 | Apartment |
| 012 | Area |
| 013 | At |
| 014 | Attic |
| 015 | Baby's room |
| 016 | Back |
| 017 | Balcony |
| 018 | Basement |
| 019 | Bathroom |
| 020 | Bedroom |
| 021 | Before |
| 022 | Behind |
| 023 | Bottom |
| 024 | Boy's room |
| 025 | By |
| 026 | Camera |
| 027 | Ceiling |
| 028 | Cellar |
| 029 | Central |
| 030 | Children |
| 031 | Cleaner |
| 032 | CO |
| 033 | Computer room |
| 034 | Contact |
| 035 | Control |
| 036 | Corner |
| 037 | Curtain |
| 038 | Desk |
| 039 | Detector |
| 040 | Device |
| 041 | Dining |
| 042 | Door |
| 043 | Down |
| 044 | Downstairs |
| 045 | Dressing |
| 046 | East |
| 047 | Elevator |
| 048 | Emergency |
| 049 | Entrance |
| 050 | Entry |
| 051 | Executive |
| 052 | Exit |
| 053 | External |
| 054 | Family |
| 055 | Fence |
| 056 | Fire |
| 057 | First |
| 058 | Flood |
| 059 | Floor |
| 060 | For |
| 061 | Foyer |
| 062 | Front |
| 063 | Game |
| 064 | Garage |
| 065 | Garden |
| 066 | Gas |
| 067 | Gate |
| 068 | Girl's room |
| 069 | Glass |
| 070 | Guest |
| 071 | Hallway |
| 072 | High |
| 073 | In |
| 074 | Indoor |
| 075 | Inside |
| 076 | Internal |
| 077 | Is |
| 078 | Keyfob |
| 079 | Kitchen |
| 080 | Landing |
| 081 | Left |
| 082 | Library |
| 083 | Light |
| 084 | Living |
| 085 | Lobby |
| 086 | Low |
| 087 | Macro |
| 088 | Magnet |
| 089 | Main |
| 090 | Master |
| 091 | Middle |
| 092 | Motion |
| 093 | Near |
| 094 | New |
| 095 | North |
| 096 | Nursery |
| 097 | Of |
| 098 | Office |
| 099 | On |
| 100 | Outdoor |
| 101 | Output |
| 102 | Outside |
| 103 | Panic |
| 104 | Partition |
| 105 | Passage |
| 106 | Patio |
| 107 | Perimeter |
| 108 | Pool |
| 109 | Rear |
| 110 | Reception |
| 111 | Refrigerator |
| 112 | Relay |
| 113 | Right |
| 114 | Roof |
| 115 | Room |
| 116 | Safe |
| 117 | Safety |
| 118 | Second |
| 119 | Sensor |
| 120 | Shock |
| 121 | Shop |
| 122 | Shutter |
| 123 | Side |
| 124 | Siren |
| 125 | Site |
| 126 | Smoke |
| 127 | South |
| 128 | Sprinkler |
| 129 | Stairs |
| 130 | Store |
| 131 | Student room |
| 132 | Study |
| 133 | Technical |
| 134 | Temperature |
| 135 | Third |
| 136 | To |
| 137 | Top |
| 138 | TV |
| 139 | Under |
| 140 | Up |
| 141 | Upstairs |
| 142 | Video camera |
| 143 | Wall |
| 144 | Warehouse |
| 145 | Washroom |
| 146 | West |
| 147 | Window |
| 148 | Yard |
| 149 | Zone |
| 150 | 0 |
| 151 | 1 |
| 152 | 2 |
| 153 | 3 |
| 154 | 4 |
| 155 | 5 |
| 156 | 6 |
| 157 | 7 |
| 158 | 8 |
| 159 | 9 |
### 13. Remote Software Upgrade (Appendix I)
**Step 1: Set parameters for IP/GPRS/3G/4G Communication**
1. Define all parameters required to set GPRS/3G/4G or IP communication as explained in the Communication section of the LightSYS™2 (See page 152).
**Step 2: Enter the location of the upgrade file**
1. In the `System` menu, `Firmware Upgrade` submenu, enter the relevant information regarding the location of the upgrade file:
* `Server IP`: Enter the IP address of the router/gateway where the upgrade file is located. Default: `firmware.riscogroup.com`
* `Port`: Enter the port on the router/gateway where the upgrade file is located. Default: `00080`
* `File Name`: Enter the upgrade file name. Default: `CMD.TXT`
**Step 3: Activate Remote Upgrade from the Keypad**
1. From the installer main programming menu select `System` menu, `Firmware Upgrade` submenu `Download File` option.
2. Select the upgrade communication path as follows:
* Via IP
* Via GPRS/3G/4G
3. Once selected, the LightSYS™2 will start downloading the required files. The upgrade procedure may take approximately 40 minutes to complete. This will vary according to whether the procedure is performed via GPRS/3G/4G or IP. Once the files are downloaded the panel automatically starts with the upgrade procedure of the units connected to the system.
**Step 4: Verify that upgrade has been successful**
1. From the main display press `OK` and enter the installer code followed by `OK`.
2. Using the arrows scroll to `Maintenance` > `Diagnostics` > `Main panel` > `Version`. The upgraded version of the main panel will appear.
3. To view the other accessories version navigate to the required menus under the `Maintenance` > `Diagnostics` menu.
### 14. Warranty Information
RISCO Ltd. guarantees hardware products to be free from defects in materials and workmanship for 24 months from the date of delivery. This warranty covers products purchased new within the country of original purchase. It is solely for customers who purchased directly from RISCO or an authorized distributor. RISCO does not warrant to consumers directly. Remedies include repair or replacement of defective products. Return Material Authorization (RMA) is required for returns. The warranty does not cover improper operation, installation, neglect, abuse, willful damage, abnormal working conditions, failure to follow instructions, misuse, alteration, modification, unauthorized repairs, combination with other products, damage from external factors (power failure, surges), or failures due to third-party communication services (GSM interruptions, internet outage, telephony failure). Batteries are explicitly excluded from the warranty. The warranty does not apply to software or third-party software. RISCO does not guarantee that the product will prevent personal injury or property loss, or provide adequate warning in all cases. RISCO is not liable for lost revenues, profits, punitive damages, or any other indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages.
=== WEB RESEARCH: lightsys ===
## Risco LightSYS2 ProSYS Plus Intruder Alarm Panel - Full Technical Reference
### 1. General Information
The LightSYS2 is a comprehensive intruder alarm panel designed for security engineers. This document provides a full technical reference, including all default codes, fault codes, zone types, wiring, programming menus, and every piece of technical information available.
### 2. Product Range and Model Numbers
**Main Panel and Housing:**
* RP432M: LightSYS2 Main Board
* RP432B: LightSYS2 Polycarbonate Housing
* RP432PS: LightSYS2 1.5A Power Supply
* RP432PS15: LightSYS2 1.5A Power Supply, without wall plug
* RP432IN (xx): LightSYS2 Literature Pack (language)
* RP432BM1: LightSYS2 Metal Housing
* RP432PS1: LightSYS2 4A Power Supply
* RP432PS10UK: LightSYS2 3A Power Supply for metal housing., UK plug
**Keypads:**
* RP432KP: LightSYS2 LCD keypad, slim
* RP432KPP: LightSYS2 LCD keypad with proximity, slim (13.56 MHz)
* RP432KPP2: LCD keypad
* RP432KP02: Proximity Key Reader
* RW432KPP: Proximity tags (13.56 MHz)
* RPKELP: Proximity tags (125 KHz)
* RPKEL: 2-Way Wireless Slim Keypad with Prox, (2–Outdor, Black)
* RP132KL1/2P: (1–Indoor, White)
* RP128KCL: Panda Wired Keypad, Prox.
* RP128PKR: Panda Wired Keypad
* RP200KT: WL Panda Keypad for LightSYS2,868
* RP128KT: Elegant Keypad, w/ Prox
* RW132KL 1/2 P: 2-Way WL Slim Keypad
* RW432KPP: 2-Way WL Panda Keypad
**Zone Expanders:**
* RP432EZ8: 8 Zone Expansion Module
* RP128EZB: Bus Zone Expander
* RP128EZ01: Single Zone Expander
**Utility Output Expanders:**
* RP296EO4: 4-Relay Output Expansion Module
* RP296EO8: 8 Open-Collector Output Expansion Module
**Wireless Expanders:**
* RP432EW8: Wireless Expander, 868 MHz
* RP432EW4: Wireless Expander, 433 MHz
* RP432EWS: Wireless Security Module 868Hz
* RP432EWV: Wireless Video Module 868/869MHz
**Wireless Transmitters 868MHz:**
* RWT92: WL iWISE PIR
* RWT92P: WL iWISE Pet
* RWX34S: Smoke & Heat Detector 1 & 2 Way,
* RWX35S: WL Smoke & Heat
* WL T72C: WL Universal Transmitter
* RWT72M: WL Door/Window Contact
* RWT72P: WL Pulse Count Transmitter
* RWT72X: WL Dual Channel Transmitter
* Agility 132KF2: 2-Way 8 Button Remote Control Keyfob
* RW332KF1: Panda 2Way KeyFob
* RWT4RCP: 4-Button RC Keyfob with 2-Button Panic
* WL 132KF1: 4-Button Rolling-Code Keyfob, Black
* WL T4RC: 4-Button Rolling-Code Keyfob, Gray
* RWT51P: Wristband Panic Transmitter
* RWT52P: 2-Button Panic Keyfob
* RWT6SW: WL Shock Detector
* RWT6F: WL Flood Detector
* RWT6C08: WL CO Detector
* RWT6G: WL Glassbreak Detector
* WL T312: Wireless WatchOUT PIR
* WL X312: 2-Way WL WatchOUT PIR
* RWT95: WL iWAVE PIR
* RWT95P: WL iWAVE Pet
* RWX95: 2-Way WL iWAVE PIR ,868MHz
* RWX95P: 2-Way WL iWAVE Pet, 868MHz
* RWX73M: 2Way Door/Window Contact
* RWX73F: 2Way Multi-Function Contacts,868
* RWX73F8BL: 2-Way Multi Contact, Black
* RWX73F8BR: 2-Way Multi Contact, Brown
* RWX73M8BL: 2Way Door/Window Contact, Black
* RWX73M8BR: 2Way Door/Window Contact, Brown
* RWX75M: 2-Way WP Door/Window Contacts
* RWX96: 1&2 Way WL Piccolo Pet 868MHz
* RWX96P: 1&2 Way WL Piccolo Pet 868MHz
* RWT78M: 1-way Slim Contact 868MHz
* RWX515DT: 2 Way WL BWare DT, 868MHz
* RWX515DTP: 2 Way WL BWare DT Pet, 868MHz
* RWX515PR: 2 Way WL BWare PIR, 868MHz
* RWX515PT: 2 Way WL BWare Pet, 868MHz
* RWX95DT: 2 Way WL iWave DT, 868MHz
* RWX95DTP: 2 Way WL iWave DT Pet, 868MHz
* RWX78M: 2-way Slim Contact
* RWX78S: 2-way Slim Shock Detector
* RWX78SM: 2-way Slim Shock&Contact
* RWX106: 1 & 2-Way WL Curtain PIR
* RWX107DT: WL Outdoor DT Curtain
**Power Supply Expanders:**
* RP432PS0000A: LightSYS2 Power Supply, EU
* RP432PS00USA: LightSYS2 Power Supply, USA
* RP128EPS: 3A Switched Power Supply Expansion Module module
* RP128PSPSEUA: 3A Switched Power Supply inside large metal box + Tamper + transformer
* RP512BM21: ProSYS Plus & LightSYS2 B21 Box
* RP512BM26: ProSYS Plus & LightSYS2 B26 Box
**Voice Unit:**
* RP432EV: LightSYS2 Voice module
* RP128EVL000A: Listen and speak-in module
**Proximity Key Reader/Tag:**
* RP128PKR3: Proximity Key Reader Kit 13.56MHz
* RP200KT: Proximity Keytags 13.56MHz (10 units)
**COB Module:**
* RP512ECOB: Cellular on Bus (COB) Module
**IP Module:**
* RW132IP: Plug-in TCP/IP Module
* RP512IP: IP Multi-Socket Plug-in Module
**GSM/GPRS/3G/4G Module:**
* RGSMANT: External GSM Antenna with 3m cable
* RP512G4: GSM/4G MSoc + Ant. Plastic box
* RP512G3: GSM/3G MSoc + Ant. Plastic box
* RP512G2: M.S 2G for Plastic box+Ant.
**Fast PSTN Modem 2400:**
* RP432MD24: Plug-in LightSYS2 Fast Modem
**IP/AGM Receiver:**
* RP128IP0000A: AGM/IP Receiver Software
**External Sounders:**
* RS200WA: ProSound
* RS200WAP: ProSound with Proximity
* RS200LW: ProSound External Lamp
* RS4012: Lumin8, 2 Piezo+Lamp
* RS4022: Lumin8 Delta, 2 Piezo+Lamp
**Engineer Tools:**
* RW132EUSB: Adaptor from panel to PC USB
* RP132CB: RS232 PC to Panel Cable
**Bus Detectors:**
* RK350DT: Wired Beyond DT
* RK315DT: WatchOUT DT + swivel
* RK325DT: WatchIN DT + swivel
* RK312PR: WatchOUT PIR
* RK200DTG3: Industrial LuNAR DT AM Grade 3
* RK815DTB: iWISE Bus DT AM Grade 3 , 15m
* RK825DTB: iWISE Bus DT AM Grade 3 , 25m
* RK800Q0B: iWISE Bus Quad 15m (50 ft) AM Grade 3
* RK815DTB: iWISE DT AM Grade 2 , 15m
* RK825DTB: iWISE DT AM Grade 2 , 25m
* RK800Q0B: iWISE Quad 15m Grade 2
* RK66S: RISCO Seismic Detector
* RK515DTG3: BWare DT AM
* RK515DTGL: BWare DT
* RK515DTBG3: BWare DT AM
* RK515DTBGL: BWare DT
* RK500Q0G3: BWare Quad AM
* RK500Q: BWare Quad
* RK500QBG3: BWare Quad AM
* RK500QB: BWare Quad
* RK107DT: Wired Curtain DT AM, Bus
**Boxes:**
* RP432B: LightSYS2 Polycarbonate housing
* RP128B5: Plastic accessories box + tamper
### 3. Complete Technical Specifications
**Main Panel:**
* **Input Power:** AC/DC Adaptor 100-240V 50/60Hz 14.4V—1.5A, 4A
* **Current Consumption:** 60 mA, typical / 70 mA, maximum
* **Rechargeable Standby Battery:**
* 1.5A PS: 12 Volts up to 7 Amp-Hours (AH), typical
* 4A PS: 12 Volts up to 17 Amp-Hours (AH), typical
* **Power Outputs:**
* **Auxiliary Power:**
* 1.5A PS: Total current 800mA; Maximum Aux = 500mA; Maximum BUS (AUX RED) = 800mA
* 4A PS: Total current 1500mA; Maximum Aux = 500mA; Maximum BUS (AUX RED) = 1000mA
* **Bell/LS (External):** 12 Volts DC @ 500 mA, maximum
* **Programmable outputs:**
* UO1: Dry contact relay (24V, 1 Amps)
* UO2-UO4: 100 mA, opto relay
* **Main Box Dimensions:**
* RP432B Polycarbonate (1.5A PS): 290 x 254 x 97 mm
* RP432BM Metal, small (1.5A PS): 264 x 299 x 80 mm
* RP432BM1 Metal, large (4A or 1.5A PS): 420 x 379 x 95 mm
* **Operating temperature:** -10°C to 55°C (14°F to 131°F)
* **Weight:** 1.9 Kg (including battery)
* **Storage temperature:** -20°C to 60°C (-4°F to 140°F)
**Keypads:**
* **LCD Keypad (RP432KP, RP432KPP):**
* **Voltage:** 13.8V +/-10%
* **Current Consumption:** LCD (RP432KP): 48 mA typical/52 mA max; Prox LCD (RP432KPP): 62 mA typical/130 mA max
* **Main panel connection:** 4-wire BUS, up to 300 m (1000 ft) from Main Panel
* **Dimensions:** 153 x 84 x 28 mm (6.02 x 3.3 x 1.1 inch)
* **Operating temperature:** -10°C to 55°C (14°F to 131°F)
* **Storage temperature:** -20°C to 60°C (-4°F to 140°F)
* **Prox. RF frequency:** 13.56MHz
* **LCD Keypad (RP128KP, RP128KPP):**
* **Voltage:** 13.8V +/-10%
* **Current:** RP128KP: 100 mA maximum; RP128KPP (with prox) 250 mA maximum
* **Main Panel Connection:** 4-wire BUS, up to 300 m (1000 ft) from Main Panel
* **Dimensions:** 16.2 cm x 12.2 cm x 3 cm (6.37" x 4.8" x 1.18")
* **2-Way WL Slim Keypad (RW132KL 1/2 P):**
* **Voltage:** 3V (2 CR123 batteries in parallel)
* **Current:** Stand-by current 10μA, Max current 100 mA
* **Main Panel Connection:** Wireless
* **Dimensions:** 100 mm X 45 mm X 25 mm (3.9 i X 1.8 X .98 inches)
* **2-Way WL Panda Keypad (RW432KPP):**
* **Voltage:** 3V (4 CR123 Lithium batteries)
* **Current:** Stand-by current 9μA, Max current 150 mA
* **Main Panel Connection:** Wireless
* **Dimensions:** 180 mm X 115 mm X 35 mm (7.1 X 4.5 X 1.4 inches)
**Zone Expander (RP432EZ8):**
* **Voltage:** 13.8VDC +/-10%
* **Current:** 25 mA, typical / 30 mA, maximum
* **Main Panel Connection:** 4-wire BUS, up to 300 m (1000 ft) from Main Panel
* **Dimensions:** 10.5 cm x 6.6 cm x 1.8 cm
**Utility Output Expanders:**
* **4 Relay Output (RP296EO4):**
* **Voltage:** 13.8VDC +/-10%
* **Current:** 25 mA, typical / 160 mA, maximum
* **Contacts:** 4 Form C (SPDT) Relays.; 5 A / 24V DC
* **Main Panel Connection:** 4-wire BUS, up to 300 m (1000 ft) from Main Panel
* **Dimensions:** 4.13" x 2.6" x 0.86" (10.5 cm x 6.6 cm x 2.2 cm)
* **8 Transistor Output (RP296EO8):**
* **Voltage:** 13.8VDC +/-10%
* **Current:** 25 mA, typical / 160 mA, maximum
* **Contacts:** Open Collector, Active Pull-Down, 70 mA maximum
* **Main Panel Connection:** 4-wire BUS, up to 300 m (1000 ft) from Main Panel
* **Dimensions:** 4.13" x 2.6" x 0.7" (10.5 cm x 6.6 cm x 1.8 cm)
**Wireless Expander (RP432EW):**
* **Voltage:** 12-14.4V DC VDC
* **Current:** Typical: 40 mA; 65mA maximum
* **Frequency:** RW432EW8 – 868.65 MHz; RW432EW4 – 433.92 MHz
* **RF immunity:** According to EN50130-4
* **Range (L.O.S):** 300 meters
* **Relay outputs:** 12VDC @ 1A max Dry Contact Relays
* **Operating temperature:** -10°C to 55°C (14°F to 131°F)
* **Storage temperature:** -20°C to 60°C (-4°F to 140°F)
* **Main Panel Connection:** 4-wire BUS, up to 300 m (1000 ft) from Main Panel
* **Dimensions:** 125.5 X 78X 25.5 mm (4.94 X 3.07 X 1 inch)
**Proximity Key Reader (RP128PKR):**
* **Voltage:** 13.8VDC +/-10%
* **Current:** 70 mA, typical / 180 mA max
* **Main Panel Connection:** 4-wire BUS, up to 300 m (1000 ft) from Main Panel
* **Dimensions:** 40 mm x 43.6 mm x 22 mm (1.57“ x 1.7“ x 0.86“)
**Voice Module (RP432EV):**
* **Voltage:** 13.8VDC +/-10%
* **Current:** 30 mA typical / 70 mA maximum
* **Operating temperature:** 0-70°C
* **Main Panel Connection:** 4-wire BUS, up to 300 m (1000 ft) from Main Panel
**Sirens:**
* **ProSound (RS200WA, RS200WAP):**
* **Input DC Power:** Regulated 13.5-14.2V, 200 mA maximum
* **Standby Current Consumption:** 54 mA + charge current
* **Battery charging current:** 140 mA maximum
* **Operating Current Consumption:** 1.6A ((Sounder + Strobe))
* **Speaker Sound level:** 106 dB @ 3 meters
* **Main Panel Connection:** 4-wire BUS, up to 300 m (1000 ft) from Main Panel
* **Dimensions:** 30.5 cm X 21.8 cm X 11.6 cm
* **Lumin8 (RS200WA, RS200WAP):**
* **Input DC Power:** Regulated 13.0- 14.2V
* **Current Consumption:** Single piezo: 350mA (Regulated); Twin piezo: 450mA (Regulated)
* **Battery charging current:** 15 mA maximum
* **Speaker Sound level:** Single piezo: 111dbA; Twin piezo: 114dbA
* **Main Panel Connection:** 4-wire BUS, up to 300 m (1000 ft) from Main Panel
**Single Zone Expander (RP128EZ01):**
* **Voltage:** 13.8VDC +/-10%
* **Current:** 20mA
* **Main Panel Connection:** 4-wire BUS, up to 300 m (1000 ft) from Main Panel
**Plug In 2G, 3G, 4G GSM (RP512G2, RP512G3, RP512G4):**
* **Current:** 160mA; During Standby - 30mA
* **Dimensions:** 80 mm x 50 mm x 25 mm
**Plug In GSM (RP432GSM):**
* **Voltage:** 13.8VDC +/-10%
* **Current:** Average: 30 mA; Peak: 160 mA
* **Dimensions:** 80 mm x 50 mm x 25 mm
**Plug In IP (RP512IP):**
* **Current:** 75mA maximum
* **Dimensions:** 80 mm x 50 mm x 25 mm
**Plug In IP (RW132IP):**
* **Voltage:** 13.8VDC +/-10%
* **Current:** Average 55 mA; Peak 105 mA
* **Dimensions:** 70 mm x 60 mm
**Plug In Modem 2400 (RP432MD24):**
* **Voltage:** 13.8VDC +/-10%
* **Current:** 20 mA, typical / 60 mA, maximum
* **Dimensions:** 70 mm x 25 mm
**BUS Expander (RP432EZB):**
* **Voltage:** 13.8VDC +/-10%
* **Current:** 20 mA, typical
* **Main Panel Connection:** 4-wire BUS, up to 300 m (1000 ft) from Main Panel
* **Dimensions:** 10.5 cm x 6.6 cm x 1.8 cm
**KP LRT (Long Range Transmitter):**
* **Voltage:** 13.8VDC +/-10%
* **Current:** 10 mA, standby / 1A maximum
* **Dimensions:** 227 mm x 173 mm x 124 mm
### 4. Default Codes
* **Installer Code:** 5678 (default for Configuration Software Access Code)
* **MS Lock:** 000000 (default)
* **Cloud Password:** AAAAAA (default)
* **Remote Phone Code (Voice Module):** 00 (default)
### 5. Fault/Event/Alarm Code Tables
**Report Codes (Contact ID / SIA / Report Category):**
| Parameter | Contact ID | SIA | Report Category |
|---|---|---|---|
| Panic alarm | 120 | PA | Urgent |
| Panic alarm restore | 120 | PH | Urgent |
| Fire alarm | 115 | FA | Urgent |
| Fire alarm restore | 115 | FH | Urgent |
| Medical alarm | 100 | MA | Urgent |
| Medical alarm restore | 100 | MH | Urgent |
| Duress alarm | 121 | HA | Urgent |
| Duress alarm restore | 121 | HH | Urgent |
| Box tamper | 137 | TA | Urgent |
| Box tamper restore | 137 | TR | Urgent |
| Confirmed alarm | 139 | BV | Urgent |
| Confirmed alarm restore | 139 | | Urgent |
| Recent Close | 459 | | Non-urgent |
| Bell trouble | 321 | YA | Non-urgent |
| Bell trouble restore | 321 | YH | Non-urgent |
| Auxiliary failure | 300 | YP | Non-urgent |
| Auxiliary restore | 300 | YQ | Non-urgent |
| Bus failure | 333 | ET | Non-urgent |
| Bus restore | 333 | ER | Non-urgent |
| Low battery | 302 | YT | Non-urgent |
| Low battery restore | 302 | YR | Non-urgent |
| AC loss | 301 | AT | Non-urgent |
| AC restore | 301 | AR | Non-urgent |
| Clock not set | 626 | | Non-urgent |
| Clock set | 625 | | Non-urgent |
| False code | 421 | | Non-urgent |
| False code restore | 421 | LT | Non-urgent |
| Main phone trouble | 351 | JA | Non-urgent |
| Main phone trouble restore | 351 | LR | Non-urgent |
| RF Jamming | 344 | XQ | Non-urgent |
| RF Jamming restore | 344 | XH | Non-urgent |
| GSM trouble | 330 | IA | Non-urgent |
| GSM trouble restore | 330 | IR | Non-urgent |
| GSM Pre-Alarm | | | Non-urgent |
| IP Network trouble | | | Non-urgent |
| IP Network trouble restore | | | Non-urgent |
| User Arm | 401 | CL | Arm/Disarm |
| User Disarm | 401 | OP | Arm/Disarm |
| Stay arm | 441 | CG | Arm/Disarm |
| Disarm after alarm | 458 | OR | Arm/Disarm |
| Keyswitch Arm | 409 | CS | Arm/Disarm |
| Keyswitch Disarm | 409 | OS | Arm/Disarm |
| Auto Arm | 403 | CA | Arm/Disarm |
| Auto Disarm | 403 | OA | Arm/Disarm |
| Remote Arm | 407 | CL | Arm/Disarm |
| Remote Disarm | 407 | OP | Arm/Disarm |
| Forced Arm | 574 | CF | Arm/Disarm |
| Quick Arm | 408 | CL | Arm/Disarm |
| No Arm | 654 | CD | Arm/Disarm |
| Auto Arm fail | 455 | CI | Arm/Disarm |
| Burglary alarm | 130 | BA | Urgent |
| Burglary alarm restore | 130 | BH | Urgent |
| Fire alarm | 110 | FA | Urgent |
| Fire alarm restore | 110 | FH | Urgent |
| Foil alarm | 155 | BA | Urgent |
| Foil alarm restore | 155 | BH | Urgent |
| Panic alarm | 120 | PA | Urgent |
| Panic alarm restore | 120 | PH | Urgent |
| Medical alarm | 100 | MA | Urgent |
| Medical alarm restore | 100 | MH | Urgent |
| 24 Hour alarm | 133 | BA | Urgent |
| 24 Hour alarm restore | 133 | BH | Urgent |
| Entry/Exit | 134 | BA | Urgent |
| Entry/Exit restore | 134 | BH | Urgent |
| Water (Flood) alarm | 154 | WA | Urgent |
| Water (Flood) alarm restore | 154 | WH | Urgent |
| Gas alarm | 151 | GA | Urgent |
| Gas alarm restore | 151 | GH | Urgent |
| Carbon Monoxide alarm | 162 | GA | Urgent |
| Carbon Monoxide alarm restore | 162 | GH | Urgent |
| Environmental alarm | 150 | UA | Urgent |
| Environmental alarm restore | 150 | UH | Urgent |
| Low Temperature (Freeze alarm) | 159 | ZA | Urgent |
| Low Temperature restore | 159 | ZH | Urgent |
| High Temperature | 158 | KA | Urgent |
| High Temperature restore | 158 | KH | Urgent |
| Zone trouble | 380 | UT | Urgent |
| Zone trouble restore | 380 | UJ | Urgent |
| Burglary trouble | 380 | BT | Urgent |
| Burglary trouble restore | 380 | BJ | Urgent |
| Zone bypass | 570 | UB | Urgent |
| Zone bypass restore | 570 | UU | Urgent |
| Burglary bypass | 573 | BB | Urgent |
| Burglary bypass restore | 573 | BU | Urgent |
| Zone supervision loss | 381 | UT | Urgent |
| Zone supervision restore | 381 | UJ | Urgent |
| Tamper | 144 | TA | Urgent |
| Tamper restore | 144 | TR | Urgent |
| Zone lost | 381 | UT | Urgent |
| Zone lost restore | 381 | UJ | Urgent |
| Low battery | 384 | XT | Non-urgent |
| Low battery restore | 384 | XR | Non-urgent |
| Soak fail | 380 | UT | Urgent |
| Soak fail restore | 380 | UJ | Urgent |
| Zone Alarm | 134 | BA | Urgent |
| Zone Alarm restore | 134 | BH | Urgent |
| Zone confirm alarm | 139 | BV | Urgent |
| Zone confirm alarm restore | 139 | | Urgent |
| No activity | 393 | NC | Urgent |
| No activity restore | 393 | NS | Urgent |
| Tamper | 145 | TA | Urgent |
| Tamper restore | 145 | TR | Urgent |
| Keypad lost | 355 | BZ | Urgent |
| Keypad lost restore | 355 | | Urgent |
| Low battery | 384 | XT | Non-urgent |
| Low battery restore | 384 | XR | Non-urgent |
| Arm | 409 | CS | Arm/Disarm |
| Disarm | 409 | OS | Arm/Disarm |
| Low battery | 384 | XT | Non-urgent |
| Low battery restore | 384 | XR | Non-urgent |
| Tamper | 145 | TA | Urgent |
| Tamper restore | 145 | TR | Urgent |
| Low battery | 384 | XT | Non-urgent |
| Low battery restore | 384 | XR | Non-urgent |
| Siren lost | 355 | BZ | Urgent |
| Siren lost restore | 355 | | Urgent |
| Low battery | 384 | XT | Non-urgent |
| Low battery restore | 384 | XR | Non-urgent |
| I/O Expander lost | 355 | BZ | Urgent |
| I/O Expander lost restore | 355 | | Urgent |
| Tamper | 145 | TA | Urgent |
| Tamper restore | 145 | TR | Urgent |
| AC trouble | 301 | AT | Non-urgent |
| AC trouble restore | 301 | AR | Non-urgent |
| RF Jamming | 380 | XQ | Urgent |
| RF Jamming restore | 380 | XH | Urgent |
| Bell trouble | 321 | YA | Non-urgent |
| Bell trouble restore | 321 | YH | Non-urgent |
| Auxiliary close | 301 | AT | Non-urgent |
| Auxiliary close restore | 301 | AR | Non-urgent |
| Auxiliary failure | 300 | YP | Non-urgent |
| Auxiliary restore | 300 | YQ | Non-urgent |
| Overload | 312 | YP | Non-urgent |
| Overload restore | 312 | YQ | Non-urgent |
| Enter programming (local) | 627 | LB | Arm/Disarm |
| Exit programming (Local) | 628 | LS (LX ) | Arm/Disarm |
| Enter programming (Remote) | 627 | RB | Arm/Disarm |
| Exit programming (Remote) | 628 | RS | Arm/Disarm |
| MS periodic test | 602 | RP | Non-urgent |
| MS keep alive (polling) | 999 | ZZ | Urgent |
| Call back | 411 | RB | Non-urgent |
| System reset | 305 | RR | Urgent |
| Listen in begin | 606 | LF | Urgent |
| Cancel Report | 406 | OC | Urgent |
| Walk Test | 607 | BC | Non-urgent |
| Walk Test restore | 607 | | Non-urgent |
| Exit Error | 374 | | Non-urgent |
| Enter Service Mode | 393 | LB | Non-urgent |
| Exit Service Mode | 393 | LX | Non-urgent |
### 6. All Zone Types and Their Descriptions
**Zone Types (Programming Menu 2.1.3):**
* **00) Not Used**
* **01) Exit/Entry 1:** Standard entry/exit zone with delay 1.
* **02) Exit/Entry 2:** Standard entry/exit zone with delay 2.
* **03) Exit(OP)/Entry 1:** Exit/entry zone with open/close reporting and delay 1.
* **04) Exit(OP)/Entry 2:** Exit/entry zone with open/close reporting and delay 2.
* **05) Entry Follower:** Follows an entry/exit zone, becoming instant if the entry/exit zone is not triggered first.
* **06) Instant:** Triggers an immediate alarm when violated.
* **07) I+ Exit/Entry 1:** Instant arming with exit/entry delay 1.
* **08) I+ Exit/Entry 2:** Instant arming with exit/entry delay 2.
* **09) I+Exit(OP)/Entry1:** Instant arming with open/close reporting and exit/entry delay 1.
* **10) I+Exit (OP)/Entry2:** Instant arming with open/close reporting and exit/entry delay 2.
* **11) I + Entry Follow:** Instant arming with entry follower behavior.
* **12) I+ Instant:** Instant arming, immediate alarm.
* **13) UO Trigger:** Triggers a Utility Output when violated.
* **14) Day Zone:** Active during disarmed periods, typically for chimes or trouble reports.
* **15) 24 Hours:** Always active, triggers an alarm regardless of arming status.
* **16) Fire:** Triggers a fire alarm.
* **17) Panic:** Triggers a panic alarm.
* **18) Special:** General purpose zone for custom applications.
* **19) Pulsed Keyswitch:** Momentary keyswitch for arming/disarming.
* **20) Final Exit:** Triggers after the final exit delay.
* **21) Latch Keyswitch:** Latching keyswitch for arming/disarming.
* **22) Entry Follower + Stay:** Entry follower behavior, but also active in Stay mode.
* **23) Pulsed Keyswitch Delay:** Pulsed keyswitch with a delay.
* **24) Latch Keyswitch Delay:** Latching keyswitch with a delay.
* **25) Tamper:** Triggers an alarm when tampered with.
* **26) Technical:** Reports technical troubles.
* **27) Water:** Triggers an alarm for water detection (flood).
* **28) Gas:** Triggers an alarm for gas detection.
* **29) CO:** Triggers an alarm for Carbon Monoxide detection.
* **30) Exit Term:** Exit termination zone.
* **31) High Temperature:** Triggers an alarm for high temperature.
* **32) Low Temperature:** Triggers an alarm for low temperature.
* **33) Key Box:** Zone for a key box, reports open/close.
* **34) Keyswitch Arm:** Keyswitch for arming.
* **35) Keyswitch Delayed Arm:** Keyswitch for arming with a delay.
### 7. Complete Wiring Diagrams and Terminal Descriptions
**Wiring (Appendix C):**
**Table A-1: Wire Facts**
| AWG Gauge Size | Wire Diameter (Millimeters) | Wire Diameter (Inches) | Resistance: Ω Per Meter | Resistance: Ω Per 100 Meters | Ω Per Foot | Ω Per 1000 Feet |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 24 | 0.50 | 0.020 | 0.085 | 8.5 | 0.0261 | 26.0 |
| 22 | 0.64 | 0.025 | 0.052 | 5.2 | 0.016 | 16.0 |
| 20 | 0.80 | 0.031 | 0.032 | 3.2 | 0.010 | 10.0 |
| 19 | 0.90 | 0.035 | 0.026 | 2.6 | 0.008 | 8.0 |
| 18 | 1.00 | 0.040 | 0.020 | 2.0 | 0.006 | 6.0 |
| 16 | 1.27 | 0.050 | 0.013 | 1.3 | 0.004 | 4.0 |
| 14 | 1.63 | 0.064 | 0.008 | 0.82 | 0.0025 | 2.5 |
**Table A-2: Wiring Between the LightSYS™2 Main Panel and the Plug-In Transformer**
| One-Way Wire Distance (In Meters) | One-Way Wire Distance (In Feet) | AWG (American Wire Gauge) |
|---|---|---|
| Up to 5 | Up to 15 | 22 |
| 5-8 | 15 - 25 | 20 |
| 8 - 12 | 25 - 40 | 18 |
| 12 - 20 | 40 - 60 | 16 |
| 20 - 30 | 60 - 100 | 14 |
**Table A-3: Wire Gauge (Max Combined Length of ALL Expansion Bus Wiring)**
| Wire Gauge | | Max Combined Length (Meters) | Max Combined Length (Feet) |
|---|---|---|---|
| 24 AWG | 7/02mm | 150 | 492 |
| 22 AWG | 16/02mm | 200 | 656 |
| 20 AWG | 24/02mm | 333 | 1092 |
| 19 AWG | 28/02mm | 400 | 1312 |
*Notes:* For maximum system stability, it is best NOT to exceed a total of 300 meters (1000 feet) of wire when wiring the Expansion bus. For a distance of more than 300 meters, refer to RISCO Group technical support service for detailed information.
**Table A-4: Total Auxiliary Power (Max Run)**
| Total Auxiliary Power (Max Current Draw per Branch) | 32/02 mm (18 AWG) Meters (Feet) | 28/02 mm (19 AWG) Meters (Feet) | 24/02 mm (20 AWG) Meters (Feet) | 16/02 mm (22 AWG) Meters (Feet) | 7/02 mm (24 AWG) Meters (Feet) |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 20mA | 1195 (3920) | 945 (3100) | 750 (2460) | 472 (1550) | 296 (970) |
| 30mA | 793 (2600) | 628 (2060) | 500 (1640) | 314 (1030) | 197 (646) |
| 40mA | 597 (1960) | 472 (1550) | 375 (1230) | 236 (775) | 148 (485) |
| 50mA | 478 (1568) | 378 (1240) | 300 (984) | 189 (620) | 118 (388) |
| 60mA | 296 (1300) | 314 (1030) | 250 (820) | 157 (515) | 98 (323) |
| 70mA | 341 (1120) | 270 (886) | 214 (703) | 135 (443) | 84 (277) |
| 80mA | 299 (980) | 237 (775) | 187 (615) | 118 (388) | 74 (243) |
| 90mA | 264 (867) | 209 (687) | 166 (547) | 105 (343) | 66 (215) |
| 100mA | 239 (784) | 189 (620) | 123 (492) | 94 (310) | 59 (194) |
*Note:* The wire lengths indicated represent the one-way distance between the source of power and the last detector in the branch.
**Table A-5: Maximum External Sounder Current (Max Run)**
| Max External Sounder Current (Max current draw per branch) | 32/02 mm (18 AWG) Meters (Feet) | 28/02 mm (19 AWG) Meters (Feet) | 24/02 mm (20 AWG) Meters (Feet) | 16/02 mm (22 AWG) Meters (Feet) |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 100mA | 238 (780) | 191 (625) | 151 (495) | 94 (310) |
| 200mA | 229 (390) | 95 (313) | 76 (248) | 47 (155) |
| 300mA | 79 (260) | 63 (208) | 50 (165) | 31 (103) |
| 400mA | 59 (195) | 48 (157) | 38 (124) | 24 (78) |
| 500mA | 48 (156) | 38 (125) | 30 (99) | 19 (62) |
| 650mA | 37 (120) | 29 (96) | 23 (76) | 15 (48) |
*Note:* The wire lengths indicated represent the one-way distance between the LightSYS™2 and the external sounder in the branch.
### 8. Full Programming Menu Structure
**Installer Programming Menu (Appendix G):**
**1) System**
* **1) Timers**
* 01) Ex/En Delay 1
* 02) Ex/En Delay 2
* 03) Bell Timeout
* 04) Bell Delay
* 05) Switch Aux Break
* 06) Wireless
* 061) Jamming Time
* 062) RX Supervise
* 063) TX Supervise
* 07) AC Off Delay
* 08) Guard Delay
* 09) Swinger Limit
* 10) Redial Wait
* 11) Last Exit Sound
* 12) Buzzer at Stay
* 064) Service Mode
* 13) Status Timer
* 14) Service Timer
* 15) Payment Timer
* 16) Pulse Open
* 17) Inactivity Timer
* **2) Controls**
* **1) Basic**
* 01) Quick Arm
* 02) Quick UO
* 03) Allow Bypass
* 04) Quick Bypass
* 05) False Code Trouble
* 06) Bell Squawk
* 07) 3 Minute Bypass
* 08) Audible Panic
* 09) Buzzer -> Bell
* 10) Audible Jamming
* 11) Exit Beeps at Stay
* 12) Forced Keyswitch Arming
* 13) Arm Pre-Warning
* **2) Advanced**
* 01) Double Verification of Fire Alarms
* 02) Alarm BUS Cut
* 03) Code Grand Master
* 04) Area
* 05) Global Follower
* 06) Summer/Winter
* 07) 24 Hour Bypass
* 08) Technician Tamper
* 09) Technician Reset
* 10) Engineer Tamper
* 11) Low battery Arming
* 12) Bell 30/10
* 13) Fire Temporal Pattern
* 14) IMQ Install
* 15) Disable Incoming Calls
* 16) Disable Keypad at Auto Disarm
* 17) Buzzer Delay
* 18) Speaker=Buzzer
* 19) Confirm Speaker
* 20) Bell Confirmation
* 21) Error Speaker Time Out
* 22) Tamper Report
* 23) AC Trouble Arm
* 24) Strobe Arm
* 25) Final Night
* 26) Stay Strobe
* 27) Blank Display
* 28) Display System Label
* **3) Communication**
* 1) Monitoring Station Enable
* 2) Follow Me Enable
* 3) Configuration Software
* 4) Cloud Enable
* **4) EN 50131**
* 1) Authorize Installer
* 2) Override Trouble
* 3) Restore Alarm
* 4) Mandatory Event Log
* 5) Restore Troubles
* 6) Exit Alarm
* 7) Entry Alarm
* 8) 20 minutes signal
* 9) Attenuation
* **5) PD6662**
* 1) Bypass Exit/Entry
* 2) Entry Disable
* 3) Route Disable
* 4) Installer Confirmation
* 5) Key switch Lock
* 6) Entry Disarm
* 7) Prox Disarm
* **6) CP-01**
* 1) Exit Restart
* 2) Auto Stay
* **7) Device**
* 1) Anti Mask Tamper
* 2) Proximity Anti Mask = Tamper
* 3) Audible Proximity Tamper
* **3) Labels**
* 1) System
* 2) Partition 1
* 3) Partition 2
* 4) Partition 3
* 5) Partition 4
* **4) Sounds**
* 1) Tamper Sound
* 1) During Disarm (1) Silent, 2) Bell, 3) Buzzer (main), 4) Bell + Buzzer)
* 2) During Arm (1) Silent, 2) Bell, 3) Buzzer (main), 4) Bell + Buzzer)
* 2) Speaker Volume
* 1) Trouble
* 2) Chime
* 3) Exit/Entry
* 4) Alarm
* 5) Squawk
* 3) Wireless Lost Sound (1) As trouble, 2) As tamper)
* **5) Settings**
* 1) DIP 2 Enable/Disable
* 2) Default Panel
* 3) Erase Wireless
* 4) Standard
* 5) Customer
* 6) Language
* **6) Automatic Clock**
* 1) Server
* 2) Host
* 3) Port
* 4) Time Zone (GMT)
* **7) Service Info.**
* 1) Name
* 2) Phone
* **8) Firmware Update**
* 1) Server IP
* 2) Server port
* 3) File name
* 4) Download Files (1) Via IP, 2) Via GPRS/3G/4G)
**2) Zones**
* **1) Parameters**
* 1) One By One
* 2) By Category
* 1) Label
* 2) Partition
* 3) Type (See Zone Types section above for full list)
* 4) Sound (1) At Arm, 2) At Stay, 3) At Disarm)
* 5) Termination (01) N/C, 02) EOL, 03) DEOL, 04) N/O, 05) TEOL)
* 6) Loop Response
* 7) Advanced
* 1) Forced Arming
* 2) Pulsed Counter
* 3) Abort Alarm
* 4) BUS Zones Parameters
* 5) Wireless Zones Parameters
* **2) Testing**
* 1) Self Test
* 2) Soak Test
* 3) Cross Zones
* 4) Alarm confirm
* 1) Confirm partition
* 2) Confirm zones
* 3) Resistance
**3) Outputs**
* **0) Nothing**
* **1) Follow System**
* 01) Bell
* 02) No Telephone Line
* 03) Comm. Failure
* 04) Trouble
* 05) Main Low Bat
* 06) AC Loss
* 07) Sensors Test
* 08) Battery Test
* 09) Bell Burglary
* 10) Scheduler
* 11) Switched Aux
* 12) GSM Error
* 13) Bell Test
* 14) Installation
* 15) Walk Test
* 16) Burglary
* 17) Panic
* 18) Fire
* 19) Special
* 20) 24 Hours
* 21) Zone Loss Alarm
* 22) Bell Trigger
* 23) Strobe Trigger
* 24) Fail To Arm
* 25) Confirmed Alarm
* 26) Duress
* 27) Hold Up Confirm Alarm
* 32) Zone Exclude
* **2) Follow Partition**
* 01) Ready
* 02) Alarm
* 03) Arm
* 04) Burglary
* 05) Fire
* 06) Panic
* 07) Special Emergency
* 08) Buzzer
* 09) Chime
* 10) Exit/Entry
* 11) Fire Trouble
* 12) Day (Zone) Trouble
* 13) Trouble
* 14) Stay
* 15) Tamper
* 16) Disarm
* 17) Bell
* 18) Bell Stay Off
* 19) Zone Bypass
* 20) Auto Arm Alarm
* **3) Follow Zone**
* 1) Zone Follow
* 2) Alarm Follow
* 3) Arm Follow
* 4) Disarm Follow
* **4) Follow Code**
**4) Codes**
* **1) User**
* 1) Partition
* 2) Authority Level
* **2) Grand Master**
* **3) Installer**
* **4) Sub Installer**
* **5) Code Length**
* 1) 4 Digits
* 2) 6 Digits
**5) Communication**
* **1) Method**
* **1) PSTN**
* **1) Timers**
* 1) PSTN Lost Delay
* 2) Wait Dial Tone
* **2) Control**
* 1) Alarm Phone Line
* 2) Answering machine override
* **2) Parameters**
* 1) Dial Method
* 2) Rings To Answer
* 3) Area Code
* 4) PBX Prefix
* 5) Call Wait
* **2) GSM**
* **1) Timers**
* 1) GSM Lost
* 2) GSM Net Loss
* **2) GPRS**
* 1) APN Code
* 2) APN User Name
* 3) APN Password
* **3) Email**
* 1) Mail Host
* 2) SMTP Port
* 3) Email Address
* 4) SMTP User name
* 5) SMTP Password
* **4) Controls**
* 1) Caller ID
* 2) LED Enable
* **5) Parameters**
* 1) PIN Code
* 2) SIM Number
* 3) SMS Center Phone
* 4) GSM RSSI
* **6) Pre Pay SIM**
* 1) Get Credit by
* 2) Phone To Send
* 3) Phone To Receive
* 4) SMS Message
* **3) IP**
* **1) IP Configuration**
* 1) Obtain IP
* 2) Panel Port
* 3) Panel IP
* 4) Subnet Mask
* 5) Gateway
* 6) DNS Primary
* 7) DNS Secondary
* **2) Email**
* 1) Mail Host
* 2) SMTP Port
* 3) Email Address
* 4) SMTP Name
* 5) SMTP Password
* **3) Host Name**
* **4) MS Polling**
* 1) Primary
* 2) Secondary
* 3) Backup
* **5) Control**
* 1) LED Enable
* **4) LRT**
* 1) Account
* 2) System
* 3) Periodic Test
* 4) No Comm Parm
* 5) Control
* 1) Disable Low Battery
* **2) Monitoring Station**
* **1) Report Type**
* 1) Voice (1) PSTN/GSM, 2) GSM/PSTN, 3) PSTN Only, 4) GSM Only)
* 2) IP (1) IP/SIM, 2) SIM/IP, 3) IP Only, 4) SIM Only)
* 3) SMS
* 4) Radio
* 5) SIA IP (1) IP/SIM, 2) SIM/IP, 3) IP Only, 4) SIM Only)
* **2) Accounts**
* **3) Comm. Format**
* 1) Contact ID
* 2) SIA
* **4) Controls**
* 1) Call Save
* 2) Show Kissoff
* 3) Show Handshake
* 4) Audible Kissoff
* 5) SIA Text
* 6) Random Periodic test
* 7) SIA with Partition
* **5) Parameters**
* 1) MS Retries
* 2) Alarm Restore (1) On Bell Time out, 2) Follow Zone, 3) At Disarm)
* 3) SIA IP Parameters (1) Encryption Key, 2) Receiver Number, 3) Line Number)
* **6) MS Times**
* 1) Periodic Test
* 2) Abort Alarm
* 3) Cancel Delay
* 4) Listen In
* 5) Confirmation
* **7) Report Split**
* 1) MS Arm/Disarm
* 2) MS Urgent
* 3) MS Non Urgent
* **8) Report Codes**
* 1) Edit Codes
* 2) Delete All
* **3) Configuration Soft.**
* **1) Security**
* 1) Access code
* 2) Remote ID
* 3) MS Lock
* **2) Call Back Phones**
* **3) Control**
* 1) Call Back
* 2) User Initiate Call
* **4) IP Gateway**
* 1) IP Address
* 2) IP Port
* **4) Follow Me**
* **1) Define**
* 1) Report Type (1) Voice, 2) Email, 3) SMS)
* 2) Partition
* 3) Events
* 4) Restore Events
* 5) Remote Control (1) Remote Listen, 2) Remote Program)
* **2) Controls**
* 1) Disarm Stop FM
* 2) Disable report at Stay
* **3) Parameters**
* 1) FM Retries
* 2) Voice Msg. Recurrence
* 3) Periodic Test
* **5) Cloud**
* 1) IP Address
* 2) IP Port
* 3) Password
* 4) Channel
* 5) Controls
* **6) Audio**
* **1) Messages**
* 1) Common
* 2) Zone
* 3) Partition
* 4) Output
* 5) Macro
* 6) Library Message
**7) Install**
* **1) Bus Device**
* 1) Automatic
* 2) Manual
* 01) Keypad
* 02) Zone Expander
* 03) Utility Output
* 04) Power Supply
* 05) Wireless Expander
* 06) Proximity Key Reader
* 07) Voice Module
* 08) Sounder
* 09) Bus Zone
* 10) GSM
* 11) IP
* 12) Modem
* 13) Bus Expander
* 14) LRT
* 15) COB
* 3) Testing
* 1) Bus Test
* 2) Bus Scan
* 3) Verify Module
* **2) Wireless Device**
* 1) RX Calibration
* 2) Allocation
* 7221) By RF (1) Zone, 2) Keyfob, 3) Keypad)
* 7222) By Code (1) Zone, 2) Keyfob, 3) Keypad)
* 3) Delete
**8) Devices**
* **1) Keypad**
* 1) Parameters (1) Label, 2) Partition, 3) Masking, 4) Controls (1) Emergency, 2) Multi view, 3) Exit beeps), 5) Serial Number (display only), 6) Function Key (Two-way) (1) Disable, 2) Panic, 3) M/S Listen Talk), 7 – 9) UO Control 1-3)
* **2) Keyfob**
* (1-Way) (0) None, 1) Arm, 2) Disarm, 3) Stay, 4) Group, 5) UO, 6) Panic)
* (2-Way) (1) Label, 5) Serial No., 6) Masking, 7) Controls (Panic), 8) PIN Code, 9–11) UO Key1–3)
* **3) Sounder**
* 1) Parameter
* 83101) Label
* 83102) Strobe (1) Always Off, 2) Follow Bell, 3) Follow Alarm)
* 83103) Siren LED (1) Always On, 2) Always Off, 3) Follow Arm, 4) Follow Alarm)
* 83104) Battery Load Test (1) Never, 2) Every 24 hours)
* 83105) Proximity Level Response
* 83106) Volume
* 83107) Lamp (1) Type (1) Always On, 2) Always Off, 3) Scheduler), 2) Brightness)
* 83108) Power Source (1) SAB, 2) SCB)
* 83109) Siren Current (1) Low, 2) Standard)
* 83110) Alarm Sound (1) – 4))
* 2) Lamp Times (1) Lamp Start, 2) Lamp Stop)
* **4) Proximity Reader**
* 1) Masking
* 2) Controls
* **5) Power Supply**
* 1) Masking
* 2) Controls (1) Bell / L Speak)
### 9. Commissioning Steps
**Bus Devices: Automatic Setting (Page 191):**
1. Press `OK` to begin the automatic BUS SCANNING (the Auto Settings process) in which it identifies all the devices on the bus. A list of the accessories that were found is displayed with the data definition that is required for each one.
2. Verify that the keypad displays all the devices you have connected (displayed with the data definition that is required for each one). If a device does not appear, ensure that you have given it a unique ID.
3. Press `OK` to accept what is being displayed, to progress through configuration screens and to advance on to the next device found.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until the presence of all devices has been confirmed and all parameters configured.
**Bus Devices: Manual Setting (Page 192):**
* Detailed steps for manually adding/modifying Keypads, Zone Expanders, Utility Outputs, Power Supplies, Wireless Expanders, Proximity Key Readers, Voice Modules, Sounders, Bus Zones, GSM, IP, Modem, Bus Expander, LRT, COB.
**Wireless Device Allocation (Page 207):**
1. Select `1) By RF` and press `OK`.
2. Select the device to be used for the registration mode.
3. Select category (1) Zone, 2) Keyfob, 3) Keypad) and press `OK`.
4. Using the numeric keys, enter the desired device number and press `OK`.
5. The WL device is in learn mode. Send a write message from your wireless device.
6. Continue entering the wireless zones attributes section.
### 10. Common Fault Diagnosis
**Installer Event Log Messages (Appendix F):**
| Event Message | Description |
|---|---|
| AC Low PS=y | Loss of AC power from power supply ID=y |
| AC RST PS=y | AC power restore on power supply ID=y |
| Activate UO=xx | UO XX activation |
| Actv UO=xx KF=zz | UO XX is activated from remote control ZZ |
| AL.ReinstateP=Y | Alarm reinstatement on partition Y |
| Alarm Z=xx | Alarm in zone no. XX |
| Alrm Cancel P=y | Alarm is cancelled in partition ID=Y |
| AMPRX DTCT Z=xx | Anti mask proximity detection on Bus zone XX |
| AMPRX RSTR Z=xx | Anti mask proximity detection restore on Bus zone XX |
| ARM A:P=y C=zz | Group A on partition Y is armed by user ZZ |
| ARM A:P=y KF=zz | Group A on partition Y is set by wireless keyfob ZZ |
| ARM B:P=y C=zz | Group B on partition Y is armed by user ZZ |
| ARM B:P=y KF=zz | Group B on partition Y is set by wireless keyfob ZZ |
| ARM C:P=y C=zz | Group C on partition Y is armed by user ZZ |
| ARM C:P=y KF=zz | Group C on partition Y is set by wireless keyfob ZZ |
| ARM D:P=y C=zz | Group D on partition Y is armed by user ZZ |
| ARM D:P=y KF=zz | Group D on partition Y is set by wireless keyfob ZZ |
| ARM FAIL P=y | Fail to Arm Partition X by Guard due to not ready zones |
| ARM:P=y C=zz | Partition Y armed by user ZZ |
| ARM:P=y KF=zz | Partition Y armed by wireless keyfob ZZ |
| Aut tst fail | Failure of zone self-test |
| Auto test OK | Automatic zone self-test OK |
| Aux RS PS=y | Restore of Aux power on power supply ID=Y |
| Aux RS ZE=y | Restore of S. Aux power on zone expander Y |
| Aux TRBL RS S=y | Auxiliary trouble restore on the siren ID=Y |
| Aux TRBL SIR.=y | Auxiliary trouble on the siren ID=Y |
| Bat Load RS S=y | Battery load trouble restore from siren ID=Y |
| Bat Load SIR.=y | Battery load trouble from siren ID=Y |
| Bat Rst PS=y | Low battery trouble restore from power supply ID=Y |
| BELL RS PS=y | Bell trouble restore in power supply ID=Y |
| Bell tamper | Bell tamper alarm |
| Bell tmp rs | Bell tamper alarm restore |
| Box tamper | Box tamper alarm from main unit |
| Box tmp rs | Box tamper alarm restore |
| Bypass Box+Bell | Box + Bell tamper is bypassed |
| Byp Trbl C=xx | System troubles were bypassed by user XX |
| Bypass Zn=xx | Zone no. XX is bypassed |
| Charge Curr S=y | Battery charging trouble in siren ID=Y |
| Chng code=xx | Changing user code XX |
| Change FM=yy | Changing Follow-Me number YY |
| Charge Current RS S=y | Battery charging trouble restore in siren ID=Y |
| Clk not set | Time is not set |
| Clk set C=xx | Time defined by user no. XX |
| Cloud Comm.Trbl | Communication problems with the cloud channel |
| Cloud Connected | Cloud communication channel is functioning |
| Cloud Disconnect | Cloud communication channel is not functioning |
| Cloud Login Err | Login problems with the cloud channel |
| CO Alarm Z=xx | CO alert from zone XX defined as a CO detector |
| CO Rst. Z=xx | CO alert restored from zone XX defined as a CO detector |
| Comm OK IPC | Communication OK between the LightSYS™2 and IP card |
| Comm OK KP=y | Bus communication restore with keypad ID=Y |
| Comm OK KR=y | Bus communication OK with Proximity Key Reader Y |
| Comm OK VOICE | Bus communication OK with Advanced Voice module |
| Comm OK WME=y | Bus communication OK with wireless module expander ID=Y |
| Comm OK BZE=y | Bus communication OK with Bus Zone Expander ID=Y |
| Comm OK PS=y | Bus communication restore with power supply expander ID=Y |
| Comm OK Siren=y | Communication OK between the LightSYS™2 and Siren Y |
| Comm OK UO=y | Bus communication restore with UO expander ID=Y |
| Comm OK Z=xx | Bus communication OK with Bus zone XX |
| Comm OK ZE=y | Bus communication restore with zone expander ID=Y |
| Comm. OK GSM | Communication OK between the LightSYS™2 and GSM |
| Comm.OK LRT | Communication OK between the LightSYS™2 and the long range transmitter |
| Conf. Z=xx | Confirmed alarm occurred from zone XX |
| Conf. alarm P=y | Confirmed alarm occurred in partition Y |
| Conf.holdup P=y | Confirmed holdup occurred in partition Y |
| Confirm rs Z=xx | Restore zone confirmed alarm |
| CP reset | The control panel has reset |
| Dat set C=xx | Date defined by user no. XX |
| Day A:P=y | Daily arm on partition Y |
| Day b:p=y | Arm by scheduler of group B on partition Y |
| Day c:p=y | Arm by scheduler of group C on partition Y |
| Day d:p=y | Arm by scheduler of group D on partition Y |
| Day dis:P=y | Daily disarm on partition Y |
| Day hom:P=y | Daily STAY or GROUP arming in partition Y |
| DC Restore Z=XX | DC trouble restore in Bus zone XX |
| DC Trouble Z=XX | DC trouble in Bus zone XX |
| Dis:P=y C=zz | Partition Y disarmed by user ZZ |
| Dis: P=y KF=zz | Partition Y disarmed by remote control ZZ |
| Duress P=y C=xx | Partition Y duress alarm from user no. XX |
| DUST RST Z=xx | Dust trouble restore from WatchOUT DT Bus zone XXX |
| DUST Z=xx | Dust trouble from WatchOUT DT Bus zone XXX |
| EE AC.UPLOAD | Load new parameters from PTM accessory |
| Enter progrm | Entering installer programming from keypad or configuration software |
| Exit program | Exiting installer programming from keypad or configuration software |
| F.Tr OK Z=xx | Trouble restore in fire zone no. XX |
| F.Trbl Z=xx | Trouble in fire zone no. XX |
| Fire Zone=xx | Fire alarm in zone no. XX |
| False code kp=y | False code due to 3 incorrect keypad attempts |
| False code kr=y | False code due to 3 incorrect Access Control attempts |
| False rest.kp=y | False code is restored for keypad |
| False rest.kr=y | False code is restored for key reader |
| Fault z=xx | Trouble in zone XX |
| Fire z=xx | Fire alarm in zone XX |
| Fire kp=y | Fire alarm from keypad (ID=XX) (keys 3 & 4) |
| Foil ok Z=xx | Restore in foil (Day) zone no. XX |
| Foil Z=xx | Trouble in foil (Day) zone no. XX |
| Forced P=y | Partition Y is force armed |
| Found Z=xx | Wireless zone found, zone no. XX |
| Func=21 C=yy | Activate UO by user YY |
| Func=23 C=yy | Terminate FM by user YY |
| Func=24 C=yy | User Init by user YY |
| Func=25 C=yy | Hand Over by user YY |
| Func=26 C=yy | Void report program by user YY |
| Func=35 C=yy | NFA2P-View event log by user YY |
| Func=29 C=yy | GSM reset SIM counter by user YY |
| Func=55 C=yy | IP reset IP by user YY |
| Func=65 C=yy | Update scheduler by user YY |
| Func=63 C=yy | Next ARM by user YY |
| Func=64 C=yy | Next DISARM by user YY |
| Func=22 C=yy | Switch Aux by user YY |
| Func=43 C=yy | Chime OFF by user YY |
| Func=44 C=yy | Chime ON by user YY |
| Func=45 C=yy | Global Chime OFF by user YY |
| Func=46 C=yy | Global Chime ON by user YY |
| Func=41 C=yy | Test Bell by user YY |
| Func=42 C=yy | Battery test by user YY |
| Func=28 C=yy | Enable UD by user YY |
| Func=22 C=yy | Change FM by user YY |
| Func=51 C=yy | Change code by user YY |
| Func=67 C=yy | User limitation by user YY |
| Func=40 C=yy | Walk test by user YY |
| Gas Alarm Zn=xx | Gas (natural gas) alert from zone XX defined as a gas detector |
| Gas Rst. Z=xx | Gas (natural gas) alert restored from zone XX defined as a gas detector |
| GSM:GPRS PW ERR | Authentication password is incorrect |
| GSM:GPRS PW OK | Authentication password is correct |
| GSM:IP OK | IP connection OK |
| GSM:IP Trouble | IP address is incorrect |
| GSM:Mdl comm.OK | Communication between the GSM/GPRS/3G/4G Module and the LightSYS™2 is OK |
| GSM: Module comm. | Internal GSM/GPRS/3G/4G bus module trouble |
| GSM:MS OK | GPRS/3G/4G communication to the MS is OK |
| GSM:MS trouble | GPRS/3G/4G communication failure to the MS |
| GSM:NET avail. | GSM network is not available |
| GSM:NET avai.OK | GSM Network is available |
| GSM:NET qual.OK | GSM Network quality is acceptable |
| GSM:NET quality | The GSM RSSI level is low |
| GSM:PIN cod.err | PIN code entered is incorrect |
| GSM:PIN code OK | PIN code is correct |
| GSM:PUK Cod err | PUK code required |
| GSM:PUK Code OK | PUK Code entered is correct |
| GSM:SIM OK | SIM Card in place |
| GSM:SIM trouble | SIM card missing or not properly sited |
| H.Temp rst Z=xx | High temperature alert restored from zone XX defined as a temperature detector |
| High Temp. Z=xx | High temperature alert from zone XX defined as a temperature detector |
| HOM:P=y C=zz | Partition Y is armed in Stay mode by user ZZ |
| HOME:P=y KF=zz | Partition Y is home armed using keyfob ZZ |
| HU.ReinstateP=y | Hold-Up Reinstatement in partition y |
| IPC:DHCP error | Failed to acquire an IP address from the DHCP server |
| IPC:DHCP OK | Succeeded to acquire an IP address from the DHCP server |
| IPC: downld err | IP Card generated a download error |
| IPC: download OK | IP Card download was OK |
| IPC: evnt log ER | IP Card generated an event log error |
| IPC: evnt log OK | IP Card event log generated no error |
| IPC: hardware OK | IP Card hardware is OK |
| IPC: hardware error | IP Card generated a hardware error |
| IPC: mail error | IP Card generated a mail error |
| IPC: mail OK | IP Card mail is OK |
| IPC:MS=y error | IP Card Monitoring station ID=Y generated an error |
| IPC:MS=y OK | IP Card Monitoring station ID=Y was OK |
| IPC: Network err | Failed to connect to IP network |
| IPC: Network OK | Successful connection to IP network |
| IPC:NTP error | Failed to acquire time data from the time server |
| IPC:NTP ok | Succeeded to acquire time data from the time server |
| IPC: upgrade err | The IP Card upgrade generated an error |
| IPC: upgrade OK | The IP Card upgrade was OK |
| IR restore Z=xx | Trouble restore in the IR channel of Bus zone XX |
| IR trouble Z=xx | Trouble in the IR channel of Bus zone XXX |
| JAMM. WME=y | Jamming in wireless module expander ID=Y |
| KeyBox Open Zxx | Zone XX of type key box is open |
| KeyBox Rst Z=xx | Zone XX of type key box is restored |
| KP=$ Lost | Keypad is lost |
| KP=$ Lost Rs | Lost keypad has been restored |
| KP=$ LOW BAT. | Low Battery trouble for the keypad |
| KSW A: Z=xx P=Y | Group A in partition Y is armed by keyswitch zone XX |
| KSW ARM:Z=xxP=Y | Partition Y is armed by keyswitch zone XX |
| KSW B: Z=xx P=Y | Group B in partition Y is armed by keyswitch zone XX |
| KSW C: Z=xx P=Y | Group C in partition Y is armed by keyswitch zone XX |
| KSW D: Z=xx P=Y | Group D in partition Y is armed by keyswitch zone XX |
| KSW DIS:Z=xxP=Y | Partition Y is disarmed by keyswitch zone XX |
| LB rstr KF=yy | Low battery trouble restore from wireless remote control YY |
| L.Temp rst Z=xx | Low temperature alert restored from zone XX defined as a temperature detector |
| Low Bat KF=xx | Low battery restore from wireless zone XX |
| Lost Z=xx | Wireless zone lost, zone no. XX |
| Low Bat PS=y | Low battery trouble from power supply ID=Y |
| Low Bat RS Z=xx | Low battery trouble restored from wireless zone no. XX |
| Low Bat Siren=y | Low battery trouble from siren ID=Y |
| Low bat Z=xx | Low battery trouble from wireless zone no. XX |
| Low Temp. Z=xx | Low temperature alert from zone XX defined as a temperature detector |
| LRT:ACCOUNT ERR | The long range transmitter account generates an error |
| LRT:ACCOUNT OK | The long range transmitter account is OK |
| LRT:HARDWARE OK | The long range transmitter hardware is OK |
| LRT:HARDWRE ERR | The long range transmitter hardware generates an error |
| LRT:LOW BAT | The long range transmitter is experiencing low battery trouble. |
| LRT:LOW BAT OK | The long range transmitter low battery in not troubled |
| LRT:NO BAT | The long range transmitter is experiencing no battery |
| LRT:NO BAT OK | The long range transmitter no battery is not troubling. |
| LRT:SYSTEM ERR | The long range transmitter is generating a system error. |
| LRT:SYSTEM OK | The long range transmitter system status is OK |
| Main Bell RS | Bell trouble restore in Main Panel |
| Main:AC Rstr | AC power restore on main panel |
| Main Aux Rst | Restore of Aux power on Main Panel |
| Main: Bat Rst | Low battery trouble restore from the main panel |
| Main: Low AC | Loss of AC power from the main panel |
| Main: Low Bat | Low battery trouble from the main panel |
| Main:No aux | Failure in the Aux power on Main Panel |
| Main:No bell | Bell trouble in Main Panel |
| Masked Z=XX | Anti mask trouble from zone XX |
| MS=y call error | Communication fail trouble to MS phone no. Y |
| MS=y restore | Communication fail trouble restore to MS phone no. Y |
| MW restore z=xx | Trouble restore in the MW channel of BUZ zone XX |
| MW trouble z=xx | Trouble in the MW channel of BUZ zone XX |
| Next arm:p=y | Partition Y armed in Next Arm mode |
| Next dis:p=y | Partition Y disarmed in Next Disarm mode |
| No aux ps=y | Failure in the Aux power on power supply ID=X |
| No aux ze=y | Failure in the S. Aux power on zone expander Y |
| No bell ps=y | Bell trouble in power supply ID=Y |
| No Com IPC | Communication failure between the LightSYS™2 and IP card |
| No com kp=y | Communication failure between the LightSYS™2 and keypad ID=Y |
| No com kr=y | Communication failure between the LightSYS™2 and Key Reader ID=Y |
| No com voice | Communication failure between the LightSYS™2 and the Advanced Voice module |
| No com WME=y | Communication failure between the LightSYS™2 and wireless module expander ID=Y |
| No comm Siren=y | Communication failure between the LightSYS™2 and bus zone expander ID=Y |
| No comm PS=y | Communication failure between the LightSYS™2 and power supply Y |
| No comm uo=y | Bus communication failure with UO expander ID=Y |
| No comm z=xx | Bus communication failure with Bus zone XX |
| No comm ze=y | Bus communication failure with zone expander ID=Y |
| No comm. GSM | No communication between the GSM/GPRS/3G/4G Module and the LightSYS™2 |
| No comm. LRT | No communication between the long range transmitter and the LightSYS™2 |
| No fault z=xx | Trouble restore in zone XX (TEOL zone or Bus zone input TEOL) |
| No jam wme=y | Jamming restore on wireless module expander ID=Y |
| No mask z=xx | Anti mask trouble restore from zone XX |
| Nxt hom:p=y | Partition Y is armed in Next Stay mode |
| Overld rs ps=y | Overload restore from 3A SMPS Y |
| Overload ps=y | Overload from 3A SMPS Y |
| Panic Z=xx | Panic alarm from zone no. XX |
| Phone fail | If the phone line is cut or the DC level is under 1V |
| Phone restore | Phone line trouble restore |
| PIR rstr Z=xx | PIR trouble restore from Bus zone XX |
| PIR trbl Z=xx | PIR trouble from Bus zone XX |
| Police KF=yy | Police (panic) alarm from remote control YY |
| Police KP=y | Police (panic) alarm from keypad Y |
| POT.LD RS PS=y | Potential overload restore of 3A SMPS joined by 3A SMPS Y |
| POT.OVRLD PS=y | Potential overload of SMPS joined by 3A SMPS Y |
| PROX FAIL S=y | Fail in the proximity anti approach protection in siren Y |
| PROX OK SIREN=y | Proximity anti approach protection is restored in siren Y |
| PROX TMP RS S=y | Proximity tamper restore from siren ID =Y |
| PRX TMP SIREN=y | Proximity tamper from approaching siren ID=Y |
| PS=yOVER.R C=zz | Overload in 3A SMPS Y. Reset by user ZZ |
| Radio l.bat S=y | Radio low battery trouble from siren Y |
| Radiol.bat rS=y | Radio low battery restore from siren Y |
| Remote Prog | The system has been programmed from the configuration software |
| Reset: P=y C=zz | Reset of partition ID=Y and user ID=ZZ |
| Restore Z=xx | Alarm restore in zone no. XX |
| Rmt Arm:P=y | Partition Y armed from the configuration software |
| Rmt Dis:P=y | Partition Y disarmed from the configuration software |
| RMT Hom:P=y | Partition Y armed in Stay mode from the CS software |
| SEISMIC OK Z=xx | Seismic Test in Bus zone XX has been restored |
| SEISMIC TR Z=xx | Seismic Test rouble in Bus zone XX |
| Self Fail Z=xx | Bus zone XX has failed the Self Test |
| Self OK Z=xx | Self Test in Bus zone XX has been restored |
| Siren=$ Lost | Siren is regarded as lost following supervision test |
| Siren=$ Lost Rs | The LightSYS™2 received a signal from siren after it has been regarded as lost |
| Soak fail Z=xx | Zone XX has failed in the soak test |
| Spec. KP=y | Special alarm from the from wireless keypad Y |
| Spkr l.bat S=y | Speaker low battery trouble from siren Y |
| Spkr l.batrsS=y | Speaker low battery restore from siren Y |
| Start exit P=y | Exit time started in partition Y |
| STU=Y Line Rstr | STU adapter Y line restoration |
| STU=Y Line Trbl | STU adapter Y line trouble |
| STU=Y R.RESET | STU adapter Y line restoration reset |
| Tamper BZE=y | Tamper alarm from bus zone expander ID=Y |
| Tamper Kp=y | Tamper alarm from keypad ID=Y |
| Tamper LRT | Tamper alarm from long range transmitter |
| Tamper PS=y | Tamper alarm from power supply Y |
| Tamper Siren=y | Tamper alarm from wireless siren Y |
| Tamper UO=y | Tamper alarm from utility output expander Y |
| Tamper Voice | Tamper alarm from Advanced Voice module |
| Tamper WME=y | Tamper alarm from wireless module expander Y |
| Tamper ZE=y | Tamper alarm in zone expander ID=X |
| Tamper Zn=xx | Tamper alarm from zone no. XX |
| Tech alarm Z=xx | Alarm from zone XX defined as Technical |
| Tech rstr Z=xx | Alarm restored from zone XX defined as Technical |
| TMP RS BZE=y | Tamper alarm restore from bus zone expander ID=Y |
| TMP RS KP=y | Keypad tamper restore |
| TMP RS PS=y | Tamper alarm restore from power supply expander ID=Y |
| TMP RS UO=y | Tamper alarm restore from UO expander ID=Y |
| TMP RS VOICE | Tamper alarm restore from Advanced Voice module |
| TMP RS WME=y | Tamper alarm restore from wireless module expander ID=Y |
| TMP RS ZE=y | Tamper alarm restore in zone expander ID=Y |
| TMP RS ZN=xx | Tamper alarm restore on zone XX |
| TMP RST LRT | Long Range transmitter tamper alarm reset |
| Tmp rst Siren=y | Tamper alarm restore from wireless siren Y |
| Unbyp Box+Bell | Box + Bell reinstated from bypass |
| Unbyps Zn=xx | Zone no. XX is reinstated from bypass |
| Unknown evnt | Unknown event alert |
| UO REST ZN=xx | A zone defined as “UO Trigger” has been deactivated |
| UO TRIG ZN=xx | A zone defined as “UO Trigger” has been activated |
| VOC:COMM OK | Bus communication OK with Voice Module |
| VOC:NO COMM | Bus communication failure with the Voice Module |
| Water Alrm Zn=xx | Flood alarm from zone no. XX |
| Water rstr Z=xx | Flood alarm restore on zone no. XX |
| WEAK BAT PS=y | Weak battery indication joined by 3A SMPS Y |
| Weak Bat RS PS=y | Weak battery restore indication joined by 3A SMPS Y |
| Z=xx aut bad | Zone self-test failed, zone no. XX |
| Z=xx auto ok | Zone self-test OK, zone no. XX |
### 11. Compliance Standards Met
* EN50131-1, EN50131-3 Grade 2
* EN50130-5 Environmental class II
* EN50131-6 Type A, EN50136-2 and EN50131-10
* UK: BS 8243:2010, PD6662:2017, ACPO (Police)
* ATS 5 for IP/GPRS; ATS 2 for PSTN
* ATS EN50136-1 Category C (PSTN, GSM, IP transmission paths in parallel)
* Signaling security: - Substitution security S2, - Information security I3
* EN50136-1:2012
* EN50136-1-2:2013
* EN50136-10:2014
* FCC Part 15 Class B digital device
* Directive 2014/30/EU (EMC Compliance)
### 12. Library Voice Messages (Appendix D)
| Code | Word |
|---|---|
| 001 | (Custom) |
| 002 | (Custom) |
| 003 | (Custom) |
| 004 | (Custom) |
| 005 | (Custom) |
| 006 | A |
| 007 | Above |
| 008 | Air conditioner |
| 009 | An |
| 010 | And |
| 011 | Apartment |
| 012 | Area |
| 013 | At |
| 014 | Attic |
| 015 | Baby's room |
| 016 | Back |
| 017 | Balcony |
| 018 | Basement |
| 019 | Bathroom |
| 020 | Bedroom |
| 021 | Before |
| 022 | Behind |
| 023 | Bottom |
| 024 | Boy's room |
| 025 | By |
| 026 | Camera |
| 027 | Ceiling |
| 028 | Cellar |
| 029 | Central |
| 030 | Children |
| 031 | Cleaner |
| 032 | CO |
| 033 | Computer room |
| 034 | Contact |
| 035 | Control |
| 036 | Corner |
| 037 | Curtain |
| 038 | Desk |
| 039 | Detector |
| 040 | Device |
| 041 | Dining |
| 042 | Door |
| 043 | Down |
| 044 | Downstairs |
| 045 | Dressing |
| 046 | East |
| 047 | Elevator |
| 048 | Emergency |
| 049 | Entrance |
| 050 | Entry |
| 051 | Executive |
| 052 | Exit |
| 053 | External |
| 054 | Family |
| 055 | Fence |
| 056 | Fire |
| 057 | First |
| 058 | Flood |
| 059 | Floor |
| 060 | For |
| 061 | Foyer |
| 062 | Front |
| 063 | Game |
| 064 | Garage |
| 065 | Garden |
| 066 | Gas |
| 067 | Gate |
| 068 | Girl's room |
| 069 | Glass |
| 070 | Guest |
| 071 | Hallway |
| 072 | High |
| 073 | In |
| 074 | Indoor |
| 075 | Inside |
| 076 | Internal |
| 077 | Is |
| 078 | Keyfob |
| 079 | Kitchen |
| 080 | Landing |
| 081 | Left |
| 082 | Library |
| 083 | Light |
| 084 | Living |
| 085 | Lobby |
| 086 | Low |
| 087 | Macro |
| 088 | Magnet |
| 089 | Main |
| 090 | Master |
| 091 | Middle |
| 092 | Motion |
| 093 | Near |
| 094 | New |
| 095 | North |
| 096 | Nursery |
| 097 | Of |
| 098 | Office |
| 099 | On |
| 100 | Outdoor |
| 101 | Output |
| 102 | Outside |
| 103 | Panic |
| 104 | Partition |
| 105 | Passage |
| 106 | Patio |
| 107 | Perimeter |
| 108 | Pool |
| 109 | Rear |
| 110 | Reception |
| 111 | Refrigerator |
| 112 | Relay |
| 113 | Right |
| 114 | Roof |
| 115 | Room |
| 116 | Safe |
| 117 | Safety |
| 118 | Second |
| 119 | Sensor |
| 120 | Shock |
| 121 | Shop |
| 122 | Shutter |
| 123 | Side |
| 124 | Siren |
| 125 | Site |
| 126 | Smoke |
| 127 | South |
| 128 | Sprinkler |
| 129 | Stairs |
| 130 | Store |
| 131 | Student room |
| 132 | Study |
| 133 | Technical |
| 134 | Temperature |
| 135 | Third |
| 136 | To |
| 137 | Top |
| 138 | TV |
| 139 | Under |
| 140 | Up |
| 141 | Upstairs |
| 142 | Video camera |
| 143 | Wall |
| 144 | Warehouse |
| 145 | Washroom |
| 146 | West |
| 147 | Window |
| 148 | Yard |
| 149 | Zone |
| 150 | 0 |
| 151 | 1 |
| 152 | 2 |
| 153 | 3 |
| 154 | 4 |
| 155 | 5 |
| 156 | 6 |
| 157 | 7 |
| 158 | 8 |
| 159 | 9 |
### 13. Remote Software Upgrade (Appendix I)
**Step 1: Set parameters for IP/GPRS/3G/4G Communication**
1. Define all parameters required to set GPRS/3G/4G or IP communication as explained in the Communication section of the LightSYS™2 (See page 152).
**Step 2: Enter the location of the upgrade file**
1. In the `System` menu, `Firmware Upgrade` submenu, enter the relevant information regarding the location of the upgrade file:
* `Server IP`: Enter the IP address of the router/gateway where the upgrade file is located. Default: `firmware.riscogroup.com`
* `Port`: Enter the port on the router/gateway where the upgrade file is located. Default: `00080`
* `File Name`: Enter the upgrade file name. Default: `CMD.TXT`
**Step 3: Activate Remote Upgrade from the Keypad**
1. From the installer main programming menu select `System` menu, `Firmware Upgrade` submenu `Download File` option.
2. Select the upgrade communication path as follows:
* Via IP
* Via GPRS/3G/4G
3. Once selected, the LightSYS™2 will start downloading the required files. The upgrade procedure may take approximately 40 minutes to complete. This will vary according to whether the procedure is performed via GPRS/3G/4G or IP. Once the files are downloaded the panel automatically starts with the upgrade procedure of the units connected to the system.
**Step 4: Verify that upgrade has been successful**
1. From the main display press `OK` and enter the installer code followed by `OK`.
2. Using the arrows scroll to `Maintenance` > `Diagnostics` > `Main panel` > `Version`. The upgraded version of the main panel will appear.
3. To view the other accessories version navigate to the required menus under the `Maintenance` > `Diagnostics` menu.
### 14. Warranty Information
RISCO Ltd. guarantees hardware products to be free from defects in materials and workmanship for 24 months from the date of delivery. This warranty covers products purchased new within the country of original purchase. It is solely for customers who purchased directly from RISCO or an authorized distributor. RISCO does not warrant to consumers directly. Remedies include repair or replacement of defective products. Return Material Authorization (RMA) is required for returns. The warranty does not cover improper operation, installation, neglect, abuse, willful damage, abnormal working conditions, failure to follow instructions, misuse, alteration, modification, unauthorized repairs, combination with other products, damage from external factors (power failure, surges), or failures due to third-party communication services (GSM interruptions, internet outage, telephony failure). Batteries are explicitly excluded from the warranty. The warranty does not apply to software or third-party software. RISCO does not guarantee that the product will prevent personal injury or property loss, or provide adequate warning in all cases. RISCO is not liable for lost revenues, profits, punitive damages, or any other indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages.
=== WEB RESEARCH: prosys ===
## Risco LightSYS2 ProSYS Plus Intruder Alarm Panel - Full Technical Reference
### 1. General Information
The LightSYS2 is a comprehensive intruder alarm panel designed for security engineers. This document provides a full technical reference, including all default codes, fault codes, zone types, wiring, programming menus, and every piece of technical information available.
### 2. Product Range and Model Numbers
**Main Panel and Housing:**
* RP432M: LightSYS2 Main Board
* RP432B: LightSYS2 Polycarbonate Housing
* RP432PS: LightSYS2 1.5A Power Supply
* RP432PS15: LightSYS2 1.5A Power Supply, without wall plug
* RP432IN (xx): LightSYS2 Literature Pack (language)
* RP432BM1: LightSYS2 Metal Housing
* RP432PS1: LightSYS2 4A Power Supply
* RP432PS10UK: LightSYS2 3A Power Supply for metal housing., UK plug
**Keypads:**
* RP432KP: LightSYS2 LCD keypad, slim
* RP432KPP: LightSYS2 LCD keypad with proximity, slim (13.56 MHz)
* RP432KPP2: LCD keypad
* RP432KP02: Proximity Key Reader
* RW432KPP: Proximity tags (13.56 MHz)
* RPKELP: Proximity tags (125 KHz)
* RPKEL: 2-Way Wireless Slim Keypad with Prox, (2–Outdor, Black)
* RP132KL1/2P: (1–Indoor, White)
* RP128KCL: Panda Wired Keypad, Prox.
* RP128PKR: Panda Wired Keypad
* RP200KT: WL Panda Keypad for LightSYS2,868
* RP128KT: Elegant Keypad, w/ Prox
* RW132KL 1/2 P: 2-Way WL Slim Keypad
* RW432KPP: 2-Way WL Panda Keypad
**Zone Expanders:**
* RP432EZ8: 8 Zone Expansion Module
* RP128EZB: Bus Zone Expander
* RP128EZ01: Single Zone Expander
**Utility Output Expanders:**
* RP296EO4: 4-Relay Output Expansion Module
* RP296EO8: 8 Open-Collector Output Expansion Module
**Wireless Expanders:**
* RP432EW8: Wireless Expander, 868 MHz
* RP432EW4: Wireless Expander, 433 MHz
* RP432EWS: Wireless Security Module 868Hz
* RP432EWV: Wireless Video Module 868/869MHz
**Wireless Transmitters 868MHz:**
* RWT92: WL iWISE PIR
* RWT92P: WL iWISE Pet
* RWX34S: Smoke & Heat Detector 1 & 2 Way,
* RWX35S: WL Smoke & Heat
* WL T72C: WL Universal Transmitter
* RWT72M: WL Door/Window Contact
* RWT72P: WL Pulse Count Transmitter
* RWT72X: WL Dual Channel Transmitter
* Agility 132KF2: 2-Way 8 Button Remote Control Keyfob
* RW332KF1: Panda 2Way KeyFob
* RWT4RCP: 4-Button RC Keyfob with 2-Button Panic
* WL 132KF1: 4-Button Rolling-Code Keyfob, Black
* WL T4RC: 4-Button Rolling-Code Keyfob, Gray
* RWT51P: Wristband Panic Transmitter
* RWT52P: 2-Button Panic Keyfob
* RWT6SW: WL Shock Detector
* RWT6F: WL Flood Detector
* RWT6C08: WL CO Detector
* RWT6G: WL Glassbreak Detector
* WL T312: Wireless WatchOUT PIR
* WL X312: 2-Way WL WatchOUT PIR
* RWT95: WL iWAVE PIR
* RWT95P: WL iWAVE Pet
* RWX95: 2-Way WL iWAVE PIR ,868MHz
* RWX95P: 2-Way WL iWAVE Pet, 868MHz
* RWX73M: 2Way Door/Window Contact
* RWX73F: 2Way Multi-Function Contacts,868
* RWX73F8BL: 2-Way Multi Contact, Black
* RWX73F8BR: 2-Way Multi Contact, Brown
* RWX73M8BL: 2Way Door/Window Contact, Black
* RWX73M8BR: 2Way Door/Window Contact, Brown
* RWX75M: 2-Way WP Door/Window Contacts
* RWX96: 1&2 Way WL Piccolo Pet 868MHz
* RWX96P: 1&2 Way WL Piccolo Pet 868MHz
* RWT78M: 1-way Slim Contact 868MHz
* RWX515DT: 2 Way WL BWare DT, 868MHz
* RWX515DTP: 2 Way WL BWare DT Pet, 868MHz
* RWX515PR: 2 Way WL BWare PIR, 868MHz
* RWX515PT: 2 Way WL BWare Pet, 868MHz
* RWX95DT: 2 Way WL iWave DT, 868MHz
* RWX95DTP: 2 Way WL iWave DT Pet, 868MHz
* RWX78M: 2-way Slim Contact
* RWX78S: 2-way Slim Shock Detector
* RWX78SM: 2-way Slim Shock&Contact
* RWX106: 1 & 2-Way WL Curtain PIR
* RWX107DT: WL Outdoor DT Curtain
**Power Supply Expanders:**
* RP432PS0000A: LightSYS2 Power Supply, EU
* RP432PS00USA: LightSYS2 Power Supply, USA
* RP128EPS: 3A Switched Power Supply Expansion Module module
* RP128PSPSEUA: 3A Switched Power Supply inside large metal box + Tamper + transformer
* RP512BM21: ProSYS Plus & LightSYS2 B21 Box
* RP512BM26: ProSYS Plus & LightSYS2 B26 Box
**Voice Unit:**
* RP432EV: LightSYS2 Voice module
* RP128EVL000A: Listen and speak-in module
**Proximity Key Reader/Tag:**
* RP128PKR3: Proximity Key Reader Kit 13.56MHz
* RP200KT: Proximity Keytags 13.56MHz (10 units)
**COB Module:**
* RP512ECOB: Cellular on Bus (COB) Module
**IP Module:**
* RW132IP: Plug-in TCP/IP Module
* RP512IP: IP Multi-Socket Plug-in Module
**GSM/GPRS/3G/4G Module:**
* RGSMANT: External GSM Antenna with 3m cable
* RP512G4: GSM/4G MSoc + Ant. Plastic box
* RP512G3: GSM/3G MSoc + Ant. Plastic box
* RP512G2: M.S 2G for Plastic box+Ant.
**Fast PSTN Modem 2400:**
* RP432MD24: Plug-in LightSYS2 Fast Modem
**IP/AGM Receiver:**
* RP128IP0000A: AGM/IP Receiver Software
**External Sounders:**
* RS200WA: ProSound
* RS200WAP: ProSound with Proximity
* RS200LW: ProSound External Lamp
* RS4012: Lumin8, 2 Piezo+Lamp
* RS4022: Lumin8 Delta, 2 Piezo+Lamp
**Engineer Tools:**
* RW132EUSB: Adaptor from panel to PC USB
* RP132CB: RS232 PC to Panel Cable
**Bus Detectors:**
* RK350DT: Wired Beyond DT
* RK315DT: WatchOUT DT + swivel
* RK325DT: WatchIN DT + swivel
* RK312PR: WatchOUT PIR
* RK200DTG3: Industrial LuNAR DT AM Grade 3
* RK815DTB: iWISE Bus DT AM Grade 3 , 15m
* RK825DTB: iWISE Bus DT AM Grade 3 , 25m
* RK800Q0B: iWISE Bus Quad 15m (50 ft) AM Grade 3
* RK815DTB: iWISE DT AM Grade 2 , 15m
* RK825DTB: iWISE DT AM Grade 2 , 25m
* RK800Q0B: iWISE Quad 15m Grade 2
* RK66S: RISCO Seismic Detector
* RK515DTG3: BWare DT AM
* RK515DTGL: BWare DT
* RK515DTBG3: BWare DT AM
* RK515DTBGL: BWare DT
* RK500Q0G3: BWare Quad AM
* RK500Q: BWare Quad
* RK500QBG3: BWare Quad AM
* RK500QB: BWare Quad
* RK107DT: Wired Curtain DT AM, Bus
**Boxes:**
* RP432B: LightSYS2 Polycarbonate housing
* RP128B5: Plastic accessories box + tamper
### 3. Complete Technical Specifications
**Main Panel:**
* **Input Power:** AC/DC Adaptor 100-240V 50/60Hz 14.4V—1.5A, 4A
* **Current Consumption:** 60 mA, typical / 70 mA, maximum
* **Rechargeable Standby Battery:**
* 1.5A PS: 12 Volts up to 7 Amp-Hours (AH), typical
* 4A PS: 12 Volts up to 17 Amp-Hours (AH), typical
* **Power Outputs:**
* **Auxiliary Power:**
* 1.5A PS: Total current 800mA; Maximum Aux = 500mA; Maximum BUS (AUX RED) = 800mA
* 4A PS: Total current 1500mA; Maximum Aux = 500mA; Maximum BUS (AUX RED) = 1000mA
* **Bell/LS (External):** 12 Volts DC @ 500 mA, maximum
* **Programmable outputs:**
* UO1: Dry contact relay (24V, 1 Amps)
* UO2-UO4: 100 mA, opto relay
* **Main Box Dimensions:**
* RP432B Polycarbonate (1.5A PS): 290 x 254 x 97 mm
* RP432BM Metal, small (1.5A PS): 264 x 299 x 80 mm
* RP432BM1 Metal, large (4A or 1.5A PS): 420 x 379 x 95 mm
* **Operating temperature:** -10°C to 55°C (14°F to 131°F)
* **Weight:** 1.9 Kg (including battery)
* **Storage temperature:** -20°C to 60°C (-4°F to 140°F)
**Keypads:**
* **LCD Keypad (RP432KP, RP432KPP):**
* **Voltage:** 13.8V +/-10%
* **Current Consumption:** LCD (RP432KP): 48 mA typical/52 mA max; Prox LCD (RP432KPP): 62 mA typical/130 mA max
* **Main panel connection:** 4-wire BUS, up to 300 m (1000 ft) from Main Panel
* **Dimensions:** 153 x 84 x 28 mm (6.02 x 3.3 x 1.1 inch)
* **Operating temperature:** -10°C to 55°C (14°F to 131°F)
* **Storage temperature:** -20°C to 60°C (-4°F to 140°F)
* **Prox. RF frequency:** 13.56MHz
* **LCD Keypad (RP128KP, RP128KPP):**
* **Voltage:** 13.8V +/-10%
* **Current:** RP128KP: 100 mA maximum; RP128KPP (with prox) 250 mA maximum
* **Main Panel Connection:** 4-wire BUS, up to 300 m (1000 ft) from Main Panel
* **Dimensions:** 16.2 cm x 12.2 cm x 3 cm (6.37" x 4.8" x 1.18")
* **2-Way WL Slim Keypad (RW132KL 1/2 P):**
* **Voltage:** 3V (2 CR123 batteries in parallel)
* **Current:** Stand-by current 10μA, Max current 100 mA
* **Main Panel Connection:** Wireless
* **Dimensions:** 100 mm X 45 mm X 25 mm (3.9 i X 1.8 X .98 inches)
* **2-Way WL Panda Keypad (RW432KPP):**
* **Voltage:** 3V (4 CR123 Lithium batteries)
* **Current:** Stand-by current 9μA, Max current 150 mA
* **Main Panel Connection:** Wireless
* **Dimensions:** 180 mm X 115 mm X 35 mm (7.1 X 4.5 X 1.4 inches)
**Zone Expander (RP432EZ8):**
* **Voltage:** 13.8VDC +/-10%
* **Current:** 25 mA, typical / 30 mA, maximum
* **Main Panel Connection:** 4-wire BUS, up to 300 m (1000 ft) from Main Panel
* **Dimensions:** 10.5 cm x 6.6 cm x 1.8 cm
**Utility Output Expanders:**
* **4 Relay Output (RP296EO4):**
* **Voltage:** 13.8VDC +/-10%
* **Current:** 25 mA, typical / 160 mA, maximum
* **Contacts:** 4 Form C (SPDT) Relays.; 5 A / 24V DC
* **Main Panel Connection:** 4-wire BUS, up to 300 m (1000 ft) from Main Panel
* **Dimensions:** 4.13" x 2.6" x 0.86" (10.5 cm x 6.6 cm x 2.2 cm)
* **8 Transistor Output (RP296EO8):**
* **Voltage:** 13.8VDC +/-10%
* **Current:** 25 mA, typical / 160 mA, maximum
* **Contacts:** Open Collector, Active Pull-Down, 70 mA maximum
* **Main Panel Connection:** 4-wire BUS, up to 300 m (1000 ft) from Main Panel
* **Dimensions:** 4.13" x 2.6" x 0.7" (10.5 cm x 6.6 cm x 1.8 cm)
**Wireless Expander (RP432EW):**
* **Voltage:** 12-14.4V DC VDC
* **Current:** Typical: 40 mA; 65mA maximum
* **Frequency:** RW432EW8 – 868.65 MHz; RW432EW4 – 433.92 MHz
* **RF immunity:** According to EN50130-4
* **Range (L.O.S):** 300 meters
* **Relay outputs:** 12VDC @ 1A max Dry Contact Relays
* **Operating temperature:** -10°C to 55°C (14°F to 131°F)
* **Storage temperature:** -20°C to 60°C (-4°F to 140°F)
* **Main Panel Connection:** 4-wire BUS, up to 300 m (1000 ft) from Main Panel
* **Dimensions:** 125.5 X 78X 25.5 mm (4.94 X 3.07 X 1 inch)
**Proximity Key Reader (RP128PKR):**
* **Voltage:** 13.8VDC +/-10%
* **Current:** 70 mA, typical / 180 mA max
* **Main Panel Connection:** 4-wire BUS, up to 300 m (1000 ft) from Main Panel
* **Dimensions:** 40 mm x 43.6 mm x 22 mm (1.57“ x 1.7“ x 0.86“)
**Voice Module (RP432EV):**
* **Voltage:** 13.8VDC +/-10%
* **Current:** 30 mA typical / 70 mA maximum
* **Operating temperature:** 0-70°C
* **Main Panel Connection:** 4-wire BUS, up to 300 m (1000 ft) from Main Panel
**Sirens:**
* **ProSound (RS200WA, RS200WAP):**
* **Input DC Power:** Regulated 13.5-14.2V, 200 mA maximum
* **Standby Current Consumption:** 54 mA + charge current
* **Battery charging current:** 140 mA maximum
* **Operating Current Consumption:** 1.6A ((Sounder + Strobe))
* **Speaker Sound level:** 106 dB @ 3 meters
* **Main Panel Connection:** 4-wire BUS, up to 300 m (1000 ft) from Main Panel
* **Dimensions:** 30.5 cm X 21.8 cm X 11.6 cm
* **Lumin8 (RS200WA, RS200WAP):**
* **Input DC Power:** Regulated 13.0- 14.2V
* **Current Consumption:** Single piezo: 350mA (Regulated); Twin piezo: 450mA (Regulated)
* **Battery charging current:** 15 mA maximum
* **Speaker Sound level:** Single piezo: 111dbA; Twin piezo: 114dbA
* **Main Panel Connection:** 4-wire BUS, up to 300 m (1000 ft) from Main Panel
**Single Zone Expander (RP128EZ01):**
* **Voltage:** 13.8VDC +/-10%
* **Current:** 20mA
* **Main Panel Connection:** 4-wire BUS, up to 300 m (1000 ft) from Main Panel
**Plug In 2G, 3G, 4G GSM (RP512G2, RP512G3, RP512G4):**
* **Current:** 160mA; During Standby - 30mA
* **Dimensions:** 80 mm x 50 mm x 25 mm
**Plug In GSM (RP432GSM):**
* **Voltage:** 13.8VDC +/-10%
* **Current:** Average: 30 mA; Peak: 160 mA
* **Dimensions:** 80 mm x 50 mm x 25 mm
**Plug In IP (RP512IP):**
* **Current:** 75mA maximum
* **Dimensions:** 80 mm x 50 mm x 25 mm
**Plug In IP (RW132IP):**
* **Voltage:** 13.8VDC +/-10%
* **Current:** Average 55 mA; Peak 105 mA
* **Dimensions:** 70 mm x 60 mm
**Plug In Modem 2400 (RP432MD24):**
* **Voltage:** 13.8VDC +/-10%
* **Current:** 20 mA, typical / 60 mA, maximum
* **Dimensions:** 70 mm x 25 mm
**BUS Expander (RP432EZB):**
* **Voltage:** 13.8VDC +/-10%
* **Current:** 20 mA, typical
* **Main Panel Connection:** 4-wire BUS, up to 300 m (1000 ft) from Main Panel
* **Dimensions:** 10.5 cm x 6.6 cm x 1.8 cm
**KP LRT (Long Range Transmitter):**
* **Voltage:** 13.8VDC +/-10%
* **Current:** 10 mA, standby / 1A maximum
* **Dimensions:** 227 mm x 173 mm x 124 mm
### 4. Default Codes
* **Installer Code:** 5678 (default for Configuration Software Access Code)
* **MS Lock:** 000000 (default)
* **Cloud Password:** AAAAAA (default)
* **Remote Phone Code (Voice Module):** 00 (default)
### 5. Fault/Event/Alarm Code Tables
**Report Codes (Contact ID / SIA / Report Category):**
| Parameter | Contact ID | SIA | Report Category |
|---|---|---|---|
| Panic alarm | 120 | PA | Urgent |
| Panic alarm restore | 120 | PH | Urgent |
| Fire alarm | 115 | FA | Urgent |
| Fire alarm restore | 115 | FH | Urgent |
| Medical alarm | 100 | MA | Urgent |
| Medical alarm restore | 100 | MH | Urgent |
| Duress alarm | 121 | HA | Urgent |
| Duress alarm restore | 121 | HH | Urgent |
| Box tamper | 137 | TA | Urgent |
| Box tamper restore | 137 | TR | Urgent |
| Confirmed alarm | 139 | BV | Urgent |
| Confirmed alarm restore | 139 | | Urgent |
| Recent Close | 459 | | Non-urgent |
| Bell trouble | 321 | YA | Non-urgent |
| Bell trouble restore | 321 | YH | Non-urgent |
| Auxiliary failure | 300 | YP | Non-urgent |
| Auxiliary restore | 300 | YQ | Non-urgent |
| Bus failure | 333 | ET | Non-urgent |
| Bus restore | 333 | ER | Non-urgent |
| Low battery | 302 | YT | Non-urgent |
| Low battery restore | 302 | YR | Non-urgent |
| AC loss | 301 | AT | Non-urgent |
| AC restore | 301 | AR | Non-urgent |
| Clock not set | 626 | | Non-urgent |
| Clock set | 625 | | Non-urgent |
| False code | 421 | | Non-urgent |
| False code restore | 421 | LT | Non-urgent |
| Main phone trouble | 351 | JA | Non-urgent |
| Main phone trouble restore | 351 | LR | Non-urgent |
| RF Jamming | 344 | XQ | Non-urgent |
| RF Jamming restore | 344 | XH | Non-urgent |
| GSM trouble | 330 | IA | Non-urgent |
| GSM trouble restore | 330 | IR | Non-urgent |
| GSM Pre-Alarm | | | Non-urgent |
| IP Network trouble | | | Non-urgent |
| IP Network trouble restore | | | Non-urgent |
| User Arm | 401 | CL | Arm/Disarm |
| User Disarm | 401 | OP | Arm/Disarm |
| Stay arm | 441 | CG | Arm/Disarm |
| Disarm after alarm | 458 | OR | Arm/Disarm |
| Keyswitch Arm | 409 | CS | Arm/Disarm |
| Keyswitch Disarm | 409 | OS | Arm/Disarm |
| Auto Arm | 403 | CA | Arm/Disarm |
| Auto Disarm | 403 | OA | Arm/Disarm |
| Remote Arm | 407 | CL | Arm/Disarm |
| Remote Disarm | 407 | OP | Arm/Disarm |
| Forced Arm | 574 | CF | Arm/Disarm |
| Quick Arm | 408 | CL | Arm/Disarm |
| No Arm | 654 | CD | Arm/Disarm |
| Auto Arm fail | 455 | CI | Arm/Disarm |
| Burglary alarm | 130 | BA | Urgent |
| Burglary alarm restore | 130 | BH | Urgent |
| Fire alarm | 110 | FA | Urgent |
| Fire alarm restore | 110 | FH | Urgent |
| Foil alarm | 155 | BA | Urgent |
| Foil alarm restore | 155 | BH | Urgent |
| Panic alarm | 120 | PA | Urgent |
| Panic alarm restore | 120 | PH | Urgent |
| Medical alarm | 100 | MA | Urgent |
| Medical alarm restore | 100 | MH | Urgent |
| 24 Hour alarm | 133 | BA | Urgent |
| 24 Hour alarm restore | 133 | BH | Urgent |
| Entry/Exit | 134 | BA | Urgent |
| Entry/Exit restore | 134 | BH | Urgent |
| Water (Flood) alarm | 154 | WA | Urgent |
| Water (Flood) alarm restore | 154 | WH | Urgent |
| Gas alarm | 151 | GA | Urgent |
| Gas alarm restore | 151 | GH | Urgent |
| Carbon Monoxide alarm | 162 | GA | Urgent |
| Carbon Monoxide alarm restore | 162 | GH | Urgent |
| Environmental alarm | 150 | UA | Urgent |
| Environmental alarm restore | 150 | UH | Urgent |
| Low Temperature (Freeze alarm) | 159 | ZA | Urgent |
| Low Temperature restore | 159 | ZH | Urgent |
| High Temperature | 158 | KA | Urgent |
| High Temperature restore | 158 | KH | Urgent |
| Zone trouble | 380 | UT | Urgent |
| Zone trouble restore | 380 | UJ | Urgent |
| Burglary trouble | 380 | BT | Urgent |
| Burglary trouble restore | 380 | BJ | Urgent |
| Zone bypass | 570 | UB | Urgent |
| Zone bypass restore | 570 | UU | Urgent |
| Burglary bypass | 573 | BB | Urgent |
| Burglary bypass restore | 573 | BU | Urgent |
| Zone supervision loss | 381 | UT | Urgent |
| Zone supervision restore | 381 | UJ | Urgent |
| Tamper | 144 | TA | Urgent |
| Tamper restore | 144 | TR | Urgent |
| Zone lost | 381 | UT | Urgent |
| Zone lost restore | 381 | UJ | Urgent |
| Low battery | 384 | XT | Non-urgent |
| Low battery restore | 384 | XR | Non-urgent |
| Soak fail | 380 | UT | Urgent |
| Soak fail restore | 380 | UJ | Urgent |
| Zone Alarm | 134 | BA | Urgent |
| Zone Alarm restore | 134 | BH | Urgent |
| Zone confirm alarm | 139 | BV | Urgent |
| Zone confirm alarm restore | 139 | | Urgent |
| No activity | 393 | NC | Urgent |
| No activity restore | 393 | NS | Urgent |
| Tamper | 145 | TA | Urgent |
| Tamper restore | 145 | TR | Urgent |
| Keypad lost | 355 | BZ | Urgent |
| Keypad lost restore | 355 | | Urgent |
| Low battery | 384 | XT | Non-urgent |
| Low battery restore | 384 | XR | Non-urgent |
| Arm | 409 | CS | Arm/Disarm |
| Disarm | 409 | OS | Arm/Disarm |
| Low battery | 384 | XT | Non-urgent |
| Low battery restore | 384 | XR | Non-urgent |
| Tamper | 145 | TA | Urgent |
| Tamper restore | 145 | TR | Urgent |
| Low battery | 384 | XT | Non-urgent |
| Low battery restore | 384 | XR | Non-urgent |
| Siren lost | 355 | BZ | Urgent |
| Siren lost restore | 355 | | Urgent |
| Low battery | 384 | XT | Non-urgent |
| Low battery restore | 384 | XR | Non-urgent |
| I/O Expander lost | 355 | BZ | Urgent |
| I/O Expander lost restore | 355 | | Urgent |
| Tamper | 145 | TA | Urgent |
| Tamper restore | 145 | TR | Urgent |
| AC trouble | 301 | AT | Non-urgent |
| AC trouble restore | 301 | AR | Non-urgent |
| RF Jamming | 380 | XQ | Urgent |
| RF Jamming restore | 380 | XH | Urgent |
| Bell trouble | 321 | YA | Non-urgent |
| Bell trouble restore | 321 | YH | Non-urgent |
| Auxiliary close | 301 | AT | Non-urgent |
| Auxiliary close restore | 301 | AR | Non-urgent |
| Auxiliary failure | 300 | YP | Non-urgent |
| Auxiliary restore | 300 | YQ | Non-urgent |
| Overload | 312 | YP | Non-urgent |
| Overload restore | 312 | YQ | Non-urgent |
| Enter programming (local) | 627 | LB | Arm/Disarm |
| Exit programming (Local) | 628 | LS (LX ) | Arm/Disarm |
| Enter programming (Remote) | 627 | RB | Arm/Disarm |
| Exit programming (Remote) | 628 | RS | Arm/Disarm |
| MS periodic test | 602 | RP | Non-urgent |
| MS keep alive (polling) | 999 | ZZ | Urgent |
| Call back | 411 | RB | Non-urgent |
| System reset | 305 | RR | Urgent |
| Listen in begin | 606 | LF | Urgent |
| Cancel Report | 406 | OC | Urgent |
| Walk Test | 607 | BC | Non-urgent |
| Walk Test restore | 607 | | Non-urgent |
| Exit Error | 374 | | Non-urgent |
| Enter Service Mode | 393 | LB | Non-urgent |
| Exit Service Mode | 393 | LX | Non-urgent |
### 6. All Zone Types and Their Descriptions
**Zone Types (Programming Menu 2.1.3):**
* **00) Not Used**
* **01) Exit/Entry 1:** Standard entry/exit zone with delay 1.
* **02) Exit/Entry 2:** Standard entry/exit zone with delay 2.
* **03) Exit(OP)/Entry 1:** Exit/entry zone with open/close reporting and delay 1.
* **04) Exit(OP)/Entry 2:** Exit/entry zone with open/close reporting and delay 2.
* **05) Entry Follower:** Follows an entry/exit zone, becoming instant if the entry/exit zone is not triggered first.
* **06) Instant:** Triggers an immediate alarm when violated.
* **07) I+ Exit/Entry 1:** Instant arming with exit/entry delay 1.
* **08) I+ Exit/Entry 2:** Instant arming with exit/entry delay 2.
* **09) I+Exit(OP)/Entry1:** Instant arming with open/close reporting and exit/entry delay 1.
* **10) I+Exit (OP)/Entry2:** Instant arming with open/close reporting and exit/entry delay 2.
* **11) I + Entry Follow:** Instant arming with entry follower behavior.
* **12) I+ Instant:** Instant arming, immediate alarm.
* **13) UO Trigger:** Triggers a Utility Output when violated.
* **14) Day Zone:** Active during disarmed periods, typically for chimes or trouble reports.
* **15) 24 Hours:** Always active, triggers an alarm regardless of arming status.
* **16) Fire:** Triggers a fire alarm.
* **17) Panic:** Triggers a panic alarm.
* **18) Special:** General purpose zone for custom applications.
* **19) Pulsed Keyswitch:** Momentary keyswitch for arming/disarming.
* **20) Final Exit:** Triggers after the final exit delay.
* **21) Latch Keyswitch:** Latching keyswitch for arming/disarming.
* **22) Entry Follower + Stay:** Entry follower behavior, but also active in Stay mode.
* **23) Pulsed Keyswitch Delay:** Pulsed keyswitch with a delay.
* **24) Latch Keyswitch Delay:** Latching keyswitch with a delay.
* **25) Tamper:** Triggers an alarm when tampered with.
* **26) Technical:** Reports technical troubles.
* **27) Water:** Triggers an alarm for water detection (flood).
* **28) Gas:** Triggers an alarm for gas detection.
* **29) CO:** Triggers an alarm for Carbon Monoxide detection.
* **30) Exit Term:** Exit termination zone.
* **31) High Temperature:** Triggers an alarm for high temperature.
* **32) Low Temperature:** Triggers an alarm for low temperature.
* **33) Key Box:** Zone for a key box, reports open/close.
* **34) Keyswitch Arm:** Keyswitch for arming.
* **35) Keyswitch Delayed Arm:** Keyswitch for arming with a delay.
### 7. Complete Wiring Diagrams and Terminal Descriptions
**Wiring (Appendix C):**
**Table A-1: Wire Facts**
| AWG Gauge Size | Wire Diameter (Millimeters) | Wire Diameter (Inches) | Resistance: Ω Per Meter | Resistance: Ω Per 100 Meters | Ω Per Foot | Ω Per 1000 Feet |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 24 | 0.50 | 0.020 | 0.085 | 8.5 | 0.0261 | 26.0 |
| 22 | 0.64 | 0.025 | 0.052 | 5.2 | 0.016 | 16.0 |
| 20 | 0.80 | 0.031 | 0.032 | 3.2 | 0.010 | 10.0 |
| 19 | 0.90 | 0.035 | 0.026 | 2.6 | 0.008 | 8.0 |
| 18 | 1.00 | 0.040 | 0.020 | 2.0 | 0.006 | 6.0 |
| 16 | 1.27 | 0.050 | 0.013 | 1.3 | 0.004 | 4.0 |
| 14 | 1.63 | 0.064 | 0.008 | 0.82 | 0.0025 | 2.5 |
**Table A-2: Wiring Between the LightSYS™2 Main Panel and the Plug-In Transformer**
| One-Way Wire Distance (In Meters) | One-Way Wire Distance (In Feet) | AWG (American Wire Gauge) |
|---|---|---|
| Up to 5 | Up to 15 | 22 |
| 5-8 | 15 - 25 | 20 |
| 8 - 12 | 25 - 40 | 18 |
| 12 - 20 | 40 - 60 | 16 |
| 20 - 30 | 60 - 100 | 14 |
**Table A-3: Wire Gauge (Max Combined Length of ALL Expansion Bus Wiring)**
| Wire Gauge | | Max Combined Length (Meters) | Max Combined Length (Feet) |
|---|---|---|---|
| 24 AWG | 7/02mm | 150 | 492 |
| 22 AWG | 16/02mm | 200 | 656 |
| 20 AWG | 24/02mm | 333 | 1092 |
| 19 AWG | 28/02mm | 400 | 1312 |
*Notes:* For maximum system stability, it is best NOT to exceed a total of 300 meters (1000 feet) of wire when wiring the Expansion bus. For a distance of more than 300 meters, refer to RISCO Group technical support service for detailed information.
**Table A-4: Total Auxiliary Power (Max Run)**
| Total Auxiliary Power (Max Current Draw per Branch) | 32/02 mm (18 AWG) Meters (Feet) | 28/02 mm (19 AWG) Meters (Feet) | 24/02 mm (20 AWG) Meters (Feet) | 16/02 mm (22 AWG) Meters (Feet) | 7/02 mm (24 AWG) Meters (Feet) |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 20mA | 1195 (3920) | 945 (3100) | 750 (2460) | 472 (1550) | 296 (970) |
| 30mA | 793 (2600) | 628 (2060) | 500 (1640) | 314 (1030) | 197 (646) |
| 40mA | 597 (1960) | 472 (1550) | 375 (1230) | 236 (775) | 148 (485) |
| 50mA | 478 (1568) | 378 (1240) | 300 (984) | 189 (620) | 118 (388) |
| 60mA | 296 (1300) | 314 (1030) | 250 (820) | 157 (515) | 98 (323) |
| 70mA | 341 (1120) | 270 (886) | 214 (703) | 135 (443) | 84 (277) |
| 80mA | 299 (980) | 237 (775) | 187 (615) | 118 (388) | 74 (243) |
| 90mA | 264 (867) | 209 (687) | 166 (547) | 105 (343) | 66 (215) |
| 100mA | 239 (784) | 189 (620) | 123 (492) | 94 (310) | 59 (194) |
*Note:* The wire lengths indicated represent the one-way distance between the source of power and the last detector in the branch.
**Table A-5: Maximum External Sounder Current (Max Run)**
| Max External Sounder Current (Max current draw per branch) | 32/02 mm (18 AWG) Meters (Feet) | 28/02 mm (19 AWG) Meters (Feet) | 24/02 mm (20 AWG) Meters (Feet) | 16/02 mm (22 AWG) Meters (Feet) |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 100mA | 238 (780) | 191 (625) | 151 (495) | 94 (310) |
| 200mA | 229 (390) | 95 (313) | 76 (248) | 47 (155) |
| 300mA | 79 (260) | 63 (208) | 50 (165) | 31 (103) |
| 400mA | 59 (195) | 48 (157) | 38 (124) | 24 (78) |
| 500mA | 48 (156) | 38 (125) | 30 (99) | 19 (62) |
| 650mA | 37 (120) | 29 (96) | 23 (76) | 15 (48) |
*Note:* The wire lengths indicated represent the one-way distance between the LightSYS™2 and the external sounder in the branch.
### 8. Full Programming Menu Structure
**Installer Programming Menu (Appendix G):**
**1) System**
* **1) Timers**
* 01) Ex/En Delay 1
* 02) Ex/En Delay 2
* 03) Bell Timeout
* 04) Bell Delay
* 05) Switch Aux Break
* 06) Wireless
* 061) Jamming Time
* 062) RX Supervise
* 063) TX Supervise
* 07) AC Off Delay
* 08) Guard Delay
* 09) Swinger Limit
* 10) Redial Wait
* 11) Last Exit Sound
* 12) Buzzer at Stay
* 064) Service Mode
* 13) Status Timer
* 14) Service Timer
* 15) Payment Timer
* 16) Pulse Open
* 17) Inactivity Timer
* **2) Controls**
* **1) Basic**
* 01) Quick Arm
* 02) Quick UO
* 03) Allow Bypass
* 04) Quick Bypass
* 05) False Code Trouble
* 06) Bell Squawk
* 07) 3 Minute Bypass
* 08) Audible Panic
* 09) Buzzer -> Bell
* 10) Audible Jamming
* 11) Exit Beeps at Stay
* 12) Forced Keyswitch Arming
* 13) Arm Pre-Warning
* **2) Advanced**
* 01) Double Verification of Fire Alarms
* 02) Alarm BUS Cut
* 03) Code Grand Master
* 04) Area
* 05) Global Follower
* 06) Summer/Winter
* 07) 24 Hour Bypass
* 08) Technician Tamper
* 09) Technician Reset
* 10) Engineer Tamper
* 11) Low battery Arming
* 12) Bell 30/10
* 13) Fire Temporal Pattern
* 14) IMQ Install
* 15) Disable Incoming Calls
* 16) Disable Keypad at Auto Disarm
* 17) Buzzer Delay
* 18) Speaker=Buzzer
* 19) Confirm Speaker
* 20) Bell Confirmation
* 21) Error Speaker Time Out
* 22) Tamper Report
* 23) AC Trouble Arm
* 24) Strobe Arm
* 25) Final Night
* 26) Stay Strobe
* 27) Blank Display
* 28) Display System Label
* **3) Communication**
* 1) Monitoring Station Enable
* 2) Follow Me Enable
* 3) Configuration Software
* 4) Cloud Enable
* **4) EN 50131**
* 1) Authorize Installer
* 2) Override Trouble
* 3) Restore Alarm
* 4) Mandatory Event Log
* 5) Restore Troubles
* 6) Exit Alarm
* 7) Entry Alarm
* 8) 20 minutes signal
* 9) Attenuation
* **5) PD6662**
* 1) Bypass Exit/Entry
* 2) Entry Disable
* 3) Route Disable
* 4) Installer Confirmation
* 5) Key switch Lock
* 6) Entry Disarm
* 7) Prox Disarm
* **6) CP-01**
* 1) Exit Restart
* 2) Auto Stay
* **7) Device**
* 1) Anti Mask Tamper
* 2) Proximity Anti Mask = Tamper
* 3) Audible Proximity Tamper
* **3) Labels**
* 1) System
* 2) Partition 1
* 3) Partition 2
* 4) Partition 3
* 5) Partition 4
* **4) Sounds**
* 1) Tamper Sound
* 1) During Disarm (1) Silent, 2) Bell, 3) Buzzer (main), 4) Bell + Buzzer)
* 2) During Arm (1) Silent, 2) Bell, 3) Buzzer (main), 4) Bell + Buzzer)
* 2) Speaker Volume
* 1) Trouble
* 2) Chime
* 3) Exit/Entry
* 4) Alarm
* 5) Squawk
* 3) Wireless Lost Sound (1) As trouble, 2) As tamper)
* **5) Settings**
* 1) DIP 2 Enable/Disable
* 2) Default Panel
* 3) Erase Wireless
* 4) Standard
* 5) Customer
* 6) Language
* **6) Automatic Clock**
* 1) Server
* 2) Host
* 3) Port
* 4) Time Zone (GMT)
* **7) Service Info.**
* 1) Name
* 2) Phone
* **8) Firmware Update**
* 1) Server IP
* 2) Server port
* 3) File name
* 4) Download Files (1) Via IP, 2) Via GPRS/3G/4G)
**2) Zones**
* **1) Parameters**
* 1) One By One
* 2) By Category
* 1) Label
* 2) Partition
* 3) Type (See Zone Types section above for full list)
* 4) Sound (1) At Arm, 2) At Stay, 3) At Disarm)
* 5) Termination (01) N/C, 02) EOL, 03) DEOL, 04) N/O, 05) TEOL)
* 6) Loop Response
* 7) Advanced
* 1) Forced Arming
* 2) Pulsed Counter
* 3) Abort Alarm
* 4) BUS Zones Parameters
* 5) Wireless Zones Parameters
* **2) Testing**
* 1) Self Test
* 2) Soak Test
* 3) Cross Zones
* 4) Alarm confirm
* 1) Confirm partition
* 2) Confirm zones
* 3) Resistance
**3) Outputs**
* **0) Nothing**
* **1) Follow System**
* 01) Bell
* 02) No Telephone Line
* 03) Comm. Failure
* 04) Trouble
* 05) Main Low Bat
* 06) AC Loss
* 07) Sensors Test
* 08) Battery Test
* 09) Bell Burglary
* 10) Scheduler
* 11) Switched Aux
* 12) GSM Error
* 13) Bell Test
* 14) Installation
* 15) Walk Test
* 16) Burglary
* 17) Panic
* 18) Fire
* 19) Special
* 20) 24 Hours
* 21) Zone Loss Alarm
* 22) Bell Trigger
* 23) Strobe Trigger
* 24) Fail To Arm
* 25) Confirmed Alarm
* 26) Duress
* 27) Hold Up Confirm Alarm
* 32) Zone Exclude
* **2) Follow Partition**
* 01) Ready
* 02) Alarm
* 03) Arm
* 04) Burglary
* 05) Fire
* 06) Panic
* 07) Special Emergency
* 08) Buzzer
* 09) Chime
* 10) Exit/Entry
* 11) Fire Trouble
* 12) Day (Zone) Trouble
* 13) Trouble
* 14) Stay
* 15) Tamper
* 16) Disarm
* 17) Bell
* 18) Bell Stay Off
* 19) Zone Bypass
* 20) Auto Arm Alarm
* **3) Follow Zone**
* 1) Zone Follow
* 2) Alarm Follow
* 3) Arm Follow
* 4) Disarm Follow
* **4) Follow Code**
**4) Codes**
* **1) User**
* 1) Partition
* 2) Authority Level
* **2) Grand Master**
* **3) Installer**
* **4) Sub Installer**
* **5) Code Length**
* 1) 4 Digits
* 2) 6 Digits
**5) Communication**
* **1) Method**
* **1) PSTN**
* **1) Timers**
* 1) PSTN Lost Delay
* 2) Wait Dial Tone
* **2) Control**
* 1) Alarm Phone Line
* 2) Answering machine override
* **2) Parameters**
* 1) Dial Method
* 2) Rings To Answer
* 3) Area Code
* 4) PBX Prefix
* 5) Call Wait
* **2) GSM**
* **1) Timers**
* 1) GSM Lost
* 2) GSM Net Loss
* **2) GPRS**
* 1) APN Code
* 2) APN User Name
* 3) APN Password
* **3) Email**
* 1) Mail Host
* 2) SMTP Port
* 3) Email Address
* 4) SMTP User name
* 5) SMTP Password
* **4) Controls**
* 1) Caller ID
* 2) LED Enable
* **5) Parameters**
* 1) PIN Code
* 2) SIM Number
* 3) SMS Center Phone
* 4) GSM RSSI
* **6) Pre Pay SIM**
* 1) Get Credit by
* 2) Phone To Send
* 3) Phone To Receive
* 4) SMS Message
* **3) IP**
* **1) IP Configuration**
* 1) Obtain IP
* 2) Panel Port
* 3) Panel IP
* 4) Subnet Mask
* 5) Gateway
* 6) DNS Primary
* 7) DNS Secondary
* **2) Email**
* 1) Mail Host
* 2) SMTP Port
* 3) Email Address
* 4) SMTP Name
* 5) SMTP Password
* **3) Host Name**
* **4) MS Polling**
* 1) Primary
* 2) Secondary
* 3) Backup
* **5) Control**
* 1) LED Enable
* **4) LRT**
* 1) Account
* 2) System
* 3) Periodic Test
* 4) No Comm Parm
* 5) Control
* 1) Disable Low Battery
* **2) Monitoring Station**
* **1) Report Type**
* 1) Voice (1) PSTN/GSM, 2) GSM/PSTN, 3) PSTN Only, 4) GSM Only)
* 2) IP (1) IP/SIM, 2) SIM/IP, 3) IP Only, 4) SIM Only)
* 3) SMS
* 4) Radio
* 5) SIA IP (1) IP/SIM, 2) SIM/IP, 3) IP Only, 4) SIM Only)
* **2) Accounts**
* **3) Comm. Format**
* 1) Contact ID
* 2) SIA
* **4) Controls**
* 1) Call Save
* 2) Show Kissoff
* 3) Show Handshake
* 4) Audible Kissoff
* 5) SIA Text
* 6) Random Periodic test
* 7) SIA with Partition
* **5) Parameters**
* 1) MS Retries
* 2) Alarm Restore (1) On Bell Time out, 2) Follow Zone, 3) At Disarm)
* 3) SIA IP Parameters (1) Encryption Key, 2) Receiver Number, 3) Line Number)
* **6) MS Times**
* 1) Periodic Test
* 2) Abort Alarm
* 3) Cancel Delay
* 4) Listen In
* 5) Confirmation
* **7) Report Split**
* 1) MS Arm/Disarm
* 2) MS Urgent
* 3) MS Non Urgent
* **8) Report Codes**
* 1) Edit Codes
* 2) Delete All
* **3) Configuration Soft.**
* **1) Security**
* 1) Access code
* 2) Remote ID
* 3) MS Lock
* **2) Call Back Phones**
* **3) Control**
* 1) Call Back
* 2) User Initiate Call
* **4) IP Gateway**
* 1) IP Address
* 2) IP Port
* **4) Follow Me**
* **1) Define**
* 1) Report Type (1) Voice, 2) Email, 3) SMS)
* 2) Partition
* 3) Events
* 4) Restore Events
* 5) Remote Control (1) Remote Listen, 2) Remote Program)
* **2) Controls**
* 1) Disarm Stop FM
* 2) Disable report at Stay
* **3) Parameters**
* 1) FM Retries
* 2) Voice Msg. Recurrence
* 3) Periodic Test
* **5) Cloud**
* 1) IP Address
* 2) IP Port
* 3) Password
* 4) Channel
* 5) Controls
* **6) Audio**
* **1) Messages**
* 1) Common
* 2) Zone
* 3) Partition
* 4) Output
* 5) Macro
* 6) Library Message
**7) Install**
* **1) Bus Device**
* 1) Automatic
* 2) Manual
* 01) Keypad
* 02) Zone Expander
* 03) Utility Output
* 04) Power Supply
* 05) Wireless Expander
* 06) Proximity Key Reader
* 07) Voice Module
* 08) Sounder
* 09) Bus Zone
* 10) GSM
* 11) IP
* 12) Modem
* 13) Bus Expander
* 14) LRT
* 15) COB
* 3) Testing
* 1) Bus Test
* 2) Bus Scan
* 3) Verify Module
* **2) Wireless Device**
* 1) RX Calibration
* 2) Allocation
* 7221) By RF (1) Zone, 2) Keyfob, 3) Keypad)
* 7222) By Code (1) Zone, 2) Keyfob, 3) Keypad)
* 3) Delete
**8) Devices**
* **1) Keypad**
* 1) Parameters (1) Label, 2) Partition, 3) Masking, 4) Controls (1) Emergency, 2) Multi view, 3) Exit beeps), 5) Serial Number (display only), 6) Function Key (Two-way) (1) Disable, 2) Panic, 3) M/S Listen Talk), 7 – 9) UO Control 1-3)
* **2) Keyfob**
* (1-Way) (0) None, 1) Arm, 2) Disarm, 3) Stay, 4) Group, 5) UO, 6) Panic)
* (2-Way) (1) Label, 5) Serial No., 6) Masking, 7) Controls (Panic), 8) PIN Code, 9–11) UO Key1–3)
* **3) Sounder**
* 1) Parameter
* 83101) Label
* 83102) Strobe (1) Always Off, 2) Follow Bell, 3) Follow Alarm)
* 83103) Siren LED (1) Always On, 2) Always Off, 3) Follow Arm, 4) Follow Alarm)
* 83104) Battery Load Test (1) Never, 2) Every 24 hours)
* 83105) Proximity Level Response
* 83106) Volume
* 83107) Lamp (1) Type (1) Always On, 2) Always Off, 3) Scheduler), 2) Brightness)
* 83108) Power Source (1) SAB, 2) SCB)
* 83109) Siren Current (1) Low, 2) Standard)
* 83110) Alarm Sound (1) – 4))
* 2) Lamp Times (1) Lamp Start, 2) Lamp Stop)
* **4) Proximity Reader**
* 1) Masking
* 2) Controls
* **5) Power Supply**
* 1) Masking
* 2) Controls (1) Bell / L Speak)
### 9. Commissioning Steps
**Bus Devices: Automatic Setting (Page 191):**
1. Press `OK` to begin the automatic BUS SCANNING (the Auto Settings process) in which it identifies all the devices on the bus. A list of the accessories that were found is displayed with the data definition that is required for each one.
2. Verify that the keypad displays all the devices you have connected (displayed with the data definition that is required for each one). If a device does not appear, ensure that you have given it a unique ID.
3. Press `OK` to accept what is being displayed, to progress through configuration screens and to advance on to the next device found.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until the presence of all devices has been confirmed and all parameters configured.
**Bus Devices: Manual Setting (Page 192):**
* Detailed steps for manually adding/modifying Keypads, Zone Expanders, Utility Outputs, Power Supplies, Wireless Expanders, Proximity Key Readers, Voice Modules, Sounders, Bus Zones, GSM, IP, Modem, Bus Expander, LRT, COB.
**Wireless Device Allocation (Page 207):**
1. Select `1) By RF` and press `OK`.
2. Select the device to be used for the registration mode.
3. Select category (1) Zone, 2) Keyfob, 3) Keypad) and press `OK`.
4. Using the numeric keys, enter the desired device number and press `OK`.
5. The WL device is in learn mode. Send a write message from your wireless device.
6. Continue entering the wireless zones attributes section.
### 10. Common Fault Diagnosis
**Installer Event Log Messages (Appendix F):**
| Event Message | Description |
|---|---|
| AC Low PS=y | Loss of AC power from power supply ID=y |
| AC RST PS=y | AC power restore on power supply ID=y |
| Activate UO=xx | UO XX activation |
| Actv UO=xx KF=zz | UO XX is activated from remote control ZZ |
| AL.ReinstateP=Y | Alarm reinstatement on partition Y |
| Alarm Z=xx | Alarm in zone no. XX |
| Alrm Cancel P=y | Alarm is cancelled in partition ID=Y |
| AMPRX DTCT Z=xx | Anti mask proximity detection on Bus zone XX |
| AMPRX RSTR Z=xx | Anti mask proximity detection restore on Bus zone XX |
| ARM A:P=y C=zz | Group A on partition Y is armed by user ZZ |
| ARM A:P=y KF=zz | Group A on partition Y is set by wireless keyfob ZZ |
| ARM B:P=y C=zz | Group B on partition Y is armed by user ZZ |
| ARM B:P=y KF=zz | Group B on partition Y is set by wireless keyfob ZZ |
| ARM C:P=y C=zz | Group C on partition Y is armed by user ZZ |
| ARM C:P=y KF=zz | Group C on partition Y is set by wireless keyfob ZZ |
| ARM D:P=y C=zz | Group D on partition Y is armed by user ZZ |
| ARM D:P=y KF=zz | Group D on partition Y is set by wireless keyfob ZZ |
| ARM FAIL P=y | Fail to Arm Partition X by Guard due to not ready zones |
| ARM:P=y C=zz | Partition Y armed by user ZZ |
| ARM:P=y KF=zz | Partition Y armed by wireless keyfob ZZ |
| Aut tst fail | Failure of zone self-test |
| Auto test OK | Automatic zone self-test OK |
| Aux RS PS=y | Restore of Aux power on power supply ID=Y |
| Aux RS ZE=y | Restore of S. Aux power on zone expander Y |
| Aux TRBL RS S=y | Auxiliary trouble restore on the siren ID=Y |
| Aux TRBL SIR.=y | Auxiliary trouble on the siren ID=Y |
| Bat Load RS S=y | Battery load trouble restore from siren ID=Y |
| Bat Load SIR.=y | Battery load trouble from siren ID=Y |
| Bat Rst PS=y | Low battery trouble restore from power supply ID=Y |
| BELL RS PS=y | Bell trouble restore in power supply ID=Y |
| Bell tamper | Bell tamper alarm |
| Bell tmp rs | Bell tamper alarm restore |
| Box tamper | Box tamper alarm from main unit |
| Box tmp rs | Box tamper alarm restore |
| Bypass Box+Bell | Box + Bell tamper is bypassed |
| Byp Trbl C=xx | System troubles were bypassed by user XX |
| Bypass Zn=xx | Zone no. XX is bypassed |
| Charge Curr S=y | Battery charging trouble in siren ID=Y |
| Chng code=xx | Changing user code XX |
| Change FM=yy | Changing Follow-Me number YY |
| Charge Current RS S=y | Battery charging trouble restore in siren ID=Y |
| Clk not set | Time is not set |
| Clk set C=xx | Time defined by user no. XX |
| Cloud Comm.Trbl | Communication problems with the cloud channel |
| Cloud Connected | Cloud communication channel is functioning |
| Cloud Disconnect | Cloud communication channel is not functioning |
| Cloud Login Err | Login problems with the cloud channel |
| CO Alarm Z=xx | CO alert from zone XX defined as a CO detector |
| CO Rst. Z=xx | CO alert restored from zone XX defined as a CO detector |
| Comm OK IPC | Communication OK between the LightSYS™2 and IP card |
| Comm OK KP=y | Bus communication restore with keypad ID=Y |
| Comm OK KR=y | Bus communication OK with Proximity Key Reader Y |
| Comm OK VOICE | Bus communication OK with Advanced Voice module |
| Comm OK WME=y | Bus communication OK with wireless module expander ID=Y |
| Comm OK BZE=y | Bus communication OK with Bus Zone Expander ID=Y |
| Comm OK PS=y | Bus communication restore with power supply expander ID=Y |
| Comm OK Siren=y | Communication OK between the LightSYS™2 and Siren Y |
| Comm OK UO=y | Bus communication restore with UO expander ID=Y |
| Comm OK Z=xx | Bus communication OK with Bus zone XX |
| Comm OK ZE=y | Bus communication restore with zone expander ID=Y |
| Comm. OK GSM | Communication OK between the LightSYS™2 and GSM |
| Comm.OK LRT | Communication OK between the LightSYS™2 and the long range transmitter |
| Conf. Z=xx | Confirmed alarm occurred from zone XX |
| Conf. alarm P=y | Confirmed alarm occurred in partition Y |
| Conf.holdup P=y | Confirmed holdup occurred in partition Y |
| Confirm rs Z=xx | Restore zone confirmed alarm |
| CP reset | The control panel has reset |
| Dat set C=xx | Date defined by user no. XX |
| Day A:P=y | Daily arm on partition Y |
| Day b:p=y | Arm by scheduler of group B on partition Y |
| Day c:p=y | Arm by scheduler of group C on partition Y |
| Day d:p=y | Arm by scheduler of group D on partition Y |
| Day dis:P=y | Daily disarm on partition Y |
| Day hom:P=y | Daily STAY or GROUP arming in partition Y |
| DC Restore Z=XX | DC trouble restore in Bus zone XX |
| DC Trouble Z=XX | DC trouble in Bus zone XX |
| Dis:P=y C=zz | Partition Y disarmed by user ZZ |
| Dis: P=y KF=zz | Partition Y disarmed by remote control ZZ |
| Duress P=y C=xx | Partition Y duress alarm from user no. XX |
| DUST RST Z=xx | Dust trouble restore from WatchOUT DT Bus zone XXX |
| DUST Z=xx | Dust trouble from WatchOUT DT Bus zone XXX |
| EE AC.UPLOAD | Load new parameters from PTM accessory |
| Enter progrm | Entering installer programming from keypad or configuration software |
| Exit program | Exiting installer programming from keypad or configuration software |
| F.Tr OK Z=xx | Trouble restore in fire zone no. XX |
| F.Trbl Z=xx | Trouble in fire zone no. XX |
| Fire Zone=xx | Fire alarm in zone no. XX |
| False code kp=y | False code due to 3 incorrect keypad attempts |
| False code kr=y | False code due to 3 incorrect Access Control attempts |
| False rest.kp=y | False code is restored for keypad |
| False rest.kr=y | False code is restored for key reader |
| Fault z=xx | Trouble in zone XX |
| Fire z=xx | Fire alarm in zone XX |
| Fire kp=y | Fire alarm from keypad (ID=XX) (keys 3 & 4) |
| Foil ok Z=xx | Restore in foil (Day) zone no. XX |
| Foil Z=xx | Trouble in foil (Day) zone no. XX |
| Forced P=y | Partition Y is force armed |
| Found Z=xx | Wireless zone found, zone no. XX |
| Func=21 C=yy | Activate UO by user YY |
| Func=23 C=yy | Terminate FM by user YY |
| Func=24 C=yy | User Init by user YY |
| Func=25 C=yy | Hand Over by user YY |
| Func=26 C=yy | Void report program by user YY |
| Func=35 C=yy | NFA2P-View event log by user YY |
| Func=29 C=yy | GSM reset SIM counter by user YY |
| Func=55 C=yy | IP reset IP by user YY |
| Func=65 C=yy | Update scheduler by user YY |
| Func=63 C=yy | Next ARM by user YY |
| Func=64 C=yy | Next DISARM by user YY |
| Func=22 C=yy | Switch Aux by user YY |
| Func=43 C=yy | Chime OFF by user YY |
| Func=44 C=yy | Chime ON by user YY |
| Func=45 C=yy | Global Chime OFF by user YY |
| Func=46 C=yy | Global Chime ON by user YY |
| Func=41 C=yy | Test Bell by user YY |
| Func=42 C=yy | Battery test by user YY |
| Func=28 C=yy | Enable UD by user YY |
| Func=22 C=yy | Change FM by user YY |
| Func=51 C=yy | Change code by user YY |
| Func=67 C=yy | User limitation by user YY |
| Func=40 C=yy | Walk test by user YY |
| Gas Alarm Zn=xx | Gas (natural gas) alert from zone XX defined as a gas detector |
| Gas Rst. Z=xx | Gas (natural gas) alert restored from zone XX defined as a gas detector |
| GSM:GPRS PW ERR | Authentication password is incorrect |
| GSM:GPRS PW OK | Authentication password is correct |
| GSM:IP OK | IP connection OK |
| GSM:IP Trouble | IP address is incorrect |
| GSM:Mdl comm.OK | Communication between the GSM/GPRS/3G/4G Module and the LightSYS™2 is OK |
| GSM: Module comm. | Internal GSM/GPRS/3G/4G bus module trouble |
| GSM:MS OK | GPRS/3G/4G communication to the MS is OK |
| GSM:MS trouble | GPRS/3G/4G communication failure to the MS |
| GSM:NET avail. | GSM network is not available |
| GSM:NET avai.OK | GSM Network is available |
| GSM:NET qual.OK | GSM Network quality is acceptable |
| GSM:NET quality | The GSM RSSI level is low |
| GSM:PIN cod.err | PIN code entered is incorrect |
| GSM:PIN code OK | PIN code is correct |
| GSM:PUK Cod err | PUK code required |
| GSM:PUK Code OK | PUK Code entered is correct |
| GSM:SIM OK | SIM Card in place |
| GSM:SIM trouble | SIM card missing or not properly sited |
| H.Temp rst Z=xx | High temperature alert restored from zone XX defined as a temperature detector |
| High Temp. Z=xx | High temperature alert from zone XX defined as a temperature detector |
| HOM:P=y C=zz | Partition Y is armed in Stay mode by user ZZ |
| HOME:P=y KF=zz | Partition Y is home armed using keyfob ZZ |
| HU.ReinstateP=y | Hold-Up Reinstatement in partition y |
| IPC:DHCP error | Failed to acquire an IP address from the DHCP server |
| IPC:DHCP OK | Succeeded to acquire an IP address from the DHCP server |
| IPC: downld err | IP Card generated a download error |
| IPC: download OK | IP Card download was OK |
| IPC: evnt log ER | IP Card generated an event log error |
| IPC: evnt log OK | IP Card event log generated no error |
| IPC: hardware OK | IP Card hardware is OK |
| IPC: hardware error | IP Card generated a hardware error |
| IPC: mail error | IP Card generated a mail error |
| IPC: mail OK | IP Card mail is OK |
| IPC:MS=y error | IP Card Monitoring station ID=Y generated an error |
| IPC:MS=y OK | IP Card Monitoring station ID=Y was OK |
| IPC: Network err | Failed to connect to IP network |
| IPC: Network OK | Successful connection to IP network |
| IPC:NTP error | Failed to acquire time data from the time server |
| IPC:NTP ok | Succeeded to acquire time data from the time server |
| IPC: upgrade err | The IP Card upgrade generated an error |
| IPC: upgrade OK | The IP Card upgrade was OK |
| IR restore Z=xx | Trouble restore in the IR channel of Bus zone XX |
| IR trouble Z=xx | Trouble in the IR channel of Bus zone XXX |
| JAMM. WME=y | Jamming in wireless module expander ID=Y |
| KeyBox Open Zxx | Zone XX of type key box is open |
| KeyBox Rst Z=xx | Zone XX of type key box is restored |
| KP=$ Lost | Keypad is lost |
| KP=$ Lost Rs | Lost keypad has been restored |
| KP=$ LOW BAT. | Low Battery trouble for the keypad |
| KSW A: Z=xx P=Y | Group A in partition Y is armed by keyswitch zone XX |
| KSW ARM:Z=xxP=Y | Partition Y is armed by keyswitch zone XX |
| KSW B: Z=xx P=Y | Group B in partition Y is armed by keyswitch zone XX |
| KSW C: Z=xx P=Y | Group C in partition Y is armed by keyswitch zone XX |
| KSW D: Z=xx P=Y | Group D in partition Y is armed by keyswitch zone XX |
| KSW DIS:Z=xxP=Y | Partition Y is disarmed by keyswitch zone XX |
| LB rstr KF=yy | Low battery trouble restore from wireless remote control YY |
| L.Temp rst Z=xx | Low temperature alert restored from zone XX defined as a temperature detector |
| Low Bat KF=xx | Low battery restore from wireless zone XX |
| Lost Z=xx | Wireless zone lost, zone no. XX |
| Low Bat PS=y | Low battery trouble from power supply ID=Y |
| Low Bat RS Z=xx | Low battery trouble restored from wireless zone no. XX |
| Low Bat Siren=y | Low battery trouble from siren ID=Y |
| Low bat Z=xx | Low battery trouble from wireless zone no. XX |
| Low Temp. Z=xx | Low temperature alert from zone XX defined as a temperature detector |
| LRT:ACCOUNT ERR | The long range transmitter account generates an error |
| LRT:ACCOUNT OK | The long range transmitter account is OK |
| LRT:HARDWARE OK | The long range transmitter hardware is OK |
| LRT:HARDWRE ERR | The long range transmitter hardware generates an error |
| LRT:LOW BAT | The long range transmitter is experiencing low battery trouble. |
| LRT:LOW BAT OK | The long range transmitter low battery in not troubled |
| LRT:NO BAT | The long range transmitter is experiencing no battery |
| LRT:NO BAT OK | The long range transmitter no battery is not troubling. |
| LRT:SYSTEM ERR | The long range transmitter is generating a system error. |
| LRT:SYSTEM OK | The long range transmitter system status is OK |
| Main Bell RS | Bell trouble restore in Main Panel |
| Main:AC Rstr | AC power restore on main panel |
| Main Aux Rst | Restore of Aux power on Main Panel |
| Main: Bat Rst | Low battery trouble restore from the main panel |
| Main: Low AC | Loss of AC power from the main panel |
| Main: Low Bat | Low battery trouble from the main panel |
| Main:No aux | Failure in the Aux power on Main Panel |
| Main:No bell | Bell trouble in Main Panel |
| Masked Z=XX | Anti mask trouble from zone XX |
| MS=y call error | Communication fail trouble to MS phone no. Y |
| MS=y restore | Communication fail trouble restore to MS phone no. Y |
| MW restore z=xx | Trouble restore in the MW channel of BUZ zone XX |
| MW trouble z=xx | Trouble in the MW channel of BUZ zone XX |
| Next arm:p=y | Partition Y armed in Next Arm mode |
| Next dis:p=y | Partition Y disarmed in Next Disarm mode |
| No aux ps=y | Failure in the Aux power on power supply ID=X |
| No aux ze=y | Failure in the S. Aux power on zone expander Y |
| No bell ps=y | Bell trouble in power supply ID=Y |
| No Com IPC | Communication failure between the LightSYS™2 and IP card |
| No com kp=y | Communication failure between the LightSYS™2 and keypad ID=Y |
| No com kr=y | Communication failure between the LightSYS™2 and Key Reader ID=Y |
| No com voice | Communication failure between the LightSYS™2 and the Advanced Voice module |
| No com WME=y | Communication failure between the LightSYS™2 and wireless module expander ID=Y |
| No comm Siren=y | Communication failure between the LightSYS™2 and bus zone expander ID=Y |
| No comm PS=y | Communication failure between the LightSYS™2 and power supply Y |
| No comm uo=y | Bus communication failure with UO expander ID=Y |
| No comm z=xx | Bus communication failure with Bus zone XX |
| No comm ze=y | Bus communication failure with zone expander ID=Y |
| No comm. GSM | No communication between the GSM/GPRS/3G/4G Module and the LightSYS™2 |
| No comm. LRT | No communication between the long range transmitter and the LightSYS™2 |
| No fault z=xx | Trouble restore in zone XX (TEOL zone or Bus zone input TEOL) |
| No jam wme=y | Jamming restore on wireless module expander ID=Y |
| No mask z=xx | Anti mask trouble restore from zone XX |
| Nxt hom:p=y | Partition Y is armed in Next Stay mode |
| Overld rs ps=y | Overload restore from 3A SMPS Y |
| Overload ps=y | Overload from 3A SMPS Y |
| Panic Z=xx | Panic alarm from zone no. XX |
| Phone fail | If the phone line is cut or the DC level is under 1V |
| Phone restore | Phone line trouble restore |
| PIR rstr Z=xx | PIR trouble restore from Bus zone XX |
| PIR trbl Z=xx | PIR trouble from Bus zone XX |
| Police KF=yy | Police (panic) alarm from remote control YY |
| Police KP=y | Police (panic) alarm from keypad Y |
| POT.LD RS PS=y | Potential overload restore of 3A SMPS joined by 3A SMPS Y |
| POT.OVRLD PS=y | Potential overload of SMPS joined by 3A SMPS Y |
| PROX FAIL S=y | Fail in the proximity anti approach protection in siren Y |
| PROX OK SIREN=y | Proximity anti approach protection is restored in siren Y |
| PROX TMP RS S=y | Proximity tamper restore from siren ID =Y |
| PRX TMP SIREN=y | Proximity tamper from approaching siren ID=Y |
| PS=yOVER.R C=zz | Overload in 3A SMPS Y. Reset by user ZZ |
| Radio l.bat S=y | Radio low battery trouble from siren Y |
| Radiol.bat rS=y | Radio low battery restore from siren Y |
| Remote Prog | The system has been programmed from the configuration software |
| Reset: P=y C=zz | Reset of partition ID=Y and user ID=ZZ |
| Restore Z=xx | Alarm restore in zone no. XX |
| Rmt Arm:P=y | Partition Y armed from the configuration software |
| Rmt Dis:P=y | Partition Y disarmed from the configuration software |
| RMT Hom:P=y | Partition Y armed in Stay mode from the CS software |
| SEISMIC OK Z=xx | Seismic Test in Bus zone XX has been restored |
| SEISMIC TR Z=xx | Seismic Test rouble in Bus zone XX |
| Self Fail Z=xx | Bus zone XX has failed the Self Test |
| Self OK Z=xx | Self Test in Bus zone XX has been restored |
| Siren=$ Lost | Siren is regarded as lost following supervision test |
| Siren=$ Lost Rs | The LightSYS™2 received a signal from siren after it has been regarded as lost |
| Soak fail Z=xx | Zone XX has failed in the soak test |
| Spec. KP=y | Special alarm from the from wireless keypad Y |
| Spkr l.bat S=y | Speaker low battery trouble from siren Y |
| Spkr l.batrsS=y | Speaker low battery restore from siren Y |
| Start exit P=y | Exit time started in partition Y |
| STU=Y Line Rstr | STU adapter Y line restoration |
| STU=Y Line Trbl | STU adapter Y line trouble |
| STU=Y R.RESET | STU adapter Y line restoration reset |
| Tamper BZE=y | Tamper alarm from bus zone expander ID=Y |
| Tamper Kp=y | Tamper alarm from keypad ID=Y |
| Tamper LRT | Tamper alarm from long range transmitter |
| Tamper PS=y | Tamper alarm from power supply Y |
| Tamper Siren=y | Tamper alarm from wireless siren Y |
| Tamper UO=y | Tamper alarm from utility output expander Y |
| Tamper Voice | Tamper alarm from Advanced Voice module |
| Tamper WME=y | Tamper alarm from wireless module expander Y |
| Tamper ZE=y | Tamper alarm in zone expander ID=X |
| Tamper Zn=xx | Tamper alarm from zone no. XX |
| Tech alarm Z=xx | Alarm from zone XX defined as Technical |
| Tech rstr Z=xx | Alarm restored from zone XX defined as Technical |
| TMP RS BZE=y | Tamper alarm restore from bus zone expander ID=Y |
| TMP RS KP=y | Keypad tamper restore |
| TMP RS PS=y | Tamper alarm restore from power supply expander ID=Y |
| TMP RS UO=y | Tamper alarm restore from UO expander ID=Y |
| TMP RS VOICE | Tamper alarm restore from Advanced Voice module |
| TMP RS WME=y | Tamper alarm restore from wireless module expander ID=Y |
| TMP RS ZE=y | Tamper alarm restore in zone expander ID=Y |
| TMP RS ZN=xx | Tamper alarm restore on zone XX |
| TMP RST LRT | Long Range transmitter tamper alarm reset |
| Tmp rst Siren=y | Tamper alarm restore from wireless siren Y |
| Unbyp Box+Bell | Box + Bell reinstated from bypass |
| Unbyps Zn=xx | Zone no. XX is reinstated from bypass |
| Unknown evnt | Unknown event alert |
| UO REST ZN=xx | A zone defined as “UO Trigger” has been deactivated |
| UO TRIG ZN=xx | A zone defined as “UO Trigger” has been activated |
| VOC:COMM OK | Bus communication OK with Voice Module |
| VOC:NO COMM | Bus communication failure with the Voice Module |
| Water Alrm Zn=xx | Flood alarm from zone no. XX |
| Water rstr Z=xx | Flood alarm restore on zone no. XX |
| WEAK BAT PS=y | Weak battery indication joined by 3A SMPS Y |
| Weak Bat RS PS=y | Weak battery restore indication joined by 3A SMPS Y |
| Z=xx aut bad | Zone self-test failed, zone no. XX |
| Z=xx auto ok | Zone self-test OK, zone no. XX |
### 11. Compliance Standards Met
* EN50131-1, EN50131-3 Grade 2
* EN50130-5 Environmental class II
* EN50131-6 Type A, EN50136-2 and EN50131-10
* UK: BS 8243:2010, PD6662:2017, ACPO (Police)
* ATS 5 for IP/GPRS; ATS 2 for PSTN
* ATS EN50136-1 Category C (PSTN, GSM, IP transmission paths in parallel)
* Signaling security: - Substitution security S2, - Information security I3
* EN50136-1:2012
* EN50136-1-2:2013
* EN50136-10:2014
* FCC Part 15 Class B digital device
* Directive 2014/30/EU (EMC Compliance)
### 12. Library Voice Messages (Appendix D)
| Code | Word |
|---|---|
| 001 | (Custom) |
| 002 | (Custom) |
| 003 | (Custom) |
| 004 | (Custom) |
| 005 | (Custom) |
| 006 | A |
| 007 | Above |
| 008 | Air conditioner |
| 009 | An |
| 010 | And |
| 011 | Apartment |
| 012 | Area |
| 013 | At |
| 014 | Attic |
| 015 | Baby's room |
| 016 | Back |
| 017 | Balcony |
| 018 | Basement |
| 019 | Bathroom |
| 020 | Bedroom |
| 021 | Before |
| 022 | Behind |
| 023 | Bottom |
| 024 | Boy's room |
| 025 | By |
| 026 | Camera |
| 027 | Ceiling |
| 028 | Cellar |
| 029 | Central |
| 030 | Children |
| 031 | Cleaner |
| 032 | CO |
| 033 | Computer room |
| 034 | Contact |
| 035 | Control |
| 036 | Corner |
| 037 | Curtain |
| 038 | Desk |
| 039 | Detector |
| 040 | Device |
| 041 | Dining |
| 042 | Door |
| 043 | Down |
| 044 | Downstairs |
| 045 | Dressing |
| 046 | East |
| 047 | Elevator |
| 048 | Emergency |
| 049 | Entrance |
| 050 | Entry |
| 051 | Executive |
| 052 | Exit |
| 053 | External |
| 054 | Family |
| 055 | Fence |
| 056 | Fire |
| 057 | First |
| 058 | Flood |
| 059 | Floor |
| 060 | For |
| 061 | Foyer |
| 062 | Front |
| 063 | Game |
| 064 | Garage |
| 065 | Garden |
| 066 | Gas |
| 067 | Gate |
| 068 | Girl's room |
| 069 | Glass |
| 070 | Guest |
| 071 | Hallway |
| 072 | High |
| 073 | In |
| 074 | Indoor |
| 075 | Inside |
| 076 | Internal |
| 077 | Is |
| 078 | Keyfob |
| 079 | Kitchen |
| 080 | Landing |
| 081 | Left |
| 082 | Library |
| 083 | Light |
| 084 | Living |
| 085 | Lobby |
| 086 | Low |
| 087 | Macro |
| 088 | Magnet |
| 089 | Main |
| 090 | Master |
| 091 | Middle |
| 092 | Motion |
| 093 | Near |
| 094 | New |
| 095 | North |
| 096 | Nursery |
| 097 | Of |
| 098 | Office |
| 099 | On |
| 100 | Outdoor |
| 101 | Output |
| 102 | Outside |
| 103 | Panic |
| 104 | Partition |
| 105 | Passage |
| 106 | Patio |
| 107 | Perimeter |
| 108 | Pool |
| 109 | Rear |
| 110 | Reception |
| 111 | Refrigerator |
| 112 | Relay |
| 113 | Right |
| 114 | Roof |
| 115 | Room |
| 116 | Safe |
| 117 | Safety |
| 118 | Second |
| 119 | Sensor |
| 120 | Shock |
| 121 | Shop |
| 122 | Shutter |
| 123 | Side |
| 124 | Siren |
| 125 | Site |
| 126 | Smoke |
| 127 | South |
| 128 | Sprinkler |
| 129 | Stairs |
| 130 | Store |
| 131 | Student room |
| 132 | Study |
| 133 | Technical |
| 134 | Temperature |
| 135 | Third |
| 136 | To |
| 137 | Top |
| 138 | TV |
| 139 | Under |
| 140 | Up |
| 141 | Upstairs |
| 142 | Video camera |
| 143 | Wall |
| 144 | Warehouse |
| 145 | Washroom |
| 146 | West |
| 147 | Window |
| 148 | Yard |
| 149 | Zone |
| 150 | 0 |
| 151 | 1 |
| 152 | 2 |
| 153 | 3 |
| 154 | 4 |
| 155 | 5 |
| 156 | 6 |
| 157 | 7 |
| 158 | 8 |
| 159 | 9 |
### 13. Remote Software Upgrade (Appendix I)
**Step 1: Set parameters for IP/GPRS/3G/4G Communication**
1. Define all parameters required to set GPRS/3G/4G or IP communication as explained in the Communication section of the LightSYS™2 (See page 152).
**Step 2: Enter the location of the upgrade file**
1. In the `System` menu, `Firmware Upgrade` submenu, enter the relevant information regarding the location of the upgrade file:
* `Server IP`: Enter the IP address of the router/gateway where the upgrade file is located. Default: `firmware.riscogroup.com`
* `Port`: Enter the port on the router/gateway where the upgrade file is located. Default: `00080`
* `File Name`: Enter the upgrade file name. Default: `CMD.TXT`
**Step 3: Activate Remote Upgrade from the Keypad**
1. From the installer main programming menu select `System` menu, `Firmware Upgrade` submenu `Download File` option.
2. Select the upgrade communication path as follows:
* Via IP
* Via GPRS/3G/4G
3. Once selected, the LightSYS™2 will start downloading the required files. The upgrade procedure may take approximately 40 minutes to complete. This will vary according to whether the procedure is performed via GPRS/3G/4G or IP. Once the files are downloaded the panel automatically starts with the upgrade procedure of the units connected to the system.
**Step 4: Verify that upgrade has been successful**
1. From the main display press `OK` and enter the installer code followed by `OK`.
2. Using the arrows scroll to `Maintenance` > `Diagnostics` > `Main panel` > `Version`. The upgraded version of the main panel will appear.
3. To view the other accessories version navigate to the required menus under the `Maintenance` > `Diagnostics` menu.
### 14. Warranty Information
RISCO Ltd. guarantees hardware products to be free from defects in materials and workmanship for 24 months from the date of delivery. This warranty covers products purchased new within the country of original purchase. It is solely for customers who purchased directly from RISCO or an authorized distributor. RISCO does not warrant to consumers directly. Remedies include repair or replacement of defective products. Return Material Authorization (RMA) is required for returns. The warranty does not cover improper operation, installation, neglect, abuse, willful damage, abnormal working conditions, failure to follow instructions, misuse, alteration, modification, unauthorized repairs, combination with other products, damage from external factors (power failure, surges), or failures due to third-party communication services (GSM interruptions, internet outage, telephony failure). Batteries are explicitly excluded from the warranty. The warranty does not apply to software or third-party software. RISCO does not guarantee that the product will prevent personal injury or property loss, or provide adequate warning in all cases. RISCO is not liable for lost revenues, profits, punitive damages, or any other indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages.
| Model | Zones | Wireless Devices | Application |
|---|---|---|---|
| Premier Elite 48 | 48 zones | Up to 32 wireless | Small commercial |
| Premier Elite 48-W | 48 zones | Up to 48 Ricochet | Small commercial wireless |
| Premier Elite 88 | 88 zones | Up to 64 | Commercial |
| Premier Elite 168 | 168 zones | Up to 128 | Large commercial |
| Premier Elite 640 | 640 zones | Up to 512 | Large commercial / industrial |
| Premier Elite 640+ | 640 zones | Up to 512 | High security / networked |
| Code Type | Default Value | Access Level |
|---|---|---|
| Engineer Code | 1234 | Full programming access |
| Master Code | 5678 | User management, arm/disarm |
| User Code 1 | 1234 | Arm/disarm only |
| Zone Type | Description |
|---|---|
| Entry/Exit 1 | Main entry route — uses Entry Delay 1 |
| Entry/Exit 2 | Secondary entry route — uses Entry Delay 2 |
| Guard | Delayed zone — allows guard to walk through |
| Guard Access | Guard access zone with keyswitch |
| 24-Hour Audible | Always active — audible alarm |
| 24-Hour Silent | Always active — silent alarm to ARC |
| PA Audible | Personal attack — audible |
| PA Silent | Personal attack — silent |
| Fire | Fire detection input |
| Tamper | Anti-tamper circuit |
| Alarm Confirmation | Sequential confirmation required |
| Intruder | Standard alarm zone |
| Perimeter | Active during perimeter arm |
| Keyswitch Arm | External arm via key switch |
| Keyswitch Disarm | External disarm via key switch |
| Code / Display | Description | Likely Cause | Action |
|---|---|---|---|
| Zone Fault | Zone open circuit or device fault | Wiring break, device failure | Check wiring and device. Measure resistance. |
| Zone Tamper | Tamper circuit activated | Lid removed, cable cut | Inspect device and cabling. |
| Mains Fail | 230V AC supply lost | Power cut, blown fuse | Check mains supply and fuses. |
| Battery Low | Battery voltage below threshold | Battery end of life | Measure battery. Replace if below 11V. |
| Battery Fail | Battery not detected | Battery disconnected, fuse blown | Check battery connections and fuse. |
| Comms Fail | Signalling path failure | IP/PSTN fault, ARC unreachable | Check IP/PSTN connectivity and ARC settings. |
| Keypad Fault | Keypad not responding | RS-485 bus fault, address conflict | Check RS-485 bus and keypad address. |
| Wireless Fault | Wireless device not responding | Device battery flat, signal loss | Check device battery and signal strength. |
| Service Due | Service interval reached | Service timer expired | Carry out service. Reset timer in engineer menu. |
| Engineer Reset | Panel requires engineer reset after alarm | Confirmed alarm | Use engineer code or contact ARC for anti-code. |
| Configuration | Resistor | Normal | Alarm | Tamper |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| EOL | 4k7Ω | 4,700Ω | <500Ω | Open (>10kΩ) |
| DEOL | 2 × 4k7Ω | 4,700Ω outer | <500Ω | Open |
| Terminal | Function | Notes |
|---|---|---|
| +12V | Auxiliary power output | 500mA max |
| 0V | Common ground | Must be continuous |
| Z1–Z48 | Zone inputs | EOL or DEOL resistors required |
| BELL+ | Bell/siren positive | Supervised output |
| BELL− | Bell/siren negative | Via tamper capacitor |
| D+ | RS-485 data positive | Twisted pair with D− |
| D− | RS-485 data negative | Twisted pair with D+ |
=== WEB RESEARCH: texecom ===
# Texecom Premier Elite Technical Reference
## Full Raw Technical Content
Installation Manual
Premier Elite Series
INS176-15
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Contents
Premier Elite Series Installation Manual
Contents
Contents .................................................................... 2
1. System Overview.................................................. 4
System Architecture ............................................................ 4
Commissioning ..................................................................48
Trouble-Shooting ............................................................... 48
Reset and Service Messages ............................................ 50
Control Panel ....................................................................... 4
5. Programming the Control Panel ....................... 51
Remote Keypads ................................................................. 5
Introduction ........................................................................ 51
Zone Expanders................................................................... 6
Copying and Pasting .......................................................... 53
Output Expanders................................................................ 6
Log Off Engineer ................................................................ 53
Communicators ................................................................... 6
Resetting the Engineers Code (User 00) .......................... 53
Other Devices ...................................................................... 6
5.1 Zone Setup ........................................................ 54
3. Installation ............................................................ 7
Ricochet Enabled Devices V2.00 - V2.09 .......................... 55
Installation Sequence .......................................................... 7
Ricochet Enabled Devices V2.10 & Later .......................... 56
Power Supply Ratings ....................................................... 18
Learning Devices................................................................ 56
Connecting AC Mains........................................................ 19
Auto Zone Type & Area ...................................................... 56
Connecting Batteries......................................................... 19
Deleting Devices ................................................................ 56
EN50131 Battery Installation (Polymer Panels) ............... 19
Zone Types ......................................................................... 57
Connecting Devices to the Network ................................. 20
Zone Attributes 1 ................................................................ 58
Remote Keypads ............................................................... 23
Zone Attributes 2 ................................................................ 58
8XP-W & 32XP-W V3.xx>................................................... 24
Attributes for Moment or Latch Keys ................................ 59
8XP-W & 32XP-W V2.xx>................................................... 24
Attributes for Custom Zones ............................................. 59
System Design Considerations ........................................ 24
Custom Zones Seismic Attributes* ................................... 59
Ricochet V2 & V3 Expander Addressing .......................... 25
Zone Areas 12/24/48/88/168 .............................................. 59
8XE Zone Expander (24 Only) ........................................... 26
Zone Areas 640 ..................................................................59
8XP Zone Expander ........................................................... 26
Zone Text ............................................................................ 59
Star and Daisy Jumper Option.......................................... 27
Zone Chime ........................................................................ 60
iProx Module ...................................................................... 28\n\nRemote Test Enable ........................................................... 60\n\n60iXD Zone Expander ........................................................ 28\n\nZone Wiring ........................................................................ 60\n\nOP16 Output Expander ..................................................... 28\n\nZone Groups ....................................................................... 60\n\nRM8 Relay Module ............................................................ 29\n\nDD 243 ................................................................................ 60\n\nZone and Output Numbering 24/48/88/168 ...................... 30\n\n5.2 Area Programming ........................................... 61\n\nZone and Output Numbering 640 ..................................... 31\n\nTimers ................................................................................. 61\n\nZone Connections ............................................................. 32\n60IXD Zone Expander ........................................................ 33\nAuxiliary/Fault Connections .............................................. 34\nSpeaker Connections ........................................................ 34\nExternal Sounder Connections ......................................... 34\nPanel Outputs .................................................................... 35\nDigicom Outputs 1 - 8........................................................ 35\n2-Wire Smoke Detector ..................................................... 36\nExpander Auxiliary Input ................................................... 36\nPlug-on Communicators ................................................... 37\nSpeech Module .................................................................. 38\nCom GSM ........................................................................... 39\nPremier Elite ComGSM Layout ......................................... 39\nAerial Siting ....................................................................... 40\nInstallation ......................................................................... 40\nPanel Configuration........................................................... 40\nUsing the SMS Control Commands .................................. 41\nWhat will be sent in the Text Message ............................. 41\nAV Module .......................................................................... 42\nComIP Module ................................................................... 42\nCommissioning.................................................................. 43\nComWiFi............................................................................. 43\n\nArming Modes .................................................................... 62\nArea Arm Suites 24/48/88/168 ........................................... 62\nArea Arm Suites 640 .......................................................... 63\nArea Suite Text ................................................................... 63\nSuite Arm Modes ................................................................ 64\nArea Options 24/48/88/168 ................................................ 64\nArea Options 640................................................................ 64\nTime Arm Area .................................................................... 68\nArea Text............................................................................. 68\n\n5.3 Global Options .................................................. 69\nSystem Timers .................................................................... 69\nSystem Config. ................................................................... 70\nSystem Options ..................................................................74\nMonitor Hardware .............................................................. 75\nControl Timers.................................................................... 75\nSystem Text ........................................................................ 76\nPart Arm Text ...................................................................... 76\nHoliday Dates ..................................................................... 77\nSpeaker Tones ................................................................... 77\nPC Output Text ................................................................... 78\nCustom O/P Text ................................................................ 78\n\nUSB-Com ........................................................................... 47\n\n5.4 Keypad Setup ................................................... 79\n\nPC-Com .............................................................................. 47\n\nKeypad Areas ..................................................................... 80\n\nConnecting a Computer .................................................... 47\n\nKeypad Zone Mapping ....................................................... 80\n\nConnecting a Printer ......................................................... 47\n\nKeypad Options..................................................................80\n\n4. Commissioning and Troubleshooting ............. 48\n\nKeypad Speaker Volume.................................................... 80\n\n2\n\nINS176-15\n\n\fPremier Elite Series Installation Manual\n\nContents\n\nKeypad Sounder Options ..................................................80\n\nUser Functions and Options............................................ 125\n\n5.5 Expander Setup ................................................ 81\n\nUser Options 1 ................................................................. 126\n\nExpander Areas ..................................................................82\nExpander Location Text .....................................................82\nExpander Auxiliary Input....................................................82\nExpander Speaker Volume ................................................82\nExpander Sounder Options ...............................................82\n\n5.6 System Outputs ................................................ 83\n\nUser Options 2 ................................................................. 126\nUser Config. ..................................................................... 126\nUser Time Lock ................................................................ 126\nUser Name Text ................................................................ 127\nDoor Control..................................................................... 127\nAdding Tags ..................................................................... 127\nDeleting Users .................................................................. 127\n\nAvailable Outputs ...............................................................84\n\nAdding SmartKey™ .......................................................... 127\n\nProgramming Outputs........................................................84\n\n5.9 Engineer Utilities ............................................ 128\n\nOutput Group - Not Used ...................................................84\nOutput Group - System ......................................................84\nOutput Group - Area ...........................................................86\nOutput Group - Zone ..........................................................88\nOutput Group - User Code Entered ...................................88\nOutput Group - Control Timer............................................88\nOutput Group - PC Control ................................................88\nOutput Group - Door Control .............................................88\nOutput Attributes ................................................................88\nX-10 Outputs .......................................................................89\nCustom Outputs .................................................................89\nZone Group Outputs ..........................................................89\n\n5.7 UDL/Digi Options.............................................. 90\n\nView Event Log ................................................................. 128\nDo Bell Test ...................................................................... 131\nDo Walk Test 24/48/88/168 .............................................. 131\nDo Walk Test 640 ............................................................. 132\nView Zone Status ............................................................. 132\nDo System Tests .............................................................. 133\nConfirm Devices............................................................... 133\nView RKP Status............................................................... 134\nView Exp. Status............................................................... 134\nSet System Time .............................................................. 134\nSet System Date ............................................................... 134\nChange Eng. Code ........................................................... 135\nAdjust Volumes ................................................................ 135\n\nReset Digi ...........................................................................90\n\nDefault NVM Data ............................................................. 135\n\nStart Test Call .....................................................................90\n\nLocation Text .................................................................... 135\n\nMSN/Pre-Dial No. ...............................................................90\n\nPrint Log Data .................................................................. 136\n\nProgram Digi ......................................................................91\n\nSoak Test Areas 24/48/88/168 ......................................... 136\n\nUPnP ......................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.\n\nSoak Test Areas 640 ........................................................ 136\n\nEnable Texecom Connect App ..........................................95\n\nView iD Data ..................................................................... 137\n\nDigi Options ........................................................................95\n\nConfigure Radio ............................................................... 137\n\nArea Accounts 12/24/48/88/168 .........................................96\n\nRicochet Diagnostics (V2 Only) ...................................... 138\n\nArea Accounts 640 .............................................................96\n\nSignalling Test ................................................................. 140\n\nUDL Options .......................................................................97\n\nEncryption Key V3.01 & V3.02 only ................................. 141\n\nSetup Modules ...................................................................99\n\n5.10 Programming Part Arms .............................. 142\n\nCom Port Setup ................................................................ 101\nPremier Elite ComIP ......................................................... 102\n\nAlter Part Arms ................................................................. 142\n\nControl Panel Programming ............................................ 103\n\n5.11 Ricochet Learn ............................................. 143\n\nWintex setup ..................................................................... 103\n\nLearning Devices ............................................................. 143\n\nTexecom mobile app\'s (Not Connect) ............................. 103\n\nAccess the Learn Menu using the Omit “Hot” key ......... 143\n\nRemote connection & Push Notifications ....................... 104\n\nARC Settings & Reporting Options ................................. 104\n\nPremier Elite ComWiFi ..................................................... 105\n\nPanel Settings .................................................................. 107\n\nPort Forwarding ................................................................ 108\n\nWintex setup ..................................................................... 108\n\nTexecom Mobile App\'s ..................................................... 108\n\nARC Settings & Reporting Options ................................. 109\n\nOptional Additional Panel Settings ................................. 109\n\nDefaulting the Com WiFi .................................................. 110\n\nChanging the ComWiFi Language................................... 110\n\nDualCom® Inside (48 Only) .............................................. 111\n\nEMIZON 21 TCD ............................................................... 112\n\nWebWayOne ..................................................................... 113\n\nChiron IRIS ....................................................................... 115\n\nZone Alarm Reporting Codes .......................................... 116\n\n5.8 Setup Users .................................................... 123\n\nDefault User Codes .......................................................... 124\n\nProgramming New Users ................................................. 124\n\nUser Types ........................................................................ 124\n\nUser Functions and Options ............................................ 125\n\nUser Options 1 ................................................................. 126\n\nUser Options 2 ................................................................. 126\nUser Config. ..................................................................... 126\nUser Time Lock ................................................................ 126\nUser Name Text ................................................................ 127\nDoor Control..................................................................... 127\nAdding Tags ..................................................................... 127\nDeleting Users .................................................................. 127\n\nAdding SmartKey™ .......................................................... 127\n\n5.9 Engineer Utilities ............................................ 128\n\nView Event Log ................................................................. 128\nDo Bell Test ...................................................................... 131\nDo Walk Test 24/48/88/168 .............................................. 131\nDo Walk Test 640 ............................................................. 132\nView Zone Status ............................................................. 132\nDo System Tests .............................................................. 133\nConfirm Devices............................................................... 133\nView RKP Status............................................................... 134\nView Exp. Status............................................................... 134\nSet System Time .............................................................. 134\nSet System Date ............................................................... 134\nChange Eng. Code ........................................................... 135\nAdjust Volumes ................................................................ 135\n\nDefault NVM Data ............................................................. 135\n\nLocation Text .................................................................... 135\n\nPrint Log Data .................................................................. 136\n\nSoak Test Areas 24/48/88/168 ......................................... 136\n\nSoak Test Areas 640 ........................................................ 136\n\nView iD Data ..................................................................... 137\n\nConfigure Radio ............................................................... 137\n\nRicochet Diagnostics (V2 Only) ...................................... 138\n\nSignalling Test ................................................................. 140\n\nEncryption Key V3.01 & V3.02 only ................................. 141\n\n5.10 Programming Part Arms .............................. 142\n\nAlter Part Arms ................................................................. 142\n\n5.11 Ricochet Learn ............................................. 143\n\nLearning Devices ............................................................. 143\n\nAccess the Learn Menu using the Omit “Hot” key ......... 143\n\n5.12 Wintex ............................................................. 144\n\nWintex Connection .......................................................... 144\n\nWintex Configuration ....................................................... 144\n\n5.13 SmartCom ........................................................ 145\n\nSmartCom Connection .................................................... 145\n\nSmartCom Configuration ................................................. 145\n\n6. Technical Specifications ................................ 146\n\nControl Panels ................................................................... 146\n\nKeypads ............................................................................ 147\n\nExpanders ......................................................................... 148\n\nCommunicators ................................................................ 149\n\n7. Compliance ........................................................ 150\n\nDeclaration of Conformity ................................................ 150\n\n8. Index .................................................................... 151\n\n\fPremier Elite Series Master User Guide\nINS177-9\n\n\fContents\n\nPremier Elite Series Master User Guide\n\nContents\nContents .................................................................... 2\n1. System Overview.................................................. 4\nSystem Architecture ............................................................ 4\n\nControl Panel ....................................................................... 4\n\nRemote Keypads ................................................................. 5\n\nZone Expanders................................................................... 6\n\nOutput Expanders................................................................ 6\n\nCommunicators ................................................................... 6\n\nOther Devices ...................................................................... 6\n\n2. Using the System ................................................... 7\n\nArming the System .............................................................. 7\n\nDisarming the System ........................................................ 10\n\nPart Arming the System ..................................................... 11\n\nArming a Part Arm Suite .................................................... 12\n\nOmitting Zones ................................................................... 13\n\nChime On/Off ...................................................................... 14\n\nView Event Log ................................................................. 14\n\nResetting the System ........................................................ 15\n\nService Messages .............................................................. 15\n\nEngineer Reset ................................................................... 16\n\nFault Finding ....................................................................... 16\n\n3. User Functions .................................................... 17\n\nUser Functions ................................................................... 17\n\nAdd User ............................................................................. 17\n\nDelete User ........................................................................ 18\n\nChange User Code ............................................................ 18\n\nChange User Options ........................................................ 19\n\nSet User Time Lock ........................................................... 19\n\nAdd Proximity Tag ............................................................. 20\n\nAdd SmartKey™ ................................................................ 20\n\nSet Keypad Areas .............................................................. 21\n\nSet Keypad Zone Mapping ................................................ 21\n\nSet Keypad Options .......................................................... 22\n\nSet Keypad Speaker Volume ............................................ 22\n\nSet Keypad Sounder Options ............................................ 22\n\nSet Expander Areas .......................................................... 23\n\nSet Expander Location Text .............................................. 23\n\nSet Expander Auxiliary Input ............................................ 23\n\nSet Expander Speaker Volume ........................................ 23\n\nSet Expander Sounder Options ........................................ 23\n\n4. Index .................................................................... 24\n\n\fWintex User Guide\nINS549-3\n\n\fContents\n\nWintex User Guide\n\nContents\nContents .................................................................... 2\n1. Introduction ............................................................ 3\nWintex Software ................................................................... 3\n\n2. Installation ............................................................ 4\nSystem Requirements .......................................................... 4\n\n3. Connecting to a Control Panel ............................ 5\nDirect Connection ................................................................ 5\n\nModem Connection .............................................................. 6\n\nIP Connection ....................................................................... 7\n\n4. Wintex Software Overview ................................... 8\nMain Screen .......................................................................... 8\n\n5. Programming ........................................................ 9\nPanel Programming .............................................................. 9\n\n6. Diagnostics .......................................................... 10\nEvent Log ............................................................................ 10\n\n7. Tools .................................................................... 11\nFirmware Update ................................................................ 11\n\n8. Reports ................................................................ 12\nSystem Report ................................................................... 12\n\n9. Index .................................................................... 13\n\n\f
=== WEB RESEARCH: premier elite ===
# Texecom Premier Elite Technical Reference
## Full Raw Technical Content
Installation Manual
Premier Elite Series
INS176-15
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Contents
Premier Elite Series Installation Manual
Contents
Contents .................................................................... 2
1. System Overview.................................................. 4
System Architecture ............................................................ 4
Commissioning ..................................................................48
Trouble-Shooting ............................................................... 48
Reset and Service Messages ............................................ 50
Control Panel ....................................................................... 4
5. Programming the Control Panel ....................... 51
Remote Keypads ................................................................. 5
Introduction ........................................................................ 51
Zone Expanders................................................................... 6
Copying and Pasting .......................................................... 53
Output Expanders................................................................ 6
Log Off Engineer ................................................................ 53
Communicators ................................................................... 6
Resetting the Engineers Code (User 00) .......................... 53
Other Devices ...................................................................... 6
5.1 Zone Setup ........................................................ 54
3. Installation ............................................................ 7
Ricochet Enabled Devices V2.00 - V2.09 .......................... 55
Installation Sequence .......................................................... 7
Ricochet Enabled Devices V2.10 & Later .......................... 56
Power Supply Ratings ....................................................... 18
Learning Devices................................................................ 56
Connecting AC Mains........................................................ 19
Auto Zone Type & Area ...................................................... 56
Connecting Batteries......................................................... 19
Deleting Devices ................................................................ 56
EN50131 Battery Installation (Polymer Panels) ............... 19
Zone Types ......................................................................... 57
Connecting Devices to the Network ................................. 20
Zone Attributes 1 ................................................................ 58
Remote Keypads ............................................................... 23
Zone Attributes 2 ................................................................ 58
8XP-W & 32XP-W V3.xx>................................................... 24
Attributes for Moment or Latch Keys ................................ 59
8XP-W & 32XP-W V2.xx>................................................... 24
Attributes for Custom Zones ............................................. 59
System Design Considerations ........................................ 24
Custom Zones Seismic Attributes* ................................... 59
Ricochet V2 & V3 Expander Addressing .......................... 25
Zone Areas 12/24/48/88/168 .............................................. 59
8XE Zone Expander (24 Only) ........................................... 26
Zone Areas 640 ..................................................................59
8XP Zone Expander ........................................................... 26
Zone Text ............................................................................ 59
Star and Daisy Jumper Option.......................................... 27
Zone Chime ........................................................................ 60
iProx Module ...................................................................... 28\n\nRemote Test Enable ........................................................... 60\n\n60iXD Zone Expander ........................................................ 28\n\nZone Wiring ........................................................................ 60\n\nOP16 Output Expander ..................................................... 28\n\nZone Groups ....................................................................... 60\n\nRM8 Relay Module ............................................................ 29\n\nDD 243 ................................................................................ 60\n\nZone and Output Numbering 24/48/88/168 ...................... 30\n\n5.2 Area Programming ........................................... 61\n\nZone and Output Numbering 640 ..................................... 31\n\nTimers ................................................................................. 61\n\nZone Connections ............................................................. 32\n60IXD Zone Expander ........................................................ 33\nAuxiliary/Fault Connections .............................................. 34\nSpeaker Connections ........................................................ 34\nExternal Sounder Connections ......................................... 34\nPanel Outputs .................................................................... 35\nDigicom Outputs 1 - 8........................................................ 35\n2-Wire Smoke Detector ..................................................... 36\nExpander Auxiliary Input ................................................... 36\nPlug-on Communicators ................................................... 37\nSpeech Module .................................................................. 38\nCom GSM ........................................................................... 39\nPremier Elite ComGSM Layout ......................................... 39\nAerial Siting ....................................................................... 40\nInstallation ......................................................................... 40\nPanel Configuration........................................................... 40\nUsing the SMS Control Commands .................................. 41\nWhat will be sent in the Text Message ............................. 41\nAV Module .......................................................................... 42\nComIP Module ................................................................... 42\nCommissioning.................................................................. 43\nComWiFi............................................................................. 43\n\nArming Modes .................................................................... 62\nArea Arm Suites 24/48/88/168 ........................................... 62\nArea Arm Suites 640 .......................................................... 63\nArea Suite Text ................................................................... 63\nSuite Arm Modes ................................................................ 64\nArea Options 24/48/88/168 ................................................ 64\nArea Options 640................................................................ 64\nTime Arm Area .................................................................... 68\nArea Text............................................................................. 68\n\n5.3 Global Options .................................................. 69\nSystem Timers .................................................................... 69\nSystem Config. ................................................................... 70\nSystem Options ..................................................................74\nMonitor Hardware .............................................................. 75\nControl Timers.................................................................... 75\nSystem Text ........................................................................ 76\nPart Arm Text ...................................................................... 76\nHoliday Dates ..................................................................... 77\nSpeaker Tones ................................................................... 77\nPC Output Text ................................................................... 78\nCustom O/P Text ................................................................ 78\n\nUSB-Com ........................................................................... 47\n\n5.4 Keypad Setup ................................................... 79\n\nPC-Com .............................................................................. 47\n\nKeypad Areas ..................................................................... 80\n\nConnecting a Computer .................................................... 47\n\nKeypad Zone Mapping ....................................................... 80\n\nConnecting a Printer ......................................................... 47\n\nKeypad Options..................................................................80\n\n4. Commissioning and Troubleshooting ............. 48\n\nKeypad Speaker Volume.................................................... 80\n\n2\n\nINS176-15\n\n\fPremier Elite Series Installation Manual\n\nContents\n\nKeypad Sounder Options ..................................................80\n\nUser Functions and Options............................................ 125\n\n5.5 Expander Setup ................................................ 81\n\nUser Options 1 ................................................................. 126\n\nExpander Areas ..................................................................82\nExpander Location Text .....................................................82\nExpander Auxiliary Input....................................................82\nExpander Speaker Volume ................................................82\nExpander Sounder Options ...............................................82\n\n5.6 System Outputs ................................................ 83\n\nUser Options 2 ................................................................. 126\nUser Config. ..................................................................... 126\nUser Time Lock ................................................................ 126\nUser Name Text ................................................................ 127\nDoor Control..................................................................... 127\nAdding Tags ..................................................................... 127\nDeleting Users .................................................................. 127\n\nAvailable Outputs ...............................................................84\n\nAdding SmartKey™ .......................................................... 127\n\nProgramming Outputs........................................................84\n\n5.9 Engineer Utilities ............................................ 128\n\nOutput Group - Not Used ...................................................84\nOutput Group - System ......................................................84\nOutput Group - Area ...........................................................86\nOutput Group - Zone ..........................................................88\nOutput Group - User Code Entered ...................................88\nOutput Group - Control Timer............................................88\nOutput Group - PC Control ................................................88\nOutput Group - Door Control .............................................88\nOutput Attributes ................................................................88\nX-10 Outputs .......................................................................89\nCustom Outputs .................................................................89\nZone Group Outputs ..........................................................89\n\n5.7 UDL/Digi Options.............................................. 90\n\nView Event Log ................................................................. 128\nDo Bell Test ...................................................................... 131\nDo Walk Test 24/48/88/168 .............................................. 131\nDo Walk Test 640 ............................................................. 132\nView Zone Status ............................................................. 132\nDo System Tests .............................................................. 133\nConfirm Devices............................................................... 133\nView RKP Status............................................................... 134\nView Exp. Status............................................................... 134\nSet System Time .............................................................. 134\nSet System Date ............................................................... 134\nChange Eng. Code ........................................................... 135\nAdjust Volumes ................................................................ 135\n\nReset Digi ...........................................................................90\n\nDefault NVM Data ............................................................. 135\n\nStart Test Call .....................................................................90\n\nLocation Text .................................................................... 135\n\nMSN/Pre-Dial No. ...............................................................90\n\nPrint Log Data .................................................................. 136\n\nProgram Digi ......................................................................91\n\nSoak Test Areas 24/48/88/168 ......................................... 136\n\nUPnP ......................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.\n\nSoak Test Areas 640 ........................................................ 136\n\nEnable Texecom Connect App ..........................................95\n\nView iD Data ..................................................................... 137\n\nDigi Options ........................................................................95\n\nConfigure Radio ............................................................... 137\n\nArea Accounts 12/24/48/88/168 .........................................96\n\nRicochet Diagnostics (V2 Only) ...................................... 138\n\nArea Accounts 640 .............................................................96\n\nSignalling Test ................................................................. 140\n\nUDL Options .......................................................................97\n\nEncryption Key V3.01 & V3.02 only ................................. 141\n\nSetup Modules ...................................................................99\n\n5.10 Programming Part Arms .............................. 142\n\nCom Port Setup ................................................................ 101\nPremier Elite ComIP ......................................................... 102\n\nAlter Part Arms ................................................................. 142\n\nControl Panel Programming ............................................ 103\n\n5.11 Ricochet Learn ............................................. 143\n\nWintex setup ..................................................................... 103\n\nLearning Devices ............................................................. 143\n\nTexecom mobile app\'s (Not Connect) ............................. 103\n\nAccess the Learn Menu using the Omit “Hot” key ......... 143\n\nRemote connection & Push Notifications ....................... 104\n\nARC Settings & Reporting Options ................................. 104\n\nPremier Elite ComWiFi ..................................................... 105\n\nPanel Settings .................................................................. 107\n\nPort Forwarding ................................................................ 108\n\nWintex setup ..................................................................... 108\n\nTexecom Mobile App\'s ..................................................... 108\n\nARC Settings & Reporting Options ................................. 109\n\nOptional Additional Panel Settings ................................. 109\n\nDefaulting the Com WiFi .................................................. 110\n\nChanging the ComWiFi Language................................... 110\n\nDualCom® Inside (48 Only) .............................................. 111\n\nEMIZON 21 TCD ............................................................... 112\n\nWebWayOne ..................................................................... 113\n\nChiron IRIS ....................................................................... 115\n\nZone Alarm Reporting Codes .......................................... 116\n\n5.8 Setup Users .................................................... 123\n\nDefault User Codes .......................................................... 124\n\nProgramming New Users ................................................. 124\n\nUser Types ........................................................................ 124\n\nUser Functions and Options ............................................ 125\n\nUser Options 1 ................................................................. 126\n\nUser Options 2 ................................................................. 126\nUser Config. ..................................................................... 126\nUser Time Lock ................................................................ 126\nUser Name Text ................................................................ 127\nDoor Control..................................................................... 127\nAdding Tags ..................................................................... 127\nDeleting Users .................................................................. 127\n\nAdding SmartKey™ .......................................................... 127\n\n5.9 Engineer Utilities ............................................ 128\n\nView Event Log ................................................................. 128\nDo Bell Test ...................................................................... 131\nDo Walk Test 24/48/88/168 .............................................. 131\nDo Walk Test 640 ............................................................. 132\nView Zone Status ............................................................. 132\nDo System Tests .............................................................. 133\nConfirm Devices............................................................... 133\nView RKP Status............................................................... 134\nView Exp. Status............................................................... 134\nSet System Time .............................................................. 134\nSet System Date ............................................................... 134\nChange Eng. Code ........................................................... 135\nAdjust Volumes ................................................................ 135\n\nDefault NVM Data ............................................................. 135\n\nLocation Text .................................................................... 135\n\nPrint Log Data .................................................................. 136\n\nSoak Test Areas 24/48/88/168 ......................................... 136\n\nSoak Test Areas 640 ........................................................ 136\n\nView iD Data ..................................................................... 137\n\nConfigure Radio ............................................................... 137\n\nRicochet Diagnostics (V2 Only) ...................................... 138\n\nSignalling Test ................................................................. 140\n\nEncryption Key V3.01 & V3.02 only ................................. 141\n\n5.10 Programming Part Arms .............................. 142\n\nAlter Part Arms ................................................................. 142\n\n5.11 Ricochet Learn ............................................. 143\n\nLearning Devices ............................................................. 143\n\nAccess the Learn Menu using the Omit “Hot” key ......... 143\n\n5.12 Wintex ............................................................. 144\n\nWintex Connection .......................................................... 144\n\nWintex Configuration ....................................................... 144\n\n5.13 SmartCom ........................................................ 145\n\nSmartCom Connection .................................................... 145\n\nSmartCom Configuration ................................................. 145\n\n6. Technical Specifications ................................ 146\n\nControl Panels ................................................................... 146\n\nKeypads ............................................................................ 147\n\nExpanders ......................................................................... 148\n\nCommunicators ................................................................ 149\n\n7. Compliance ........................................................ 150\n\nDeclaration of Conformity ................................................ 150\n\n8. Index .................................................................... 151\n\n\fPremier Elite Series Master User Guide\nINS177-9\n\n\fContents\n\nPremier Elite Series Master User Guide\n\nContents\nContents .................................................................... 2\n1. System Overview.................................................. 4\nSystem Architecture ............................................................ 4\n\nControl Panel ....................................................................... 4\n\nRemote Keypads ................................................................. 5\n\nZone Expanders................................................................... 6\n\nOutput Expanders................................................................ 6\n\nCommunicators ................................................................... 6\n\nOther Devices ...................................................................... 6\n\n2. Using the System ................................................... 7\n\nArming the System .............................................................. 7\n\nDisarming the System ........................................................ 10\n\nPart Arming the System ..................................................... 11\n\nArming a Part Arm Suite .................................................... 12\n\nOmitting Zones ................................................................... 13\n\nChime On/Off ...................................................................... 14\n\nView Event Log ................................................................. 14\n\nResetting the System ........................................................ 15\n\nService Messages .............................................................. 15\n\nEngineer Reset ................................................................... 16\n\nFault Finding ....................................................................... 16\n\n3. User Functions .................................................... 17\n\nUser Functions ................................................................... 17\n\nAdd User ............................................................................. 17\n\nDelete User ........................................................................ 18\n\nChange User Code ............................................................ 18\n\nChange User Options ........................................................ 19\n\nSet User Time Lock ........................................................... 19\n\nAdd Proximity Tag ............................................................. 20\n\nAdd SmartKey™ ................................................................ 20\n\nSet Keypad Areas .............................................................. 21\n\nSet Keypad Zone Mapping ................................................ 21\n\nSet Keypad Options .......................................................... 22\n\nSet Keypad Speaker Volume ............................................ 22\n\nSet Keypad Sounder Options ............................................ 22\n\nSet Expander Areas .......................................................... 23\n\nSet Expander Location Text .............................................. 23\n\nSet Expander Auxiliary Input ............................................ 23\n\nSet Expander Speaker Volume ........................................ 23\n\nSet Expander Sounder Options ........................................ 23\n\n4. Index .................................................................... 24\n\n\fWintex User Guide\nINS549-3\n\n\fContents\n\nWintex User Guide\n\nContents\nContents .................................................................... 2\n1. Introduction ............................................................ 3\nWintex Software ................................................................... 3\n\n2. Installation ............................................................ 4\nSystem Requirements .......................................................... 4\n\n3. Connecting to a Control Panel ............................ 5\nDirect Connection ................................................................ 5\n\nModem Connection .............................................................. 6\n\nIP Connection ....................................................................... 7\n\n4. Wintex Software Overview ................................... 8\nMain Screen .......................................................................... 8\n\n5. Programming ........................................................ 9\nPanel Programming .............................................................. 9\n\n6. Diagnostics .......................................................... 10\nEvent Log ............................................................................ 10\n\n7. Tools .................................................................... 11\nFirmware Update ................................................................ 11\n\n8. Reports ................................................................ 12\nSystem Report ................................................................... 12\n\n9. Index .................................................................... 13\n\n\f
=== RESEARCH: Texecom Premier Elite 48 88 168 640 ===
Texecom Premier Elite Series (48, 88, 168, 640) Technical Documentation Summary
1. System Capacities:
- Premier Elite 48: 48 zones, 4 areas, 50 user codes, 500 event log.
- Premier Elite 88: 88 zones, 8 areas, 100 user codes, 1000 event log.
- Premier Elite 168: 168 zones, 16 areas, 200 user codes, 2000 event log.
- Premier Elite 640: 640 zones, 64 areas, 1000 user codes, 5000 event log.
2. Compliance Standards:
- EN50131-1, EN50131-3, EN50131-6
- PD6662:2017 Grade 3 Class II
3. Default Codes:
- Default Engineer Code: 1234 (or 123456 depending on code length)
- Default Master User Code: 5678 (or 567890)
4. Wiring Specifications:
- Zone Wiring: Supports Normally Closed (NC), Double Pole (DP), End of Line (EOL), and Triple End of Line (TEOL).
- Network Wiring: 4-wire standard 7/0.2 alarm cable for keypads and expanders.
- Power Supply: 1.5A to 2.5A depending on the panel enclosure.
5. Zone Types:
- Entry/Exit 1 & 2
- Guard
- Guard Access
- 24 Hour Alarm
- Panic Alarm (PA) Silent / Audible
- Fire
- Medical
- Tamper
- Omit
- Keybox
- Trouble
6. Programming Menus:
- 1. Zone Setup
- 2. Area Programming
- 3. Global Options
- 4. Keypad Setup
- 5. Expander Setup
- 6. System Outputs
- 7. UDL/Digi Options
- 8. Setup Users
- 9. Engineer Utilities
7. Fault Codes and Reset Messages:
- Mains Fail / AC Fail: Loss of AC mains power.
- Battery Fault: Standby battery is low, missing, or failed load test.
- ATS Fault: Alarm Transmission System (communicator) fault.
- Line Fault: Telephone line disconnected or dead.
- Tamper Fault: Case tamper, bell tamper, or device tamper activated.
- Arm Fail: System failed to arm due to an active zone at the end of the exit timer.
- System Alerts: General prompt indicating a fault or alarm condition requires user or engineer reset.
- Anti-Code Reset: Requires a random code to be quoted to the ARC/Installer to receive a reset code.
=== RESEARCH: Texecom Premier Elite 48 88 168 640 ===
Texecom Premier Elite Series (48, 88, 168, 640) Technical Documentation Summary
1. System Capacities:
- Premier Elite 48: 48 zones, 4 areas, 50 user codes, 500 event log.
- Premier Elite 88: 88 zones, 8 areas, 100 user codes, 1000 event log.
- Premier Elite 168: 168 zones, 16 areas, 200 user codes, 2000 event log.
- Premier Elite 640: 640 zones, 64 areas, 1000 user codes, 5000 event log.
2. Compliance Standards:
- EN50131-1, EN50131-3, EN50131-6
- PD6662:2017 Grade 3 Class II
3. Default Codes:
- Default Engineer Code: 1234 (or 123456 depending on code length)
- Default Master User Code: 5678 (or 567890)
4. Wiring Specifications:
- Zone Wiring: Supports Normally Closed (NC), Double Pole (DP), End of Line (EOL), and Triple End of Line (TEOL).
- Network Wiring: 4-wire standard 7/0.2 alarm cable for keypads and expanders.
- Power Supply: 1.5A to 2.5A depending on the panel enclosure.
5. Zone Types:
- Entry/Exit 1 & 2
- Guard
- Guard Access
- 24 Hour Alarm
- Panic Alarm (PA) Silent / Audible
- Fire
- Medical
- Tamper
- Omit
- Keybox
- Trouble
6. Programming Menus:
- 1. Zone Setup
- 2. Area Programming
- 3. Global Options
- 4. Keypad Setup
- 5. Expander Setup
- 6. System Outputs
- 7. UDL/Digi Options
- 8. Setup Users
- 9. Engineer Utilities
7. Fault Codes and Reset Messages:
- Mains Fail / AC Fail: Loss of AC mains power.
- Battery Fault: Standby battery is low, missing, or failed load test.
- ATS Fault: Alarm Transmission System (communicator) fault.
- Line Fault: Telephone line disconnected or dead.
- Tamper Fault: Case tamper, bell tamper, or device tamper activated.
- Arm Fail: System failed to arm due to an active zone at the end of the exit timer.
- System Alerts: General prompt indicating a fault or alarm condition requires user or engineer reset.
- Anti-Code Reset: Requires a random code to be quoted to the ARC/Installer to receive a reset code.
=== PDF TEXT: texecom_10949329138.txt ===
--- PAGE BREAK ---
--- PAGE BREAK ---
--- PAGE BREAK ---
--- PAGE BREAK ---
--- PAGE BREAK ---
--- PAGE BREAK ---
--- PAGE BREAK ---
--- PAGE BREAK ---
--- PAGE BREAK ---
--- PAGE BREAK ---
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Looking for a highly-flexible control panel for your security system? Look no further than the Texecom Premier Elite 24. With an easy-to-use menu-driven interface via a range of LCD keypads, even the most complex security setups are a breeze to configure. This saves you valuable time and maximises the reliability of your system. Designed to be
installed out of sight, whilst the keypad or app may be used for daily use.Installation is made even easier thanks to a host of innovative features, such as the ability to programme wiring types on a per zone basis, and the inclusion of 8 onboard Zones. Standard alarm cable can be used to wire the networks and devices. Plus, the efficient switched mode
power supply and the space for a 7aH backup battery ensures your system runs smoothly and with minimal downtime.Digital Services compatibleThe Premier Elite 24 is also compatible with a wide range of Texecom Digital Services, such as Texecom Cloud, Texecom Monitor, and Texecom Connect, when using a SmartCom or SmartCom 4G
communicator. This allows you to easily monitor and manage your security system from anywhere, at any time.With the ability to accept multiple wired and wireless expanders, the Premier Elite 24 is a true hybrid system. This means you can easily incorporate motion detectors, contacts, shock sensors, internal and external sounders into your security
system.So if youre looking for a highly-flexible, reliable, and secure control panel for your security system, the Texecom Premier Elite 24 is the perfect choice. Texecom Premieralarminstallation manuals The following is a fulllist of the different Texecom Premier alarm installation manuals, across the full The following is a fulllist of the different
Texecom Premier alarm installation manuals, across the full range of Premier Elite panel series.Premier Elite 640The Elite 640 is a grade 3 alarm control panel expandable to 640 zones, 64 areas and 500 codes.Download Premier Elite 640 installation manual here >>Premier Elite 168The Elite168 is a grade 3 alarm control panel expandable to168
zones,16 areas and 200 codes.Download Premier Elite 168 installation manual here >>Premier Elite 88The Elite 88is a grade 3 alarm control panel expandable to 88 zones,8 areas and 100 codes.Download Premier Elite 88 Installation Manual here >>Premier Elite 64-W LIVEThe 64-W LIVE is Texecoms self-contained Wireless Control Panel with 32
onboard wireless zones, expandable to 64.Download Premier Elite 64W LIVE installation manual here >>Premier Elite 64-WThe 64-W is Texecoms standard wireless control panel (without onboard display) with 32 onboard wireless zones, expandable to 64.Download Premier Elite 64W installation manual here >>Premier Elite 12-W LIVEThe 12-W is
Texecoms entry-level wireless control panel for residential use, with8 onboard wireless zones as well as 4 wired zones.Download Premier Elite 12W installation manual here >>Premier Elite 12-WThe12-W is Texecoms entry-level wireless control panel for residential use (without onboard display), with8onboard wireless zones as well as 4 wired
zones.Download Premier Elite 12W installation manual here >>Premier Elite 24-W LIVEThe 24-W is Texecoms wireless control panel (with onboard display), with16 onboard wireless zones (expandable to 24) as well as 4 wired zones.Download Premier Elite 24W LIVE installation manual here >>Premier Elite24-WThe24-W is Texecoms wireless
control panel (without onboard display), with16onboard wireless zones (expandable to 24) as well as 4 wired zones.Download Premier Elite 24W installation manual here >>Premier Elite 48-W LIVEThe 48-W LIVE is Texecoms wireless control panel (with onboard display), with32 onboard wireless zones (expandable to 48) as well as 4 wired
zones.Download Premier Elite 48W LIVE installation manual here >>Premier Elite 8XP-WThe 8XP-W is Texecoms 8 zone wireless expander, compatible with Texecoms Premier Elite series of control panels.Download Premier Elite 8XP-W Installation instructions here >>Premier Elite 32XP-WThe 32XP-W is Texecoms32 zone wireless expander,
compatible with Texecoms Premier Elite series of control panels.Download Premier Elite 32XP-W Installation instructions here >>Ricochet Expansion Pack (IXP-W)The IXP-W is Texecoms 8-zone interface card that converts wireless devices into relay-driven wired outputs.Download Premier IXP-W Installation Instructions here >>
NewsProductsDigital Services AboutContactHead Office Injection Moulding FacilityIndia OfficeChina OfficeSupportStockists User Manuals, Guides and Specifications for your Texecom Premier Elite 24-W Control Panel. Database contains 3 Texecom Premier Elite 24-W Manuals (available for free online viewing or downloading in PDF): Quick start
manual, Installation manual .
Texecom premier elite 24 installation manual. Texecom premier elite 64 installation manual. Texecom premier elite 24 installation. Texecom premier elite installatiehandleiding. Texecom premier elite control
panel manual.
--- PAGE BREAK ---
=== PDF TEXT: texecom_PREMIER-SERIES-USER-GUIDE.txt ===
Veritas User Guide
Quick Reference Guide
THANK YOU FOR VOTING TEXECOM
THANK YOU FOR VOTING TEXECOM
USER GUIDE
Security Control Panels
Issue 2
1
INS167
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Premier Series User Guide
Overview
1. Overview
Introduction
Users of the alarm system will be assigned a unique 4, 5 or 6 digit User code. User
codes are used to arm and disarm the system. Some User codes can also access
additional options such as, system tests and omitting zones.
Keypads will be installed throughout the premises, usually one at each entry/exit door.
The keypads are used to perform all of the system operations i.e. Arming, Disarming etc.
Most User codes can be used at any keypad on the system. However, Local Users will only
be able to use certain keypads on the system.
The Emergency Keys
In case of emergency, the alarm system can provide three immediate emergency alarms
by pressing and holding two specific keys for two seconds.
!"
The emergency keys can be enabled/disabled for each keypad on the system.
The Panic alarm can be programmed for either audible or silent operation.
The Panic alarm can be programmed for either instant or delayed operation.
Emergency Alarm
Press Keys
Panic Alarm (PA)
!&"
#&$
%&&
Fire
Medical
The Quick Arm Keys
The ‘Quick Arm’ keys allow the system to be armed without having to enter a User code first.
!"
The ‘Quick Arm’ keys will only work if the keypad has been programmed to allow
arming in this way.
To FULL arm the system, press '.
To PART arm the system, press !, ( or " followed by ).
Keypad Lock
The keys on the keypad can be locked to prevent unwanted access to the system.
!"
The Emergency keys will NOT operate with the keys locked.
To Lock the keys, press * and + together.
To Unlock the keys, press * and + together again.
2
INS221
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Premier Series User Guide
Overview
LED Indicators
Five LED indicators have been provided to indicate the status of the system.
LED
Status
Power
On
Flashing
Service
Ready
Meaning
AC mains is present on the control panel
AC Mains is not present, the control panel is running on the standby battery
On
The system requires attention, contact your installer
Off
The system does NOT require attention
On
All zones are secure and the system is ready to be armed
Off
One or more zones are active
Flashing
The system has zones (with the ‘Force Omit’ attribute) that are active
On
The system is armed (can also be programmed for other indications)
Off
The system is unarmed (can also be programmed for other indications)
On
One or more zones are omitted
Off
No zones are omitted
Info.
Omit
Zone Faults During Arming
Before attempting to arm the system, ensure that the premises are secure (all doors and
windows closed etc.) and the Ready light is on.
If an attempt is made to arm the system with any zones active (e.g. door ajar, open
window, etc.) the internal sounders will bleep repeatedly (fault tone) and the display will
show the zones that are active.
The fault tone will stop and the exit tone will resume when all zones are secure. If it is
necessary to leave a zone open then it must be omitted (see page 8 for details).
!"
If an active zone cannot be secured then it may be ‘in fault’, in this case contact
the alarm company immediately.
Arm Fail - Failing to Arm
If the exit procedure is started and zones are still ‘Active’ at the end of the exit procedure,
an Internal alarm will occur (internal sounders only) and the strobe light on the external
sounder will flash.
!"
If this occurs the arm fail must be cleared and the zone in fault identified before the
system can be armed (see page 6 for details on clearing an Arm Fail).
The Ready LED
To help prevent faults during arming a Ready light has been provided, see table above
for details on how the Ready LED operates.
INS221
3
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Operating the Alarm System
Premier Series User Guide
2. Operating the Alarm System
To FULL Arm the System
The system is FULL Armed when ALL zones are ON (not omitted).
!"
'
Your Installer may have programmed the system so that it can be set by just pressing
, if this is the case then there is no need to enter the User code below.
1. Ensure that the premises are secure (all doors and windows closed etc.) and the
Ready light is on
2. Enter a valid User code ,,,,
3. Press * to arm
The exit tone will sound
4. Leave the premises
When the system has armed the exit tone will stop
To PART Arm the System
The system is PART Armed, when ONE OR MORE zones have been left OFF (omitted)
i.e. the landing or a bedroom.
!"
The system is only Part Armed when zones are omitted using the ‘Part Arm’ procedure
(omitting zones manually (see page 8 for details) is not classed as Part Arming).
The bottom line of the display is programmable for each Part Arm.
Your Installer may have programmed the system so that it can be Part Armed by
just pressing !, ( or " followed by ), if this is the case then there is
no need to enter the User code below.
1. Ensure that the premises are secure (all windows and doors not being omitted are
closed) and the Ready light is on
2. Enter a valid User code ,,,,
3. Press )
4. Use keys ! - " to select the required Part Arm
5. Press * to arm normally or press - to arm silently
The exit tone will sound (if silent arm has not been selected)
6. Leave the protected area
When the system has armed, the exit tone (if sounding) will stop
4
INS221
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Premier Series User Guide
Operating the Alarm System
To ARM Individual Areas
If the system has been split up into separate areas of protection i.e. Area 1 = House,
Area 2 = Garage, Area 3 = Shed etc. These areas can be individually selected for FULL
or PART arming as required.
!"
Areas are selected by using keys ! - . (the / key can also be used to
select an area followed by ' or +).
Only areas that exist on the system can be selected. (A ‘Star’ means the area can
be selected and a ‘Dot’ means the area cannot be selected).
Pressing 0 will select/deselect all areas, pressing ' will toggle between the
first 8 areas and the second 8 areas (where applicable).
1. Ensure that the premises are secure (all windows and doors not being omitted are
closed) and the Ready light is on
2. Enter a valid User code ,,,,
3. Press '
4. Use keys ! - . to select the required areas
5. Press * or - to FULL arm the areas
Or
5. Press )!, ( or " followed by * or - to PART arm the areas
The exit tone will sound (if silent arm has not been selected)
6. Leave the premises
When the system has armed, the exit tone (if sounding) will stop
To DISARM the System
The entry time is divided into two sections, the Entry time and the 2nd Entry time. If the
Entry time expires, an Internal alarm will occur and the 2nd Entry time will start. If the 2nd
Entry time expires, an Intruder alarm will occur (all internal and external sounders).
!"
It is perfectly normal for the 2nd Entry time to be programmed as zero, in which
case, an Intruder alarm will occur as soon as the Entry time expires.
1. Enter the premises via the designated entry point
The entry tone will start
2. Enter a valid User code ,,,,
The entry tone will stop
INS221
5
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Operating the Alarm System
Premier Series User Guide
To DISARM the System When Not in Entry
1. Enter a valid User code ,,,,
2. Press *
To CANCEL the Exit Mode
Once the exit mode has been started you should leave the premises immediately,
however, if for some reason you decide not to leave, the exit mode must be cancelled.
1. Enter a valid User code ,,,,
2. Press *
The exit tone will stop.
To CLEAR an Arm Fail
When the system tries to arm with zones active (open), the internal sounders will sound
and the external strobe will be flashing to indicate a problem. For details on preventing
an Arm Fail condition, please refer to page 3.
!"
If you were not present when the Arm Fail occurred or you do not clear the Arm
Fail, the internal sounders will continue to sound and the external strobe will
continue to flash.
1. Enter a valid User code ,,,,
The internal and external sounders will stop, the external strobe will continue to flash
and the number of the zone that caused the Arm Fail will be displayed.
2. Enter a valid User code ,,,, and press 12
To SILENCE an Alarm
When an alarm occurs on the system, the internal and external sounders will normally
sound for a pre-programmed time (normally 15 minutes).
!"
If you were not present when the alarm activated, the internal and external
sounders may have already stopped but the external strobe will still be flashing.
When alarm information is being displayed, pressing the SCROLL key will slow
down the display and also allow manual scrolling through the events.
1. Enter a valid User code ,,,,
The internal and external sounders will stop and the number of the zone that caused the
alarm will be displayed.
The alarm now needs to be reset.
6
INS221
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Premier Series User Guide
Operating the Alarm System
To RESET After an Alarm
USER Reset
Once the alarm has been silenced (see page 6 for details), the system will need to be reset.
!"
If the system has been programmed, to be reset by an Engineer, pressing 1 will
not return the display to normal, if this is the case see ENGINEER Reset for details.
The system may have been programmed to be reset by Anti-code, if this is the
case, see ANTI-CODE Reset for details.
1. Enter a valid User code ,,,,
2. Press 1
The external strobe will stop, the system will chime and the display will return to normal.
ENGINEER Reset
If the system has been programmed to be reset by an Engineer following an alarm
activation, you will still be able to silence the alarm by entering a valid User code (see
page 6 for details).
!"
The system cannot be armed again until the alarm has been reset.
1. Contact the telephone number on the display (if programmed) or the telephone
number on the last page of this User Guide
ANTI-CODE Reset
If the system has been programmed to be reset using an Anti-Code following an alarm
activation, you will still be able to silence the alarm by entering a valid User code (see
page 6 for details).
!"
The system cannot be armed again until the alarm has been reset.
1. Enter a valid User code ,,,,
2. Press 1
The display will show a random code number i.e. 4281.
3. Contact the telephone number on the display (if programmed) or the telephone
number on the last page of this User Guide and quote the random code number
You will be given a 4-digit Anti-Code i.e. 5624.
4. Enter the Anti-code that has been given to you ,,,,
5. Press *
If the Anti-code is correct, the keypad will bleep to indicate that the system has been
reset and the display will return to normal.
INS221
7
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Operating the Alarm System
Premier Series User Guide
To OMIT Zones
It is possible to exclude (omit) individual zones when arming i.e. if a zone is ‘in fault’. Users
with access to this function can only omit zones that have been programmed as ‘Omittable’.
!"
If the zone can be omitted, there will be a ‘Star’ to the right of the zone number.
Only zones that have the ‘Omit’ attribute assigned to them can be omitted.
A ‘Star’ will appear to the left of the zone number to indicate that the zone has been
selected for omitting.
All omitted zones will be automatically reinstated the next time the system is
disarmed, unless programmed otherwise.
To re-instate zones manually, simply follow the instructions again. However, when
the 3 key is pressed on this occasion, the zones will be re-instated.
1. Enter a valid User code ,,,, and press 3
2. Enter the zone number ,,,
3. Press 3 to omit the selected zone
Repeat for other zones if required.
4. Press 4 when finished
Continue to arm the system as normal.
The Turn CHIME On and Off
The system can be set up so that activating (opening) certain zones will cause the
internal sounders to chime. This would normally be used on a front door, exit button etc.
!"
Zones will only cause the internal sounders to chime if they are selected for chime
(see page Master User Guide for details on selecting which zones chime).
Once a zone has been selected for chime, the Chime facility can be manually turned on
and off as required.
!"
The system can also be programmed to automatically turn chime on and off under
certain conditions i.e. certain times of the day, door left open etc.
If no zones have been programmed for Chime, then turning Chime on and off will
have no effect.
8
To turn CHIME On
To turn CHIME Off
1. Press -
1. Press -
The Chime tone will sound.
The Error tone will sound.
INS221
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Premier Series User Guide
Operating the Alarm System
To CHANGE Your User Code
Users with access to this option can change their own User codes. User codes are
unique to each user and can be 4, 5 or 6 digits long.
!"
Only the User code that is entered to access the change code menu will be changed.
Before changing your code, it is vital that you memorise or write down the new
code you are about to program. Failure to remember your code will require an
engineer visit to re-program a new code for you. This may incur a call-out charge.
1. Enter the User code that requires changing ,,,,
2. Press 4
3. Press *
4. Press (
5. Press *
6. Enter a new 4, 5 or 6-digit User code ,,,,
7. Press * to accept the new code
8. Press 1 to exit the menu
The display will return to normal.
INS221
9
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Premier Series User Guide
Quick Reference Guide
4. Quick Reference Guide
Operation
Description
To Full Arm the System
Enter a valid User code
Press Yes (or press Chime to arm silently)
To Part Arm the System
Enter a valid User code
Press Part
Select Required Part Arm
Press Yes (or press Chime to arm silently)
To Arm Individual Areas
Enter a valid User code
Press Area
Select Required Area using keys 1 - 8
Press Yes (or press Chime to arm silently)
To Disarm the System
Enter a valid User code
Press Yes (if the entry mode was not started)
To Cancel the Exit Mode
Enter a valid User code
Press Yes
To Clear an Arm Fail
Enter a valid User code
Press Reset
To Silence an Alarm
Enter a valid User code
To Reset After an Alarm
Enter a valid User code
Press Reset
To Engineer Reset
Contact Your Installation Company
To Anti-code Reset
Enter a valid User code
Press Reset
Contact Your Alarm Receiving Centre
Quote 4-digit code shown on display
Enter 4-digit code given by Receiving Centre
Press Yes
To Omit Zones
Enter a valid User code
Press Omit
Enter Zone Number(s)
Press Menu when finished
Press Yes to Arm
Turn Chime On/Off
Press Chime Once to Turn ON
Press Chime Again to Turn OFF
To Change User Code
Enter a valid User code
Press Menu followed by Yes
Press 2 followed by Yes
Enter a new 4, 5 or 6 digit User code
Press Yes to accept
Press Reset to return to the normal display
10
Action
,,,,
* or ,,,,
)
!, ( or "
* or ,,,,
'
!-.
* or ,,,,
*
,,,,
*
,,,,
1
,,,,
,,,,
1
_____________
,,,,
1
_____________
!"#$%&'(((('
,,,,
*
,,,,
3
,,,…
3
*
,,,,
4*
(*
,,,,
*
1
INS221
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Premier Series User Guide
Installation Details
5. Installation Details
Areas
No.
Description
Exit
Time
Entry
Time 1
Entry
Time 2
Bell
Delay
Bell
Duration
Abort
Time
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Min.
Min.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Min.
Min.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Min.
Min.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Sec.
Min.
Min.
Sec.
Keypads
No.
Location
Emergency Keys
Quick
Arm
PA
New Code
Area
Area
Fire
Med
User Codes
User
01
Name
Type
Master
Default
5678
Time Lock
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Zones
No.
INS221
Description
Type
Area
Omit
1
Part Arms
2
3
11
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Installation Company Details
Installation Engineer:
Installation Company:
Address:
Telephone Number:
Installation Date:
Service Record
Date Serviced
Comments
Engineer
Emergency Telephone Numbers
For 24 Hour Call Out
For Anti-Code Reset
Control Panel
Details
Model
Premier 24 ❏
Premier 48 ❏
Premier 88 ❏
Location
© TEXECOM LTD. 2000 - 2005
INS221-2
Premier 168 ❏
Premier 640 ❏
--- PAGE BREAK ---
=== PDF TEXT: texecom_Texe_Premier-Elite-User.txt ===
User Guide
Premier Elite 24/48/88/168/640
INS221-4
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Premier Elite Series User Guide
Overview
Introduction
Users of the alarm system will be assigned a unique 4, 5 or 6 digit User code, and may be assigned a Proximity Tag.
User codes are used to arm and disarm the system. Some User codes can also access additional options such as,
system tests and omitting zones.
Keypads will be installed throughout the premises, usually one at each entry/exit door. The keypads are used to
perform all of the system operations i.e. Arming, Disarming etc. Most User codes can be used at any keypad on the
system. However, Local Users will only be able to use certain keypads on the system.
The Emergency Keys
In case of emergency, the alarm system can provide three immediate emergency alarms by pressing and holding
two specific keys for two seconds.
Emergency
Alarm
Press Keys
Panic Alarm (PA)
&
&
&
Fire
Medical
The emergency keys can be enabled/disabled for each keypad on the system. The
Panic alarm can be programmed for either audible or silent operation. The Panic
alarm can be programmed for either instant or delayed operation
The Quick Arm Keys
The ‘Quick Arm’ keys allow the system to be armed without having to enter a User code first.
The ‘Quick Arm’ keys will only work if the keypad has been programmed to allow arming in this way.
To FULL arm the system, press
To PART arm the system, press
.
, or followed by .
Keypad Lock
The keys on the keypad can be locked to prevent unwanted access to the system.
The Emergency keys will NOT operate with the keys locked.
To Lock the keys press
and together. To Unlock the keys, press and together again.
LED Indicators
Five LED indicators have been provided to indicate the status of the system.
LED
Status
Power
On
Flashing
On
Off
On
Off
Flashing
On
Off
On
Off
Service
Ready
Info.
Omit
2
Meaning
AC mains is present on the control panel
AC Mains is not present, the control panel is running on the standby battery
The system requires attention, contact your installer
The system does NOT require attention
All zones are secure and the system is ready to be armed
One or more zones are active
The system has zones (with the ‘Force Omit’ attribute) that are active
The system is armed (can also be programmed for other indications)
The system is unarmed (can also be programmed for other indications)
One or more zones are omitted
No zones are omitted
INS221-4
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Premier Elite Series User Guide
Zone Faults During Arming
Before attempting to arm the system, ensure that the premises are secure (all doors and windows closed etc.) and
the Ready light is on.
If an attempt is made to arm the system with any zones active (e.g. door ajar, open window, etc.) the internal
sounders will bleep repeatedly (fault tone) and the display will show the zones that are active.
The fault tone will stop and the exit tone will resume when all zones are secure. If it is necessary to leave a zone
open then it must be omitted (see page 6 for details).
If an active zone cannot be secured then it may be ‘in fault’, in this case contact the alarm company immediately.
Arm Fail - Failing to Arm
If the exit procedure is started and zones are still ‘Active’ at the end of the exit procedure, an Internal alarm will occur
(internal sounders only) and the strobe light on the external sounder will flash.
If this occurs the arm fail must be cleared and the zone in fault identified before the system can be armed (see page 4 for
details on clearing an Arm Fail).
The Ready LED
To help prevent faults during arming a Ready light has been provided, see table above for details on how the Ready
LED operates.
Operating the Alarm System using a code
To FULL Arm the System
The system is FULL Armed when ALL zones are ON (not omitted).
Your Installer may have programmed the system so that it can be set by just pressing
to enter the User code below.
, if this is the case then there is no need
1. Ensure that the premises are secure (all doors and windows closed etc.) and the Ready light is on
2. Enter a valid User code
3. Press
to arm. The exit tone will sound
4. Leave the premises When the system has armed the exit tone will stop
To PART Arm the System
The system is PART Armed, when ONE OR MORE zones have been left OFF (omitted) i.e. the landing or a
bedroom.
The system is only Part Armed when zones are omitted using the ‘Part Arm’ procedure (omitting zones manually (see page 6 for details)
is not classed as Part Arming).
The bottom line of the display is programmable for each Part Arm.
Your Installer may have programmed the system so that it can be Part Armed by just pressing
by
, if this is the case then there is no need to enter the User code below.
, or followed
1. Ensure that the premises are secure (all windows and doors not being omitted are closed) and the Ready light
is on
2. Enter a valid User code
3. Press
- to select the required Part Arm
4. Use keys
to arm normally or press
to arm silently The exit tone will sound (if silent arm has not been
5. Press
selected)
6. Leave the protected area When the system has armed, the exit tone (if sounding) will stop
INS221-4
3
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Premier Elite Series User Guide
To ARM Individual Areas
If the system has been split up into separate areas of protection i.e. Area 1 = House, Area 2 = Garage, Area 3 =
Shed etc. These areas can be individually selected for FULL or PART arming as required.
Areas are selected by using keys
).
- (the key can also be used to select an area followed by or
On the 640 there are 4 Area groups, each with 16 Areas, these can be selected by pressing the
Area Group (1-4)
- key to select an
Only areas that exist on the system can be selected. (A ‘Star’ means the area can be selected and a ‘Dot’ means the area
cannot be selected).
will select/deselect all areas, pressing
Pressing
(where applicable).
will toggle between the first 8 areas and the second 8 areas
1. Ensure that the premises are secure (all windows and doors not being omitted are closed) and the Ready light
is on
2. Enter a valid User code
3. Press
- to select the required areas
5. Press or to FULL arm the areas Or on the 640 press
5. Press , or followed by or (24/48/88/168) or (640)to PART arm the
4. Use keys
areas The exit tone will sound (if silent arm has not been selected)
6. Leave the premises When the system has armed, the exit tone (if sounding) will stop
To DISARM the System
The entry time is divided into two sections, the Entry time and the 2nd Entry time. If the Entry time expires, an Internal
alarm will occur and the 2nd Entry time will start. If the 2nd Entry time expires, an Intruder alarm will occur (all internal
and external sounders).
It is perfectly normal for the 2nd Entry time to be programmed as zero, in which case, an Intruder alarm will occur as soon as
the Entry time expires.
1. Enter the premises via the designated entry point The entry tone will start
2. Enter a valid User code
The entry tone will stop
To DISARM the System When Not in Entry
1. Enter a valid User code
2. Press
To CANCEL the Exit Mode
Once the exit mode has been started you should leave the premises immediately, however, if for some reason you
decide not to leave, the exit mode must be cancelled.
1. Enter a valid User code
2. Press
4
The exit tone will stop.
INS221-4
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Premier Elite Series User Guide
To CLEAR an Arm Fail
When the system tries to arm with zones active (open), the internal sounders will sound and the external strobe will
be flashing to indicate a problem. For details on preventing an Arm Fail condition, please refer to page 3.
If you were not present when the Arm Fail occurred or you do not clear the Arm Fail, the internal sounders will continue to
sound and the external strobe will continue to flash.
1. Enter a valid User code
The internal and external sounders will stop, the external strobe
will continue to flash and the number of the zone that caused the Arm Fail will be displayed.
2. Enter a valid User code
and press
To SILENCE an Alarm
When an alarm occurs on the system, the internal and external sounders will normally sound for a pre-programmed
time (normally 15 minutes).
If you were not present when the alarm activated, the internal and external sounders may have already stopped but the
external strobe will still be flashing.
When alarm information is being displayed, pressing the SCROLL key will slow down the display and also allow manual
scrolling through the events.
1. Enter a valid User code
The internal and external sounders will stop and the number of the
zone that caused the alarm will be displayed. The alarm now needs to be reset.
To DISPLAY the cause(s) of System Alerts (Alarms)
When silencing an alarm or unsetting the system after an alarm, the number of the zone(s) will be displayed on the
keypad. If several zones were triggered, the display will scroll through each in turn.
After noting the cause of the alarm, the system can be reset as described in ‘RESET After an Alarm’ below.
System Alerts
When the system has faults to display, or has not been reset after an alarm condition, the display may show
‘SYSTEM ALERTS’.
Enter a valid User code
Any alarms or faults will be displayed. If several fault or alarm conditions have been triggered, the display will scroll
through each in turn.
After noting the cause of the alarm or fault, the system can be reset as described in ‘RESET After an Alarm’ below.
Some action may be required to clear the cause of the alarm or fault in order to successfully reset the panel.
To RESET After an Alarm
If the display shows ‘SYSTEM ALERTS’, follow the steps described in ‘To DISPLAY the causes of System Alerts’
above, before attempting to reset.
USER Reset
Once the alarm has been silenced (see page 5 for details), the system will need to be reset.
If the system has been programmed, to be reset by an Engineer, pressing
the case see ENGINEER Reset for details.
will not return the display to normal, if this is
The system may have been programmed to be reset by Anti-code, if this is the case, see ANTI-CODE Reset for details.
1. Enter a valid User code
2. Press
The external strobe will stop, the system will chime and the display will return to normal.
INS221-4
5
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Premier Elite Series User Guide
ENGINEER Reset
If the system has been programmed to be reset by an Engineer following an alarm activation, you will still be able to
silence the alarm by entering a valid User code (see page 5 for details).
The system cannot be armed again until the alarm has been reset.
1. Contact the telephone number on the display (if programmed) or the telephone number on the last page of
this User Guide
ANTI-CODE Reset
If the system has been programmed to be reset using an Anti-Code following an alarm activation, you will still be
able to silence the alarm by entering a valid User code (see page 5 for details).
The system cannot be armed again until the alarm has been reset.
1. Enter a valid User code
2. Press
The display will show a random code number i.e. 4281.
3. Contact the telephone number on the display (if programmed) or the telephone number on the last page of
this User Guide and quote the random code number You will be given a 4-digit Anti-Code i.e. 5624.
4. Enter the Anti-code that has been given to you
5. Press
If the Anti-code is correct, the keypad will bleep to indicate that the system has been reset and the
display will return to normal.
To OMIT Zones
It is possible to exclude (omit) individual zones when arming i.e. if a zone is ‘in fault’. Users with access to this function can
only omit zones that have been programmed as ‘Omittable’.
If the zone can be omitted, there will be a ‘Star’ to the right of the zone number. Only zones that have the ‘Omit’ attribute
assigned to them can be omitted.
A ‘Star’ will appear to the left of the zone number to indicate that the zone has been selected for omitting.
All omitted zones will be automatically reinstated the next time the system is disarmed, unless programmed otherwise.
To re-instate zones manually, simply follow the instructions again. However, when the
the zones will be re-instated.
key is pressed on this occasion,
1. Enter a valid User code
2. Enter the zone number
3. Press
4. Press
6
and press
to omit the selected zone Repeat for other zones if required.
when finished Continue to arm the system as normal.
INS221-4
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Premier Elite Series User Guide
The Turn CHIME On and Off
The system can be set up so that activating (opening) certain zones will cause the internal sounders to chime. This
would normally be used on a front door, exit button etc.
Zones will only cause the internal sounders to chime if they are selected for chime (see page Master User Guide for details
on selecting which zones chime).
Once a zone has been selected for chime, the Chime facility can be manually turned on and off as required.
The system can also be programmed to automatically turn chime on and off under certain conditions i.e. certain times of
the day, door left open etc.
If no zones have been programmed for Chime, then turning Chime on and off will have no effect.
To turn CHIME On
1. Press
To turn CHIME Off
1. Press
The Error tone will sound.
The Chime tone will sound.
To CHANGE Your User Code
Users with access to this option can change their own User codes. User codes are unique to each user and can be
4, 5 or 6 digits long.
Only the User code that is entered to access the change code menu will be changed.
Before changing your code, it is vital that you memorise or write down the new code you are about to
program. Failure to remember your code will require an engineer visit to re-program a new code for you. This
may incur a call-out charge.
1. Enter the User code that requires changing
2. Press
4. Press
5. Press
3. Press
6. Enter a new 4, 5 or 6-digit User code
to accept the new code
8. Press to exit the menu The display will return to normal.
7. Press
Using a Proximity Tag
General Operation
1.
2.
3.
4.
A Proximity TAG must be held over the PROX symbol on the keypad.
A Proximity TAG will normally work at distances of up to 4cm, however it should be noted that distances can
and do vary.
Presenting a Proximity TAG to the keypad is NO different to entering a code except that it is a SINGLE action as
opposed to a MULTIPLE action.
The control panel will log which User/TAG has been presented.
Programming Proximity TAGS
Programming a Proximity TAG will depend on which type of control panel and what version of software is installed
(Your Installation Company can advise if it is possible to use Tag’s on your system).Operation
INS221-4
7
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Premier Elite Series User Guide
Determine your Panel Type
From Day Mode press
followed by 4, the keypad will display the Model and software version. Note which
Model you have and proceed as follows:-
Programming
To assign a Proximity TAG to a User, proceed as follows:
1. Program the User code as normal, this new option will now appear at the end :- ‘Do you want to Add TAG to
User?’
2.
3.
4.
Press
Present the Proximity TAG to the keypad within 10 seconds
A confirmation tone will be heard, the TAG is now programmed.
Arming
To Arm the Control Panel, proceed as follows:
1. Present the TAG to the keypad, the display will show ‘Do You Want To Arm System?
2.
Present the TAG again (or hold it in place) and the exit will start, leave the building
If Quickarm is enabled the system will start the exit time immediately.
Disarming
To Disarm the Control Panel, proceed as follows:
1. Enter the building Via the designated Entry point (the entry tone will sound)
2.
8
Present the TAG to the keypad, the entry tone will stop, the alarm is now disarmed
INS221-4
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Premier Elite Series User Guide
Quick Guide
Operation
Description
Action
To Full Arm the System
Enter a valid User code
Press Yes (or press Chime to arm silently)
or
Enter a valid User code
Press Part
Select Required Part Arm
, or
Press Yes (or press Chime to arm silently)
or
Enter a valid User code
Press Area
Select Required Area using keys 1 - 8
-
Press Yes (or press Chime to arm silently)
or
Enter a valid User code
Press Yes (if the entry mode was not started)
Enter a valid User code
Press Yes
Enter a valid User code
Press Reset
To Silence an Alarm
Enter a valid User code
To Reset After an Alarm
Enter a valid User code
Press Reset
To Part Arm the System
To Arm Individual Areas
To Disarm the System
To Cancel the Exit Mode
To Clear an Arm Fail
To Engineer Reset
To Anti-code Reset
Contact Your Installation Company
Enter a valid User code
Press Reset
Contact Your Alarm Receiving Centre
To Omit Zones
Turn Chime On/Off
To Change User Code
INS221-4
Quote 4-digit code shown on display
Enter 4-digit code given by Receiving Centre
Press Yes
Enter a valid User code
Press Omit
Enter Zone Number(s)
…
Press Omit to toggle omit status on/off
Press Menu when finished
Press Yes to Arm
Press Chime Once to Turn ON
Press Chime Again to Turn OFF
Enter a valid User code
Press Menu followed by Yes
Press 2 followed by Yes
Enter a new 4, 5 or 6 digit User code
Press Yes to accept
Press Reset to return to the normal display
9
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Premier Elite Series User Guide
Installation Records
Installation Engineer:
Installation Company:
Address:
Telephone Number:
Installation Date:
Service Record
Date Serviced
Comments
Engineer
Emergency Telephone Numbers
For 24 Hour Call Out
For Anti-Code Reset
Control Panel
Details
Model
24
48
88
168
640
Location
© TEXECOM LTD. 2012
10
INS221-4
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Premier Elite Series User Guide
Notes
INS221-4
11
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Texecom Limited, Bradwood Court, St. Crispin Way, Haslingden, Lancashire
BB4 4PW, England.
© Texecom Limited 2012
INS221-4
--- PAGE BREAK ---
=== PDF TEXT: texecom_challenger_ap55_installation_c9cea871e90578574f482b437e428252.txt ===
Installation Manual
Premier Elite 24/48/88/168 & 640
INS176-8
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Contents
Premier Elite 24, 48, 88, 168 & 640 Installation Manual
Contents
Contents .................................................................. 2
1. System Overview ................................................ 4
System Architecture ............................................................ 4
Control Panel ....................................................................... 4
Remote Keypads ................................................................. 5
Zone Expanders................................................................... 6
Output Expanders................................................................ 6
Communicators ................................................................... 6
Other Devices ...................................................................... 6
3. Installation ........................................................... 7
Installation Sequence .......................................................... 7
Control Panel ....................................................................... 7
Power Supply Ratings ....................................................... 18
Connecting AC Mains ....................................................... 19
Connecting Batteries......................................................... 19
Connecting Devices to the Network ................................. 20
Remote Keypads ............................................................... 22
8XE Zone Expander (24 Only) ........................................... 23
8XP Zone Expander ........................................................... 23
Attributes for Custom Zones ............................................. 44
Zone Areas 24/48/88/168 ................................................... 44
Zone Areas 640 .................................................................. 44
Zone Text ............................................................................ 44
Zone Chime ........................................................................ 44
Remote Test Enable ........................................................... 45
Zone Wiring ........................................................................ 45
DD 243 ................................................................................ 45
5.2 Area Programming .......................................... 46
Timers ................................................................................. 46
Arming Modes .................................................................... 47
Area Arm Suites 24/48/88/168 ........................................... 47
Area Arm Suites 640 .......................................................... 48
Area Suite Text ................................................................... 48
Suite Arm Modes ................................................................ 49
Area Options 24/48/88/168 ................................................ 49
Area Options 640 ................................................................ 49
Time Arm Area .................................................................... 53
Area Text ............................................................................. 53
iProx Module ...................................................................... 24
5.3 Global Options ................................................ 54
60iXD Zone Expander ........................................................ 24
System Timers .................................................................... 54
OP16 Output Expander ..................................................... 25
System Config. ................................................................... 55
Zone and Output Numbering 24/48/88/168 ...................... 26
System Options .................................................................. 59
Zone and Output Numbering 640 ..................................... 27
Monitor Hardware .............................................................. 60
Zone Connections ............................................................. 28
Control Timers .................................................................... 60
60IXD Zone Expander ........................................................ 29
System Text ........................................................................ 61
Auxiliary/Fault Connections .............................................. 30
Part Arm Text ...................................................................... 61
Speaker Connections ........................................................ 30
Holiday Dates ..................................................................... 62
External Sounder Connections ......................................... 30
Speaker Tones ................................................................... 62
Panel Outputs .................................................................... 31
PC Output Text ................................................................... 63
Digicom Outputs 1 - 8 ....................................................... 31
Custom O/P Text ................................................................ 63
2-Wire Smoke Detector ..................................................... 32
5.4 Keypad Setup .................................................. 64
Expander Auxiliary Input ................................................... 32
Keypad Areas ..................................................................... 65
Plug-on Communicators ................................................... 33
Keypad Zone Mapping ....................................................... 65
Com GSM ........................................................................... 33
Keypad Options .................................................................. 65
AV Module .......................................................................... 33
Keypad Speaker Volume .................................................... 65
ComIP Module ................................................................... 34
Keypad Sounder Options .................................................. 65
USB-Com ........................................................................... 34
PC-Com .............................................................................. 34
PRINT-Com ........................................................................ 34
Connecting a Computer .................................................... 34
Connecting a Printer ......................................................... 34
4. Commissioning and Troubleshooting ............. 35
Commissioning.................................................................. 35
Trouble-Shooting ............................................................... 35
Reset and Service Messages............................................ 37
5. Programming the Control Panel ...................... 38
5.5 Expander Setup ............................................... 66
Expander Areas .................................................................. 67
Expander Location Text ..................................................... 67
Expander Auxiliary Input .................................................... 67
Expander Speaker Volume ................................................ 67
Expander Sounder Options ............................................... 67
5.6 System Outputs............................................... 68
Available Outputs ............................................................... 69
Programming Outputs........................................................ 69
Output Group - Not Used ................................................... 69
Introduction ....................................................................... 38
Output Group - System ...................................................... 69
Copying and Pasting ......................................................... 40
Output Group - Area ........................................................... 71
Log Off Engineer ............................................................... 40
Output Group - Zone .......................................................... 73
Resetting the Engineers Code (User 00) ......................... 40
Output Group - User Code Entered ................................... 73
5.1 Zone Setup ...................................................... 41
Output Group - Control Timer ............................................ 73
Zone Types ........................................................................ 42
Output Group - PC Control ................................................ 73
Zone Attributes 1 ............................................................... 43
Output Group - Door Control ............................................. 73
Zone Attributes 2 ............................................................... 43
Output Attributes ................................................................ 73
Attributes for Moment or Latch Keys ............................... 44
X-10 Outputs ....................................................................... 73
2
INS176-8
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Premier 24, 48, 88, 168 & 640 Installation Manual
Contents
Custom Outputs ................................................................. 74
Standards ......................................................................... 119
5.7 UDL/Digi Options............................................. 75
Warranty ........................................................................... 119
Reset Digi ........................................................................... 75
Start Test Call ..................................................................... 75
MSN/Pre-Dial No. ............................................................... 75
Program Digi ...................................................................... 76
Digi Options ........................................................................ 80
Area Accounts 24/48/88/168 .............................................. 80
Area Accounts 640 ............................................................. 81
UDL Options ....................................................................... 82
Setup Modules ................................................................... 84
Com Port Setup .................................................................. 86
DualCom® Inside (48 Only) ............................................... 87
EMIZON 21 TCD ................................................................. 88
WebWayOne ....................................................................... 89
Chiron IRIS ......................................................................... 91
Zone Alarm Reporting Codes ............................................ 92
5.8 Setup Users ..................................................... 99
Default User Codes .......................................................... 100
Programming New Users ................................................. 100
User Types ........................................................................ 100
User Functions and Options ............................................ 101
User Options 1.................................................................. 102
User Options 2.................................................................. 102
User Config....................................................................... 102
User Time Lock ................................................................ 102
User Name Text ................................................................ 103
Door Control ..................................................................... 103
Adding Tags ..................................................................... 103
Deleting Users .................................................................. 103
5.9 Engineer Utilities ........................................... 104
View Event Log ................................................................. 104
Do Bell Test ...................................................................... 107
Do Walk Test 24/48/88/168 .............................................. 107
Do Walk Test 640 ............................................................. 108
View Zone Status .............................................................. 108
Do System Tests .............................................................. 109
Confirm Devices ............................................................... 109
View RKP Status ............................................................... 110
View Exp. Status ............................................................... 110
Set System Time............................................................... 110
Set System Date ............................................................... 110
Change Eng. Code ........................................................... 111
Adjust Volumes ................................................................ 111
Default NVM Data ............................................................. 111
Location Text .................................................................... 111
Print Log Data ................................................................... 112
Soak Test Areas 24/48/88/168 ......................................... 112
Soak Test Areas 640 ........................................................ 112
View iD Data ..................................................................... 113
Configure Radio ............................................................... 113
5.10 Programming Part Arms ............................. 114
Alter Part Arms ................................................................. 114
6. Specifications .................................................. 115
Control Panels .................................................................. 115
Remote Keypads .............................................................. 118
Zone Expanders ............................................................... 118
Output Expanders ............................................................ 119
INS176-8
3
--- PAGE BREAK ---
System Overview
Premier Elite 24, 48, 88, 168 & 640 Installation Manual
1. System Overview
System Architecture
Control Panel
Premier Elite 24
8 fully programmable Double Pole or End Of Line zones
Expandable to 24 zones via keypads and zone expanders
1 x 4-wire data network (standard 7/0.2 alarm cable)
Up to 4 keypads and 2 zone expanders
Up to 1 output module
2 independent areas each with 3 part arms
2 area arm suites
25 programmable User codes
500 Event Log (time & date stamped)
1 programmable panel outputs (1 x 100mA )
1.5 Amp power supply (plastic Case)
Premier Elite 48
4
8 fully programmable Double Pole or End Of Line zones
Expandable to 48 zones via keypads and zone expanders
1 x 4-wire data network (standard 7/0.2 alarm cable)
Up to 4 keypads and 4 zone expanders
Up to 2 output modules
4 independent areas each with 3 part arms
4 area arm suites
50 programmable User codes
500 Event Log (time & date stamped)
2 programmable panel outputs (2 x 1A )
2.5 Amp power supply
Premier Elite 48-W
4 Onboard Zones
32 wireless device Ricochet™ enabled receiver onboard
Expandable to 48 zones via keypads and zone expanders
1 x 4-wire data network (standard 7/0.2 alarm cable)
Up to 4 keypads and 3 zone expanders
Up to 2 output modules
4 independent areas each with 3 part arms
4 area arm suites
50 programmable User codes
500 Event Log (time & date stamped)
2 programmable panel outputs (2 x 500mA )
1.5 Amp power supply
Premier Elite 88
8 fully programmable Double Pole or End Of Line zones
Expandable to 88 zones via keypads and zone expanders
1 x 4-wire data network (standard 7/0.2 alarm cable)
Up to 8 keypads and 8 zone expanders
Up to 4 output modules
8 independent areas each with 3 part arms
8 area arm suites
100 programmable User codes
1000 Event Log (time & date stamped)
5 programmable panel outputs (4 x 1A & 3A relay)
2.5 Amp power supply
INS176-8
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Premier Elite 24, 48, 88, 168 & 640 Installation Manual
System Overview
Premier Elite 168
FMK/SMK
8 fully programmable Double Pole or End Of Line zones
Expandable to 168 zones via keypads and zone expanders
2 x 4-wire data network (standard 7/0.2 alarm cable)
Up to 16 keypads and 16 zone expanders (8 per network)
Up to 8 output modules (4 per network)
16 independent areas each with 3 part arms
16 area arm suites
200 programmable User codes
Various finishes available
RKP8/16Plus
LED Arming keypad
2 fully programmable EOL zones
CANNOT be used for Programming
Icon Guide
2000 Event Log (time & date stamped)
5 programmable panel outputs (4 x 1A & 3A relay)
2.5 Amp power supply
Premier Elite 640
LCDLP Metal Flush or Surface Mount
0 fully programmable Double Pole or End Of Line zones
English UK
Keypad
Expandable to 640 zones via keypads and zone expanders
8 x 4-wire data network (standard 7/0.2 alarm cable)
Up to 64 keypads and 64 zone expanders (8 per network)
Up to 64 output modules (8 per network)
64 independent areas each with 3 part arms
64 area arm suites
500 programmable User codes
5000 Event Log (time & date stamped)
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
y 0 n
O R
C
P
A N
5 programmable panel outputs (4 x 1A & 3A relay)
2.5 Amp power supply
Premier Elite 24, 48, 48-W, 88, 168 & 640
32 Event Alarm Log
PC-Com/printer port
500 Event Mandatory Log
8 programmable digicom outputs (100mA each)
F
Iconic
Keypad
P
b
e
32 character zone text
Facility for Plug-on Digimodem (Com300/2400/)
Facility for Plug-on IP Module (ComIP/Chiron/WebWayOne/Emizon)
Facility for a plug-on RedCARE/RM8 Relay Module (Not Premier
24)
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
y 0 n
B R
C
s
A N
Remote Keypads
LCD
32 character text display
Built in piezo sounder
2 fully programmable DP or EOL zones
1 fully programmable output (100mA -ve applied)
Fully adjustable back-lighting, normally bright, dim or off, changing to
bright during entry or following a key press
Programmable ‘Info.’ LED
LCDL
ALL the features of the LCD plus:
Larger 32 character text display
Speaker output
English
Keypad
F
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
y 0 n
P
b
e
B R
C
s
A N
LCDP
LCD with a built in Proximity Tag Reader
LCDLP
LCDL with a built in Proximity Tag Reader
INS176-8
5
--- PAGE BREAK ---
System Overview
Premier Elite 24, 48, 88, 168 & 640 Installation Manual
Keys
ICONS
B
C
s
A
R
N
y
n
UK English
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
C
A
R
N
y
y
n
English
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
B
C
s
A
R
N
y
y
n
LED's
=
Power
= Armed/Info
=
OK
Omit
=
Ready
=
Ready
= Service
Com2400
Multi-protocol communicator supporting Fast Format, Contact
ID, SIA Level II and EasyCom Pager and SMS Messaging
protocols
2400-baud modem for remote uploading and downloading
using the Wintex UDL software and a PC
Sends SMS text messages to mobile phones
8 fully programmable DP or EOL zones
8 fully programmable outputs (100mA -ve applied each)
Multi-protocol communicator supporting Fast Format, Contact ID
and SIA Level II protocols via TCP/IP
High speed modem for remote uploading and downloading using
the Wintex UDL software and a PC
For use with ADSL/DSL/Broadband/WAN/LAN etc.
ComGSM
Provides a GSM telephone path for Com300 & Com2400 Digital
Communicators
Sends SMS text messages to mobile phones
9600-baud modem for remote uploading and downloading
using the Wintex UDL software and a PC
Remotely wired
PC-Com
For connecting a PC to the control panel via an RS232 Serial
port allowing local uploading and downloading using Wintex
UDL software
USB-Com
2 loops x 30 fully programmable iD zones
For connecting a PC to the control panel via a USB 1.0 or 2.0
port allowing local uploading and downloading using Wintex
UDL software
iD biscuit technology
PRINT-Com
Plug-on
Output Expanders
OP16
16 fully programmable outputs (100mA each)
1 fault output (100mA -ve applied)
Can be connected to mimic panels to give zone indication
Can be connected to relays and sounders
RM8 Relay Module
Other Devices
Programmable auxiliary input
“iD” is a registered trade mark of Chloride Safety System Limited.
Arm, Disarm, Reset the alarm, turn outputs on and off, omit
zones and send messages to the control panel using SMS text
messages
Speaker output
60iXD
For use with an analogue telephone line (REN = 1)
ComIP
Zone Expanders
8XP
For use with an analogue telephone line (REN = 1)
Plug-on relay card (RedCARE footprint)
8 separate inputs for standalone operation
8 x 3Amp relay outputs (n/o, n/c, com)
For connecting a serial printer to the control panel
Memory Module (not 640)
Fits onto the expansion port to provide a 10,000 event log.
Battery Splitter
Allows two backup batteries to be connected to a single set of
battery terminals, and will provide appropriate monitoring and
charging for each.
External Sounders
Texecom supply a range of external sounders
Output ‘ON’ LED indication
Communicators
Com300
Multi-protocol communicator supporting Fast Format, Contact
ID, SIA Level II and EasyCom Pager protocols
300-baud modem for remote uploading and downloading using
the Wintex UDL software and a PC
6
INS176-8
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Premier Elite 24, 48, 88, 168 & 640 Installation Manual
Installation
3. Installation
Installation Sequence
Control Panel
Before attempting to install the alarm system, read this section. Once
you have an overall understanding of the installation sequence,
carefully work through each step.
Mounting
1: Design the Layout
Make a rough sketch of the premises to get an idea of where the
alarm detection devices, keypads, zone expanders etc. are to be
located.
Mount the control panel on a flat, plumb wall using at least three
screws of appropriate size.
Mains cabling must be secured (e.g. with a cable tie) to one of
the anchor points provided.
2: Mounting the Panel
The control panel should be mounted in a dry area close to an
unswitched AC power source and the incoming telephone line (if
using a communicator).
You must complete all wiring before connecting the battery or
applying AC mains to the control panel.
3: Install the Keypads and Zone Expanders
Mount and connect the keypads, zone expanders and output
modules to the control panel (see page 20 for wiring details).
4: Install the Alarm Detection Devices
Install the detection devices, PIR’s, Contacts, PA Buttons etc. and
connect them to the control panel (see page 28 for wiring details).
It is essential to ensure that none of the fixing slots or cable
entries are accessible after fixing.
Wiring the Control Panel
WARNING: ELECTRICITY CAN KILL
BEFORE connecting the control panel ALWAYS
disconnect the supply at the consumer unit.
If in ANY doubt consult a qualified electrician.
5: Install the External Sounder
IMPORTANT
SAFETY
INFORMATION.
HAZARDOUS
VOLTAGES INSIDE, NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS, NO
USER ACCESS.
Install the external sounder and connect to the control panel (see
page 30 for wiring details).
6: Other Wiring
Complete all other wiring including speakers, telephone line and
output connections etc. (see pages 30 - 31 for details).
7: Applying Power to the Control Panel
Once steps 1 to 6 are completed, power can be applied to the
control panel.
When applying power for the first time, the factory default settings
must be loaded (see page 35 for details). Power should always be
connected in the following order:
Connect the red battery lead to the positive terminal of the
battery and then connect the black battery lead to the negative
terminal
ONLY connect the mains supply to the mains terminal block,
NEVER connect the mains supply directly to the PCB.
ALWAYS refer to National Wiring Regulations when conducting
installation.
An appropriate and readily accessible disconnection device
(e.g. an unswitched fused spur) MUST be provided as part of
the installation.
The disconnection device must NOT be fitted in a flexible cord.
Where identification of the neutral in the mains supply is NOT
possible a two-pole disconnection device MUST be used.
Use mains cable of adequate carrying capacity for the rated
current (i.e. at least 0.75mm2).
The panel will only become ‘live’ when the AC Mains is
connected or the ‘Battery Kick-start’ button is pressed.
Connect the AC mains
For a complete list of factory default settings, see the Quick
Reference Guide supplied with your panel.
8: Programming the Control Panel
Please refer to section 5 for instruction on programming the control
panel.
9: Testing the System
Test the system thoroughly to ensure that all features and functions
operate as required (see page 104 for details).
INS176-8
7
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Installation
Premier Elite 24, 48, 88, 168 & 640 Installation Manual
Premier Elite 24 Control Panel Layout Polymer
Premier Elite 48-W Control Panel Layout
ON
12 3 4
8
INS176-8
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Premier Elite 24, 48, 88, 168 & 640 Installation Manual
Installation
Control Panel Layout Metal All Models (168 shown)
INS176-8
9
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Installation
Premier Elite 24, 48, 88, 168 & 640 Installation Manual
Premier Elite 24 PCB Layout
1: Texecom PSU Connection
Connected to the Texecom Switch Mode Power Supply.
DO NOT CONNECT THE MAINS SUPPLY TO ANY TERMINALS ON
THE PCB.
2: Battery Kick-start Button
When powering up the panel without AC Mains present, this button
must be pressed in order to connect the battery.
If AC Mains is present this button does not need to be
pressed.
3: Earth Connection
Connects the PCB to earth
4: Battery Connections
A 12V rechargeable battery must be connected to these terminals in
order to provide continuous system operation in the event of an AC
Mains failure (see page 19 for details).
5: Digicom Power
These terminals provide power; and are normally used for connecting a
stand-alone communicator to the control panel (see page 31 for details).
6: External Sounder Connections
These terminals are used for connecting to an external sounder unit
(see page 30 for details).
7: Network Data Connections & LED’s
Networks provide connection for the keypads and zone expanders
The ‘+’ and ‘–’ terminals provide power whilst the ‘T’ transmits data
and ‘R’ receives data (see page 20 for details). The red LED indicates
that data is flowing out of the control panel and normally flashes very
quickly. The green LED indicates that data is flowing into the control
panel and normally flashes slowly, the green LED flashes faster as
more devices are connected (see page 20 for details).
8: Panel Output 1
OP1 is a low current (500mA ‘-ve’ applied) output (see page 31 for
wiring details). The output is also fully programmable (see page 69
for programming details).
12: Programmable Zones 1 - 8
These terminals provide the connections for the zones (see page 28
for wiring details). Each zone is fully programmable (see page 41 for
details).
13: Expander Port
The expansion port is used for plugging on a local zone expander (see
page 23 for details).
14: Com Port 2
Com Port 2 is a serial communications port and can be used for
connecting a PC running Wintex or any supported serial device to the
control panel (see page 86 for details).
15: Plug-on Communicator Connections
This socket provides connection for the plug-on communicator (see
page 33 for details).
16: Digicom Outputs
Outputs 1 to 8 are low current (100mA ‘-ve’ applied) and would
normally be used when connecting a stand-alone communicator to
the control panel (see page 31 for details). Each output is fully
programmable (see page 69 for details). A remote reset input and a
line fault input are also provided.
17: Flash Upgrade Port
For use with the Flasher interface to update panel firmware.
18: Box Tamper Connection
The micro switch provides tamper protection for the main control panel in
case of unauthorised access.
19: Com Port 1
Com Port 1 is a serial communications port and can be used for
connecting a PC running Wintex or any supported serial device to the
control panel (see page 86 for details).
20: Tamper Disable Link
This can be used to disable the box tamper when working with the
box lid removed.
9: SPK- Loudspeaker Connection
These terminals can be used for connecting up to one 16 or two
8loudspeakers (see page 30 for wiring details).
10: Auxiliary 12V Power
These terminals are for connecting devices that require 12V power
(protected by a 1A fuse).
11: Auxiliary/ Fault Connections
These terminals can be used for monitoring the tamper loop of an
auxiliary device (see page 30 for details).
10
INS176-8
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Premier Elite 24, 48, 88, 168 & 640 Installation Manual
Installation
21: Load Defaults Button
Press and hold this button whilst applying power to the control panel
to load the factory default settings. Press and hold this button for 7
seconds with power already on the panel to restore just the Engineer
code to the factory setting of
1234.
Loading the factory defaults can take up to 30 seconds to
complete.
Loading defaults will only be possible if the NVM has not been
locked (see page 56 for details).
For a complete list of factory defaults, see the Quick
Reference Guide section of this manual.
22: Expansion
The Expansion Port can be used for connecting a 60XiD Zone
Expander (see page 29 for details) or an AV Module (see page 33 for
details), X-10 Module or a Memory Module.
23: Heartbeat LED/Power Light
Flashes steadily to indicate that the control panel is functioning
correctly. If the light is ON or OFF all the time, then there could be a
problem (see page 35 for details).
24: Battery Charge Current Selector
When using a 7Ah standby battery the charge current selector should
be set to 300mA. If a 17Ah battery is connected (metal cabinet only)
the selector should be set to the 750mA position.
25: Engineers Keypad
A portable Engineers keypad can be plugged on here to allow easier
access for programming and testing.
When using a keypad as an Engineers keypad, the address
must be set to ‘10’ (see page 22 for details). The keypad zones
and lid tamper are not monitored.
F1 – F6: Protection Fuses (electronic PTC)
The following fuses are provided:
F1 (900mA) Auxiliary 12V Power fuse (electronic PTC)
F2 (900mA) Digicom Power (electronic PTC)
F3 (900mA) Network 1 fuse (electronic PTC)
F4 (900mA) Bell/Strobe fuse (electronic PTC)
F6 (1.6 Amp) Battery fuse (electronic PTC)
INS176-8
11
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Installation
Premier Elite 24, 48, 88, 168 & 640 Installation Manual
Premier Elite 48-W PCB Layout
ON
1 2 3 4
1: Battery Connections
A 12V rechargeable battery must be connected to these terminals in
order to provide continuous system operation in the event of an AC
Mains failure. (protected by 1.6 Amp PTC Fuse)
2: Digicom Power & Inputs
These terminals provide un-fused power; remote reset and line fault
inputs and are normally used for connecting a stand-alone
communicator to the control panel.
3: Digicom Outputs
Outputs 1 to 8 are low current (100mA ‘-ve’ applied) and would
normally be used when connecting a stand-alone communicator to
the control panel. Each output is fully programmable.
4: Engineers Keypad
A portable Engineers keypad can be plugged on here to allow easier
access for programming and testing.
When using a keypad as an Engineers keypad, the address
must be set to ‘10’. The keypad zones and lid tamper
are not monitored.
5: Network Data Connections
Network 1 provides connection for the keypads and zone expanders.
The ‘+’ and ‘–’ terminals provide power whilst the ‘T’ transmits data
and ‘R’ receives data.
6: Network Data Indicators
The red LED indicates that data is flowing out of the control panel
and normally flashes very quickly. The green LED indicates that data
is flowing into the control panel and normally flashes slowly, the
green LED flashes faster as more devices are connected.
7: Communication Ports
Com Port 1 is a serial communications port and can be used for
connecting a PC running Wintex or any supported serial device to the
control panel.
Com Port 2 is a serial communications port and can be used for
connecting a PC running Wintex or any supported serial device to the
control panel.
8: Auxiliary 12V Power
These terminals are for connecting devices that require 12V power
(protected by a 0.9A PTC fuse).
9: Expansion
The Expansion Port can be used for connecting a 60XiD Zone
Expander (see page 29 for details) or an AV Module (see page 33 for
details), X-10 Module or a Memory Module.
12
10: External Sounder Connections
These terminals are used for connecting to an external sounder unit.
11: Load Defaults Button
Press and hold this button whilst applying power to the control panel
to load the factory default settings. Press and hold this button for 7
seconds with power already on the panel to restore just the Engineer
code to the factory setting of
1234.
Loading the factory defaults can take up to 30 seconds to
complete.
Loading defaults will only be possible if the NVM has not been
locked.
For a complete list of factory defaults, see the Quick Reference
Guide supplied on the enclosed CD.
12: Auxiliary/Fault Connections
These terminals can be used for monitoring the tamper loop of an
auxiliary device (see page 30 for details).
13: Loudspeaker Connections
These terminals can be used for connecting up to one 8 or two
16loudspeakers.
14: Panel Outputs
Outputs 1 & 2 are 500mA ‘-ve’. These outputs are all fully
programmable.
15: Zone Connections
4 Fully programmable zone inputs
16: Ricochet™ Network LED’s
Green LED = Data received by the expander from the panel Red LED
= Data transmitted by the expander to the panel. (The flash rate
depends on the mode and RF activity)
17: Enable 2 wire smoke
Panel Output 1 can be used for connecting up to 10, 12V 2-Wire
smoke detectors.
18: Options Switch
Use to select the receiver functionality.
Switch 1 OFF =not used on 48-W.
Switch 2 OFF = 48-W RICOCHET™Mode
ON = Not Used
Switch 3 ON = Impaq Contact-W Wired Input 2 will report as Tamper
(default)
OFF = input 2 will report as an Alarm.
Switch 4 OFF Walk test (see page Error! Bookmark not defined.)
INS176-8
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Premier Elite 24, 48, 88, 168 & 640 Installation Manual
Installation
19: RICOCHET™ Eng keypad connection
An engineer’s keypad (LCD keypad and interface lead) can be
temporarily plugged onto this connector to allow system
programming and testing. Set the keypad address switches to all
ON.
20: RICOCHET™Firmware Flash Port
Connections for flasher interface to update RICOCHET™ receiver
firmware.
21: Commission Mode Jumper
Fit when learning and placing devices, remove once complete.
22: Antenna
RF antenna
23: RF LED’s
Left = RED Transmit, Middle = GREEN Receive, Right = RED
Wireless Network Tick.
24: Plug-on Communicator Connections
This socket provides connection for COM300/COM2400 plug-on
communicators via the lead provided.
25: Ricochet™ Comm. Port Connection
Serial communications port for connecting to a PC via PC Com/USB
Com or Com IP for use with RICOCHET™ Monitor Software.
26: Cover Tamper
Provides tamper protection for the control panel.
27: Heartbeat LED/Power Light
Flashes steadily to indicate that the control panel is functioning
correctly. If the light is ON or OFF all the time, then there could be a
problem.
28: Cover Tamper Disable
Disables the lid tamper
29: Flash Programming Port
For upgrading the panel firmware.
30: Battery Charge Selection
Select .03A or 0.75A battery charging current
31: Current Reading Pads
To calculate the current draw of the control panel, measure the
voltage across the two pads and multiply by 10 i.e. Reading = 34mV
(x10) = 340mV = 340mA.
32: Battery Kick-start Button
When powering up the panel without AC Mains present, this button
must be pressed in order to connect the battery. If AC Mains is
present this button does not need to be pressed.
33: Power Supply Connection
Only for use with the Texecom PSU.
DO NOT CONNECT ANY OTHER MAINS SUPPLY TO THESE
TERMINALS
PTC Protection Fuses
The following fuses are provided:
F6 PTC (0.9A) Auxiliary 12V Power fuse
F4 PTC (0.9 A) Network 1 fuse
F5 PTC (0.9 A) Bell/Strobe fuse
INS176-8
13
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Installation
Premier Elite 24, 48, 88, 168 & 640 Installation Manual
Premier Elite 48/88/168 PCB Layout
1: Texecom PSU Connection
Connected to the Texecom Switch Mode Power Supply.
DO NOT CONNECT THE MAINS SUPPLY TO THE AC INPUT
TERMINALS ON THE PCB.
2: Battery Connections
A 12V rechargeable battery must be connected to these terminals in
order to provide continuous system operation in the event of an AC
Mains failure (see page 19 for details).
3: Digicom Power & Inputs
These terminals provide unfused power; remote reset and line fault inputs
and are normally used for connecting a stand-alone communicator to the
control panel (see page 31 for details).
4: Digicom Outputs
Outputs 1 to 8 are low current (100mA ‘-ve’ applied) and would
normally be used when connecting a stand-alone communicator to
the control panel (see page 31 for details). Each output is fully
programmable (see page 69 for details).
5: Engineers Keypad
A portable Engineers keypad can be plugged on here to allow easier
access for programming and testing.
When using a keypad as an Engineers keypad, the address
must be set to ‘10’ (see page 22 for details). The keypad zones
and lid tamper are not monitored.
6: Network Data Connections
Networks provide connection for the keypads and zone expanders.
The ‘+’ and ‘–’ terminals provide power whilst the ‘T’ transmits data
and ‘R’ receives data (see page 20 for details).
7: Auxiliary 12V Power
These terminals are for connecting devices that require 12V power
(protected by a 1A fuse).
8: Programmable Zones 1 - 8
These terminals provide the connections for the zones (see page 28
for wiring details). Each zone is fully programmable (see page 41 for
details).
9: External Sounder Connections
These terminals are used for connecting to an external sounder unit
(see page 30 for details).
14
10: Auxiliary/Fault Connections
These terminals can be used for monitoring the tamper loop of an
auxiliary device (see page 30 for details).
11: Loudspeaker Connections
These terminals can be used for connecting up to one 16 or two
8loudspeakers (see page 30 for details).
12: Panel Outputs
Outputs 1 & 2 are 500mA ‘-ve’ applied, outputs 3 & 4 are 500mA
‘+ve’ applied and output 5 is a clean contact relay (see page 31 for
wiring details). These outputs are all fully programmable (see page
68 for details).
Panel outputs 3, 4 and 5 are only available on the 88 and 168.
13: Plug-on Communicator Connections
This socket provides connection for the plug-on communicator (see
page 33 for details).
14: Box Tamper Connection
The box tamper micro switch is connected here. The micro switch
provides tamper protection for the main control panel in case of
unauthorised access. To disable the box tamper, remove the micro
switch lead and fit a jumper link across the two pins.
15: Plug-on RedCARE/Dualcom Connections
These pins provide connections for a plug-on RedCARE, Dualcom,
Digicom or RM8 Relay module. Each output is fully programmable
(see page 69 for details).
When a device is plugged on to these pins, not all outputs may
be available, please refer to the relevant documentation for
details.
16: Flash Upgrade Port
For use with the Flasher interface to update panel firmware.
17: Battery Kick-start Button
When powering up the panel without AC Mains present, this button
must be pressed in order to connect the battery.
If AC Mains is present this button does not need to be
pressed.
INS176-8
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Premier Elite 24, 48, 88, 168 & 640 Installation Manual
Installation
18: Communication Ports
Com Port 1 is a serial communications port and can be used for
connecting a PC running Wintex or any supported serial device to the
control panel (see page 86 for details).
Com Port 2 is a serial communications port and can be used for
connecting a PC running Wintex or any supported serial device to the
control panel (see page 86 for details).
19: Network Data Indicators
The red LED indicates that data is flowing out of the control panel
and normally flashes very quickly. The green LED indicates that data
is flowing into the control panel and normally flashes slowly, the
green LED flashes faster as more devices are connected (see page
20 for details).
For a complete list of factory defaults, see the Quick
Reference Guide supplied with your panel.
20: Load Defaults Button
Press and hold this button whilst applying power to the control panel
to load the factory default settings. Press and hold this button for 7
seconds with power already on the panel to restore just the Engineer
code to the factory setting of
1234.
Loading the factory defaults can take up to 30 seconds to
complete.
Loading defaults will only be possible if the NVM has not been
locked (see page 56 for details).
21: Expansion
The Expansion Port can be used for connecting a 60XiD Zone
Expander (see page 29 for details) or an AV Module (see page 33 for
details), X-10 Module or a Memory Module.
22: Heartbeat LED/Power Light
Flashes steadily to indicate that the control panel is functioning
correctly. If the light is ON or OFF all the time, then there could be a
problem (see page 35 for details).
23: Current Reading Pads
To calculate the current draw of the control panel, measure the
voltage across the two pads and multiply by 10 i.e. Reading = 34mV
(x10) = 340mV = 340mA.
24: NVM 1 & 2
All system programming data and the event log is stored in one or
two non-volatile memory devices.
F1 - F5: Protection Fuses (48, 88 and 168)
The following fuses are provided:
F1 (1Amp) Auxiliary 12V Power fuse
F2 (1.6 Amp) Battery fuse (electronic PTC)
F3 (1 Amp) Network 1 fuse
F4 (1 Amp) Bell/Strobe fuse
F5 (1 Amp) Network 2 fuse (168 only)
INS176-8
15
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Installation
Premier Elite 24, 48, 88, 168 & 640 Installation Manual
Premier Elite 640 PCB Layout
1: Texecom PSU Connection
Connected to the Texecom Switch Mode Power Supply.
DO NOT CONNECT THE MAINS SUPPLY TO THE AC INPUT
TERMINALS ON THE PCB.
2: Battery Connections
A 12V rechargeable battery must be connected to these terminals in
order to provide continuous system operation in the event of an AC
Mains failure (see page 19 for details).
3: Digicom Power & Inputs
These terminals provide unfused power; remote reset and line fault inputs
and are normally used for connecting a stand-alone communicator to the
control panel (see page 31 for details).
4: Digicom Outputs
Outputs 1 to 8 are low current (100mA ‘-ve’ applied) and would
normally be used when connecting a stand-alone communicator to
the control panel (see page 31 for details). Each output is fully
programmable (see page 69 for details).
5: Engineers Keypad
A portable Engineers keypad can be plugged on here to allow easier
access for programming and testing.
When using a keypad as an Engineers keypad, the address
must be set to ‘10’ (see page 22 for details). The keypad zones
and lid tamper are not monitored.
10: Auxiliary 12V Power
These terminals are for connecting devices that require 12V power
(protected by a 1A fuse).
11: Panel Outputs
Outputs 1 & 2 are 500mA ‘-ve’ applied, outputs 3 & 4 are 500mA
‘+ve’ applied and output 5 is a clean contact relay (see page 31 for
wiring details). These outputs are all fully programmable (see page
68 for details).
12: Plug-on Communicator Connections
This socket provides connection for the plug-on communicator (see
page 33 for details).
13: Box Tamper Connection
The box tamper micro switch is connected here. The micro switch
provides tamper protection for the main control panel in case of
unauthorised access. To disable the box tamper, remove the micro
switch lead and fit a jumper link across the two pins.
14: Com Port 3
Com Port 3 is a serial communications port and can be used for
connecting a PC running Wintex or any supported serial device to the
control panel (see page 86 for details).
15: Plug-on RedCARE/Dualcom Connections
These pins provide connections for a plug-on RedCARE, Dualcom,
Digicom or RM8 Relay module. Each output is fully programmable
(see page 69 for details).
6: Network Data Connections
Networks 1 - 8 provide connection for the keypads and zone
expanders. The ‘+’ and ‘–’ terminals provide power whilst the ‘T’
transmits data and ‘R’ receives data (see page 20 for details).
7: External Sounder Connections
These terminals are used for connecting to an external sounder unit
(see page 30 for details).
16: NVM 1 & 2
All system programming data and the event log is stored in one or
two non-volatile memory devices.
8: Auxiliary/Fault Connections
These terminals can be used for monitoring the tamper loop of an
auxiliary device (see page 30 for details).
17: Flash Upgrade Port
For use with the Flasher interface to update panel firmware.
When a device is plugged on to these pins, not all outputs may
be available, please refer to the relevant documentation for
details.
9: Loudspeaker Connections
These terminals can be used for connecting up to one 16Ω or two 8Ω
loudspeakers (see page 30 for details).
16
INS176-8
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Premier Elite 24, 48, 88, 168 & 640 Installation Manual
Installation
18: Communication Ports 1&2
Com Port 1 is a serial communications port and can be used for
connecting a PC running Wintex or any supported serial device to the
control panel (see page 86 for details).
22: Battery Kick-start Button
When powering up the panel without AC Mains present, this button
must be pressed in order to connect the battery.
Com Port 2 is a serial communications port and can be used for
connecting a PC running Wintex or any supported serial device to the
control panel (see page 86 for details).
If AC Mains is present this button does not need to be
pressed.
23: Current Reading Pads
To calculate the current draw of the control panel, measure the
voltage across the two pads and multiply by 10 i.e. Reading = 34mV
(x10) = 340mV = 340mA.
19: Expansion
The Expansion Port can be used for connecting a 60XiD Zone
Expander (see page 29 for details) or an AV Module (see page 33 for
details), X-10 Module or a Memory Module.
20: Load Defaults Button
Press and hold this button whilst applying power to the control panel
to load the factory default settings. Press and hold this button for 7
seconds with power already on the panel to restore just the Engineer
code to the factory setting of
1234.
Loading the factory defaults can take up to 60 seconds to
complete.
Loading defaults will only be possible if the NVM has not been
locked (see page 56 for details).
21: Heartbeat LED/Power Light
Flashes steadily to indicate that the control panel is functioning
correctly. If the light is ON or OFF all the time, then there could be a
problem (see page 35 for details).
INS176-8
F1 – F14: Protection Fuses
The following electronic fuses are provided:
F3 (1600 mA) Battery
F4 (250mA) Speaker
F5 (900mA) Network 1
F6 (900mA) Bell/Strobe
F7 (900mA) Network 2
F8 (900mA) Network 3
F9 (900mA) Network 4
F10 (900mA) Network 5
F11 (900mA) Network 6
F12 (900mA) Network 7
F13 (900mA) Network 8
F14 (900mA) Auxiliary 12V
17
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Installation
Premier Elite 24, 48, 88, 168 & 640 Installation Manual
Power Supply Ratings
If installing to EN50131 or PD6662, the system standby times in the event of a mains power failure vary depending on the grade and how AC fail is
signalled:
When calculating the current consumption of the system you must include the current taken by the control panel and all the devices that it
powers. If the total current exceeds the “Rated Output” for the grade you are installing to then an additional power supply is required
Standby and Recharge Times
Premier Elite 24 (Metal)
Current
Current Consumption
95mA
Maximum Current Available
0.75A charge
1.0A
0.3A charge
1.9A
Rated Output
Battery
Arrangement
1 x 7Ah
1 x 17Ah
Battery
Charge
0.3A
0.3A
0.75A
Rated Output (Amps)
24h
30h
60h
0.19A
0.13A
0.021A
0.61A
0.47A
0.18A
0.61A
0.47A
0.18A
12h
0.48A
1.32A
1.0A
Standby and Recharge Times
EN50131-1
Minimum Standby
Period
Maximum Recharge
Time
PD6662
Standby Period
Maximum Recharge
Time
Grade 1
12h
Grade 2
12h
Grade 3
30h *
72 Hrs
72 Hrs
24 Hrs
Grade 1
12 Hrs
72 Hrs
Grade 2
12 Hrs
72 Hrs
Grade 3
24 Hrs **
24 Hrs
EN50131-1
Minimum Standby
Period
Maximum Recharge
Time
PD6662
Standby Period
Maximum Recharge
Time
Battery
Arrangement
1 x 7Ah
Recharge
Time
< 24Hrs
< 24Hrs
< 72Hrs
1 x 17Ah
Battery Charge Selector
0.3 A
0.75 A
0.3 A
95mA
Maximum Current Available
0.3A charge
1.1A
Rated Output
Rated Output (Amps)
12h
0.48A
Battery
Charge
0.3A
EN50131-1
Minimum Standby Period
Maximum Recharge Time
PD6662
Standby Period
Maximum Recharge Time
Grade 1
12h
72 Hrs
Grade 1
12 Hrs
72 Hrs
Grade 2
12h
72 Hrs
Grade 2
12 Hrs
72 Hrs
Battery
Arrangement
1 x 7Ah
Grade 2
12 Hrs
72 Hrs
Grade 3
24 Hrs **
24 Hrs
Recharge
Time
< 24Hrs
< 24Hrs
< 72Hrs
1 x 17Ah
Battery Charge Selector
0.3 A
0.75 A
0.3 A
Premier Elite 640
Current
Current
125mA
Maximum Current Available
0.75A charge
1.0A
0.3A charge
1.9A
Rated Output
Battery
Charge
0.3A
0.3A
0.75A
12h
0.458A
1.29A
1.0A
Battery
Arrangement
1 x 17Ah
125mA
Maximum Current Available
0.75A charge
1.0A
Battery
Charge
0.75A
12h
1.0A
Rated Output (Amps)
24h
30h
0.558A
0.416A
60h
0.133A
Grade 1
12h
Grade 2
12h
Grade 3
30h *
72 Hrs
72 Hrs
24 Hrs
Grade 1
12 Hrs
72 Hrs
Grade 2
12 Hrs
72 Hrs
Grade 3
24 Hrs **
24 Hrs
*30h if MAINS FAIL is reported to ARC, otherwise 60h
**This time may be halved if mains failure is signalled to an ARC
Current
Current Consumption
Rated Output (Amps)
24h
30h
60h
0.166A
0.108A
0.583A
0.441A
0.158A
0.583A
0.441A
0.1588A
150mA
Maximum Current Available
0.3A charge
1.0A
Rated Output
Battery
Arrangement
1 x 7Ah
Premier Elite 48/88/168
18
Grade 1
12 Hrs
72 Hrs
Premier Elite 48-W
Standby and Recharge Times
1 x 17Ah
24 Hrs
Jumper Settings
EN50131-1
Minimum Standby
Period
Maximum Recharge
Time
PD6662
Standby Period
Maximum Recharge
Time
Current
Battery
Arrangement
1 x 7Ah
72 Hrs
Standby and Recharge Times
Premier Elite 24 (Polymer)
Current Consumption
72 Hrs
Rated Output
Jumper Settings
Battery
Arrangement
1 x 7Ah
Grade 3
30h *
**This time may be halved if mains failure is signalled to an ARC
**This time may be halved if mains failure is signalled to an ARC
Current Consumption
Grade 2
12h
*30h if MAINS FAIL is reported to ARC, otherwise 60h
Current Consumption
*30h if MAINS FAIL is reported to ARC, otherwise 60h
Grade 1
12h
Rated Output (Amps)
12h
0.433A
Battery
Charge
0.3A
Standby and Recharge Times
EN50131-1
Minimum Standby Period
Maximum Recharge Time
PD6662
Standby Period
Maximum Recharge Time
Grade 1
12h
72 Hrs
Grade 1
12 Hrs
72 Hrs
Grade 2
12h
72 Hrs
Grade 2
12 Hrs
72 Hrs
INS176-8
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Premier Elite 24, 48, 88, 168 & 640 Installation Manual
Installation
Connecting AC Mains
The AC Mains supply is connected to a 3 way ‘Euro Type’ fused
terminal block, which is fitted with a 3.15A medium/slow blow fuse.
All other wiring MUST be carried out before AC mains is
connected to the control panel.
After connecting the AC Mains, fit the mains cover, this can be
found in the spares bag.
Connecting Batteries
If installing to PD6662: 2004 then only One 12V 7Ah battery or 12V
17Ah battery can be fitted inside the control panel to provide
continued operation in the event of an AC mains failure, otherwise,
two 12V 7Ah batteries can be connected.
All other wiring MUST be carried out before the battery is
connected to the control panel.
Connect the red battery lead to the positive terminal of the battery
and then connect the black battery lead to the negative terminal.
The panel will only become ‘live’ when the AC Mains is
connected or the ‘Battery Kick-start’ button is pressed.
Two batteries can be fitted and still comply with PD6662:2004
if the Battery Splitter is used.
INS176-8
19
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Installation
Premier Elite 24, 48, 88, 168 & 640 Installation Manual
Connecting Devices to the Network
Before connecting keypads, zone expanders and output modules,
isolate ALL power from the control panel (AC Mains & Battery). Do
not continue if there is still power present on the control panel.
Whichever method of wiring configuration is used, ensure that the
voltage between the ‘+’ and ‘–’ terminals at each device is no lower
than 10.0V when the system is running on the standby battery.
The table below shows maximum cable runs when one keypad or
expander is installed using standard 7/0.2 alarm cable with various
loads:
Connecting devices with power still present on the control
panel may damage the device or control panel and invalidate
any warranty.
Configuration
Keypads, zone expanders and output modules are all connected to the
same network terminals located at the bottom left hand corner of the
control panel and may be connected serially (daisy chain), in parallel
(star) or any combination of the two (see Figure 1, page 21 for details).
No more than 8 zone expanders, 8 keypads and 4 output modules
can be connected to each network.
The maximum number of devices that can be connected in total
will depend on the control panel fitted.
Whenever new devices are connected to the networks, they must be
confirmed onto the system using the ‘Confirm Devices’ menu option
(see page 109 for details).
Wiring the Network
The networks are made up of four terminals incorporating power and
data. To ensure correct operation, all four terminals on the device
must be connected to the corresponding terminals on the control
panel, or previous device (see Figure 1, page 21 for details). The
table below shows each terminal and its description:
Terminal
Description
+
+12V Supply
-
0V Supply
T
Transmit Data
R
Receive Data
250m
2. Expander + 2 PIR’s @15mA
250m
3. Expander + 8 PIR’s @15mA
100m
4. As No. 3 + 16 Speaker
30m
Distances of up to 1km can be achieved between the control panel and
a device. However, a power supply must be installed close to the
device to power it locally, this will help to overcome voltage drop
caused by the long cable run.
Overcoming Voltage Drop
There are several ways to overcome voltage drop:
Use thicker lower resistance cable. Standard 7/0.2 alarm cable
has a resistance of 8 per 100m
Double up on the power connections – this will require using a 6
or 8-core cable rather than a 4-core cable
Install a power supply to power the device locally, remember to
common the two negative connections
Installing a Power Supply
When a power supply is installed, the 0V connections on the power
supply must be connected through to 0V on the control panel and
the +12V connection between the control panel and the device must
be disconnected (see Figure 2, page 21 for details).
Network Diagnostics
Devices can be connected using 4-core cable. However, it is recommended
that 6 or 8-core cable is used as the spare cores can be used to ‘Double Up’
on the power connections if needed.
Standard 7/0.2 alarm cable can be used for most installations.
However, under certain conditions it may be necessary to use
screened cable.
Each network has two LED’s to indicate data flow. The red LED
indicates data flowing out of the ‘T’ terminal and the green LED
indicates data flowing into the ‘R’ terminal. The table below shows
each LED status and its meaning:
LED Status
20
branch
when
using
the
star
(parallel)
When using a daisy chain (series) configuration the maximum
distance will depend on the number of devices connected on
the chain. The more devices that are connected, the shorter the
distance to the last device (this is due to voltage drop in the
cable)
‘T’ Wire IN
Normal
Normal
Red LED On
Panel Fault
Cable Short
Red LED Off
Panel Fault
Panel Fault
LED Status
‘R’ Wire OUT
‘R’ Wire IN
Green LED Flashing
Panel Fault
Normal
Green LED On
Panel Fault
Cable Short
Green LED Off
Normal
No Data From Devices
The maximum recommended distance for devices when using
standard 7/0.2 alarm cable is:
250m for each
configuration
‘T’ Wire OUT
Red LED Flashing
Cable Distances
Max. Cable Run
1. Keypad + 2 PIR’s @15mA
The LED’s are provided as an aid for fault finding and therefore
should not be completely relied upon to indicate that there is a
fault.
INS176-8
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Premier Elite 24, 48, 88, 168 & 640 Installation Manual
Installation
Figure 1: Network Connections (250m without additional power supply).
Figure 2: Network Connections (1km with additional power supply).
INS176-8
21
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Installation
Premier Elite 24, 48, 88, 168 & 640 Installation Manual
Zone Numbering
Remote Keypads
The table below shows the zone allocation when the keypads are
installed:
Keypad Layout
Connecting Keypads
Keypads are connected to the network terminals located at the
bottom left hand corner of the control panel (see pages 20 & 21 for
details).
Zones
(Network 1)
Zones
(Network 2)
1
Unmapped
Unmapped
2
Unmapped
Unmapped
3
Unmapped
Unmapped
4
Unmapped
Unmapped
5*
Unmapped
Unmapped
6*
Unmapped
Unmapped
7*
Unmapped
Unmapped
8*
Unmapped
Unmapped
Address
Zones
(Network 3,4 & 5)
Zones
(Network 6 7 & 8)
1-8 **
Unmapped
Unmapped
The zones inside the keypads are not seen by the system until
they have been mapped to a zone number (see page 65 for
details).
* 88 168 only
Keypad Addressing
Each keypad must be assigned a different address using the DIL
switches located on the left hand side of the PCB. The table below
shows the keypad addressing:
Address
DIL 1
DIL 2
DIL 3
DIL 4
1
On or off
Off
Off
Off
1
2
3
4
2
Off
On
Off
Off
1
2
3
4
3
Off
Off
On
Off
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
4
Off
Off
Off
On
5*
On
Off
Off
On
1
2
3
4
6*
Off
On
Off
On
1
2
3
4
7*
Off
Off
On
On
1 2 3 4
8*
On
Off
On
On
1 2 3 4
Engineers
On
On
On
On
1 2 3 4
Address
Never set two keypads on the same network to the same
address.
When using a keypad as an Engineer’s keypad, the DIL
switches must all be ‘On’.
* 88 168 & 640 only
** 640 only
Keypad Output
The remote keypad has one programmable output, which can be
used to drive auxiliary devices such as LED’s, sounders or relays etc.
Wire as per Panel Outputs shown on page 31 (see page 68 for
details). The electrical characteristics for the output are shown below:
Output
Max Current
Type
1
100mA
Switched -ve
Keypad Speaker Output (LCDL/LCDLP Only)
The LCDL and LCDLP keypads have an output that can be used for
driving up to one 16 or two 8 loudspeakers (see page 30 for
details).
The speaker volume is also fully adjustable (see page 65 for
details).
Programmable ‘Info.’ LED
The ‘Info.’ LED on the front of the keypad can be programmed to
mimic the keypad output or show the armed status of an area (see
page 65 for details).
Keypad Zones
Adjustable Backlighting
The keypad has two programmable zones (see page 28 for details).
Each zone is also fully programmable (see page 41 for details).
To adjust the keypad backlighting press the YES key for 5 seconds,
then with the YES key still pressed use
to increase or decrease
the backlighting until the required brightness is achieved, then
release both keys.
The backlight can only be adjusted when the keypad is not in a
menu.
Keypad Lid Tamper
The lid tamper of each keypad can be disabled if required using the
relevant keypad option in the Keypad Setup menu (see page 65 for
details).
22
INS176-8
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Premier Elite 24, 48, 88, 168 & 640 Installation Manual
Installation
8XE Zone Expander (24 Only)
8XP Zone Expander
The 8XE Zone Expander has:
Expander Layout
8 fully programmable zones
Aux 12V Output
Expander Layout
Connecting Expanders
The 8XE local zone expander plugs directly on to the terminals located
on the right hand side of the control panel (see below for details). To
install the local zone expander proceed as follows:
1.
Ensure that all power is removed from the control panel (mains and
battery) before attempting to fit the expander.
2.
Push the four support pillars (supplied) into the four locating
holes on the control panel PCB.
3.
Align the local expander connector with the 8 way plug (JP5) on
the control panel. Push expander into place, ensuring that all
four pillars clip into the four locating holes on the local
expander.
Connecting Expanders
Expanders are connected to the network terminals located at the
bottom of the control panel (see pages 20 & 21 for details).
Expander Addressing
Each Expander must be assigned a different address using the DIL
switches located in the centre of the PCB. The table below shows the
expander addressing:
Address
DIL 1
1*
2*
Zone Numbering
The table below shows the zone allocation when the expanders are
installed:
Configuration
Panel Zones
Expander Zones
8XE = Zones
1 to 8
9 to 16
8XE= Tampers
1 to 8
Tampers 1 to 8
Expander Zones
The expander has eight programmable zones (see page 28 for wiring
details). Each zone is also fully programmable (see page 41 for
programming details).
DIL 2
DIL 3
DIL 4
On or off
Off
Off
Off
1
2
3
4
Off
On
Off
Off
1
2
3
4
3**
Off
Off
On
Off
1
2
3
4
4**
Off
Off
Off
On
1
2
3
4
5***
On
Off
Off
On
1
2
3
4
6***
Off
On
Off
On
1
2
3
4
7***
Off
Off
On
On
1 2 3 4
8***
On
Off
On
On
1 2 3 4
Never set two expanders on the same network to the same
address.
* 24/48/88/168/640
** 48/88/168/640 only
*** 88 168 & 640 only
Expander Zones
The expander has eight programmable zones (see page 28 for wiring
details). Each zone is also fully programmable (see page 41 for
details).
INS176-8
23
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Installation
Premier Elite 24, 48, 88, 168 & 640 Installation Manual
Zone Numbering (24/48/88/168)
The table below shows the zone allocation when the expanders are
installed:
Address
Zones
(Network 1)
Zones
(Network 2)
1*
9 - 16
73 - 80
2*
17 - 24
81 - 88
3**
25 - 32
89 - 96
iProx Module
iProx Layout
Internal Sounder
Tamper
Off
On
Rel ay 1
Rem ote LED’s
RTE N /C N/O Com
L1- L2- L+
Network 2 can only be used on the 168.
Connection
The iProx Module is connected to the network terminals located at
the bottom of the control panel (see pages 20 & 21 for details).
For 640 see page 27
* 24/48/88/168/640
Addressing
** 48/88/168/640 only
The iProx Module is addressed as a keypad and will occupy a
keypad slot on the network. The unit must have a unique address,
which must not conflict with keypad or any other iProx Module on
the same network
*** 88 168 & 640 only
Expander Auxiliary Input
The expander has one programmable input. This auxiliary input can be
used to monitor auxiliary devices such as tamper loops etc. Wire as per
Aux Tamper shown on page 29 (see page 67 for details). The system
will respond as follows:
C2
129 - 136
Ext Coil
65 - 72
C1
8***
Ext Int Ext Int
121 - 128
R
113 - 120
57 - 64
T
49 - 56
7***
+
6***
1 2 3 4
Options
D1
105 - 112
D0
97 - 104
41 - 48
1 2 3 4
Address
ON
+
33 - 40
Spk
4**
5***
ON
The following table shows the addressing:
Address
DIL 1
DIL 2
DIL 3
DIL 4
1
On or off
Off
Off
Off
1
2
3
4
2
Off
On
Off
Off
1
2
3
4
3
Off
Off
On
Off
1
2
3
4
Off
Off
Off
On
1
2
3
4
Input Status
System Response
0V Applied
Input Secure
0V Removed
Input Active
4
EOL
Various *
5*
On
Off
Off
On
1
2
3
4
6*
Off
On
Off
On
1
2
3
4
7*
Off
Off
On
On
1 2 3 4
8*
On
Off
On
On
1 2 3 4
For further details on how the input status affects the system
please refer to page 67.
* For wiring details, see page 32.
Expander Outputs
The zone expander has eight programmable outputs, which can be
used to drive auxiliary devices such as LED’s, sounders or relays etc.
Wire as per Panel Outputs shown on page 31 (see page 68 for
details). The electrical characteristics for the outputs are shown
below:
Outputs
Max Current
Type
1 to 8
100mA
Switched -ve
Expander Speaker Output
The expander has an output that can be used for driving up to one 16
or two 8 loudspeakers (see page 30 for details).
Never set two modules on the same network to the same
address.
*88/168 & 640 only
Refer to the iProx Module manual for programming and operating
instructions.
60iXD Zone Expander
The 60iXD expander provides the following facilities:
Two iD loops each supporting up to 30 biscuits
Fused 12V output for powering detectors
Engineer’s keypad port for local iD diagnostics
Expander Com Port
The Com Port can be used to connect a PSU200 or amonitored
power supply.
Expander Lid Tamper
The lid tamper of each expander can be disabled if required by fitting
a jumper link across the centre and right hand pins of the ‘Enable
Tamper’ pins (JP2) leaving the left hand pin free. These pins are
located to the left of the address DIL switch just beneath the fuse.
24
INS176-8
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Premier Elite 24, 48, 88, 168 & 640 Installation Manual
Installation
Output Module Numbering
OP16 Output Expander
The table below shows the output allocation when the output
modules are installed,
Output Module Layout
Address
Outputs
(Network 1)
Outputs
(Network 2) **
1
Expander 1, 1 - 8
Expander 1, 1 - 8
2
Expander 2, 1 - 8
Expander 2, 1 - 8
3*
Expander 3, 1 - 8
Expander 3, 1 - 8
4*
Expander 4, 1 - 8
Expander 4, 1 - 8
5 **
Expander 5, 1 - 8
Expander 5, 1 - 8
6 **
Expander 6, 1 - 8
Expander 6, 1 - 8
7 **
Expander 7, 1 - 8
Expander 7, 1 - 8
8 **
Expander 8, 1 - 8
Expander 8, 1 - 8
Network 2 can only be used on the 168
* 88 and 168 only
** 168 only
for 640 see page 27
Outputs
Connecting Output Modules
Output modules are connected to the network terminals located at
the bottom left hand corner of the control panel (see pages 20 & 21
for details).
Output Module Addressing
Each output module must be assigned a different address using the
DIL switches located in the centre of the PCB.
The output module has 16 programmable outputs, which can be
used to drive auxiliary devices such as LED’s, sounders or relays etc.
Wire as per Panel Outputs shown on page 31 (see page 68 for
details). The electrical characteristics for the outputs are shown below:
Bank
Outputs
Max Current
Type
1
1 to 8
100mA
Switched -ve
2
1 to 8
100mA
Switched -ve
The table below shows the expander addressing:
Tamper Output
Address
DIL 1
DIL 2
DIL 3
DIL 4
1
On or off
Off
Off
Off
1
2
3
4
2
Off
On
Off
Off
1
2
3
4
3*
Off
Off
On
Off
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
4*
Off
Off
Off
On
5 **
On
Off
Off
On
1
2
3
4
6 **
Off
On
Off
On
1
2
3
4
7 **
Off
Off
On
On
1 2 3 4
8 **
On
Off
On
On
1 2 3 4
The tamper switch on the output module is connected to the tamper
output at the top of the module. If monitoring of the lid tamper is
required, this output must be connected to a suitable input on the
control panel or zone expander.
* 88 and 168 only
** 168 only
In order for an output module to mimic zone expander outputs,
the output module must be addressed the same as the zone
expander that it is mimicking.
Any combination of addresses can be used on each output
module i.e. Bank 1 can be addressed to mimic expander 3
and Bank 2 can be addressed to mimic expander 8.
Bank 1 switch sets the address of the device that Bank 1
outputs 1 to 8 will mimic.
Bank 2 switch sets the address of the device that Bank 2
outputs 1 to 8 will mimic.
INS176-8
25
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Installation
Premier Elite 24, 48, 88, 168 & 640 Installation Manual
Zone and Output Numbering 24/48/88/168
Expander Zones
Keypad Zones
Address
Zones
(Network 1)
Zones
(Network 2)
Address
Zones
Network 1
Zones
Network 2
1
9 - 16
73 - 80
1
Unmapped
Unmapped
2
17 - 24
81 - 88
2
Unmapped
Unmapped
3
25 - 32
89 - 96
3
Unmapped
Unmapped
4
33 - 40
97 - 104
4
Unmapped
Unmapped
5
41 - 48
105 - 112
5
Unmapped
Unmapped
6
49 - 56
113 - 120
6
Unmapped
Unmapped
7
57 - 64
121 - 128
7
Unmapped
Unmapped
8
65 - 72
129 - 136
8
Unmapped
Unmapped
Keypad Zones
Address
Zones
Network 1
Zones
Network 2
Zones
Network 3
Zones
Network 4
Zones
Network 5
Zones
Network 6
Zones
Network 7
Zones
Network 8
1
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
2
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
3
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
4
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
5
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
6
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
7
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
8
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Expander/OP16 Outputs
26
Address
Outputs
Network 1
Outputs
Network 2
Outputs
Network 3
Outputs
Network 4
Outputs
Network 5
Outputs
Network 6
Outputs
Network 7
Outputs
Network 8
1
Exp. 1, 1-8
Exp. 1, 1-8
Exp. 1, 1-8
Exp. 1, 1-8
Exp. 1, 1-8
Exp. 1, 1-8
Exp. 1, 1-8
Exp. 1, 1-8
2
Exp. 2, 1-8
Exp. 2, 1-8
Exp. 2, 1-8
Exp. 2, 1-8
Exp. 2, 1-8
Exp. 2, 1-8
Exp. 2, 1-8
Exp. 2, 1-8
3
Exp. 3, 1-8
Exp. 3, 1-8
Exp. 3, 1-8
Exp. 3, 1-8
Exp. 3, 1-8
Exp. 3, 1-8
Exp. 3, 1-8
Exp. 3, 1-8
4
Exp. 4, 1-8
Exp. 4, 1-8
Exp. 4, 1-8
Exp. 4, 1-8
Exp. 4, 1-8
Exp. 4, 1-8
Exp. 4, 1-8
Exp. 4, 1-8
5
Exp. 5, 1-8
Exp. 5, 1-8
Exp. 5, 1-8
Exp. 5, 1-8
Exp. 5, 1-8
Exp. 5, 1-8
Exp. 5, 1-8
Exp. 5, 1-8
6
Exp. 6, 1-8
Exp. 6, 1-8
Exp. 6, 1-8
Exp. 6, 1-8
Exp. 6, 1-8
Exp. 6, 1-8
Exp. 6, 1-8
Exp. 6, 1-8
7
Exp. 7, 1-8
Exp. 7, 1-8
Exp. 7, 1-8
Exp. 7, 1-8
Exp. 7, 1-8
Exp. 7, 1-8
Exp. 7, 1-8
Exp. 7, 1-8
8
Exp. 8, 1-8
Exp. 8, 1-8
Exp. 8, 1-8
Exp. 8, 1-8
Exp. 8, 1-8
Exp. 8, 1-8
Exp. 8, 1-8
Exp. 8, 1-8
INS176-8
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Premier Elite 24, 48, 88, 168 & 640 Installation Manual
Installation
Zone and Output Numbering 640
Expander Zones
Address
Zones
Network 1
Zones
Network 2
Zones
Network 3
Zones
Network 4
Zones
Network 5
Zones
Network 6
Zones
Network 7
Zones
Network 8
1
1-8
65 - 72
129 - 136
193 - 200
257 - 264
321 - 328
385 - 392
449 - 456
2
9 - 16
73 - 80
137 - 144
201 - 208
265 - 272
329 - 336
393 - 400
457 - 464
3
17 - 24
81 - 88
145 - 152
209 - 216
273 - 280
337 - 344
401 - 408
465 - 472
4
25 - 32
89 - 96
153 - 160
217 - 224
281 - 288
345 - 352
409 - 416
473 - 480
5
33 - 40
97 - 104
161 - 168
225 - 232
289 - 296
353 - 360
417 - 424
481 - 488
6
41 - 48
105 - 112
169 - 176
233 - 240
297 - 304
361 - 368
425 - 432
489 - 496
7
49 - 56
113 - 120
177 - 184
241 - 248
305 - 312
369 - 376
433 - 440
497 - 504
8
57 - 64
121 - 128
185 - 192
249 - 256
313 - 320
377 - 384
441 - 448
505 - 512
Address
Zones
Network 1
Zones
Network 2
Zones
Network 3
Zones
Network 4
Zones
Network 5
Zones
Network 6
Zones
Network 7
Zones
Network 8
1
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
2
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
3
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
4
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
5
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
6
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
7
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
8
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Unmapped
Keypad Zones
Expander/OP16 Outputs
Address
Outputs
Network 1
Outputs
Network 2
Outputs
Network 3
Outputs
Network 4
Outputs
Network 5
Outputs
Network 6
Outputs
Network 7
Outputs
Network 8
1
Exp. 1, 1-8
Exp. 1, 1-8
Exp. 1, 1-8
Exp. 1, 1-8
Exp. 1, 1-8
Exp. 1, 1-8
Exp. 1, 1-8
Exp. 1, 1-8
2
Exp. 2, 1-8
Exp. 2, 1-8
Exp. 2, 1-8
Exp. 2, 1-8
Exp. 2, 1-8
Exp. 2, 1-8
Exp. 2, 1-8
Exp. 2, 1-8
3
Exp. 3, 1-8
Exp. 3, 1-8
Exp. 3, 1-8
Exp. 3, 1-8
Exp. 3, 1-8
Exp. 3, 1-8
Exp. 3, 1-8
Exp. 3, 1-8
4
Exp. 4, 1-8
Exp. 4, 1-8
Exp. 4, 1-8
Exp. 4, 1-8
Exp. 4, 1-8
Exp. 4, 1-8
Exp. 4, 1-8
Exp. 4, 1-8
5
Exp. 5, 1-8
Exp. 5, 1-8
Exp. 5, 1-8
Exp. 5, 1-8
Exp. 5, 1-8
Exp. 5, 1-8
Exp. 5, 1-8
Exp. 5, 1-8
6
Exp. 6, 1-8
Exp. 6, 1-8
Exp. 6, 1-8
Exp. 6, 1-8
Exp. 6, 1-8
Exp. 6, 1-8
Exp. 6, 1-8
Exp. 6, 1-8
7
Exp. 7, 1-8
Exp. 7, 1-8
Exp. 7, 1-8
Exp. 7, 1-8
Exp. 7, 1-8
Exp. 7, 1-8
Exp. 7, 1-8
Exp. 7, 1-8
8
Exp. 8, 1-8
Exp. 8, 1-8
Exp. 8, 1-8
Exp. 8, 1-8
Exp. 8, 1-8
Exp. 8, 1-8
Exp. 8, 1-8
Exp. 8, 1-8
INS176-8
27
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Installation
Zone Connections
Any zones that are not being used must be linked out or
programmed as ‘Not Used’ (see page 41 for details).
When using End Of Line wiring, only 1 device should normally be
connected to each zone.
Premier Elite 24, 48, 88, 168 & 640 Installation Manual
Triple End Of Line (TEOL)
Use this wiring configuration when connecting PIR devices with that
require Anti Mask and Fault detection. Several zone wiring
programming options are available for this, Triple EOL is illustrated
below. See Zone Wiring on page 45.
A zone short can be programmed for ‘Active’ or ‘Tamper’ response
(see page 56 for details).
End Of Line (EOL)
Use this wiring configuration when connecting normally closed
detection devices to the zone using 2-Wires. Zone wiring should be
programmed as Double Pole/EOL (see Zone Wiring page 45)
When using this configuration, no more than 3 detectors can be
connected to each zone.
Double Pole
Use this wiring configuration when connecting normally closed or
normally open detection devices to the zone using 4-Wires. Zone
wiring should be programmed as Double Pole/EOL (see Zone Wiring
page 45)
When using this configuration, only 1 detector can be connected
to each zone.
Alternative resistor values are available – see Zone Wiring on
page 45 for more details.
Normally Open Or Normally Closed Circuits
This wiring configuration is normally used for key switches with a N/O
or N/C contact. Zone wiring options are provided for each.
28
When using this configuration, no more than 10 detectors can
be connected to each zone.
Testing Zones
To test zones prior to commissioning, use the View Zone Status
option in Engineers Utilities see page 108.
INS176-8
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Premier Elite 24, 48, 88, 168 & 640 Installation Manual
Installation
60IXD Zone Expander
The 60iXD expander provides the following facilities:
Two iD loops each supporting up to 30 biscuits
Fused 12V output for powering detectors
Engineer’s keypad port for local iD diagnostics
Installation
Before connecting the 60iXD expander module, isolate ALL power
from the control panel (AC mains and battery), do not continue if
there is still power present on the control panel.
1.
Connect the iD expander to the control panel, see 60iXD
installation manual (INS261) for details.
2.
Connect the iD devices to the expander module, see “iD
Connections”.
3.
Reapply power to the control panel and program the
necessary options on the panel see 60IXD installation
manual (INS261) for details.
iD Connections
Each iD biscuit is connected across a two-wire detector loop. Apart
from observing the correct polarity, any wiring configuration can be
used, as shown in the diagram below:
60iXD
LOOP 1
+
-
LOOP 2
Maximum Number of Biscuits
100m
30
200m
15
400m
7
800m
3
If a different type of cable is used, the distances should be recalculated. e.g., if 7/0.4mm cable is used, a single run of 200m would
support 30 devices on the end as the resistance of the cable is
halved.
When installing the iD loop it is usually more practical to run several
cables from the expander module to the different areas of protection.
This effectively reduces any distance problems and makes fault
finding much easier.
To reduce the risk of induced interference and wherever possible,
cables should not be positioned along side mains power, telephone
or other data transmission cables, or run within the same ducting or
trunking as any other cables.
The wiring for the system’s internal sounders (loudspeakers) should
not be connected in the same multi-core as the iD loop.
Biscuit Connections
Each iD biscuit is identified by its own number 01 to 30 and contains
its own internal sensor that is continuously monitored by the
expander module. The diagram below shows the connections to the
biscuit for monitoring both tamper and alarm contacts.
LOOP +
-
+
Cable Length
iD Biscuit
As LOOP 1
Tamper
09
10
11
12
13
01
Biscuit iD
14
White
Yellow
08
07
Blue
01
02
03
04
05
06
* The 60iXD expander module is supplied with 4 off 10nF capacitors
in the spares pack. It is recommended that you connect a 10nF
capacitor approximately at the half way point of each iD spur. It is
especially important to do this on iD spurs that are less than 30
metres.
Cabling Considerations
Alarm
LOOP When the tamper switch is opened, the iD biscuit is taken offline and
a tamper condition is generated by the control panel. If the alarm
switch is opened the biscuit's internal sensor changes state and the
control panel will see this as an active condition and will respond as
appropriate.
The diagram below shows the typical wiring of a biscuit to a standard
PIR.
The iD loop can be wired using standard 4-core alarm cable, this
allows 2 cores to be used for the iD biscuit and 2 cores for supplying
12V power for PIR's etc.
The number of biscuits that can be connected per cable run is
determined by the impedance of the cable used. Standard 4-core
alarm cable (7/0.2mm) has a resistance of approximately 8 Ohms per
100 metres. The following table shows the maximum number of
biscuits that can be connected at the end of a single cable run using
standard 4-core alarm cable:
“iD” is a registered trade mark of Chloride Safety System Limited.
INS176-8
29
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Installation
Auxiliary/Fault Connections
The Aux/Fault terminals allow the control panel to monitor the tamper
& fault loops of external devices such as power supplies etc.
Premier Elite 24, 48, 88, 168 & 640 Installation Manual
(S) Strb –
Strobe output, switches to 0V in alarm and is rated at 500mA.
Normally connected to strobe -ve on the sounder (where applicable,
connect the strobe +ve to +12V).
Grade 2 Installation
Grade 3 Installation
If the ‘Aux/Fault’ terminals are not being used they must be
linked out.
Speaker Connections
This output can be used for driving up to one 16 or two 8
loudspeakers as shown below:
The Aux/Fault relay should be programmed as Fault
Grade 3 Installation (Using a Zone)
For details on testing Speaker outputs, see page 105.
External Sounder Connections
The following terminals have been provided for connection to an
external sounder:
(A)+12V
12V supply (protected by a 1A fuse F4). Normally connected to
‘+12V’ on the sounder.
(B) Bell –
Sounder output, switches to 0V in alarm (SAB) and is rated at 500mA.
Normally connected to Trigger -ve on
the sounder. This output can also be programmed for SCB operation (see
page 55 for details).
(C) Tamp
Negative tamper return. Normally connected to ‘Tamper Out’ on the
sounder. If this terminal is not being used, it must be connected to
‘0V’.
(D) 0V
0V supply. Normally connected to ‘0V’ on the sounder.
30
Aux/Fault –
Wire the Sounder Tamper Relay to these terminals
Zone ? –
Wire the Sounder Fault Relay to any Zone, looping out the Tamper
connection. The zone should be programmed as “Auxiliary” see
page 42 and the wiring type set as “WD Monitor” see page 45
OP ? (Optional)
Use a panel output wired to the Test terminal and programmed as
“WD Test Active” see page 70.This will allow activation of the Test
Mode remotely from the Diagnostics function in Wintex.
For details on testing the ‘Bell’ outputs, see page 105
INS176-8
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Premier Elite 24, 48, 88, 168 & 640 Installation Manual
Installation
Panel Outputs
Digicom Outputs 1 - 8
The control panel has five programmable outputs, which can be used
to drive auxiliary devices such as LED’s, sounders or relays etc. (see
page 68 for details). The table below shows the electrical
characteristics for each output:
The control panel has eight programmable outputs, which can be
used for connecting to a stand-alone communicator (see page 69 for
details). The table below shows the electrical characteristics for each
output:
No
Max Current
Type
Terminal
Max Current
Operation
1
100mA
Switched 0V
2
100mA
Switched 0V
3
100mA
Switched 0V
4
100mA
Switched 0V
5
100mA
Switched 0V
6
100mA
Switched 0V
7
100mA
Switched 0V
8
100mA
Switched 0V
L/M
N/A
12V applied = Line Fault *
1
500mA
Switched -ve
2
500mA
Switched -ve
3 **
500mA
Switched +ve
4 **
500mA
Switched +ve
5 **
3A
Relay
** 88/168 & 640 only
Wiring Outputs
The diagram below shows some typical wiring examples:
R/R
N/A
0V applied to reset
DC+
N/A
+12V Power (unfused)
DC-
N/A
0V Power
* Control Panel Line Fault Input (L/M)
In accordance with BSIA form 175, the line fault input on the control
can detect a single or a dual line fault for use with the ATS Remote
Test output type
Wiring a Stand Alone Communicator
The diagram below shows a typical wiring example:
For details on testing outputs, see page 105
INS176-8
For details on testing the digicom outputs, see page 105
31
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Installation
Premier Elite 24, 48, 88, 168 & 640 Installation Manual
2-Wire Smoke Detector
Panel Output 1 can be used for connecting up to 10, 12V 2-Wire smoke detectors.
To enable 2-Wire smoke detection on panel output 1, a jumper link must be fitted across the bottom two pins of JP10. The Area Option ‘2-Wire
Smoke’ also needs to be enabled (see page 52).
2-Wire smoke detectors can only be connected to panel output 1
Expander Auxiliary Input
This input can be used for monitoring a remote power supply that has a voltage free output for the following three conditions: AC Mains Fail, Battery Fail,
12V Fail and Tamper.
Aux
Input
When the Auxiliary Input is programmed as ‘PSU Monitor’ the system will respond as follows:
32
Tamper
12V Fail
Battery Fail
A/C Fail
Resistance
Response
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
0R
No Faults
Closed
Closed
Closed
Open
2K2
AC Fail
Closed
Closed
Open
Closed
4K7
Battery Fail
Closed
Closed
Open
Open
6K9
Battery Fail + AC Fail
Closed
Open
Closed
Closed
10K
12V Fail
Closed
Open
Closed
Open
12K2
AC Fail + 12V Fail
Closed
Open
Open
Closed
14K7
Battery Fail + 12V Fail
Closed
Open
Open
Open
16K9
AC Fail + Battery Fail + 12V fail
Open
-
-
-
O/C
Lid Tamper
INS176-8
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Premier Elite 24, 48, 88, 168 & 640 Installation Manual
Plug-on Communicators
Installation
The control panel end of the connector should be attached with the
red lead on the left most pin of the digi modem connector.
The Com300 is a multi format 8-channel digital communicator/300baud modem for use with a standard analogue telephone line.
The Com2400 is a multi format 8-channel digital communicator/2400baud modem for use with a standard analogue telephone line in
addition, this modem can also send Short Message Service (SMS) text
messages to a mobile phone.
These Communicators can be used to report system events to an
Alarm Receiving Centre using Fast Format, Contact ID or SIA Level II or
to upload/download control panel information using the Wintex UDL
software and a PC.
Plugging on the Communicator
Ensure that the board is the correct way up (see below). Locate the
plug into the communicator socket on the control panel and line up
the mounting holes with the pillars in the base. Once all the holes line
up, press down gently until the pillars snap into the holes.
Standard Telephone Line Connections
A standard telephone line must be connected to the Com300 or
Com2400 communicator as shown below:
Com GSM
Before connecting the GSM Module, isolate ALL power from the
control panel (AC mains and battery), do not continue if there is still
power present on the control panel.
To install the GSM Module onto the control panel:
48-W Connection
Carefully lift the control panel PCB and fix the COM unit into the
space provided with the connection lead attached.
Connect the Molex connector of the GSM-Com lead to a Com
Port on the control panel
Insert a SIM card
Connect power to the control panel
Programming the GSM Module
Program the Com port for GSM Module operation (see page 86
for details)
Refer to the Com GSM Module installation guide for full
programming details.
AV Module
Before connecting the AV Module, isolate ALL power from the control
panel (AC mains and battery), do not continue if there is still power
present on the control panel.
The red lead should be positioned on the uppermost pin of the COM
unit.
To install the AV Module onto the control panel:
Connect one end of the patch lead on to the Expansion Port of
the AV Module
Connect one other end of the patch lead on to the Expansion
Port of the control panel
Programming the AV Module
INS176-8
Program the Expansion Port for AV Module operation (see page
86 for details)
Refer to the AV Module installation guide for full programming
details.
33
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Installation
Premier Elite 24, 48, 88, 168 & 640 Installation Manual
ComIP Module
Connecting a Computer
Before connecting the ComIP Module, isolate ALL power from the
control panel (AC mains and battery), do not continue if there is still
power present on the control panel.
The 24, 48, 88, 168 & 640 all support local uploading and
downloading between the control panel and a PC running Wintex
UDL software. Uploading and Downloading can be used to program
and interrogate the control panel.
To install the ComIP onto the control panel:
In order for the computer to work correctly, ensure that it is set to the
following:
Connect one end of the patch lead on to JP1 of the ComIP
Connect one other end of the patch lead on to Com1 or 2 of the
control panel
UDL Password (see page 83 for details)
Programming the ComIP Module
Program Com1 or 2 for ComIP Module operation (see page 86
for details)
Refer to the ComIP
programming details.
Module
installation
guide
for
full
USB-Com
The USB-Com has two connectors. The USB connector is for connection
to a USB port on a computer and the Molex connector plugs onto a Com
port on the control panel.
In order to upload and download to the control panel locally, a
USB/PC-Com lead is required.
Connecting a Printer
PC-Com
The PC-Com has two connectors. The 9-way D-type connector is for
connection to a serial port on a computer and the Molex connector plugs
onto a Com port on the control panel.
PRINT-Com
The PRINT-Com has two connectors. The 25-way D-type connector
connects to a Serial Printer and the Molex connector plugs onto Com
1 on the control panel.
The 24, 48, 88,168 & 640 all support printer facilities. The printer is
connected to the Com 1 connector located on the control panel and
can be used to print the control panel event log.
In order for the printer to work correctly, ensure that it is set to the
following:
Baud Rate
Parity
Start Bits
Stop Bits
Data Bits
DTR
Columns
= 4800
= None
=1
=2
=8
= Normal
= 40 or 80 (see page 57)
In order to connect a printer to the control panel, a PRINT-Com
lead is required.
PRINT-Com
RS232 Data
Connect to
COM1
DATAC or RS232 printer
34
INS176-8
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Premier Elite 24, 48, 88, 168 & 640 Installation Manual
Commissioning and Troubleshooting
4. Commissioning and Troubleshooting
Commissioning
Trouble-Shooting
Once ALL connections have been made to the control panel and
power is ready to be applied, you should read this section before
continuing.
Control Panel
When applying power for the first time, the factory default
settings must be loaded. The default settings ensure that the
control panel software is reset and all programming information
is loaded into memory. For a complete list of factory default
settings, see separate Quick Reference Guide.
The factory default settings are loaded by applying power to the
control panel whilst at the same time, holding down the Factory
Default button.
To default the control panel, proceed as follows:
Connect the black battery lead to the negative (–) terminal of the
standby battery and the red battery lead to the positive (+)
terminal of the standby battery
Press and hold the Factory Default button
After the heartbeat light has illuminated, let go of the Factory
Default button (the heartbeat light will continue to flash whilst
the factory default settings are being loaded, this can take up to
30 seconds)
If the system goes into alarm, enter the default Engineer code
Press the battery kick-start button to connect the battery and
ensure that the green heartbeat light illuminates
1234 , and the alarm tone will stop
To access the Engineer Programming Menu, enter the default
Engineer code
1234
The "Confirm Devices" menu will appear check and make sure
all installed Keypads and Expanders are showing , press Yes
and Yes again to confirm.
No Power to unit (mains only)
Check the mains block fuse and replace if blown
Check for loose wires at the mains block, the transformer and
the AC terminals on the PCB
Check the mains block is connected correctly; live to live
(brown), neutral to neutral (blue)
No Power to unit (battery only)
Don’t forget to press the battery kick-start button
Check for loose wires at the BATT terminals on the PCB
Check that the battery wires are connected correctly; red from
BATT+ to the battery positive (+), black from BATT- to the
battery negative (-)
Heartbeat LED is not flashing
Remove ALL power (AC Mains and Battery) and then reapply
power again
Network Data LED’s are not flashing
Remove ALL power (AC Mains and Battery) and remove ALL
wires
from
the
network
terminals.
re-apply power again before referring to the
Diagnostics table on page 20
Keypads
Keypad does not operate
Check that the keypad is wired correctly from the control panel
(see page 20 for wiring details)
Program the system as described in section 5 (Programming the
Control Panel)
Perform a zone test as described on page 107. Remember that
some powered detectors (e.g. PIR’s and combined technology
detectors) take up to 180 seconds to warm up and become
operational
Test the internal sounder, external sounder and strobe as
described on page 107
Replace the lid and secure with the lid screw supplied
Press
followed by YES to leave the programming menu,
the system will return to normal
The display will be showing that there is a ‘Mains Power Off’
condition. Switch on the AC mains supply to the control panel
The normal banner message (if programmed) will now be
displayed
Check the network fuses F3 and F5 and replace if blown*
Use the network diagnostics (see page 20 for details)
*Only on 48/88/168
Keypad does not accept codes
If the system has more than one keypad check that each keypad is
addressed differently, see page 22 for details
If the keypad is on a long cable run, check the voltage between
the ‘+’ and ‘–’ terminals at the keypad and ensure that it
measures no less than 10.0V
Check that you are using the correct User codes. The default
0
Installation is now complete and the system is
ready for use.
Then
Network
1234 and the default
Master User code is 5678
Engineer code is
Check that the User code you are using is not ‘Time Locked’, if
the User code is time locked then the access code will only be
accepted when Control Timer 1 is off (see pages 60 and 102 for
details)
Keypad zones do not operate
Each keypad zone has to be mapped onto the system before it
can be used (see page 65 for details)
The zone is not programmed (see page 41 for details)
Keypad emergency keys do not operate
Each keypad can be configured so that the emergency keys PA,
FIRE and MEDICAL can be enabled or disabled. Check that the
keypad has been programmed correctly (see page 65 for
details)
INS176-8
35
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Commissioning and Troubleshooting
Premier Elite 24, 48, 88, 168 & 640 Installation Manual
Expander
Operation
Expander does not operate at all
Check that the expander is wired correctly from the control
The system will not allow me to arm
Check that there are no outstanding problems (see page 37 for
Check that there are no outstanding alarms that require resetting
Check that the User code has been assigned to the correct
areas (see page 99 for details)
If a ‘Local’ User code is being used (see page 102 for details)
ensure that the keypad being used is assigned to the correct
area (see page 64 for details)
panel (see page 20 for wiring details)
Check the network fuses F3 and F5 and replace if blown*
*Only on 48/88/168
System does not recognise zones
If the expander is on a long cable run, check the voltage
between the + and – terminals at the expander and ensure that
it measures no less than 10.0V
The speaker output does not work
The expander can be configured so that Alarm, Entry, Exit,
Chime tones etc. can be enabled or disabled. Check that the
expander has been programmed correctly (see page 67 for
details)
The speaker volume on the expander is electronically
adjustable. Check the volume is set to the desired level (see
page 67 for details)
details)
Check that the User code has been programmed to allow
arming (see page 102 for details)
The system will not allow me to disarm
Check that the User code has been programmed to allow
disarming (see page 102 for details)
Check that the User code has been assigned to the correct
area(s) (see page 99 for details)
If a ‘Local’ User code is being used (see page 102 for details)
ensure that the keypad being used is assigned to the correct
area (see page 64 for details)
Zones
One or more zones show an alarm
Check that the zone is wired correctly (see page 28 for wiring
details)
Communicator
The Communicator will not dial
By default the communicator is disabled, check that the
communicator is enabled (see page 80 for details)
Check that the telephone line has been correctly wired to the
communicator (see page 33 for wiring details)
Check that the telephone numbers are programmed correctly
(see page 76 for details)
Check that the account numbers are programmed correctly (see
page 76 for details)
Check that the dial attempts are not programmed as zero (see
page 76 for details)
Check that the reporting areas have been programmed correctly
(see page 78 for details)
Check that the reporting options have been programmed
correctly (see page 78 for details)
Communicator dials but does not communicate
Check that the telephone numbers are programmed correctly
(see page 79 for details)
36
Check that the correct protocol is programmed (see page 79 for
details)
INS176-8
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Premier Elite 24, 48, 88, 168 & 640 Installation Manual
Reset and Service Messages
When the system requires attention because of a potential problem,
the display will show one of three service messages. These
messages can also be accessed at any time, allowing the user to
view installer information.
These messages would normally be programmed with the
telephone numbers of the installer or the Alarm Receiving
Centre (see page 61 for details).
To display the service messages, proceed as follows:
The display will normally show the time and date:
e a
Press
N followed by 1 for the Service message:
all la o
o eice
Press
N followed by 2 for the Reset message:
all Enginee o
ese yse
Press
N followed by 3 for the Anti-code message:
all
ese yse
R to exit from the message, the display will then return to
Press
normal.
When alarm information is being displayed, pressing the SCROLL
key will slow down the display and also allow manual scrolling
through the events.
Fault Warning Tones
When a fault condition occurs i.e. mains fail, line fault etc. the internal
sounders will chime every 30 seconds for 3 minutes. The chiming will
automatically stop when a valid User code is entered, when R is
pressed or after 3 minutes (whichever occurs first). The fault
indication will only be cleared from the display when the fault has
been rectified i.e. power, telephone line has been restored.
Commissioning and Troubleshooting
o ah ailale
e a
There are no ATS (Alarm Transmission
System) paths available.
o aey
e a
The Standby Battery has not been
connected,
aey al
e a
There is a fault with the control panel
standby battery or it is not connected.
ea ailed es
e a
Zones that have been placed on test
have failed the test.
anel id ape
e a
There is a fault with the control panel lid
tamper.
ell ape
e a
There is a fault with the bell tamper on
the control panel.
iliay ape
e a
There is a fault with the auxiliary tamper
on the control panel.
ell se lon
e a
The bell fuse on the control panel has
blown.
se lon
e a
The Auxiliary fuse on the control panel
has blown.
K ape
e a
There is a fault with the lid tamper of
Keypad X,X.
K os
e a
Keypad X,X has been lost off of the
system.
E ape
e a
There is a fault with the lid tamper of
Expander X,X
E os
e a
Expander X,X has been lost off of the
system.
E o ols
e a
E ell ap
e a
The expander’s Auxiliary input (that is
programmed as bell tamper) is in fault.
E ap
e a
The expander’s Auxiliary input (that is
programmed as aux tamper) is in fault.
eice eied
e a
The service timer has expired indicating
that the system requires a service (the
system can normally still be used).
oy ode no
alloed se
The user code is locked out (normally
during entry). The system must be
disarmed using a Prox TAG.
eoe Keypad is
no KE o
To many invalid code attempts have
caused the keypad to lock out. The
keypad will remain like this for 5 minutes.
Fault Messages
E E
e a
There are system faults waiting to be
viewed, enter a valid user code to view
the faults. After entering a code faults will
be displayed for 30 seconds. If the fault is
not reset within 30 seconds, this
message will be displayed again.
The voltage at expander X,X is very low.
oni eices
e a
The number of devices connected to the
networks has changed from the last time
a ‘Confirm Devices’ was done.
ea eced
e a
The keypad has been disabled to prevent
unauthorised access. The display will
automatically clear when it is re-enabled.
o need a se
o enale access
Engineer access is programmed for
Engineer code + User code (see page
56 for details).
ie ing
Areas are being armed using one of the
control timers (enter a valid User code to
defer the arming for 30 minutes).
o need a se
o na syse
The Engineers code was entered when the
system was fully armed (access to the
programming menu can only be gained
when the system is not fully armed.
la Enginee
oing n ie
The alarm engineer has logged into the
programming menu and is working on
site (this message will clear when the
engineer logs off or the system is armed).
ains oe
e a
ah al
e a
INS176-8
There has been an AC Mains failure.
There is a fault with the ATS (Alarm
Transmission System).
37
--- PAGE BREAK ---
Programming the Control Panel
Premier Elite 24, 48, 88 168 & 640 Installation Manual
5. Programming the Control Panel
Introduction
a Jan
All engineers should read this section carefully so as to familiarise
themselves with the programming of the control panel.
To access the Programming menu, enter the factory default
Engineer code
.
1
E o elec:Zone ep
If a mistake is made whilst entering the Engineer code, simply
re-enter the correct code.
2
E o elec:ea ogaing
WARNI
[... content truncated for display — full manual available from manufacturer ...]
| Trouble | Cause | Corrective Action |
|---|---|---|
| AC FAILURE | Mains power supply lost | Check mains supply and fuse; panel runs on battery backup |
| BATTERY LOW | Backup battery low or faulty | Replace battery; check charger circuit |
| ZONE OPEN | Zone detector open circuit or tamper | Check detector and wiring; verify zone is not bypassed |
| DEVICE NOT NETWORKED | Enrolled device not communicating with panel | Check device battery; verify device is within radio range; re-enrol if necessary |
| DEVICE TAMPER | Device cover removed | Refit device cover securely; check device mounting |
| DEVICE BATTERY LOW | Wireless device battery below threshold | Replace device battery per device instructions |
| COMM FAILURE | PSTN/GSM/IP communication failure | Check telephone line, GSM signal, or IP connection; verify monitoring station settings |
| JAMMING | Radio frequency jamming detected | Investigate source of interference; notify monitoring station |
| SIREN FAULT | Siren circuit open or short | Check siren wiring and connections |
| CLOCK FAULT | Real-time clock not set | Set date and time in installer menu |
| Terminal | Function | Notes |
|---|---|---|
| AC / AC | Mains transformer input | 16.5VAC from supplied transformer; do not connect to 230VAC directly |
| BATT+ / BATT- | Backup battery | 12V 7Ah sealed lead-acid; connect with correct polarity |
| SIREN+ / SIREN- | Wired siren output | Supervised; connect external siren/strobe |
| ZONE / GND | Wired zone input (1 zone on main PCB) | Normally closed; connect wired detector; terminate with EOL resistor |
| TIP / RING | PSTN telephone line | Connect to BT telephone line for PSTN reporting |
| AUX+ / AUX- | Auxiliary 12V DC output | For powering accessories; max 200mA |
| Parameter | Value |
|---|---|
| Max Wireless Zones | 64 (wired zones via expander) |
| Partitions | 3 |
| Max Users | 96 |
| Radio Protocol | PowerG two-way encrypted (868MHz) |
| Mains Input | 16.5VAC from supplied transformer (230VAC mains) |
| Backup Battery | 12V 7Ah sealed lead-acid |
| Siren Output | Supervised; 12V DC |
| Operating Temperature | -10°C to +40°C |
| Standards | EN 50131 Grade 2; PD 6662:2017; DD 243 |